Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 1000

Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths

______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise 1.1

1. Prove that the product of two consecutive positive integers is divisible by 2.


Sol:
Let, (n – 1) and n be two consecutive positive integers
∴ Their product = n(n – 1)
= 𝑛2 − 𝑛
We know that any positive integer is of the form 2q or 2q + 1, for some integer q
When n =2q, we have
𝑛2 − 𝑛 = (2𝑞)2 − 2𝑞
= 4𝑞 2 − 2𝑞
2𝑞(2𝑞 − 1)
Then 𝑛2 − 𝑛 is divisible by 2.
When n = 2q + 1, we have
𝑛2 − 𝑛 = (2𝑞 + 1)2 − (2𝑞 + 1)
= 4𝑞 2 + 4𝑞 + 1 − 2𝑞 − 1
= 4𝑞 2 + 2𝑞
= 2𝑞(2𝑞 + 1)
Then 𝑛2 − 𝑛 is divisible by 2.
Hence the product of two consecutive positive integers is divisible by 2.

2. If a and b are two odd positive integers such that a > b, then prove that one of the two
𝑎+𝑏 𝑎−𝑏
numbers and is odd and the other is even.
2 2
Sol:
Let a = 2q + 3 and b = 2q + 1 be two positive odd integers such that a > b
𝑎+𝑏 2𝑞+3+2𝑞+1 4𝑞+4
Now, = = = 2𝑞 + 2 = 𝑎𝑛 𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑛 𝑛𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟
2 2 2
𝑎−𝑏 (2𝑞+3)−(2𝑞+1) 2𝑞+3−2𝑞−1 2
and = = = 2 = 1 = 𝑎𝑛 𝑜𝑑𝑑 𝑛𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟
2 2 2
𝑎+𝑏 𝑎−𝑏
Hence one of the two numbers 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑖𝑠 𝑜𝑑𝑑 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑜𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑟 𝑖𝑠 𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑛 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑎𝑛𝑦
2 2
𝑡𝑤𝑜 𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑜𝑑𝑑 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟

3. Show that the square of an odd positive integer is of the form 8q + 1, for some integer q.
Sol:
By Euclid’s division algorithm
a = bq + r, where 0 ≤ r ≤ b
Put b = 4
a = 4q + r, where 0 ≤ r ≤ 4
If r = 0, then a = 4q even
If r = 1, then a = 4q + 1 odd
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
If r = 2, then a = 4q + 2 even
If r = 3, then a = 4q + 3 odd
Now, (4𝑞 + 1)2 = (4𝑞)2 + 2(4𝑞)(1) + (1)2
= 16𝑞 2 + 8𝑞 + 1
= 8(2𝑞 2 + 𝑞) + 1
= 8m + 1 where m is some integer
Hence the square of an odd integer is of the form 8q + 1, for some integer q

4. Show that any positive odd integer is of the form 6q + 1 or, 6q + 3 or, 6q + 5, where q is
some integer.
Sol:
Let a be any odd positive integer we need to prove that a is of the form 6q + 1, or 6q +3, 6q
+ 5, where q is some integer
Since a is an integer consider b = 6 another integer applying Euclid’s division lemma we
get
a = 6q + r for some integer q ≥ 0, and r = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 since 0 ≤ r < 6.
Therefore, a = 6q or 6q + 1 or 6q + 2 or 6q + 3 or 6q + 4 or 6q + 5
However since a is odd so a cannot take the values 6q, 6q + 2 and 6q + 4
(since all these are divisible by 2)
Also, 6q + 1 = 2 × 3q + 1 = 2k 1 + 1, where k1 is a positive integer
6q + 3 = (6q + 2) + 1 = 2 (3q + 1) + 1 = 2k2 + 1, where k2 is an integer
6q + 5 = (6q + 4) + 1 = 2(3q + 2) + 1 = 2k3 + 1, where k3 is an integer
Clearly, 6q +1, 6q +3, 6q + 5 are of the form 2k + 1, where k is an integer
Therefore, 6q + 1, 6q + 3, 6q + 5 are odd numbers.
Therefore, any odd integer can be expressed is of the form
6q + 1, or 6q + 3, 6q + 5 where q is some integer
Concept insight: In order to solve such problems Euclid’s division lemma is applied to two
integers a and b the integer b must be taken in accordance with what is to be proved, for
example here the integer b was taken 6 because a must be of the form 6q + 1, 6q +3, 6q + 5
Basic definition of even (divisible by 2) and odd numbers (not divisible by 2) and the fact
that addiction and multiplication of integers is always an integer are applicable here.

5. Prove that the square of any positive integer is of the form 3m or, 3m + 1 but not of the
form 3m +2.
Sol:
By Euclid’s division algorithm
a = bq + r, where 0 ≤ r ≤ b
Put b = 3
a = 3q + r, where 0 ≤ r ≤ 3
If r = 0, then a = 3q
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
If r = 1, then a = 3q + 1
If r = 2, then a = 3q + 2
Now, (3𝑞)2 = 9𝑞 2
= 3 × 3𝑞 2
= 3𝑚, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑚 𝑖𝑠 𝑠𝑜𝑚𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟
(3𝑞 + 1)2 = (3𝑞)2 + 2(3𝑞)(1) + (1)2
= 9𝑞 2 + 6𝑞 + 1
= 3(3𝑞 2 + 2𝑞) + 1
= 3𝑚 + 1, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑚 𝑖𝑠 𝑠𝑜𝑚𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟
(3𝑞 + 2)2 = (3𝑞)2 + 2(3𝑞)(2) + (2)2
= 9𝑞 2 + 12𝑞 + 4
= 9𝑞 2 + 12𝑞 + 4
= 3(3𝑞 2 + 4𝑞 + 1) + 1
= 3𝑚 + 1, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑚 𝑖𝑠 𝑠𝑜𝑚𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟
Hence the square of any positive integer is of the form 3m, or 3m +1
But not of the form 3m + 2

6. Prove that the square of any positive integer is of the form 4q or 4q + 1 for some integer q.
Sol:
By Euclid’s division Algorithm
a = bm + r, where 0 ≤ r ≤ b
Put b = 4
a = 4m + r, where 0 ≤ r ≤ 4
If r = 0, then a = 4m
If r = 1, then a = 4m + 1
If r = 2, then a = 4m + 2
If r = 3, then a = 4m + 3
Now, (4𝑚)2 = 16𝑚2
= 4 × 4m2
= 4q where q is some integer
(4𝑚 + 1)2 = (4𝑚)2 + 2(4𝑚)(1) + (1)2
= 16𝑚2 + 8𝑚 + 1
= 4(4𝑚2 + 2𝑚) + 1
= 4𝑞 + 1 where q is some integer
(4𝑚 + 2)2 = (4𝑚)2 + 2(4𝑚)(2)+(2)2
= 16𝑚2 + 24𝑚 + 9
= 16𝑚2 + 24𝑚 + 8 + 1
= 4(4𝑚2 + 6𝑚 + 2) + 1
= 4𝑞 + 1, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑞 𝑖𝑠 𝑠𝑜𝑚𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Hence, the square of any positive integer is of the form 4q or 4q +
1 for some integer m

7. Prove that the square of any positive integer is of the form 5q, 5q + 1, 5q + 4 for some
integer q.
Sol:
By Euclid’s division algorithm
a = bm + r, where 0 ≤ r ≤ b
Put b = 5
a = 5m + r, where 0 ≤ r ≤ 4
If r = 0, then a = 5m
If r = 1, then a = 5m + 1
If r = 2, then a = 5m + 2
If r = 3, then a = 5m + 3
If r = 4, then a = 5m + 4
Now, (5𝑚)2 = 25𝑚2
= 5(5𝑚2 )
= 5q where q is some integer
(5𝑚 + 1)2 = (5𝑚)2 + 2(5𝑚)(1) + (1)2
= 25𝑚2 + 10𝑚 + 1
= 5(5𝑚2 + 2𝑚) + 1
= 5𝑞 + 1 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑞 𝑖𝑠 𝑠𝑜𝑚𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟
(5𝑚 + 1)2 = (5𝑚)2 + 2(5𝑚)(1)(1)2
= 25𝑚2 + 10𝑚 + 1
= 5(5𝑚2 + 2𝑚) + 1
= 5𝑞 + 1 where q is some integer
= (5𝑚 + 2)2 = (5𝑚)2 + 2(5𝑚)(2) + (2)2
= 25𝑚2 + 20𝑚 + 4
= 5(5𝑚2 + 4𝑚) + 4
= 5𝑞 + 4, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑞 𝑖𝑠 𝑠𝑜𝑚𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟
= (5𝑚 + 3)2 = (5𝑚)2 + 2(5𝑚)(3) + (3)2
= 25𝑚2 + 30𝑚 + 9
= 25𝑚2 + 30𝑚 + 5 + 4
= 5(5𝑚2 + 6𝑚 + 1) + 4
= 5𝑞 + 1, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑞 𝑖𝑠 𝑠𝑜𝑚𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟
= (5𝑚 + 4)2 = (5𝑚)2 + 2(5𝑚)(4) + (4)2
= 25𝑚2 + 40𝑚 + 16
= 25𝑚2 + 40𝑚 + 15 + 1
= 5(5𝑚2 ) + 2(5𝑚)(4) + (4)2
= 5𝑞 + 1, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑞 𝑖𝑠 𝑠𝑜𝑚𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Hence, the square of any positive integer is of the form 5q or 5q + 1, 5q + 4 for some
integer q.

8. Prove that if a positive integer is of the form 6q + 5, then it is of the form 3q + 2 for some
integer q, but not conversely.
Sol:
Let, n = 6q + 5, when q is a positive integer
We know that any positive integer is of the form 3k, or 3k + 1, or 3k + 2
∴ q = 3k or 3k + 1, or 3k + 2
If q = 3k, then
n = 6q + 5
= 6(3k) + 5
= 18k + 5
= 18k + 3 + 2
= 3(6k + 1) + 2
= 3m + 2, where m is some integer
If q = 3k + 1, then
n = 6q + 5
= 6(3k + 1) + 5
= 18k + 6 + 5
= 18k + 11
= 3(6k + 3) + 2
= 3m + 2, where m is some integer
If q = 3k + 2, then
n = 6q + 5
= 6(3k + 2) + 5
= 18k + 12 + 5
= 18k + 17
= 3(6k + 5) + 2
= 3m + 2, where m is some integer
Hence, if a positive integer is of the form 6q + 5, then it is of the form 3q + 2 for some
integer q.

Conversely
Let n = 3q + 2
We know that a positive integer can be of the form 6k + 1, 6k + 2, 6k + 3, 6k + 4 or 6k + 5
So, now if q = 6k + 1 then
n = 3(6k + 1) + 2
= 18k + 5
= 6(3k) + 5
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
= 6m + 5, where m is some integer
So, now if q = 6k + 2 then
n = 3(6k + 2) + 2
= 18k + 8
= 6 (3k + 1) + 2
= 6m + 2, where m is some integer
Now, this is not of the form 6m + 5
Hence, if n is of the form 3q + 2, then it necessarily won’t be of the form 6q + 5 always.

9. Prove that the square of any positive integer of the form 5q + 1 is of the same form.
Sol:
Let n = 5q + 1 where q is a positive integer
∴ 𝑛2 = (5𝑞 + 1)2
= 25q2 + 10q + 1
= 5(5q2 + 2q) + 1
= 5m + 1, where m is some integer
Hence, the square of any positive integer of the form 5q + 1 is of the same form.

10. Prove that the product of three consecutive positive integer is divisible by 6.
Sol:
Let, n be any positive integer. Since any positive integer is of the form 6q or 6q + 1 or 6q +
2 or, 6q + 3 or 6q + 4 or 6q + 5.
If n = 6q, then
n(n + 1)(n + 2) = (6q + 1)(6q + 2)(6q + 3)
= 6[(6q + 1)(3q + 1)(2q + 1)]
= 6m, which is divisible by 6?
If n = 6q + 1, then
n(n + 1)(n + 2) = (6q + 2)(6q + 3)(6q + 4)
= 6[(6q + 1)(3q + 1)(2q + 1)]
= 6m, which is divisible by 6
If n = 6q + 2, then
n(n + 1)(n + 2) = (6q + 2)(6q + 3)(6q + 4)
= 6[(3q + 1)(2q + 1)(6q + 4)]
= 6m, which is divisible by 6.
If n = 6q + 3, then
n(n + 1)(n + 2) = (6q + 3)(6q + 4)(6q + 5)
= 6[(6q + 1)(3q + 2)(2q + 5)]
= 6m, which is divisible by 6.
If n = 6q + 4, then
n(n + 1)(n + 2) = (6q + 4)(6q + 5)(6q + 6)
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
= 6[(6q + 4)(3q + 5)(2q + 1)]
= 6m, which is divisible by 6.
If n = 6q + 5, then
n(n + 1)(n + 2) = (6q + 5)(6q + 6)(6q + 7)
= 6[(6q + 5)(q + 1)(6q + 7)]
= 6m, which is divisible by 6.
Hero, the product of three consecutive positive integer is divisible by 6.

11. For any positive integer n , prove that n3 − n divisible by 6.


Sol:
We have 𝑛3 − 𝑛 = 𝑛(𝑛2 − 1) = (𝑛 − 1) (𝑛) (𝑛 + 1)
Let, n be any positive integer. Since any positive integer is of the form 6q or 6q + 1 or, 6q +
2 or, 6q + 3 or, 6q + 4 or, 6q + 5.
If n = 6q, then
(𝑛 − 1)(𝑛)(𝑛 + 1) = (6𝑞 − 1)(6𝑞)(6𝑞 + 1)
= 6[(6𝑞 − 1)(𝑞)(6𝑞 + 1)]
= 6m, which is divisible by 6
If n = 6q + 1, then
(𝑛 − 1)(𝑛 + 1) = (6𝑞)(6𝑞 + 1)(6𝑞 + 2)
= 6[(𝑞)(6𝑞 + 1)(6𝑞 + 2)]
= 6m, which is divisible by 6
If n = 6q + 2, then
(𝑛 − 1)(𝑛)(𝑛 + 1) = (6𝑞 + 1)(6𝑞 + 2)(6𝑞 + 3)
= 6[(6𝑞 + 1)(3𝑞 + 1)(2𝑞 + 1)]
= 6m, which is divisible by 6
If n = 6q + 3, then
(𝑛 − 1)(𝑛)(𝑛 + 1) = (6𝑞 + 3)(6𝑞 + 4)(6𝑞 + 5)
= 6[(3𝑞 + 1)(2𝑞 + 1)(6𝑞 + 4)]
= 6m, which is divisible by 6
If n = 6q + 4, then
(𝑛 − 1)(𝑛)(𝑛 + 1) = (6𝑞 + 3)(6𝑞 + 4)(6𝑞 + 5)
= 6[(2𝑞 + 1)(3𝑞 + 2)(6𝑞 + 5)]
= 6m, which is divisible by 6
If n = 6q + 5, then
(𝑛 − 1)(𝑛)(𝑛 + 1) = (6𝑞 + 4)(6𝑞 + 5)(6𝑞 + 6)
= 6[(6𝑞 + 4)(6𝑞 + 5)(𝑞 + 1)]
= 6m, which is divisible by 6
Hence, for any positive integer n, n3 – n is divisible by 6.
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise 1.2

1. Define HOE of two positive integers and find the HCF of the following pairs of numbers:
(i) 32 and 54 (ii) 18 and 24 (iii) 70 and 30 (iv) 56 and 88
(v) 475 and 495 (vi) 75 and 243 (vii) 240 and 6552 (viii) 155 and 1385
(ix) 100 and 190 (x) 105 and 120
Sol:
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
(i) 5y = 32 × 1 + 22
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division of 32 and remainder 22.
32 = 22 × 1 + 10
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division of 22 and remainder 10.
22 = 10 × 2 + 2
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division of 10 and remainder 2.
10 = 2 × 5 [remainder 0]
Hence, HCF of 32 and 54 10 2
(ii) By applying division lemma
24 = 18 × 1 + 6
Since remainder = 6, apply division lemma on divisor of 18 and remainder 6.
18 = 6 × 3 + 0
∴ Hence, HCF of 18 and 24 = 6
(iii) By applying Euclid’s division lemma
70 = 30 × 2 + 10
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 30 and remainder 10.
30 = 10 × 3 + 0
∴ Hence HCF of 70 and 30 is = 10.
(iv) By applying Euclid’s division lemma
88 = 56 × 1 + 32
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 56 and remainder 32.
56 = 32 × 1 + 24
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 32 and remainder 24.
32 = 24 × 1 + 8
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 24 and remainder 8.
24 = 8 × 3 + 0
∴ HCF of 56 and 88 is = 8.
(v) By applying Euclid’s division lemma
495 = 475 × 1 +20
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 475 and remainder 20.
475 = 20 × 23 + 15
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 20 and remainder 15.
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
20 = 15 × 1 + 5
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 15 and remainder 5.
15 = 5 × 3 + 0
∴ HCF of 475 and 495 is = 5.
(vi) By applying Euclid’s division lemma
243 = 75 × 3 + 18
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 75 and remainder 18.
75 = 18 × 4 + 3
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 18 and remainder 3.
18 = 3 × 6 + 0
∴ HCF of 243 and 75 is = 3.
(vii) By applying Euclid’s division lemma
6552 = 240 × 27 + 72
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 240 and remainder 72.
210 = 72 × 3 + 24
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor of 72 and remainder 24.
72 = 24 × 3 + 0
∴ HCF of 6552 and 240 is = 24.
(viii) By applying Euclid’s division lemma
1385 = 155 × 8 + 145
Since remainder ≠ 0, applying division lemma on divisor 155 and remainder 145
155 = 145 × 1 + 10
Since remainder ≠ 0, applying division lemma on divisor 10 and remainder 5
10 = 5 × 2 + 0
∴ Hence HCF of 1385 and 155 = 5.
(ix) By applying Euclid’s division lemma
190 = 100 × 1 + 90
Since remainder ≠ 0, applying division lemma on divisor 100 and remainder 90.
90 = 10 × 9 + 0
∴ HCF of 100 and 190 = 10
(x) By applying Euclid’s division lemma
120 = 105 × 1 + 15
Since remainder ≠ 0, applying division lemma on divisor 105 and remainder 15.
105 = 15 × 7 + 0
∴ HCF of 105 and 120 = 15

2. Use Euclid’s division algorithm to find the HCF of


(i) 135 and 225 (ii) 196 and 38220
Sol:
(i) 135 and 225
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Step 1: Since 225 > 135. Apply Euclid’s division lemma to a = 225 and b = 135 to
find q and r such that 225 = 135q + r, 0 ≤ r < 135
On dividing 225 by 135 we get quotient as 1 and remainder as ‘90’
i.e., 225 = 135r 1 + 90
Step 2: Remainder 5 which is 90 7, we apply Euclid’s division lemma to a = 135
and b = 90 to find whole numbers q and r such that 135 = 90 × q + r 0 ≤ r < 90 on
dividing 135 by 90 we get quotient as 1 and remainder as 45
i.e., 135 = 90 × 1 + 45
Step3: Again remainder r = 45 to so we apply division lemma to a = 90 and b = 45
to find q and r such that 90 = 45 × q × r. 0 ≤ r < 45. On dividing 90 by 45we get
quotient as 2 and remainder as 0 i.e., 90 = 2 × 45 + 0
Step 4: Since the remainder = 0, the divisor at this stage will be HCF of (135, 225)
Since the divisor at this stage is 45. Therefore the HCF of 135 and 225 is 45.
(ii) 867 and 255:
Step 1: Since 867 > 255, apply Euclid’s division
Lemma a to a = 867 = 255 q + r, 0 < r < 255
On dividing 867 by 255 we get quotient as 3 and the remainder as low
Step 2: Since the remainder 102 to, we apply the division lemma to a = 255 and b =
102 to find 255 = 102q + 51 = 102r – 151
Step 3: Again remainder 0 is non-zero, so we apply the division lemma to a = 102
and b = 51 to find whole numbers q and r such that 102 = q = r when 0 ≤ r < 51
On dividing 102 by 51 quotient = 2 and remainder is ‘0’
i,e., = 102 = 51 × 2 + 0
Since the remainder is zero, the divisional this stage is the HCF.
Since the divisor at this stage is 51, ∴ HCF of 867 and 255 is ‘51’.

3. Find the HCF of the following pairs of integers and express it as a linear combination of
them.
(i) 963 and 657 (ii) 592 and 252 (iii) 506 and 1155 (iv)1288 and 575
Sol:
(i) 963 and 6567
By applying Euclid’s division lemma 963 = 657 × 1 + 306 …(i)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor 657 and remainder 306
657 = 306 × 2 + 45 ….. (ii)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor 306 and remainder 4
306 = 45 × 6 + 36 …..(iii)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor 45 and remainder 36
45 = 36 × 1 + 9 …… (iv)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor 36 and remainder 9
36 = 9 × 4 + 0
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
∴ HCF = 9
Now 9 = 45 – 36 × 1 [from (iv)]
= 45 – [306 – 45 × 6] × 1 [from (iii)]
= 45 – 306 × 1 + 45 × 6
= 45 × 7 – 306 × 1
= 657 × 7 – 306 × 14 – 306 × 1 [from (ii)]
= 657 × 7 – 306 × 15
= 657 × 7 – [963 – 657 × 1] × 15 [from (i)]
= 657 × 22 – 963 × 15
(ii) 595 and 252
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
595 = 252 × 2 + 91 ….. (i)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor 252 and remainder 91
252 = 91 × 2 + 70 …. (ii)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor 91 and remainder 70
91 = 70 × 1 + 21 ….(iii)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor 70 and remainder 20
70 = 21 × 3 + 7 …..(iv)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor 21 and remainder 7
21 = 7 × 3 + 0
H.C.F = 7
Now, 7 = 70 – 21 × 3 [from (iv)]
= 70 – [90 – 70 × 1] × 3 [from (iii)]
= 70 – 91 × 3 + 70 × 3
= 70 × 4 – 91 × 3
= [252 – 91 × 2] × 4 – 91 × 3 [from (ii)]
= 252 × 4 – 91 × 8 – 91 × 3
= 252 × 4 – 91 × 11
= 252 × 4 – [595 – 252 × 2] × 11 [from (i)]
= 252 × 4 – 595 × 11 + 252 × 22
= 252 × 6 – 595 × 11
(iii) 506 and 1155
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
1155 = 506 × 2 + 143 …. (i)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 506 and remainder 143
506 = 143 × 3 + 77 ….(ii)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 143 and remainder 77
143 = 77 × 1 + 56 ….(iii)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 77 and remainder 66
77 = 66 × 1 + 11 …(iv)
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on divisor 36 and remainder 9
66 = 11 × 6 + 0
∴ HCF = 11
Now, 11 = 77 – 6 × 11 [from (iv)]
= 77 – [143 – 77 × 1] × 1 [from (iii)]
= 77 – 143 × 1 – 77 × 1
= 77 × 2 – 143 × 1
= [506 – 143 × 3] × 2 – 143 × 1 [from (ii)]
= 506 × 2 – 143 × 6 – 143 × 1
= 506 × 2 – 143 × 7
= 506 × 2 – [1155 – 506 × 27 × 7] [from (i)]
= 506 × 2 – 1155 × 7 + 506 × 14
= 506 × 16 – 115 × 7
(iv) 1288 and 575
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
1288 = 575 × 2 + 138 …(i)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 575 and remainder 138
575 = 138 × 1 + 23 …(ii)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 138 and remainder 23 …(iii)
∴ HCF = 23
Now, 23 = 575 – 138 × 4 [from (ii)]
= 575 – [1288 – 572 × 2] × 4 [from (i)]
= 575 – 1288 × 4 + 575 × 8
= 575 × 9 – 1288 × 4

4. Express the HCF of 468 and 222 as 468x + 222y where x, y are integers in two different
ways.
Sol:
Given integers are 468 and 222 where 468 > 222.
By applying Euclid’s division lemma, we get 468 = 222 × 2 + 24 …(i)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 222 and remainder 24
222 = 24 × 9 + 6 …(ii)
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 24 and remainder 6
24 = 6 × 4 + 0 …(iii)
We observe that the remainder = 0, so the last divisor 6 is the HCF of the 468 and 222
From (ii) we have
6 = 222 – 24 × 9
⇒ 6 = 222 – [468 – 222 × 2] × 9 [Substituting 24 = 468 – 222 × 2 from (i)]
⇒ 6 = 222 – 468 × 9 – 222 × 18
⇒ 6 = 222 × 19 – 468 × 9
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
⇒ 6 = 222y + 468x, where x = −9 and y = 19

5. If the HCF of 408 and 1032 is expressible in the form 1032 m − 408 × 5, find m.
Sol:
General integers are 408 and 1032 where 408 < 1032
By applying Euclid’s division lemma, we get
1032 = 408 × 2 + 216
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 408 and remainder 216
408 = 216 × 1 + 192
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 216 and remainder 192
216 = 192 × 1 + 24
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 192 and remainder 24
192 = 24 × 8 + 32
We observe that 32m under in 0. So the last divisor 24 is the H.C.F of 408 and 1032
∴ 216 = 1032m – 408 × 5
⇒ 1032 m = 24 + 408 × 5
⇒ 1032m = 24 + 2040
⇒ 1032m = 2064
2064
⇒ m = 1032 = 2

6. If the HCF of 657 and 963 is expressible in the form 657 x + 963 x − 15, find x.
Sol:
657 and 963
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
963 = 657 × 1 + 306
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 657 and remainder 306
657 = 306 × 2 + 45
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 306 and remainder 45
306 = 45 × 6 + 36
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 45 and remainder 36
45 = 36 × 1 + 19
Since remainder ≠ 0, apply division lemma on division 36 and remainder 19
36 = 19 × 4 + 0
∴ HCF = 657
Given HCF = 657 + 963 × (-15)
⇒ 9 = 657 × −1445
⇒ 9 + 14445 = 657 x
⇒ 657x = 1445y
1445𝑦
⇒x= 657
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
⇒ x = 22

7. An army contingent of 616 members is to march behind an army band of 32 members in a


parade. The two groups are to march in the same number of columns. What is the
maximum number of columns in which they can march?
Sol:
Members in arms = 616
Members in Band = 32
∴ Maximum numbers of columns
= HCF of 616 and 32
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
616 = 32 × 19 + 8
32 = 8 × 4 + 0
∴ HCF = 8
Hence the maximum remainder number of columns in which they can each is 8

8. Find the largest number which divides 615 and 963 leaving remainder 6 in each case.
Sol:
The required number when the divides 615 and 963
Leaves remainder 616 is means 615 – 6 = 609 and 963 – 957 are completely divisible by
the number
∴ the required number
= HCF of 609 and 957
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
957 = 609 × 1 + 348
609 = 348 × 1 + 261
348 = 261 × 1 + 87
261 = 87 × 370
HCF = 87
Hence the required number is ‘87’

9. Find the greatest number which divides 285 and 1249 leaving remainders 9 and 7
respectively.
Sol:
The require number when divides 285 and 1249, leaves remainder 9 and 7, this means 285
– 9 = 276 and 1249 – 7 = 1242 are completely divisible by the number
∴ The required number = HCF of 276 and 1242
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
1242 = 276 × 4 + 138
276 = 138 × 2 + 0
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
∴ HCF = 138
Hence remainder is = 0
Hence required number is 138

10. Find the largest number which exactly divides 280 and 1245 leaving remainders 4 and 3,
respectively.
Sol:
The required number when divides 280 and 1245 leaves the remainder 4 and 3, this means
280 4 – 216 and 1245 – 3 = 1245 – 3 = 1242 are completely divisible by the number
∴ The required number = HCF of 276 and 1242
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
1242 = 276 × 4 + 138
276 = 138 × 2 + 0
∴ HCF = 138
Hence the required numbers is 138

11. What is the largest number that divides 626, 3127 and 15628 and leaves remainders of 1, 2
and 3 respectively.
Sol:
The required number when divides 626, 3127 and 15628, leaves remainder 1, 2 and 3. This
means 626 – 1 = 625, 3127 – 2 = 3125 and
15628 – 3 = 15625 are completely divisible by the number
∴ The required number = HCF of 625, 3125 and 15625
First consider 625 and 3125
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
3125 = 625 × 5 + 0
HCF of 625 and 3125 = 625
Now consider 625 and 15625
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
15625 = 625 × 25 + 0
∴ HCF of 625, 3125 and 15625 = 625
Hence required number is 625

12. Find the greatest number that will divide 445, 572 and 699 leaving remainders 4, 5 and 6
respectively.
Sol:
The required number when divides 445, 572 and 699 leaves remainders 4, 5 and 6
This means 445 – 4 = 441, 572 – 5 = 561 and
699 – 6 = 693 are completely divisible by the number
∴ The required number = HCF of 441, 567 and 693
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
First consider 441 and 567
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
567 = 441 × 1 + 126
441 = 126 × 3 + 63
126 = 63 × 2 + 0
∴ HCF of 441 and 567 = 63
Now consider 63 and 693
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
693 = 63 × 11 + 0
∴ HCF of 441, 567 and 693 = 63
Hence required number is 63

13. Find the greatest number which divides 2011 and 2623 leaving remainders 9 and 5
respectively.
Sol:
The required number when divides 2011 and 2623
Leaves remainders 9 and the means
2011 – 9 = 2002 and 2623 – 5 = 2618 are completely divisible by the number
∴ The required number = HCF of 2002 and 2618
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
2618 = 2002 × 1 + 616
2002 = 616 × 3 + 154
616 = 754 × 4 + 0
∴ HCF of 2002 and 2618 = 154
Hence required number is 154

14. The length, breadth and height of a room are 8 m 25 cm, 6 m 75 cm and 4 m 50 cm,
respectively. Determine the longest rod which can measure the three dimensions of the
room exactly.
Sol:
Length of room = 8m 25cm = 825 cm
Breadth of room = 6m 75m = 675 cm
Height of room = 4m 50m = 450 cm
∴ The required longest rod
= HCF of 825, 675 and 450
First consider 675 and 450
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
675 = 450 × 1 + 225
450 = 225 × 2 + 0
∴ HCF of 675 and 450 = 825
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now consider 625 and 825
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
825 = 225 × 3 + 150
225 = 150 × 1 + 75
150 = 75 × 2 + 0
HCF of 825, 675 and 450 = 75

15. 105 goats, 140 donkeys and 175 cows have to be taken across a river. There is only one
boat which will have to make many trips in order to do so. The lazy boatman has his own
conditions for transporting them. He insists that he will take the same number of animals in
every trip and they have to be of the same kind. He will naturally like to take the largest
possible number each time. Can you tell how many animals went in each trip?
Sol:
Number of goats = 205
Number of donkey = 140
Number of cows = 175
∴ The largest number of animals in one trip = HCF of 105, 140 and 175
First consider 105 and 140
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
140 = 105 × 1 + 35
105 = 35 × 3 + 0
∴ HCF of 105 and 140 = 35
Now consider 35 and 175
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
175 = 35 × 5 + 0
HCF of 105, 140 and 175 = 35

16. 15 pastries and 12 biscuit packets have been donated for a school fete. These are to be
packed in several smaller identical boxes with the same number of pastries and biscuit
packets in each. How many biscuit packets and how many pastries will each box contain?
Sol:
Number of pastries = 15
Number of biscuit packets = 12
∴ The required no of boxes to contain equal number = HCF of 15 and 13
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
15 = 12 × 13
12 = 2 × 9 = 0
∴ No. of boxes required = 3
15 2
Hence each box will contain 3
= 5 pastries and 3 biscuit packets
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
17. A mason has to fit a bathroom with square marble tiles of the largest possible size. The size
of the bathroom is 10 ft. by 8 ft. What would be the size in inches of the tile required that
has to be cut and how many such tiles are required?
Sol:
Size of bathroom = 10ft by 8ft
= (10 × 12) inch by (8 × 12) inch
= 120 inch by 96 inch
The largest size of tile required = HCF of 120 and 96
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
120 = 96 × 1 + 24
96 = 24 × 4 + 0
∴ HCF = 24
∴ Largest size of tile required = 24 inches
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑏𝑎𝑡ℎ𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑚
∴ No. of tiles required = 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 2 𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑒
120 ×96
= 24×24
=5×4
= 20 tiles

18. Two brands of chocolates are available in packs of 24 and 15 respectively. If I need to buy
an equal number of chocolates of both kinds, what is the least number of boxes of each
kind I would need to buy?
Sol:
Number of chocolates of 1st brand in one pack = 24
Number of chocolates of 2nd b and in one pack = 15
∴ The least number of chocolates 1 need to purchase
= LCM of 24 and 15
= 2 × 24 × 2 × 2 × 3 × 5
= 120
120
∴ The number of packet of 1st brand = =5
24
120
And the number of packet of 2nd brand = =8
15
∴ Largest size of tile required = 24 inches
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑏𝑎𝑡ℎ 𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑚 120×96
∴ No of tiles required = = = 5 × 4 = 20𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑒𝑠
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 1 𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑒 24×24
No of chocolates of 1st brand in one pack = 24
No of chocolate of 2nd brand in one pack = 15
∴ The least number of chocolates I need to purchase
= LCM of 24 and 15
=2×2×2×3×5
= 120
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
120
∴ The number of packet of 1st brand = =5
24
120
All the number of packet of 2nd brand = =8
15

19. 144 cartons of Coke Cans and 90 cartons of Pepsi Cans are to be stacked in a Canteen. If
each stack is of the same height and is to contain cartons of the same drink, what would be
the greatest number of cartons each stack would have?
Sol:
Number of cartons of coke cans = 144
Number of cartons of pepsi cans = 90
∴ The greatest number of cartons in one stock = HCF of 144 and 90
By applying Euclid’s division lemma
144 = 90 × 1 + 54
90 = 54 × 1 + 36
54 = 36 × 1 + 18
36 = 18 × 2 + 0
∴ HCF = 18
Hence the greatest number cartons in one stock = 18

20. During a sale, colour pencils were being sold in packs of 24 each and crayons in packs of
32 each. If you want full packs of both and the same number of pencils and crayons, how
many of each would you need to buy?
Sol:
Number of color pencils in one pack = 24
No of crayons in pack = 32
∴ The least number of both colors to be purchased
= LCM of 24 and 32
=2×2×2×2×3
= 96
96
∴ Number of packs of pencils to be bought = 24 = 1
96
And number of packs of crayon to be bought = 32 = 3

21. A merchant has 120 liters of oil of one kind, 180 liters of another kind and 240 liters of
third kind. He wants to sell the oil by filling the three kinds of oil in tins of equal capacity.
What should be the greatest capacity of such a tin?
Sol:
Quantity of oil A = 120 liters
Quantity of oil B = 180 liters
Quantity of oil C = 240 liters
We want to fill oils A, B and C in tins of the same capacity
Class X Chapter 1 – Real Numbers Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
∴ The greatest capacity of the tin chat can hold oil. A, B and C = HCF of 120, 180 and 240
By fundamental theorem of arithmetic
120 = 23 × 3 × 5
180 = 22 × 32 × 5
240 = 24 × 3 × 5
HCF = 22 × 3 × 5 = 4 × 3 × 5 = 60 𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠
The greatest capacity of tin = 60 liters
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise 2.1

1. Find the zeroes of each of the following quadratic polynomials and verify the relationship
between the zeroes and their co efficient:
(i) f(x) = 𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 8 (v) q(x) = √3𝑥 2 + 10𝑥 + 7√3
(ii) g(s) = 4𝑠 2 − 4𝑥 + 1 (vi) f(x) = 𝑥 2 − (√3 + 1)𝑥 + √3
2
(iii) h(t) = 𝑡 − 15 (vii) g(x) = 𝑎(𝑥 2 + 1) − 𝑥(𝑎2 + 1)
(iv) p(x) = 𝑥 2 + 2√2𝑥 + 6 (viii) 6𝑥 2 − 3 − 7𝑥
Sol:
(i) f(x) = 𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 8
𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 8 = 𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 2𝑥 − 8
= 𝑥(𝑥 − 4) + 2(𝑥 − 4)
= (𝑥 + 2)(𝑥 − 4)
Zeroes of the polynomials are -2 and 4
− 𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥
Sum of the zeroes = 𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥
−(−2)
-2 + 4 = 1
2=2
𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑡 𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚
Product of the zeroes = 𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥 2
−8
= 24 = 1
− 8 = −8
∴ Hence the relationship verified
(ii) 9(5) = 45 − 45 + 1 = 452 − 25 − 25 + 1 = 25(25 − 1) − 1(25 − 1)
= (25 − 1)(25 − 1)
1 1
Zeroes of the polynomials are 2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 2
− 𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑠
Sum of zeroes = 𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑠2
1 1 −(−4)
+2=
2 4
1=1
𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑡 𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚
Product of the zeroes =
𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑠 𝑠2
1 1 1 1 1
×2=4⇒4=4
2
∴ Hence the relationship verified.
2
(iii) h(t) = 𝑡 2 − 15 = (𝑡 2 ) − (√15) = (𝑡 + √15)(𝑡 − √15)
zeroes of the polynomials are −√15 𝑎𝑛𝑑 √15
sum of zeroes = 0
−√15 + √15 = 0
0=0
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
−15
Product of zeroes = 1
−√15 × √15 = −15
−15 = -15
∴ Hence the relationship verified.
(iv) p(x) = 𝑥 2 + 2√2𝑥 − 6 = 𝑥 2 + 3√2𝑥 + √2 × 3√2
= 𝑥(𝑥 + 3√2) − √2(2 + 3√2) = (𝑥 − √2)(𝑥 + 3√2)
Zeroes of the polynomial are 3√2 and -3√2
−3√2
Sum of the zeroes = 1
√2 − 3√2 = −2√2
−2√2 = −2√2
6
𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠 ⇒ √2 × −3√2 = − 1
−6 = −6
𝐻𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑟𝑒𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑠ℎ𝑖𝑝 𝑣𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑓𝑖𝑒𝑑
(v) 2(x) = √3𝑥 2 + 10𝑥 + 7√3 = √3𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 + 3𝑥 + 7√3
= √3𝑥(𝑥 + √3) + 7(𝑥 + √3)
= (√3𝑥 + 7)(𝑥 + √3)
−7
Zeroes of the polynomials are −√3,
√3
−10
Sum of zeroes =
√3
7 −10 −10 −10
⇒ −√3 − = ⇒ =
√3 √3 √3 √3
7√3 √3𝑥−7
Product of zeroes = ⇒ =7
3 √30
⇒7=7
Hence, relationship verified.
(vi) f(x) = 𝑥 2 − (√3 + 1)𝑥 + √3 = 𝑥 2 − √3𝑥 − 𝑥 + √3
= x (x − √3) – 1 (x - √3)
= (x – 1) (x − √3)
Zeroes of the polynomials are 1 and √3
−{𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥} −[−√3−1]
Sum of zeroes = =
𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑟 2 1
1 + √3 = √3 + 1
𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑡 𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚 √3
Product of zeroes = 𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥 2 = 1
1 × √3 = √3 = √3 = √3
∴ Hence, relationship verified
(vii) g(x) = 𝑎[(𝑥 2 + 1) − 𝑥(𝑎2 + 1)]2 = 𝑎𝑥 2 + 𝑎 − 𝑎2 𝑥 − 𝑥
= 𝑎𝑥 2 − [(𝑎2 + 1) − 𝑥] + 0 = 𝑎𝑥 2 − 𝑎2 𝑥 − 𝑥 + 𝑎
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
= 𝑎𝑥(𝑥 − 𝑎) − 1(𝑥 − 𝑎) = (𝑥 − 𝑎)(𝑎𝑥 − 1)
1
Zeroes of the polynomials = 𝑎 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎
−[−𝑎2 −1]
Sum of the zeroes = 𝑎
1 𝑎2 +1 𝑎2 +1 𝑎2 +1
⇒𝑎+𝑎 = ⇒ =
𝑎 𝑎 𝑎
𝑎
Product of zeroes = 𝑎
1 𝑎 𝑎2 +1 𝑎2 +1
⇒𝑎×𝑎 = 𝑎 ⇒ =
𝑎 𝑎
𝑎
Product of zeroes = 𝑎 ⇒ 1 = 1
Hence relationship verified
(viii) 6𝑥 2 − 3 − 7𝑥 = 6𝑥 2 − 7𝑥 − 3 = (3𝑥 + 11)(2𝑥 − 3)
3 −1
Zeroes of polynomials are +2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 3
−1 3 7 −(−7) −(𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥)
Sum of zeroes = +2=6= =
3 6 𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥 2
−1 3 −1 −3 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑡 𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚
Product of zeroes = ×2= = = 𝑐𝑜 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥 2
3 2 6
∴ Hence, relationship verified.

2. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = ax2 + bx + c, then evaluate:
(i) 𝛼− 𝛽 (v) 𝛼 4 + 𝛽4 𝛼2
(viii) 𝑎 [ + ] +
𝛽2
1 1 1 1 𝛽 𝛼
(ii) − (vi) + 𝛼 𝛽
𝛼 𝛽 𝑎𝛼+𝑏 𝛼𝛽+𝑏
𝑏 [𝑎 + 𝛼 ]
1 1 𝛽 𝛼
(iii) + 𝛽 − 2𝛼 𝛽 (vii) + 𝑎𝛽+𝑏
𝛼 𝑎𝛼+𝑏
(iv) 𝛼 2 𝛽 + 𝛼 𝛽2
Sol:
f(x) = 𝑎𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑥 + 𝑐
−𝑏
𝛼+𝛽 = 𝒂
𝑐
𝛼𝛽 = 𝑎
𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝛼 + 𝛽 𝑎𝑟𝑒 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑡𝑠 (𝑜𝑟)𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑔𝑖𝑣𝑒𝑛 𝑝𝑜𝑙𝑦𝑛𝑜𝑚𝑖𝑎𝑙𝑠
(i) 𝛼− 𝛽
The two zeroes of the polynomials are
−𝑏+√𝑏2 −4𝑎𝑐 −√𝑏2 −4𝑎𝑐 √𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐 +𝑏+√𝑏2 −4𝑎𝑐 2√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐 √𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐
− (𝑏 ) = −𝑏 + = =
2𝑎 2𝑎 2𝑎 2𝑎 2𝑎
1 1 𝛽−𝛼 −(𝛼− 𝛽)
(ii) −𝛽 = = … (𝑖)
𝛼 𝛼𝛽 𝛼𝛽
√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐 𝑐
From (i) we know that 𝛼 − 𝛽 = [𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 (𝑖)]𝛼𝛽 =
2𝑎 𝑎
√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐×𝑎 −√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐
Putting the values in the (a) = − ( )=
𝑎×𝑐 𝑐
1 1
(iii) + 𝛽 − 2𝛼 𝛽
𝛼
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝛼+ 𝛽
⇒[ ] − 2𝛼𝛽
𝛼𝛽
−𝑏 𝑎 𝑐 𝑐 𝑏 −𝑎𝑏−2𝑐 2 𝑏 2𝑐
⇒ × 𝑐 − 2 𝑎 = −2 𝑎 − 𝑐 = − [𝑐 + ]
𝑎 𝑎𝑐 𝑎
(iv) 𝛼 2 𝛽 + 𝛼 𝛽2
𝛼 𝛽(𝛼 + 𝛽)
𝑐 −𝑏
= 𝑎( 𝑎 )
−𝑏𝑐
= 𝑎2
(v) 𝛼 + 𝛽 4 = (𝛼 2 + 𝛽 2 )2 − 2𝛼 2 + 𝛽 2
4

= ((𝛼 + 𝛽)2 − 2𝛼𝛽)2 − 2(𝛼𝛽)2


2
𝑏 2 𝑐 𝑐 2
= [(− 𝑎) − 2 𝑎] − [2 (𝑎) ]
2
𝑏 2 −2𝑎𝑐 2𝑐 2
=[ ] −
𝑎2 𝑎2
2
(𝑏 2 2𝑎𝑐) −2𝑎2 𝑐 2
= 𝑎4
1 1
(vi) +
𝑎𝛼+𝑏 𝛼𝛽+𝑏
𝑎𝛽+𝑏+𝑎𝛼+𝑏
⇒ (3𝛼+𝑏)(𝛼𝛽+𝑏)
𝑎(𝛼+ 𝛽)+2𝑏
= 𝑎2 𝛼𝛽+𝑎𝑏 𝛼+𝑎𝑏𝛽+𝑏2
𝑎(𝛼+𝛽)+𝑏
=
𝑎2 𝛼𝛽+𝛼𝛽(𝛼2 𝛽)+𝑏 2
𝑎+2𝑏
𝑎× 𝑏 𝑏
𝑎
= 𝑐 𝑎𝑏𝑐(−𝑏)+𝑏2
= 𝑎𝑐−𝑏2 +𝑏2 = 𝑎𝑐
𝑎× +
𝑎 𝑎
𝛽 𝛼
(vii) +
𝑎𝛼+𝑏 𝑎𝛽+𝑏
𝛽(𝑎𝛽+𝑏)+𝛼(𝑎𝛼+𝑏)
= (𝑎𝛼+𝑏)(𝛼𝛽+𝑏)
𝑎𝛽 2 +𝑏𝛽+𝑎𝛼2 +𝑏𝛼
= 𝑎2 𝛼𝛽+𝑎𝑏𝛼+𝑎𝑏𝛽+𝑏2
𝑎𝛼2 +𝑎𝛽 2 +𝑏𝛽 2 +𝑏𝛼
= 𝑐
𝑎× +𝑎𝑏(𝛼+𝛽)+𝑏 2
𝑎
𝑎[(𝛼2 +𝛽 2 )+𝑏(𝛼+𝛽)]
= −𝑏
𝑎𝑐+𝑎𝑏+𝑥( )+𝑏2
𝑎
𝑏
𝑎[(𝛼+ 𝛽)2 −2𝛼𝛽]+𝑏𝑥−
𝑎
= 𝑎𝑐
𝑏2 2𝑐 𝑏2 𝑏2 −2𝑐
𝑎[ − ]− 𝑎×[ ]−𝑏2 −2
𝑎 𝑎 𝑎 𝑎
= = =
𝑎𝑐 𝑎𝑐 𝑎
𝛼2 𝛽2 𝛼 𝛽
(viii) 𝑎 [ 𝛽 + ] + 𝑏 [𝑎 + 𝛼 ]
𝛼
𝛼3 +𝛽 3 𝛼2 +𝛽 2
= 𝑎[ ]+𝑏( )
𝛼𝛽 𝛼𝛽
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝛼[(𝛼+𝛽)3 −3𝛼𝛽 (𝛼+𝛽)]
= + 𝑏(𝛼 + 𝛽)2 − 2𝛼 𝛽
𝛼𝛽
−𝑏3 3𝑏 𝑐 𝑏2 2𝑐
𝛼[( 3 )+ . +𝑏( 2 − )]
𝑎 𝑎 𝑎 𝑎 𝑎
= 𝑐
𝑎
𝑎2 −𝑏3 3𝑏𝑐 𝑏3 2𝑏𝑐
= [ 𝑎3 + + 𝑎2 − ]
𝑐 𝑎2 𝑎
−𝑎2 𝑏 3 3𝑎2 𝑏𝑐 𝑏 3 𝑎2 2𝑏𝑐𝑎2
= + + −
𝑐𝑎3 𝑐𝑎2 𝑎2 𝑐 𝑎𝑐
−𝑏 3 𝑏3
= + 3𝑏 + 𝑎𝑐 − 2𝑏
𝑎𝑐
=b

3. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = 6x2 + x − 2, find the value of
𝛼 𝛽
+𝛼
𝛽
Sol:
f(x) = 6𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 2
Since 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeroes of the given polynomial
−1
∴ Sum of zeroes [𝛼 + 𝛽] = 6
−1
Product of zeroes (𝛼𝛽) = 3
𝛼 𝛽 𝛼2 +𝛽 2 (𝛼+ 𝛽)2 −2𝛼𝛽
=𝛽+𝛼 = =
𝛼𝛽 𝛼𝛽
1 2 −1 1 2 1+24
( ) −2×( ) −
6 3 6 3 36
= 1 = −1 = −1

3 3 3
2
36 −25
= 1 = 12
3

4. If a and are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = 𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 4, find the value of
1 1
+ 𝛽 − 𝛼𝛽
𝛼
Sol:
Since 𝛼 + 𝛽 are the zeroes of the polynomial: 𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 4
Sum of the roots (𝛼 + 𝛽) = 1
Product of the roots (𝛼𝛽) = −4
1 1 𝛼+𝛽
+ 𝛽 − 𝛼𝛽 = − 𝛼𝛽
𝛼 𝛼𝛽
1 −1 −1+16 15
= −4 + 4 = +4 = =
4 4 4

5. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial p(x) = 4x2 − 5x −1, find the value of
𝛼 2 𝛽 + 𝛼𝛽 2 .
Sol:
Since 𝛼 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛽 are the roots of the polynomial: 4𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 − 1
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5
∴ Sum of the roots 𝛼 + 𝛽 = 4
−1
Product of the roots 𝛼𝛽 = 4
2 2 5 −1 −5
Hence 𝛼 𝛽 + 𝛼𝛽 = 𝛼𝛽(𝛼 + 𝛽) = 4 ( 4 ) = 16

1
6. If a and 3 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 + x − 2, find the value of 𝛼 −
1
.
𝛽
Sol:
Since 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the roots of the polynomial x + x – 2
∴ Sum of roots 𝛼 + 𝛽 = 1
1
Product of roots 𝛼𝛽 2 ⇒ − 𝛽
𝛽−𝛼 (𝛼−𝛽)
= ∙
𝛼𝛽 𝛼𝛽
√(𝛼+𝛽)2 −4𝛼𝛽
= 𝛼𝛽
√1+8 3
= =2
+2

7. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 − 5x + 4, find the value of
1 1
− 𝛽 − 2𝛼𝛽
𝛼
Sol:
Since 𝛼 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛽 are the roots of the quadratic polynomial
f(x) = 𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 + 4
Sum of roots = 𝛼 + 𝛽 = 5
Product of roots = 𝛼𝛽 = 4
1 1 𝛽+𝛼 5 5 −27
+ 𝛽 − 2𝛼𝛽 = − 2𝛼𝛽 = 4 − 2 × 4 = 4 − 8 =
𝛼 𝛼𝛽 4

8. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(t) = t2 − 4t + 3, find the value of
𝛼 4𝛽3 + 𝛼 3𝛽4
Sol:
Since 𝛼 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛽 are the zeroes of the polynomial f(t) = 𝑡 2 − 4𝑡 + 3
Since α + β = 4
Product of zeroes 𝛼𝛽 = 3
𝐻𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝛼 4 𝛽 3 + 𝛼 3 𝛽 4 = 𝛼 3 𝛽 3 (𝛼 + 𝛽) = [3]3 [4] = 108

9. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial p(y) = 5y2 − 7y + 1, find the value of
1 1
𝛼
+𝛽
Sol:
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Since 𝛼 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛽 are the zeroes of the polynomials
p(y) = 542 = 5y2 – 7y + 1
1
Sum of the zeroes 𝛼 𝛽 = 6
1
Product of zeroes = 𝛼 𝛽 = 6
1 1 𝛼+𝛽 7×5
+𝛽 = = 5×1 = 7
𝛼 𝛼𝛽

10. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial p(s) = 3s2 − 6s + 4, find the value of
𝛼 𝛽 1 1
+ 𝛼 + 2 [𝛼 + 𝛽] + 3𝛼𝛽
𝛽
Sol:
Since 𝛼 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛽 are the zeroes of the polynomials
6
Sum of the zeroes 𝛼 + 𝛽 = 3
4
Product of the zeroes 𝛼𝛽 = 3
𝛼 𝛽 1 1
+ 𝛼 + 2 [𝛼 + 𝛽] + 3𝛼𝛽
𝛽
𝛼2 +𝛽 2 𝛼+𝛽
⇒ + 2[ ] + 3𝛼𝛽
𝛼𝛽 𝛼𝛽
(𝛼+𝛽)2 −2𝛼𝛽 𝛼+𝛽
⇒ + 2 [ 𝛼𝛽 ] + 3𝛼𝛽
𝛼𝛽
4 2×3 4
[2]2 −2× +2[ ]+3[ ]
3 4 3
= 4
3
8
4− 4 3
3
= 4 + 7 ⇒ 3 × 4 (1 + 7) ⇒ 8
3

11. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 − px + q, prove that
α2 𝛽2 𝑝4 4𝑝2
+ 𝛼2 = 𝑞 2 − +2
𝛽2 𝑞
Sol:
Since 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the roots of the polynomials
f(x) = 𝑥 2 − 𝑝𝑥 + 2
sum of zeroes = p = 𝛼 + 𝛽
Product of zeroes = q = 𝛼𝛽
α2 𝛽2
LHS = 𝛽2 + 𝛼2
2
𝛼2 +𝛽 2 (α2 + β2 ) −2(𝛼𝛽)2
= =
𝛼𝛽 2 (𝛼𝛽)2
2
[(𝛼+𝛽)2 −2𝛼𝛽] −2(𝛼𝛽)2
= (𝛼𝛽)2
2
[(𝑝)2 −2𝑞] −2𝑞 2
= 𝑞
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝑝4 +4𝑞 2 −2𝑝2 .2𝑞−2𝑞 2
= 𝑞2
𝑝4 +2𝑞 2 −4𝑝2 𝑞 𝑝4 4𝑝2
= = 𝑞2 + 2 −
𝑞2 𝑞
𝑝4 4𝑝2 𝑝4 4𝑝2
= 𝑞2 − = 𝑞2 + 2 −
𝑞2 𝑞
𝑝4 4𝑝2
= 𝑞2 − +2
𝑞

12. If the squared difference of the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 + px + 45 is
equal to 144, find the value of p.
Sol:
Let the two zeroes of the polynomial be 𝛼 and 𝛽
f(x) = 𝑥 2 + 𝑝𝑥 + 45
sum of the zeroes = −𝑝
Product of zeroes = 45
⇒ (α − β)2 − 4αβ = 144
⇒ 𝑝2 − 4 × 45 = 144
⇒ 𝑝2 = 144 + 180
⇒ 𝑝2 = 324
𝑝 = ±1

13. If the sum of the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(t) = kt2 + 2t + 3k is equal to their
product, find the value of k.
Sol:
Let the two zeroes of the f(t) = 𝑘𝑡 2 + 2𝑡 + 3𝑘 𝑏𝑒 α and β
Sum of the zeroes (α + β)
Product of the zeroes αβ
−2 3𝑘
=
k k
−2𝑘 = 3𝑘 2
2𝑘 + 3𝑘 2 = 0
k(3k + 2) = 0
k=0
−2
k= 3

14. If one zero of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = 4x2 − 8kx − 9 is negative of the other, find
the value of k.
Sol:
Let the two zeroes of one polynomial
𝑓(𝑥) = 4𝑥 2 − 5𝑘 − 9 𝑏𝑒 α, −α
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
−9
α×α = 4
2 +9
tα = 4
+3
𝛼= 2
8𝑘
Sum of zeroes = =0
4
Hence 8k = 0
Or k = 0

15. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 − 1, find a quadratic
2𝛼 2𝛽
polynomial whose zeroes are 𝑎𝑛𝑑
𝛽 𝛼
Sol:
f(x) = 𝑥 2 − 1
sum of zeroes 𝛼 + 𝛽 = 0
Product of zeroes α𝛽 = -1
2α 2𝛽 2α2 +2𝛽2
Sum of zeroes = + =
𝛽 α α𝛽
2((α+𝛽)2 −2α𝛽)
= α𝛽
2[(0)2 −2× −1]
= −1
2(2)1
= −1
= −4
2α×2𝛽 4α𝛽
Product of zeroes = =
α𝛽 α𝛽
Hence the quadratic equation is 𝑥 2 − (𝑠𝑢𝑚 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠)𝑥 + 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠
= 𝑘(𝑥 2 + 4𝑥 + 14)

16. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 − 3x − 2, find a quadratic
1 1
polynomial whose zeroes are 2α+𝛽 + 2𝛽+α.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 − 2
Sum of zeroes [α + 𝛽] = 3
Product of zeroes [α𝛽] = -2
1 1
Sum of zeroes = 2α+𝛽 + 2𝛽+α
2𝛽+α+2α+𝐴
= (2α+𝛽)(2𝛽+α)
3α+3𝛽
= 2(α2 +𝛽2 )+5α𝛽
3 ×3
= 2[2 (α+𝛽)2 −2α𝛽 +5×(−2)]
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
9 9
= 2[9]−10 = 16
1 1 1
Product of zeroes = α+𝛽 × 2𝛽+α = 4α𝛽+α𝛽+2α2 +2𝛽2
1
= 5×−2+2[(α+𝛽)2 −2α𝛽]
1
= −10+2[9+4]
1
= 10+26
1
= 16
Quadratic equation = 𝑥 2 − [𝑠𝑢𝑚 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠]𝑥 + 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠
9𝑥 1
= 𝑥2 − +
16 16
2 9𝑥 1
= 𝑘 [𝑥 − 16 + 16]

17. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of a quadratic polynomial such that a + 13 = 24 and a − 𝛽 = 8, find
a quadratic polynomial having 𝛼 and 𝛽 as its zeros.
Sol:
𝛼 + 𝛽 = 24
𝛼𝛽=8
………….
2 𝛼 =32
𝛼 = 16
𝛽=8
𝛼 𝛽 = 16 × 8 = 128
Quadratic equation
⇒ 𝑥 2 − (𝑠𝑢𝑚 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠) + 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠
⇒ 𝑘[𝑥 2 − 24𝑥 + 128]

18. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 − p (x + 1) — c, show that (𝛼
+ 1)( 𝛽 +1) = 1− c.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 2 − 𝑝(𝑥 + 1)𝑐 = 𝑥 − 𝑝𝑥 = −𝑝 − 𝑐
Sum of zeroes = 𝛼 + 𝛽 = p
Product of zeroes = − p – c = 𝛼 𝛽
(𝛼 + 1+ 𝛽+ ) = 𝛼 𝛽+ 𝛼 + 𝛽 + 1 = −p –c + p + 1
= 1 – c = R.H.S
∴ Hence proved

19. If If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeros of the quadratic polynomial f(x) = x2 – 2x + 3, find a polynomial
𝛼−1 𝛽−1
whose roots are (i) 𝛼 + 2, 𝛽 + 2 (ii) 𝛼+1 , 𝛽+1
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 + 3
Sum of zeroes = 2 = (𝛼 + 𝛽)
Product of zeroes = 3 = (𝛼 𝛽)
(𝑖) 𝑠𝑢𝑚 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠 = (α + 2) + (β + 2) = α + β + 4 = 2 + 4 = 6
𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠 = (α + 2)(β + 2)
= α β + 2α + 2β + 4 = 3 + 2(2) + 4 = 11
𝑄𝑢𝑎𝑑𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑐 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 = 𝑥 2 − 6𝑥 + 11 = 𝑘[𝑥 2 − 6𝑥 + 11]
α−1 β−1
(ii) sum of zeroes = α+1 + β+1
(α−1)(β+1)+(β−1)(α+1)
= (α+1)(β+1)
α β+α−β−1+α β+β+β−α−1
= 3+2+1
3−1+3−1 2
= =4=3
3+2+1
α−1 β−1 α 1−α−αβ+1
Product of zeroes = βα +1 × α+1 − α β+α+β+1
3−(α+β)+1 2 1
= =6=3
3+2+1
2 +1 𝑥 2 −2𝑥 1
Quadratic equation on 𝑥 2 − 3 × = 1[ + 3]
3 3

20. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the zeroes of the polynomial f(x) = 𝑥 2 + 𝑝𝑥 + 𝑞, form a polynomial whose
zeroes are (𝛼 + 𝛽)2 and (𝛼 − 𝛽)2.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 2 + 𝑝 + 𝑞
Sum of zeroes = p = 𝛼 + 𝛽
Product of zeroes = q = 𝛼 𝛽
Sum of the new polynomial = (α + β)2 + (α − β)2
= (−𝑝)2 + α2 + β2 − 2α β
= 𝑝2 + (α + β)2 − 2α β − 2α β
= 𝑝2 + 𝑝2 − 4𝑞
= 2𝑝2 − 4𝑞
Product of zeroes = (α + β)2 × (α − β)2 = [−𝑝]2 × (𝑝2 − 4𝑞) = (𝑝2 − 4𝑞)𝑝2
Quadratic equation = 𝑥 2 − [2𝑝2 − 4𝑞] + 𝑝2 [−4𝑞 + 𝑝]
𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑘{𝑥 2 − 2(𝑝2 − 28)𝑥 + 𝑝2 (𝑞 2 − 4𝑞)}
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise 2.2

1. Verify that the numbers given alongside of the cubic polynomials below are their zeros.
Also, verify the relationship between the zeros and coefficients in each case:
1
(𝑖) 𝑓(𝑥) = 2𝑥 3 + 𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 + 2; , 1, −2
2
(ii) 𝑔(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 − 4𝑥 2 + 5𝑥 − 2; 2, 1, 1
Sol:
(𝑖) 𝑓(𝑥) = 2𝑥 3 + 𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 + 2
1 1 3 1 2 1
𝑓 (2) = 2 (2) + (2) − 5 (2) + 2
2 1 5 −4
=8+4−2+2= +2=0
2
𝑓(1) = 2(1)3 + (1)2
− 5(1) + 2 = 2 + 1 − 5 + 2 = 0
𝑓(−2) = 𝑞(−2) + (−2)2 − 5(−2) + 2
3

= −16 + 4 + 10 + 2
= −16 + 16 = 0
−𝑏
= ∝ +𝛽 + 𝛾 = 𝑎
1 −1
+1−2=
2 2
1 −1
−1=
2 2
1 −1
=
2 2
𝑐
𝛼𝛽. 𝛽𝛾 + 𝑟𝛼 = 𝑎
1 1 −5
× 1 + 1 × −2 + −2 × 2 =
2 2
1 −5
−2−1=
2 2
−5 −5
=
2 2
(𝑖𝑖) 𝑔(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 − 4𝑥 2 + 5 × −2
𝑔(2) = (2)3 − 4(2)2 + 5(2) − 2 = 8 − 16 + 10 − 2 = 18 − 18 = 0
𝑔(1) = [1]3 − 4[1]2 + 5[1] − 2 = 1 − 4 + 5 − 2 = 6 − 6 = 0
−𝑏
𝛼+𝛽+𝛾= (2) + 1 + 1 = −(−4) = 4 = 4
𝑎
𝑐
𝛼 𝛽 + 𝛽 𝛾 + 𝛾𝛼 = 𝑎
2×1+1𝛼1+1×2=5
2+1+2=5
5=5
𝛼𝛽𝛾 = −(−2)
2×1×1=2
2=2
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2. Find a cubic polynomial with the sum, sum of the product of its zeroes taken two at a time,
and product of its zeros as 3, −1 and −3 respectively.
Sol:
Any cubic polynomial is of the form 𝑎𝑥 3 + 𝑏𝑥 2 + 𝑐𝑥 + 𝑑 = 𝑥 3 −
𝑠𝑢𝑚 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠 (𝑥 2 )[product of zeroes] + sum of the products of its zeroes × - product
of zeroes
= 𝑥 3 − 2𝑥 2 + (3 − 𝑥) + 3
= k [𝑥 3 − 3𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 3]
k is any non-zero real numbers

3. If the zeros of the polynomial f(x) = 2x3 − 15x2 + 37x − 30 are in A.P., find them.
Sol:
Let 𝛼 = a – d , 𝛽 = a and 𝛾 = a + d be the zeroes of polynomial.
𝑓(𝑥) = 2𝑥 3 − 15𝑥 2 + 37𝑥 − 30
−15 15
𝛼 + 𝛽 + 𝛾 = −( )=
2 2
−30
𝛼𝛽𝛾 = − ( ) = 15
2
15
a–d+a+a+d= and 𝑎(𝑎 − 𝑑)(𝑎 + 𝑎) = 15
2
15 5
3a = ,a=2
2
𝑎(𝑎2 − 𝑑 2 ) = 15
15×2 5 2 25−6
𝑎2 − 𝑎2 = ⇒ (2) − 𝑑2 = 6 ⇒⇒ = 𝑑2
5 4
1 1
𝑑2 = 4 ⇒ 𝑑 = 2
5 1 4
∴𝛼 =2−2 = 2= 2
5 5
𝛽=2=2
5 1
𝛾 =2+2=3

4. Find the condition that the zeros of the polynomial f(x) = x3 + 3px2 + 3qx + r may be in
A.P.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 + 3𝑝𝑥 2 + 3𝑞𝑥 + 𝑞
𝐿𝑒𝑡 𝑎 − 𝑑, 𝑎, 𝑎 + 𝑑 be the zeroes of the polynomial
−𝑏
𝑇ℎ𝑒 𝑠𝑢𝑚 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠 = 𝑎
𝑏
𝑎+𝑎−𝑑+𝑎+𝑑 =𝑎
3𝑎 = −3𝑝
a = −𝑝
Since a is the zero of the polynomial f(x) therefore f(a) = 0 ⇒ [𝑎]2 + 3𝑝𝑎2 + 3𝑞𝑎 + 𝑟 = 0
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
∴ 𝑓(𝑎) = 0 ⇒ [𝑎]2 + 3𝑝𝑎2 + 3𝑞𝑎 + 𝑟 = 0
⇒ 𝑝3 + 3𝑝(−𝑝)2 + 3𝑞(−𝑝) + 𝑟 = 0
⇒ −𝑝3 + 3𝑝2 − 𝑝𝑞 + 𝑟 = 0
⇒ 2𝑝3 − 𝑝𝑞 + 𝑟 = 0

5. If the zeroes of the polynomial 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑎𝑥 3 + 3𝑏𝑥 2 + 3𝑐𝑥 + 𝑑 are in A.P., prove that
2𝑏 3 − 3𝑎𝑏𝑐 + 𝑎2 𝑑 = 0
Sol:
Let a – d, a, a + d be the zeroes of the polynomial f(x)
−3𝑏
The sum of zeroes ⇒ a – d + a + a + d = 𝑎
3𝑏 −3𝑏 −𝑏
⇒ +3a = − ⇒ 𝑎 = 𝑎×3 𝑎 =
𝑎 𝑎
f(a) = 0 ⇒ a(a)2 + 3b(a)2 + 3 c(a) + d = 0
−𝑏 3 3𝑏 2 3𝑏𝑐
=a(𝑎) + − +𝑑 =0
𝑎2 𝑎
2𝑏 3 3𝑏𝑐
⇒ − +𝑑 =0
𝑎2 𝑎
2𝑏 3 −3𝑎𝑏𝑐+𝑎2 𝑑
⇒ =0
𝑎2
⇒ 2𝑏 3 − 3𝑎𝑏𝑐 + 𝑎2 𝑑 = 0

6. If the zeroes of the polynomial 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 − 12𝑥 2 + 39𝑥 + 𝑘 are in A.P., find the value of
k.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 − 12𝑥 2 + 39𝑥 − 𝑘
Let 𝑎 − 𝑑, 𝑎, 𝑎 + 𝑑 be the zeroes of the polynomial f(x)
The sum of the zeroes = 12
3a = 12
a=4
𝑓(𝑎), −𝑎(𝑥)3 − 𝑙 2 (4)2 + 39(4) + 𝑘 = 0
64 – 192 + 156 + k = 0
= −28 = 𝑘
k = −28
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise 2.3

1. Apply division algorithm to find the quotient q(x) and remainder r(x) on dividing f(x) by
g(x) in each of the following:
(i) 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 − 6𝑥 2 + 11𝑥 − 6, g(x) = 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 + 1
(ii) 𝑓(𝑥) = 10𝑥 4 + 17𝑥 3 − 62𝑥 2 + 30𝑥 − 105(𝑥) = 2𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 + 1
(iii) 𝑓(𝑥) = 4𝑥 3 + 8𝑥 2 + 8𝑥 + 7: 9(𝑥) = 2𝑥 2 − 𝑥 + 1
(iv) 𝑓(𝑥) = 15𝑥 3 − 20𝑥 2 + 13𝑥 − 12; 𝑔(𝑥) = 𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 + 2
Sol:
(i) 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 − 6𝑥 2 + 11𝑥 − 6
g(x) = 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 + 1
𝑥−7
𝑥 + 𝑥 + 1 𝑥 3 − 6𝑥 2 + 11𝑥 − 6
2

𝑥3 + 𝑥2 + 𝑥
−7𝑥 2 − 7𝑥 − 7
−7𝑥 2 − 7𝑥 − 7
17𝑥 − 1
(ii) 𝑓(𝑥) = 10𝑥 + 17𝑥 3 − 62𝑥 2 + 30𝑥 − 105(𝑥) = 2𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 + 1
4

5𝑥 2 − 9𝑥 − 2
2𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 + 1 10𝑥 4 + 17𝑥 3 − 62𝑥 2 + 30𝑥 − 3
10𝑥 4 + 35𝑥 3 + 5𝑥 2
−18𝑥 3 − 67𝑥 2 + 30𝑥
−18𝑥 3 ± 63𝑥 2 + 9𝑥
−4𝑥 2 + 39𝑥 − 3
±4𝑥 2 ± 14𝑥 ± 2
53𝑥 − 1
(iii) 𝑓(𝑥) = 4𝑥 + 8𝑥 + 8𝑥 + 7: 9(𝑥) = 2𝑥 2 − 𝑥 + 1
3 2

2x – 5
2𝑥 − 2 + 1 4𝑥 + 8𝑥 2 + 82 + 7
2 3

4𝑥 3 ∓ 2𝑥 2 ± 2𝑥
10𝑥 2 + 6𝑥 + 7
10𝑥 2 ± 5𝑥 ± 5
11x – 2
(iv) 𝑓(𝑥) = 15𝑥 − 20𝑥 + 13𝑥 − 12; 𝑔(𝑥) = 𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 + 2
3 2

15𝑥 + 10
𝑥 − 2𝑥 + 2 15𝑥 − 20𝑥 2 + 13𝑥 − 12
2 3

15𝑥 3 ∓ 30𝑥 2 ± 30𝑥


10𝑥 2 − 17𝑥 − 12
10𝑥 2 ± 20𝑥 + 20
3x – 32
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2. Check whether the first polynomial is a factor of the second polynomial by applying the
division algorithm:
(i) 𝑔(𝑡) = 𝑡 2 − 3; 𝑓(𝑡) = 2𝑡 4 + 3𝑡 3 − 2𝑡 2 − 9𝑡
(ii) 𝑔(𝑥) = 𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 + 1, 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 5 − 4𝑥 3 + 𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 + 1
(iii) 𝑔(𝑥) = 2𝑥 2 − 𝑥 + 3, 𝑓(𝑥) = 6𝑥 5 − 𝑥 4 + 4𝑥 3 − 5𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 15
Sol:
(i) 𝑔(𝑡) = 𝑡 2 − 3; 𝑓(𝑡) = 2𝑡 4 + 3𝑡 3 − 2𝑡 2 − 9𝑡
2𝑡 2 + 3𝑡 + 4
𝑡2 − 3 2𝑡 4 + 3𝑡 3 − 2𝑡 2 − 9𝑡
2𝑡 2 − 6𝑡 2
3𝑡 3 + 4𝑡 − 9𝑡
3𝑡 3 + 4𝑡 − 9𝑡
4𝑡 2 − 12
4𝑡 2 ∓ 12
(ii) 𝑔(𝑥) = 𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 + 1, 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 5 − 4𝑥 3 + 𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 + 1
𝑥2 − 1
𝑥 3 − 3𝑥 + 1 𝑥 5 − 4𝑥 3 + 𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 + 1
𝑥 5 − 3𝑥 3 + 𝑥 2
−𝑥 3 + 3𝑥 + 1
−𝑥 3 + 3𝑥 − 1
2
(iii) 𝑔(𝑥) = 2𝑥 − 𝑥 + 3, 𝑓(𝑥) = 6𝑥 − 𝑥 4 + 4𝑥 3 − 5𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 15
2 5

3𝑥 3 + 𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 5
2𝑥 2 − 𝑥 + 3 6𝑥 5 − 𝑥 4 + 4𝑥 3 − 5𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 15
6𝑥 5 − 3𝑥 4 + 9𝑥 3
2𝑥 4 − 5𝑥 3 − 5𝑥 2
2𝑥 4 ∓ 𝑥 3 ± 3𝑥 2
−4𝑥 3 − 8𝑥 2 − 𝑥
∓4𝑥 3 ± 2𝑥 2 − 6𝑥
−10𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 − 15
∓10𝑥 ± 15𝑥 ∓ 15
0

3. Obtain all zeros of the polynomial f(x) = 2x4 + x3 − 14x2 − 19x − 6, if two of its zeros are
−2 and −1.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 2𝑥 4 + 𝑥 3 − 14𝑥 2 − 19𝑥 − 6
If the two zeroes of the polynomial are -2 and -1, then its factors are (x + 2) and (x + 1)
(𝑥 + 2)(𝑥 + 1) = 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 + 2𝑥 = 𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 + 2
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 − 3
𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 + 2 2𝑥 4 + 𝑥 3 − 14𝑥 2 − 19𝑥 − 6
2𝑥 4 + 6𝑥 3 + 4𝑥 2
−5𝑥 3 − 18𝑥 2 − 19𝑥
−5𝑥 3 ∓ 15𝑥 2 ∓ 10𝑥
−3𝑥 2 − 9𝑥 − 6
−3𝑥 2 − 9𝑥 − 6
∴ 2𝑥 4 + 𝑥 3 − 14𝑥 2 − 19𝑥 − 6
= (2𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 − 3)[𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 + 2] = [2𝑥 + 1][𝑥 − 3][𝑥 + 2][𝑥 + 1]
−1
∴ zero all x = , 3, −2, −1
2

4. Obtain all zeros of f(x) = x3 + 13x2 + 32x + 20, if one of its zeros is −2.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 + 13𝑥 2 + 32𝑥 + 20
𝑥 2 + 11𝑥 + 10
𝑥 + 2 𝑥 3 + 13𝑥 2 + 32𝑥 + 20
𝑥 3 ± 2𝑥 2
11𝑥 2 + 32𝑥 + 20
11𝑥 2 ± 22𝑥
10x + 20
10x + 20
0
2 2
(𝑥 + 11𝑥 + 10) = 𝑥 + 10𝑥 + 𝑥 + 20(𝑥 + 10) + 1(𝑥 + 10) = (𝑥 + 1)(𝑥 + 10)
∴ The zeroes of the polynomial are -1, -10, -2.

5. Obtain all zeros of the polynomial 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 4 − 3𝑥 2 = 𝑥 2 + 9𝑥 − 6 if two of its zeros are
−√3, 𝑎𝑛𝑑 √3.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = (𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 + 2) = (𝑥 + √3)& (𝑥 − √3) = 𝑥 2 − 3
𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 + 2
𝑥 2 − 3 𝑥 4 − 3𝑥 2 = 𝑥 2 + 9𝑥 − 6
𝑥 4 − 3𝑥 2
−3𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 2 + 9𝑥
−3𝑥 2 ± 9𝑥
2
2𝑥 − 6
2𝑥 2 − 6
(𝑥 2 − 3)(𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 + 2) = (𝑥 + √3)(𝑥 − √3)(𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 𝑥 + 2)
= (𝑥 + √3)(𝑥 − √3) (𝑥 − 2)(𝑥 − 2)
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Zeroes are −√3, √3, 1, 2

6. Find all zeros of the polynomial 𝑓(𝑥) = 2𝑥 4 − 2𝑥 3 − 7𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 + 6, if its two zeroes are
3 3
−√2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 √2
Sol:
3 3
If the zeroes of the polynomial are −√2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 √2

√3 3 𝑥 2 −3
Its factors are (𝑥 + ) (𝑥 − √2) =
2 2

3 3
x = −1, 2, √2 , −√2
3
= [2𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 4] (𝑥 2 − 2)
3
= (2𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 2𝑥 − 4) (𝑥 + √2)

= [2[𝑥(𝑥 + 2) + 2(𝑥 − 2)]]


√3 3
= [𝑥 + ] [𝑥 − √2]
2

3 3
= (𝑥 + 2)(𝑥 − 2) [𝑥 + √2] [𝑥 − √2]

3 3
𝑥 = −1, 2, √2 − √2

7. What must be added to the polynomial 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 4 + 2𝑥 3 − 2𝑥 2 + 𝑥 − 1 so that the


resulting polynomial is exactly divisible by 𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 − 3?
Sol:
𝑥2 − 1
𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 − 3 𝑥 4 + 2𝑥 3 − 2𝑥 2 + 𝑥 − 1
𝑥 4 + 2𝑥 3 − 3𝑥 2
𝑥2 + 𝑥 − 1
𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 − 3
−x + 2
we must add x −2 in order to get the resulting polynomial exactly divisible by 𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 −
3

8. What must be subtracted from the polynomial 𝑥 4 + 2𝑥 3 − 13𝑥 2 − 12𝑥 + 21, so that the
resulting polynomial is exactly divisible by 𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 3?
Sol:
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝑥 2 + 6𝑥 + 8
𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 3 𝑥 4 + 2𝑥 3 − 13𝑥 2 − 12𝑥 + 21
𝑥 4 − 4𝑥 3 + 3𝑥 2
6𝑥 3 − 16𝑥 2 − 12𝑥
6𝑥 3 − 24𝑥 2 − 18𝑥
8𝑥 2 − 30𝑥 + 21
8𝑥 2 − 32𝑥 + 21
2x – 2
We must subtract [2𝑥 − 2] + 10𝑚 the given polynomial so as to get the resulting
polynomial exactly divisible by 𝑥 2 − 𝑥 + 3

9. Find all the zeroes of the polynomial 𝑥 4 + 𝑥 3 − 34𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 120, if two of its zeroes are
2 and −2.
Sol:
⇒ 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 4 + 𝑥 3 − 34𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 120
⇒ x = −2 is a solution
x = −2 is a factor
x = −2 is a solution
x = +2 is a factor
here,
(𝑥 − 2)(𝑥 + 2)𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑓(𝑥)
𝑥 2 − 4 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟
𝑥 2 + 𝑥 − 30
𝑥 2 − 4 𝑥 4 + 𝑥 3 − 34𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 120
−𝑥 4 − 4𝑥 2
𝑥 3 − 30𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 120
𝑥3 − 4𝑥
2
−30𝑥 + 120
2
−30x + 120
0
Hence, 𝑥 + 𝑥 − 34𝑥 − 4𝑥 + 120 = (𝑥 2 − 4)(𝑥 2 + 𝑥 − 30)
4 3 2

𝑥 4 + 𝑥 3 − 34𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 120 = (𝑥 2 − 4)(𝑥 2 + 6𝑥 − 5𝑥 − 30)


𝑥 4 + 𝑥 3 − 34𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 120 = (𝑥 2 − 4)[(𝑥(𝑥 + 6) − 5(𝑥 + 6))]
𝑥 4 + 𝑥 3 − 34𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 120 = (𝑥 2 − 4)(𝑥 + 6)(𝑥 − 5)
Other zeroes are
x+6=0 ⇒x–5=0
x=−6 x=5
Set of zeroes for f(x) [2, −2, −6, 5]
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

10. Find all zeros of the polynomial 2x4 + 7x3 − 19x2 − 14x + 30, if two of its zeros are √2
and −√2.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 2𝑥 4 + 7𝑥 3 − 19𝑥 2 − 14𝑥 + 30
𝑥 = √2 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛
𝑥 − √2 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛
𝑥 − √2 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛
𝑥 + √2 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟
Here, (𝑥 + √2)(𝑥 − √2)𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑓(𝑥)
𝑥 2 − 2 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑓(𝑥)
2𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 − 15
𝑥 2 − 2 2𝑥 4 + 7𝑥 3 − 192 − 14𝑥 + 30
2𝑥 4 − 4𝑥 2
7𝑥 3 − 15𝑥 2 − 14𝑥
7𝑥 3 − −14𝑥
2
−15𝑥 + 30
2
−15𝑥 + 30
0
Hence, 2𝑥 + 7𝑥 − 19𝑥 − 14𝑥 + 30 = (𝑥 − 2)(2𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 − 15)
4 3 2 2

= (𝑥 2 − 2) (2𝑥 2 + 10𝑥 − 3𝑥 − 15)


= (𝑥 2 − 2)(2𝑥(𝑥 + 5) − 3(𝑥 + 5))
= (𝑥 2 − 2)(𝑥 + 5)(𝑥 − 3)
Other zeroes are:
x+5=0 2x – 3 = 0
x = −5 2x = 3
3
x=2
3
Hence the set of zeroes for 𝑓(𝑥) {−5, 2 , √2, −√2}

11. Find all the zeros of the polynomial 2x3 + x2 − 6x − 3, if two of its zeros are −√3 and √3.
Sol:
𝑓(𝑥) = 2𝑥 3 + 𝑥 2 − 6𝑥 − 3
x = −√3 is a solution
𝑥 + √3 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟
𝑥 = √3 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛
𝑥 − √3 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟
Here, (𝑥 + √3)(𝑥 − √3)𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑓(𝑥)
𝑥 2 − 3 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑓(𝑥)
Class X Chapter 2 – Polynomials Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2x + 1
𝑥 − 3 2𝑥 3 + 𝑥 2 − 6𝑥 − 3
2

2𝑥 3 − 6𝑥
2
𝑥 −3
2
𝑥 −3
0
Hence, 2𝑥 + 𝑥 − 6𝑥 − 3 = (𝑥 2 − 3)(2𝑥 + 1)
3 2

Other zeroes of f(x) is 2 × +1 = 0


1
𝑥 = −2
−1
𝑆𝑒𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠 {√3, −√3, }
2

12. Find all the zeros of the polynomial x3 + 3x2 − 2x − 6, if two of its zeros are −√2 and √2.
Sol:
Since −√2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 √2 are zeroes of polynomial 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 + 3𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 6
(𝑥 + √2)(𝑥 − √2) = 𝑥 2 − 2 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑓(𝑥)
Now we divide 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 3 + 3𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 6 by
𝑔(𝑥) = 𝑥 2 − 2 𝑡𝑜 𝑏 𝑓𝑖𝑛𝑑 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑜𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑟 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑒𝑠 𝑜𝑓 𝑓(𝑥)
𝑥+3
𝑥 − 2 𝑥 3 + 3𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 6
2

𝑥3 − 2𝑥
2
3𝑥 −6
2
3𝑥 −6
0
By division algorithm, we have
⇒ 𝑥 3 + 3𝑥 2 − 2 − 6 = (𝑥 2 − 2)(𝑥 + 3)
⇒ 𝑥 3 + 3𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 6 = (𝑥 + √2)(𝑥 − √2)(𝑥 + 3)
Here the zeroes of the given polynomials are −√2, √2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 − 3
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 3.1

1. Akhila went to a fair in her village. She wanted to enjoy rides on the Giant Wheel and play
Hoopla (a game in which you throw a rig on the items kept in the stall, and if the ring
covers any object completely you get it). The number of times she played Hoopla is half
the number of rides she had on the Giant Wheel. Each ride costs Rs 3, and a game of
Hoopla costs Rs 4. If she spent Rs 20 in the fair, represent this situation algebraically and
graphically.
Sol:
The pair of equations formed is:
1
y x
2
i.e., x  2 y  0 ……..(1)

3x  4 y  20 ………(2)
Let us represent these equations graphically. For this, we need at least two solutions for
each equation. We give these solutions in Table
x 0 2 x 0 2 4
x 20  3x
y 0 1 y 5 0 2
2 4

Recall from Class IX that there are infinitely many solutions of each linear equation. So
each of you choose any two values, which may not be the ones we have chosen. Can you
guess why we have chosen x  O in the first equation and in the second equation? When
one of the variables is zero, the equation reduces to a linear equation is one variable, which
can be solved easily. For instance, putting x  O in Equation (2), we get 4y = 20 i.e.,
20 20
y  5. Similarly, putting y  O in Equation (2), we get 3x  20 i.e., x  . But as is
3 3
not an integer, it will not be easy to plot exactly on the graph paper. So, we choose y = 2
which gives x = 4, an integral value.
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Plot the points A  O, O  , B  2,1 and P  O,5  , Q  412  , corresponding to the draw the lines
AB and PQ, representing the equations x  2 y  O and 3x  4 y  20, as shown in figure

In fig., observe that the two lines representing the two equations are intersecting at the
point (4,2),

2. Aftab tells his daughter, “Seven years ago, I was seven times as old as you were then. Also,
three years from now, I shall be three times as old as you will be.” Is not this interesting?
Represent this situation algebraically and graphically.
Sol:
Let the present age of Aftab and his daughter be x and y respectively. Seven years ago.
Age of Ahab  x  7
Age of his daughter y  7
According to the given condition.
 x  7  7  y  7
 x  7  7 y  49
 x  7 y  42
Three years hence
Age of Aftab  x  3
Age of his daughter  y  3
According to the given condition,
 x  3  3  y  3
 x  3  3y  9
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
 x  3y  6
Thus, the given condition can be algebraically represented as
x  7 y  42
x  3y  6
x  7 y  42  x  42  7 y
Three solution of this equation can be written in a table as follows:
x 7 0 7
y 5 6 7

x  3y  6  x  6  3y
Three solution of this equation can be written in a table as follows:
x 6 3 0
y 0 -1 -2
The graphical representation is as follows:

Concept insight In order to represent a given situation mathematically, first see what we
need to find out in the problem. Here. Aftab and his daughters present age needs to be
found so, so the ages will be represented by variables z and y. The problem talks about
their ages seven years ago and three years from now. Here, the words ’seven years ago’
means we have to subtract 7 from their present ages. and ‘three years from now’ or three
years hence means we have to add 3 to their present ages. Remember in order to represent
the algebraic equations graphically the solution set of equations must be taken as whole
numbers only for the accuracy. Graph of the two linear equations will be represented by a
straight line.

3. The path of a train A is given by the equation 3x + 4y − 12 = 0 and the path of another
train B is given by the equation 6x + 8y − 48 = 0. Represent this situation graphically.
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
The paths of two trains are giver by the following pair of linear equations.
3x  4 y  12  0 ... 1
6 x  8 y  48  0 ...  2 
In order to represent the above pair of linear equations graphically. We need two points on
the line representing each equation. That is, we find two solutions of each equation as given
below:
We have,
3x  4 y  12  0
Putting y  0, we get
3x  4  0  12  0
 3x  12
12
 x 4
3
Putting x  0, we get
3  0  4 y  12  0
 4 y  12
12
 y 3
4
Thus, two solution of equation 3x  4 y  12  0 are  0,3 and  4, 0 
We have,
6 x  8 y  48  0
Putting x  0, we get
6  0  8 y  48  0
 8 y  48
48
 y
8
 y6
Putting y  0, we get
6 x  8  0  48  0
 6 x  48
48
 x 8
6
Thus, two solution of equation 6 x  8 y  48  0 are  0, 6  and  8, 0 
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Clearly, two lines intersect at  1, 2 


Hence, x  1, y  2 is the solution of the given system of equations.

4. Gloria is walking along the path joining (− 2, 3) and (2, − 2), while Suresh is walking
along the path joining (0, 5) and (4, 0). Represent this situation graphically.
Sol:
It is given that Gloria is walking along the path Joining  2,3 and  2, 2  , while
Suresh is walking along the path joining  0,5 and  4, 0  .

We observe that the lines are parallel and they do not intersect anywhere.

𝑎 𝑏 𝑐
5. On comparing the ratios 𝑎1 , 𝑏1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐1 and and without drawing them, find out whether the
2 2 2
lines representing the following pairs of linear equations intersect at a point, are parallel or
coincide:
(i) 5x− 4y + 8 = 0 (ii) 9x + 3y + 12 = 0 (iii) 6x − 3y + 10 = 0
7x + 6y − 9 = 0 18x + 6y + 24 = 0 2x – y + 9 = 0
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
We have,
5x  4 y  8  0
7x  6 y  9  0
Here,
a1  5, b1  4, c1  8
a2  7, b2  6, c2  9
We have,
a1 5 b1 4 2 c 8 8
 ,   and 1  
a2 7 b2 6 3 c2 9 9
a1 b1
 
a2 b2
Two lines are intersecting with each other at a point.
We have,
9 x  3 y  12  0
18  6 y  24  0
Here,
a1  9, b1  3, c1  12
a2  18, b2  6, c2  24
Now,
a1 9 1
  ,
a2 18 2
b1 3 1
 
b2 6 2
c1 12 1
And  
c2 24 2
a1 b1 c1
  
a2 b2 c2
Both the lines coincide.
We have,
6 x  3 y  10  0
2x  y  9  0
Here,
a1  6, b1  3, c1  10
a2  2, b2  1, c2  9
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 6 3
  ,
a2 2 1
b1 3 3
  ,
b2 1 1
c1 10
And 
c2 9
a1 b1 c1
  
a2 b2 c2
 The lines are parallel

6. Given the linear equation 2x + 3y - 8 = 0, write another linear equation in two variables such
that the geometrical representation of the pair so formed is:
(i) intersecting lines (ii) parallel lines (iii) coincident lines.
Sol:
We have,
2x  3 y  8  0
Let another equation of line is:
4x  9 y  4  0
Here,
a1  2, b1  3, c1  8
a2  4, b2  9, c2  4

Now,
a1 2 1
  ,
a2 4 2
b1 3 1
  ,
b2 9 3
c1 8 2
And  
c2 4 1
a1 b1
 
a2 b2
 2 x  3 y  8  0 and 4 x  9 y  4  0 intersect each other at one point.
Hence, required equation of line is 4 x  9 y  4  0
We have,
2x  3 y  8  0
Let another equation of line is:
4x  6 y  4  0
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Here,
a1  2, b1  3, c1  8
a2  4, b2  6, c2  4
Now,
a1 2 1
  ,
a2 4 2
b1 3 1
  ,
b2 6 2
c1 8 2
And  
c2 4 1
a1 b1 c1
  
a2 b2 c2
Lines are parallel to each other.
Hence, required equation of line is 4 x  6 y  4  0.

7. The cost of 2kg of apples and 1 kg of grapes on a day was found to be Rs 160. After a
month, the cost of 4kg of apples and 2kg of grapes is Rs 300. Represent the situation
algebraically and geometrically.
Sol:
Let the cost of 1 kg of apples and 1 kg grapes be Rs x and Rs y.
The given conditions can be algebraically represented as:
2 x  y  160
4 x  2 y  300
2 x  y  160  y  160  2 x
Three solutions of this equation cab be written in a table as follows:
x 50 60 70
y 60 40 20
300  4 x
4 x  2 y  300  y 
2
Three solutions of this equation cab be written in a table as follows:
x 70 80 75
y 10 -10 0

The graphical representation is as follows:


Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Concept insight: cost of apples and grapes needs to be found so the cost of 1 kg apples and
1kg grapes will be taken as the variables from the given condition of collective cost of
apples and grapes, a pair of linear equations in two variables will be obtained. Then In
order to represent the obtained equations graphically, take the values of variables as whole
numbers only. Since these values are Large so take the suitable scale.

Exercise 3.2

Solve the following systems of equations graphically:

1. x  y  3
2 x  5 y  12
Sol:
We have
x y 3
2 x  5 y  12
Now,
x y 3
When y  0, we have
x3
When x  0, we have
y 3
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x  y  3
x 0 3
y 3 0
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2  5 y  12
12  2 x
y
5
When x  1, we have
12  11
y 2
5
When x  4, we have
12  1 4 
y 4
5
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  5 y  12
x 1 -4
y 2 4
Graph of the equation x  y  3 and 2 x  5 y  12 :

Clearly, two lines intersect at P 1, 2  .


Hence, x  1, y  2 is the solution of the given system of equations.

x  2y  5
2.
2 x  3 y  10
Sol:
We have
x  2y  5
2 x  3 y  10
Now,
x  2y  5
 x  5 2y
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
When y  0, we have
x  5  2 0  5
When y  2, we have
x  5  2   2   1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x  2 y  5
x 5 1
y 0 -2
Now,
2 x  3 y  10
 2 x  10  3 y
10  3 y
 x
2
When y  0, we have
10
x 5
2
When y  0, we have
10
x 5
2
When y  2, we have
10  3  2
x 2
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  3 y  10
x 5 2
y 0 2
Graph of the equation x  2 y  5 and 2 x  3 y  10 :
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Clearly, two lines intersect at (5,0).
Hence, x  5, y  0 is the solution of the given system of equations.

3x  y  1  0
3.
2x  3y  8  0
Sol:
We have,
3x  y  1  0
2x  3y  8  0
Now,
3x  y  1  0
 y  1  3x
When x  0, we have
y  1
When x  1, we have
y  1  3   1  2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 3x  y  1  0
x -1 0
y 2 -1
Now,
2x  3y  8  0
 2x  3y  8
3y  8
 x
2
When y  0, we have
3 0  8
x  4
2
When y  2, we have
3 2  8
x  1
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  3 y  8  0
x -4 -1
y 0 -2
Graph of the equation are:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Clearly, two lines intersect at  - 1, 2 .


Hence, x  1, y  2 is the solution of the given system of equations.

2x  y  3  0
4.
2x  3y  7  0
Sol:
We have
2x  y  3  0
2x  3y  7  0
Now,
2x  y  3  0
 y  3  2x
When x  0, we have
y 3
When x  1, we have
y 1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  y  3  0
x 0 1
y 3 1
Now,
2x  3y  7  0
 3y  2x  7
25  7
 y 1
3
When x  5, we have
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
25  7
y 1
3
When x  2, we have
2 2  7
y  1
3
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  3 y  7  0
x 2 5
y -1 1
Graph of the given equation are

Clearly, two lines intersect at  2, 1 .


Hence, x  2, y  1 is the solution of the given system of equations.

x y 6
5.
x y 2
Sol:
We have.
x y 6
x y 2
Now,
x y 6
 y  6 x
When x  2, we have
y4
When x  3, we have
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
y 3
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x  y  6
x 2 3
y 4 3
Now,
x y 2
 y  x2
When x  0, we have
y  2
When x  2, we have
y0
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x  y  6
x 0 2
y -2 0
Graph of the given equation are

Clearly, two lines intersect at (4,2).


Hence, x  4, y  2 is the solution of the given system of equations.

x  2y  6
6.
3x  6 y  0
Sol:
We have.
x  2y  6
3x  6 y  0
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now,
x  2y  6
 x  6  2y
When y  2, we have
x  6  2  2  2
When y  3, we have
x  6  2  3  0
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x  2 y  6
x 2 0
y -2 -3
Now,
3x  6 y  0
 3x  6 y
 x  2y
When y  0, we have
x0
When y  1, we have
x2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 3x  6 y  0
x 0 2
y 0 1
Graph of the given equation are

Clearly, two lines are parallel to each other. So, the two lines have no common point
Hence, the given system of equations has no solution.
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x y 4
7.
2x  3y  3
Sol:
We have.
x y 4
2x  3y  3
Now,
x y 4
 x  4 y
When y  0, we have
x4
When y  2, we have
x2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x  y  4
x 4 2
y 0 2
Now,
2x  3y  3
 2x  3y  3
3y  3
 x
2
When y  1, we have
x3
When y  1, we have
x0
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  3 y  3
x 3 0
y 1 -1

Graph of the given equation are


Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Clearly, two lines intersect at (3, 1).


Hence, x  3, y  1 is the solution of the given system of equations.

2x  3y  4
8.
x y3 0
Sol:
We have.
2x  3y  4
x y3 0
Now,
2x  3y  4
 2x  4  3y
4  3y
 x
2
When y  0, we have
4  3 2
x  1
2
When y  2, we have
4  3 2
x  1
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  3 y  4
x -1 2
y 2 0
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now,
x y3 0
 x  y 3
When y  3, we have
x0
When y  4, we have
x 1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x  y  3  0
x 0 1
y 3 4
Graph of the given equation are

Clearly, two lines intersect at  12


, .
Hence, x  1, y  2 is the solution of the given system of equations.

2 x  3 y  13  0
9.
3x  2 y  12  0
Sol:
We have,
2 x  3 y  13  0
3x  2 y  12  0
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2 x  3 y  13  0
 2 x  3 y  13
3 y  13
 x
2
When y  1, we have
3 1  13
x  5
2
When y  3, we have
3  3  13
x  2
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  3 y  13  0
x -5 -2
y 1 3
Now,
3x  2 y  12  0
 3x  2 y  12
2 y  12
 x
3
When y  0, we have
2  0  12
x  14
3
When y  3, we have
2  3  12
x  2
3
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 3 y  2 y  12  0
x -4 -2
y 0 3

Graph of the given equations are:


Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Clearly, two lines intersect at (-2, 3)


Hence, x  2, y  3 is the solution of the given system of equations.

2x  3 y  5  0
10.
3x  2 y  12  0
Sol:
We have,
2x  3 y  5  0
3x  2 y  12  0
Now,
2x  3y  5  0
 2 x  3 y  5
3 y  5
 x
2
When y  1, we have
3 1  5
x  4
2
When y  1, we have
3   1  5
x  1
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  3 y  5  0
x -4 -1
y 1 -1
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now,
3x  2 y  12  0
 3x  2 y  12
2 y  12
 x
3
When y  0, we have
2  0  12
x 4
3
When y  3, we have
2  3  12
x 6
3
Thus we have the following table giving points on the line 3x  2 y  12  0
x 4 6
y 0 3
Graph of the given equations are:

Clearly, two lines intersect at  2, 3 .


Hence, x  2, y  3 is the solution of the given system of equations.

Show graphically that each one of the following systems of equations has infinitely many
solutions:

2x  3 y  6
11.
4 x  6 y  12
Sol:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
We have,
2x  3 y  6
4 x  6 y  12
Now,
2x  3y  6
 2x  6  3y
6  3y
 x
2
When y  0, we have
x3
When y  2, we have
6  3 2
x 0
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  3 y  6
x 0 3
y 2 0
Now,
4 x  6 y  12
 4 x  12  6 y
12  6 y
 x
4
When y  0, we have
x3
When y  2, we have
12  6  2
x 0
3
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 4 x  6 y  12
x 0 3
y 2 0
Graph of the given equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Thus, the graphs of the two equations are coincident.


Hence, the system of equations has infinitely many solutions.

x  2y  5
12.
3x  6 y  15
Sol:
We have,
x  2y  5
3x  6 y  15
Now,
x  2y  5
 x  2y  5
When y  1, we have
x  2  1  5  3
When y  0, we have
x  2 0  5  5
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x  2 y  5
x 3 5
y 1 0
Now,
3x  6 y  15
 3x  15  6 y
15  6 y
 x
3
When y  2, we have
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
15  6  2 
x 1
3
When y  3, we have
15  6  3
x  1
3
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 3x  6 y  15
x 1 -1
y -2 -3
Graph of the given equations:

3x  y  8
13.
6 x  2 y  16
Sol:
We have,
3x  y  8
6 x  2 y  16
Now,
3x  y  8
 y  8  3x
When x  2, we have
y  8, 3  2  2
When x  3, we have
y  8, 3  3  1
Thus we have the following table giving points on the line 3x  y  8
x 2 3
y 2 -1
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now,
6 x  2 y  16
 2 y  16  6 x
16  6 x
 y
2
When x  1, we have
16  6 1
y 5
2
When x  3, we have
16  6  3
y  1
2
Thus we have the following table giving points on the line 6 x  2 y  16
x 1 3
y 5 -1
Graph of the given equations:

Thus, the graphs of the two equations are coincident.


Hence, the system of equations has infinitely many solutions,

x  2 y  11  0
14.
3x  6 y  33  0
Sol:
We have,
x  2 y  11  0
3x  6 y  33  0
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x  2 y  11  0
 x  2 y  11
When y  5, we have
x  2  5  11  1
When x  4, we have
x  2  4 11  3
Thus we have the following table giving points on the line x  2 y  11  0
x -1 -3
y 5 4
Now,
3x  6 y  33  0
 3x  6 y  33
6 y  33
 x 1
3
When y  6, we have
6  6  33
x  1
3
When y  5, we have
6  5  33
x  1
2
Thus we have the following table giving points on the line 3x  6 y  33  0
x 1 -1
y 6 5
Graph of the given equations:

Thus, the graphs of the two equations are coincident,


Hence, the system of equations has infinitely many solutions,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Show graphically that each one of the following systems of equations is in-consistent (i.e.,
has no solution)

3x  5 y  20
15.
6 x  10 y  40
Sol:
We have,
3x  5 y  20
6 x  10 y  40
Now
 3x  5 y  20
5 y  20
 x
3
When y  1, we have
5  1  20
x 5
3
When y  4, we have
5  4   20
x 0
3
Thus we have the following table giving points on the line 3x  5 y  20
x 5 0
y -1 -4
Now
6 x  10 y  40
 6 x  40  10 y
40  10 y
 x
6
When y  4, we have
40  10  4
x 0
6
When y  1, we have
40  10 1
x  5
6
Thus we have the following table giving points on the line 6 x  10 y  40
x 0 -5
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
y 4 1
Graph of the given equations:

Clearly, there is no common point between these two lines


Hence, given system of equations is in-consistent.

x  2y  6
16.
3x  6 y  0
Sol:
We have
x  2y  6
3x  6 y  0
Now,
x  2y  6
 x  6  2y
When y  0, we have
x  6  2 0  6
When y  2, we have
x  6  2   2   2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x  2 y  6
x 6 2
y 0 -2
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3x  6 y  0
 3x  6 y
6y
 x
3
 x  2y
When y  0, we have
x  2 0  0
When y  1, we have
x  2 1  2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 3x  6 y  0
x 0 2
y 0 1
Graph of the given equations:

We find the lines represented by equations x  2 y  6 and 3x  6 y  0 are parallel. So, the
two lines have no common point.
Hence, the given system of equations is in-consistent.

2y  x  9
17.
6 y  3x  21
Sol:
We have
2y  x  9
6 y  3x  21
Now,
2y  x  9
 2y 9  x
 x  2y 9
When y  3, we have
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x  2  3  9  3
When y  4, we have
x  2  4  9  1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  x  9
x -3 -1
y 3 4
Now,
6 y  3 x  21
 6 y  21  3 x
 3x  6 y  21
3 2 y  7
 x
3
 x  2y  7
When y  2, we have
x  2  2  7  3
When y  3, we have
x  2  3  7  1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 6 y  3x  21.
x -3 -1
y 2 3
Graph of the given equations:

We find the lines represented by equations 2 y  x  9 and 6 y  3x  21 are parallel. So, the
two lines have no common point.
Hence, the given system of equations is in-consistent.
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3x  4 y  1  0
18. 8
2x  y  5  0
3
Sol:
We have
3x  4 y  1  0
8
2x  y  5  0
3
Now,
3x  4 y  1  0
 3x  1  4 y
1 4 y
 x
3
When y  2, we have
1 4 2
x 3
3
When y  1, we have
1  4   1
x  1
3
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 3x  4 y  1  0.
x -1 3
y -1 2
Now,
8
2x  y  5  0
3
6 x  8 y  15
 0
3
 6 x  8 y  15  0
 6 x  8 y  15
8 y  15
 x
6
When y  0, we have
8  0  15
x  2.5
6
When y  3, we have
8  3  15
x  1.5
6
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
8
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  y  5  0.
3
x -2.5 1.5
y 0 3
Graph of the given equations:

8
We find the lines represented by equations 3x  4 y  1  0 and 2 x  y  5  0 are
3
parallel. So, the two lines have no common point.
Hence, the given system of equations is in-consistent.

19. Determine graphically the vertices of the triangle, the equations of whose sides are given
below:
2y  x  8
5 y  x  14
(i) y  2x  1
yx
y0
(ii) 3x  3 y  10

Sol:
We have
2y  x  8
5 y  x  14
y  2x  1
Now,
2y  x  8
 2y  8  x
 x  2y 8
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
When y  2, we have
x  2  2  8  4
When y  4, we have
x  2 4  8  0
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 y  x  8.
x -4 0
y 2 4
Now,
5 y  x  14
 5 y  14  x
 x  5 y  14
When y  2, we have
x  5  2  14  1
When y  3, we have
x  5  3  14  1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 5 y  x  14.
x -4 1
y 2 3
We have
y  2x  1
 y 1  2x
y 1
 x
2
When y  3, we have
3 1
x 1
2
When y  1, we have
1  1
x 1
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line y  2 x  1.
x -1 1
y 1 3
Graph of the given equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

From the graph of the lines represented by the given equations, we observe that the lines
taken in pairs intersect each other at points A  4, 2  , B 1,3 and C  2,5 
Hence, the vertices of the triangle are A  4, 2  , B 1,3 and C  2,5  .
The given system of equations is
yx
y0
3x  3 y  10
We have,
yx
When x  1, we have
y 1
When x  2, we have
y  2
Thus, we have the following table points on the line y  x
x 1 -2
y 7/3 4/3
Graph of the given equation:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

From the graph of the lines represented by the given equations, we observe that the lines
 10  5 5
taken in pairs intersect each other at points A  0, 0  , B  , 0  and C  , 
 3  3 3
 10  5 5
Hence, the required vertices of the triangle are A  0, 0  , B  , 0  and C  ,  .
0  3 3

20. Determine, graphically whether the system of equations x − 2y = 2, 4x − 2y = 5 is


consistent or in-consistent.
Sol:
We have
x  2y  2
4x  2 y  5
Now
x  2y  2
 x  2  2y
When y  0, we have
x  2  2 0  2
When y  1, we have
x  2  2   1  0
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x  2 y  2
x 2 0
y 0 -1
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
4x  2 y  5
 4x  5  2 y
5 2y
 x
4
When y  0, we have
5  2 0 5
x 
4 4
When y  1, we have
5  2 1 7
x 
4 4
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 4 x  2 y  5
x 5/4 7/4
y 0 1
Graph of the given equations:

Clearly, the two lines intersect at (i!).


Hence, the system of equations is consistent.

21. Determine, by drawing graphs, whether the following system of linear equations has a
unique solution or not:
(i) 2x − 3y = 6, x + y = l (ii) 2y = 4x − 6, 2x = y + 3
Sol:
We have
2x  3y  6
x  y 1
Now
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2x  3y  6
 2x  6  3y
When y  0, we have
6  3y
x
2
When y  2, we have
6  3   2 
x 0
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  3 y  6
x 3 0
y 0 -2
Now,
x  y 1
 x  1 y
When y  1, we have
x  1 1  0
When y  0, we have
x  1 0  1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x  y  1
x 0 1
y 1 0
Graph of the given equations:

We have,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2 y  4x  6
2x  y  3
Now,
2 y  4x  6
 2 y  6  4x
 4x  2 y  6
2y  6
 x
4

When y  1, we have


2   1  6
x 1
4
When y  5, we have
25  6
x 4
4
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 y  4 x  6

x 1 4
y -1 5
Now,
2x  y  3
y3
 x
2
When y  1, we have
1 3
x 2
2
When y  3, we have
33
x 3
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  y  3
x 2 3
y 1 3
Graph of the given equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

We find the graphs of the two equations are coincident,


Hence, the system of equations has infinity many solutions

22. Solve graphically each of the following systems of linear equations. Also find the
coordinates of the points where the lines meet axis of y.
2x  5 y  4  0
(i)
2x  y  8  0
3x  2 y  12
(ii)
5x  2 y  4
2 x  y  11  0
(iii)
x  y 1  0
(iv) 𝑥 + 2𝑦 − 7 = 0
2𝑥 − 𝑦 − 4 = 0
3x  y  5  0
(v)
2x  y  5  0
2x  y  5  0
(vi)
x  y 3  0
Sol:
We have
2x  5 y  4  0
2x  y  8  0
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now,
2x  5 y  4  0
 2x  5 y  4
5y  4
 x
2
When y  2, we have
5 2  4
x 3
2
When y  4, we have
5 4  4
x 8
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  5 y  4  0
x 3 8
y 2 4
Now,
2x  y  8  0
 2x  8  y
8 y
 x
2
When y  4, we have
84
x 2
2
When y  2, we have
82
x 3
2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  5 y  4  0
x 3 8
y 2 4
Graph of the given equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Clearly, two intersect at P  3, 2  .


Hence, x  2, y  3 is the solution of the given system of equations.
We also observe that the lines represented by 2 X  5 y  4  0 and 2x  y  8  0 meet y-
 4
axis at A  0,  and B  0,8  respectively.
 5
We have,
3x  2 y  12
5x  2 y  4
Now,
3x  2 y  12
 3x  12  2 y
12  2 y
 x
3
When y  3, we have
12  2  3
x 2
3
When y  3, we have
12  2   3
x 6
3
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 3x  2 y  12
x 2 6
y 3 -3
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5x  2 y  4
 5x  4  2 y
4  2y
 x
5
When y  3, we have
4  23
x 2
5
When y  7, we have
4  2   7 
x  2
5
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 5 x  2 y  4
x 2 -2
y 3 -7
Graph of the given equation

Clearly, two intersect at p  2,3 .


Hence, x  2, y  3 is the solution of the given system of equations.

We also observe that the lines represented by 3x  2 y  12 and 5 x  2 y  4 meet y-axis at


A  0, 6  and B  0, 2  respectively.
We have,
2 x  y  11  0
x  y 1  0

Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2 x  y  11  0
 y  11  2 x
When x  4, we have
y  11  2  4  3
When x  5, we have
y  11  2  5  1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  y  11  0
x 4 5
y 3 1
Now,
x  y 1  0
 x 1  y
 y  x 1
When x  2, we have
y  2 1  1
When x  3, we have
y  3 1  2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x  y  1  0
x 2 3
y 1 2
Graph of the given equation
We have,
2 x  y  11  0
x  y 1  0
Now,
2 x  y  11  0
 y  11  2 x
When x  4, we have
y  11  2  4  3
When x  5, we have
y  11  2  5  1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  y  11  0
x 4 5
y 3 1
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x  y 1  0
 x 1  y
 y  x 1
When x  2, we have
y  2 1  1
When x  3, we have
y  3 1  2
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x  y  1  0
x 2 3
y 1 2
Graph of the given equations:

Clearly, two intersect at P  4,3 .


Hence, x  4, y  3 is the solution of the given system of equations.
We also observe that the lines represented by 2 x  y  11  0 and x  y  1  0 meet y-axis
at, A  0,11 and B  0, 1 respectively.
We have, x  2 y  7  0
Now,
2x  y  4  0
x  2y  7  0
x  7  2y
y  1, x  5
When
y  2, x  3
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

x 5 3
y 1 2
2x  y  4  0
Also,
y  2x  4
x 2 0
y 0 -4

From the graph, the solution is A  3, 2  .


Also, the coordinates of the points where the lines meet the y-axis are
B  0,3.5  and C  0, 4  .
We have
3x  y  5  0
2x  y  5  0
Now,
3x  y  5  0
 y  5  3x
When x  1, we have
y  5, 3 1  2
When x  2, we have
y  5, 3  2  1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 3x  y  5  0
x 1 2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
y 2 -1
Now,
2x  y  5  0
 2x  5  y
 y  2x  5
When x  0, we have
y  5
When x  2, we have
y  2  2  5  1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  y  5  0
x 0 2
y -5 -1
Graph of the given equations:

Clearly, two intersect at P  2, 1 .


Hence, x  2, y  1 is the solution of the given system of equations.
We also observe that the lines represented by 3x  y  5  0 and 2 x  y  5  0 meet y-axis
at A  0,5  and 8  0, 5  respectively.
We have,
2x  y  5  0
x  y 3  0
Now,
2x  y  5  0
 2x  5  y
 y  2x  5
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
When x  1, we have
y  2 1  5  3
When x  2, we have
y  2  2  5  1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line 2 x  y  5  0
x 1 2
y -3 -1
Now,
x y 3  0
 x 3  y
 y  x3
When x  3, we have
y  33  0
When x  4, we have
y  4 3 1
Thus, we have the following table giving points on the line x  y  3  0
x 3 4
y 0 1
Graph of the given equations:

Clearly, two intersect at P  2, 1 .


Hence, x  2, y  1 is the solution of the given system of equations?
We also observe that the lines represented by 2 x  y  5  0 and x  y  3  0 meet y-axis
at A  0, 5  and 8  0, 3 respectively.
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
23. Determine graphically the coordinates of the vertices of a triangle, the equations of whose
sides are:
yx
(i) y  2x
yx6
yx
(ii) 3y  x
x y 8
Sol:
The system of the given equations is,
yx
y  2x
yx6
Now,
yx
When x  0, we have
y0
When x  1, we have
y  1
Thus, we have the following table:
x 0 -1
y 0 -2
We have
y  2x
When x  0, we have
y  2 0  0
When x  1, we have
y  2  1  2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 0 -1
y 0 -2
We have
yx6
 y  6 x
When x  2, we have
y  62  4
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
When x  4, we have
y  64  2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 2 4
y 4 2
Graph of the given system of equations:

From the graph of the three equations, we find that the three lines taken in pairs intersect
each other at points A  0, 0  , B  2, 4  and C  3,3 .
Hence, the vertices of the required triangle are  0, 0  ,  2, 4  and  3,3 .
The system of the given equations is,
yx
3y  x
x y 8
Now,
yx
 x y
When y  0, we have
x0
When y  3, we have
x  3
Thus, we have the following table.
x 0 -3
y 0 -3
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

We have
3y  x
 x  3y
When y  0, we have
x  3 0  0
When y  1, we have
y  3   1  3
Thus, we have the following table:
x 0 -3
y 0 -1
We have
x y 8
 x  8 y
When y  4, we have
x  84  4
When y  5, we have
x  85  3
Thus, we have the following table:
x 4 5
y 4 3
Graph of the given system of equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
From the graph of the three equations, we find that the three lines taken in pairs intersect
each other at points A  0, 0  , B  4, 4  and C  6, 2  .
Hence, the vertices of the required triangle are  0, 0  ,  44  and  6, 2  .

24. Solve the following system of linear equations graphically and shade the region between
the two lines and x-axis:
2 x  3 y  12
(i)
x  y 1
3x  2 y  4  0
(ii)
2x  3y  7  0
3x  2 y  11  0
(iii)
2 x  3 y  10  0
Sol:
The system of given equations is
2 x  3 y  12
x  y 1
Now,
2 x  3 y  12
 2 x  12  3 y
12  3  2
 x 3
2
When y  2, we have
12  3  2
x 3
2
When y  4, we have
12  3  4
x 0
2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 0 3
y 4 2
We have,
x  y 1
 x  1 y
When y  0, we have
x 1
When y  1, we have
x  11  2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Thus, we have the following table:
x 1 2
y 0 1
Graph of the given system of equations:

Clearly, the two lines intersect at P  3, 2  .


Hence, x  3, y  2 is the solution of the given system of equations. The system of the
given equations is,
3x  2 y  4  0
2x  3y  7  0
Now,
3x  2 y  4  0
 3x  4  2 y
4  2y
 x
3
When y  5, we have
4  25
x  2
3
When y  8, we have
4  28
x  4
3
Thus, we have the following table:
x -2 -4
y 5 8
We have,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2x  3y  7  0
 2x  3y  7
3y  7
 x
2
When y  1, we have
3 1  7
x 5
2
When y  1, we have
3   1  7
x 2
2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 5 2
y 1 -1
Graph of the given system of equations:

Clearly, the two lines intersect at P  2, 1 .


Hence, x  2, y  1 is the solution of the given system of equations.
The system of the given equations is,
3x  2 y  11  0
2 x  3 y  10  0
Now,
3x  2 y  11  0
 3x  11  2 y
11  2 y
 x
3
When y  1, we have
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
11  2 1
x 3
3
When y  4, we have
11  2  4
x 1
3
Thus, we have the following table:
x 3 1
y 1 4
We have,
2 x  3 y  10  0
 2 x  3 y  10
3 y  10
 x
2
When y  0, we have
3  0  10
x  5
2
When y  2, we have
3  2  10
x  2
2
Thus, we have the following table:
x -5 -2
y 0 2
Graph of the given system of equations:

Clearly, the two lines intersect at P 1, 4  .


Hence, x  1, y  4 is the solution of the given system of equations
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

25. Draw the graphs of the following equations on the same graph paper:
2 x  3 y  12
x  y 1
Sol:
The system of the given equations is
2 x  3 y  12
x  y 1
Now,
2 x  3 y  12
 2 x  12  3 y
12  3 y
 x
2
When y  0, we have
12  3  0
x 6
2
When y  2, we have
12  3  2
x 3
2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 6 3
y 0 2
We have
x  y 1
 x  1 y
When y  0, we have
x 1
When y  1, we have
x  1 1  0
Thus, we have the following table:
x 1 0
y 0 -1
Graph of the given system of equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Clearly, the two lines intersect at A  3, 2  .


We also observe that the lines represented by the equations 2 x  3 y  12 and x  y  1
meet y-axis at B  0, 1 and C  0, 4  .
Hence, the vertices of the required triangle are A  3, 2  , B  0, 1 and C  0, 4  .

26. Draw the graphs of x − y + 1 = 0 and 3x + 2y − 12 = 0. Determine the coordinates of the


vertices of the triangle formed by these lines and x- axis and shade the triangular area.
Calculate the area bounded by these lines and x-axis.
Sol:
The given system of equations is
x  y 1  0
3x  2 y  12  0
Now,
x  y 1  0
 x  y 1
When y  3, we have
x  3 1  2
When y  1, we have
x  1  1  2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 2 -2
y 3 -1
We have
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3x  2 y  12  0
 3x  12  2 y
12  2 y
 x
3
When y  6, we have
12  2  6
x 0
3
When y  3, we have
12  2  3
x 2
3
Thus, we have the following table:
x 0 2
y 6 3
Graph of the given system of equations:

Clearly, the two lines intersect at A  2,3 .


We also observe that the lines represented by the equations
x  y  1  0 and 3x  2 y  12  0 meet x-axis at B  1, 0  and C  4, 0  respectively.
Thus, x  2, y  3 is the solution of the given system of equations.
Draw AD perpendicular from A on x-axis.
Clearly, we have
AD  y  coordinate of point A  2,3
 AD  3 and, BC  4   1  4  1  5
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
27. Solve graphically the system of linear equations:
4x  3y  4  0
4 x  3 y  20  0
Find the area bounded by these lines and x-axis.
Sol:
The given system of equation is
4x  3y  4  0
4 x  3 y  20  0
Now,
4x  3y  4  0
 4x  3y  4
3y  4
 x
4
When y  0, we have
3 0  4
x  1
4
When y  4, we have
3 4  4
x 2
4

Thus, we have the following table:


x 2 -1
y 4 0
We have
4 x  3 y  20  0
 4 x  20  3 y
20  3 y
 x
4
When y  0, we have
20  3  0
x 5
4
When y  4, we have
20  3  4
x 2
4
Thus, we have the following table:
x 5 2
y 0 4
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Graph of the given system of equation:

Clearly, the two lines intersect at A  2, 4  . Hence x  2, y  4 is the solution of the given
system of equations.
We also observe that the lines represented by the equations
4 x  3 y  4  0 and 4 x  3 y  20  0 meet x-axis at B  1, 0  and C  5, 0  respectively.
Thus, x  2, y  4 is the solution of the given system of equations.
Draw AD perpendicular from A on x-axis.
Clearly, we have
AD  y  coordinate of point A  2, 4 
 AD  4 and, BC  5   1  5  1  6
Area of the shaded region = Area of ABC
1
 Area of the shaded region   Base  Height 
2
1
   BC  AD 
2
1
  6 4
2
 6 2
 12 sq. units
Area of shaded region  12 sq. units
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
28. Solve the following system of linear equations graphically:
3x  y  11  0
x  y 1  0
Shade the region bounded by these lines and y -axis. Also, find the area of the region
bounded by these lines and y-axis.
Sol:
The given system of equation is
3x  y  11  0
x  y 1  0
Now,
3x  y  11  0
 y  11  3x
When x  0, we have
y  11  3  0  11
When x  3 we have
y  11  3  3  2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 0 3
y 11 2
We have
x  y 1  0
 x 1  y
 y  x 1
When x  0, we have
y  0  1  1
When x  3, we have
y  3 1  2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 0 3
y -1 2
Graph of the given system of equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Clearly, the two lines intersect at A  3, 2 . Hence x  3, y  2 is the solution of the given
system of equations.
We so observe that the lines represented by the equations 3x  y  11  0 and x  y  1  0
meet y-axis at B  0,11 and C  0, 1 respectively.
Thus, x  3, y  2 is the solution of the given system of equations.
Draw AD perpendicular from A on y-axis.
Clearly, we have
AD  x  coordinate of point A  3, 2 
 AD  3 and, BC  11   1  11  1  12
Area of the shaded region = Area of ABC
1
 Area of the shaded region   Base  Height 
2
1
   BC  AD 
2
1
 12  3
2
 63
 18 sq. units
Area of the shaded region  18 sq. units

29. Solve graphically each of the following systems of linear equations. Also, find the
coordinates of the points where the lines meet the axis of x in each system:
2x  y  2
(i)
4x  y  8
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2x  y  2
(ii)
4x  y  8
x  2y  5
(iii)
2 x  3 y  4
2x  3 y  8
(iv)
x  2 y  3
Sol:
The given system of equation is
2x  y  2
4x  y  8

Now,
2x  y  2
 2x  y  2
y2
 x
2
When y  0, we have
02
x 1
2
When y  2, we have
22
x 2
2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 1 2
y 0 2
We have,
4x  y  8
 4x  y  8
y 8
 x
4
When y  0, we have
08
x 2
4
When y  4 we have
4  8
x 1
4
Thus, we have the following table:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

x 2 1
y 0 -4
Graph of the given system of equations:

Clearly, the two lines intersect at A  2, 2  . Hence x  2, y  2 is the solution of the given
system of equations.
We so observe that the lines represented by the equations 2 x  y  6 and x  2 y  2 meet
x-axis at B  3, 0  and C  2, 0  respectively.

The system of the given equations is


2x  y  6
x  2 y  2
Now,
2x  y  6
6 y
 x
2
When y  0, we have
60
x 3
2
When y  2, we have
62
x 2
2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 3 2
y 0 2
We have,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x  2 y  2
 y  2y  2
When y  0, we have
x  2  0  2  2
When y  1, we have
x  2 1  2  0
Thus, we have the following table:
x -2 0
y 0 1
Graph of the given system of equations:

Clearly the two lines intersect at A  3, 4  . Hence x  3, y  4 is the solution of the given
system of equations.
We so observe that the lines represented by the equations 2 x  y  2 and 4 x  y  8 meet
x-axis at B 1, 0  and C  2, 0  respectively

The system of the given equations is


x  2y  5
2 x  3 y  4
Now,
x  2y  5
 x  5 2y
When y  2, we have
x  5  2 2  1
When y  3, we have
x  5  2  3  1
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Thus, we have the following table:
x 1 -1
y 2 3

We have,
2 x  3 y  4
 2x  3y  4
3y  4
 x
2
When y  0, we have
3 0  4
x  2
2
When y  2, we have
3 2  4
x 1
2
Thus, we have the following table:
x -2 1
y 0 2
Graph of the given system of equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

The given system of equation is


2x  3 y  8
x  2 y  3
Now,
2x  3y  8
 2x  8  3y
8  3y
 x
2
When y  2, we have
8  3 4
x 1
2
When y  4, we have
8  3 4
x  2
2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 1 -2
y 2 4
We have,
x  2 y  3
 x  2y 3
When y  0, we have
x  2  0  3  3
When y  1, we have
x  2 1  3  1
Thus, we have the following table:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

x -3 -1
y 0 1
Graph of the given system of equations:

Clearly, the two lines intersect at A 1, 2  . Hence x  1, y  2 is the solution of the given
system of equations.
We also observe that the lines represented by the equations 2 x  3 y  8 and x  2 y  3
meet x-axis at B  4, 0  and C  3, 0  respectively.

30. Draw the graphs of the following equations:


2x  3y  6  0
2 x  3 y  18  0
y2 0
Find the vertices of the triangle so obtained. Also, find the area of the triangle.
Sol:
The given system of equation is
2x  3y  6  0
2 x  3 y  18  0
y2 0
Now,
2x  3y  6  0
 2x  3y  6
3y  6
 x
2
When y  0, we have
3 0  6
x  3
2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
When y  2, we have
3 2  6
x 0
2
Thus, we have the following table:
x -3 0
y 0 2

We have,
2 x  3 y  18  0
 2 x  18  3 y
18  3 y
 x
2
When y  2, we have
18  3  2
x 6
2
When y  6, we have
18  3  6
x 0
2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 6 0
y 2 6
We have
y20
 y  2
Graph of the given system of equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

From the graph of the three equations, we find that the three lines taken in pairs intersect
each other at points A  3, 4  , B  0, 2  and C  6, 2  .
Hence, the vertices of the required triangle are  3, 4  ,  0, 2  and  6, 2  .
From graph, we have
AD  4  2  2
BC  6  0  6
1
Area of ABC   Base  Height 
2
1
  BC  AD
2
1
  6 2
2
 6 sq. units
Area of ABC  6 sq.units

31. Solve the following system of equations graphically:


2x  3y  6  0
2 x  3 y  18  0
Also, find the area of the region bounded by these two lines and y-axis.
Sol:
The given system of equation is
2x  3y  6  0
2 x  3 y  18  0
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2x  3y  6  0
 2x  6  3y
 3y  2x  6
2x  6
 y
3
When x  0, we have
20  6
y 2
3
When x  3, we have
2   3  6
y 0
3
Thus, we have the following table:
x 0 -3
y 2 6
Graph of the given system of equations:

Clearly, the two lines intersect at A  3, 4  . Hence, x  3, y  4 is the solution of the given
system of equations.
We also observe that the lines represented by the equations
2 x  3 y  6  0 and 2 x  3 y  18  0 meet y-axis at B  0, 2  and C  0, 6  respectively.
Thus, x  3, y  4 is the solution of the given system of equations.
Draw AD perpendicular from A on y-axis.
Clearly, we have,
AD  x  coordinate of point A  3, 4 
 AD  3 and, BC  6  2  4
Area of the shaded region = Area of ABC
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
Area of the shaded region   Base  Height 
2
1
  BC  AD 
2
1
  43
2
 23
 6 sq. units
Area of the region bounded by these two lines and y-axis is 6 sq. units.

32. Solve the following system of linear equations graphically:


4 x  5 y  20  0
3x  5 y  15  0
Determine the vertices of the triangle formed by the lines representing the above equation
and the y-axis.
Sol:
The given system of equation is
4 x  5 y  20  0
3x  5 y  15  0
Now,
4 x  5 y  20  0
 4 x  5 y  20
5 y  20
 x 5
4
When y  0, we have
5  0  20
x 5
4
When y  4, we have
5   4   20
x 0
4
Thus, we have the following table:
x 5 0
y 0 -4
We have,
3x  5 y  15  0
 3x  15  5 y
15  5 y
 x
3
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
When y  0, we have
15  5  3
x 0
3
When y  3, we have
15  5  3
x 0
3
Thus, we have the following table:
x 5 0
y 0 3
Graph of the given system of equations:

Clearly, the two lines intersect at 4 5, 0  . Hence, x  5, y  0 is the solution of the given
system of equations.
We also find that the two lines represented by the equations
4 x  5 y  20  0 and 3x  5 y  15  0 meet y-axis at B  0, 4  and C  0,3 respectively,
The vertices of the required triangle are  5, 0  ,  0, 4  and  0,3 .

33. Draw the graphs of the equations 5x − y = 5 and 3x − y = 3. Determine the co-ordinates of
the vertices of the triangle formed by these lines and y-axis. Calculate the area of the
triangle so formed.
Sol:
5x  y  5  y  5x  5
Three solutions of this equation can be written in a table as follows:
x 0 1 2
y -5 0 5
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3x  y  3  y  3x  3
x 0 1 2
y -3 0 3
The graphical representation of the two lines will be as follows:

It can be observed that the required triangle is ABC.


The coordinates of its vertices are A 1, 0  , B  0,  3 , C  0, 5  .
Concept insight: In order to find the coordinates of the vertices of the triangle so formed.
Find the points where the two lines intersects the y-axis and also where the two lines
intersect each other. Here, note that the coordinates of the intersection of lines with y-axis
is taken and not with x-axis, this is became the question says to find the triangle formed by
the two lines and the y-axis.

34. Form the pair of linear equations in the following problems, and find their solution
graphically:
(i) 10 students of class X took part in Mathematics quiz. If the number of girls is 4 more
than the number of boys, find the number of boys and girls who took part in the quiz.
(ii) 5 pencils and 7 pens together cost Rs 50, whereas 7 pencils and 5 pens together cost Rs
46. Find the cost of one pencil and a pen.
(iii)Champa went to a ‘sale’ to purchase some pants and skirts. When her friends asked her
how many of each she had bought, she answered, “The number of skirts is two less than
twice the number of pants purchased. Also, the number of skirts is four less than four
times the number of pants purchased.” Help her friends to find how many pants and
skirts Champa bought.
Sol:
(i) Let the number of girls and boys in the class be x and y respectively.
According to the given conditions, we have:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x  y  10
x y 4
x  y  10  x  10  y
Three solutions of this equation can be written in a table as follows:
x 4 5 6
y 6 5 4

x y  4 x  4 y
Three solutions of this equation can be written in a table as follows:
x 5 4 3
y 1 0 -1

The graphical representation is as follows:

From the graph, it can be observed that the two lines intersect each other at the point  7, 3 .
So. x  7 and y  3.
Thus, the number of girls and boys in the class are 7 and 3 respectively.
(ii) Let the cost of one pencil and one pen be Rs x and Rs y respectively.
According to the given conditions, we have:
5 x  7 y  50
7 x  5 y  46
50  7 y
5 x  7 y  50  x 
5
Three solutions of this equation can be written in a table as follows:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

x 3 10 -4
y 5 0 10

46  5 y
7 x  5 y  46  x 
7
Three solutions of this equation can be written in a table as follows:
x 8 3 -2
y -2 5 12

The graphical representation is as follows:

From the graph. It can be observed that the two lines intersect each other at the point  3, 5 .
So. x  3 and y  5.
Therefore, the cost of one pencil and one pen are Rs 3 and Rs 5 respectively.

(iii) Let us denote the number of pants by x and the number of skirts by y. Then the
equations formed are:
y  2 x ? 2...... 1 and y  4 x ? 4......  2 
Let us draw the graphs of Equations (1) and (2) by finding two solutions for each of the
equations.
They are given in Table

They are giving table


Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

x 2 0
y  2 x ?2 2 -2

x 0 1
y  2 x ?2 -4 0

Plot the point and draw the lines passing through them to represent the equation, as shown
in fig.
The t lines intersect at the point  1, 0  . So. x  1, y  0 is the required solution of the pair of
linear equations, i.e, the number of pants she purchased island she did not buy any skirt
Concept insight: Read the question carefully and examine what are the unknowns.
Represent the given conditions with the help of equations by taking the unknowns
quantities as variables. Also carefully state the variables as whole solution is based on it on
the graph paper, mark the points accurately and neatly using a sharp pencil. Also take at
least three points satisfying the two equations in order to obtain the correct straight line of
the equation. Since joining any two points gives a straight line and if one of the points is
computed incorrect will give a wrong line and taking third point will give a correct line.
The point where the two straight lines will intersect will give the values of the two
variables, i.e., the solution of the two linear equations. State the solution point.

35. Solve the following system of equations graphically:


Shade the region between the lines and the y-axis
3x  4 y  7
(i)
5x  2 y  3
4x  y  4
(ii)
3x  2 y  14
Sol:
The given system of equations is
3x  4 y  7
5x  2 y  3
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now,
3x  4 y  7
 3x  7  4 y
 4 y  3x  7
3x  7
 y
4
When x  1, we have
3 1  7
y  1
4
When x  3, we have
3   3  7
y  4
4
Thus, we have the following table:
x 1 -3
y -1 -4
We have,
5x  2 y  3
 2 y  3  5x
3  5x
 y
2
When x  1, we have
3  5 1
y  1
2
When x  3, we have
3  5 3
y  6
2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 1 3
y -1 -6
Graph of the given system of equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Clearly, the two lines intersect at A 1, 1 Hence, x  1, y  1 is the solution of the given
system of equations.
We also observe that the required shaded region is ABC

The given system of equations is


4x  y  4
3x  2 y  14
Now,
4x  y  4
 4x  4  y
 y  4x  4
When x  0, we have
y  4  0  4  4
When x  1, we have
y  4   1  4  8
Thus, we have the following table:
x 0 -1
y -4 -8
We have,
3x  2 y  14
 2 y  14  3x
14  3x
 y
2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
When x  0, we have
14  3  0
y 7
2
When x  0, we have
14  3  4
y 1
2
Thus, we have the following table:
x 0 4
y 7 1
Graph of the given system of equations:

Clearly, the two lines intersect at A  2, 4  . Hence, x  2, y  4 is the solution of the given
system of equations.
We also observe ABC is the required shaded region.

36. Represent the following pair of equations graphically and write the coordinates of points
where the lines intersects y-axis
x  3y  6
2 x  3 y  12
Sol:
The given system of equations is
x  3y  6
2 x  3 y  12
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x  3y  6
 3y  6  x
6 x
 y
3
When x  0, we have
60
y 2
3
When x  3, we have
63
y 1
3
Thus, we have the following table:
x 0 3
y 2 1

We have,
2 x  3 y  12
 2 x  12  3x
 3 y  2 x  12
2 x  12
 y
3
When x  0, we have
2  0  12
y  4
3
When x  6, we have
2  6  12
y 0
3
Thus, we have the following table:
x 0 6
y -4 0
Graph of the given system of equations:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

We observe that the lines represented by the equations x  3 y  6 and 2 x  3 y  12 meet y-


axis at B  0, 2  and C  0, 4  respectively.
Hence, the required co-ordinates are  0, 2  and  0, 4  .

37. Given the linear equation 2x + 3y − 8 = 0, write another linear equation in two variables
such that the geometrical representation of the pair so formed is (i) intersecting lines (ii)
Parallel lines (iii) coincident lines
Sol:
(i) For the two lines a1 x  b1 x  c1  0 and a2 x  b2 x  c2  0, to be intersecting, we must have
a1 b1

a2 b2
So, the other linear equation can be 5 x  6 y  16  0
a1 2 b1 3 1 c1 8 1
As  ,   ,  
a2 5 b2 6 2 c2 16 2
(ii) For the two lines a1 x  b1 x  c1  0 and a2 x  b2 x  c2  0, to be parallel we must have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
So, the other linear equation can be 6 x  9 y  24  0,
a1 2 1 b1 3 1 c1 8 1
As   ,   ,  
a2 6 3 b2 9 3 c2 24 3
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
(iii) For the two lines a1 x  b1 x  c1  0 and a2 x  b2 x  c2  0, to be coincident, we must
a1 b1 c1
have  
a2 b2 c2
So, the other linear equation can be 6 x  9 y  24  0,
a1 2 1 b1 3 1 c1 8 1
As   ,   ,  
a2 8 4 b2 12 4 c2 32 4
Concept insight: In orders to answer such type of problems, just remember the conditions
for two lines to be intersecting parallel, and coincident

This problem will have multiple answers as their can be marry equations satisfying the
required conditions.

Exercise 3.3
Solve the following systems of equations:
1. 11x + 15y + 23 = 0
7x – 2y – 20 = 0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
11x  15 y  23  0 ...  i 
7 x  2 y  20  0 ...  ii 
From (ii), we get
2 y  7 x  20
7 x  20
 y
2
7 x  20
Substituting y  in (i) we get
2
 7 x  20 
11x  15    23  0
 2 
105 x  300
 11x   23  0
2
22 x  105 x  300  46
 0
2
 127 x  254  0
 127 x  254
254
 x 2
127
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
7 x  20
Putting x  2 in y  we get
2
7  2  20
 y
2
14  20

2
6

2
 3
Hence, the solution of the given system of equations is x  2, y  3.

2. 3x – 7y + 10 = 0
y – 2x – 3 = 0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
3x  7 y  10  0 ...  i 
y  2x  3  0 ...  ii 
From (ii), we get
y  2x  3
Substituting y  2 x  3 in (i) we get
3x  7  2 x  3  10  0
 3x  14 x  21  10  0
 11x  11
11
 x  1
11
Putting x  1 in y  2 x  3, we get
 y  2   1  3
 2  3
1
 y 1
Hence, the solution of the given system of equations is x  1, y  1.

3. 0.4x + 0.3y = 1.7


0.7x + 0.2y = 0.8
Sol:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
The given system of equation is
0.4 x  0.3 y  1.7 ...  i 
0.7 x  0.2 y  0.8 ...  ii 
Multiplying both sides of (i) and (ii), by 10, we get
4 x  3 y  17 ...  iii 
7x  2 y  8 ...  iv 
From (iv), we get
7x  8  2 y
8 2y
 7x
7
8  2y
Substituting x  in (iii), we get
7
 8 2y 
4   3 y  17
 7 
32  8 y
  3 y  17
7
 32  29 y  17  7
 29 y  119  32
 29 y  87
87
 y 3
29
8  2y
Putting y  3 in x  , we get
7
8  23
x
7
86

7
14

7
2
Hence, the solution of the given system of equation is x  2, y  3.

x
4.  y  0.8
2
Sol:
x
 y  0.8
2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
7
And  10
y
x
2
7 2
 x  2 y  1.6 and  10
2x  y
x  2 y  1.6 and 7  10 x  5 y
Multiply first equation by 10
10 x  20 y  16 and 10 x  5 y  7
Subtracting the two equations
15 y  9
9 3
y 
15 5
3 6 2
x  1.6  2    1.6  
5 5 5
 2 3
Solution is  , 
5 5

5. 7(y + 3) – 2 (x + 3) = 14
4(y – 2) + 3 (x – 3) = 2
Sol:
The given system of equations id
7  y  3  2  x  3  14 ...  i 
4  y  2   3  x  3  2 ...  ii 
From (i), we get
7 x  21  2 x  4  14
 7 y  14  4  21  2 x
2x  3
 y
7
From (ii), we get
4 y  8  3x  9  2
 4 y  3x  17  2  0
 4 y  3x  19  0 ...  iii 
2x  3
Substituting y  in (iii), we get
7
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 2x  3 
4   3x  19  0
 7 
8 x  12
  3x  19  0
7
 8 x  12  21x  133  0
 29 x  145  0
 29 x  145
145
 x 5
29
2x  3
Putting x  5 in y  , we get
7
25  7
y
7
10  3

7
7

7
1
 y 1
Hence, the solution of the given system of equations is x  5, y  1.

𝑥 𝑦
6. +3=5
7
𝑥 𝑦
−9=6
2
Sol:
The given system of equation is
x y
 5 ...  i 
7 3
x y
 6 ...  ii 
2 9
From (i), we get
3x  7 y
5
21
 3x  7 y  105
 3x  105  7 y
105  7 y
 x
3
From (ii), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
9x  2 y
6
18
 9 x  2 y  108 ...  iii 
105  7 y
Substituting x  in (iii), we get
3
 105  7 y 
9   2 y  108
 3 
948  63 y
  2 y  108
3
 945  63 y  6 y  108  3
 945  69 y  324
 945  324  69 y
 69 y  621
621
 y 9
69
1105  7 y
Putting y  9 in x  , we get
3
105  7  9 105  63
x 
3 3
42
 x  14
3
Hence, the solution of thee given system of equations is x  14, y  9.

𝑥 𝑦
7. + 4 = 11
3
5𝑥 𝑦
−3=7
6
Sol:
The given system of equations is
x y
  11 ...  i 
3 4
5x y
 7 ...  ii 
6 3
From (i), we get
4x  3y
 11
12
 4 x  3 y  132 ...  iii 
From (ii), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5x  2 y
 7
6
 5 x  2 y  42 ...  iv 
Let us eliminate y from the given equations. The coefficients of y in the equations(iii) and
(iv) are 3 and 2 respectively. The L.C.M of 3 and 2 is 6. So, we make the coefficient of y
equal to 6 in the two equations.
Multiplying (iii) by 2 and (iv) by 3, we get
8 x  6 y  264 ...  v 
15 x  6 x  126 ...  vi 
Adding (v) and (vi), we get
8 x  15 x  264  126
 23x  138
138
 x 6
23
Substituting x  6 in (iii), we get
4  6  3 y  132
 3 y  132  24
 3 y  108
108
 y  36
3
Hence, the solution of the given system of equations is x  6, y  36.

4u  3 y  8
8.
6u  4 y  5
Sol:
1
Taking  u, then given equations become
x
4u  3 y  8 ...  i 
6u  4 y  5 ...  ii 
From (i), we get
4u  8  3 y
8  3y
 u
4
8  3y
Substituting u  in (ii), we get
4
From (ii), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 8  3y 
6   4 y  5
 4 
3 8  3 y 
  4 y  5
2
24  9 y
  4 y  5
2
24  9 y  8 y
  5
2
 24  17 y  10
 17 y  10  24
 17 y  34
34
 y 2
17
8  3y
Putting y  2, in u  , we get
4
8  3 2 8  6 2 1
u   
4 4 4 2
1
Hence, x   2
u
So, the solution of the given system of equation is x  2, y  2.

y
9. x 4
2
x
 2y  5
3
Sol:
The given system of equation is
y
x 4 ..(i)
2
x
 2y  5 ..(ii)
3
From (i), we get
2x  y
4
2
2x  y  8
y  8  2x
From (ii), we get
x  6 y  15 ..(iii)
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Substituting y  8  2 x in (iii), we get
x  6  8  2 x   15
 x  48  12 x  15
 11x  15  48
 11x  33
33
 x 3
11
Putting x  3, in y  8  2 x, we get
y  8  23
 86
2
 y2
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x  3, y  2.

3
10. x  2y 
2
3
2x  y 
2
Sol:
The given system of equation is
3
x  2y  ..(i)
2
3
2x  y  ..(ii)
2
Let us eliminate y from the given equations. The Coefficients of y in the given equations
are 2 and 1 respectively. The L.C.M of 2 and 1 is 2. So, we make the coefficient of y equal
to 2 in the two equations.

Multiplying (i) by 1 and (ii) by 2, we get


3
x  2y  ..(iii)
2
4x  2 y  3 ..(iv)
Subtracting (iii) from (iv), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3
4x  x  2 y  2 y  3 
2
63
 3x 
2
3
 3x 
2
3
 x
23
1
 x
2
1
Putting x  , in equation (iv), we get
2
1
4  2y  3
2
 2  2y  3
 2y  3 2
1
 y
2
1 1
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x  , y  .
2 2

2x  3y  0
11.
3x  8 y  0
Sol:
2x  3y  0 ...  i 
3x  8 y  0 ...  ii 
From equation (i), we obtain:
 3y
x ...  iii 
2
Substituting this value in equation (ii), we obtain:
 3y 
3     8 y  0
 2 
3y
  2 2y  0
2
 3 
y 2 2 0
 2 
y0
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Substituting the value of y in equation (iii), we obtain:
x0
 x  0, y  0

y7
3x   2  10
12. 11
x  11
2y   10
7
Sol:
The given systems of equation is
y7
3x   2  10 ...  i 
11
x  11
2y   10 ...  ii 
7
From (i), we get
33x  y  7  22
 10
11
 33x  y  15  10 11
 33x  15  110  y
 y  33x  95
From (ii) we get
14 y  x  11
 109
7
 14 y  x  11  10  7
 14 y  x  11  70
 14 y  x  70  11
 14 y  x  59 ...  iii 
Substituting y  33x  95 in (iii), we get
14  33x  95   x  59
 462 x  1330  x  59
 463x  59  1330
 463x  1389
1389
 x 3
463
Putting x  3, in y  33x  95, we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
y  33  3  95
 y  99  95
4
 y4
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x  3, y  4.

3
2x  9
y
13.
7
3 x   2, y  0
y
Sol:
The given systems of equation is
3
2x   9 ...  i 
y
7
3x   2, y  0 ...  ii 
y
1
Taking  u, the given equations becomes
y
2 x  3u  9 ...  iii 
3x  7u  2 ...  iv 
From (iii), we get
2 x  9  3u
9  3u
 x
2
9  3u
Substituting x  in (iv), we get
2
 9  3u 
3   7u  2
 2 
27  9u  14u
 2
2
 27  23u  2  2
 23u  4  27
23
 u  1
23
1 1
Hence, y    1
u 1
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
9  3u
Putting u  1 in x  , we get
2
9  3  1 9  3 6
x   3
2 2 2
 x3
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x  3, y  1.

0.5 x  0.7 y  0.74


14.
0.3x  0.5 y  0.5
Sol:
The given systems of equations is
0.5 x  0.7 y  0.74 i 
0.3x  0.5 y  0.5  ii 
Multiplying (i) and (ii) by 100, we get
50 x  70 y  74 ...  iii 
30 x  50 y  50 ...  iv 
From (iii), we get
50 x  74  70 y
74  70 y
 x
50
74  70 y
Substituting x  in equation (iv), we get
50
 74  70 y 
30    50 y  50
 50 
3  74  70 y 
  50 y  50
5
222  210 y
  50 y  50
5
 222  210 y  250 y  250
 40 y  250  222
 40 y  28
28 14 7
 y    0.7
40 20 10
74  70 y
Putting y  0.7 in x  , we get
50
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
74  70  0  7
x
50
74  49

50
25

50
1

2
 0.5
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x  0  5, y  0.7

1 1
 3
7x 6 y
15.
1 1
 5
2x 3y
Sol:
1 1
 3 .... 1
7x 6 y
1 1
 5 ....  2 
2x 3y
1
Multiplying (2) by , we get
2
1 1 5
  ....  3
4x 6 y 2
Solving (1) and (3), we get
1 1
 3
7x 6 y
1 1 5
 
4x 6 y 2
(Adding the equations)
1 1 5
  3
7x 4x 2
47 65
 
28x 2
11 11
 
28 x 2
11 2 1
x 
28  11 14
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
When x  , we get
14
1 1
 3 (Using (1))
 1  6y
7 
 14 
1
 2 3
6y
1
  3 2 1
6y
1
y
6
1 
Thus, the solution of given equation is x  and y  .
14 6

1 1
16. + 3𝑦 = 2
2𝑥
1 1 13
+ 2𝑦 =
3𝑥 6
Sol:
1 1
Let  u and  v, the given equations become
x y
u v
 2
2 3
3u  2v
 2
6
 3u  2v  12 ....  i 
u v 13
And,  
3 2 6
2u  3v 13
 
6 6
6
v 3
2
1 1 1 1
Hence, x   and y  
u 2 v 3
1 1
So, the solution of the given system o equation is x  , y  .
2 3
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x y
17. 2
xy
x y
6
xy
Sol:
The given system of equation is
x y
2
xy
x y
  2
xy xy
1 1
  2 .....  i 
y x
x y
And, 6
xy
x y
  6
xy xy
1 y
  6 ...  ii 
y x
1 1
Taking  v and  u, the above equations become
y x
vu  2 .....  iii 
v u  6 ......  iv 
Adding equation (iii) and equation (iv), we get
v u v u  26
 2v  8
8
 v 4
2
Putting v  4 in equation (iii), we get
4u  2
 u  2  4  2
1 1 1 1 1
Hence, x    and y  
u 2 2 v 4
1 1
So, the solution of the given system of equation is x  ,y
2 4
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
15 2
18. + 𝑣 = 17
𝑢
Sol:
1 1
Let  x and  y, then, the given system of equations become
u v
15 x  2 y  17 ...  i 
36
x y  ...  ii 
5
From (i), we get
2 y  17  15 x
17  15 x
 y
2
17  15x
Substituting y  in equation (ii), we get
2
17  15 x 36
x 
2 5
2 x  17  15 x 36
 
2 5
13x  17 36
 
2 5
 5  13x  17   36  2
 65 x  85  72
 65 x  72  85
 65 x  13
13 1
 65x  
65 5
1
Putting x  in equation (ii), we get
5
1 36
y
5 5
36 1
 y 
5 5
36  1 35
  7
5 5
1 1 1
Hence, u   5 and v   .
x y 7
1
So, the solution off the given system of equation is u  5, v  .
7
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3 1
19. − 𝑦 = −9
𝑥
2 3
+𝑦 =5
𝑥
Sol:
1 1
Let  u and  v, Then, the given system of equations becomes
x y
3u  v  9 ......  i 
2u  3v  5 ......  ii 
Multiplying equation (i) by 3 an equation (ii) by 1, we get
9u  3v  27 .........  iii 
2u  3v  5 ..........  iv 
Adding equation (i) and equation (ii), we get
9u  2u  3v  3v  27  5
 11u  22
22
 u  2
11
Putting u  2 in equation (iv), we get
2   2   3v  5
 4  3v  5
 3v  5  4
9
 v 3
3
1 1 1 1 1
Hence, x    and y   .
u 2 2 v 3
1 1
So, the solution of the given system of equation is x  ,y .
2 3

2 5
20. +𝑦 =1
𝑥
60 40
+ = 19, 𝑥 ≠ 0, 𝑦 ≠ 0
𝑥 𝑦
Sol:
1 1
Taking  u and  v, the given becomes
x y
2u  5v  1 ......  i 
60u  40u  19 ......  ii 
Let us eliminate ‘u’ from equation (i) and (ii), multiplying equation (i) by 60 and equation
(ii) by 2, we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

120u  300v  60 ......  iii 


120u  80v  38 ......  iv 
Subtracting (iv) from (iii), we get
300v  80v  60  38
 220v  22
22 1
 v 
220 10
1
Putting v  in equation (i), we get
10
1
2u  5   1
10
1
 2u   1
2
1
 2u  1 
2
2 1 1
 2u  
2 2
1
 2u 
2
1
 u
4
1 1
Hence, x   4 and y   10
u v
So, the solution of the given system of equation is x  4, y  10.

1 1
21. + 6𝑦 = 12
5𝑥
1 3
− 7𝑦 = 8, 𝑥 ≠ 0, 𝑦 ≠ 0
3𝑥
Sol:
1 1
Taking  u and  v, the given equations become\
x y
u v
  12
5 6
6u  5v
  12
30
 6u  5v  360 .....  i 
u 3v
And,  8
3 7
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
7u  9v
 8
21
 7u  9v  168 ......  ii 
Let us eliminate ‘v’ from equation (i) and (ii), Multiplying equation (i) by 9 and equation
(ii) by 5, we get
54u  45v  3240 ......  iii 
35u  45v  840 ......  iv 
Adding equation (i) adding equation (ii), we get
54u  35u  3240  840
 89u  4080
4080
 u
89
4080
Putting u  in equation (i), we get
89
4080
6  5v  360
89
24480
  5v  360
89
24480
 5v  360 
89
32040  24480
 5v 
89
7560
 5v 
89
7560
 v
5  89
1512
 v
89
1 89 1 89
Hence, x   and y  
u 4080 v 1512
89 89
So, the solution of the given system of equation is x  ,y .
4080 1512
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2 3 9
 
x y xy
22.
4 9 21
  , where x  0, y  0
x y xy
Sol:
The system of given equation is
2 3 9
  .....  i 
x y xy
4 9 21
  , where x  0, y  0 .....  ii 
x y xy
Multiplying equation (i) adding equation (ii) by xy , we get
2 y  3x  9 ....  iii 
4 y  9 x  21 ....  iv 
From (iii), we get
3x  9  2 y
9  2y
 x
3
9  2y
Substituting x  in equation (iv), we get
3
 9  2y 
4x  9    21
 3 
 4 y  3  9  2 y   21
 4 y  27  6 y  21
 2 y  21  27
 2 y  6
6
 y 3
2
9  2y
Putting y  3 in x  , we get
3
9  23
x
3
96

3
3

3
1
Hence, solution of the system of equation is x  1, y  3
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

6 7
23. = 𝑥−𝑦 + 3
𝑥+𝑦
1 1
= 3(𝑥−𝑦), where x + y ≠ 0 and x – y ≠ 0
2(𝑥+𝑦)
Sol:
1 1
Let  u and  v. Then, the given system of equation becomes
x y x y
6u  7v  3
 6u  7v  3 .......  i 
u v
And, 
2 3
 3u  2v
 3u  2v  0 ......  ii 
Multiplying equation  ii  by 2, and equation (i) by 1, we get
6u  7v  3 .......  iii 
6u  4v  0 ........  iv 
Subtracting equation (iv) from equation (iii), we get
7  4v  3
 3v  3
 v  1
Putting v  1 in equation (ii), we get
3u  2   1  0
 3u  2  0
 3u  2
2
 u
3
Now,
2
u
3
1 2
 
x2 3
3
 x y  ....  v 
2
And, v  1
1
  1
x y
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 x  y  1 ......  vi 
Adding equation (v) and equation (vi), we get
3
2x  1
2
3  2
 2x 
2
5
 2x 
2
5
 x
4
5
Putting x  in equation (vi), we get
4
5
 y  1
4
5
 1  y
4
5  4
 y
4
1
 y
4
1
 y
4
5 1
Hence, solution of the system of equation is x  ,y .
4 4

xy 6
24. 
x y 5
xy
6
yx
Sol:
The given system of equation is
xy 6

x y 5
 5 xy  6  x  y 
 5 xy  6 x  6 y ....  i 
xy
And, 6
yx
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 xy  6  y  x 
 xy  6 y  6 x .....  ii 
Adding equation (i) and equation (ii), we get
6 xy  6 y  6 y
 6 xy  12 y
12 y
 x 2
6y
Putting x  2 in equation (i), we get
5 2 y  6 2  6 y
 10 y  12  6 y
 10 y  6 y  12
 4 y  12
12
 y 3
4
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x  2, y  3.

22 15
25. + 𝑥−𝑦 = 5
𝑥+𝑦
55 45
+ 𝑥−𝑦 = 14
𝑥+𝑦
Sol:
1 1
Let  u and  v. Then, the given system of equation becomes
x y x y
22u  15v  5 ...  i 
55u  45v  14 ...  ii 
Multiplying equation (i) by 3, and equation (ii) by 1, we get
66u  45v  15 .....  iii 
55u  45v  14 ......  iv 
Subtracting equation (iv) from equation (iii), we get
66u  55u  15  4
 11u  1
1
 u
11
1
Putting u  in equation (i), we get
11
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
22   15v  5
11
 2  15v  5
 15v  5  2
 15v  3
3 1
 v 
15 5
1
Now, u 
x y
1 1
 
x  y 11
 x  y  11 ....  v 
1
And v
x y
1 1
 
x y 5
 x y 5 .....  vi 
Adding equation (v) and equation (vi), we get
2 x  11  5
 2 x  16
16
 x 8
2
Putting x  8 in equation (v), we get
8  y  11
 y  11  8  3
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x  8, y  3.

5 2
26. − 𝑥−𝑦 = −1
𝑥+𝑦
15 7
+ 𝑥−𝑦 = 10
𝑥+𝑦
Sol:
1 1
Let  u and  v . Then, the given system off equations becomes
x y x y
5u  2v  1 ......  i 
15u  7v  10 .....  ii 
Multiplying equation (i) by 7, and equation (ii) by 2, we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

35u  14v  7 .....  iii 


30u  14v  20 ......  iv 
Adding equation (iii) and equation (iv), we get
 35u  30u  7  20
 65u  13
13 1
 u 
65 5

1
Putting u  in equation (i), we get
5
1
5   2 v  1
5
 1  2v  1
 2v  1  1
 2v  2
2
 v 1
2

1
Now, u 
x y
1 1
 
x y 5
 x y 5 ......  v 
1
and, v  1
x y
 x  y 1 .......  vi 
Adding equation (v) and equation (vi), we get
2x  5 1
 2x  6
6
 x 3
2
Putting x  3 in equation (v), we get
3 y  5
 y  53  2
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x  3, y  2.
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3 2
27. + 𝑥−𝑦 = 2
𝑥+𝑦
9 4
− 𝑥−𝑦 = 1
𝑥+𝑦
Sol:
1 1
Let  u and  v. Then, the given system of equation becomes
x y x y
3u  2v  2 ...  i 
9u  4v  1 ...  ii 
Multiplying equation (i) by 3, and equation (ii) by 1, we get
6u  4v  4 .....  iii 
9u  4v  1 ......  iv 
Adding equation (iii) and equation (iv), we get
6u  9u  4  1
 15u  5
5 1
 u 
15 3
1
Putting u  in equation (i), we get
3
1
3   2v  2
3
 1  2v  2
 2v  2  1
1
 v
2
1
u
Now, x y
1 1
 
x y 3
 x y 3 ......  v 
1
v
And, x y
1 1
 
x y 2
 x y  2 ......  vi 
Adding equation (v) and equation (vi), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2x  3  2
5
 x
2
5
x
Putting 2 in equation (v), we get
5
 y3
2
5
 y  3
2
65 1
 y 
2 2
5 1
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x  , y  .
2 2

1 5 −3 5 3 61
28. + 3(3𝑥−2𝑦) = − 5(3𝑥−2𝑦) = 60
2(𝑥+2𝑦) 2 4(𝑥+2𝑦)
Sol:
1 1
Let  u and  v.
x  2y 3x  2 y
Then, the given system of equation becomes
u 5v 3
 
2 3 2
3u  10v 3
 
6 2
3  6
 3u  10v 
2
 3u  10v  9 .....  i 
5u 3v 61
 
4 5 60
And,
25u  12v 61
 
20 60
61
 25u  12v  .......  ii 
3
Multiplying equation (i) by 12, and equation (ii) by 10, we get
36u  120v  108 ......  iii 
610
250u  120v  ......  iv 
3
Adding equation (iii) and equation (iv), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
610
36u  250u   108
3
610  324
 286u 
3
286
 286u 
3
1
 u
3
1
Putting u  in equation (i), we get
3
1
3   10v  9
3
 1  10v  9
 10v  9  1
10
 v  1
10
1
Now, u 
x  2y
1 1
 
x y 3
 x  2y  3 ..........  v 
1
And, v 
3x  2 y
1
  1
3x  2 y
 3x  2 y  1 .......  vi 
1
Putting x  in equation (v), we get
2
1
 2y  3
2
1
 2y  3
2
6 1
 2y 
2
5
 y
4
1 5
Hence, solution of the given system of equations is x  , y  .
2 4
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5 2 1
29. − 𝑦−1 = 2
𝑥+1
10 2 5
+ 𝑦−1 = 2 , 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑥 ≠ −1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑦 ≠ 1
𝑥+1
Sol:
1 1
Let  u and  v.
x 1 y 1
Then, the given system of equations becomes
1
 5u  2v  ........  i 
2
5
 10u  2 y  ........  ii 
2
Adding equation (i) equation (ii), we get
1 5
5u  10u  
2 2
1 5
 15u 
2
6
 15u   3
2
3 1
 u 
15 5
1
Putting u  in equation (i), we get
5
1 1
5   2v 
5 2
1
 1  2v 
2
1
 2v   1
2
1 2
 2v 
2
1
 2v 
2
1 1
 v 
4 4
1
Now, u 
x 1
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1
 
x 1 5
 x 1  5
 x  5 1  4
1
And, v 
y 1
1 1
 
y 1 4
 y 1  4
 y  4 1  5
Hence, solution of the give system of equation is x  4, y  5.

x  y  5 xy
30.
3x  2 y  13xy
Sol:
The give system of equation is
x  y  5 xy ......  i 
3x  2 y  13xy .....  ii 
Multiplying equation (i) by 2 and equation (ii) by , we get

2 x  2 y  10 xy ....  iii 
3x  2 y  13xy ....  iv 
Subtracting equation (iii) from equation (iv), we get
3x  2 x  13xy  10 xy
 x  3xy
x
 y
3x
1
 y
3
1
Putting y  in equation (i), we get
3
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
x  y  5 x 
3
1 5x
x 
3 3
1 5x
  x
3 3
1 5 x  3x
 
3 3
 1  2x
 2x  1
1
 x
2
1 1
Hence, solution of the given system of equations is x  , y  .
2 3

31. x  y  2 xy
x y
 6 x  0, y  0
xy
Sol:
The system of the given equation is
x  y  2 xy .......  i 
x y
And, 6
xy
x  y  6 xy .......  ii 
Adding equation (i) and equation (ii), we get
2 x  2 xy  6 xy
 2 x  8 xy
2x
 y
8x
1
 y
4
1
Putting y  in equation (i), we get
4
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1
x  2x 
4 4
1 x
 x 
4 2
x 1
 x 
2 4
2 x  x 1
 
2 4
2 1
 x 
4 2
1 1
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x  ,y ,
2 4

2  3u  v   5uv
32.
2  u  3v   5uv
Sol:
The system of the given equation is
2  3u  v   5uv
 6u  2v  5uv ....  i 
And, 2  u  3v   5uv
 2u  6v  5uv .......  ii 
Multiplying equation (i) by 3 and equation (ii) by 1, we get
18u  6v  15uv .......  iii 
2u  6v  5uv .......  iv 
Adding equation (iii) and equation (iv), we get
18u  2u  15uv  5uv
 20u  20uv
20u
 v
20u
 v 1
Putting v  1 in equation (i), we get
6u  2 1  5u 1
 6u  2  5u
 6u  5u  2
 u2
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is u  2, v  1.
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2 3 17
33. + 3𝑥−2𝑦 =
3𝑥+2𝑦 5
5 1
+ 3𝑥−2𝑦 = 2
3𝑥+2𝑦
Sol:
1 1
Let  u and  v. Then, the given system of equation becomes
3x  2 y 3x  2 y
17
2u  3v  .......  i 
5
5u  v  2 .......  ii 
Multiplying equation (ii) by 3, we get
17
15u  2u  6 
5
30  17
 13u 
5
13
 13u 
5
13 1
 u 
5 13 5
1
Putting u  in equation (ii), we get
5
1
5  v  2
5
 1 v  2
 v  2 1
 v 1
1
Now, u 
3x  2 y
1 1
 
3x  2 y 5
 3x  2 y  5 .....  iv 
1
And, v 
3x  2 y
1
 1
3x  2 y
 3x  2 y  1 .......  v 
Adding equation (iv) and (v), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
6x  1 5
 6x  6
 x 1
Putting x  1 in equation (v), we get
3 1  2 y  5
 2y  5 3
 2y  2
2
 y  1
2
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x  1, y  1.

4
34. + 3𝑦 = 14
𝑥
3
− 4𝑦 = 23
𝑥
Sol:
4
 3 y  14
x
3
 4 y  23
x
1
Let  p
x
The given equations reduce to:
4 p  3 y  14
 4 p  3 y  14  0 ..... 1
3 p  4 y  23
 3 p  4 y  23  0 .....  2 
Using cross-multiplication method, we obtain
p y 1
 
69  56 42   92  16  9
p y 1
 
125 50 25
p 1 y 1
 , 
125 25 50 25
p  5, y  2
1
p 5
x
1
x
5
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
99 x  101y  499
35.
101x  99 y  501
Sol:
The given system of equation is
99 x  101y  499 .....  i 
101x  99 y  501 ....  ii 
Adding equation (i) and equation (ii), we get
99 x  101x  101y  99 y  499  501
 200 x  200 y  1000
 200  x  y   1000
1000
 x y  5
200
 x y 5 .....  iii 
Subtracting equation (i) by equation (ii), we get
101x  99 x  99 y  101y  501  499
 2x  2 y  2
 2 x  y  2
2
 x y 
2
 x  y 1 .......  iv 

Adding equation (iii) and equation (iv), we get


2x  5 1
6
 x 3
2
Putting x  3 in equation (iii), we get
3 y  5
 y  53  2
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x  3, y  2.

23x  29 y  98
36.
29 x  23 y  110
Sol:
The given system of equation is
23x  29 y  98 .....  i 
29 x  23 y  110 .....  ii 
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Adding equation (i) and equation (ii), we get
23x  29 x  29 y  23 y  98  110
 52 x  52 y  208
 52  x  y   208
208
 x y  4
52
 x y4 ........  iii 
Subtracting equation (i) by equation (ii), we get
29 x  23x  23 y  29 y  110  98
 6 x  6 y  12
 6  x  y   12
12
 x y  2
6
 x y 2 ......  iv 
Adding equation (iii) and equation (iv), we get
2x  2  4  6
6
 x 3
2
Putting x  3 in equation (iv), we get
3 y  2
 y  2  3  1
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x  3, y  1.

x yz 4
37. x  2 y  2z  9
2 x  y  3z  1
Sol:
We have,
x yz 4 ......  i 
x  2 y  2z  9 ......  ii 
2 x  y  3z  1 .....  iii 
From equation (i), we get
z  4 x y
 z  x  y  4
Subtracting the value of z in equation (ii), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

x  2 y  2   x  y  4  9
 x  2 y  2x  2 y  8  8
 3x  4 y  9  8
 3x  4 y  17 .....  iv 
Subtracting the value of z in equation (iii), we get
2x  y  3  x  y  4  1
 2 x  y  3x  3 y  12  1
  x  4 y  1  12
  x  4 y  11 ......  v 
Adding equations (iv) and (v), we get
3 x  x  4 y  4 y  17  11
 2x  6
6
 x 3
2
Putting x  3 in equation (iv), we get
3  3  4 y  17
 9  4 y  17
 4 y  17  9
 4 y  8
8
 y  2
4
Putting x  3 and y  2 in z   x  y  4, we get
z  3  2  4
 z  5  4
 z  1
Hence, solution of the giving system of equation is x  3, y  2, z  1.

x yz 4
38. x yz 2
2 x  y  3z  0
Sol:
We have,
x yz  4 ......  i 
x y z  2 ......  ii 
2 x  y  3z  0 ......  iii 
From equation (i), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
z  4 x y
 z  x  y  4
Substituting z   x  y  4 in equation (ii), we get
x  y    x  y  4  2
 x yx y4 2
 2y  4  2
 2 y  2  4  2
 2 y  2
2
 y  1
2
Substituting the value of z in equation (iii), we get
2x  y  3  x  y  4  0
 2 x  y  3x  3 y  12  0
 5 x  2 y  12  0
 5 x  2 y  12 .......  iv 
Putting y  1 in equation (iv), we get
5 x  2   1  12
 5 x  2  12
 5 x  12  2  10
10
 x 2
5
Putting x  2 and y  1 in z   x  y  4, we get
z  2   1  4
 2  1  4
 3  4
1
Hence, solution of the giving system of equation is x  2, y  1, z  1.

44 30
39. + 𝑥−𝑦 = 4
𝑥+𝑦
55 40
+ 𝑥−𝑦 = 13
𝑥+𝑦
Sol:
1 1
Let  u and  v.
x y x y
Then, the system of the given equations becomes
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

44u  30v  10 .....  i 


55u  40v  13 .....  ii 
Multiplying equation (i) by 4 and equation (ii) by 3, we get
176u  120v  40 .......  iii 
165u  120v  39 .......  iv 
Subtracting equation (iv) by equation (iii), we get
176  165u  40  39
 11u  1
1
 u
11
1
Putting u  in equation (i), we get
11
1
44   30v  10
11
4  30v  10
 30v  10  4
 30v  6
6 1
 v 
30 5
1
Now, u 
x y
1 1
 
x  y 11
 x  y  11 ........  v 
Adding equation (v) and (vi), we get
2 x  11  5
 2 x  16
16
 x 8
2
Putting x  8 in equation (v),, we get
8  y  11
 y  11  8  3
Hence, solution of the given system of equations is x  8, y  3.
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
4
40.  15 y  21
x
3
 4y  5
x
Sol:
The given system of equation is
4
 15 y  21 ......  i 
x
3
 4y  5 ......  ii 
x
Multiplying equation (i) by 3 and equation (ii) by 4, we get
12
 15 y  21 ......  iii 
x
12
 16 y  20 ......  iv 
x
Subtracting equation (iii) from equation (iv), we get
12 12
  16 y  15 y  20  21
x x
 y  1
Putting y  1 in equation (i), we get
4
 5   1  7
x
4
 5  7
x
4
  75
x
4
  12
x
 4  12 x
4
 x
12
4
 x
12
1
 x
3
1
Hence, solution of the given system of equation is x  , y  1.
3
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

1 1
2    3    13
x  y
41.
1 1
5    4    2
x  y
Sol:
Let us write the given pair of equation as
1 1
2    3    13 1
x  y
1 1
5    4    2  2
x  y
These equation are not in the form ax  by  c  0. However, if we substitute
1 1
 p and  q in equations (1) and (2), we get
x y
2 p  3q  13
5 p  4q  2
So, we have expressed the equations as a pair of linear equations. Now, you can use any
method to solve these equations, and get p  2, q  3
1 1
You know that p  and q  .
x y
Substitute the values of p and q to get
1 1 1 1
 2, i.e., x  and  3 i.e., y  .
x 2 y 3

5 1
42. + 𝑦−2 = 2
𝑥−1
Sol:
x = 4, y = 5
Detailed answer not given in website

10 2
43.  4
x y x y
15 5
  2
x y x y
Sol:
10 2
 4
x y x y
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
15 5
  2
x y x y
1 1
Let  p and q
x y x y
The given equations reduce to:
10 p  2q  4
 10 p  2q  4  0 ..... 1
15 p  5q  2
 15 p  5q  2  0 .....  2 
Using cross-multiplication method, we obtain:
p q 1
 
4  20 60  20 50  30
p q 1
 
16 80 80
p 1 q 1
 and 
16 80 80 80
1
p  and q  1
5
1 1 1
p  and q  1
x y 5 x y
x y 5 ......  3
x  y 1 ......  4 
Adding equation (3) and (4), we obtain:
2x  6
x3
Substituting the value of x in equation (3), we obtain:
y2
 x  3, y  2

1 1 3
44. + 3𝑥−𝑦 = 4
3𝑥+𝑦
1 1 1
− 2(3𝑥−𝑦) = − 8
2(3𝑥+𝑦)
Sol:
1 1
Let us put  p and  q. Then the given equations
x 1 y2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 1  1
5  2 ...... 1
 x 1  y  2
 1   1 
6   3  1 ......  2 
 x 1   y  2 
Can be written as: 5 p  q  2 ........  3
6 p  3q  1 ......  4 
Equations (3) and (4) from a pair of linear equations in the general form. Now, you can use
1 1
any method to solve these equations. We get p  and q  .
3 3
1
Substituting for p, we have
x 1
1 1
 ,
x 1 3
i.e., x  1  3, i.e., x  4.
1
Similarly, substituting for q, we get
y2
1 1

y2 3
i.e., x  1  3, i.e., x  4
1
Similarly, substituting for q, we get
y2
1 1

y2 3
i.e., 3  y  2, i.e., y  5
Hence, x  4, y  5 is the required solution of the given pair of equations.

2 3
 2
x y
45.
4 9
  1
x y
Sol:
2 3
 2
x y
4 9
  1
x y
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1
Let  p and q
x y
The given equations reduce to:
2 p  3q  2 ..... 1
4 p  9q  1 .....  2 
Multiplying equation (1) by (3), we obtain:
6 p  9q  6 .....  3
Adding equation (2) and (3), we obtain:
10 p  5
1
p
2
Putting the value of p in equation (1), we obtain:
1
2   3q  2
2
3q  1
1
q
3
1 1
p 
x 2
x 2
x4
1 1
q 
y 3
y 3
y9
 x  4, y  9

7x  2 y
5
xy
46.
8x  7 y
 15
xy
Sol:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
7x  2 y
5
xy
7 2
  5 ... 1
y x
8x  7 y
 15
xy
8 7
   15 .....  2 
y x
1 1
Let  p and  q
x y
The given equations reduce to:
2 p  7q  5
 2 p  7q  5  0 ....  3
7 p  8q  15
 7 p  8q  15  0 ....  4 
Using cross multiplication method, we obtain:
p q 1
 
105   40  35  30 16  49
p 1 q 1
 , 
65 65 65 65
p  1, q  1
1 1
p  1, q   1
x y
x  1, y  1

152 x  378 y  74


47.
378 x  152 y  604
Sol:
152 x  378 y  74 .... 1
378 x  152 y  604 ....  2 
Adding the equations (1) and (2), we obtain:
226 x  226 y  678
 x y 3 .....  3
Subtracting the equation (2) from equation (1), we obtain
530 x  530 y  530
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 x  y 1 .....  4 
Adding equations (3) and (4), we obtain:
2x  4
x2
Substituting the value of x in equation (3), we obtain:
y 1

Exercise 3.4
Solve each of the following systems of equations by the method of cross-multiplication:

x  2 y 1  0
1.
2 x  3 y  12  0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
x  2 y 1  0
2 x  3 y  12  0
Here,
a1  1, b1  2, c1  1
a2  2, b2  3 and c2  12
By cross-multiplication, we get
x y 1
  
2   12   1  3 1  12   1 2 1  3  2  2
x y 1
  
24  3 12  2 3  4
x y 1
  
21 14 7
Now,
x 1

21 7
21
 x 3
7
And,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
y 1

14 7
y 1
 
14 7
14
 y  2
7
Hence, the solution of the given system of equations is x  3, y  2.

3x  2 y  25  0
2.
2 x  y  10  0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
3x  2 y  25  0
2 x  y  10  0
Here,
a1  3, b1  2, c1  25
a2  2, b2  1 and c2  10
By cross-multiplication, we have
x y 1
  
2 10  25 1 3 10  25  2 3 1  2  2
x y 1
  
20  25 30  50 3  4
x y 1
  
5 20 1
x 1
Now, 
5 1
5
x 5
1
And,
y 1

20 1
y
 1
20
 y  20
Hence, x  5, y  20 is the solution of the given system of equations.

2 x  y  35  0
3.
3x  4 y  65  0
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
2 x  y  35  0
3x  4 y  65  0
Here,
a1  2, b1  1, c1  35
a2  3, b2  4 and c2  65
By cross multiplication, we have
x y 1
  
1  65   35  4 2   65   35  3 2  4  1 3
x y 1
  
65  140 130  105 8  3
x y 1
  
75 25 5
x y 1
  
75 25 5
Now,
y 1

25 5
25
 y 5
5
Hence, x  15, y  5 is the solution of the given system of equations.

2x  y  6  0
4.
x y20
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
2x  y  6  0
x y20
Here,
a1  2, b1  1, c1  6
a2  1, b2  1 and c2  2
By cross multiplication, we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x y 1
  
 1   2    6    1 2   2    6  1 2   1   1 1
x y 1
  
2  6 4  6 2  1
x y 1
  
4 2 1
x y
   1
4 2
Now,
x
 1
4
 x   4    1  4
And,
y
 1
2
  y   1  2
  y  2
 y2
Hence, x  4, y  2 is the solution of the given system of the equations.

x y
5. 2
xy
x y
6
xy
Sol:
The given system of equations is
x y
2
xy
x y
  2
xy xy
1 1
  2
y x
1 1
  2 ......  i 
x y
And,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x y
6
xy
x y
  6
xy xy
1 1
  6
y x
1 1
  6 ......  ii 
x y
1 1
Taking u  and v  , we get
x y
uv  2uv2  0 .....  iii 
And, u  v  6  u  v  6  0 .....  iv 
Here,
a1  1, b1  1, c1  2
a2  1, b2  1 and c2  6
By cross multiplication
u v 1
  
1 6   2    1 1 6   2  1 1  1  11
u v 1
  
6  2 6  2 1  1
u v 1
  
4 8 2
u 1
Now, 
4 2
4
u   2
2
v 1
And, 
8 2
8
 v   4
2
 v  4
v4
1 1 1 1
Now, x   and y  
u 2 v 4
1 1
Hence, x  , y  is the solution of the given system of equations.
2 4
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
ax  by  a  b
6.
bx  ay  a  b
Sol:
The given system of equations is
ax  by  a  b ....  i 
bx  ay  a  b ....  ii 
Here,
a1  a, b1  b, c1  b  a
a2  b, b2  a and c2  a  b
By cross multiplication, we get
x y 1
  
 a  b    b    b  a    a   a  b    a   b  a    b  a  a  b  b
x y 1
  2  2 2
ab  b  ab  a
2 2
a  ab  b  ab a  b
2

x y 1
 2  2 2  2 2
b  a 2
a  b a  b
Now,
x 1
 2 2
b  a
2 2
a  b
b  a
2 2
 x 2 2
a  b



 b2  a 2 
a 2
b 2


a 2
 b2 
a 2
 b2 
 x 1
And,
y 1
 2 2
a  b
2 2
a  b

 y 
 a  b2
2
 
 a 2  b2  
 y 1
 y  1
Hence, x  1, y  1 is the solution of the given system of the equations.
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x  ay  b  0
7.
ax  by  c  0
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
x  ay  b  0
ax  by  c  0
Here,
a1  1, b1  a, c1  b
a2  a, b2  b and c2  c
By cross multiplication, we get
x y 1
  
 a    c    b    b  1  c    b   a 1  b   a  a
x y 1
  
ac  b 2
c  ab b  a 2
Now,
x 1

ac  b 2
b  a 2
ac  b 2
 x
b  a 2

 x

 b 2  ac 

 a2  b 
b 2  ac

a2  b
And
y 1

c  ab b  a 2
ab  c
 y 
 a2  b 
ab  c
 y
a2  b
ac  b2 ab  c
Hence, x  2 ,y 2 is the solution of the given system of the equations.
a b a b

ax  by  a 2
8.
bx  ay  b 2
Sol:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
The system of the given equations may be written as
ax  by  a 2  0
bx  ay  b 2  0
Here,
a1  a, b1  b, c1  a 2
a2  b, b2  a and c2  b 2
By cross multiplication, we get
x y 1
  
      
b  b  a  a a  b  a  b a  a  b  b
2 2 2 2

x y 1
   2 2
b  a
3 3
ab  a b a  b
2 2

Now,
x 1
 2 2
b  a
3 3
a b
a b
3 3
 x 2 2
a b
 a  b   a 2  ab  b 2 

 a  b  a  b 
a 2  ab  b 2

ab
And,
y 1
 2 2
ab  a b a  b
2 2

a 2b  ab 2
 y  2 2
a b
ab  a 2b
2
 y 2 2
a b
ab  b  a 

 a  b  a  b 
ab  a  b 

 a  b  a  b 
ab

ab
a 2  ab  b2 ab
Hence, x  ,y is the solution of the given system of the equations.
ab a b
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝑥 𝑦
9. +𝑏 =2
𝑎
𝑎𝑥 − 𝑏𝑦 = 𝑎2 − 𝑏 2
Sol:
The system of the given equations may be written as
1 1
x  y  2  0
a b
ax  by  b 2  a 2  0
Here,
1 1
a1  , b1  , c1  2
a b
a2  a, b2  b and c2  b 2  a 2
By cross multiplication, we get
x y 1
  
b 1 a 1
  b 2  a 2    2    b    b 2  a 2    2   a
1 1

b a a b
x y 1
 2  2 
b a 2
b a 2
b a
 2b  2b 
b b a b
x y 1
 2  2  2
b  a  2b
2 2
b  a  2b2 2
b  a 2
b a ab
x y 1
  2  2
a  b
2 2
b a 2
b  a 2
b a ab
Now,
x 1
 2
a  b
2 2
b  a 2
b ab
a  b
2 2
ab
 x  2
b b  a 2
And,
y 1
 2
b a
2 2
b  a 2
a ab
b a
2 2
ab
 y   2 2
a b  a
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 y 
b 2

 a2  b

 b  a22

 y b
Hence, x  a, y  b is the solution of the given system of the equations.

𝑥 𝑦
10. +𝑏 =𝑎+𝑏
𝑎
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
1 1
x    y  a  b  0
a b
1 1
2
x 2  y  2  0
a b
Here,
1 1
a1  , b2  , c1    a  b 
a b
1 1
a2  2 , b2  2 , and c2  2
a b
By cross multiplication, we get
x y 1
  
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
  2   2 x   a  b   2  2 x   a  b    
b b a a a b2 a 2 b
x y 1
  
2 a 1 2 1 b 1 1
  2    2  2 2
b b b a a a ab a b
x y 1
  
a 1 1 b 1 1
2
   2 2
 2
b b a a ab a b
x y 1
  
a b a b a b
b2 a2 a 2b 2
a b 1 a b 1
x 2   a 2 and y  2   b2
b a b a a b
2 2
ab a 2b 2
Hence, x  a 2 , y  b 2 is the solution of the given system of the equtaions.

x y

11. a b
ax  by  a 2  b 2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
x y

a b
ax  by  a 2  b 2
1 1
Here a1  , b1  , c1  0
a b

a2  a, b2  b, c2   a 2  b 2 
By cross multiplication, we get
x y 1
 
1
  
  a 2  b2  b  0 
b
1
a
 
 a 2  b2   a  0 1
a
1
 b   a   
 b 
x y 1
 2 2 
a b
2 2
a b b a

b a a b
a 2  b2 a 2  b2
x b  2 b 2 a
b a
 b a
a b ab
a b
2 2
a  b2
2

y a  2 b 2 b
b a
 b a
a b ab
Solution is (a, b)

5 2
12. − 𝑥−𝑦 = −1
𝑥+𝑦
15 7
+ 𝑥−𝑦 = 10, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑥 ≠ 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑦 ≠ 0
𝑥+𝑦
Sol:
1 1
Let  u and  v. Then, the given system of equations becomes
x y x y
5u  2v  1
15u  7v  10
Here
a1  5, b1  2, c1  1
a2  15, b2  7 and c2  10
By cross multiplication, we get
u u 1
  
 2    10   1 7 5   10   115 5  7   2  15
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
u v 1
  
20  7 50  15 35  30
u v 1
  
13 65 65
u v 1
  
13 65 65
Now,
u 1

13 65
13 1
 u 
65 5
And,
v 1

65 65
65
 v 1
65
Now,
1
u
x y
1 1
  ......  i 
x y 5
And,
1
v
x y
1
 1
x y
 x  y 1 ......  ii 
Adding equation (i) and (ii), we get
2x  5 1
 2x  6
6
 x 3
2

2 3
13.   13
x y
5 4
  2, where x  0 and y  0
x y
Sol:
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
The given system of equation is
2 3
  13
x y
5 4
  2, where x  0 and y  0
x y
1 1
Let  u and  v, Then, the given system of equations becomes
x y
2u  3v  13
5u  4v  2
Here,
a1  2, b1  3, c1  13
a2  5, b2  4 and c2  2
By cross multiplication, we have
u v 1
  
3  2   13   4  2  2   13  5 2   4   3  5
u v 1
  
6  52 4  65 8  15
u v 1
  
46 69 23
Now,
u 1

46 23
46
 u 2
23
And
v 1

69 23
69
 v 3
23
Now,
1 1
x 
u 2
And,
1 1
y 
v 3
1 1
Hence, x  , y  is the solution of the given system of equations.
2 3
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
ab
ax  by 
14. 2
3x  5 y  4
Sol:
The given system of equation is
ab
ax  by  ......  i 
2
3x  5 y  4 ......  ii 
From (i), we get
2  ax  by   a  b
 2ax  2by   a  b   0 .....  iii 
From (ii), we get
3x  5 y  4  0
Here,
a1  2a, b1  2b, c1    a  b 
a2  3, b2  5, c2  4
By cross multiplication, we have
x y 1
  
2b   4      a  b    5 2a   4      a  b   3 2a  5  2b  3
x y 1
  
8b  5  a  b  8a  3  a  b  10a  6b
x y 1
  
8b  5a  5b 8a  3a  3b 10a  6b
x y 1
  
5a  3b 5a  3b 10a  6b
Now,
x y 1
 
5a  3b 5a  3b 10a  6b
5a  3b 5a  3b 1
 x  
10a  6b 2  5a  3b  2
And,
y 1

5a  3b 10a  6b
5a  3b
 y 
2  5a  3b 
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

  5a  3b 
 y
2  5a  3b 
5a  3b

2  5a  3b 
1
 y
2
1 1
Hence, x  , y  is the solution of the given system of equations.
2 2

2ax  3by  a  2b
15.
3ax  2by  2a  b
Sol:
The given system of equations is
2ax  3by  a  2b ....  i 
3ax  2by  2a  b ...  ii 
Here,
a1  2a, b1  3b, c1    a  2b 
a2  3a, b 2  2b, c2    2a  b 
By cross multiplication we have
x y 1
  
3b   2a  b      a  2b    2b 2a   2a  b     a  2b    3a 2a  2b  3b  3a
x y 1
  
3b   2a  b   2b  a  2b  2a  2a  b   3a  a  2b  4ab  9ab
x y 1
  
6ab  3b  2ab  4b
2 2
4a  2ab  3a  6ab 4ab  9ab
2 2

x y 1
  2 
4ab  b 2
a  4ab 5ab
Now,
x 1

4ab  b 2
5ab
4ab  b2
x
5ab
b  4a  b 

5ab
4a  b

5a
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
y 1
And, 
a  4ab 5ab
2

a 2  4ab
 y 
5ab
a  a  4b 
 y 
5ab
a  4b
 y 
5b
4b  a
 y
5b
4a  b 4b  a
Hence, x  ,y is the solution of the given system of equation.
5a 5b

5ax  6by  28
16.
3ax  4by  18  0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
5ax  6by  28
 5ax  6by  28  0 .....  i 
and , 3ax  4by  18  0
 3ax  4by  18  0 .....  ii 
Here,
a1  5a, b1  6b, c1  28
a2  3a, b2  4b and c2  18
By cross multiplication we have
x y 1
  
6b   18   28  4b 5a   18   28  3a 5a  4b  6b  3a
x y 1
  
108b  112b 90a  84a 20ab 18ab
x y 1
  
4b 6a 2ab
Now,
x 1

4b 2ab
5b  2a
 x
10ab
And,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
y 1

6a 2ab
6a 3
 y 
2ab b
2 3
Hence, x  , y  is the solution of the given system of equations.
a b
 a  2b  x   2a  b  y  2
17.
 a  2b  x   2a  b  y  3
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
 a  2b  x   2a  b  y  2  0
 a  2b  x   2a  b  y  3  0
Here,
a1  a  2b, b1  2a  b, c1  2
a2  a  2b, b2  2a  b and c2  3
By cross multiplication, we have
x y 1
  
3  2a  b    2  2a  b  3  a  2b    2  a  2b   a  2b  2a  b    2a  b  a  2b 
x y 1
   2

6a  3b  4a  2b 3a  6b  2a  4b 2a  ab  4ab  2b  2a 2  4ab  ab  2b 2
2

x y 1
   2

2a  5b a  10b 2a  ab  4ab  2b  2a 2  4ab  ab  2b 2
2

x y 1
  
2a  5b   a  10b  10ab
x y 1
  
2a  5b a  10b 10ab
Now,
x 1

2a  5b 10ab
a  10b
y
10ab
And,
y 1

a  10b 10ab
a  10b
 y
10ab
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5b  2a a  10b
Hence, x  ,y is the solution of the given system of equations.
10ab 10ab

 ab   ab 
18. xa b    ya b 
 a b   ab 
x  y  2a 2
Sol:
The given system of equation is
 ab   ab 
xa b    ya b  ...…(i)
 a b   ab 
x  y  2a 2 …...(ii)
From equation (i), we get
 ab   ab 
xa b   ya b 0
 a b   ab 
  a  b 2  ab    a  b 2  ab 
 x  y 0
 a b   ab 
   
 a 2  b 2  2ab  ab   a 2  b 2  2ab  ab 
 x  y 0
 a b   ab 
 a 2  b 2  ab   a 2  b 2  ab 
 x  y 0 .....(iii)
 a b   ab 
From equation (ii), we get
x  y  2a 2  0
Here,
a 2  b 2  ab  a 2  b 2  ab 
a1  , b1     , c1  0
a b  ab 
a2  1, b2  1 and c2  2a 2
By cross multiplication, we get
x y 1
  

  a 2  b 2  ab  

2a 2       0  1 2 a2
  a 2  b 2  ab  
      0  1 
a 2  b 2  ab  a  b  ab
 
2 2
 
  ab    a b  a b  a b 
x y 1
   2 2
2  a  b  ab  2  a  b  ab  a  b  ab a 2  b 2  ab
  2a  
2 2 2 2
2a   
 a  b   a  b  a  b ab
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x y 1
  
 a 2  b 2  ab 
2a 2   2a 2    
 
 a 2  b 2  ab   a  b  a 2  b 2  ab   a  b  a 2  b 2  ab  
 ab   a b   a  b  a  b 
x y 1
   3 3
2  a  b  ab 
2 2
2  a  b  ab 
2 2
a  b  a 3  b3
2a   2a  
 ab   a b   a  b  a  b 
x y 1
  
 a  b  ab 
2 2
2  a  b  ab 
2 2
2a 3
2a 2   2 a  
 ab   a b   a  b  a  b 
Now,
x 1

2  a  b  ab  2a 3
2 2
2a  
 ab   a  b  a  b 

 x

2a 2 a 2  b2  ab    a  b  a  b 
ab 2a 3
 a  b   a 2  b2  ab 

a
a b3 3

a  
 a3  b3   a  b  a 2  b2  ab 
 
And,
y 1

 a  b  ab 
2 2
2a 3
2a 2  
 a b   a  b  a  b 

 y

2a 2 a 2  b 2  ab    a  b  a  b 
a b 2a 3



 a  b  a 2  b2  ab 
a
a b
 
3 3
  a 3  b3   a  b  a 2  b 2  ab 
a  
a 3  b3 a 2  b2
Hence, x  ,y is the solution of the given system of equaatiions.
a a
The given system of equation id
 ab   ab 
xa b    ya b  …(i)
 a b   ab 
x  y  2a 2 …(ii)
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
From equation (i), w get
 ab   ab 
xa b   ya b 0
 a b   ab 
  a  b 2  ab    a  b 2  ab 
 x  y 0
 a b   ab 
   
 a 2  b 2  2ab  ab   a 2  b 2  2ab  ab 
 x  y 0
 a b   ab 
 a 2  b 2  ab   a 2  b 2  ab 
 x  y 0 …..(iii)
 a b   ab 
From equation (ii), we get
x  y  2a 2  0 …..(iv)
Here,
a 2  b 2  ab  a 2  b 2  ab 
a1  , b1     , c1  0
a b  ab 
a2  1, b2  1 and c2  2a 2
By cross multiplication we get
x y 1
  
  a 2  b2  ab   2  a  b  ab  a  b  ab  a 2  b2  ab 
 
2 2 2 2

 
2a   
2

ab
   0 1 2a 
 a b
  0 1
 a b
 
 a  b 
  
x y 1
   2 2
 a  b  ab  2  a  b  ab  a  b  ab a 2  b 2  ab
 
2 2 2 2
2a 2   2 a   
 ab   a b  a b ab
x y 1
  
2  a  b  ab  2  a  b  ab  a  b  ab a 2  b 2  ab
2 2

  2a  
2 2 2 2
2a   
 a  b   a  b  a  b ab
x y 1
   3 3
 a  b  ab 
2 2
2  a  b  ab 
2 2
a  b  a 3  b3
2a 2   2 a  
 ab   a b   a  b  a  b 
x y 1
  
 a  b  ab 
2 2
2  a  b  ab 
2 2
2a 3
2a 2   2 a  
 ab   a b   a  b  a  b 
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x 1

2  a  b  ab  2a 3
22
2a   a b a b
 ab    

x

2a 2 a 2  b2  ab    a  b  a  b 
ab 2a 3
 a  b   a 2  b2  ab 

a
a b
3 3

a   
 a 2  b2   a  b  a 2  b2  ab 

And,
y 1

 a  b  ab 
2 2
2a 3
2a 2  
 a b   a  b  a  b 

y

2a 2 a 2  b2  ab    a  b  a  b 
a b 2a 3
 a  b   a 2  b2  ab 

a
a b
3 3

a  
 a3  b3   a  b  a 2  b2  ab 

a 2  b2 a 3  b3
Hence, x  ,y is the solution of the given system of equation.
a a

bx  cy  a  b
19.  1 1   1 1  2a
ax     cy   
 a b a b  ba ba  ab
Sol:
The given system of equation is
bx  cy  a  b ....(i )
 1 1   1 1  2a
ax     cy    .....(ii )
 a b a b  ba ba  ab
From equation (ii), we get
bx  cy   a  b   0 ....  iii 
From equation (ii), we get
 a  b  a  b   b  a   b  a   2a
ax    cy    0
  a  b  a  b     b  a  b  a   a  b
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 aba b   b  a  b  a  2a
 ax    cy    0
  a  b  a  b     b  a  b  a   a  b
 2b   2a  2a
 ax    cy    0
  a  b  a  b     b  a  b  a   a  b
 2ab   2ac  2a
 x   y    0
  a  b  a  b      a  b  a  b   a  b
 2ab   2ac  2a
 x   y    0
  a  b  a  b     a  b  a  b   a  b
1  2abx 2acy 
    2a   0
a b a b a b 
2abx 2acy
   2a  0
a b a b
2abx  2acy  2a  a  b 
 0
a b
 2abx  2acy  2a  a  b   0 .....  iv 
From equation (i) and equation (ii), we get
a1  b, b1  c, c1    a  b 
a2  2ab, b2  2ac and c2  2a  a  b 
By cross multiplication, we get
x y 1
  
2ac  a  b      a  b    2ac  2ab  a  b      a  b   2ab  2abc  2abc
x y 1
  
2a c  2abc   2a c  2abc  2a b  2ab  2a b  2ab  4abc
2 2 2 2 2 2

x y 1
  
2a c  2abc  2a c  2abc 2a b  2ab  2a b  2ab
2 2 2 2 2 2
4abc
x y 1
  
4a c 4ab
2 2
4abc
Now,
x 1

4a c 4abc
2

4a 2 c a
 x 
4abc b
And,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
y 1
2

4ab 4abc
4ab 2 b
 y 
4abc c
a b
Hence, x  , y  is the solution of the given system of the equations.
b c

20.  a  b  x   a  b  y  2a 2  2b 2
 a  b  x  y   4ab
Sol:
The given system of equation is
 a  b  x   a  b  y  2a 2  2b 2 ……(i)
 a  b  x  y   4ab ……(ii)
From equation (i), we get
 a  b  x   a  b  y   2a 2  2b2   0
……(iii)
  a  b  x   a  b  y  2  a 2  b2   0
From equation (ii), we get
 a  b  x   a  b  y  4ab  0 ……(iv)
Here,
a1  a  b, b1  a  b, c1  2  a 2  b 2 
a2  a  b, b2  a  b and c2  4ab
By cross multiplication, we get
x y 1
  
4ab  a  b   2  a  b   a  b  4ab  a  b   2  a  b   a  b   a  b  a  b    a  b  a  b 
2 2 2 2

x y 1
  
2  a  b   2ab  a  b  4ab  a  b   2  a  b  a  b   a  b   a  b   a  b    a  b 
2 2

x y 1
  
2  a  b   a  b  2ab 
2 2
2  a  b   2ab   a  b  a  b    a  b   a  b  a  b 
x y 1
  
2  a  b   a  b  2ab 
2 2
2  a  b   2ab   a 2  b 2  2ab    a  b  2b 
x y 1
  
2  a  b   a  b  2ab 
2 2
2  a  b   a  b  2b  a  b 
2 2

Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x 1

2  a  b   a 2  b2  2ab  2b  a  b 

2  a  b   a 2  b2  2ab 
x
2b  a  b 
a 2  b2  2ab
x
b
a  b2  2ab
2
x
b
2ab  a 2  b2

b
Now,
y 1

2  a  b   a  b  2ab  a  b 
2 2

2  a  b   a 2  b2 
 y 
2b  a  b 
 a  b   a 2  b2 
 y
b  a  b

2ab  a 2  b2  a  b   a 2  b2 
Hence, x  ,y is the solution of the given system of
b b  a  b
equations.
y 1
 4 4
a d  b c
22 2 2
a b
a d  b c
2 2 2 2
 y 
a 4  b4
a 2 d 2  b2c 2
 y
a 4  b4

a 2 x  b2 y  c 2
21.
b2 x  a 2 y  d 2
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
b2 x  a 2 y  d 2  0
Here,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

a1  a 2 , b1  b 2 , c1  c 2
a2  b 2 , b2  a 2 and c2  d 2
By cross multiplication, we have
x y 1
 2 2  2 2 2 2 4 4
b d  a c2 2
a d  b c a b
Now,
x 1
 4 4
b d  a c
2 2 2 2
a b
a c b d
2 2 2 2
 x
a 4  b4
And,
y 1
 4 4
a d  b c
2 2 2 2
a b
a d  b c
2 2 2 2
 y 
a 4  b4
a 2 d 2  b2c 2
 y
a 4  b4
a 2c 2  b 2 d 2 a 2 d 2  b 2c 2
Hence, x  ,y is the solution of the given system of the equations.
a 4  b4 a 4  b4

57 6
22. + 𝑥−𝑦 = 5
𝑥+𝑦
38 21
+ 𝑥−𝑦 = 9
𝑥+𝑦
Sol:
1 1
Let  u and  v. Then, the given system of equations become
x y x y
57u  6v  5  57u  6v  5  0
38u  21v  9  38u  21v  9  0
Here,
a1  57, b1  6, c1  5
a2  38, b2  21, and c2  9
By cross multiplication, we have
u v 1
  
54  105 513  190 1193  228
u v 1
  
51 323 969
u v 1
  
51 323 969
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now,
u 1

51 969
51
 u
969
1
 u
19
And,
v 1

323 969
323
 v
969
1
 v
3
Now,
1
u
x y
1 1
 
x  y 19
 x  y  19 ....  i 
And,
1
v
x y
1 1
 
x y 3
 x y 3 ...  ii 
23. 2(ax – by) + a + 4b = 0
2(bx + ay) + b – 4a = 0
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
2ax  2by  a  4b  0
2bx  2ay  b  4a  0
Here,
a1  2a, b1  2b, c1  a  4b
a2  2b, b2  2a, c2  b  4a
By cross multiplication, we have
x y 1
   2
 2b  b  4a    2a  a  4b   2b b  4a    2a  a  4b  4a  4b 2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x y 1
   2
2b  8ab  2a  8ab 2ab  8a  2ab  8b
2 2 2 2
4a  4b2
x y 1
   2
2a  2b
2 2
8a  8b
2 2
4a  4b2
Now,
x 1
 2
2a  2b
2 2
4a  4b2
2a 2  2b2
 x
4a 2  4b2
2  a 2  b2 

4  a 2  b2 
1

2
And,
y 1
 2
8a  8b
2 2
4a  4b 2
8a 2  8b 2
 y 
4a 2  4b 2
8  a 2  b2 
 y 
4  a 2  b2 
8
 y 
4
 y2
1
Hence, x  , y  2 is the solution of the given system of the equations.
2
The given system of equations may be written as
2ax  2by  a  4b  0
2bx  2ay  b  4a  0
Here,
a1  2a, b1  2b, c1  a  4b
a2  2b, b2  2a, c2  b  4a
By cross multiplication, we have
x y 1
   2
 2b  b  4a    2a  a  4b   2a b  4a    2b  a  4b  4a  4b 2
x 1
  2
2b  8ab  2a  8ab 4a  4b2
2 2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x y 1
   2
2a  2b
2 2
8a  8b
2 2
4a  4b2
Now,
x 1
 2
2a  2b
2 2
4a  4b 2
2a  2b 2
 x 2
4a  4b 2
2  a 2  b 2 

4a 2  4b 2
1

2
And,
y 1
 2
8a  8b
2 2
4a  4b2
8a 2  8b 2
 y 
4a 2  4b 2
8  a 2  b 2 
 y 
4  a 2  b2 
8
 y 
4
 y2
1
Hence, x  , y  2 is the solution of the given system of the equations.
2

6  ax  by   3a  2b
24.
6  bx  ay   3b  2a
Sol:
The given system of equation is
6  ax  by   3a  2b .....  i 
6  bx  ay   3b  2a .....  ii 
From equation (i), we get
6ax  6by   3a  2b   0 ......  iii 
From equation (ii), we get
6bx  6ay   3b  2a   0 ......  iv 
Here,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

a1  6a, b1  6b, c1    3a  2b 
a2  6b, b2  6a and c2    3b  2a 
By cross multiplication, we have
x y 1
 
6b  3b  2a   6a  3a  2b  6a  3b  2a   6b  3a  2b  36a  36b 2
2

x y 1
  
18b  12ab  18a  12ab 18ab  12a  18ab  12b 36  a 2  b2 
2 2 2 2

x y 1
  
18a  18b 12a  12b 36  a 2  b2 
22 2 2

x y 1
  
18  a  b  12  a  b  36  a 2  b2 
2 2 2 2

Now,
x 1

18  a  b  36  a 2  b 2 
2 2

18  a 2  b2 
 x
36  a 2  b2 
1

2
And,
y 1

12  a  b  36  a 2  b 2 
2 2

12  a 2  b 2 
 y
36  a 2  b 2 
1
 y
3
1 1
Hence, x  , y  is the solution of the given system of equations.
2 3

𝑎2 𝑏2
25. − =0
𝑥 𝑦
𝑎2 𝑏 𝑏2 𝑎
+ = 𝑎 + 𝑏, 𝑥, 𝑦 ≠ 0
𝑥 𝑦
Sol:
1 1
Taking  u and  v. Then, the given system of equations become
x y
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

a 2u  b 2 v  0
a 2bu  b2 av   a  b   0
Here,
a1  a 2 , b1  b2 , c1  0
a2  a 2b, b2  b2 a, and c2    a  b 
By cross multiplication, we have
u v 1
 2  2  3 2
b  a  b   0  b a  a  a  b   0  a b a b  a 2b 3
2 2

u v 1
  2  2 2
b a  b a a  b a b a  b
2

Now,
u 1
 2 2
b  a  b a b a  b
2

b2  a  b 
 u 2 2
a b a  b
1
 u
a2
And,
v 1
 2 2
a a  b a b a  b
2

a2  a  b 
 v 2 2
a b a  b
1
 v
b2
Now,
1
x   a2
u
And,
1
y   b2
v
Hence, x  a 2 , y  b 2 is the solution of the given system of equations.

26. mx – my = m2 + n2
x + y = 2m
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

mx  ny   m 2  n 2   0
x  y  2m  0
Here,
a1  m, b1  n, c1    m2  n 2 
a2  1, b2  1, and c2  2m
By cross multiplication, we have
x y 1
 
2mn   m  n  2m   m  n  m  n
2 2 2 2 2

x y 1
  
2mn  m  n2 2
m  n
2 2
mn
x y 1
  
 m  n  m  n m  n
2 2 2

Now,
x 1

 m  n mn
2

 x
m  n  2

mn
 x  mn
And,
y 1

m  n
2 2
mn
m  n 2
2
 y 
mn
m  n2
2
 y
mn

 y
 m  n  m  n 
mn
 y  mn
Hence, x  m  n, y  m  n is the solution of the given system of equation.

𝑎𝑥 𝑏𝑦
27. − =𝑎+𝑏
𝑏 𝑎
𝑎𝑥 − 𝑏𝑦 = 2𝑎𝑏
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a b
x    y  a  b  0
b a
ax  by  2ab  0
Here,
a b
a1  , b1   , c1    a  b 
b a
x y 1
  
2b  ab  b
2 2
2a  a  ab a  b
2 2

x y 1
  2 
b  ab a  ab a  b
2

x y 1
  
b  b  a  a  a  b  b  a
Now,
x 1

b b  a  b  a
b b  a 
 x b
ba
And,
y 1

a b  a  b  a
a b  a 
 y 
ba
 y  a
 y  a
Hence, x  b, y  a is the solution of the given system of equations.

x  y   a 2  b2   0
b a
28.
a b
x  y  2ab  0
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as

x  y   a 2  b2   0
b a
a b
x  y  2ab  0
Here,
a1  , b1  , c1    a 2  b 2 
b a
a b
a2  1, b2  1, and c2  2ab
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
By cross multiplication, we have
x y 1
 
a a b a
2ab   a 2  b 2 2ab   a 2  b 2 
b b a b
x y 1
   2
2a  a  b
2 2 2
2b  a  b
2 2 2
b  a2
ab
x y 1
  
b2  a 2 b 2  a 2 b2  a 2
ab
Now,
x 1
 2
b a
2 2
b  a2
ab
ab
 x  b2  a 2  2
b  a2
 x  ab
And,
y 1
 2
b  a
2 2
b  a2
ab
ab
  y  b 2  a 2  2
b  a2
 y    b2  a 2   2
ab

b  a2
  y  ab
 y  ab
Hence, x  ab, y  ab is the solution of the given system of equations.

Exercise 3.5
In each of the following systems of equations determine whether the system has a unique
solution, no solution or infinitely many solutions. In case there is a unique solution, find it:
(1 −4)
x  3y  3  0
1.
3x  9 y  2  0
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x  3y  3  0
3x  9 y  2  0
The given system of equations is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  1, b1  3, c1  3
And a2  3, b2  9, c2  2
We have,
a1 1

a2 3
b1 3 1
 
b2 9 3
c1 3 3
And,  
c2 2 2
a1 b1 c1
Clearly,  
a2 b2 c2
So, the given system of equation has no solutions.

2x  y  5  0
2.
4 x  2 y  10  0
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
2x  y  5  0
4 x  2 y  10  0
The given system of equations is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  2, b1  1, c1  5
And a2  4, b2  2, c2  10
We have,
a1 2 1
 
a2 4 2
b1 1

b2 2
c1 5 1
And,  
c2 10 2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
Clearly,  
a2 b2 c2
So, the given system of equation has infinity many solutions.

3x  5 y  20
3.
6 x  10 y  40
Sol:
3x  5 y  20
6 x  10 y  40
Compare it with
a1 x  by1  c1  0
a1 x  by2  c2  0
We get
a1  3, b1  5 and c1  20
a 2  6, b2  10 and c 2  40
a1 3 b1 5 c 20
 ,  and 1 
a2 6 b2 10 c2 40
Simplifying it we get
a1 1 b1 1 c 1
 ,  and 1 
a2 2 b2 2 c2 2
Hence
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
So both lines are coincident and overlap with each other
So, it will have infinite or many solutions

x  2y 8  0
4.
5 x  10 y  10  0
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
x  2y 8  0
5 x  10 y  10  0
The given system if equation is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  1, b1  2, c1  8
And, a2  5, b2  10, c2  10
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
We have,
a1 1

a2 5
b1 2 1
 
b2 10 5
c1 8 4
And,  
c2 10 5
a1 b2 c1
Clearly,  
a2 b2 c2
So, the given system of equation has no solution.

kx  2 y  5  0
5.
3x  y  1  0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
kx  2 y  5  0
3x  y  1  0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  k , b1  2, c1  5
And, a2  3, b2  1, c2  1
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1

a2 b2
k 2
 
3 1
 k 6
So, the given system of equations will have a unique solution for all real values of k other
than 6.

6. 4x + ky + 8 = 0
2x + 2y + 2 = 0
Sol:
Here a1  4, a2  k , b1  2, b2  2
a1 b1
Now for the given pair to have a unique solution: 
a2 b2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
4 k
i.e., 
2 2
i.e., k  4
Therefore, for all values of k, except 4, the given pair of equations will have a unique
solution.

4x  5 y  k
7.
2 x  3 y  12
Sol:
The given system of equation is
4x  5 y  k  0
2 x  3 y  12  0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  4, b1  5, c1  k
And, a2  2, b2  3, c2  12
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1

a2 b2
4 5
 
2 3
 k is any real number.
So, the given system of equations will have a unique solution for all real values of k.

x  2y  3
8.
5 x  ky  7  0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
x  2y 3  0
5 x  ky  7  0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  1, b1  2, c1  3
And, a2  5, b2  k , c2  7
For a unique solution, we must have
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1

a2 b2
1 2
 
5 k
 k  10
So, the given system of equations will have a unique solution for all real values of k other
than 10.

Find the value of k for which each of the following systems of equations have definitely many
solution: (9-19)
2x  3y  5  0
9.
6 x  ky  15  0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
2x  3y  5  0
6 x  ky  15  0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  2, b1  3, c1  5
And, a2  6, b2  k , c2  15
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
2 3
 
6 k
 2k  18
18
 k  9
2
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k  9.

4x  5 y  3
10.
kx  15 y  9
Sol:
The given system of equation is
4x  5 y  3  0
kx  15 y  9  0
The system of equation is of the form
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  4, b1  5, c1  3
And, a2  k , b2  15, c2  9
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
4 5 3
  
k 15 9
Now,
4 5

k 15
4 1
 
k 3
 k  12
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k  12.

kx  2 y  6  0
11.
4x  3y  9  0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
kx  2 y  6  0
4x  3y  9  0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  k , b1  2, c1  6
And, a2  4, b2  3, c2  9
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
k 2 6
  
4 3 9
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
k 6

4 9
k 2
 
4 3
2 4
 k
3
8
 k
3
8
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k  .
3

8x  5 y  9
12.
kx  10 y  18
Sol:
The given system of equation is
8x  5 y  9  0
kx  10 y  18  0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  8, b1  5, c1  9
And, a2  k , b2  10, c2  18
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
8 5 9
  
k 10 18
Now,
8 5

k 10
 8 10  5  k
8 10
 k
5
 k  8  2  16
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k  16.
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2x  3y  7
13.
 k  2  x   2k  1 y  3  2k  1
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
2x  3y  7  0
 k  2  x   2k  1 y  3  2k  1  0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  2, b1  3, c1  7
And, a2  k , b2    2k  1 , c2  3  2k  1
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
2 3 7
  
k  2   2k  1 3  2k  1
2 3 3 7
  and 
k  2   2k  1   2k  1 3  2k  1
 2  2k  1  3  k  2  and 3  3  2k  1  7  2k  1
 4k  2  3k  6 and 18k  9  14k  7
 4k  3k  6  2 and 18k  14k  7  9
 k  4 and 4k  16  k  4
 k  4 and k  4
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k  4.

2x  3y  2
14.
 k  2  x   2k  1 y  2  k  1
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
2x  3y  2  0
 k  2  x   2k  1 y  2  k  1  0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  2, b1  3, c1  2
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

And, a2  k  2, b2   2k  1 , c2  2  k  1
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
2 3 2
  
k  2  2k  1 2  k  1
2 3 3 2
  and 
k  2  2k  1  2k  1 2  k  1
 2  2k  1  3  k  2  and 3  k  1   2k  1
 4k  2  3k  6 and 3k  3  2k  1
 4k  3k  6  2 and 3k  2k  1  3
 k  4 and k  4
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k  4.

x   k  1 y  4
15.
 k  1 x  9 y   5k  2 
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
x   k  1 y  4  0
 k  1 x  9 y  5k  2   0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  1, b1  k  1, c1  4
And, a2  k  1, b2  9, c2    5k  2 
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
1 k 1 4
  
k 1 9   5k  2 
1 k 1 k 1 4
  and 
k 1 9 9 5k  2
9   k  1 and  k  1 5k  2   36
2

 9  k 2  1  2k and 5k 2  2k  5k  2  36
 k 2  2k  1  9  0 and 5k 2  7k  2  36  0
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 k 2  2k  8  0 and 5k 2  7k  34  0
 k 2  4k  2k  8  0 and 5k 2  17k  10k  34  0
 k  k  4   2  k  4   0 and  5k  17   2  5k  17   0
  k  4  k  2   0 and  5k  17  k  2   0
17
  k  4 or k  2  and  k  
or k  2 
 5 
 k  2 satisfies both the conditions
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k  2.

kx  3 y  2k  1
16.
2  k  1 x  9 y   7 k  1
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
kx  3 y   2k  1  0
2  k  1 x  9 y   7k  1  0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  k , b1  3, c1    2k  1
And, a2  2  k  1 , b2  9, c2    7k  1
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
1 3   2k  1
  
2  k  1 9   7k  1
k 3 3 2k  1
  and 
2  k  1 9 9 7k  1
 9k  3  2  k  1 and 3  7k  1  9  2k  1
 9k  6  k  1 and 21k  3  18k  9
 9k  6k  6 and 21k  18k  9  3
 3k  6 and 3k  6
6 6
 k  and k 
3 3
 k  2 and k  2
 k  2 satisfies both the conditions
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k  2.

2x   k  2 y  k
17.
6 x   2k  1 y   2k  5
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
2x   k  2 y  k  0
6 x   2k  1 y   2k  5  0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  2, b1  k  2, c1  k
And, a2  6, b2  2k  1, c2    2k  5 
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
2 k 2 k
  
6 2k  1 2  2k  5
2 k 2 k 2 k
  and 
6 2k  1 2k  1 2k  5
1 k 2
  and  k  2  2k  5  k  2k  1
3 2k  1
 2k  1  3  k  2  and 2k 2  5k  4k  10  2k 2  k
 2k  3k  6 and k  10  k
 2k  3k  6  1 and k  k  10
 k  5 and 2k  10
5 10
 k and k 
1 2
 k  5 and k  5
 k  5 satisfies both the conditions
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k  5.

2x  3y  7
18.
 k  1 x   2k  1 y   4k  1
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2x  3y  7  0
 k  1 x   2k  1 y   4k  1  0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  2, b1  3, c1  7
And, a2  k  1, b2  2k  1, c2    4k  1
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
2 3 7
  
k  1 2k  1   4k  1
2 3 3 7
  and 
k  1 2k  1 2k  1 4k  1
 2  2k  1  3  k  1 and 3  4k  1  7  2k  1
 4k  2  3k  3 and 12k  3  14k  7
 4k  3k  3  2 and 12k  14k  7  3
 k  5 and  2k  10
10
 k  5 and k   5
2
 k  5 satisfies both the conditions
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k  5.

2x  3y  k
19.
 k  1 x   k  2  y  3k
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
2x  3y  k  0
 k  1 x   k  2  y  3k  0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  2, b1  3, c1  k
And, a2  k  1, b2  k  2, c2  3k
For a unique solution, we must have
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
2 3 k
  
k  1 k  1 3k
2 3 3 k
  and 
k 1 k 1 k  1 3k
 2  k  2   3  k  1 and 3  3  k  2
 2k  4  3k  3 and 9  k  2
 4  3  3k  2k and 9  2  k
 7  k and 7  k
 k  7 and k  7
 k  7 satisfies both the conditions
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions, if k  7.

Find the value of k for which the following system of equations has no solution: (20 – 25)
kx  5 y  2
20.
6x  2 y  7
Sol:
Given
kx  5 y  2
6x  2 y  7
Condition for system of equations having no solution
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
k 5 2
  
6 2 7
 2k  30
 k  15

x  2y  0
21.
2 x  ky  5  0
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
x  2y  0
2 x  ky  5  0
The system of equation is of the form
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  1, b1  2, c1  0
And, a2  2, b2  k , c2  5
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
We have,
a1 1

a2 2
b1 2

b2 k
c1 0
And, 
c2 5
a1 b1
Now, 
a2 b2
1 2
 
2 k
 k 4
Hence, the given system of equations has no solutions, when k  4.

3x  4 y  7  0
22.
kx  3 y  5  0
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
3x  4 y  7  0
kx  3 y  5  0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  3, b1  4, c1  7
And, a2  k , b2  3, c2  5
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
We have,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
b1 4

b2 3
c1 7
and , 
c2 5
b1 c1
Clearly, 
b2 c2
So, the given system will have no solution.
a b 3 4 9
If 1  1   k 
a2 b2 k 3 4
a1 b1 c1
Clearly, for this value of k, we have  
a2 b2 c2
9
Hence, the given system of equations has no solutions, when k  .
4

2 x  ky  3  0
23.
3x  2 y  1  0
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
2 x  ky  3  0
3x  2 y  1  0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  2, b1  k , c1  3
And, a2  3, b2  2, c2  1
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
We have,
a1 2

a2 3
c1 3
and , 
c2 1
a1 c1
Clearly, 
a2 c2
So, the given system will have no solution. If
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 2 k 4
 i.e.,  k 
a2 b2 k 2 3
4
Hence, the given system of equations has no solutions, k  .
3

2 x  ky  11  0
24.
5x  7 y  5  0
Sol:
The given system of equation is
2 x  ky  11  0
5x  7 y  5  0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  2, b1  k , c1  11
And, a2  5, b2  7, c2  5
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
2 k 11
  
5 7 5
2 k k 11
  and 
5 7 7 5
Now,
2 k

5 7
 2   7   5k
 5k  14
14
 k
5
14 k 11
Clearly, for we have 
5 7 5
14
Hence, the given system of equation will have no solution, if k 
5

kx  3 y  3
25.
12 x  ky  6
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
kx  3 y  3
12 x  ky  6
a1 b1 c1
For no solution  
a2 b2 c2
k 2 3
  
12 k 6
k 3

12 k
k 2  36
k  6 i.e., k  6, 6
Also,
3 3

k 6
3 6
k
3
k 6
k  6 satisfies both the condition
Hence, k  6

26. For what value of 𝛼, the following system of equations will be inconsistent?
4 x  6 y  11  0
2 x  ky  7  0
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
4 x  6 y  11  0
2 x  ky  7  0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  4, b1  6, c1  11
And, a2  2, b2  k , c2  7
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1

a2 b2
4 6
 
2 k
 4k  12
12
 k 3
4
Clearly, for this value of k, we have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
Hence, the given system of equation is inconsistent, when k  3.

27. For what value of 𝛼, the system of equations


 x  3y    3
12 x   y  
will have no solution?
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
 x  3 y    3   0
12 x   y    0
The system of equation is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1   , b1  3, c1     3
And, a2  12, b2   , c2  
For a unique solution, we must have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
 3    3 
  
12  
Now,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

3    3 

 
3  3
 
 
 3  3
 33  
 6
  6
And,
 3

12 
   36
2

   6
   6    6
Hence, the given system of equation will have no solution, if   6.

28. Find the value of k for which the system


kx + 2y = 5
3x + y = 1
has (i) a unique solution, and (ii) no solution.
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
kx  2 y  5  0
3x  y  1  0
It is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  k , b1  2, c1  5
And, a2  3, b2  1, c2  1
(i) The given system will have a unique solution, if
a1 b1

a2 b2
k 2
 
3 1
 k 6
So, the given system of equations will have a unique solution, if k  6
(ii) The given system will have no solution, if
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
We have
b1 2 c 5 5
  and 1  
b2 1 c2 1 1
b1 c1
Clearly, 
b2 c2
So, the given system of equations will have no solution, if
a1 b1

a2 b2
k 2
 
3 1
 k 6
Hence, the given system of equations will have no solution, if k  6.

29. Prove that there is a value of c (≠ 0) for which the system


6x  3y  c  3
12 x  cy  c
has infinitely many solutions. Find this value.
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
6 x  3 y   c  3  0
12 x  cy  c  0
This is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  6, b1  3, c1    c  3
And, a2  12, b2  c, c2  c
For infinitely many solutions, we must have
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
6 13   c  3
  
12 c c
6 13 3 c 3
  and 
12 c c c
 6c  12  3 and 3   c  3
36
 c and c  3  3
6
 c  6 and c  6
Now,
a1 6 1
 
a2 12 2
b1 3 1
 
b2 6 2
c1   6  3 1
 
c2 6 2
a1 b1 c1
  
a2 b2 c2
a1 b1 c1
Clearly, for this value of c, we have  
a2 b2 c2
Hence, the given system of equations has infinitely many solutions, if c  6.

30. Find the values of k for which the system


2x + ky = 1
3x – 5y = 7
will have (i) a unique solution, and (ii) no solution. Is there a value of k for which the
system has infinitely many solutions?
Sol:
The given system of equation may be written as
2 x  ky  1  0
3x  5 y  7  0
It is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  2, b1  k , c1  1
And, a2  3, b2  5, c2  7
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
(i) The given system will have a unique solution, if
a1 b1

a2 b2
2 k
 
3 5
 10  3k
 3k  10
10
 k
3
10
So, the given system of equations will have a unique solution, if k  .
3
(ii) The given system will have no solution, if
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
We have
a1 b1

a2 b2
2 k
 
3 5
 10  3k
 3k  10
10
 k
3
We have
b1 k 10 2
  
b2 5 3  5 3
c1 1 1
And,  
c2 7 7
b1 c1
Clearly, 
b2 c2
10
So, the given system of equations will have no solution, if k 
3
For the given system to have infinite number of solutions, we must have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
We have,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 2 b1 k
 , 
a2 3 b2 5
c1 1 1
And,  
c2 7 7
a1 c1
Clearly, 
a2 c2
So, whatever be the value of k, we cannot have
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
Hence, there is no value of k, for which the given system of equations has infinitely many
solutions.

31. For what value of k, the following system of equations will represent the coincident lines?
x  2y  7  0
2 x  ky  14  0
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
x  2y  7  0
2 x  ky  14  0
The given system of equations is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  1, b1  2, c1  7
And a2  2, b2  k , c2  14
The given equations will represent coincident lines if they have infinitely many solutions,
The condition for which is
a1 b1 c1 1 2 7
     k4
a2 b2 c2 2 k 14
Hence, the given system of equations will represent coincident lines, if k  4.

32. Obtain the condition for the following system of linear equations to have a unique solution
ax  by  c
lx  my  n
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
ax  by  c  0
lx  my  n  0
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
It is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  1, b1  2, c1  c
And a2  l , b2  m, c2  n
For unique solution, we must have
a1 b1

a2 b2
a b
 
l m
 am  bl
Hence, am  bl is the required condition.

33. Determine the values of a and b so that the following system of linear equations have
infinitely many solutions:
 2a  1 x  3 y  5  0
3x   b  1 y  2  0
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
 2a  1 x  3 y  5  0
3x   b  1 y  2  0
It is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  2a, b1  3, c1  5
And a2  3, b2  b  1, c2  2
The given system of equations will have infinite number of solutions, if
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
2a  1 3 5
  
3 b  1 2
5 3 5
 2  2a  1  and 
2 b  1 2
 2  2a  1  5  3 and 3  2  5  b  1
 4a  2  15 and 6  5b  5
 4a  15  2 and 6  5  5b
17 11
 a and b
4 5
17 11
 a and b 
4 5
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions,
17 11
If a  and b  .
4 5

34. Find the values of a and b for which the following system of linear equations has infinite
number of solutions:
2x  3y  7
 a  b  x   a  b  3  y  4a  b
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
2x  3y  7  0
 a  b  x   a  b  3  y   4a  b   0
It is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  2, b1  3, c1  7
And a2  a  b, b2    a  b  3 , c2    4a  b 
The given system of equations will have infinite number of solutions, if
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
2 3 7
  
a  b   a  b  3    4a  b 
2 3 3 7
  and 
a  b  a  b  3 a  b  3 4a  b
 2  a  b  3  3  a  b  and 3  4a  b   7  a  b  3
 6  3a  2a  3b  2b and 12a  7a  3b  7b  21
 6  a  b and 5a  4b  21
Now,
a  b  6
 a  6  b
Substituting the value of ‘a’ in 5a  4b  2, we get
5  b  6   4b  21
 5b  30  4b  21
 9b  21  30
 9b  9
9
 b  1
9
Putting b  1 in a  b  6, we get
a    1  6  1  6  5
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions,
If a  5 and b  1.

35. Find the values of p and q for which the following system of linear equations has infinite
number of solutions:
2x  3y  9
 p  q  x   2 p  q  y  3  p  q  1
Sol:
The given system of equations may be written as
2x  3y  9  0
 p  q  x   2 p  q  y  3  p  q  1  0
It is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  2, b1  3, c1  9
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

And a2  p  q, b2  2 p  q, c2  3  p  q  1
The given system of equations will have infinite number of solutions, if
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
2 2 9
  
p  q 2 p  q 3  p  q  1
2 3 3
  
p  q 2 p  q p  q 1
2 3 3 3
  and 
p  q 2p q 2 p  q p  q 1
 2  2 p  q   3  p  q  and p  q  1  2 p  q
 4 p  2q  3 p  3q and  2 p  p  q  q  1
 p  5q  0 and  p  2q  1
 p  5q  p  2q  1 [On adding]
 3q  1
1
 q
3
1
Putting q  in p  5q, we get
3
1
p  5   0
3
5
 p
3
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions,
5 1
If p  and q 
3. 3

36. Find the values of a and b for which the following system of equations has infinitely many
solutions:
2x  3 y  7
 a  b  x   a  b  y  3a  b  2
Sol:
2x  3y  7  0
 a  b  x   a  b  y   3a  b  2   0
Here, a1  2, b1  3, c1  7
a2   a  b  , b2   a  b  , c2    3a  b  2 
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 2 b1 3 c1 7 7
 ,  ,  
a2 a  b b2 a  b c2   3a  b  2   3a  b  2 
For the equation to have infinitely many solutions, we have:
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
2 7

a  b 3a  b  2
6a  2b  4  7a  7b
a  9b  4 ......... 1
2 3

a b a b
2a  2b  3a  3b
a  5b  0 ........  2 
Subtracting (1) from (2), we obtain:
4b  4
b 1
Substituting the value of b in equation (2), we obtain
a  5 1  0
a5
Thus, the values of a and b are 5 and 1 respectively.

(i)
 2a  1 x  3 y  5
3x   b  2  y  3
Sol:
The given system of equations is
 2a  1 x  3 y  5  0
3x   b  2  y  3  0
It is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  2a  1, b1  3, c1  5
And, a2  3, b2  b  2, c2  3
The given system of equations will have infinite number of solutions, if
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
2a  1 3 5
  
3 b  2 3
2a  1 3 5
  
3 b2 3
2a  1 5 3 5
  and 
3 3 b2 3
3  2a  1
  5 and  9  5  b  2 
3
 2a  1  5 and  9  5b  b  2 
 2a  5  1 and  9  10  5b
6
 a  and 1  5b
2
1
 a  3 and  b
5
1
 a  3 and b 
5
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions,
1
If a  3 and b 
5

(ii)
2 x   2a  5  y  5
 2b  1 x  9 y  15
Sol:
The given system of equations is
2 x   2a  5  y  5  0
 2b  1 x  9 y  15  0
It is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  x  b1    2a  5 , c1  5
And, a2   2b  1 , b2  9, c2  15
The given system of equations will be have infinite number of solutions, if
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
2   2a  5  5
  
2b  1 9 15
2 2a  5 1
  
2b  1 9 3
2 1 2a  5 1
  and 
2b  1 3 9 3
3  2a  5 
 6  2b  1 and 1
9
 6  1  2b and 2a  5  3
 5  2b and 2a  2
5 2
  b and a   1
2 2
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions,
5
If a  1 and b  .
2
(iii)
 a  1 x  3 y  2
6 x  1  2b  y  6
Sol:
The given system of equations is
 a  1 x  3 y  2  0
6 x  1  2b  y  6  0
It is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  a  1, b1  3, c1  2
And, a2  6, b2  1  2b, c2  6
The given system of equations will be have infinite number of solutions, if
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
a 1 3 2
  
6 1  2b 6
a 1 3 1
  
6 1  2b 3
a 1 1 3 1
  and 
b 3 1  2b 3
 3  a  1  6 and 3  3  1  2b
 a  1  2 and 9  1  2b
 a  2  1 and 2b  1  9
 a  3 and 2b  8
8
 a  3 and b   4
2
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions,
If a  3 and b  4.

(iv)
3x  4 y  12
 a  b  x  2  a  b  y  5a  1
Sol:
The given system of equations is
3x  4 y  12  0
 a  b  x  2  a  b  y   5a  1  0
It is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  3, b1  4, c1  12
And, a2  a  b, b2  2  a  b  , c2    5a  1
The given system of equations will be have infinite number of solutions, if
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
3 4 12
  
a  b 2  a  b  5a  1
3 2 2 12
  and 
a b a b a  b 5a  1
 3  a  b   2  a  b  and 2  5a  1  12  a  b 
 3a  3b  2a  2b and 10a  2  12a  12b
 3a  2a  2b  3b and 10a  12a  12b  2
 a  5b and  2a  12b  2
Substituting a  5b in 2a  12b  2, we get
2  5b   12b  2
 10b  12b  2
 12b  10b  2
 2b  2
 b 1
Putting b  1 in a  5b, we get
a  5 1  5
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions,
If a  5 and b  1.

(v)
2x  3y  7
 a  1 x   a  1 y  (3a  1)
Sol:
The given system of equations is
2x  3y  7  0
 a  1 x   a  1 y   3a  1  0
It is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  2, b1  3, c1  7
And, a2  a  1, b2  a  1, c2    3a  1
The given system of equations will be have infinite number of solutions, if
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
2 3 7
  
a  b a  1   3a  1
2 3 7
  
a  1 a  1 3a  1
3 3 3 7
  and 
a 1 a 1 a  1 3a  1
 2  a  1  3  a  1 and 3  3a  1  7  a  1
 2a  2  3a  3 and 9a  3  7a  7
 2a  3a  3 and 9a  3  7a  7
 a  5 and 2a  10
10
 a  5 and a   5
2
 a5
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions,
If a  5.

(vi)
2x  3y  7
 a  1 x   a  2  y  3a
Sol:
The given system of equations is
2x  3y  7  0
 a  1 x   a  2  y  3a  0
It is of the form
a1 x  b1 y  c1  0
a2 x  b2 y  c2  0
Where, a1  2, b1  3, c1  7
And, a2  a  1, b2  a  1, c2  3a
The given system of equations will be have infinite number of solutions, if
a1 b1 c1
 
a2 b2 c2
2 3 7
  
a  b a  1 3a
2 3 7
  
a  1 a  2 3a
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2 3 3 7
  and 
a 1 a  2 a  2 3a
 2  a  2   3  a  1 and 3  3a  7  a  2 
 2a  4a  3 and 9a  7a  14
 2a  3a  3 and 9a  7a  14
 a  7 and 2a  14
14
 a  7 and a  7
2
 a7
Hence, the given system of equations will have infinitely many solutions,
If a  7.

Exercise 3.6

1. 5 pens and 6 pencils together cost Rs 9 and 3 pens and 2 pencils cost Rs 5. Find the cost of
1 pen and 1 pencil.
Sol:
Let the cost of a pen be Rs x and that of a pencil be Rs y. Then,
5x  6 y  9 .......  i 
and 3x  2 y  5 ......  ii 
Multiplying equation (i) by 2 and equation (ii) by 6, we get
10 x  12 y  18 ......  iii 
18 x  12 y  30 ......  iv 
Subtracting equation (iii) by equation (iv), we get
18 x  10 x  12 y  12 y  30  18
 8 x  12
12 3
 x    1.5
8 2
Substituting x  1.5 in equation (i), we get
5 1.5  6 y  9
 7.5  6 y  9
 6 y  9  7.5
 6 y  1.5
1.5 1
 y   0.25
6 4
Hence, cost of one pen  Rs 1.50 and cost of one pencil  Rs 0.25
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2. 7 audio cassettes and 3 video cassettes cost Rs 1110, while 5 audio cassettes and 4 video
cassettes cost Rs 1350. Find the cost of an audio cassette and a video cassette.
Sol:
Let the cost of a audio cassette be Rs x and that of a video cassette be Rs y. Then,
7 x  3 y  1110 ....  i 
and 5 x  4 y  1350 ....  ii 
Multiplying equation (i) by 4 and equation (ii) by 3, we get
28 x  12 y  4440 ......  iii 
15 x  12 y  4050 ......  iv 
Subtracting equation (iv) from equation (iii), we get
28 x  15 x  12 y  12 y  4440  4050
 13x  390
390
 x  30
13
Substituting equation (iv) from equation (iii), we get
28x  15 x  12 y  12 y  4440  4050
 13x  390
390
 x  30
13
Substituting x  30 in equation (i), w get
7  30  3 y  1110
 210  3 y  1110
 3 y  1110  210
 3 y  900
900
 y  300
3
Hence, cost of one audio cassette  Rs 30 and cost of one video cassette  Rs 300

3. Reena has pens and pencils which together are 40 in number. If she has 5 more pencils and
5 less pens, then nuimber of pencils would become 4 times the number of pens. Find the
original number of pens and pencils.
Sol:
Let the number of pens be x and that of pencil be y. then,
x  y  40 .......(i )
and  y  5  4  x  5
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
 y  5  4 x  20
 5  20  4 x  y
 4 x  y  25 ......  ii 
Adding equation (i) and equation (ii), we get
x  4 x  40  25
 5 x  65
65
 x  13
5
Putting x  13 in equation (i), we get
13  y  40
 y  40  13  27
Hence, Reena has 13 pens 27 pencils.

4. 4 tables and 3 chairs, together, cost Rs 2,250 and 3 tables and 4 chairs cost Rs 1950. Find
the cost of 2 chairs and 1 table.
Sol:
Let the cost of a table be Rs x and that of a chairs be Rs y. Then,
4 x  3 y  2, 250 .....  i 
and , 3x  4 y  1950 .....(ii)
Multiplying equation (i) by 4 and equation (ii) by 3, we get
16 x  12 y  9000 ......(iii )
9 x  12 y  5850 .......  iv 
Subtracting equation (iv) by equation (iii), we get
16 x  9 x  9000  5850
 7 x  3150
3150
 x  450
7
Putting x  450 in equation (i), we get
4  450  3 y  2, 250
 1800  3 y  2250
 3 y  2250  1800
 3 y  450
450
 y  150
3
 2 y  2 150  300
Cost of 2 chairs  Rs 300 and cost of 1 table  Rs 450
The cost of 2 chairs and 1 table  300  450  Rs 750
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

5. 3 bags and 4 pens together cost Rs 257 whereas 4 bags and 3 pens together cost R 324.
Find the total cost of 1 bag and 10 pens.
Sol:
Let the cost of a bag be Rs x and that of a pen be Rs y . Then,
3x  4 y  257 .....  i 
and , 4 x  3 y  324 .....  ii 
Multiplying equation (i) by 3 and equation (ii) by 4, we get
9 x  12 y  770 ....  iii 
16 x  12 y  1296 ......  iv 
Subtracting equation (iii) by equation (iv), we get
16 x  9 x  1296  771
 7 x  525
525
 x  75
7
Cost of a bag  Rs 75
Putting x  75 in equation (i), we get
3  75  4 y  257
 225  4 y  257
 4 y  257  225
 4 y  32
32
 y 8
4
 Cost of a pen  Rs 8
 Cost of 10 pens  8 10  Rs 80
Hence, the total cost of 1 bag and 10 pens  75  80  Rs 155.

6. 5 books and 7 pens together cost Rs 79 whereas 7 books and 5 pens together cost Rs 77.
Find the total cost of 1 book and 2 pens.
Sol:
Let the cost of a book be Rs x and that of a pen be Rs y. Then,
5 x  7 y  79 .....  i 
and , 7 x  5 y  77 ....  ii 
Multiplying equation (i) by 5 and equation (ii) by 7, we get
25  35 y  395 ......  iii 
49 x  35 y  539 .......  iv 
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Subtracting equation (iii) by equation (iv), we get
49 x  25 x  539  395
 24 x  144
144
 x 6
24
 Cost of a book  Rs 6
Putting x  6 in equation (i), we get
5  6  7 y  79
 30  7 y  79
 7 y  79  30
 7 y  49
79
 y 7
7
 Cost of a pen  Rs 7
 Cost of 2 pens  2  7  Rs 14
Hence, the total cost of 1 book and 2 pens  6  14  Rs 20

7. A and B each have a certain number of mangoes. A says to B, “if you give 30 of your
mangoes, I will have twice as many as left with you.” B replies, “if you give me 10, I will
have thrice as many as left with you.” How many mangoes does each have?
Sol:
Suppose A has x mangoes and B has y mangoes
According to the given conditions, we have
x  30  2  y  30 
 x  30  2 y  60
 x  2 y  60  30
 x  2 y  90 ....  i 
And, y  10  3  x  10 
 y  10  3x  30
 10  30  3x  y
 3x  y  40 ....  ii 
Multiplying equation (i) by 3 and equation (ii) by 1, we get
3x  6 y  270 .....  iii 
3x  y  40 ......  iv 
Subtracting equation (iv) by equation (iii), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

6 y    y   270  40
 6 y  y  310
 5 y  310
310
 y  62
5
Putting x  62 in equation (i), we get
x  2  62  90
 x  124  90
 x  90  124
 x  34
Hence, A has 34 mangoes and B has 62 mangoes

8. On selling a T.V. at 5%gain and a fridge at 10% gain, a shopkeeper gains Rs 2000. But if
he sells the T.V. at 10% gain and the fridge at 5% loss. He gains Rs 1500 on the
transaction. Find the actual prices of T.V. and fridge.
Sol:
Let the price of a T.V. be Rs x and that of a fridge be Rs y. Then, we have
5 x 10 y
  2000
100 100
 5 x  10 y  200000
 5  x  2 y   200000
 x  2 y  400000 ...  i 
10 x 5 y
And,   1500
100 100
 10 x  5 y  150000
 5  2 x  y   150000
 2 x  y  30000
Multiplying equation (ii) by 2, we get
4 x  2 y  6000 .....  iii 
Adding equation (i) and equation (iii), we get
x  4 x  40000  60000
 5 x  100000
 x  20000
Putting x  20000 in equation (i), we get
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
20000  2 y  40000
 2 y  40000  20000
20000
 y  10000
2
Hence, the actual price of T.V  Rs 20, 000 and, the actual price of fridge  Rs 10, 000

9. The coach of a cricket team buys 7 bats and 6 balls for Rs 3800. Later, he buys 3 bats and 5
balls for Rs 1750. Find the cost of each bat and each ball.
Sol:
Let the cost of bat and a ball be x and y respectively
According to the given information
7 x  6 y  3800 …….(1)
3x  5 y  1750 ……..(2)
From (1), we obtain
3800  7 x
y ……..(3)
6
Substituting this value in equation (2), we obtain
 3800  7 x 
3x  5    1750
 6 
9500 35 x
3x    1750
3 6
35x 9500
3x   1750 
6 3
35x 5250  9500
3x  
6 3
17 x 4250
 
6 3
17 x  8500
x  500  4
Substituting this in equation (3), we obtain
3800  7  500
y
6
300
  50
6
Hence, the cost of a bat is Rs 500 and that of a ball is Rs 50.
Concept Insight: Cost of bats and balls needs to be found so the cost of a ball and bat will
be taken as the variables. Applying the conditions of total cost of bats and balls algebraic
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
equations will be obtained. The pair of equations can then be solved by suitable
substitution.

10. One says, “Give me a hundred, friend! I shall then become twice as rich as you.” The other
replies, “If you give me ten, I shall be six times as rich as you.” Tell me what is the amount
of their respective capital?
Sol:
Let the money with the first person and second person be Rs x and Rs y respectively.
According to the question
x  100  2  y  100 
x  100  2 y  200
x  2 y  300 ……(1)
6  x  10    y  10 
6 x  30  y  10
6 x  y  70 …….(2)
Multiplying equation (2) by 2, we obtain
12 x  2 y  140 …….(3)
Subtracting equation (1) from equation (3), we obtain:
11x  140  300
11x  440
x  40
Putting the value of x in equation (1), we obtain
40  2 y  300
40  300  2 y
2 y  340
y  170
Thus, the two friends had Rs 40 and Rs 170 with them.

11. A lending library has a fixed charge for the first three days and an additional charge for
each day thereafter. Saritha paid Rs 27 for a book kept for seven days, while Susy paid Rs
21 for the book she kept for five days. Find the fixed charge and the charge for each extra
day.
Sol:
Let the fixed charge for first three days and each day charge thereafter be Rs x and Rs y
respectively.
According to the question,
Class X Chapter 3 – Pair of Linear Equations in Two Variables Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

x  4 y  27 ... 1
x  2 y  21 ...  2 
Subtracting equation (2) from equation (1), we obtain:
2y  6
y3
Subtracting the value of y in equation (1), we obtain
x  12  27
x  15
Hence, the fixed charge is Rs 15 and the charge per day is Rs 3.
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

Exercise 4.1

1. (i) All circles are .......... (congruent, similar).


(ii) All squares are .......... (similar, congruent).
(iii) All .......... triangles are similar (isosceles, equilaterals):
(iv) Two triangles are similar, if their corresponding angles are .......... (proportional, equal)
(v) Two triangles are similar, if their corresponding sides are .......... (proportional, equal)
(vi) Two polygons of the same number of sides are similar, if (a) their corresponding angles
are and (b) their corresponding sides are .......... (equal, proportional).
Sol:
(i) All circles are similar
(ii) All squares are similar
(iii)All equilateral triangles are similar
(iv) Two triangles are similar, if their corresponding angles are equal
(v) Two triangles are similar, if their corresponding sides are proportional
(vi) Two polygons of the same number of sides are similar, if (a) their corresponding angles
are equal and (b) their corresponding sides are proportional.

2. Write the truth value (T/F) of each of the following statements:


(i) Any two similar figures are congruent.
(ii) Any two congruent figures are similar.
(iii) Two polygons are similar, if their corresponding sides are proportional.
(iv) Two polygons are similar if their corresponding angles are proportional.
(v) Two triangles are similar if their corresponding sides are proportional.
(vi) Two triangles are similar if their corresponding angles are proportional.
Sol:
(i) False
(ii) True
(iii)False
(iv) False
(v) True
(vi) True

Exercise 4.2

1. In ∆ABC, D and E are points on the sides AB and AC respectively such that DE || BC
(i) If AD = 6 cm, DB = 9 cm and AE = 8 cm, find AC.
𝐴𝐷 3
(ii) If 𝐷𝐵 = 4 and AC = 15 cm, find AE
𝐴𝐷 2
(iii) If 𝐷𝐵 = 3 and AC = 18 cm, find AE
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

(iv) If AD = 4, AE = 8, DB = x – 4, and EC = 3x – 19, find x.


(v) If AD = 8cm, AB = 12 cm and AE = 12 cm, find CE.
(vi) If AD = 4 cm, DB = 4.5 cm and AE = 8 cm, find AC.
(vii) If AD = 2 cm, AB = 6 cm and AC = 9 cm, find AE.
𝐴𝐷 4
(viii) If 𝐵𝐷 = 5 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝐸𝐶 = 2.5 𝑐𝑚, 𝑓𝑖𝑛𝑑 𝐴𝐸
(ix) If AD = x, DB = x − 2, AE = x + 2 and EC = x − 1, find the value of x.
(x) If AD = 8x − 7, DB = 5x − 3, AE = 4x − 3 and EC = (3x − 1), find the value of x.
(xi) If AD = 4x − 3, AE = 8x – 7, BD = 3x – 1 and CE = 5x − 3, find the volume of x.
(xii) If AD = 2.5 cm, BD = 3.0 cm and AE = 3.75 cm, find the length of AC.
Sol:
(i)

We have,
DE || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionally theorem,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
We have 𝐷𝐵 = 𝐸𝐶
6 8
⇒ 9 = 𝐸𝐶
2 8
⇒ 3 = 𝐸𝐶
8×3
⇒ EC = 2
⇒ EC = 12 cm
⇒ Now, AC = AE + EC = 8 + 12 = 20 cm
∴ AC = 20 cm

(ii)
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

We have,
𝐴𝐷 3
= 4 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝐷𝐸 | |𝐵𝐶
𝐷𝐵
𝑇ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑒, 𝑏𝑦 𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑖𝑐 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑎𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑚, 𝑤𝑒 ℎ𝑎𝑣𝑒
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
=
𝐷𝐵 𝐸𝐶
Adding 1 on both sides, we get
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
+ 1 = 𝐸𝐶 + 1
𝐷𝐵
3 𝐴𝐸+𝐸𝐶
+1=
4 𝐸𝐶
3+4 𝐴𝐶
⇒ = 𝐸𝐶 [∵ AE + EC = AC]
4
7 15
⇒ 4 = 𝐸𝐶
15×4
⇒ EC = 7
60
⇒ EC = 7
Now, AE + EC = AC
60
⇒ AE + = 15
7
60
⇒ AE = 15 − 7
105−60
= 7
45
= 7
= 6.43 cm
∴ AE = 6.43 cm

(iii)

We have,
𝐴𝐷 2
= 3 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝐷𝐸 | | 𝐵𝐶
𝐷𝐵
𝑇ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑒, 𝑏𝑦 𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑖𝑐 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑎𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑚, 𝑤𝑒 ℎ𝑎𝑣𝑒,
𝐴𝐷 𝐸𝐶
= 𝐴𝐸
𝐷𝐵
3 𝐸𝐶
⇒ 2 = 𝐴𝐸
Adding 1 on both sides, we get
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

3 𝐸𝐶
+ 1 = 𝐴𝐸 + 1
2
3+2 𝐸𝐶+𝐴𝐸
⇒ =
2 𝐴𝐸
5 𝐴𝐶
⇒ 2 = 𝐴𝐸 [∵ AE + EC = AC]
5 18
⇒ 2 = 𝐴𝐸 [∵ AC = 18]
18×2
⇒ 𝐴𝐸 = 5
36
⇒ 𝐴𝐸 = = 7.2 𝑐𝑚
5
(iv)

We have,
DE || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionality theorem, we have,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
=
𝐷𝐵 𝐸𝐶
4 8
= 3𝑥−19
𝑥−4
⇒ 4(3x – 19) = 8(x – 4)
⇒ 12x – 76 = 8x – 32
⇒ 12x – 8x = −32 + 76
⇒ 4x = 44
44
⇒𝑥= = 11𝑐𝑚
4
∴ x = 11 cm

(v)

We have,
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

AD = 8cm, AB = 12 cm
∴ BD = AB – AD
= 12 – 8
⇒ BD = 4 cm
And, DE || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionality theorem, we have,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
=
𝐵𝐷 𝐶𝐸
8 12
⇒ 4 = 𝐶𝐸
12×4 12
⇒ CE = =
8 2
⇒ CE = 6cm
∴ CE = 6cm

(vi)

We have,
DE || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionality theorem, we have,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
=
𝐷𝐵 𝐸𝐶
4 8
⇒ 4.5 = 𝐸𝐶
8×4.5
⇒ 𝐸𝐶 = 4
⇒ EC = 9cm
Now, AC = AE + EC
=8+9
= 17 cm
∴ AC = 17 cm

(vii)
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

We have,
AD = 2 cm, AB = 6 cm
∴ DB = AB – AD
=6–2
⇒ DB = 4 cm
And, DE || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionality theorem, we have,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
=
𝐷𝐵 𝐸𝐶
Taking reciprocal on both sides, we get,
𝐷𝐵 𝐸𝐶
= 𝐴𝐸
𝐴𝐷
4 𝐸𝐶
= 𝐴𝐸
2
Adding 1 on both sides, we get
4 𝐸𝐶
+ 1 = 𝐴𝐸 + 1
2
4+2 𝐸𝐶+𝐴𝐸
⇒ =
2 𝐴𝐸
6 𝐴𝐶
⇒ 2 = 𝐴𝐸 [∵ EC + AE = AC]
6 9
⇒ 2 = 𝐴𝐸 [∵ AC = 9cm]
9×2
𝐴𝐸 = 6
⇒ 𝐴𝐸 = 3𝑐𝑚

(viii)

We have, DE || BC
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

Therefore, by basic proportionality theorem,


We have,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
=
𝐵𝐷 𝐸𝐶
4 𝐴𝐸
⇒ 5 = 2.5
4×2.5
⇒ AE = 5
⇒ AE = 2cm

(ix)

We have,
DE || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionality theorem,
We have,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
=
𝐷𝐵 𝐸𝐶
𝑥 𝑥+2
⇒ 𝑥−2 = 𝑥−1
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 1) = (𝑥 + 2)(𝑥 − 2)
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 𝑥 = 𝑥 2 − (2)2 [∵ (a – b) (a + b) = 𝑎2 − 𝑏 2 ]
⇒ −𝑥 = −4
⇒ x = 4 cm
∴ x = 4 cm

(x)
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

We have,
DE || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionality theorem, we have,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
=
𝐷𝐵 𝐸𝐶
8𝑥−7 4𝑥−3
⇒ 5𝑥−3 = 3𝑥−1
⇒ (8𝑥 − 7)(3𝑥 − 1) = (4𝑥 − 3)(5𝑥 − 3)
⇒ 24𝑥 2 − 8𝑥 − 21𝑥 + 7 = 20𝑥 2 − 12𝑥 − 15𝑥 + 9
⇒ 24𝑥 2 − 20𝑥 2 − 29𝑥 + 27𝑥 + 7 − 9 = 0
⇒ 4𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 2 = 0
⇒ 2[2𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 1] = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 1 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 + 1𝑥 − 1 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥(𝑥 − 1) + 1(𝑥 − 1) = 0
⇒ (2x + 1) (x – 1) = 0
⇒ 2x + 1 = 0 or x – 1 = 0
1
⇒ x = − 2 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 1
1
𝑥 = − 2 𝑖𝑠 𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑏𝑙𝑒
∴x=1

(xi)
We have, DE || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionality theorem,
We have,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
=
𝐷𝐵 𝐸𝐶
4𝑥−3 8𝑥−7
⇒ 3𝑥−1 = 5𝑥−3
⇒ (4𝑥 − 3)(5𝑥 − 3) = (8𝑥 − 7)(3𝑥 − 1)
⇒ 4𝑥(5𝑥 − 3) − 3(5𝑥 − 3) = 8𝑥(3𝑥 − 1) − 7(3𝑥 − 1)
⇒ 20𝑥 2 − 12𝑥 − 15𝑥 + 9 = 24𝑥 2 − 8𝑥 − 21𝑥 + 7
⇒ 4𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 2 = 0
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

⇒ 2(2𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 1)= 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 − 𝑥 − 1 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 + 1𝑥 − 1 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥(𝑥 − 1) + 1(𝑥 − 1) = 0
⇒ (2x + 1) (x – 1) = 0
⇒ 2x + 1 = 0 or x – 1 = 0
1
⇒ x = − 2 or x = 1
1
x = − 2 is not possible
∴x=1

(xii)

We have, DE || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionality theorem, we have,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
=
𝐷𝐵 𝐸𝐶
2.5 3.75
⇒ 3.0 = 𝐸𝐶
3.75×3 375×3
⇒ 𝐸𝐶 = =
2.5 250
15×3
⇒ EC = 10
45
= 10 = 4.5 𝑐𝑚
Now, AC = AE + EC = 3.75 + 4.5 = 8.25
∴ AC = 8.25 cm

2. In a ∆ABC, D and E are points on the sides AB and AC respectively. For each of the
following cases show that DE || BC:
(i) AB = 2cm, AD = 8cm, AE = 12 cm and AC = l8cm.
(ii) AB = 5.6cm, AD = 1.4cm, AC= 7.2 cm and AE = 1.8 cm.
(iii) AB = 10.8 cm, BD = 4.5 cm, AC = 4.8 cm and AE = 2.8 cm.
(iv) AD = 5.7 cm, BD = 9.5 cm, AE = 3.3 cm and EC = 5.5 cm.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

AB = 12 cm, AD = 12 cm and AC = 18 cm.


∴ DB = AB – AD
= 12 – 8
⇒ DB = 4 cm
And, EC = AC – AE
= 18 – 12
⇒ EC = 6 cm
𝐴𝐷 8 2
Now, 𝐷𝐵 = 4 = 1 [∵ DB = 4 cm]
𝐴𝐸 12 2
And, 𝐸𝐶 = =1 [∵ EC = 6 cm]
6
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
⇒ 𝐷𝐵 = 𝐸𝐶
Thus, DE divides sides AB and AC of ∆ABC in the same ratio.
Therefore, by the converse of basic proportionality theorem,
(ii)
We have, DE || BC

We have,
AB = 5.6 cm, AD = 1.4 cm, AC = 7.2 cm and AE = 1.8 cm
∴ DB = AB – AD
= 5.6 – 1.4
⇒ DB = 4.2 cm
And, EC = AC – AE
= 7.2 – 1.8
⇒ EC = 5.4 cm
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

𝐴𝐷 1.4 1
Now, 𝐷𝐵 = 4.2 = 3 [∵ DB = 4.2 cm]
𝐴𝐸 1.8 1
And, 𝐸𝐶 = 5.4 = 3 [∵ EC = 5.4 cm]
Thus, DE divides sides AB and AC of ∆ABC in the same ratio.
Therefore, by the converse of basic proportionality theorem,

(iii)
We have,

We have,
AB = 10.8cm, BD = 4.5cm, AC = 4.8 cm and AE = 2.8cm
∴ AD = AB – DB = 10.8 – 4.5
⇒ AD = 6.3 cm
And, EC = AC – AE
= 4.8 – 2.8
⇒ EC = 2 cm
𝐴𝐷 6.3 7
Now, 𝐷𝐵 = 4.5 = 5 [∵ AD = 6.3 cm]
𝐴𝐸 2.8 28 75
And, 𝐸𝐶 = = 20 = [∵ EC = 2 cm]
2 5
Thus, DE divides sides AB and AC of ∆ABC in the same ratio. Therefore, by the converse
of basic proportionality theorem.

(iv)

We have,
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

DE || BC
We have, AD = 5.7 cm, BD = 9.5 cm, AE = 3.3 cm and EC = 5.5 cm
𝐴𝐷 5.7 57
Now 𝐵𝐷 = 9.5 = 95
𝐴𝐷 3
⇒ 𝐵𝐷 = 5
𝐴𝐸 3.3 33
And, 𝐸𝐶 = 5.5 = 55
𝐴𝐸 3
⇒ 𝐸𝐶 = 5
Thus DE divides sides AB and AC of ∆ABC in the same ratio.
Therefore, by the converse of basic proportionality theorem. We have DE || BC

3. In a ∆ABC, P and Q are points on sides AB and AC respectively, such that PQ || BC. If AP
= 2.4 cm, AQ = 2 cm, QC = 3 cm and BC = 6 cm, find AB and PQ.
Sol:

We have || BC
Therefore, by BPT
We have,
𝐴𝑃 𝐴𝑄
= 𝑄𝐶
𝑃𝐵
2.4 2
=3
𝑃𝐵
3×2.4 3×24 3×6 18
⇒ PB = = = =
2 2 5 5
⇒ PB = 3.6 cm
Now, AB = AP + PB
= 2.4 + 3.6 = 6cm
Now, In ∆APQ and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [common]
∠APQ = ∠ABC [∵ PQ || BC ⇒ Corresponding angles are equal]
⇒ ∆APQ ~ ∆ABC [By AA criteria]
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐶
⇒ 𝐴𝑃 = 𝑃𝑄 [corresponding sides of similar triangles are proportional]
6×2.4
⇒ PQ = 6
⇒ PQ = 2.4 cm
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

Hence, AB = 6 cm and PO = 2.4 cm


4. In a ∆ABC, D and E are points on AB and AC respectively such that DE || BC. If AD =
2.4cm, AE = 3.2 cm, DE = 2cm and BC = 5 cm, find BD and CE.
Sol:

We have,
DE || BC
Now, In ∆ADE and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [common]
∠ADE = ∠ABC [∵ DE || BC ⇒ Corresponding angles are equal]
⇒ ∆ADE ~ ∆ABC [By AA criteria]
𝐴𝐵 𝐴𝐷
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 = 𝐷𝐸 [corresponding sides of similar triangles are proportional]
2.4×5
⇒ AB = 2
⇒ AB = 1.2 × 5 = 6.0 cm
⇒ AB = 6 cm
∴ BD = 6 cm
BD = AB – AD
= 6 – 2.4 = 3.6 cm
⇒ DB = 3.6 cm
Now,
𝐴𝐶 𝐴𝐸
= 𝐷𝐸 [∵ Corresponding sides of similar triangles are equal]
𝐵𝐶
𝐴𝐶 3.2
⇒ =
5 2
3.2×5
⇒ 𝐴𝐶 = = 1.6 × 5 = 8.0 𝑐𝑚
2
⇒ AC = 8 cm
∴ CE = AC – AE
= 8 – 3.2 = 4.8 cm
Hence, BD = 3.6 cm and CE = 4.8 cm
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

5. In below Fig., state if PQ || EF.

Sol:
We have,
DP = 3.9 cm, PE = 3cm, DQ = 3.6 cm and QF = 2.4 cm
𝐷𝑃 3.9 1.3 13
Now, 𝑃𝐸 = = = 10
3 1
𝐷𝑄 3.6 36 3
And, 𝑄𝐹 = 2.4 = 24 = 2
𝐷𝑃 𝐷𝑄
⇒ 𝑃𝐸 ≠ 𝑄𝐹
So, PQ is not parallel to EF

6. M and N are points on the sides PQ and PR respectively of a ∆PQR. For each of the
following cases, state whether MN || QR
(i) PM = 4cm, QM = 4.5 cm, PN = 4 cm and NR = 4.5 cm
Sol:

(i) We have, PM = 4cm, QM = 4.5 cm, PN = 4 cm and NR = 4.5 cm


𝑃𝑀 4 8
Hence, 𝑄𝑀 = 4.5 = 9
𝑃𝑁 4 8
Also, 𝑁𝑅 = 4.5 = 9
𝑃𝑀 𝑃𝑁
Hence, 𝑄𝑀 = 𝑁𝑅
By converse of proportionality theorem
MN || QR
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

7. In three line segments OA, OB, and OC, points L, M, N respectively are so chosen that LM
|| AB and MN || BC but neither of L, M, N nor of A, B, C are collinear. Show that LN ||AC.
Sol:

We have,
LM || AB and MN || BC
Therefore, by basic proportionality theorem,
We have,
𝑄𝐿 𝑂𝑀
= 𝑀𝐵 …(i)
𝐴𝐿
𝑂𝑁 𝑂𝑀
𝑎𝑛𝑑, 𝑁𝐶 = 𝑀𝐵 …(ii)
𝐶𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 (𝑖)𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 (𝑖𝑖), 𝑤𝑒 𝑔𝑒𝑡,
𝑂𝑁 𝑂𝑁
=
𝐴𝐿 𝑁𝐶
Thus, LN divides sides OA and OC of ∆OAC in the same ratio. Therefore, by the converse
of basic proportionality theorem,
we have, LN || AC

8. If D and E are points on sides AB and AC respectively of a ∆ABC such that DE || BC and
BD = CE. Prove that ∆ABC is isosceles.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

We have, DE || BC
Therefore, by BPT, we have,
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
= 𝐸𝐶
𝐷𝐵
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
⇒ 𝐷𝐵 = 𝐷𝐵 [∵BD = CE]
⇒ AD = AE
Adding DB on both sides
⇒ AD + DB = AE + DB
⇒ AD + DB = AE + EC [∴ BD = CE]
⇒ AB = AC
⇒ ∆ ABC is isosceles

Exercise 4.3

1. In a ∆ABC, AD is the bisector of ∠A, meeting side BC at D.


(i) If BD = 2.5cm, AB = 5cm and AC = 4.2cm, find DC.
(ii) If BD = 2cm, AB = 5cm and DC = 3cm, find AC.
(iii) If AB = 3.5 cm, AC = 4.2 cm and DC = 2.8 cm, find BD.
(iv) If AB = lo cm, AC =14 cm and BC =6 cm, find BD and DC.
(v) If AC = 4.2 cm, DC = 6 cm and 10 cm, find AB
(vi) If AB = 5.6 cm, AC = 6cm and DC = 3cm, find BC.
(vii) If AD = 5.6 cm, BC = 6cm and BD = 3.2 cm, find AC.
(viii) If AB = 10cm, AC = 6 cm and BC = 12 cm, find BD and DC.
Sol:
(i)

We have,
∠BAD = ∠CAD
We know that, the internal bisector of an angle of a triangle divides the opposite side
internally in the ratio of the sides containing the angle.
𝐵𝐷 𝐴𝐵
∴ 𝐷𝐶 = 𝐴𝐶
2.5 5
⇒ 𝐷𝐶 = 4.2
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

2.5×4.2
⇒ 𝐷𝐶 = 5
25×42 5×42 210
= 5×100 = = 100 = 2.1 𝑐𝑚
100
∴ DC = 2.1 cm
(ii)

We have,
AD is the bisector of ∠A
We know that, the internal bisector of an angle of a triangle divides the opposite
side internally in the ratio of the sides containing the angle.
𝐵𝐷 𝐴𝐵
∴ =
𝐷𝐶 𝐴𝐶
2 5
⇒ 3 = 𝐴𝐶
5×3 15
⇒ AC = =
2 2
⇒ AC = 7.5 cm

(iii)

In ∆ABC, AD is the bisector of ∠A.


We know that, the internal bisector of an angle of a triangle divides the
opposite side internally in the ratio of the sides containing the angle.
𝐵𝐷 𝐴𝐵
∴ 𝐷𝐶 = 𝐴𝐶
𝐵𝐷 3.5
⇒ 2.8 = 4.2
3.5×2
= 3
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

7
= 3 = 2.33 𝑐𝑚
∴ 𝐵𝐷 = 2.3 𝑐𝑚

(iv)

In ∆ABC, AD is the bisector of ∠A


We know that, the internal bisector of an angle of a triangle divides the opposite side
internally in the ratio of the sides containing the angle.
𝐵𝐷 𝐴𝐵
∴ 𝐷𝐶 = 𝐴𝐶
𝑥 10
⇒ 6−𝑥 = 14
⇒ 14x = 10(6 – x)
⇒ 24x = 60
60 5
⇒ 𝑥 = 24 = 2 = 2.5𝑐𝑚
Since, DC = 6 – x = 6 – 2.5 = 3.5 cm
Hence, BD = 2.5cm, and DC = 3.5 cm

(v)

We have,
BC = 10 cm, DC = 6 cm and AC = 4.2 cm
∴ BD = BC – DC = 10 – 6 = 4 cm
⇒ BD = 4 cm
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

In ∆ABC, AD is the bisector of ∠A.


We know that, the internal bisector of an angle of a triangle divides the opposite
side internally in the ratio of the sides containing the angle.
𝐵𝐷 𝐴𝐵
∴ 𝐷𝐶 = 𝐴𝐶
4 𝐴𝐵
⇒ 6 = 4.2 [∵ BD = 4 cm]
⇒ AB = 2.8 cm
(vi)

We have, In ∆ABC, AD is the bisector of ∠A.


We know that, the internal bisector of an angle of a triangle divides the opposite
side internally in the ratio of the sides containing the angle.
𝐵𝐷 𝐴𝐵
∴ 𝐷𝐶 = 𝐴𝐶
𝐵𝐷 5.6
⇒ =
3 6
5.6×3 5.6
⇒ BD = = = 2.8𝑐𝑚
6 2
⇒ BD = 2.8 cm
Since, BC = BD + DC
= 2.8 + 3
= 5.8 cm
∴ BC = 5.8 cm
(vii)

We have,
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

In ∆ABC, AD is the bisector of ∠A.


We know that, the internal bisector of an angle of a triangle divides the opposite
side internally in the ratio of the containing the angle.
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐷
∴ 𝐴𝐶 = 𝐷𝐶
5.6 3.2
= 6−3.2 [∵ DC = BC – BD]
𝐴𝐶
5.6 3.2
⇒ 𝐴𝐶 = 2.8
5.6 ×2.8
⇒ 𝐴𝐶 = 3.2
5.6×7
= = 0.7 × 7
8
= 4.9 𝑐𝑚
(viii)

In ∆ABC, AD is the bisector of ∠A.


We know that, the internal bisector of an angle of a triangle divides the opposite
side internally in the ratio of the sides containing the angle.
𝐵𝐷 𝐴𝐵
∴ 𝐷𝐶 = 𝐴𝐶
𝑥 10
⇒ 12−𝑧 = 6
⇒ 6x = 10(12 – x)
⇒ 6x = 120
120
⇒𝑥= = 7.5 𝑐𝑚
16
∴ BD = 7.5 cm and DC = 12 – x = 12 – 7.5 = 4.5 cm
Hence, BD = 7.5 cm and DC = 4.5 cm

2. In Fig. 4.57, AE is the bisector of the exterior ∠CAD meeting BC produced in E. If AB =


10cm, AC = 6cm and BC = 12 cm, find CE.
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

Sol:
In ∆ABC, AD is the bisector of ∠A.
We know that, the internal bisector of an angle of a triangle divides the opposite side
internally in the ratio of the sides containing the angle.
𝐵𝐷 𝐴𝐵 𝑥 10
∴ 𝐷𝐶 = 𝐴𝐶 ⇒ 12−𝑥 = 6
⇒ 6(12 + x) = 10x
⇒ 72 + 6x = 10x
⇒ 4x – 72
72
⇒x= = 18 𝑐𝑚
4
∴ CE = 18 cm

𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐷
3. In Fig. 4.58, ∆ABC is a triangle such that 𝐴𝐶 = 𝐷𝐶 , ∠𝐵 = 70°, ∠𝐶 = 50°. 𝐹𝑖𝑛𝑑 ∠𝐵𝐴𝐷.

Sol:
We have, if a line through one vertex of a triangle divides the opposite side in the ratio of
the other two sides, then the line bisects the angle at the vertex.
∴ ∠1 = ∠2
In ∆ABC
∠A + ∠B + ∠C = 180°
⇒ ∠A + 70 ° + 50° = 180° [∵ ∠B = 70° and ∠C = 50°]
⇒ ∠A = 180° − 120° = 60°
⇒ ∠1 + ∠2 = 60°
⇒ ∠1 + ∠1 = 60° [∵ ∠1 = ∠2]
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

⇒ 2∠1 = 60°
⇒ ∠1 = 30°
∴ ∠BAD = 30°

𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐷
4. In ∆ABC (Fig., 4.59), if ∠1 = ∠2, prove that 𝐴𝐶 = 𝐷𝐶 .

Sol:

Given: A ∆ABC in which ∠1 = ∠2


𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐷
To prove: 𝐴𝐶 = 𝐷𝐶
Construction: Draw CE || DA to meet BA produced in E.
Proof: since, CE || DA and AC cuts them.
∴ ∠2 − ∠3 …. (i) [Alternate angles]
And, ∠1 − ∠4 ….(ii) [Corresponding angles]
But, ∠1 − ∠2 [Given]
From (i) and (ii), we get
∠3 − ∠4
Thus, in ∆ACE, we have
∠3 = ∠4
⇒ AE = AC … (iii) [Sides opposite to equal angles are equal]
Now, In ∆BCE, we have
DA || CE
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

𝐵𝐷 𝐵𝐴
⇒ 𝑫𝑪 = 𝑨𝑬 [Using basic proportionality theorem]
𝐵𝐷 𝐴𝐵
⇒ 𝐷𝐶 = 𝐴𝐶 [∵ BA – AB and AE – AC from (iii)]
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐷
Hence, 𝐴𝐶 = 𝐷𝐶

5. D, E and F are the points on sides BC, CA and AB respectively of ∆ABC such that AD
bisects ∠A, BE bisects ∠B and CF bisects ∠C. If AB = 5 cm, BC = 8 cm and CA = 4 cm,
determine AP, CE and BD.
Sol:

In ∆ABC, CF bisects ∠C.


We know that, the internal bisector of an angle of a triangle divides the opposite side
internally in the ratio of the sides containing the angle.
𝐴𝐹 𝐴𝐶
∴ 𝐹𝐵 = 𝐵𝐶
𝐴𝐹 4
⇒ 5−𝐴𝐹 = 8 [∵ FB = AB – AF = 5 – AF]
𝐴𝐹 1
⇒ 5−𝐴𝐹 = 2
⇒ 2AF = 5 – AF
⇒ 2AF + AF = 5
⇒ 3AF = 5
5
⇒ AF = 3 cm
Again, In ∆ABC, BE bisects ∠B.
𝐴𝐸 𝐴𝐵
∴ 𝐸𝐶 = 𝐵𝐶
4−𝐶𝐸 5
⇒ =8 [∵ AE = AC – CE = 4 – CE]
𝐶𝐸
⇒ 8(4 − 𝐶𝐸) = 5 × 𝐶𝐸
⇒ 32 – 8CE = 5CE
⇒ 32 = 13CE
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

32
⇒ CE = 13 cm
Similarly,
𝐵𝐷 𝐴𝐷
=
𝐷𝐶 𝐴𝐶
𝐵𝐷 5
⇒ 8−𝐵𝐷 = 4 [∵ DC = BC – BD = 8 – BD]
⇒ 4BD = 40 – 5BD
⇒ 9BD = 40
40
⇒ BD = cm
9
5 32 40
Hence, AF = 3 𝑐𝑚, CE = 13 cm and BD = cm.
9

6. In fig., 4.60, check whether AD is the bisector of ∠A of ∆ABC in each of the following:

(i) AB = 5cm, AC = 10cm, BD = 1.5 cm and CD = 3.5 cm


(ii) AB = 4 cm, AC = 6 cm, BD = 1.6 cm and CD = 2.4 cm
(iii) AB = 8 cm, AC = 24 cm, BD = 6 cm and BC = 24cm
(iv) AB = 6 cm, AC = 8cm, BD = l.5 cm and CD= 2 cm.
(v) AB = 5 cm, AC = l2 cm, BD = 2.5 cm and BC = 9cm
Sol:
Now,
𝐵𝐷 1.5 3
= 3.5 = 7
𝐶𝐷
𝐴𝐵 5 1
And, 𝐴𝐶 = 10 = 2
𝐵𝐷 𝐴𝐵
⇒ 𝐶𝐷 ≠ 𝐴𝐶
⇒ AD is not the bisector of ∠A.
Now,
𝐴𝐵 4 2
=6=3
𝐴𝐶
𝐵𝐷 1.6 2
And, 𝐶𝐷 = 2.4 = 3
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐷
⇒ 𝐴𝐶 = 𝐶𝐷
⇒ AD is the bisector of ∠A.
𝐴𝐵 8 1
Now, 𝐴𝐶 = 24 = 3
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

𝐵𝐷 𝐵𝐷
And, 𝐶𝐷 = 𝐵𝐶−𝐵𝐷 [∵ CD = BC – BD]
𝐵𝐷
= 24−6
6
= 18
1
=3
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐷
∴ 𝐴𝐶 = 𝐶𝐷
∴ 𝐴𝐷 𝑖𝑠 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑏𝑖𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 𝑜𝑓 ∠𝐴 𝑜𝑓 ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶.
𝐴𝐵 6 3
=8=4
𝐴𝐶
𝐵𝐷 2.5
And, = [∵ CD = BC – BD]
𝐶𝐷 𝐵𝐶−𝐵𝐷
2.5
= 9−2.5
2.5
= 6.5
1
=3
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐷
∴ 𝐴𝐶 ≠ 𝐶𝐷
∴ AD is not the bisector of ∠A of ∆ABC.

Exercise 4.4

1. (i) In below fig., If AB || CD, find the value of x.

Sol:
Since diagonals of a trapezium divide each other proportionally.
𝐴𝑂 𝐵𝑂
∴ 𝑂𝐶 = 𝑂𝐷
4 𝑥+1
⇒ 4𝑥−2 = 2𝑥+4
⇒ 4(2𝑥 + 4) = (𝑥 + 1)(4𝑥 − 2)
⇒ 8x + 16 = x(4x – 2) +1(4x – 2)
⇒ 8x + 16 = 4x2 + 2x – 2
⇒ 4𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 − 8𝑥 − 2 − 16 = 0
⇒ 4𝑥 2 − 6𝑥 − 18 = 0
⇒ 2[2𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 − 9] = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 − 9 = 0
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

⇒ 2𝑥(𝑥 − 3) + 3(𝑥 − 3) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 3)(2𝑥 + 3) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 − 3 = 0 or 2𝑥 + 3 = 0
3
⇒ 𝑥 = 3 or 𝑥 = − 2
3
⇒ x = 3 or 𝑥 = − 2
3 3 1
𝑥 = − 2 is not possible, because OB = x + 1 = − 2 + 1 = − 2
Length cannot be negative
𝐴𝑂 𝐵𝑂
∴ 𝑂𝐶 = 𝑂𝐷

(ii) In the below fig., If AB || CD, find the value of x.

3𝑥−1 2𝑥+1
⇒ 5𝑥−3 = 6𝑥−5
⇒ (3x – 1) (6x – 5) = (2x + 1) (5x – 3)
⇒ 3x (6x – 5) – 1(6x – 5) = 2x (5x – 3) + 1 (5x – 3)
⇒ 18𝑥 2 − 15𝑥 − 6𝑥 + 5 = 10𝑥 2 − 6𝑥 + 5𝑥 − 3
⇒ 8𝑥 2 − 20𝑥 + 8 = 0
⇒ 4(2𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 + 2) = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 − 1𝑥 + 2 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥(𝑥 − 2) − 1(𝑥 − 2) = 0
⇒ (2𝑥 − 1)(𝑥 − 2) = 0
⇒ 2x – 1 = 0 or x – 2 = 0
1
⇒ 𝑥 = 2 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 2
1
𝑥 = 2 is not possible, because, OC = 5x – 3
1
= 5 (2) − 3
5−6 1
= = −2
2

(iii) In below fig., AB || CD. If OA = 3x – 19, OB = x – 4, OC = x – 3 and OD = 4, find x.


Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

Since diagonals of a trapezium divide each other proportionally.


𝐴𝑂 𝐵𝑂
∴ 𝑂𝐶 = 𝑂𝐷
3𝑥−19 𝑥−4
⇒ =
𝑥−3 4
⇒ 4(3𝑥 − 19) = (𝑥 − 4)(𝑥 − 3)
⇒ 12x – 76 = x (x – 3) −4(x – 3)
⇒ 12𝑥 − 76 = 𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 − 4𝑥 + 12
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 7𝑥 − 12𝑥 + 12 + 76 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 19𝑥 + 88 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 11𝑧 − 8𝑧 + 88 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 11) − 8(𝑥 − 11) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 11)(𝑥 − 8) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 − 11 = 0 or x – 8 = 0
⇒ x = 11 or x = 8

Exercise 4.5

1. In fig. 4.136, ∆ACB ~ ∆APQ. If BC = 8 cm, PQ = 4 cm, BA = 6.5 cm and AP = 2.8 cm, find
CA and AQ.

Sol:
Given ∆ACB ~ ∆APQ
𝐴𝐶 𝐵𝐶 𝐴𝐵
Then, 𝐴𝑃 = 𝑃𝑄 = 𝐴𝑄 [corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝐴𝐶 8 6.5
⇒ 2.8 = 4 = 𝐴𝑄
𝐴𝐶 8 8 6.5
⇒ 2.8 = 4 𝑎𝑛𝑑 4 − 𝐴𝑄
8 4
⇒ AC = 4 × 2.8 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝐴𝑄 = 6.5 × 8
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

⇒ AC = 5.6 cm and AQ = 3.25 cm

2. A vertical stick 10 cm long casts a shadow 8 cm long. At the same time a shadow 30 m
long. Determine the height of the tower.
Sol:

Length of stick = 10 cm
Length of shadow of stick = 8 cm
Length of shadow of tower = h cm
In ∆ABC and ∆PQR
∠B = ∠Q = 90°
And, ∠C = ∠R [Angular elevation of sun]
Then, ∆ABC ~ ∆PQR [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐶
∴ 𝑃𝑄 = 𝑄𝑅
10𝑐𝑚 ℎ 𝑐𝑚
⇒ = 3000
8 𝑐𝑚
10
⇒ℎ= × 3000 = 3750 𝑐𝑚 = 37.5 𝑚
8

3. In Fig. 4.137, AB || QR. Find the length of PB.

Sol:
We have, ∆PAB and ∆PQR
∠P = ∠P [common]
∠PAB = ∠PQR [corresponding angles]
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

Then, ∆PAB ~ ∆PQR [By AA similarity]


𝑃𝐵 𝐴𝐵
∴ 𝑃𝑅 = 𝑄𝑅 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆are proportional]
𝑃𝐵 3
⇒ =9
6
3
⇒ PB = 9 × 6 = 2 𝑐𝑚

4. In fig. 4.138, XY || BC. Find the length of XY

Sol:
We have, XY || BC
In ∆AXY and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [common]
∠AXY = ∠ABC [corresponding angles]
Then, ∆AXY ~ ∆ABC [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝑋 𝑋𝑌
∴ 𝐴𝐵 = 𝐵𝐶 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
1 𝑋𝑌
⇒4= 6
6
⇒ XY = 4 = 1.5𝑐𝑚

5. In a right angled triangle with sides a and b and hypotenuse c, the altitude drawn on the
hypotenuse is x. Prove that ab = cx.
Sol:
We have: ∠C = 90° and CD ⊥ AB

In ∆ACB and ∆CDB


Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

∠B = ∠B [common]
∠ACB = ∠CDB [Each 90°]
Then, ∆ACB ~ ∆CDB [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐶 𝐴𝐵
∴ 𝐶𝐷 = [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝐶𝐵
𝑏 𝑐
⇒𝑥=𝑎
⇒ ab = cx

6. In Fig. 4.139, ∠ABC = 90° and BD ⊥ AC. If BD = 8 cm and AD = 4 cm, find CD.

Sol:
We have, ∠ABC = 90° and BD ⊥ AC
Now, ∠ABD + ∠DBC − 90° …(i) [∵ ∠ABC − 90°]
And, ∠C + ∠DBC − 90° …(ii) [By angle sum prop. in ∆BCD]
Compare equations (i) & (ii)
∠ABD = ∠C …(iii)
In ∆ABD and ∆BCD
∠ABD = ∠C [From (iii)]
∠ADB = ∠BDC [Each 90°]
Then, ∆ABD ~ ∆BCD [By AA similarity]
𝐵𝐷 𝐴𝐷
∴ 𝐶𝐷 = 𝐵𝐷 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
8 4
⇒ 𝐶𝐷 = 8
8×8
⇒ CD = = 16 𝑐𝑚
4

7. In Fig. 4.14, ∠ABC = 90° and BD ⊥ AC. If AB = 5.7 cm, BD = 3.8 cm and CD = 5.4 cm,
find BC.
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

Sol:
We have, ∠ABC = 90° and BD ⊥ AC
In ∆ABC and ∆BDC
∠ABC = ∠BDC [Each 90°]
∠C = ∠C [Common]
Then, ∆ABC ~ ∆BDC [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐶
∴ 𝐵𝐷 = 𝐷𝐶 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
5.7 𝐵𝐶
⇒ 3.8 = 5.4
5.7
⇒ BC = 3.8 × 8.1 𝑐𝑚

8. In Fig. 4.141, DE || BC such that AE = (1/4) AC. If AB = 6 cm, find AD.

Sol:
1
We have, DE || BC, AB = 6 cm and AE = 4 𝐴𝐶
In ∆ADE and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [Common]
∠ADE = ∠ABC [Corresponding angles]
Then, ∆ADE ~ ∆ABC [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 = 𝐴𝐶 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
1
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐶 1
4
⇒ = [∵ AE = 4 𝐴𝐶 𝑔𝑖𝑣𝑒𝑛]
6 𝐴𝐶
𝐴𝐷 1
⇒ =4
6
6
⇒ AD = 4 = 1.5 cm
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

1 1 1
9. In fig., 4.142, PA, QB and RC are each perpendicular to AC. Prove that 𝑥 + 𝑧 + 𝑦

Sol:
We have, PA ⊥ AC, QB ⊥ AC and RC ⊥ AC
Let, AB = a and BC = b
In ∆CQB and ∆CPA
∠QCB = ∠PCA [Common]
∠QBC = ∠PAC [Each 90°]
Then, ∆CQB ~ ∆CPA [By AA similarity]
𝑄𝐵 𝐶𝐵
∴ 𝑃𝐴 = 𝐶𝐴 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝑦 𝑏
⇒ 𝑥 = 𝑎+𝑏 ….(i)
In ∆ AQB and ∆ARC
∠QAB = ∠RAC [common]
∠ABQ = ∠ ACR [Each 90°]
Then, ∆AQB ~ ∆ARC [By AA similarity]
𝑄𝐵 𝐴𝐵
∴ 𝑅𝐶 = [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝐴𝐶
𝑦 𝑎
⇒ 𝑧 = 𝑎+𝑏 ….(ii)
Adding equations (i) & (ii)
𝑦 𝑦 𝑏 𝑎
+ 𝑧 = 𝑎+𝑏 + 𝑎+𝑏
𝑥
1 1 𝑏+𝑎
⇒ 𝑦 (𝑥 + 𝑧) = 𝑎+𝑏
1 1
⇒ y(𝑥 + 𝑧) = 1
1 1 1
⇒𝑥+𝑧 =𝑦

10. In below fig., ∠A = ∠CED, Prove that ∆CAB ~ ∆CED. Also, find the value of x.
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

Sol:
We have, ∠A = ∠CED
In ∆CAB and ∆CED
∠C = ∠C [Common]
∠A = ∠CED [Given]
Then, ∆CAB ~ ∆CED [By AA similarity]
𝐶𝐴 𝐴𝐵
∴ 𝐶𝐸 = 𝐸𝐷 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
15 9
⇒ 10 = 𝑥
10×9
⇒𝑥= = 6 𝑐𝑚
15

11. The perimeters of two similar triangles are 25 cm and 15 cm respectively. If one side of
first triangle is 9 cm, what is the corresponding side of the other triangle?
Sol:
Assume ABC and PQR to be 2 triangles
We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
Perimeter of ∆ ABC = 25 cm
Perimeter of ∆ PQR = 15 cm
AB = 9 cm
PQ = ?
Since, ∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
Then, ratio of perimeter of triangles = ratio of corresponding sides
25 𝐴𝐵
⇒ 12 = 𝑃𝑄
25 9
⇒ 15 = 𝑃𝑄
15×9
⇒ PQ = = 5.4 𝑐𝑚
25

12. In ∆ABC and ∆DEF, it is being given that: AB = 5 cm, BC = 4 cm and CA = 4.2 cm;
DE=10cm, EF = 8 cm and FD = 8.4 cm. If AL ⊥ BC and DM ⊥ EF, find AL: DM.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐶 𝐴𝐶 1
Since, 𝐷𝐸 = 𝐸𝐹 = 𝐷𝐸 = 2
Then, ∆ABC ~ ∆DEF [By SSS similarity]
Now, In ∆ABL ~ ∆DEM
∠B = ∠E [∆ ABC ~ ∆DEF]
∠ALB = ∠DME [Each 90°]
Then, ∆ABL ~ ∆DEM [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐵 𝐴𝐿
∴ 𝐷𝐸 = 𝐷𝑀 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
5 𝐴𝐿
⇒ 10 = 𝐷𝑀
1 𝐴𝐿
⇒ 2 = 𝐷𝑀

13. D and E are the points on the sides AB and AC respectively of a ∆ABC such that: AD = 8
cm, DB = 12 cm, AE = 6 cm and CE = 9 cm. Prove that BC = 5/2 DE.
Sol:

We have,
𝐴𝐷 8 2
= 12 = 3
𝐷𝐵
𝐴𝐸 6 2
And, 𝐸𝐶 = 9 = 3
𝐴𝐷 𝐴𝐸
Since, 𝐷𝐵 = 𝐸𝐶
Then, by converse of basic proportionality theorem
DE || BC
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

In ∆ADE and ∆ABC


∠A = ∠A [Common]
∠ADE = ∠B [Corresponding angles]
Then, ∆ADE ~ ∆ABC [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐷 𝐷𝐸
∴ 𝐴𝐵 = [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝐵𝐶
8 𝐷𝐸
⇒ 20 = 𝐵𝐶
2 𝐷𝐸
⇒5= 𝐵𝐶
5
⇒ BC = 2 DE

14. D is the mid-point of side BC of a ∆ABC. AD is bisected at the point E and BE produced
cuts AC at the point X. Prove that BE : EX = 3 : 1
Sol:

Given: In ∆ABC, D is the mid-point of BC and E is the mid-point of AD.


To prove: BE : EX = 3 : 1
Const: Through D, draw DF || BX
Proof: In ∆EAX and ∆ADF
∠EAX = ∠ADF [Common]
∠AXE = ∠DAF [Corresponding angles]
Then, ∆AEX ~ ∆ADF [By AA similarity]
𝐸𝑋 𝐴𝐸
∴ 𝐷𝐹 = 𝐴𝐷 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝐸𝑋 𝐴𝐸
⇒ 𝐷𝐹 = 2𝐴𝐸 [AE = ED given]
⇒ DF = 2EX …. (i)
In ∆CDF and ∆CBX [By AA similarity]
𝐶𝐷 𝐷𝐹
∴ 𝐶𝐵 = 𝐵𝑋 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
1 𝐷𝐹
⇒ 2 = 𝐵𝐸+𝐸𝑋 [BD = DC given]
⇒ BE + EX = 2DF
⇒ BE + EX = 4EX
⇒ BE = 4EX – EX [By using (i)]
⇒ BE = 4EX – EX
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

𝐵𝐸 3
⇒ 𝐸𝑋 = 1

15. ABCD is a parallelogram and APQ is a straight line meeting BC at P and DC produced at
Q. Prove that the rectangle obtained by BP and DQ is equal to the AB and BC.
Sol:

Given: ABCD is a parallelogram


To prove: BP × DQ = AB × BC
Proof: In ∆ABP and ∆QDA
∠B = ∠D [Opposite angles of parallelogram]
∠BAP = ∠AQD [Alternate interior angles]
Then, ∆ABP ~ ∆QDA [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝑃
∴ 𝑄𝐷 = 𝐷𝐴 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
But, DA = BC [Opposite sides of parallelogram]
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝑃
Then, 𝑄𝐷 = 𝐵𝐶
⇒ AB × BC = QD × BP

16. In ∆ABC, AL and CM are the perpendiculars from the vertices A and C to BC and AB
respectively. If AL and CM intersect at O, prove that:
(i) ∆ OMA and ∆OLC
𝑂𝐴 𝑂𝑀
(ii) =
𝑂𝐶 𝑂𝐿
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

We have,
AL ⊥ BC and CM ⊥ AB
In ∆ OMA and ∆OLC
∠MOA = ∠LOC [Vertically opposite angles]
∠AMO = ∠CLO [Each 90°]
Then, ∆OMA ~ ∆OLC [By AA similarity]
𝑂𝐴 𝑂𝑀
∴ 𝑂𝐶 = [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝑂𝐿

17. In Fig below we have AB || CD || EF. If AB = 6 cm, CD = x cm, EF = 10 cm, BD = 4 cm


and DE = y cm, calculate the values of x and y.

Sol:
We have AB || CD || EF. If AB = 6 cm, CD = x cm, EF = 10 cm, BD = 4 cm and DE = y cm
In ∆ECD and ∆EAB
∠CED = ∠AEB [common]
∠ECD = ∠EAB [corresponding angles]
Then, ∆ECD ~ ∆EAB ….(i) [By AA similarity]
𝐸𝐶 𝐶𝐷
∴ 𝐸𝐴 = 𝐴𝐵 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝐸𝐶 𝑥
⇒ 𝐸𝐴 = 6 ….(ii)
In ∆ACD and ∆AEF
∠CAD = ∠EAF [common]
∠ACD = ∠AEF [corresponding angles]
Then, ∆ACD ~ ∆AEF [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐶 𝐶𝐷
∴ 𝐴𝐸 = 𝐸𝐹
𝐴𝐶 𝑥
⇒ = …(iii)
𝐴𝐸 10
Add equations (iii) & (ii)
𝐸𝐶 𝐴𝐶 𝑥 𝑥
∴ 𝐸𝐴 + 𝐴𝐸 = 6 + 10
𝐴𝐸 5𝑥+3𝑥
⇒ 𝐴𝐸 = 30
8𝑥
⇒ 1 = 30
30
⇒𝑥= = 3.75 cm
8
𝐷𝐶 𝐸𝐷
From (i) 𝐴𝐵 = 𝐵𝐸
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

3.75 𝑦
⇒ = 𝑦+4
6
⇒ 6y = 3.75y + 15
⇒ 2.25y = 15
15
⇒ 𝑦 = 2.25 = 6.67 𝑐𝑚

18. ABCD is a quadrilateral in which AD = BC. If P, Q, R, S be the mid-points of AB, AC, CD


and BD respectively, show that PQRS is a rhombus.
Sol:

AD = BC and P, Q, R and S are the mid-points of sides AB, AC, CD and BD respectively,
show that PQRS is a rhombus.
In ∆BAD, by mid-point theorem
1
PS || AD and PS = 2 AD …(i)
In ∆CAD, by mid-point theorem
1
QR || AD and QR = 2 𝐴𝐷 …(ii)
Compare (i) and (ii)
PS || QR and PS = QR
Since one pair of opposite sides is equal as well as parallel then
PQRS is a parallelogram ...(iii)
Now, In ∆ABC, by mid-point theorem
1
PQ || BC and PQ = 2 BC …(iv)
And, AD = BC …(v) [given]
Compare equations (i) (iv) and (v)
PS = PQ …(vi)
From (iii) and (vi)
Since, PQRS is a parallelogram with PS = PQ then PQRS is a rhombus

19. In Fig. below, if AB ⊥ BC, DC ⊥ BC and DE ⊥ AC, Prove that ∆ CED ~ ABC.
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

Sol:
Given: AB ⊥ BC, DC ⊥ BC and DE ⊥ AC
To prove: ∆CED ~ ∆ABC
Proof:
∠BAC + ∠BCA = 90° …(i) [By angle sum property]
And, ∠BCA + ∠ECD = 90° …(ii) [DC ⊥ BC given]
Compare equation (i) and (ii)
∠BAC = ∠ECD …(iii)
In ∆CED and ∆ABC
∠CED = ∠ABC [Each 90°]
∠ECD = ∠BAC [From (iii)]
Then, ∆CED ~ ∆ABC [By AA similarity]

20. In an isosceles ∆ABC, the base AB is produced both the ways to P and Q such that AP ×
BQ = AC2. Prove that ∆APC ~ ∆BCQ.
Sol:

Given: In ∆ABC, CA = CB and AP × BQ = AC2


To prove: ∆APC ~ ∆BCQ
Proof:
AP × BQ = AC2 [Given]
⇒ AP × BQ = AC × AC
⇒ AP × BQ = AC × BC [AC = BC given]
𝐴𝑃 𝐴𝐶
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 = 𝐵𝑄 …(i)
Since, CA = CB [Given]
Then, ∠CAB = ∠CBA …(ii) [Opposite angles to equal sides]
Now, ∠CAB + ∠CAP = 180° …(iii) [Linear pair of angles]
And, ∠CBA + ∠CBQ = 180° …(iv) [Linear pair of angles]
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

Compare equation (ii) (iii) & (iv)


∠CAP = ∠CBQ …(v)
In ∆APC and ∆BCQ
∠CAP = ∠CBQ [From (v)]
𝐴𝑃 𝐴𝐶
= 𝐵𝑄 [From (i)]
𝐵𝐶
𝑇ℎ𝑒𝑛, ∆𝐴𝑃𝐶~∆𝐵𝐶𝑄 [By SAS similarity]

21. A girl of height 90 cm is walking away from the base of a lamp-post at a speed of 1.2m/sec.
If the lamp is 3.6 m above the ground, find the length of her shadow after 4 seconds.
Sol:

We have,
Height of girl = 90 cm = 0.9 m
Height of lamp-post = 3.6 m
Speed of girl = 1.2 m/sec
∴ Distance moved by girl (CQ) = Speed × Time
= 1.2 × 4 = 4.8m
Let length of shadow (AC) = x cm
In ∆ABC and ∆APQ
∠ACB = ∠AQP [Each 90°]
∠BAC = ∠PAQ [Common]
Then, ∆AB ~ ∆APQ [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐶 𝐵𝐶
∴ 𝐴𝑄 = 𝑃𝑄 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝑥 0.9
⇒ = 3.6
𝑥+4.8
𝑥 1
⇒ 𝑥+4.8 = 4
⇒ 4x = x + 4.8
⇒ 4x – x = 4.8
⇒ 3x = 4.8
4.8
⇒x= = 1.6 𝑚
3
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

∴ Length of shadow = 1.6m

22. Diagonals AC and BD of a trapezium ABCD with AB || DC intersect each other at the
𝑂𝐴 𝑂𝐵
point O. Using similarity criterion for two triangles, show that 𝑂𝐶 = 𝑂𝐷.
Sol:

We have,
ABCD is a trapezium with AB || DC
In ∆AOB and ∆COD
∠AOB = ∠COD [Vertically opposite angles]
∠OAB = ∠OCD [Alternate interior angles]
Then, ∆AOB ~ ∆COD [By AA similarity]
𝑂𝐴 𝑂𝐵
∴ 𝑂𝐶 = 𝑂𝐷 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]

23. If ∆ABC and ∆AMP are two right triangles, right angled at B and M respectively such that
∠MAP = ∠BAC. Prove that
(i) ∆ABC ~ ∆AMP
𝐶𝐴 𝐵𝐶
(ii) = 𝑀𝑃
𝑃𝐴
Sol:

We have,
∠B = ∠M = 90°
And, ∠BAC = ∠MAP
In ∆ABC and ∆AMP
∠B = ∠M [Each 90°]
∠BAC = ∠MAP [Given]
Then, ∆ABC ~ ∆AMP [By AA similarity]
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

𝐶𝐴 𝐵𝐶
∴ 𝑃𝐴 = 𝑀𝑃 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]

24. A vertical stick of length 6 m casts a shadow 4 m long on the ground and at the same time a
tower casts a shadow 28 m long. Find the height of the tower.
Sol:

Let AB be a tower
CD be a stick, CD = 6m
Shadow of AB is BE = 28m
Shadow of CD is DF = 4m
At same time light rays from sun will fall on tower and stick at same angle.
So, ∠DCF = ∠BAE
And ∠DFC = ∠BEA
∠CDF = ∠ABE (tower and stick are vertical to ground)
Therefore ∆ ABE ~ ∆CDF (By AA similarity)
So,
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐸
= 𝐷𝐹
𝐶𝐷
𝐴𝐵 28
=
6 4
6
AB = 28 × 4 = 42𝑚
So, height of tower will be 42 metres.

25. In below Fig., ∆ABC is right angled at C and DE ⊥ AB. Prove that ∆ABC ~ ∆ADE and
Hence find the lengths of AE and DE.

Sol:
In ∆ACB, by Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = (5)2 + (12)2
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 25 + 144 = 169
⇒ AB = √169 = 13 𝑐𝑚
In ∆AED and ∆ACB
∠A = ∠A [Common]
∠AED = ∠ACB [Each 90°]
Then, ∆AED ~ ∆ACB [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐸 𝐷𝐸 𝐴𝐷
∴ 𝐴𝐶 = = 𝐴𝐵 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝐶𝐵
𝐴𝐸 𝐷𝐸 3
⇒ = = 13
5 12
𝐴𝐸 3 𝐷𝐸 3
⇒ = 13 and 12 = 13
5
15 36
⇒ AE = 13 cm and DE = 13 cm

Exercise 4.6

1. Triangles ABC and DEF are similar


(i) If area (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) = 16𝑐𝑚2 , area (∆𝐷𝐸𝐹) = 25 𝑐𝑚2 and BC = 2.3 cm, find EF.
(ii) If area (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) = 9𝑐𝑚2 , area (∆𝐷𝐸𝐹) = 64 𝑐𝑚2 and DE = 5.1 cm, find AB.
(iii)If AC = 19cm and DF = 8 cm, find the ratio of the area of two triangles.
(iv) If area (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) = 36𝑐𝑚2 , area (∆𝐷𝐸𝐹) = 64 𝑐𝑚2 and DE = 6.2 cm, find AB.
(v) If AB = 1.2 cm and DE = 1.4 cm, find the ratio of the areas of ∆ABC and ∆DEF.
Sol:
(i)
We have,
∆ABC ~∆DEF
Area (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) = 16 𝑐𝑚2 ,
Area (∆𝐷𝐸𝐹) = 25 𝑐𝑚2
And BC = 2.3 cm
Since, ∆ABC ~ ∆DEF
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐵𝐶 2
Then, 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆ 𝐷𝐸𝐹) = 𝐸𝐹2 [By area of similar triangle theorem]
16 (2.3)2
⇒ 25 = 𝐸𝐹2
4 2.3
⇒5= [By taking square root]
𝐸𝐹
11.5
⇒ EF = = 2.875 𝑐𝑚
4
(ii)
We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆DEF
Area(∆ABC) = 9 cm2
Area (∆DEF) = 64 cm2
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

And DE = 5.1 cm
Since, ∆ABC ~ ∆DEF
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐵2
Then, 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐷𝐸𝐹) = 𝐷𝐸2 [By area of similar triangle theorem]
9 𝐴𝐵2
⇒ 64 = (5.1)2
3 𝐴𝐵
⇒ 8 = 5.1 [By taking square root]
3×5.1
⇒ AB = = 1.9125 𝑐𝑚
8
(iii)
We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆DEF
AC = 19 cm and DF = 8 cm
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆ 𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐶 2 (19)2 361
= 𝐷𝐹2 = =
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐷𝐸𝐹) 82 64
We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆DEF
AC = 19 cm and DF = 8 cm
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐶 2 (19)2 361
= 𝐷𝐹2 = =
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐷𝐸𝐹) 82 64
(iv)
We have, Area (∆ABC) = 36 𝑐𝑚2
Area (∆𝐷𝐸𝐹) = 64 𝑐𝑚2
DE = 6.2 cm
And, ∆ABC ~ ∆DEF
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎( ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐵2
= 𝐷𝐸2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐷𝐸𝐹)
36 𝐴𝐵2
⇒ 64 = (6.2)2 [By taking square root]
6×6.2
⇒ AB = = 4.65 𝑐𝑚
8
(v)
We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆DEF
AB = 1.2 cm and DF = 1.4 cm
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆ 𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐵2
= 𝐷𝐸2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆ 𝐷𝐸𝐹)
(1.2)2
= (1.4)2
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

1.44
= 1.96
36
= 49

2. In fig. below ∆ACB ~ ∆APQ. If BC = 10 cm, PQ = 5 cm, BA = 6.5 cm and AP = 2.8 cm,
find CA and AQ. Also, find the area (∆𝐴𝐶𝐵): 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝑃𝑄)

Sol:
We have,
∆ACB ~ ∆APQ
𝐴𝐶 𝐶𝐵 𝐴𝐵
Then, 𝐴𝑃 = 𝑃𝑄 = 𝐴𝑄 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝐴𝐶 10 6.5
⇒ 2.8 = = 𝐴𝑄
5
𝐴𝐶 10 10 6.5
⇒ 2.8 = 𝑎𝑛𝑑 = 𝐴𝑄
5 5
10 5
⇒ AC = × 2.8 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝐴𝑄 = 6.5 × 10
5
⇒ AC = 5.6 cm and AQ = 3.25 cm
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐶𝐵) 𝐵𝐶 2
= 𝑃𝑄2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝑃𝑄)
(10)2
= (5)2
100
= 25
4
=1

3. The areas of two similar triangles are 81 cm2 and 49 cm2 respectively. Find the ratio of
their corresponding heights. What is the ratio of their corresponding medians?
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
Area (∆ABC) = 81 cm2,
Area (∆PQR) = 49 cm2
And AD and PS are the altitudes
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐵2
= 𝑃𝑄2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝑃𝑄𝑅)
81 𝐴𝐵2
⇒ 49 = 𝑃𝑄2
9 𝐴𝐵
⇒ = ….(i) [Taking square root]
7 𝑃𝑄
𝐼𝑛 ∆𝐴𝐵𝐷 𝑎𝑛𝑑 ∆𝑃𝑄𝑆
∠B = ∠Q [∆ABC ~ ∆PQR]
∠ ADB = ∠PSQ [Each 90°]
Then, ∆ABD ~ ∆PQS [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐵 𝐴𝐷
∴ 𝑃𝑄 = …(ii) [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝑃𝑆
Compare (1) and (2)
𝐴𝐷 9
=7
𝑃𝑆
9
∴ Ratio of altitudes = 7
Since, the ratio of the area of two similar triangles is equal to the ratio of the squares of the
squares of their corresponding altitudes and is also equal to the squares of their
corresponding medians.
Hence, ratio of altitudes = Ratio of medians = 9 : 7

4. The areas of two similar triangles are 169 cm2 and 121 cm2 respectively. If the longest side
of the larger triangle is 26 cm, find the longest side of the smaller triangle.
Sol:

We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
Area(∆ABC) = 169 cm2
Area(∆PQR) = 121 cm2
And AB = 26 cm
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

By area of similar triangle theorem


𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐵2
=
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆ 𝑃𝑄𝑅) 𝑃𝑄 2
169 (26) 2
⇒ 121 = 𝑃𝑄 2
13 26
⇒ 11 = 𝑃𝑄 [Taking square root]
11
⇒ PQ = 13 × 26 = 22 𝑐𝑚

5. Two isosceles triangles have equal vertical angles and their areas are in the ratio 36 : 25.
Find the ratio of their corresponding heights.
Sol:

Given: AB = AC, PQ = PQ and ∠A = ∠P


And, AD and PS are altitudes
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 36
And, 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆ 𝑃𝑄𝑅) = 25 …(i)
𝐴𝐷
To find: 𝑃𝑆
Proof: Since, AB = AC and PQ = PR
𝐴𝐵 𝑃𝑄
Then, 𝐴𝐶 = 1 and 𝑃𝑅 = 1
𝐴𝐵 𝑃𝑄
∴ 𝐴𝐶 = 𝑃𝑅
𝐴𝐵 𝐴𝐶
⇒ 𝑃𝑄 = 𝑃𝑅 …(ii)
In ∆ABC and ∆PQR
∠A = ∠P [Given]
𝐴𝐵 𝐴𝐶
= 𝑃𝑅 [From (2)]
𝑃𝑄
𝑇ℎ𝑒𝑛, ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶~∆𝑃𝑄𝑅 [By SAS similarity]
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐵2
∴ = 𝑃𝑄2 ….(iii) [By area of similar triangle theorem]
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆ 𝑃𝑄𝑅)
𝐶𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑒 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 (𝑖)𝑎𝑛𝑑 (𝑖𝑖𝑖)
𝐴𝐵2 36
=
𝑃𝑄 2 25
𝐴𝐵 6
⇒ 𝑃𝑄 = 5 ….(iv)
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

In ∆ABD and ∆PQS


∠B = ∠Q [∆ABC ~ ∆PQR]
∠ADB = ∠PSQ [Each 90°]
Then, ∆ABD ~ ∆PQS [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐵 𝐴𝐷
∴ 𝑃𝑄 = 𝑃𝑆
6 𝐴𝐷
⇒5= [From (iv)]
𝑃𝑆

6. The areas of two similar triangles are 25 cm2 and 36 cm2 respectively. If the altitude of the
first triangle is 2.4 cm, find the corresponding altitude of the other.
Sol:

We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
Area (∆ABC) = 25 cm2
Area (∆PQR) = 36 cm2
AD = 2.4 cm
And AD and PS are the altitudes
To find: PS
Proof: Since, ∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
Then, by area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐵2
= 𝑃𝑄2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝑃𝑄𝑅)
25 𝐴𝐵2
⇒ =
36 𝑃𝑄 2
5 𝐴𝐵
⇒ 6 = 𝑃𝑄 ….(i)
𝐼𝑛 ∆𝐴𝐵𝐷 𝑎𝑛𝑑 ∆𝑃𝑄𝑆
∠B = ∠Q [∆ ABC ~ ∆PQR]
∠ADB ~ ∠PSQ [Each 90°]
Then, ∆ABD ~ ∆PQS [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐵 𝐴𝐷
∴ 𝑃𝑆 = ….(ii) [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝑃𝑆
Compare (i) and (ii)
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

𝐴𝐷 5
=6
𝑃𝑆
2.4 5
⇒ =6
𝑃𝑆
2.4×6
⇒ 𝑃𝑆 = = 2.88 𝑐𝑚
5

7. The corresponding altitudes of two similar triangles are 6 cm and 9 cm respectively. Find
the ratio of their areas.
Sol:

We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
AD = 6 cm
And, PS = 9 cm
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐵2
= 𝑃𝑄2 …(i)
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝑃𝑄𝑅)
𝐼𝑛 ∆𝐴𝐵𝐷 𝑎𝑛𝑑 ∆𝑃𝑄𝑆
∠B = ∠Q [∆ABC ~ ∆PQR]
∠ADB = ∠PSQ [Each 90°]
Then, ∆ABD ~ ∆PQS [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐵 𝐴𝐷
∴ 𝑃𝑄 = [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝑃𝑆
𝐴𝐵 6
⇒ 𝑃𝑄 = 9
𝐴𝐵 2
⇒ 𝑃𝑄 = 3 …(ii)
Compare equations (i) and (ii)
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎(∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 2 2 4
= (3) = 9
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝑃𝑄𝑅)

8. ABC is a triangle in which ∠A =90°, AN⊥ BC, BC = 12 cm and AC = 5cm. Find the ratio
of the areas of ∆ANC and ∆ABC.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

In ∆ANC and ∆ABC


∠C = ∠C [Common]
∠ANC = ∠BAC [Each 90°]
Then, ∆ANC ~ ∆BAC [By AA similarity]
By area of similarity triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆ 𝐴𝑁𝐶) 𝐴𝐶 2
= 𝐵𝐶 2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐵𝐴𝐶)
52
= 122
25
= 144

9. In Fig. 4.178, DE || BC

(i) If DE = 4 cm, BC = 6 cm and Area (∆ADE) = 16 cm2, find the area of ∆ABC.
(ii) If DE = 4cm, BC = 8 cm and Area (∆ADE) = 25 cm2, find the area of ∆ABC.
(iii)If DE : BC = 3 : 5. Calculate the ratio of the areas of ∆ADE and the trapezium BCED.
Sol:
We have, DE || BC, DE = 4 cm, BC = 6 cm and area (∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) = 16𝑐𝑚2
In ∆ADE and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [Common]
∠ADE = ∠ABC [Corresponding angles]
Then, ∆ADE ~ ∆ABC [By AA similarity]
∴ By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) 𝐷𝐸 2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶)
= 𝐵𝐶 2
16 42
⇒ 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) = 62
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

16×36
⇒ 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) = = 36𝑐𝑚2
16
𝑤𝑒 ℎ𝑎𝑣𝑒, 𝐷𝐸 | |𝐵𝐶, 𝐷𝐸 = 4 𝑐𝑚, 𝐵𝐶 = 8 𝑐𝑚 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) = 25 𝑐𝑚2
𝐼𝑛 ∆𝐴𝐷𝐸 𝑎𝑛𝑑 ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶
∠A = ∠A [Common]
∠ADE = ∠ABC [Corresponding angles]
Then, ∆𝐴𝐷𝐸~∆𝐴𝐵𝐶 [By AA similarity]
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) 𝐷𝐸 2
= 𝐵𝐶 2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆ 𝐴𝐵𝐶)
16 42
⇒ =
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶 ) 62
16×36
⇒ Area (∆ABC) = = 36 𝑐𝑚2
16
We have, DE || BC, DE = 4 cm, BC = 8 cm and area (∆ADE) = 25cm2
In ∆ADE and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [Common]
∠ADE = ∠ABC [Corresponding angles]
Then, ∆ADE ~ ∆ABC [By AA similarity]
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) 𝐷𝐸 2
⇒ 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) = 𝐵𝐶 2
25 42
=
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 82
25×64
⇒ 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) = = 100 𝑐𝑚2
16
𝐷𝐸 3
We have, DE || BC, and 𝐵𝐶 = 5 ….(i)
In ∆ADE and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [Common]
∠ADE = ∠B [Corresponding angles]
Then, ∆ADE ~ ∆ABC [By AA similarity]
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) 𝐷𝐸 2
⇒ 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) = 𝐵𝐶 2
𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) 32
⇒ 𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐷𝐸)+𝑎𝑟(𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑝.𝐷𝐸𝐶𝐵) = 52 [From (i)]
⇒ 25ar (∆ADE) = 9𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) + 9𝑎𝑟 (𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑝. 𝐷𝐸𝐶𝐵)
⇒ 25 ar (∆ADE – 9ar) (∆ADE) = 9ar (trap.DECB)
⇒ 16 ar(∆ADE) = 9 ar (trap. DECB)
𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) 9
⇒ 𝑎𝑟 (𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑝.𝐷𝐸𝐶𝐵) = 16
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

10. In ∆ABC, D and E are the mid-points of AB and AC respectively. Find the ratio of the
areas of ∆ADE and ∆ABC
Sol:

We have, D and E as the mid-points of AB and AC


So, according to the mid-point theorem
1
DE || BC and DE = 2 𝐵𝐶 …(i)
In ∆ADE and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [Common]
∠ADE = ∠B [Corresponding angles]
Then, ∆ADE ~ ∆ABC [By AA similarity]
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) 𝐷𝐸 2
= 𝐵𝐶 2
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐵𝐶)
1 2
( 𝐵𝐶)
2
= [From (i)]
𝐵𝐶 2
1
𝐵𝐶 2
4
= 𝐵𝐶 2
1
=4

11. In Fig., 4.179, ∆ABC and ∆DBC are on the same base BC. If AD and BC intersect at O,
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝑂
prove that 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐷𝐵𝐶) = 𝐷𝑂
Sol:
1
We know that area of a triangle = 2 × 𝐵𝑎𝑠𝑒 × ℎ𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡
Since ∆ABC and ∆DBC are one same base,
Therefore ratio between their areas will be as ratio of their heights.
Let us draw two perpendiculars AP and DM on line BC.
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

In ∆APO and ∆DMO,


∠APO = ∠DMO (Each is 90°)
∠AOP = ∠DOM (vertically opposite angles)
∠OAP = ∠ODM (remaining angle)
Therefore ∆APO ~ ∆DMO (By AAA rule)
𝐴𝑃 𝐴𝑂
Therefore 𝐷𝑀 = 𝐷𝑂
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝑂
Therefore 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐷𝐵𝐶) = 𝐷𝑂

12. ABCD is a trapezium in which AB || CD. The diagonals AC and BD intersect at O. Prove
that: (i) ∆AOB and ∆COD (ii) If OA = 6 cm, OC = 8 cm,
Find:
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝑂𝐵)
(a) 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐶𝑂𝐷)
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝑂𝐷)
(b) 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐶𝑂𝐷)
Sol:

We have,
AB || DC
In ∆AOB and ∆COD
∠AOB = ∠COD [Vertically opposite angles]
∠OAB = ∠OCD [Alternate interior angles]
Then, ∆AOB ~ ∆COD [By AA similarity]
(a) By area of similar triangle theorem
𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐴𝑂𝐵) 𝑂𝐴2 62 36 9
= = = =
𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐶𝑂𝐷) 𝑂𝐶 2 82 64 16
(b) Draw DP ⊥ AC
1
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝑂𝐷) ×𝐴𝑂×𝐷𝑃
∴ 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐶𝑂𝐷) = 21
×𝐶𝑂×𝐷𝑃
2
𝐴𝑂
= 𝐶𝑂
6
=8
3
=4
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

13. In ABC, P divides the side AB such that AP : PB = 1 : 2. Q is a point in AC such that PQ ||
BC. Find the ratio of the areas of ∆APQ and trapezium BPQC.
Sol:

We have,
PQ || BC
𝐴𝑃 1
And 𝑃𝐵 = 2
In ∆APQ and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [Common]
∠APQ = ∠B [Corresponding angles]
Then, ∆APQ ~∆ABC [By AA similarity]
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) 𝐴𝑃 2
= 𝐴𝐵2
𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶)
𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) 12 𝐴𝑃 1
⇒ 𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝑃𝑄)+𝑎𝑟(𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑝.𝐵𝑃𝑄𝐶) = 32 [𝑃𝐵 = 2]
⇒ 9ar (𝐴𝑃𝑄) = 𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) + 𝑎𝑟(𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑝. 𝐵𝑃𝑄𝐶)
⇒ 9ar (𝐴𝑃𝑄) − 𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) + 𝑎𝑟(𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑝. 𝐵𝑃𝑄𝐶)
⇒ 8ar(APQ) = ar(trap. BPQC)
𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) 1
⇒ 𝑎𝑟(𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑝.𝐵𝑃𝑄𝐶) = 8

14. The areas of two similar triangles are 100 cm2 and 49 cm2 respectively. If the altitude the
bigger triangle is 5 cm, find the corresponding altitude of the other.
Sol:

We have, ∆ABC ~ ∆PQR


Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

Area(∆ABC) = 100 cm2,


Area (∆PQR) = 49 cm2
AD = 5 cm
And AD and PS are the altitudes
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐵2
= 𝑃𝑄2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝑃𝑄𝑅)
100 𝐴𝐵2
⇒ = 𝑃𝑄2
49
10 𝐴𝐵
⇒ = 𝑃𝑄 …(i)
7
𝐼𝑛 ∆𝐴𝐵𝐷 𝑎𝑛𝑑 ∆𝑃𝑄𝑆
∠B = ∠Q [∆ABC ~ ∆PQR]
∠ADB = ∠PSQ [Each 90°]
Then, ∆ABD ~ ∆PQS [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐵 𝐴𝐷
∴ 𝑃𝑄 = …(ii) [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝑃𝑆
Compare (i) and (ii)
𝐴𝐷 10
=
𝑃𝑆 7
5 10
⇒ 𝑃𝑆 = 7
5×7
⇒ PS = = 3.5 𝑐𝑚
10

15. The areas of two similar triangles are 121 cm2 and 64 cm2 respectively. If the median of the
first triangle is 12.1 cm, find the corresponding median of the other.
Sol:

We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
Area (∆ABC) = 121 cm2,
Area (∆PQR) = 64 cm2
AD = 12.1 cm
And AD and PS are the medians
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎(∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐵2
= 𝑃𝑄2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎(∆𝑃𝑄𝑅)
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

121 𝐴𝐵2
⇒ = 𝑃𝑄2
64
11 𝐴𝐵
⇒ = 𝑃𝑄 …(i)
8
Since, ∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐶
Then, 𝑃𝑄 = 𝑄𝑅 [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝐴𝐵 2𝐵𝐷
⇒ 𝑃𝑄 = [AD and PS are medians]
2𝑄𝑆
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐷
⇒ 𝑃𝑄 = …(ii)
𝑄𝑆
In ∆ABD and ∆PQS
∠B = ∠Q [∆ABC ~ ∆PQS]
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐷
= [From (ii)]
𝑃𝑄 𝑄𝑆
𝑇ℎ𝑒𝑛, ∆𝐴𝐵𝐷 ~ ∆𝑃𝑄𝑆 [By SAS similarity]
𝐴𝐵 𝐴𝐷
∴ 𝑃𝑄 = …(iii) [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝑃𝑆
𝐶𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑒 (𝑖) 𝑎𝑛𝑑 (𝑖𝑖𝑖)
11 𝐴𝐷
=
8 𝑃𝑆
11 12.1
⇒ =
8 𝑃𝑆
8 ×12.1
⇒ PS = 𝑃𝑆
8 ×12.1
⇒ PS = = 8.8 𝑐𝑚
𝑃𝑆

16. If ∆ABC ~ ∆DEF such that AB = 5 cm, area (∆ABC) = 20 cm2 and area (∆DEF) = 45 cm2,
determine DE.
Sol:
We have,
∆ABC ~ ∆DEF such that AB = 5 cm,
Area (∆ABC) = 20 cm2 and area(∆DEF) = 45 cm2
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎(∆ABC) 𝐴𝐵2
= 𝐷𝐸2
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎(∆DEF)
20 52
⇒ 45 = 𝐷𝐸2
4 52
⇒ 9 = 𝐷𝐸2
2 5
⇒ 3 = 𝐷𝐸 [Taking square root]
3×5
⇒ 𝐷𝐸 = = 7.5 𝑐𝑚
2

17. In ∆ABC, PQ is a line segment intersecting AB at P and AC at Q such that PQ || BC and


𝐵𝑃
PQ divides ∆ABC into two parts equal in area. Find 𝐴𝐵
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

Sol:

We have,
PQ || BC
And ar(∆APQ) = ar(trap. PQCB)
⇒ ar(∆APQ) = ar(∆ABC) – ar(∆APQ)
⇒ 2ar(∆APQ) = ar(∆ABC) …(i)
In ∆APQ and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [common]
∠APQ = ∠B [corresponding angles]
Then, ∆APQ ~ ∆ABC [By AA similarity]
∴ By area of similar triangle theorem
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) 𝐴𝑃 2
= 𝐴𝐵2
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐵𝐶)
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) 𝐴𝑃 2
⇒ 𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) = 𝐴𝐵2 [By using (i)]
1 𝐴𝑃 2
⇒ 2 = 𝐴𝐵2
1 𝐴𝑃
⇒ = 𝐴𝐵2
√2
1 𝐴𝑃
⇒ = 𝐴𝐵 [Taking square root]
√2
1 𝐴𝐵−𝐵𝑃
⇒ =
√2 𝐴𝐵
1 𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝑃
⇒ = 𝐴𝐵 − 𝐴𝐵
√2
1 𝐵𝑃
⇒ = 1 − 𝐴𝐵
√2
𝐵𝑃 1
= 𝐴𝐵 = 1 −
√2
𝐵𝑃 √2−1
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 =
√2

18. The areas of two similar triangles ABC and PQR are in the ratio 9:16. If BC = 4.5 cm, find
the length of QR.
Sol:
We have,
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

∆ABC ~ ∆PQR
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐵𝐶 2
=
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (∆𝑃𝑄𝑅) 𝑄𝑅 2
9 (4.5)2
⇒ 16 = 𝑄𝑅 2
3 4.5
⇒ 4 = 𝑄𝑅 [Taking square root]
4×4.5
⇒ QR = = 6𝑐𝑚
3

19. ABC is a triangle and PQ is a straight line meeting AB in P and AC in Q. If AP = 1 cm, PB


= 3 cm, AQ = 1.5 cm, QC = 4.5 m, prove that area of ∆APQ is one- sixteenth of the area of
ABC.
Sol:

We have,
AP = 1 cm, PB = 3 cm, AQ = 1.5 cm and QC = 4.5 m
In ∆APQ and ∆ABC
∠A = ∠A [Common]
𝐴𝑃 𝐴𝑄 1
= 𝐴𝐶 [Each equal to 4]
𝐴𝐵
𝑇ℎ𝑒𝑛, ∆𝐴𝑃𝑄 ~∆𝐴𝐵𝐶 [By SAS similarity]
𝐵𝑦 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑖𝑚𝑖𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑚
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) 12
= 42
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐵𝐶)
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝑃𝑄) 1
⇒ 𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) = 16 × 𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐵𝐶)

20. If D is a point on the side AB of ∆ABC such that AD : DB = 3.2 and E is a Point on BC
such that DE || AC. Find the ratio of areas of ∆ABC and ∆BDE.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

We have,
𝐴𝐷 3
=
𝐷𝐵 2
𝐷𝐵 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐷 = 3
In ∆BDE and ∆BAC
∠B = ∠B [common]
∠ BDE = ∠A [corresponding angles]
Then, ∆BDE ~ ∆BAC [By AA similarity]
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐴𝐵2
= 𝐵𝐷2
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐵𝐷𝐸)
52 𝐴𝐷 3
= 22 [𝐷𝐵 = 2]
25
= 4

21. If ∆ABC and ∆BDE are equilateral triangles, where D is the mid-point of BC, find the ratio
of areas of ∆ABC and ∆BDE.
Sol:

We have,
∆ABC and ∆BDE are equilateral triangles then both triangles are equiangular
∴ ∆ABC ~ ∆BDE [By AAA similarity]
By area of similar triangle theorem
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐵𝐶) 𝐵𝐶 2
= 𝐵𝐷2
𝑎𝑟 (∆𝐵𝐷𝐸)
2(𝐵𝐷)2
= [D is the mid-point of BC]
𝐵𝐷 2
4𝐵𝐷 2
= 𝐵𝐷 2
4
=1

22. AD is an altitude of an equilateral triangle ABC. On AD as base, another equilateral


triangle ADE is constructed. Prove that Area (∆ADE): Area (∆ABC) = 3: 4
Sol:

We have,
∆ABC is an equilateral triangle
Then, AB = BC = AC
Let, AB = BC = AC = 2x
Since, AD ⊥ BC then BD = DC = x
In ∆ADB, by Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐵 2 = (2𝑥)2 − (𝑥)2
⇒ 𝐴𝐷2 = 4𝑥 2 − 𝑥 2 = 3𝑥 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐷 = √3𝑥 𝑐𝑚
𝑆𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑒, ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶 𝑎𝑛𝑑 ∆𝐴𝐷𝐸 𝑏𝑜𝑡ℎ 𝑎𝑟𝑒 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑙 𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒𝑠 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑦 𝑎𝑟𝑒 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟
∴ ∆ABC ~ ∆ADE [By AA similarity]
By area of similar triangle theorem
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐷𝐸) 𝐴𝐷 2
= 𝐴𝐵2
𝑎𝑟(∆𝐴𝐵𝐶)
2
(√3𝑥)
= (2𝑥)2
3𝑥 2
= 4𝑥 2
3
=4
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

Exercise 4.7
1. If the sides of a triangle are 3 cm, 4 cm, and 6 cm long, determine whether the triangle is a
right-angled triangle.
Sol:
We have,
Sides of triangle
AB = 3 cm
BC = 4 cm
AC = 6 cm
∴ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 32 = 9
𝐵𝐶 2 = 42 = 16
𝐴𝐶 2 = 62 = 36
Since, 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2 ≠ 𝐴𝐶 2
Then, by converse of Pythagoras theorem, triangle is not a right triangle.

2. The sides of certain triangles are given below. Determine which of them right triangles are.
(i) a = 7 cm, b = 24 cm and c = 25 cm
(ii) a = 9 cm, b = l6 cm and c = 18 cm
(iii) a = 1.6 cm, b = 3.8 cm and c = 4 cm
(iv) a = 8 cm, b = 10 cm and c = 6 cm
Sol:
We have,
a = 7 cm, b = 24 cm and c = 25 cm
∴ 𝑎2 = 49, 𝑏 2 = 576 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐 2 = 625
Since, 𝑎2 + 𝑏 2 = 49 + 576
= 625
= 𝑐2
Then, by converse of Pythagoras theorem, given triangle is a right triangle.

We have,
a = 9 cm, b = 16 cm and c = 18 cm
∴ 𝑎2 = 81, 𝑏 2 = 256 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐 2 = 324
Since, 𝑎2 + 𝑏 2 = 81 + 256 = 337
≠ 𝑐2
Then, by converse of Pythagoras theorem, given triangle is not a right triangle.

We have,
a = 1.6 cm, b = 3.8 cm and C = 4 cm
∴ 𝑎2 = 64, 𝑏 2 = 100 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐 2 = 36
Since, 𝑎2 + 𝑐 2 = 64 + 36 = 100 = 𝑏 2
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

Then, by converse of Pythagoras theorem, given triangle is a right triangle.

3. A man goes 15 metres due west and then 8 metres due north. How far is he from the
starting point?
Sol:

Let the starting point of the man be O and final point be A.


∴ In ∆ABO, by Pythagoras theorem 𝐴𝑂2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝑂2
⇒ 𝐴𝑂2 = 82 + 152
⇒ 𝐴𝑂2 = 64 + 225 = 289
⇒ AO = √289 = 17𝑚
∴ He is 17m far from the starting point.

4. A ladder 17 m long reaches a window of a building 15 m above the ground. Find the
distance of the foot of the ladder from the building.
Sol:

In ∆ABC, by Pythagoras theorem


𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2
⇒ 152 + 𝐵𝐶 2 = 172
⇒ 225 + 𝐵𝐶 2 = 172
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 3 = 289 − 225
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 2 = 64
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

⇒ 𝐵𝐶 = 8 𝑚
∴ 𝐷𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑓𝑜𝑜𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑙𝑎𝑑𝑑𝑒𝑟 𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 𝑏𝑢𝑖𝑙𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔 = 8 𝑚

5. Two poles of heights 6 m and 11 m stand on a plane ground. If the distance between their
feet is 12 m, find the distance between their tops.
Sol:

Let CD and AB be the poles of height 11 and 6 m.


Therefore CP = 11 – 6 = 5 m
From the figure we may observe that AP = 12m
In triangle APC, by applying Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝑃2 + 𝑃𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2
122 + 52 = 𝐴𝐶 2
𝐴𝐶 2 = 144 + 25 = 169
AC = 13
Therefore distance between their tops = 13m.

6. In an isosceles triangle ABC, AB = AC = 25 cm, BC = 14 cm. Calculate the altitude from


A on BC.
Sol:

We have
AB = AC = 25 cm and BC = 14 cm
In ∆ABD and ∆ACD
∠ADB = ∠ADC [Each 90°]
AB = AC [Each 25 cm]
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

AD = AD [Common]
Then, ∆ABD ≅ ∆ACD [By RHS condition]
∴ BD = CD = 7 cm [By c.p.c.t]
In ∆ADB, by Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐷2 + 𝐵𝐷2 = 𝐴𝐵 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐷2 + 72 = 252
⇒ 𝐴𝐷2 = 625 − 49 = 576
⇒ 𝐴𝐷 = √576 = 24 𝑐𝑚

7. The foot of a ladder is 6 m away from a wall and its top reaches a window 8 m above the
ground. If the ladder is shifted in such a way that its foot is 8 m away from the wall, to
what height does its tip reach?
Sol:

Let, length of ladder be AD = BE = l m


In ∆ACD, by Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐷2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 + 𝐶𝐷2
⇒ 𝑙 2 = 82 + 62 ….(i)
𝐼𝑛 ∆𝐵𝐶𝐸, 𝑏𝑦 𝑝𝑦𝑡ℎ𝑎𝑔𝑜𝑟𝑎𝑠 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑚
𝐵𝐸 2 = 𝐵𝐶 2 + 𝐶𝐸 2
⇒ 𝑙 2 = 𝐵𝐶 2 + 82 ….(ii)
𝐶𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑒 (𝑖)𝑎𝑛𝑑 (𝑖𝑖)
𝐵𝐶 2 + 82 = 82 + 62
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 2 = 62
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 = 6𝑚

8. Two poles of height 9 m and 14 m stand on a plane ground. If the distance between their
feet is 12 m, find the distance between their tops.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

We have,
AC = 14 m, DC = 12m and ED = BC = 9m
Construction: Draw EB ⊥ AC
∴ AB = AC – BC = 14 – 9 = 5m
And, EB = DC = 12 m
In ∆ABE, by Pythagoras theorem,
𝐴𝐸 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐸 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐸 2 = 52 + 122
⇒ 𝐴𝐸 2 = 25 + 144 = 169
⇒ 𝐴𝐸 = √169 = 13 𝑚
∴ 𝐷𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑏𝑒𝑡𝑤𝑒𝑒𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑖𝑟 𝑡𝑜𝑝𝑠 = 13 𝑚

9. Using Pythagoras theorem determine the length of AD in terms of b and c shown in Fig.
4.219

Sol:
We have,
In ∆BAC, by Pythagoras theorem
𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐴𝐶 2
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝑐 2 + 𝑏 2
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 = √𝑐 2 + 𝑏 2 …(i)
𝐼𝑛 ∆𝐴𝐵𝐷 𝑎𝑛𝑑 ∆𝐶𝐵𝐴
∠B = ∠B [Common]
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

∠ADB = ∠BAC [Each 90°]


Then, ∆ABD ~ ∆CBA [By AA similarity]
𝐴𝐵 𝐴𝐷
∴ 𝐶𝐵 = [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝐶𝐴
𝑐 𝐴𝐷
⇒ √𝑐 2 =
+𝑏2 𝑏
𝑏𝑐
⇒ AD = √𝑐 2
+𝑏 2

10. A triangle has sides 5 cm, 12 cm and 13 cm. Find the length to one decimal place, of the
perpendicular from the opposite vertex to the side whose length is 13 cm.
Sol:

Let, AB = 5cm, BC = 12 cm and AC = 13 cm. Then, 𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2 . This proves that


∆ABC is a right triangle, right angles at B. Let BD be the length of perpendicular from B
on AC.
1
Now, Area ∆ABC = 2 (𝐵𝐶 × 𝐵𝐴)
1
= 2 (12 × 5)
= 30 cm2
1 1
Also, Area of ∆ABC = 2 𝐴𝐶 × 𝐵𝐷 = 2 (13 × 𝐵𝐷)
⇒ (13 × 𝐵𝐷) = 30 × 2
60
⇒ BD = 13 cm

11. ABCD is a square. F is the mid-point of AB. BE is one third of BC. If the area of ∆FBE =
108 cm2, find the length of AC.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

Since, ABCD is a square


Then, AB = BC = CD = DA = x cm
Since, F is the mid-point of AB
𝑥
Then, AF = 𝐹𝐵 = 2 𝑐𝑚
Since, BE is one third of BC
𝑥
Then, BE = 3 cm
We have, area of ∆FBE = 108 cm2
1
⇒ 2 × 𝐵𝐸 × 𝐹𝐵 = 108
1 𝑥 𝑥
⇒ 2 × 3 × 2 = 108
⇒ 𝑥 2 = 108 × 2 × 3 × 2
⇒ 𝑥 2 = 1296
⇒ 𝑥 = √1296 = 36𝑐𝑚
𝐼𝑛 ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶, 𝑏𝑦 𝑝𝑦𝑡ℎ𝑎𝑔𝑜𝑟𝑎𝑠 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑚 𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐶 2 = 2𝑥 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐶 2 = 2 × (36)2
⇒ 𝐴𝐶 = 36√2 = 36 × 1.414 = 50.904 𝑐𝑚

12. In an isosceles triangle ABC, if AB = AC = 13 cm and the altitude from A on BC is 5 cm,


find BC.
Sol:

In ∆ADB, by Pythagoras theorem


𝐴𝐷2 + 𝐵𝐷2 = 132
⇒ 25 + 𝐵𝐷2 = 169
⇒ 𝐵𝐷2 = 169 − 2 = 144
⇒ 𝐵𝐷 = √144 = 12 𝑐𝑚
𝐼𝑛 ∆𝐴𝐷𝐵 𝑎𝑛𝑑 ∆𝐴𝐷𝐶
∠ADB = ∠ADC [Each 90°]
AB = AC [Each 13 cm]
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

AD = AD [Common]
Then, ∆ADB ≅ ∆ADC [By RHS condition]
∴ BD = CD = 12 cm [By c.p.c.t]
Hence, BC = 12 + 12 = 24 cm

13. In a ∆ABC, AB = BC = CA = 2a and AD ⊥ BC. Prove that


(i) AD = a√3 (ii) Area (∆ABC) = √3 a2
Sol:

(i) In ∆ABD and ∆ACD


∠ADB = ∠ADC [Each 90°]
AB = AC [Given]
AD = AD [Common]
Then, ∆ABD ≅ ∆ACD [By RHS condition]
∴ BD = CD = a [By c.p.c.t]
In ∆ADB, by Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐷2 + 𝐵𝐷2 = 𝐴𝐵 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐷2 + (𝑎)2 = (2𝑎)2
⇒ 𝐴𝐷2 + 𝑎2 = 4𝑎2
⇒ 𝐴𝐷2 = 4𝑎2 − 𝑎2 = 3𝑎2
⇒ 𝐴𝐷 = 𝑎√3
1
(ii) Area of ∆ABC = 2 × 𝐵𝐶 × 𝐴𝐷
1
= 2 × 2𝑎 × 𝑎√3
= √3𝑎2

14. The lengths of the diagonals of a rhombus are 24 cm and 10 cm. Find each side of the
rhombus.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

We have,
ABCD is a rhombus with diagonals AC = 10 cm and BD = 24 cm
We know that diagonal of a rhombus bisect each other at 90°
∴ AO = OC = 5 cm and BO = OD = 12 cm
In ∆AOB, by Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝑂2 + 𝐵𝑂2
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 52 + 122
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 25 + 144 = 169
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 = √169 = 13 𝑐𝑚

15. Each side of a rhombus is 10 cm. If one of its diagonals is 16 cm find the length of the
other diagonal.
Sol:

We have,
ABCD is a rhombus with side 10 cm and diagonal BD = 16 cm
We know that diagonals of a rhombus bisect each other at 90°
∴ BO = OD = 8 cm
In ∆AOB, by pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝑂2 + 𝐵𝑂2 = 𝐴𝐵 2
⇒ 𝐴𝑂2 + 82 = 102
⇒ 𝐴𝑂2 = 100 − 64 = 36
⇒ 𝐴𝑂 = √36 = 6 𝑐𝑚 [By above property]
ℎ𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒, 𝐴𝐶 = 6 + 6 = 12 𝑐𝑚
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

16. In an acute-angled triangle, express a median in terms of its sides.


Sol:

We have,
In ∆ABC, AD is a median.
Draw AE ⊥ BC
In ∆AEB, by pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐸 2 + 𝐵𝐸 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐷2 − 𝐷𝐸 2 + (𝐵𝐷 − 𝐷𝐸)2 [By Pythagoras theorem]
2 2 2 2 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 = 𝐴𝐷 − 𝐷𝐸 + 𝐵𝐷 + 𝐷𝐸 − 2𝐵𝐷 × 𝐷𝐸
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐷2 + 𝐵𝐷2 − 2𝐵𝐷 × 𝐷𝐸
𝐵𝐶 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐷2 + − 𝐵𝐶 × 𝐷𝐸 ….(i) [BC = 2BD given]
4
Again, In ∆AEC, by pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐸 2 + 𝐸𝐶 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐷2 − 𝐷𝐸 2 + (𝐷𝐸 + 𝐶𝐷)2 [By Pythagoras theorem]
⇒𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐷2 + 𝐶𝐷 2 + 2𝐶𝐷 × 𝐷𝐸
𝐵𝐶 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐷2 + + 𝐵𝐶 × 𝐷𝐸 ….(ii) [BC = 2CD given]
4
𝐴𝑑𝑑 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑠 (𝑖) 𝑎𝑛𝑑 (𝑖𝑖)
𝐵𝐶 2
𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐴𝐶 2 = 2𝐴𝐷 2 + 2
⇒ 2𝐴𝐵 2 + 2𝐴𝐶 2 = 4𝐴𝐷2 + 𝐵𝐶 2 [Multiply by 2]
⇒4𝐴𝐷2 = 2𝐴𝐵 2 + 2𝐴𝐶 2 − 𝐵𝐶 2
2𝐴𝐵2 +2𝐴𝐶 2 −𝐵𝐶 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐷2 = 4
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

17. Calculate the height of an equilateral triangle each of whose sides measures 12 cm.
Sol:

We have,
∆ABC is an equilateral ∆ with side 12 cm.
Draw AE ⊥ BC
In ∆ABD and ∆ACD
∠ADB = ∠ADC [Each 90°]
AB = AC [Each 12 cm]
AD = AD [Common]
Then, ∆ABD ≅ ∆ACD [By RHS condition]
2 2 2
∴ 𝐴𝐷 + 𝐵𝐷 = 𝐴𝐵
⇒ 𝐴𝐷2 + 62 = 122
⇒ 𝐴𝐷2 = 144 − 36 = 108
⇒ AD = √108 = 10.39 cm

18. In right-angled triangle ABC in which ∠C = 90°, if D is the mid-point of BC, prove that
AB2 = 4 AD2 −3 AC2.
Sol:

We have,
∠C = 90° and D is the mid-point of BC
In ∆ACB, by Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 + (2𝐶𝐷)2 [D is the mid-point of BC]
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 + 4𝐶𝐷 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 + 4(𝐴𝐷2 − 𝐴𝐶 2 ) [In ∆ACD, by Pythagoras theorem]
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 + 4𝐴𝐷2 − 4𝐴𝐶 2
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 4𝐴𝐷2 − 3𝐴𝐶 2

19. In Fig. 4.220, D is the mid-point of side BC and AE ⊥ BC. If BC = a, AC = b, AB = c, ED


= x, AD = p and AE = h, prove that:

𝑎2
(i) 𝑏 2 = 𝑝2 + 𝑎𝑥 + 4
2 2 𝑎2
(ii) 𝑐 = 𝑝 − 𝑎𝑥 + 4
2 2 2 𝑎2
(iii) 𝑏 + 𝑐 = 2𝑝 + 2
Sol:
We have, D as the mid-point of BC
(i) 𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐸 2 + 𝐸𝐶 2
𝑏 2 = 𝐴𝐸 2 + (𝐸𝐷 + 𝐷𝐶)2 [By pythagoras theorem]
2 2 2
𝑏 = 𝐴𝐷 + 𝐷𝐶 + 2𝐷𝐶 × 𝐸𝐷
𝑎 2 𝑎
𝑏 2 = 𝑝2 + (2 ) + 2 (2 ) × 𝑥 [BC = 2CD given]
𝑎2
⇒ 𝑏 2 = 𝑝2 + + 𝑎𝑥 …(i)
4
(ii) In ∆AEB, by pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐸 2 + 𝐵𝐸 2
⇒ 𝑐 2 = 𝐴𝐷 2 − 𝐸𝐷2 + (𝐵𝐷 − 𝐸𝐷)2 [By pythagoras theorem]
⇒ 𝑐 2 = 𝑝2 − 𝐸𝐷2 + 𝐵𝐷2 + 𝐸𝐷2 − 2𝐵𝐷 × 𝐸𝐷
𝑎 2 𝑎
⇒ 𝑐 2 = 𝑝2 + (2) − 2 (2) × 𝑥 …(ii)
(iii) Add equations (i) and (ii)
𝑎2
𝑏 2 + 𝑐 2 = 2𝑝2 + 2

20. In Fig., 4.221, ∠B < 90° and segment AD ⊥ BC, show that
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

(i) 𝑏 2 = ℎ2 + 𝑎2 + 𝑥 2 − 2𝑎𝑥
(ii) 𝑏 2 = 𝑎2 + 𝑐 2 − 2𝑎𝑥
Sol:
In ∆ADC, by pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐷2 + 𝐷𝐶 2
⇒ 𝑏 2 = ℎ2 + (𝑎 − 𝑥)2
⇒ 𝑏 2 = ℎ2 + 𝑎2 + 𝑥 2 − 2𝑎𝑥
⇒ 𝑏 2 = 𝑎2 + (ℎ2 + 𝑥 2 ) − 2𝑎𝑥
⇒ 𝑏 2 = 𝑎2 + 𝑐 2 − 2𝑎𝑥 by Pythagoras theorem

21. In ∆ABC, ∠A is obtuse, PB ⊥AC and QC ⊥ AB. Prove that:


(i) AB × AQ = AC × AP
(ii) 𝐵𝐶 2 = (𝐴𝐶 × 𝐶𝑃 + 𝐴𝐵 × 𝐵𝑄)
Sol:

Then, ∆APB ~ ∆AQC [By AA similarity]


𝐴𝑃 𝐴𝐵
∴ = [Corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
𝐴𝑄 𝐴𝐶
⇒ 𝐴𝑃 × 𝐴𝐶 = 𝐴𝑄 × 𝐴𝐵 …(i)
(ii) In ∆BPC, by pythagoras theorem
𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐵𝑃2 + 𝑃𝐶 2
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 − 𝐴𝑃2 + (𝐴𝑃 + 𝐴𝐶)2 [By pythagoras theorem]
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐴𝐶 2 + 2𝐴𝑃 × 𝐴𝐶 …(ii)
𝐼𝑛 ∆𝐵𝑄𝐶, 𝑏𝑦 𝑝𝑦𝑡ℎ𝑎𝑔𝑜𝑟𝑎𝑠 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑚,
𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐶𝑄 2 + 𝐵𝑄 2
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 − 𝐴𝑄 2 + (𝐴𝐵 + 𝐴𝑄)2 [By pythagoras theorem]
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

⇒ 𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 − 𝐴𝑄 2 + 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐴𝑄 2 + 2𝐴𝐵 × 𝐴𝑄
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 + 𝐴𝐵 2 + 2𝐴𝐵 × 𝐴𝑄 …(iii)
𝐴𝑑𝑑 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑠 (𝑖𝑖)& (𝑖𝑖𝑖)
2𝐵𝐶 2 = 2𝐴𝐶 2 + 2𝐴𝐵 2 + 2𝐴𝑃 × 𝐴𝐶 + 2𝐴𝐵 × 𝐴𝑄
⇒ 2𝐵𝐶 2 = 2𝐴𝐶 2 + 2𝐴𝐵 2 + 2𝐴𝑃 × 𝐴𝐶 + 2𝐴𝐵 × 𝐴𝑄
⇒ 2𝐵𝐶 2 = 2𝐴𝐶[𝐴𝐶 + 𝐴𝑃] + 𝐴𝐵[𝐴𝐵 + 𝐴𝑄]
⇒ 2𝐵𝐶 2 = 2𝐴𝐶 × 𝑃𝐶 + 2𝐴𝐵 × 𝐵𝑄
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐶 × 𝑃𝐶 + 𝐴𝐵 × 𝐵𝑄 [Divide by 2]

22. In a right ∆ABC right-angled at C, if D is the mid-point of BC, prove that 𝐵𝐶 2 =


4(𝐴𝐷2 − 𝐴𝐶 2 )
Sol:

To prove: 𝐵𝐶 2 = 4[𝐴𝐷2 − 𝐴𝐶 2 ]
We have, ∠C = 90° and D is the mid-point of BC.
LHS = 𝐵𝐶 2
= (2𝐶𝐷)2 [D is the mid-point of BC]
2
= 4CD
= 4[𝐴𝐷2 − 𝐴𝐶 2 ] [In ∆ACD, by pythagoras theorem]
= 𝑅𝐻𝑆

23. In a quadrilateral ABCD, ∠B = 90°, AD2 = AB2 + BC2 + CD2, prove that ∠ACD = 90°.
Sol:

We have, ∠B = 90° and 𝐴𝐷2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2 + 𝐶𝐷2


∴ 𝐴𝐷2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2 + 𝐶𝐷2 [Given]
But 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 [By pythagoras theorem]
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

Then, 𝐴𝐷2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 + 𝐶𝐷2


By converse of by pythagoras theorem
∠ACD = 90°

24. In an equilateral ∆ABC, AD ⊥ BC, prove that 𝐴𝐷2 = 3𝐵𝐷2 .


Sol:

We have, ∆ABC is an equilateral ∆ and AD ⊥ BC


In ∆ADB and ∆ADC
∠ADB = ∠ADC [Each 90°]
AB = AC [Given]
AD = AD [Common]
Then, ∆ADB ≅ ∆ADC [By RHS condition]
𝐵𝐶
∴ BD = CD = …(i) [corresponding parts of similar ∆ are proportional]
2
In, ∆ABD, by Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐷2 + 𝐵𝐷2
⇒ 𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐷2 + 𝐵𝐷2 [AB = BC given]
2 2 2
⇒ [2𝐵𝐷] = 𝐴𝐷 + 𝐵𝐷 [From (i)]
2 2 2
⇒ 4𝐵𝐷 − 𝐵𝐷 = 𝐴𝐷
⇒ 3𝐵𝐷2 = 𝐴𝐷2

25. ∆ABD is a right triangle right angled at A and AC ⊥ BD. Show that:
(i) 𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐶𝐵 × 𝐵𝐷
(ii) 𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐷𝐶 × 𝐵𝐶
(iii) 𝐴𝐷2 = 𝐵𝐷 × 𝐶𝐷
𝐴𝐵2 𝐵𝐷
(iv) = 𝐷𝐶
𝐴𝐶 2
Sol:
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

(i) In ∆ADB and ∆CAB


∠DAB = ∠ACB = 90°
∠ABD = ∠CBA (common angle)
∠ADB = ∠CAB (remaining angle)
So, ∆ADB ~ ∆CAB (by AAA similarity)
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐷
Therefore 𝐶𝐵 = 𝐴𝐵
⇒ 𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐶𝐵 × 𝐵𝐷
(ii) Let ∠CAB = x
In ∆CBA
∠CBA = 180° − 90° − 𝑥
∠CBA = 90° − 𝑥
Similarly in ∆CAD
∠CAD = 90° − ∠𝐶𝐴𝐷 = 90° − 𝑥
∠CDA = 90° − ∠CAB
= 90° − 𝑥
∠CDA = 180° −90° − (90° − 𝑥)
∠CDA = x
Now in ∆CBA and ∆CAD we may observe that
∠CBA = ∠CAD
∠CAB = ∠CDA
∠ACB = ∠DCA = 90°
Therefore ∆CBA ~ ∆CAD (by AAA rule)
𝐴𝐶 𝐵𝐶
Therefore 𝐷𝐶 = 𝐴𝐶
⇒ 𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐷𝐶 × 𝐵𝐶
(iii) In ∆DCA & ∆DAB
∠DCA = ∠DAB (both are equal to 90°)
∠CDA = ∠ADB (common angle)
∠DAC = ∠DBA (remaining angle)
∆DCA ~ ∆DAB (AAA property)
𝐷𝐶 𝐷𝐴
Therefore 𝐷𝐴 = 𝐷𝐵
⇒𝐴𝐷2 = 𝐵𝐷 × 𝐶𝐷
(iv) From part (i) 𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐶𝐵 × 𝐵𝐷
From part (ii) 𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐷𝐶 × 𝐵𝐶
𝐴𝐵2 𝐶𝐵×𝐵𝐷
Hence 𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐷𝐶×𝐵𝐶
𝐴𝐵2 𝐵𝐷
= 𝐷𝐶
𝐴𝐶 2
Hence proved
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

26. A guy wire attached to a vertical pole of height 18 m is 24 m long and has a stake attached
to the other end. How far from the base of the pole should the stake be driven so that the
wire will be taut?
Sol:

Let OB be the pole and AB be the wire. Therefore by pythagoras theorem,


𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝑂𝐵 2 + 𝑂𝐴2
242 = 182 + 𝑂𝐴2
𝑂𝐴2 = 576 − 324
OA = √252 = √6 × 6 × 7 = 6√7
Therefore distance from base = 6√7 𝑚

27. An aeroplane leaves an airport and flies due north at a speed of 1000km/hr. At the same
time, another aeroplane leaves the same airport and flies due west at a speed of 1200 km/hr.
How far apart will be the two planes after 1 hours?
Sol:

1
Distance traveled by the plane flying towards north in 1 2 hrs
1
= 1000 × 1 2 = 1500 𝑘𝑚
1
Similarly, distance travelled by the plane flying towards west in 1 2 ℎ𝑟𝑠
1
= 1200 × 1 2 = 1800 𝑘𝑚
Let these distances are represented by OA and OB respectively.
Now applying Pythagoras theorem
1
Distance between these planes after 1 2 ℎ𝑟𝑠 AB = √𝑂𝐴2 + 𝑂𝐵 2
= √(1500)2 + (1800)2 = √2250000 + 3240000
Class X Chapter 4 – Triangles Maths

= √5490000 = √9 × 610000 = 300√61


1
So, distance between these planes will be 300√61 km, after 1 2 ℎ𝑟𝑠

28. Determine whether the triangle having sides (a − 1) cm, 2√𝑎 cm and (a + 1) cm is a right-
angled triangle.
Sol:
Let ABC be the ∆ with
AB = (a – 1) cm BC = 2√𝑎 cm, CA = (a + 1) cm
Hence, 𝐴𝐵 2 = (𝑎 − 1)2 = 𝑎2 + 1 − 2𝑎
2
𝐵𝐶 2 = (2√𝑎) = 4𝑎
𝐶𝐴2 = (𝑎 + 1)2 = 𝑎2 + 1 + 2𝑎
Hence 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2
𝑆𝑜 ∆ 𝐴𝐵𝐶 𝑖𝑠 𝑟𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒𝑑 ∆ 𝑎𝑡 𝐵.
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 5.1

1. In each of the following one of the six trigonometric ratios is given. Find the values of the
other trigonometric ratios.
Sol:
2
(i) Sin A = 3
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
We know that Sin 𝜃 = ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
Let us Consider a right angled ∆le ABC.

By applying Pythagorean theorem we get


𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
9 = 𝑥2 + 4
𝑥2 = 9 - 4
x = √5
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
We know that cos = and
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
tan𝜃 = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
√5
So, cos𝜃 = ;
3
1 3
sec = =
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 √5
2
tan𝜃 = ;
√5
1 √5
cot = 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃 = 2
1 3
cosec𝜃 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃 = 2
(ii)
4
Cos A = 5
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
We know that cos𝜃 = ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
Let us consider a right angled ∆le ABC.

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Let opposite side BC = x.


By applying pythagorn’s theorem, we get
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
25 = x + 16
x = 25 - 16 = 9
x = √9 = 3
4
We know that cosA = 5
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 3
sinA = =5
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 3
tanA = =4
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
1
1 3 5
cosecA = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝐴 = =3
5
1
1 4 5
secA = = =4
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝐴 5
1
1 3 4
cotA = 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝐴 = =3
4

(iii)
tan𝜃 = 11.
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 11
We know that tan𝜃 = =
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 1
Consider a right angled ∆ ABC. le

Let hypotenuse AC = x, by applying Pythagoras theorem


𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
𝑥 2 = 112 + 12
𝑥 2 = 121 + 1
𝑥 = √122
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 11
We know that sin𝜃 = =
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒 √122
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 1
cos𝜃 = =
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒 √122

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
1 11 √122
cosec𝜃 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃 = =
√122 11
1 1/1
sec𝜃 = = = √122
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 √122
1 1 1
cot𝜃 = 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃 = 11 = 11
(iv)
11
Sin 𝜃 = 5
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 11
We know Sin 𝜃 = = 15
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
Consider right angled ∆le ACB.

Let x = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒


By applying Pythagoras
𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
225 = 121+𝑥 2
𝑥 2 = 225 -121
𝑥 2 = 104
𝑥 = √104
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 104
cos = = √ 15
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 11
tan = =
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 √104
1 15
cosec𝜃 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃 = 11
1 15
sec = =
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 √104
1 √104
cot = 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃 = 11
(v)
5
tanα = 12
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 5
We know that tanα= = 12
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
Now consider a right angled ∆le ABC.

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Let x = hypotenuse .By applying Pythagoras theorem


𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
𝑥 2 = 52 + 122
𝑥 2 = 25 + 144 = 169
𝑥 = 13
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 5
sinα = = 13
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 12
cosα = = 13
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
1 12
cotα = 𝑡𝑎𝑛α = 15
1 1/5 13
cosecα = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝛼 = =
13 5
1
1 12 13
secα = = = 12 .
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝛼 13
(vi)
√3
Sin 𝜃 = 2
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 √3
We know Sin 𝜃 = =
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒 2
Now consider right angled ∆le ABC.

Let x = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒


By applying Pythagoras
𝐴𝐵 2 = 𝐴𝐶 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
4 = 3+𝑥 2
𝑥2 = 4 − 3
𝑥2 = 1
𝑥 =1
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 1
cos = =
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒 2
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 √3
tan = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
= 1
= √3

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1 2
cosec𝜃 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃 = √3
=
√3
2
1
1 1
sec = = =2
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 2
1 1
cot = 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃 =
√3
(vii)
7
Cos𝜃 = 25.
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
We know that cos𝜃 = ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
Now consider a right angled ∆le ABC,

Let x be the opposite side.


By applying pythagorn’s theorem
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
(25)2 = 𝑥 2 + 72
625 - 49 = 𝑥 2
576 = √576 = 24

𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 24
sin𝜃 = = 25
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 24
tan𝜃 = =
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 7
1
1 3 25
cosec𝜃 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃 = = 24
5
1
1 4 25
sec𝜃 = = =
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 5 7
1
1 3 7
cot𝜃 = 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃 = = 24
4
(viii)
8
tan𝜃 = 15
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 8
We know that tan𝜃= = 15
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
Now consider a right angled ∆le ABC.

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
By applying Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
𝑥 2 = 82 + 152
𝑥 2 = 225 + 64 = 289
𝑥 = √289 = 17
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 8
sin𝜃 = = 17
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 15
cos𝜃 = = 17
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 8
tan𝜃 = =
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 15
1 1 15
cot𝜃 = = 8 =
𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃 8
15
1
1 8 17
cosec𝜃 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃 = 17
= 8
1
1 15 17
sec𝜃 = = = 15
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 17
(ix)
12
cot𝜃 = 5
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 12
cotα= =
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 5
Now consider a right angled ∆le ABC,

By applying Pythagoras theorem


𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
𝑥 2 = 25 + 144
𝑥 2 = 169 = √169
𝑥 = 13
1
1 12 5
tan𝜃 = 𝑐𝑜𝑡𝜃 = =
5 12
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 5
sin𝜃 = = 13
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 12
cos𝜃 = = 13
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
1 1 13
cosec𝜃 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃 = 5/13 = 5
1 1 13
sec𝜃 = = 12/13 = 12
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃
(x)
13
sec𝜃 = 5

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒 13
sec𝜃 = =
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 5
Now consider a right angled ∆le ABC,

By applying Pythagoras theorem


𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
169 = 𝑥 2 + 25
𝑥 2 = 169 − 25 = 144
𝑥 = 12
1
1 5
cos𝜃 = 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝜃 = 13 = 13
5
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 12
tan𝜃 = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 = 5
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 12
sin𝜃 = = 13
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
1 1 13
cosec𝜃 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃 = 12/13 = 12
1 1 13
sec𝜃 = = 5/13 =
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 5
1 1 5
cot𝜃 = = =
𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃 12/5 12
(xi)
cosec𝜃 = √10
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
cosec𝜃 = = √10
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
consider a right angled ∆le ABC, we get

Let x be the adjacent side.


By applying pythagora’s theorem
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
2
(√10) = 12 + 𝑥 2
𝑥 2 = 10 − 1 = 9
𝑥=3
1 1
sin𝜃 = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐𝜃 =
√10
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 3
cos𝜃 = =
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒 √10

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 1
tan𝜃 = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 = 3
1 √10
sec𝜃 = =
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 3
1
1 1
cot𝜃 = = = 3.
𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃 3
(xii)
12
Cos𝜃 = 5
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 12
cos𝜃 = = 15 .
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒

Let x be the opposite side.


By applying pythagorn’s theorem
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
225 = 𝑥 2 + 144
225 − 144 = 𝑥 2
𝑥 2 = 81
𝑥=9
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 9
sin𝜃 = = 15
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 9
tan𝜃 = = 12
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
1
1 9 15
cosec𝜃 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛θ = 15 = 9
1
1 12 15
sec𝜃 = = = 12
𝑐𝑜𝑠θ 15
1
1 9 12
cot𝜃 = 𝑡𝑎𝑛θ = =
12 9

2. In a ∆ABC, right angled at B, AB = 24 cm, BC = 7 cm. Determine


(i) Sin A, Cos A
(ii) Sin C, cos C
Sol:
∆ABC is right angled at B
AB = 24cm, BC = 7cm.

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Let ‘x’ be the hypotenuse,


By applying Pythagoras
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
𝑥 2 = 242 + 72
𝑥 2 = 576 + 49
𝑥 2 = 625
𝑥 = 25
a. Sin A, Cos A
At ∠A, opposite side = 7
adjacent side = 24
hypotenuse = 25
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 7
sin A = = 25
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 24
cos A = = 25
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
b. Sin C, Cos C
At ∠C, opposite side = 24
adjacent side = 7
hypotenuse = 25
24
sin C = 25
7
cos C = 25

3. In Fig below, Find tan P and cot R. Is tan P = cot R?

Sol:

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Let x be the adjacent side.


By Pythagoras theorem
𝑃𝑅 2 = 𝑃𝑄 2 + 𝑅𝑄 2
169 = 𝑥 2 + 144
𝑥 2 = 25
𝑥=5
At LP, opposite side = 5
Adjacent side = 12
Hypotenuse = 13
1
12 5
tan P = ⇒ 12
5
At LR, opposite side = 12
Adjacent side = 5
Hypotenuse = 13
1 1 5
cot R = tan 𝑅 = 12 = 12
5
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
[∵ Tan R = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒]
∵ tan P = cot R

9
4. If sin A = 41 , 𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑢𝑡𝑒 cos 𝐴 𝑎𝑛𝑑 tan 𝐴
Sol:
9
sin 𝐴 = 41
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 9
Sin A = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 = 41
Consider right angled triangle ABC,

Let x be the adjacent side


By applying Pythagorean

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
412 = 122 + 92
𝑥 2 = 412 − 92
𝑥 = 40
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 40
cos 𝐴 = = 41
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 9
tan 𝐴 = 𝐻𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 = 40

5. Given 15 cot A = 8, find Sin A and sec A.


Sol:
15 cot A = 8, find Sin A and sec A
8
Cot A = 15

Consider right angled triangle ABC,


Let x be the hypotenuse,
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
𝑥 2 = (8)2 + (15)2
𝑥 2 = 64 + 225
𝑥 2 = 289
𝑥 = 17
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 15
Sin A = = 17
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
1
Sec A = cos 𝐴
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 8
cos 𝐴 = = 17
𝐻𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
1 1 17
Sec A = cos 𝐴 = 8/17 = 8

6. In ∆PQR, right angled at Q, PQ = 4 cm and RQ = 3 cm. Find the values of sin P, sin R, sec
P and sec R.
Sol:
∆PQR, right angled at Q.

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Let x be the hypotenuse


By applying Pythagoras
𝑃𝑅 2 = 𝑃𝑄 2 + 𝑄𝑅 2
𝑥 2 = 42 + 32
𝑥 2 = 16 + 9
∴ 𝑥 = √25 = 5
Find sin 𝑃 , sin 𝑅, sec 𝑃, sec 𝑅
At LP, opposite side = 3 cm
Adjacent side = 4 cm
Hypotenuse = 5
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 3
sin 𝑃 = =5
𝐻𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
𝐻𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒 5
sec 𝑃 = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 = 4
At LK, opposite side = 4 cm
Adjacent side = 3 cm
Hypotenuse = 5 cm
4
Sin R = 5
5
Sec R = 3

7
7. If cot 𝜃 = 8 , 𝑒𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑒:
(1+sin 𝜃) (1−sin 𝜃)
(i) (1+cos 𝜃)(1−cos 𝜃)
(ii) Cot2𝜃
Sol:
7
Cot 𝜃 =
8
(1+sin 𝜃) (1−sin 𝜃)
(i) (1+cos 𝜃)(1−cos 𝜃)
1−sin2 𝜃
= 1−cos2 𝜃 [∵ (a + b) (a – b) = 𝑎2 − 𝑏 2 ] a = 1, b = sin 𝜃
We know that 𝑆𝑖𝑛2 𝜃 + cos2 𝜃 = 1
1 − sin2 𝜃 = cos2 𝜃 = cos2 𝜃
1 − cos2 𝜃 = sin2 𝜃
cos2 𝜃
= sin2 𝜃

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
= cot 2 𝜃
7 2
= (cot 𝜃)2 = [8]
49
= 64
(ii) cot 2 𝜃
7 2
⇒ (cot 𝜃)2 = [8]
49
= 64

1−tan2 𝐴
8. If 3 cot A = 4, check whether 1+tan2 𝐴 = cos 2 𝐴 − sin2 𝐴 or not.
Sol:
1−tan2 𝐴
3 cot A = 4, check = = cos 2 𝐴 − sin2 𝐴
1+tan2 𝐴

𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 4
Cot A = =3
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
Let x be the hypotenuse
By Applying Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
𝑥 2 = 42 + 32
𝑥 2 = 25
𝑥=5
1 3
Tan A = cos2 𝐴 = 4
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 4
Cos A = =5
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
3
Sin A = 5
3 2 16−9
1−tan2 𝐴 1−( ) 7
4 16
LHS = = 3 2
= 16+9 =
1+tan2 𝐴 1+( ) 25
4 16

4 2 3 2 16−9
RHS cos 2 𝐴 − sin2 𝐴 = (5) − (5) = 25
7
= 251

𝑎 cos 𝜃+sin 𝜃
9. If tan 𝜃 = 𝑏 , find the value of cos 𝜃−sin 𝜃
Sol:
𝑎 cos 𝜃+sin 𝜃
Tan 𝜃 = 𝑏 find cos 𝜃−sin 𝜃 ….(i)

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Divide equation (i) with cos 𝜃, we get
cos 𝜃+sin 𝜃
cos 𝜃
⇒ cos 𝜃−sin 𝜃
cos 𝜃
sin 𝜃
1+
cos 𝜃
⇒ sin 𝜃
1−
cos 𝜃
1+tan 𝜃
⇒ 1−tan 𝜃
𝑎
1+
𝑏
= 𝑎
1−
𝑏
𝑏+𝑎
= 𝑏−𝑎

4 cos 𝜃−sin 𝜃
10. If 3 tan 𝜃 = 4, 𝑓𝑖𝑛𝑑 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑜𝑓 2 cos 𝜃+sin 𝜃
Sol:
4 cos 𝜃 −sin 𝜃
3 tan 𝜃 = 4 find …(i)
2 cos 𝜃+sin 𝜃
4
Tan 𝜃 = 3
Dividing equation (i) with cos 𝜃 we get
4 cos 𝜃−sin 𝜃
cos 𝜃 4−tan 𝜃 sin 𝜃
= 2 cos 𝜃+sin 𝜃 = 2+tan 𝜃 [∵ cos 𝜃 = tan 𝜃]
cos 𝜃
4−tan 𝜃 sin 𝜃
= 2+tan 𝜃 [∵ cos 𝜃 = tan 𝜃]
4
4−
1
= 4
2+
5
12−4
= 6+4
8
= 10
4
=5

4 sin 𝜃−3 cos 𝜃


11. If 3 cot 𝜃 = 2, find the value of = 2 sin 𝜃+6sin 𝜃
Sol:
4 sin 𝜃−3 cos 𝜃
3 cot 𝜃 = 2 find … (i)
2 sin 𝜃+6 cos 𝜃
2
Cot 𝜃 = 3
4 sin 𝜃−3 cos 𝜃
sin 𝜃
= 2 sin 𝜃+6 cos 𝜃
sin 𝜃
4−3 cot 𝜃
=
2+6 cot 𝜃
2
4−3×
3
= 2
2+6×
3

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
4+2 2
= 2+4 = 6
1
=3

𝑎 𝑎 sin 𝜃−𝑏 cos 𝜃 𝑎2 −𝑏2


12. If tan 𝜃 = 𝑏, prove that 𝑎 sin 𝜃 +𝑏 cos 𝜃 = 𝑎2 +𝑏2
Sol:
𝑎 𝑎 sin 𝜃−𝑏 cos 𝜃 𝑎2 −𝑏 2
Tan𝜃 = 𝑏. PT 𝑎 sin 𝜃 +𝑏 cos 𝜃 = 𝑎2 +𝑏2
𝑎 sin 𝜃−𝑏 cos 𝜃
Let 𝑎 sin 𝜃+𝑏 cos 𝜃 …(i)
Divide both Nr and Dr with cos 𝜃 of (a)
𝑎 sin 𝜃−𝑏 cos 𝜃
cos 𝜃
= 𝑎 sin 𝜃+𝑏 cos 𝜃
cos 𝜃
𝑎 tan 𝜃−𝑏
= 𝑎 tan 𝜃+𝑏
𝑎
𝑎×( )−𝑏
𝑏
= 𝑎
𝑎×( )+𝑏
𝑏
𝑎2 −𝑏 2
= 𝑎2 +𝑏2

13 2 cos 𝜃−3 cos 𝜃


13. If sec 𝜃 = , show that =3
5 4 sin 𝜃−9𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃
Sol:
13
𝑆𝑒𝑐 𝜃 = 5
𝐻𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒 13
Sec 𝜃 = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 = 5
Now consider right angled triangle ABC

By applying Pythagoras theorem


𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
169 = 𝑥 2 + 25
𝑥 2 = 169 − 25 = 144
𝑥 = 12
1 1 5
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 = sec 𝜃 = 13 = 3
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 12
tan 𝜃 = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 = 13
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 12
sin 𝜃 = = 13
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1 13
Cosec 𝜃 = sin 𝜃 = 12/13 = 12
1 1 13
sec 𝜃 = cos 𝜃 = 5/13 = 5
1 1 5
Cot 𝜃 = tan 𝜃 = 12/5 = 12

12 35
14. If cos 𝜃 = 13, show that sin 𝜃 (1 – tan 𝜃) = 156
Sol:
12 35
Cos 𝜃 = S.T Sin 𝜃 (1 − tan 𝜃) = 156
3
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 12
Cos 𝜃 = = 13
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒

Let x be the opposite side


By applying Pythagoras
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
169 = 𝑥 2 + 144
x = 25
x=5
𝐴𝐵 5
sin 𝜃 = =3
𝐴𝐶
𝐴𝐵 5
Tan 𝜃 = 𝐵𝐶 = 12
5 5
sin 𝜃 (1 − tan 𝜃) = 13 (1 − 12)
5 7 35
= 13 [12] = 156

1 1−cos2 𝜃 3
15. If cot 𝜃 = , show that =5
√3 2−sin2 𝜃
Sol:
1 1−cos2 𝜃 3
cot 𝜃 = =
√3 2−sin2 𝜃 5
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 1
Cot 𝜃 = =
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 √3

Let x be the hypotenuse


By applying Pythagoras
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2
𝑥 2 = (√3) + 1
𝑥2 = 3 + 1
𝑥2 = 3 + 1 ⇒ 𝑥 = 2
𝐵𝐶 1
Cos 𝜃 = 𝐴𝐶 = − 2
𝐴𝐵 √3
Sin 𝜃 = 𝐴𝐶 = 2
1 2
1−cos2 𝜃 1−( )
2
⇒ 2
2−sin2 𝜃 √3
2−( )
2
1 3
1−
4 4
⇒ 3 ⇒ 5
2−
4 4
3
=5

1 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝜃−sec2 𝜃 3
16. If tan 𝜃 = =4
√7 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝜃+sec2 𝜃
Sol:
1 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝜃−sec2 𝜃 3
Tan𝜃 = =4
√7 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝜃+sec2 𝜃
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
Tan 𝜃 = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒

Let ‘x’ be the hypotenuse


By applying Pythagoras
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
2
𝑥 2 = 12 + (√7)
𝑥2 = 1 + 7 = 8
𝑥 = 2√2
𝐴𝐶
Cosec 𝜃 = 𝐴𝐵 = 2√2
𝐴𝐶 2√2
Sec 𝜃 = 𝐵𝐶 =
√7
Substitute, cosec 𝜃, sec 𝜃 in equation
2
2 2
(2√2) − (2√ )
7
⇒ 2
2
2√2
(2√2) +( )
√7
2
8−4×
7
2
8+4×
7

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
8
8−
7
⇒ 8
8+
7
56−8
7
= 56+8
7
48
= 64
3
=4
𝐿. 𝐻. 𝑆 = 𝑅. 𝐻. 𝑆

12 sin2 𝜃−cos2 𝜃 1
17. If Sin 𝜃 = 13 find × 𝑡𝑎𝑛2 𝜃
2 sin 𝜃 cos 𝜃
Sol:

Let x be the adjacent side


By applying Pythagoras
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
169 = 144 + 𝑥
𝑥 2 = 25
𝑥 = 5
𝐵𝐶 5
Cos θ = 𝐴𝐶 = 13
𝐴𝐵 12
Tan θ = 𝐵𝐶 = 5
12 2 5
( ) −( ) 1
13 13
⇒ 2 5 × 12 2
𝛼× × [ ]
13 13 5
144−25
169 25
⇒ 24×5 × 144
169
119
169 25 129 25 595
⇒ 120 × = × 144 = 3456
144 120
169

5 sin 𝜃−2 cos 𝜃


18. If sec 𝜃 = 4 , find the value of tan 𝜃−cot 𝜃
Sol:
Not given

5 sin2 𝜃−cos2 𝜃 3
19. If cos 𝜃 = 13 , find the value of =5
2𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 cos 𝜃
Sol:
Not given

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

12 2 sin 𝜃 cos 𝜃
20. Tan 𝜃 = 13 Find cos2 𝜃−sin2 𝜃
Sol:
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
Tan 𝜃 = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
Let x be, the hypotenuse

By Pythagoras we get
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
𝑥 2 = 144 + 169
𝑥 = √313
𝐴𝐵 12
Sin 𝜃 = 𝐴𝐶 =
√313
𝐵𝐶 13
Cos 𝜃 = 𝐴𝐶 =
√313
Substitute, Sin 𝜃, cos 𝜃 in equation we get
12 13
2 sin 𝜃 cos 𝜃 2× ×
√313 √313
⇒ 169 144
cos2 𝜃−sin2 𝜃 −
313 313
312
313 312
= 25 = 25
313

1
3 sin 𝜃−
tan 𝜃
21. If cos 𝜃 = 5, find the value of 2 tan 𝜃
Sol:
1
3 sin 𝜃−
tan 𝜃
Cos 𝜃 = 5 find value of
2 tan 𝜃
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
We know that cos 𝜃 =
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒

Let us consider right angled ∆le ABC


Let x be the opposite side, By applying Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
25 = 𝑥 2 + 9
𝑥 2 = 16 ⇒ 𝑥 = 4

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝐴𝐵 4
Sin 𝜃 = 𝐴𝐶 = 5
𝐴𝐵 4
Tan 𝜃 = =3
𝐵𝐶
Substitute sin 𝜃, tan 𝜃 in equation we get
1 4 3
sin 𝜃− −
tan 𝜃 5 4
= 4
2 tan 𝜃 2×
3
16−15 1
20 20
= 8 = 8
3 3
1 3 3
= 20 × 8 = 160

1
3 cos 𝜃−
tan 𝜃
22. If sin 𝜃 = 5 , 𝑒𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑒 2 cot 𝜃
Sol:
Not given

5 3 sin 𝐴−4 sin3 𝐴 3 tan 𝐴−tan3 𝐴


23. If sec A = 4, verify that 4 cos3 𝐴−3 cos 𝐴 = 1−3 tan2 𝐴
Sol:
Not given

3 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝜃−cot2 𝜃 √7
24. If sin 𝜃 = 4, prove that √ =
sec2 𝜃−1 3
Sol:
Not given

17 3−4 sin2 𝐴 3−tan2 𝐴


25. If sec A = , verify that 4 cos2 𝐴−3 = 1−3 tan2 𝐴
8
Sol:
17 3−4 sin2 𝐴 3−tan2 𝐴
Sec A = verify that 4 cos2 𝐴−3 = 1−3 tan2 𝐴
8
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
We know sec A = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
Consider right angled triangle ABC

Let x be the adjacent side


By applying Pythagoras we get
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
(17)2 = 𝑥 2 + 64

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝑥 2 = 289 − 64
𝑥 2 = 225 ⇒ 𝑥 = 15
𝐴𝐵 15
Sin A = 𝐵𝐶 = 17
𝐵𝐶 8
Cos A = 𝐴𝐶 = 17
𝐴𝐵 15
Tan A = 𝐵𝐶 = 8
15 2 225
3−4 sin2 𝐴 3−4×( ) 3−4× 867−900 −33 33
17 289
L.H.S = 4 cos2 𝐴−3 = 8 2
= 64 = 256−867 = −611 = 611
4×( ) −3 4× −3
17 289
15 2 225 −33
3−tan2 𝐴 3−( ) 3− −33 33
8 64 64
R.H.S = 1−3 tan2 𝐴 = 15 2
= 225 = −611 = −611 = 611
1−3×( ) 1−3× 64
8 64

∴ LHS = RHS

3 sec 𝜃−𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 1
26. If cot 𝜃 = 4, prove that √sec 𝜃+𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 =
√7
Sol:
3 sec 𝜃−𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 1
Cot 𝜃 = 4 P.T √ =
sec 𝜃+𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 √7
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
Cot 𝜃 = 𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒

Let x be the hypotenuse by applying Pythagoras theorem.


𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
𝑥 2 = 16 + 9
𝑥 2 = 25 ⇒ 𝑥 = 5
𝐴𝐶 5
sec 𝜃 = 𝐵𝐶 = 3
𝐴𝐶 5
Cosec 𝜃 = 𝐴𝐵 = 4
On substituting in equation we get
5 5
sec 𝜃−𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 −
3 4
√ =√ 5 5
sec 𝜃+𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 +
3 4

20−15
12 5 1
= √ 20+15 = √35 =
√7
12

24
27. If tan 𝜃 = , find that sin 𝜃 + cos 𝜃
7

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
24
Tan 𝜃 = 𝑓𝑖𝑛𝑑 sin 𝜃 + cos 𝜃
7

Let x − 1 be the hypotenuse By applying Pythagoras theorem we get


𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
𝑥 2 = (24)2 + (7)2
𝑥 2 = 576 + 49 = 62.5
x = 25
𝐴𝐵 24
sin 𝜃 = 𝐴𝐶 = 25
𝐵𝐶 7
cos 𝜃 = 𝐴𝐶 = 25
24 7
sin 𝜃 + cos 𝜃 = 25 + 25
31
= 25

𝑎
28. If sin 𝜃 = 𝑏, find sec 𝜃 + tan 𝜃 in terms of a and b.
Sol:
𝑎
Sin 𝜃 = 𝑏 find sec 𝜃 + tan 𝜃
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
We know sin 𝜃 = ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒

Let x be the adjacent side


By applying Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
𝑏 2 = 𝑎2 + 𝑥 2
𝑥 2 = 𝑏 2 − 𝑎2
𝑥 = √𝑏 2 − 𝑎2
𝐴𝐶 𝑏
sec 𝜃 = 𝐵𝐶 = √𝑏2
−𝑎2
𝐴𝐵 𝑎
Tan 𝜃 = 𝐵𝐶 = √𝑏2
−𝑎2

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝑏 𝑎
Sec 𝜃 + tan 𝜃 = √𝑏 2 −𝑎2
+ √𝑏2
−𝑎2
𝑏+𝑎 𝑏+𝑎 𝑏+𝑎 1 𝑏+𝑎
= √𝑏2 = = − = √𝑏−𝑎
−𝑎2 √(𝑏+𝑎)(𝑏−𝑎) √𝑏+𝑎 √𝑏−𝑎

29. If 8 tan A = 15, find sin A – cos A.


Sol:
8 tan A = 15 find. Sin A – cos A
15
Tan A = 8
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
Tan A = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒

Let x be the hypotenuse By applying theorem.


𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
𝑥 2 = 152 + 82
𝑥 2 = 225 + 64
𝑥 2 = 289 ⇒ x = 17
𝐴𝐵 15
𝑆𝑖𝑛 𝐴 = =
𝐴𝐶 17
15 8
Sin A – cos A = 17 − 17
7
= 17

30. If 3cos 𝜃 – 4sin 𝜃 = 2cos 𝜃 + sin𝜃 Find tan 𝜃


Sol:
3 cos 𝜃 – 2 cos 𝜃 = 4 sin 𝜃 + sin 𝜃 find tan 𝜃
3 cos 𝜃 – 2 cos 𝜃 = sin 𝜃 + 4 sin 𝜃
Cos 𝜃 = 5 sin 𝜃
Dividing both side by use we get
cos 𝜃 5 sin 𝜃
=
cos 𝜃 cos 𝜃
1 = 5 tan 𝜃
⇒ tan 𝜃 = 1

20 1−sin 𝜃+cos 𝜃 3
31. If tan 𝜃 = 21, show that 1+sin 𝜃+cos 𝜃 = 7
Sol:
20 1−sin 𝜃+cos 𝜃 3
Tan 𝜃 = 21 S.T =7
1+sin 𝜃+cos 𝜃

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 20
Tan 𝜃 = 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 = 21

Let x be the hypotenuse By applying Pythagoras we get


𝐴𝐶 2 + 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
𝑥 2 = (20)2 + (21)2
𝑥 2 = 400 + 441
𝑥 2 = 841 ⇒ x = 29
𝐴𝐵 20
𝑆𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 𝐴𝐶 = 29
𝐵𝐶 21
Cos 𝜃 = 𝐴𝐶 = 29
Substitute sin 𝜃, cos 𝜃 in equation we get
1−sin 𝜃+cos 𝜃
⇒ 1+sin 𝜃+cos 𝜃
20 21 29−20+21
1− + 30 3
29 29 29
⇒ 20 21 = 29+20+21 = 70 = 7
1+ +
29 29 29

1 sin 𝐴
32. If Cosec A = 2 find 𝑇𝑎𝑛 𝐴 + 1+cos 𝐴
Sol:
ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒 2
Cosec A = 𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 = 1

Let x be the adjacent side


By applying Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2
4 = 1 + 𝑥2
𝑥 2 = 3 ⇒ 𝑥 = √3
1 1
Sin A = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝐴 = 2
𝐴𝐵 1
Tan A = 𝐵𝐶 =
√3
𝐵𝐶 √3
Cos A = 𝐴𝐶 = 2
Substitute in equation we get

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
1 sin 𝐴 1 2
+ 1+cos 𝐴 = 1 + √3
𝑇𝑎𝑛𝐴 1+
√3 2
1
2 1 2√3+3+1 2√3+4 2(2+√3)
= √3 + 2+√3
= √3 + 2+√3 = = = =2
2+√3 2+√3 2+√3
2

33. If ∠A and ∠B are acute angles such that cos A = cos B, then show that ∠A = ∠B.
Sol:
∠A and ∠B are acute angles.
Cos A = cos B S.T ∠A = ∠B
Let us consider right angled triangle ACB.

𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
We have cos A = 𝐻𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒
𝐴𝐶
= 𝐴𝐵
𝐵𝐶
Cos B = 𝐴𝐵
𝐶𝑜𝑠 𝐴 = cos 𝐵
𝐴𝐶 𝐵𝐶
= 𝐴𝐵
𝐴𝐵
AC = BC
∠A = ∠B

34. If ∠A and ∠P are acute angles such that tan A = tan P, then show that ∠A = ∠P.
Sol:
A and P are acute angle tan A = tan P
S. T. ∠A = ∠P
Let us consider right angled triangle ACP,

𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
We know tan 𝜃 = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
𝑃𝐶
Tan A = 𝐴𝐶
𝐴𝐶
Tan A = 𝑃𝐶

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝐴𝐶
Tan A = 𝑃𝐶
Tan = tan P
𝐷𝐶 𝐴𝐶
= 𝑃𝐶
𝐴𝐶
(𝑃𝐶)2 = (𝐴𝐶)2
𝑃𝐶 = 𝐴𝐶 [∵ Angle opposite to equal sides are equal]
∠𝑃 = ∠𝐴

35. In a ∆ABC, right angled at A, if tan C = √3, find the value of sin B cos C + cos B sin C.
Sol:
In a ∆le ABC right angled at A tan C = √3
Find sin B cos C + cos B sin C

Tan c = √3
𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
Tan C = 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
Let x be the hypotenuse By applying Pythagoras we get
𝐵𝐶 2 = 𝐵𝐴2 + 𝐴𝐶 2
2
𝑥 2 = (√3) + 12
𝑥2 = ∆ ⇒ 𝑥 = 2
𝐴𝐶 1
At ∠B, sin B = 𝐵𝐶 = 2
√3
Cos B = 2
√3
At ∠C, sin = 2
1
Cos c = 2
On substitution we get
1 1 √3 √3
⇒ × + ×
2 2 2 2
1 (√3) √3×√3+1 3+1 4
⇒4+ × (√3) = = =4=1
4 4 4

36. State whether the following are true or false. Justify your answer.
(i) The value of tan A is always less than 1.
12
(ii) Sec A = for some value of angle A.
5
(iii) Cos A is the abbreviation used for the cosecant of angle A.
4
(iv) Sin 𝜃 = 3 for some angle 𝜃.

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
(a) Tan A ∠1
Value of tan A at 45° i.e., tan 45 = 1
As value of A increases to 90°
Tan A becomes infinite
So given statement is false.
12
(b) Sec A = for some value of angle of
5
M-I
Sec A = 2.4
Sec A > 1
So given statement is True
M-II
12
For sec A = 5
12
For sec A = we get adjacent side = 13
5

We get a right angle ∆le


Subtending 9i at B.
So, given statement is true
(c) Cos A is the abbreviation used for cosecant of angle A.
The given statement is false. ∴ Cos A is abbreviation used for cos of angle A but not for
cosecant of angle A.
(d) Cot A is the product of cot A and A
Given statement is false
𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
∵ cot A is co-tangent of angle A and co-tangent of angle A = 𝑜𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒
4
(e) Sin 𝜃 = 3 for some angle 𝜃
Given statement is false
Since value of sin 𝜃 is less than (or) equal to one. Here value of sin 𝜃 exceeds one, so
given statement is false.

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 5.2

Evaluate each of the following (1 – 19):

1. sin 45° sin 30° + cos 45° cos 30°


Sol:
sin 45° sin 30° + cos 45° cos 30° … . (𝑖)
We know that by trigonometric ratios we have,
1 1
Sin 45° = sin 30° = 2
√2
1 √3
Cos 45° = cos 30° =
√2 2
Substituting the values in (i) we get
1 1√3 1
∙2+ ∙
√2 √2 2
1 √3 √3+1
= ∙ 2√2 = 2√2
√2

2. Sin 60° cos 30° + cos 60° sin 30°


Sol:
Sin 60° cos 30° + cos 60° sin 30° …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we have,
√3 1
Sin 60° = sin 30° = 2
2
√3 1
Cos 30° = 2 cos 60° = 2
Substituting above values in (i), we get
√3 √3 1 1
∙ 2 +2∙2
2
3 1 4
=4+4=4=1

3. Cos 60° cos 45° - sin 60° ∙ sin 45°


Sol:
Cos 60° cos 45° - sin 60° ∙ sin 45° …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we know that,
1 1
Cos 60° = 2 cos 45° =
√2
√3 1
Sin 60° = sin 45° =
2 √2
By substituting above value in (i), we get
1 1 √3 1 1−√3
∙ − ∙ ⇒
2 √2 2 √2 2√2

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
4. 𝑆𝑖𝑛2 30° + sin2 45° + sin2 60° + sin2 90°
Sol:
𝑆𝑖𝑛2 30° + sin2 45° + sin2 60° + sin2 90° …(i)
𝐵𝑦 𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑔𝑜𝑛𝑜𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑐 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑠 𝑤𝑒 ℎ𝑎𝑣𝑒
1 1
Sin 30° = 2 sin 45° =
√2
√3
Sin 60° = sin 90° = 1
2
By substituting above values in (i), we get
2
1 2 1 2 √3
= [2] + [ ] + [ 2 ] + [1]2
√2
1 1 3 1+3 1+2
= + + +1⇒ +
4 2 4 4 2
3 2+3 5
⇒1+2= =2
2

5. cos2 30° + cos2 45° + cos2 60° + cos 2 90°


Sol:
cos2 30° + cos2 45° + cos2 60° + cos 2 90° …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we have
√3 1
Cos 30° = cos 45° =
2 √2
1
Cos 60° = 2 cos 90° = 0
By substituting above values in (i), we get
2
√3 1 2 1 2
[ 2 ] + [ ] + [2] + [1]2
√2
3 1 1 1 3
+2+4=0 ⇒1+2=2
4

6. tan2 30° + tan2 60° + tan2 45°


Sol:
tan2 30° + tan2 60° + tan2 45° …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we have
1
Tan 30° = tan 60° = √3 tan 45° = 1
√3
By substituting above values in (i), we get
1 2 2
[ ] + [√3] + [1]2
√3
1 1
⇒3+3+1⇒ 3+4
1+12 13
⇒ =
3 3

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
7. 2 sin2 30° − 3 cos2 45° + tan2 60°
Sol:
2 sin2 30° − 3 cos2 45° + tan2 60° …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we have
1 1
Sin 30° = 2 cos 45° tan 60° = √3
√2
By substituting above values in (i), we get
1 2 1 2 2
2 ∙ [2] − 3 [ ] + [√3]
√2
1 1
2. 4 − 3. 2 + 3
1 3 3
−2+3⇒2+2=2
2

1 1
8. sin2 30° cos2 45 ° + 4 tan2 30° + sin2 90° − 2 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 90° + cos2 0 °
2 24
Sol:
1 1
sin2 30° cos2 45 ° + 4 tan2 30° + 2 sin2 90° − 2 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 90° + 24 cos2 0 ° …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we have
1 1 1
Sin 30° = 2 cos 45° = tan 30° = sin 90° = 1 cos 90° = 0 cos 0° = 1
√2 √3
By substituting above values in (i), we get
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1
[2] ∙ [ ] + 4 [ ] + 2 [1]2 − 2[0]2 + 24 [1]2
√2 √3
1 1 1 1 1
∙ + 4 ∙ 3 + 2 − 0 + 24
4 2
1 4 1 1 48
+ 3 + 2 + 24 = 24 = 2
8

9. 4(sin4 60° + cos4 30°) − 3(tan2 60° − tan2 45°) + 5 cos2 45°
Sol:
4(sin4 60° + cos4 30°) − 3(tan2 60° − tan2 45°) + 5 cos2 45° …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we have
√3 √3 1
Sin 60° = cos 30° = tan 60° = √3 tan 45° = 1 cos 45 ° =
2 2 √2
By substituting above values in (i), we get
4 4
√3 √3 1 2
4 ([ 2 ] + [ 2 ] ) − 3([3]2 − [1]2 ) + 5 [ ]
√2
9 9 1
⇒ 4 [16 + 16] − 3[3 − 1] + 5 [2]
18 5
⇒ 4 ∙ 16 − 6 + 2
1 5
⇒4−6+2
9 5
=2+2−6
14
= −6=7−6=1
2

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
10. (𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 45° sec 2 30°)(sin2 30° + 4 cot 2 45° − sec 2 60°)
Sol:
(𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 45° sec 2 30°)(sin2 30° + 4 cot 2 45° − sec 2 60°) …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we have
2 1
Cosec 45° = √2 sec 30° = sin 30° = 2 cot 45° = 1 sec 60° = 2
√3
By substituting above values in (i), we get
2 2 2 1 2
([√2] ∙ [ ] ) ([2] + 4[1]2 ∙ [2]2 )
√3
4 1 4 1 2
⇒ [2 ∙ 3] [4 + 4 − 4] ⇒ 3 ∙ 3 ∙ 4 = 3

11. 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 3 30° cos 60° tan3 45° sin2 90° sec 2 45° cot 30°
Sol:
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 3 30° cos 60° tan3 45° sin2 90° sec 2 45° cot 30° …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we have
1
Cosec 30° = 2, cos 60° = 2, tan 45° = 1 sin 90° = 1 sec 45° = √2 cot 30° = √3
By substituting above values in (i), we get
1 2
[2]3 ∙ ∙ (1)3 ∙ (1)2 (√2) ∙ √3
2
1
⇒ 8 ∙ 2 ∙ 1 ∙ 2 ∙ √3 ⇒ 8√3

3
12. cot 2 30° − 2 cos2 60° − 4 sec 2 45° − 4 sec 2 30°
Sol:
3
cot 2 30° − 2 cos2 60° − 4 sec 2 45° − 4 sec 2 30° …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we have
1 2
cot 30° = √3 cos 60° = 2 sec 45° = √2 sec 30° =
√3
By substituting above values in (i), we get
2 1 2 3 2 2 2
(√3) − 2 [2] − 4 (√2) − 4 [ ]
√3
1 3 4
3−2∙4−4∙2−4 ∙3
1 3 8 5
3 − 2 − 2 − 3 ⇒ −3

13. (cos 0° + sin 45° + sin 30°)(sin 90° − cos 45° + cos 60°)
Sol:
(cos 0° + sin 45° + sin 30°)(sin 90° − cos 45° + cos 60°) …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we have
1 1 1 1
Cos 0° = 1, sin 45° = , sin 30° = 2 , sin 90° = 1, cos 45° = cos 60° = 2
√2 √2
By substituting above values in (i), we get

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1 1 1
(1 + + 2) (1 − + 2)
√2 √2
3 1 3 1 3 2 1 9 1 7
[2 + ] [2 − ] ⇒ [2] − [ ] = 4 − 2 = 4
√2 √2 √2

sin 30°−sin 90°+2 cos 0°


14. tan 30° tan 60°
Sol:
sin 30°−sin 90°+2 cos 0°
…(i)
tan 30° tan 60°
By trigonometric ratios we have
1 1
Sin 30° = 2 sin 90° = 1 cos 0° = 1 tan 30° = tan 60° = √3
√3
By substituting above values in (i), we get
1 3
−1+2 +1 3
2
1 = 21 = 2
√3∙
√3

4 1
15. + sin2 60° − cos2 45°
cot2 30°
Sol:
4 1
+ sin2 60° − cos2 45° …(i)
cot2 30°
By trigonometric ratios we have
√3 1
Cot 30° = √3 sin 60° = cos 45° =
2 √2
By substituting above values in (i), we get
4 1 1 2
2 + 2 −( )
(√3) √3 √2
( )
2
4 4 1 13
+3−2=
3 6

16. 4(sin4 30° + cos2 60°) − 3(cos 2 45° − sin2 90°) − sin2 60°
Sol:
4(sin4 30° + cos2 60°) − 3(cos 2 45° − sin2 90°) − sin2 60° …(i)
By trigonometric ratios we have
1 1 1 √3
Sin 30° = cos 60° = cos 45° = Sin 90° = 1 sin 60° =
2 2 √2 2
By substituting above values in (i), we get
2
1 4 1 2 1 2 √3
4 [(2) + (2) ] − 3 [[ ] − 1] − [2]
√2
1 1 1−[√2] 3
4 [16 + 4] − 3 [ 2 ]−4
(√2)
2
1 1−[√2] 3
+ 1 − 3[ [√2]
] −4
4
1 3 3
=4+1−4+2=2

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
tan2 60°+4 cos2 45°+3 sec2 30°+5 cos2 90°
17. 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 30°+sec 60°−cot2 30°
Sol:
tan2 60°+4 cos2 45°+3 sec2 30°+5 cos2 90°
…(i)
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 30°+sec 60°−cot2 30°
By trigonometric ratios we have
1 2
Tan 60° = √3 cos 45° = sec 30° =
√2 √3
cos 90° = 0 cosec 30° = 2 sec 60° = 2 cot 30° = √3
By substituting above values in (i), we get
2 1 2 2 2
(√3) +4∙( ) +2+[ ] +5(0)2
√3 √3
2
2+2√2(+√3)
1 4
3+4∙ +3∙ 3+2+4
2 3
= = =9
4−3 1

sin 30° tan 45° sin 60° cos 30°


18. + sec 60° − cot 45° − sin 90°
sin 45°
Sol:
sin 30° tan 45° sin 60° cos 30°
+ sec 60° − cot 45° − sin 90° …(i)
sin 45°
By trigonometric ratios we have
1 1 √3
Sin 30° = 2 sin 45° = tan 45° = 1 sec 60° = 2 sin 60° =
√2 2
√3
cot 45° = 1 cos 30° = sin 90° = 1
2
By substituting above values in (i), we get
1 1 √3 √3
∙ √2 + 2 − ∙1− .1
2 2 2
2
2+1−
3
= 2

𝑇𝑎𝑛 45° sec 60° 5 sin 90°


19. + cot 45° −
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 30° 2 cos 0°
Sol:
𝑇𝑎𝑛 45° sec 60° 5 sin 90°
+ cot 45° − …(i)
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 30° 2 cos 0°
By trigonometric ratios we have
Tan 45° = 1 cosec 30° = 2 sec 60° = 2 cot 45° = 1 sin 90° = 1 cos 0° = 1
By substituting above values in (i), we get
1 2 1
+1−5∙2
2
4
− 2 + 2 = −2 + 2 = 0

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

20. 2sin 3x = √3 s = ?
Sol:
√3
Sin 3x = 2
Sin 3x = sin 60°
Equating angles we get,
3x = 60°
x = 20°

𝑥
21. 2 sin 2 = 1 x = ?
Sol:
𝑥 1
Sin 2 = 2
𝑥
Sin 2 = sin 30°
𝑥
= 30°
2
𝑥 = 60°

22. √3 sin 𝑥 = cos 𝑥


Sol:
√3 tan x = 1
1
tan 𝑥 =
√3
∴ Tan x = Tan 30°
x = 30°

23. Tan x = sin 45° cos 45 ° + sin 30°


Sol:
1 1 1 1 1 1
Tan x = ∙ +2 [∵ sin 45° = cos 45° = sin 30° = 2]
√2 √2 √2 √2
1 1
Tan x = 2 + 2
Tan x = 1
Tan x = tan 45°
x = 45°

24. √3 tan 2𝑥 = cos 60° + sin 45° cos 45°


Sol:
1 1 1 1 1
√3 tan 2𝑥 = 2 + √2 ∙ √2 [∵ cos 60° = 2 sin 45° = cos 45° = ]
√2
1
√3 tan 2𝑥 = √3 ⇒ tan 2𝑥 = tan 30°
2x = 30°
x = 15°

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
25. Cos 2x = cos 60° cos 30° + sin 60° sin 30°
Sol:
1 √3 √3 1 1 √3
Cos 2x = ∙ + ∙ [∵ cos 60° = sin 30° = 2 sin 60° = cos 30° = ]
2 2 2 2 2
√3
Cos 2x = 2 ∙ 4
√3
⇒ cos 2x = 2
Cos 2x = cos 30°
2x = 30°
x = 15°

26. If 𝜃 = 30° verify


2 tan 𝜃
(i) Tan 2𝜃 = 1−tan2 𝜃
Sol:
2 tan 𝜃
Tan 2𝜃 = 1−tan2 𝜃 …(i)
Substitute 𝜃 = 30° in (i)
LHS = Tan 60° = √3
1
2 tan 30° 2∙
√3
RHS = 1−tan2 30° = 1 2
1−( )
√3
2
√3
= 1 = √3
1−
3
∴ LHS = RHS
2 tan 𝜃
(ii) Sin 𝜃 = 1−tan2 𝜃
Substitute 𝜃 = 30°
2 tan 30°
Sin 60° = 1+(tan 30°)2
1
√3 2.
√3
= = 1 2
2 1+( )
√3
√3 2 3 √3 √3
= = ∙4⇒ =
2 √3 2 2
∴ LHS = RHS
1−tan2 𝜃
(iii) Cos 2𝜃 = 1+tan2 𝜃
Substitute 𝜃 = 30°
1−tan2 𝜃
LHS = cosec 𝜃 RHS = 1+tan2 𝜃
1−tan2 30°
= cos 2(30°) = 1+tan2 30°
1 2 1 2
1 1−( ) 1− 1
√3 3 3
Cos 60° = 2 = 1 2
= 1 = 4 =2
1+( ) 1+ 3
3
√3

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
∴ LHS = RHS
(iv) Cos 30𝜃 = 4 cos3𝜃 – 3 cos 𝜃
LHS = Cos 30° RHS 4 cos3 𝜃 – 3 cos 𝜃
Substitute 𝜃 = 30° 4cos3 30° - 3 cos 30°
3
√3 √3
Cos 3 (30°) = cos 90° 4∙ [ 2 ] − 3 ∙ 2
3√3 3√2
=0 ⇒ − =0
2 2

27. If A = B = 60°. Verify


(i) Cos (A – B) = Cos A cos B + sin A sin B
Sol:
Cos (A – B) = Cos A cos B + sin A sin B …(i)
Substitute A & B in (i)
⇒ cos (60 - 60°)= cos 60° cos 60° + sin 60° sin 60°
2
1 2 √3
Cos 0° = (2) + ( 2 )
1 3
1=4+4=1=1 LHS = RHS
(ii) Substitute A & B in (i)
Sin (60° - 60°) = Sin 60° Cos 60° − cos 60° sin 60°
= sin 0° = 0 = 0
LHS = RHS
𝑇𝑎𝑛 𝐴−tan 𝐵
(iii) Tan (A – B) = 1+tan 𝐴 tan 𝐵
A = 60° B = 60° we get
tan 60°−tan 60°
Tan (60° - 60°) = 1−tan 60 tan 60°
Tan 0° = 0
0=0
LHS = RHS

28. If A = 30° B = 60° verify


(i) Sin (A + B) = Sin A Cos B + cos A sin B
Sol:
A = 30°, B = 60° we get
Sin (30° + 60°) = Sin 30° cos 60° + cos 30° sin 60°
1 1 √3 √3
Sin 90° = 2 ∙ 2 + ∙ 2
2
Sin 90° = 1 ⇒ 1 = 1
LHS = RHS
(ii) Cos (A + B) = cos A cos B – Sin A Sin B
A = 30° B = 60°

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Cos (90°) = Cos 30° cos 60° − sin 30° sin 60°
1 √3 √3 1
= cos 90° = 2 ∙ − ∙
2 2 2
0=0
LHS = RHS
29. Sin (A – B) = Sin A Cos B – cos A sin B
Cos (A – B) = cos A Cos B – sin A sin B
Find sin 15° cos 15°
Sol:
Sin (A – B) = Sin A Cos B – cos A sin B …(i)
Cos (A – B) = cos A Cos B – sin A sin B …(ii)
Let A = 45° B = 30° we get on substituting in (i)
⇒ Sin(45° − 30°) = Sin 45° cos 30°
1 √3 1 1
Sin 15° = ∙ − ∙
√2 2 √2 2
√3−1
∴ Sin 15° = 2√2
(ii) A = 45° B = 30° in equation (ii) we get
Cos (45° − 30°) cos 45° cos 30° + sin 45° sin 30°
1 √3 1 1
Cos 15° - ∙ + ∙
√2 2 √2 2
√3+1
Cos 15° ⇒ 2√2

30. In right angled triangle ABC. ∠C = 90°, ∠B = 60°. AB = 15units. Find remaining angles
and sides.
Sol:
In a ∆le sum of all angles = 180°
∠A + ∠B + ∠C = 180°
⇒ 90° + 60° + ∠A = 180°
∠A = 180° − 150°
∴ ∠A = 30°

From above figure


𝐵𝐶
Cos B = 𝐴𝐵
𝐵𝐶
Cos 60° = 15
1 𝐵𝐶
=
2 15

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
15
BC = 2
𝐴𝐶
Sin B = 15
𝐴𝐶
Sin 60° = 15
√3 𝐴𝑉 15√3
= = 𝐴𝐶 =
2 15 2

31. In ∆ABC is a right triangle such that ∠C = 90° ∠A = 45°, BC = 7 units find ∠B, AB and
AC
Sol:
Sum of angles in ∆le = 180°
∠A + ∠B + ∠C = 180°
45° + ∠B + 90° = 180°
∠B = 180° − 135°
∠B = 45°

𝐵𝐶
From figure cos B = 𝐴𝐵
7
Cos 45° = 𝐴𝐵
1 7

√2 𝐴𝐵
AB = 7√2 units
𝐴𝐶
From figure sin B = 𝐴𝐵
𝐴𝐶
Sin 45° = 7√2
1 𝐴𝐶
= 7√2 ∴ 𝐴𝐶 = 7 𝑢𝑛𝑖𝑡𝑠
√2

32. In rectangle ABCD AB = 20cm ∠BAC = 60° BC, calculate side BC and diagonals AC and
BD.
Sol:

Consider ∆le ABC we get

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝐴𝐵 𝐵𝐶
Cos A = 𝐴𝐶 Sin A = 𝐴𝐶
20 𝐵𝐶
∴ cos 60° = 𝐴𝐶 Sin 60° = 𝐴𝐶
1 20 √3 𝐵𝐶
= 𝐴𝐶 ∴ AC = 40 cm =
𝑎 2 40
∴ AC = 40 cm ∴ BC = 20√3 cm
Consider ∆le ACD we know ∠CAD = 30°
𝐶𝐷 1 20
∴ Tan 30° = 𝐴𝐷 = = 𝐴𝐶 = 𝐴𝐷 = 20√3
√3
In rectangle diagonals are equal in magnitude
∴ BD = AC = 40 cm

33. If Sin (A + B) = 1 and cos (A – B) = 1, 0° < A + B ≤ 90° A ≥ B. Fin A & B


Sol:
Sin(A + B) = 1
∴ Sin (A + B) = Sin 90°
A + B = 90° …(i)
Cos (A – B) = 1
Cos (A – B) = cos 0°
A – B = 0° …(ii)
Adding (i) & (ii) we get
A + B = 90°
A – B = 0°
A = 90° A = 45°
A–B=0
A = B ⇒ B = 45°

1
34. If Tan (A – B) = and Tan (A + B) = √3 , 0° < 𝐴 + 𝐵 ≤ 90°, A ≥ B, Find A & B
√3
Sol:
Tan (A – B) = 𝑇𝑎𝑛 30° Tan (A + B) = Tan 60°
∴ A – B = 30° …(i) A + B = 60° …(ii)
Add (i) & (ii)
A – B = 30°
A + B = 60°
2A = 90° A = 40°
A – B = 30° 45° - B = 30°
B = 45° − 30° = 15°

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1
35. If Sin (A – B) = 2 and Cos (A + B) = 2 , 0° < A + B ≤ 90°, A > B, Find A & B
Sol:
Sin (A – B) = sin 30° Cos (A + B) = cos 60°
A – B = 30° …(i)
A + B = 60° …(ii)
Add (i) & (ii) we get
2A = 90°, A = 45°.
A – B = 30°
45 – B = 30° B = 45 – 30°
B = 15°

36. In right angled triangle ∆ABC at B, ∠A = ∠C. Find the values of


(i) Sin A cos C + Cos A Sin C
Sol:
In ∆le ABC ∠A + ∠B + ∠C = 180°
∠A + 90° + ∠A = 180°
2∠A = 90°
∠A = 45°
∴ ∠A = 45°
(ii) Sin 45° cos 45° + cos 45° sin 45°
1 1 1 1 1 1
∙ + ∙ = ∙ =1
√2 √2 √2 √2 2 2
(𝑖𝑖)𝑆𝑖𝑛 𝐴 𝑆𝑖𝑛 𝐵 + cos 𝐴 cos 𝐵
∠A = 45° sin 90° + cos 45° cos 90°
1
= ∙1+0
√2
1
=
√2
√3
37. Find acute angles A & B, if sin (A + 2B) = Cos (A + 4B) = 0, A > B.
2
Sol:
Sin (A + 2B) = Sin 60°
Cos (A + 4B) = cos 90°
A + 2B = 60° …(i)
A + 4B = 90° …(ii)
Subtracting (ii) from (i)
A + 4B = 90°
−A – 2B = −60
2B = 30° ∴ B = 15°
A + 4B = 90°
4B = 4(15°) = 4B = 60°
∴ A + 60° = 90° ∴ A = 30°

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1
38. If A and B are acute angles such that Tan A = 2 Tan B = 3 𝑎𝑛𝑑 Tan (A + B) =
tan 𝐴+𝑇𝑎𝑛 𝐵
A+B=?
1−tan 𝐴 𝑇𝑎𝑛 𝐵
Sol:
1 1
Tan A = 2 Tan B = 3
1 1 5
+
2 3 6
Tan (A + B) = 11 = 1 =1
1− ∙ 1−
23 6
Tan (A + B) = Tan 45°
∴ A – B = 45°

39. In ∆PQR, right angled at Q, PQ = 3cm PR = 6cm. Determine ∠P = ? ∠R = ?


Sol:

From above figure


𝑃𝑄
Sin R = 𝑃𝑅
3 1
Sin R = 6 = 2
∴ Sin R = Sin 30°
R = 30°
We know in ∆le ∠P + ∠Q + ∠R = 180°
∠P + 90° + 30° = 180°
∠P = 60°
Exercise 5.3

Evaluate the following:

𝑆𝑖𝑛 20°
1.
cos 70°
Sol:
(i)
𝑆𝑖𝑛 (90°−70°) cos 70°
⇒ ⇒ cos 70° [∵ 𝑆𝑖𝑛 (90° − 𝜃) = cos 𝜃]
cos 70°
cos 70°
⇒ cos 70° = 1
(ii)
cos 19°
sin 71°

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
cos(90°−71°) sin 71°
⇒ ⇒ sin 71° [∵ cos(90° − 𝜃) = sin 𝜃]
sin 71°
=1
(iii)
sin 21° sin(cos 69°) cos 69°
⇒ = cos 69° [∵ sin(90° − 𝜃) = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃]
cos 69° cos 69°
=1
(iv)
𝑇𝑎𝑛 10° tan(90°−80°) cot 80°
⇒ = cot 80° [∵ tan(90 − 𝜃) = cot 𝜃]
𝐶𝑜𝑡 80° cot 80°
=1
(𝑣)
sec 11° sec(90°−79°) 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 79°
⇒ = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 79° [∵ sec(90 − 𝜃) ∙ 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 ]
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 79° 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 79°
=1

Evaluate the following:


sin 49° 2 cos 41°
2. (i) [ cos 45 ] + [ sin 49° ]
Sol:
We know that sin(49°) = sin(90° – 41°) = cos 41° similarly cos 41° = sin 49°
cos 41° 2 sin 49° 2
⇒ [cos 41°] + [sin 49°] = 12 + 12 = 2

(ii)
Cos 48° - sin 42°
Sol:
Cos 48° = cos (90° − 42°) sin 42°
∴ sin 42° − sin42° = 0

(iii)
cot 40° 1 cos 35°
− 2 [ sin 55° ]
cos 35°
Sol:
Cot 40° − cot (90° - 50°) = tan 50°
Cos 35° = cos (90° - 55°) = sin 55°
tan 50° 1 sin 55°
⇒ tan 50° − 2 [sin 55°]
1
= 1 − 2 [1]
1
=2

(iv)
sin 27° cos 63° 2
[cos 63°] − [ sin 27° ]

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
Sin 27° = sin (90° - 63°) = cos 63° [∵ sin (90° - 𝜃) = cos 𝜃]
⇒ sin 27° = cos 63°
sin 27° 2 cos 63° 2
[sin 27°] − [cos 63°] = 1 − 1 = 0

(v)
tan 35° cot 63°
+ cos 63° − 1
cot 55°
Sol:
Tan 35° = tan (90° - 55°) = cos 55°
Cot 78° = cot (90° - 12°) = tan 12°
cot 55° tan 12°
⇒ cot 55° + tan 12° − 1
= tan 1 – 1 = 1

(vi)
sec 70° sin 59°
+ cos 31°
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 20°
Sol:
Sec 70° = sec (90° - 20°) = cosec 20° [∵ sec (90 – 𝜃) = cosec 𝜃]
Sin 59° = sin (90° - 31°) = cos 31° [∵ sin (90 - 𝜃) = cos 𝜃]
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 20 cos 31°
⇒ 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 20 + cos 31° = 1 + 1 = 2

(vii)
Sec 50° Sin 40° + Cos 40° cosec 50°
Sol:
Sec 50° = sec (90° - 40°) = cosec 40°
Cos 40° = cos (90° - 50°) = sin 50°
∴ Sin 𝜃 cosec 𝜃 = 1
⇒ cosec 40° sin 40° + sin 50° cosec 50°
1+1=2

3. Express each one of the following in terms of trigonometric ratios of angles lying between
0° and 45°
(i) Sin 59° + cos 56°
Sol:
Sin 59° = sin (90° - 59°) = cos 31°
Cos 56° = cos (65° - 34°) = Sin 34°
⇒ cos 31° + sin 34°
(ii)
Tan 65° + cot 49°

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
Tan 65° = tan (90° - 25°) = cot 25°
Cot 49° = cot (90° - 41°) = tan (41°)
⇒ cot 25° + tan 41°
(iii)
Sec 76° + cosec 52°
Sol:
Sec 76° = sec (90° - 14°) = cosec 14°
Cosec 52° = cosec (90° - 88°) = sec 38°
⇒ Cosec 14° + sec 38°
(iv)
Cos 78° + sec 78°
Sol:
Cos 78° = cos (90° - 12°) = sin 12°
Sec 78° = sec (90° - 12°) = cosec 12°
⇒ sin 12° + cosec 12°
(v)
Cosec 54° + sin 72°
Sol:
Cosec 54° = cosec (90° - 36°) = sec 36°
Sin 72° = sin (90° - 18°) = cos 18°
⇒ sec 36° + cos 18°
(vi)
Cot 85° + cos 75°
Sol:
Cot 85° = cot (90° - 5°) = tan 5°
Cos 75° = cos (90° - 15°) = sin 15°
= tan 5° + sin 15°
(vii)
Sin 67° + cos 75°
Sol:
Sin 67° = Sin (90° − 23°) = cos 23°
Cos 75° = cos (90° −15° ) = sin 15°
= cos 23° + sin 15°

4. Express Cos 75° + cot 75° in terms of angles between 0° and 30°.
Sol:
Cot 75° = cos (90° - 15°) = sin 15°
Cot 75° = cot (90° - 15°) = tan 15°
= sin 15° + tan 15°

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

5. If Sin 3A = cos (A – 26°), where 3A is an acute angle, find the value of A = ?


Sol:
Cos 𝜃 = sin (90° - 𝜃)
⇒ Cos (A – 26) = sin (90° −(A− 26°))
⇒ Sin 3A = sin (90° − (A – 26))
Equating angles on both sides
3A = 90° − A + 26°
116
4A = 116° A = = 29°
4
∴ A = 29°

𝐶+𝐴 𝐵
6. If A, B, C are interior angles of a triangle ABC, prove that (i) tan ( ) = cot 2
2
Sol:
𝑐+𝐴 𝐵
(i) Tan [ ] = cot 2
2
Sol:
Given A + B + C = 180°
C + A = 180° − B
180−𝐵 𝐵
⇒ Tan [ ] ⇒ 𝑇𝑎𝑛 [90° − 2 ]
2
𝐵
⇒ cot 2 [∵ tan(90° − θ) = cot 𝜃]
∴ LHS = RHS
𝐵+𝐶 𝐴
(ii) Sin [ ] = cos 2
2
Sol:
A + B + C = 180°
B + C = 180° - A
180°−𝐴 A
LHS = sin [ ] ⇒ sin [90° − 2 ]
2
𝐴
Cos 2 [∵ 𝑆𝑖𝑛 (90° − 𝜃) ∙ 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃]
∴ LHS =RHS

7. Prove that
(i)
Tan20° Tan 35° tan 45° tan 55° Tan 70° = 1
Sol:
Tan 20° = tan (90° - 70°) = cot 70°
Tan 35° = tan (90° - 70°) = cot 55°
Tan 45° = 1
⇒ cot 70° tan 70° x cot 55° tan 55° x tan 45° ∙ cot 𝜃 = tan 𝜃 = 1
⇒1×1×1=1 Hence proved.
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
(ii)
Sin 48° sec 42° + cosec 42° = 2
Sol:
Sin 48° = sin (90° - 42°) = cos 42°
Cos (45°) = cos (90° - 42°) = sin 42°
Sec 𝜃 ∙ cos 𝜃 = 1 ∙ sin 𝜃 cosec 𝜃 = 1
⇒ cos 42° sec 42° + sin 42° cosec 42°
⇒1+1=2
∴ LHS = RHS
(iii)
sin 70° 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 20°
+ − 2 cos 70° 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 20° = 0
cos 20° sec 70°
Sol:
Sin (70°) = sin (90° - 20°) = cos 20°
Cosec 20° = cosec (90° - 70°) = sec 70°
Cos 70° = cos (90° - 20°) = sin 20°
cos 20° sec 70°
⇒ cos 20° + sec 70° − 2 sin 20 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 20°
1 + 1 – 2(1) = 0
∴ LHS = RHS Hence proved
(iv)
cos 80°
+ cos 59° 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 31° = 2
sin 10°
Sol:
Cos 80° = cos (90° - 10°) = sin 10°
Cos 59° = cos (90° - 31°) = sin 31°
sin 10°
⇒ sin 10° + sin 31° 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 31°
=1+1=2 [∵ Sin 𝜃 cosec 𝜃 = 1]
Hence proved
8. Prove the following:
(i) Sin 𝜃 sin (90 - 𝜃) – cos 𝜃 cos (90 - 𝜃) = 0
Sol:
Sin (90 – 𝜃) = cos 𝜃
Cos (90 – 𝜃) – cos 𝜃 sin 𝜃
=0
∴ LHS = RHS
Hence proved

cos(90°−𝜃) sec(90°−𝜃) tan 𝜃 tan(90°−𝜃)


(ii) 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 (90°−θ) sin(90°−θ) cot(90°−θ) + =2
cot 𝜃
Sol:
Cos (90° - 𝜃) = sin A cosec (90 - 𝜃) = sec 𝜃

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sec (90° - 𝜃) = cosec 𝜃 sin (90 - 𝜃) = cos 𝜃
Cot (90 - 𝜃) = tan 𝜃
sin 𝜃 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 𝒕𝒂𝒏 𝜃 sin 𝜃 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃
⇒ = [∵ sin 𝜃 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 = 1]
sec 𝜃.cos 𝜃.tan 𝜃 sec 𝜃 cos 𝜃
=1 [sec 𝜃 cos 𝜃 = 1]
tan(90°− 𝜃) cot 𝜃
= cot 𝜃 = 1
cot 𝜃
⇒1+1=2
∴ LHS = RHS
Hence proved

tan(90−𝐴) cot 𝐴
(iii) − cos 2 𝐴 = 0
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝐴
Sol:
Tan (90 – A) = cot A
cot 𝐴 .cot 𝐴
⇒ − cos2 𝐴
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝐴
cot2 𝐴
⇒ 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝐴 − cos2 𝐴
cos2 𝐴
= − cos 2 𝐴 ⇒ cos 2 𝐴 cos2 𝐴 = 0
sin2 𝐴
Hence proved

cos(90°−𝐴) sin(90°−𝐴)
(iv) − sin2 𝐴 = 0
tan(90°−𝐴)
Sol:
Cos (90° - A) = sin A Tan (90° - A) = cot A
Sin (95° A) = cos A
sin 𝐴 cos 𝐴
− sin2 𝐴 = 0
cot 𝐴
sin 𝐴.cos 𝐴.
sin 𝐴 − sin2 𝐴
cos 𝐴
sin 𝐴 − sin2 𝐴 = 0
2

LHS = RHS
Hence Proved

(v) Sin (50° + 𝜃) – cos (40° – 𝜃) + tan 1° tan 10° tan 20° tan 70° tan 80° tan 89° = 1
Sol:
Sin (50 + 𝜃) = cos (90 – (50 + 𝜃)) = cos (40 – 𝜃)
Tan 1 = tan (90° − 89°) ∙ cot 89°
Tan 10° = tan (90° - 80°) = cot 80°
Tan 20° = tan (90° - 70°) = cot 70°
⇒ cos (40° - 𝜃) – cos (40 - 𝜃) = cot 89° tan 89° . cot 80° . cot 70° tan 70°
Cot . tan 𝜃 = 1
=1∙1∙1=1

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
LHS = RHS
Hence proved

9. Evaluate:
2 1
(i) 3 (cos4 30° − sin4 45 °) − 3(sin2 60° − sec 2 45°) + 4 cot 2 30°
Sol:
√3 √3 1 1
Cos 30° = sin 60° = cot 30° = √3 sin 45° = sec 45° =
2 2 √2 √2
Substituting above values in (i)
4 4 2
2 √3 1 √3 1 2 1 2
[( 2 ) − ( ) ] − 3 [( 2 ) ∙ [ ] ] + 4 (√3)
3 √2 √2
2 9 1 3 1 1−3
[ − 4] − 3 [4 − 2]
3 16 4
2 9−4 3−2 3
[ 16 ] − 3 [ ]−4
3 4
2 5 3 3 5
⇒ 3 ∙ 16 − 4 + 4 ⇒ 24
2
2 4 2 3 1 2 1 2
(ii) 4 (sin 30 + cos 60°) − 3 3 [(√2) ∙ [ ] ] + 4 (√3)
√2

Sol:
1 1 √3 1
𝑆𝑖𝑛 30° = 2 cos 60 = 2 sin 60° = cos 45° = tan 60° = √3
2 √2
2
1 4 1 4 2 √3 1 2 1 2
⇒ 4 [[2] + [2] ] − 3 [( 2 ) − ( ) ] + 2 (√3)
√2
1 2 3 1 3
4 [2. 16] − 3 [4 − 2] + 2
1 2 1 3 11
=2−3 ∙4+2= 6

sin 50° 𝑐𝑜 sec 40°


(iii) cos 40° + − 4 cos 50° 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 40°
sec 50°
Sol:
Sin 50° = sin (90° - 40°) = cos 40°
Cosec 40° = cosec (90° - 50°) = sec 50°
Cos 50° = cos (90° - 40°) = sin 40°
cos 40° sec 50°
⇒ cos 40° + 𝑠𝑒𝑐 50° − 4 sin 40° 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 40°
1+1–4=−2 [∵ Sin 40° cosec 40° = 1]

(iv) Tan 35° tan 40° tan 50° tan 55°


Sol:
Tan 35° = tan (90° - 55°) = cot 55°
Tan 40° = tan (90° - 50°) = cot 55°
Tan 65° = 1

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Cot 55 tan 55∙ cot 50 tan 50 ∙ tan 45
1∙1∙1=1

(v) Cosec (65 + 𝜃) – sec (25 – 𝜃) – tan (55 – 𝜃) + cot (35 + 𝜃)


Sol:
Cosec (65 + 𝜃) = sec (90 – (65 + 𝜃)) = sec (25 – 𝜃)
Tan (55 – 𝜃) = cot (90 – (55 – 𝜃) = cot (35 + 𝜃)
⇒ sec (25 – 𝜃) – sec (25 – 𝜃) tan (55 – 𝜃) + tan (55 – 𝜃) = 0

(vi) Tan 7° tan 23° tan 60° tan 67° tan 83°
Sol:
Tan 7° tan 23° tan 60° tan (90° - 23) tan (90° - 7°)
⇒ tan 7° tan 23° tan 60° cot 23° tan 60°
1 ∙ 1 ∙ √3 = √3

2 sin 68 2 cot 15° 8 tan 45° tan 20° tan 40° tan 50° tan 70°
(vii) − 5 tan 75° −
cos 22 5
Sol:
Sin 68° = sin (90 - 22) = cos 22
Cot 15° = tan (90 - 75) = tan 75
cos 22 2 tan 75° 3 tan 45° tan20° tan 40° cot 40° cot 20°
2 ∙ cos 22 − 5 tan 75° − 5
2 3
=2−5−5=2−1=1

3 cos 55° 4(cos 70 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 20°)


(viii) − 7 (tan 5° tan 25° tan 45° tan 65° tan 85°)
7 sin 35°
Sol:
Cos 55° = cos (90° - 35°) = sin 35°
Cos 70° = cos (90 – 20) = sin 20°
Tan 5 = cot 85° tan 25° = cot 65°
3 sin 35° 4 (sin 20° 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 20°)
⇒ 7 sin 35° − 7(cot 85° tan 85° cot 65° tan 65° tan 45°)
3 4 1
= 7 − 7 = −7

sin 18°
(ix) + √3 [tan 10° tan 30° tan 40° tan 50° tan 80°]
cos 72°
Sol:
Sin 18° = sin (90° - 72) = cos 72°
Tan 10° = cot 80° tan 50° = cot 40°
𝑠𝑖𝑛 18° 1
⇒ sin 18° + √3 [tan 80 cos 30 . tan 40 cot 40 . ]
√3
1
= 1 + √3 ∙ =2
√3

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

cos 58° sin 22° cos 38° cosec 52°


(x) + cos 68° − tan 18° tan 35° tan 60° tan 72° tan 65°
sin 32°
Sol:
Cos 58° = cos (90° - 32°) = sin 32°
Sin 22° = sin (90° - 68°) = cos 68°
Cos 38° = cos (90 – 52) = sin 52°
Tan 18° = cot 72 tan 35° = cot 55°
sin 32° cos 68° sin 52 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 52
⇒ sin 32° + cos 68° − tan 72 .cot 72 tan 55 cot 55 .tan 60
1 2√3−1 √3 6−√3
=1+1− = × =
√3 √3 √3 3

10. If Sin 𝜃 = cos (𝜃 – 45°), where 𝜃 – 45° are acute angles, find the degree measure of 𝜃.
Sol:
Sin 𝜃 = cos (𝜃 – 45°)
Cos 𝜃 = cos (90 – 𝜃)
Cos (𝜃 – 45°) = sin (90° - (𝜃 – 45°)) = sin (90 – 𝜃 + 45°)
Sin 𝜃 = sin (135 – 𝜃)
𝜃 = 135 – 𝜃
2𝜃 = 135
∴ 𝜃 = 135°/2

11. If A, B, C are the interior angles of a ∆ABC, show that:


𝐵+𝐶 𝐴 𝐵+𝐶 𝐴
(i) Sin ( ) = cos 2 (ii) cos [ ] = 𝑆𝑖𝑛 2
2 2
Sol:
A + B + C = 180
𝐴
B – C = 180 – 2
𝐴 𝐴
(i) Sin [90 − 2 ] = cos 2
∴ LHS = RHS
𝐴 𝐴
(ii) Cos [90 − 2 ] = sin 2
∴ LHS = RHS

12. If 2𝜃 + 45° and 30° − 𝜃 are acute angles, find the degree measure of 𝜃 satisfying Sin
(20 + 45°) = cos (30 - 𝜃°)
Sol:
Here 20 + 45° and 30 – 𝜃° are acute angles:
We know that (90 – 𝜃) = cos 𝜃
Sin (2𝜃 + 45°) = sin (90 – (30 – 𝜃))
Sin (2𝜃 + 45°) = sin (90 – 30 + 𝜃)

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sin (20 + 45°) = sin (60 + 𝜃)
On equating sin of angle of we get
2𝜃 + 45 = 60 + 𝜃
2𝜃 – 𝜃 = 60 – 45
𝜃 = 15°

13. If 𝜃 is a positive acute angle such that sec 𝜃 = cosec 60°, find 2 cos2 𝜃 – 1
Sol:
We know that sec (90 – 𝜃) = cosec2 𝜃
Sec 𝜃 = sec (90 – 60°)
On equating we get
Sec 𝜃 = sec 30°
𝜃 = 30°

Find 2cos2 𝜃 – 1
√3
⇒ 2 × cos2 30° − 1 [cos 30 = ]
2
2
√3
⇒2×(2) −1
3
⇒2×4−1
3
⇒2−1
1
=2

14. If cos 2𝜃 = sin 4𝜃 where 2𝜃, 4𝜃 are acute angles, find the value of 𝜃.
Sol:
We know that sin (90 – 𝜃) = cos 𝜃
Sin 20 = cos 2𝜃
Sin 4𝜃 = sin (90 - 2𝜃)
4𝜃 = 90 – 20
6𝜃 = 90
90
𝜃=
6
𝜃 = 15°

15. If Sin 3𝜃 = cos (𝜃 – 6°) where 3 𝜃 and 𝜃 − 6° are acute angles, find the value of 𝜃.
Sol:
30, 𝜃 – 6 are acute angle
We know that sin (90 – 𝜃) = cos 𝜃
Sin 3𝜃 = sin (90 – (𝜃 - 6°))
Sin 3𝜃 = sin(90 – 𝜃 + 6°)

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 5 – Trigonometric Ratios Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sin 3𝜃 = sin (96° - 𝜃)
3𝜃 = 96° – 𝜃
4𝜃 = 96°
96°
𝜃= 4
𝜃 = 24°

16. If Sec 4A = cosec (A – 20°) where 4A is acute angle, find the value of A.
Sol:
Sec 4A = sec [90 − 𝐴 − 20] [∵ sec(90 − 𝜃) = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃]
Sec 4A = sec (90 – A + 20)
Sec 4A = sec (110 – A)
4A = 110 – A
5A = 110
110
A= ⇒ 𝐴 = 22
5

17. If Sec 2A = cosec (A – 42°) where 2A is acute angle. Find the value of A.
Sol:
We know that (sec (90 – 𝜃)) = cosec 𝜃
Sec 2A = sec (90 – (A – 42))
Sec 2A = sec (90 – A + 42)
Sec 2A = sec (132 – A)
Now equating both the angles we get
2A = 132 – A
132
3A = 3
A = 44

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 6.1

Prove the following trigonometric identities:


1. 1  cos A cos ec A  1
2 2

Sol:
We know sin 2 A  cos2 A  1
sin 2 A  1  cos 2 A
 sin 2 A  cos ec 2 A
1
 sin 2 A  2  1  L.H .S  R.H .S
sin A

2. 1  cos A sin
2 2
A 1
Sol:
We know that cos ec 2 A  a 2  A  1
cos ec 2 A  1  cot 2 A
 cos ec 2 A  sin 2 A  1
1
 n 2 A 1
sin A
1  1 L.H .S  R.H .S

3. tan 2  cos2   1  cos2 


Sol:
sin 2 
L.H .S   cos2   sin 2 
cos2 
R.H .S  1  cos 2  1  sin   cos 2  
 sin 2   sin 2   1  cos 2  
L.H .S  R.H .S

4. cos ec 1  cos 2   1


Sol:
LHS  cos ec sin 2   1  cos 2   sin 2  
 cos ec  sin 
1
 L.H .S  R.H .S

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

5.  sec   1 cos ec   1  1


2 2

Sol:
We know that sec2   tan 2   1
 sec2   1, tan 
cos ec 2  cos 2   1
cos ec 2  cot 2 
1
tan 2   cot 2   tan 2 
tan 2 

1
6. tan   sec cos ec
tan 
Sol:
1 sin  1
LHS  tan    
tan  cos  sin 
cos 
sin  cos 
 
cos  sin 
sin 2   cos2  1
 
sin  cos  sin  cos 
 sec cos ec
Hence L.H.S = R.H.S

cos  1  sin 
7. 
1  sin  cos 
Sol:
  
cos   cos 2   cos 2  sin 2
2 2 2
  
sin   sin  2  2sin cos
2 2 2
 
cos 2  sin 2
2 2   
 LHS  1  cos 2  sin 2 
 2 2     2 2
cos 2  sin 2   2sin 2 cos 2

     
cos 2  sin 2  cos 2  sin 2 
  a 2  b2   a  b  a  b  a  b 2  a 2  b2  2ab 
    
 cos  sin
2 2 

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
 
cos  sin
 2 2.
 
cos  sin
2 2
   
cos 2  sin 2  2sin cos
1  sin  2 2 2 2
R.H .S 
cos   
cos 2  sin 2
2 2
  
cos 2  sin 2 

  
cos 2  sin 2 
 
cos  sin
 2 2
 
cos  sin
2 2
 L.H .S  R.H .S

cos  1  sin 
8. 
1  sin  cos 
Sol:
  
cos   cos 2  cos2  sin 2
2 2 2
  
sin   sin 2   2sin cos
2 2 2
 
1  cos2  sin 2
2 2
 
cos 2  sin
cos  2 2
LHS  
1  sin  cos 2   sin 2   2sin  cot 
2 2 2 2
     
 cos  sin  cos  sin 

2 2  2 2
 
2

 cos  sin 
 2 2
 
cos  sin
 2 2
 
cos  sin
2 2

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
   
cos 2  sin 2  2sin cos
1  sin  2 2 2 2
RHS  
cos   
cos 2  sin 2
2 2
 
2

 cos  sin 
  2 2
     
 cos  sin  cos  sin 
 2 2  2 2
 
cos  sin
 2 2
 
cos  sin
2 2
 LHS = RHS

1
9. cos2 A  1
1  cot 2 A
Sol:
1  cot 2 A  cos ec 2 A  cos ec 2 A  cot 2 A  1

cos ec 2 A  1  cot 2 A.
1
 cot 2 A 
cos ec 2 A
 cos2 A  sin 2 A  1  LHS  RHS

1
10. sin 2 A  1
1  tan 2 A
Sol:
1  tan 2 A  sec2  sec2 A  tan 2 A  1
1
 sin 2 A  1  tan 2 A  sec2 A
sec2
 sin 2 A  cos 2 A  1
 LHS  RHS

1  cos 
11.  cos ec  cot  .
1  cos 
Sol:
1  cos 
L.H.S  Rationalize numerator with 1  cos 
1  cos 

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

1  cos  1  cos
 
1  cos  1  cos 

 
2
1  cos

1  cos  1  cos  
1  cos  1  cos  1  cos 
  
1  cos 2  sin 2  sin 
 cos ec  cot 

1  cos  sin 
12. 
sin  1  cos 
Sol:
 
1  cos2  sin 2
2 2
  
cos   cos 2   cos2  8sin 2
2 2 2
  
sin   sin 2   2sin cos
2 2 2
    
cos 2  sin 2   cos 2  sin 2 
1  cos  2 2  2 2
LHS  
sin   
2sin cos
2 2
   
cos  sin 2  cos 2  sin 2
2 2 2 2
 
2sin cos
2 2

2sin 2
 2  tan  .
  2
2sin cos
2 2
 
2sin cos
RHS  2 2
2 2 2 
cos  sin  cos  sin 2
2 2 2 2
 
2sin cos
 2 2  tan 
 2
2 cos 2
2
 L.H .S  R.H .S

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
sin 
13.  cos ec  cot 
1  cos 
Sol:
sin 
LHS 
1  cos 
Rationalizer both Nr and Or with 1  cos
sin  1  cos 
 
1  cos  1  cos 
sin  1  cos  
   a  b  a  b   a 2  b 2 
1  cos 2 
sin   sin 
  1  cos 2   sin 2  
sin 2 
sin  sin  cos 
 2 
sin  sin 2 
1 cos 
  cos ec  cot 
sin  sin 
 LHS  RHS

1  sin 
  sec  tan  
2
14.
1  sin 
Sol:
1  sin 
LHS 
1  sin 
Rationalize both Nr and Or with 1  sin   multiply
1  sin  1  sin 
 
1  sin  1  sin 
1  sin  
2

  1  sin  1  sin    cos 2  


cos 2

1  sin   sin  
2 2
 1
   
 cos    cos  cos  
 sec   tan  
2

 LHS  RHS Hence proved

15.  cos ec  sin   cos ec  sin    cos 2   cos 2 


Sol:
LHS  cos ec 2  sin 2   a  b  a  b   a 2  b 2 

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 1  cot 2   1  cos 2    cos ec 2  1  cot 2  sin 2   1  cos 2  

 1  cot 2  1  cos2 
 cot 2   cos2 
 LHS  RHS Hence proved

16.
1  cot   tan   cot 
2

sec 2 
Sol:

LHS 
1  cot   tan 
2

 cos ec 2  1  cot 2  
sec 2

cos ec   tan 
2
1 cos2  sin 
   
sec2 sin 2  1 cos 
cos 
  cot 
sin 
 LHS  RHS Hence proved

17.  sec  cos   sec  cos   tan 2   sin 2 


Sol:
LHS  sec2   cos2    sec   cos   sec  cos    sec2   cos2  
 1  tan 2   1  sin 2    sec2   1  tan 2  cos 2   1  tan 2  

 1  tan 2   l  sin 2 
tan 2   sin 2 
 LHS  RHS Hence proved

18. sec A 1  sin A sec A  tan A   1


Sol:
1  1 sin A   1 sin A 
LHS   1  sin A      sec A  cos A and tan A  cos A 
cos  1  cos A cos A 


1
 1  sin A
1  sin A
cos A cos A
2
cos A
 2
1  1  sin A 1  sin A   cos 2 A  1  sin 2 A
cos A
 LHS  RHS Hence proved

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

19.  cos ecA  sin A sec A  cos A tan A  cot A  1
Sol:
 1  1   sin A cos A 
LHS    sin A   cos A  
 sin A   cos A   cos A sin A 
1  sin 2 A 1  cos2 A sin 2 A  cos2 A
  
sin A cos A sin A cos A
 1 
 cos ec A  sin A
 
 sec A  1 A 

cos A  sin A 1
2
 cos 
 2 2  
sin A cos A  tan A  sin A 
 cos A 
 cos A 
 cot A  
 sin A 
 1  sin 2 A  cos 2 A
 
1  1  cos A  sin A 
2 2

 sin 2 A  cos 2 A  1 
 
 LHS  RHS Hence proved

20. tan 2   sin 2  tan 2  sin 2 


Sol:
sin 2   sin 2  
LHS  tan 2   sin     sin 2  
2
 
cos 2  
tan
cos2  
 1 
 sin 2   2  1
 cos  
1  cos 2  
sin 2   
 cos  
2

sin 2 
 sin 2    sin 2  tan 2 
cos2 
 LHS  RHS Hence proved

21. 1  tan   1  sin    1  sin    1


2

Sol:
LHS  1  tan 2  1  sin 2     a  b  a  b   a 2  b 2 
 sec2   cos 2   sec2   1  tan 2  

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
 LHS  RHS Hence proved

22. sin 2 A cot 2 A  cos2 A tan 2 A  1


Sol:
cos2 A sin 2 A
LHS  sin 2 A  2  cos2 A 
sin A cos2 A
 A sin 2 A 
 cos 2 A  sin 2 A
2
 2 2

cos 2 A 
cot A cos tan A
 sin 2 A
 LHS  RHS Hence proved

2cos2   1
23. (i) cos   tan  
sin  cos 
Sol:
cos sin 
L.H .S  
sin  cos 
cos2   sin 2  cos2 
   cos2   sin 2   cos  
sin  cos  sin  cos 
 cos 2  2 cos 2   1

2cos 2   1

sin  cos 
 LHS  RHS Hence proved
2sin 2   1
(ii) tan   cot  
sin  cos 
Sol:
sin  cos 
LHS  
cos  sin 
sin 2   cos2

cos  sin 
sin 2   1  sin 2  
  cos 2   1sin 2  
cos  sin 
2sin 2   1

sin  cos 
 LHS  RHS Hence proved

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

cos2 
24.  cos ec  sin   
sin 
Sol:

LHS 
15   sin  cos ec  sin
2 2

sin 
cos   sin   1
2 2
  sin  cos ec  1
sin 
0
 LHS  RHS Hence proved

1 1
25.   2sec2 A
1  sin A 1  sin A
Sol:
1  sin A  1  sin A
LHS 
1  sin A1  sin A
2
  1  sin A 1  sin A   1  sin 2 A
1  sin A
2

2
 2
 2sec2 A  1  sin A  cos A
cos A
 LHS  RHS Hence proved

1  sin  cos A
26.   2sec
cos  1  sin 
Sol:
1  sin    cos2 
2

LHS 
cos  1  sin  
1  sin 2   2sin   cos 2 

cos  1  sin  
2 1  sin  
  2sec 
cos  1  sin  
 LHS  RHS Hence proved

1  sin    1  sin  
2 2
1  sin 2 
27. 
2 cos 2  1  sin 2 
Sol:
1  sin 2   2sin   1  sin 2   2sin 
LHS 
2cos 
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

2 1  sin 2  
1  sin 2 
   cos 2   1  sin 2  
2 cos 2  1  sin 2 
 LHS  RHS Hence proved

1  tan 2  1  tan  
2

28.   tan 2 
1  cot 2   cot  
Sol:
1  tan 2  sec2 
LHS    tan 2   1  sec2  1  cot 2   cos ec 2 
1  cot 2  cos ec 2
1
 sin 2  tan 2 
cos  1
2

2
 
1  tan    1  tan 
2

   
1  cot   1 
1

 tan  
2
 1  tan  
  tan    tan 2 
 1  tan   
 LHS  RHS Hence proved

1  sec  sin 2 
29. 
sec 1  cos 
Sol:
1
1
1  sec  cos 
LHS  
sec  1
cos 
cos   1
  cos 
cos 
 1  cos 
sin 2  1  cos2 
RHS  
1  cos  1  cos 


1  2 5b    cos   1  cos
1  48
 LHS  RHS Hence proved

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
tan  cot 
30.   1  tan   cot  .
1  cot  1  tan 
Sol:
tan  cot 
LHS  
1
1 1  tan 
tan 
tan 
2
cot 
 
1  tan   1  tan 
1  1 
  tan 2  
1  tan   tan  
1 1  tan 3  
 
1  tan   tan  


1  tan   1  tan   tan 2  

1
1  tan  tan    
 a3  b3   a  b  a 2  ab  b2 

1  tan   tan 2 

tan 
 cot   1  tan 
 LHS  RHS Hence proved

31. sec6   tan 6   3tan 2  sec2   1


Sol:
We know that sec2   tan 2  :
Cubing on both sides
sec  tan  
3
2
1

 
sec6   tan 6   3sec 2  sec 2   tan 2   1

tan 2    a  b  a3  b3  3ab  a  b 
3
 
 sec  tan 6   3sec2  tan 2   1
 sec6   tan 6   1  3tan   sec2 
Hence proved

32. cos ec6  cot 6   3cot 2  cos ec2  1


Sol:
We know that cos ec 2  cot 2   1
Cubing on both sides
 cos ec   cot    1
3 3
2 2

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 
 cos ec 6  cot 6   3cos ec 2 cot 2  cos ec 2  cot 2   1

  a  b 3  a3  b3  3ab  a  b 
 
 cos ec6  1  3cos ec 2 cot 2   cot 6 
Hence proved

33.
1  tan   cot   tan 
2

cos ec 2
Sol:
sec2   tan 2   1
 sec2   1  tan 2 
sec2   cot  1 sin 6  cos 
LHS   
cos ec 2 cos2  sin 
 1 1 cos  
 sec   cos  , cos ec  sin  cot   sin  
sin 
  tan 
cos 
 LHS  RHS Hence proved

1  cos A 1
34. 
sin A 1  cos A
2

Sol:
We know that sin 2 A  cos 2 A  1
sin 2 A  1  cos2 A
 sin 2 A  1  cos A1  cos A

 LHS 
1  cos A 
1
1  cos A1  cos A 1  cos A
 L.H .S  R.H .S Hence proved

sec A  tan A cos 2 A


35. 
sec A  tan A 1  sin A2
Sol:
sec  tan 
LHS 
sec A  tan A
Rationalizing the denominator y multiply and diving with sec A  tan A we get

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 sec A  tan A   sec A  tan A  sec2 A  tan2 A  1


 sec A  tan A  sec A  tan A  sec A  tan A  sec A  tan A2
2

 sec 2 A  tan 2 A  1


1 1
 
sec A  tan A  2sec A tan A
2 2
1 sin 2 A 2sin A
 
cos 2 A cos 2 A cos2 A
cos 2 cos 2 A
 
1  sin 2 A  2sin A 1  sin A2
 L.H .S  R.H .S Hence proved

1  cos A sin A
36. 
sin A 1  cos A
Sol:
1  cos A
LHS  ... 1
sin A
Multiply both Nr and Dr with 1  cos A  we get
1  cos A1  cos A  1  cos2 A
sin A 1  cos A sin A 1  cos A
sin 2 A 1  cos 2 A
 
sin A 1  cos A sin A 1  cos A
sin 2
  cos 2 A  sin 2 A
sin A 1  cos A
sin A

1  cos A
 L.H .S  R.H .S Hence proved

1  sin A
37.  sin A  tan A
1  sin A
Sol:
1  sin A
LHS  .
1  sin A
Rationalize the Nr. By multiplying both Nr and Dr with 1  sin A.

1  sin A1  sin A  1  sin A


2

  1  sin A1  sin A  cos 2 A


1  sin A1  sin A cos 2 A

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1  sin A 1 sin A
  
cos A cos A cos A
sec A  tan A
 L.H .S  R.H .S Hence proved

1  cos A
38.  cos ecA  cot A
1  cos A
Sol:
Rationalizing both Nr and Or by multiplying both with 1  cos A we get
1  cos A1  cos A .
  1  cos A1  cos A  1  cos2 A  sin 2 A
1  cos A1  cos A
1  cos A
2

sin 2 A
1  cos A

sin A
 cos ecA  cot A.
 L.H .S  R.H .S Hence proved

1  sin A
sec A  tan A
2
39. 
1  sin A
Sol:
LHS   sec A  tan A 
2

1  sin A 2 2
 1 sin A 
  
 cos A cos A  cos 2 A.
1  sin A
2

  1  sin 2 A  cos 2 A


1  sin A
2

1  sin A
2

  a 2  b 2   a  b  a  b  
1  sin A1  sin A
1  sin A

1  sin A
 L.H .S  R.H .S Hence proved

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1  cos A
  cot A  cos ecA
2
40.
1  cos A
Sol:
1  cos A
LHS 
1  cos A
Rationalizing Nr by multiplying and dividing with 1  cos A.


1  cos A1  cos A
1  cos A1  cos A
1  cos A
2


1  cos 2 A
1  cos A
2

 2
  a  b  a  b   a 2  b 2 1  cos 2 A  sin 2 A
sin A
2
 1 cos A 
 cos ecA  cot A
2
 
 sin A sin A 
  cot A  cos ecA 
2

 L.H .S  R.H .S Hence proved

1 1
41.   2cos ecA cot A
sec A  1 sec A  1
Sol:
sec A  1  sec A  1 2sec A
LHS  
 sec A  1 sec A  1  sec2 A  1
  a  b  a  b   a 2  b 2 sec2 A  1  tan 2 A
2sec A 2 1cos 2 A  1 sin 2 A 
   sec A  tan 2
A  
tan 2 A cos A  sin 2 A  cos A cos 2 A 
 2cos ecA cot A
 L.H .S  R.H .S Hence proved

cos A sin A
42.   sin A  cos A
1  tan A 1  cot A
Sol:
cos A sin A
LHS  
1  tan A  1 
1  
 tan A 
cos A sin A  tan A
 
1  tan A 1  tan A

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
cos A  sin A tan A

1  tan A
sin A
cos A  sin A 
 cos A
sin A
1
cos A
cos 2 A  sin 2 A cos A  cos A  sin A cos A  sin A
 
 cos A  sin A cos A cos A  sin A
 cos A  sin A.
 L.H .S  R.H .S Hence proved

cos ecA cos ecA


43.   2sec2 A.
cos ecA  1 cos ecA  1
Sol:
 cos ec  1  cos ec  1   cos ec 2 A  1  cot 2 A
LHS cos ecA  
 cos ec 2 A  1
 2 cos ecA 
 cos ecA 
 cot A 
2

2 sin 2 A
 2 2
 2sec2 A.
sin A cos A
 LHS  RHS Hence proved.

44. 1  tan A  1  tan1 A   sin


2
2 2
1
A  sin 4 A
Sol:
 sin 2 A   cos 2 A 
LHS  1  2   1  2 2 
 cos A   sin A 
cos2 A  sin 2 A sin 2 A  cos2 A
 
cos2 A sin 2 A
1 1
 2
 2  sin 2 A  cos 2 A  1
cos A sin A
sin 2 A  cos 2 A 1
  2 cos 2 A  1  sin 2 A
sin A cos A sin A 1  sin A
2 2

1

sin A  sin  A
2

 LHS  RHS Hence proved.

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

tan 2 A cot 2 A
45. 
1  tan 2 A 1  cot A
Sol:
We know that
sec 2 A  1  tan 2 A
cos ec 2 A  1  cot 2 A.
tan 2 cot 2
 LHS  
sec 2 cos ec 2 A
sin 2 A cos 2 A cos 2 A sin 2 A
   
cos 2 A 1 sin 2 A 1
 A 1 cos A 1 
 tan A  sin cos A sec A  cos A cot A  sin A cos ec  sin A 

 sin 2 A  cos 2 A
1
 LHS  RHS Hence proved.

cot A  cos A cos ecA  1


46. 
cos A  cos A cos ecA  1
Sol:
cos A
 cos A
sin A  cos A 
  cot A 
cos A
 cos A  sin A 
sin A
 1 
cos A   1
  sin A 
 1 
cos A   1
 sin A 
cos ecA  1

cos ecA  1

1  cos   sin 
47. (i)
1  cos   sin 
sin   cos   1
(ii)
sin   cos   1

cos   sin   1
(iii)  cos ec  cot 
cos   sin   1
Sol:

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1  cos   sin 
(i) 
1  cos   sin 
Dividing the equation with cos  we get or both Nr and Dr
1  cos   sin  1 cos  sin 
 
cos   cos  cos  cos 
1  cos   sin  1 cos  sin 
 
cos  cos  cos  cos 
sec  1  ta

sec  1  tan 
sec  tan   sec2   tan 2 
  sec2   tan 2   1
sec2   tan   1
Or
sec   tan   1
sec   tan   1
1
1
sec   tan   1 
 sec   tan  
sec   tan   1  sec   tan  
Or
sec   tan   1
sec   tan   1
1
1
sec   tan   1 
 sec   tan  
sec   tan   1  sec   tan  
1  sec   tan  1
 
1  sec   tan  sec   tan 
1
  sec   tan 
sec   tan 
 sec   tan 
1 sin 
 
cos  cos 
1  cos 

cos 
sin   cos   1
(ii)
sin   cos   1
Divide Nr and Dr with cos  , we get

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
sin   cos   1
cos  tan   1  sec 
 .
sin   cos   1 tan   1  sec 
cos 
1
 1
sec   tan 
tan   sec   1
1  sec   tan  1
 
1  sec   tan  sec   tan 
1

sec   tan 
cos   sin   1
(iii)  cos ec  cot 
cos   sin   1
Divide both Nr and Dr with sin 
cos   sin   1
sin 
cos   sin   1
sin 
cot   1  cos ec

cot   1  cos ec
cot   cos ec   cos ec 2  cot 2  

cot   cos ec  1
cot   cos ec   cos ec 2  cot 2  

cot   cos ec  1
cot   cos ec 1   cos ec  cot   

cot   cos ec  1
 cot   cos ec

1 1 1 1
48.   
sec A  tan A cos A cos A sec A  tan A
Sol:
 1 
LHS : sec A  tan A   sec A  tan A
 sec A  tan A 
  tan A

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1
RHS 
cos A sec A  tan A
sec A   sec A  tan A 
 1 
 sec A  tan A  sec A  tan A
  tan A
LHS  RHS

49. tan 2 A  cot 2 A  sec2 A cos ec 2 A  2


Sol:
sin 2 A cos 2 A
tan 2 A  cot 2 A  
cos2 A sin 2 A
sin 4 A  cos 4 A

cos2 A sin 2 A
1  2sin 2 A cos2 A
 2 2
 sin 4 A  cos4 A  1  2sin 2 A cos2 A
sin A cos A
 sec2 A cos ec 2 A  2
sin 4 A  cos4 A is in the form of a 4  b4
 
2
a 4  b4  a 2  b2  2a 2 b 2
Here a  sin A, b  cos A

 
2
 sin 2 A  cos 2 A  2sin 2 A cos 2 A
 1  2sin 2 A cos 2 14

1  tan 2 A
50.  tan 2 A.
cot 2 A  1
Sol:
sin 2 A cos 2 A  sin 2 A
1
cos 2 A  cos 2 A
cos 2 cos 2 A  sin 2 A
 1
sin 2 sin 2 A
sin 2 A

cos 2 A
 tan 2 A.

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

cot 2 
51. 1  cos ec
1  cos ec
Sol:
cos ec 2  1
1  cos ec 2  cot 2   1,cot 2   cos ec 2  1
1  cos ec

1
 cos ec  1 cos ec  1
1  cos ec
 1  cos ec  1   a  b  a  b   a 2  b 2 a  cos ec , b  1.
 cos ec

cos  cos 
52.   2 tan 
cos ec  1 cos ec  1
Sol:
cos  cos 

1 1
1 1
sin  sin 
cos  cos 
1  sin   1  sin 
sin  sin 
 cos   sin     cos   sin  
1  sin  1  sin 
1  sin   sin  cos     sin  cos  
1  sin  1  sin  
sin  cos   sin  cos   sin  cos   sin 2  cos 2
1  sin 2 
sin  cos 

cos 2 
2sin 

cos 
 2 tan 

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

1  cos   sin 2 
53.  cot 
sin  1  cos  
Sol:
1  cos   sin 2 
sin  1  cos  
1  sin 2   cos 

sin  1  cos  
cos 2   cos 

sin  1  cos  
cos  1  cos  

sin  1  cos  
 cot  .

tan 3  cot 3 
54.   sec cos ec   2sin  cos
1  tan 2  1  cot 2 
Sol:
tan 3  cos2 
  sec2   tan 2   1cos ec 2  cot 2   1
sec  cos ec 
2 2

cos ec 2  1  cot 2  .
 1 1 2 
tan   cos 2   cot 3   sin 3   sec2   cos  , cos ec 2  1  cot  
2

sin 3  cos3 
 cos 2
   sin 2 
cos 3
sin 
3

sin  cos 
3 3

cos  sin 
sin   cos 4 
4

sin  cos 
1  2sin 2  cos 2 
sin  cos 
1 2sin 2  cos 2 

sin  cos  sin  cos 
sec cos ec  2sin  cos .

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
T3  T5 T5  T7
55. If Tn  sin n   cos n  , provethat  .
T1 T3
Sol:

LHS 
sin   cos    sin   cos  
3 3 3 5

sin   cos 
sin  1  sin    cos3   1  cos 2 
3 2


sin   cos 
sin   cos   cos3   sin 2 
3 3

sin   cos 
sin   cos   sin   cos  
2


sin   cos 
 sin  cos 2 
3

T5  T9


sin 5   cos5   sin 7   cos7    
T3 sin 3   cos3 


 
sin 5  1  sin 2   cos5  sin 2   
sin   cos 
3 3


sin 5   cos 2  cos5  sin 2   
sin 3   cos3 



sin 2  cos 2  sin 3   cos3  
sin   cos 
3 3

 sin  cos 2 
2

L.H .S  R.H .S Hence Proval.


sin 2  cos 2   sin   cos  

sin 2   cos 
 sin 2  cos 2 
L.H .S  R.H .S
 1  sin 2  
2 2
 1   1 
56.  tan   cos     tan   cos    2  1  sin 2  
 
Sol:
  tan   sec     tan   sec  
2 2

 tan 2   sec2   2 tan  sec  tan 2   sec2   2 tan  sec .

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 2 tan 2   2sec 2 
 2  tan 2   sec 2 
 sin 2  1 
 2 2  
 cos  cos  
2

 sin  sin 2  
 2 
 cos  
2

 1 1  2 1  sin 2  cos 2 
57. 
 sec2   cos2  cos ec 2  sin 2   sin  cos 2
  .
2  sin 2  cos 2 
Sol:
 
 1 1  2
   sin  cos 2  .
 cos 2  cos ec   sin  
2 2
1

 cos 
2

 
 1 1  2
   sin  cos  .
2

 1  cos  1  sin 
4 4

 cos 2  sin 2  
 cos 2  sin 2   2
   sin  cos 
2

1  cos  1  sin  
4 4

 cos 2  sin 2  2
 2   sin  cos  .
2

 cos   sin   cos  cos   sin   sin  


2 4 2 2 4

 cos 2  sin 2  
 2   sin 2  cos 2  .
 2 2

 cos  1  cos   sin  sin  1  sin   cos  
2 2 2
 
 cos 2  sin 2   2
 2   sin  cos 
2

 cos  sin   sin  sin  cos   cos  


2 2 2 2 2

 cos 2  sin 2  
 2   sin 2  cos 2  .
  
 sin  cos 2   1 cos 2  sin 2   1  

 cos  1  sin    sin  1  cos   


4 2 4 2

  sin 2
 cos 2 
 sin  cos  1  cos  1  sin   
2 2 2 2

cos  1  sin    sin  1  cos  


4 2 4 2


1  cos  1  sin  
2 2

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

cos4   cos4  sin 2   sin 4   sin 4  cos2 


 .
1  sin 2   cos2   cos 2  sin 2 

1  2sin 2  cos 2   sin 2  cos2  cos2   sin 2  

1  1  cos  sin 
2 2  
cos 2   sin 2   1

1  sin 2  cos 2 
 .
2  sin 2  cos2 

1  sin   cos   1  cos 


2

58.  
1  sin   cos   1  cos 
Sol:
 1  sin   cos  1  sin   cos  
2

  
 1  sin   cos  1  sin   cos  
 1  sin   cos  2 
 
 1  sin    cos 2  
2

 12  sin 2   cos 2   2 1 sin   2  sin    cos    2cos  


 
 1  cos 2   sin 2   2sin  
(Since, sin 2   cos 2   1 ]
1  1  2sin   2sin  cos   2cos  
2

 
 sin 2   sin 2   2sin 
 2  2sin   2sin  cos   2cos  
2

 
 2sin 2   2sin 
 2 1  sin    2 cos   sin   1 
2

 
 2sin   sin   1 
 1  sin   2  2 cos   
2

 
 2sin   sin   1 
 2  2 cos  
2


 2sin  

2
 2  1  cos   
   
 2  sin   

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

1  cos  
2


 sin  
1  cos  
2


1  cos 2 


1  cos    1  cos  
1  cos  1  cos  
1  cos 
 .
1  cos 

59.  sec A  tan A  1 sec A  tan A  1  2 tan A


Sol:
   
 sec A  tan A  sec2 A  tan 2 A sec A  tan A  sec2 A  tan 2 A  
  sec A  tan A  sec A  tan A  sec A  tan A   sec A  tan A   sec A  tan A  sec A  tan A  
  sec A  tan A  1   sec A  tan A    sec A  tan A 1  sec A tan A 
  sec A  tan A 1  sec A  tan A  sec A  tan A 1  sec A tan A 
  sec A  tan A  sec A  tan A 1  sec A  tan A 1  sec A tan A 

 
 sec 2 A  tan 2 A 1  sec A  tan A 1  sec A tan A 
 1 sin A   1 sin A 
 1   1 
 cos A cos A   cos A cos A 
 

 cos A  1  sin A  cos A  1  sin A 


  
 cos A  cos A 
 cos A  sin A2  1 
 
 cos 2 A 
cos2 A  sin 2 A  2sin A cos A  1

cos 2 A
1  2sin A cos A
 1
cos2 A
2sin A cos A
 2
 sin 2 A  cos 2 A  1
cos A
 2 tan A

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
60. (1 + cot 𝐴 − 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝐴)(1 + tan 𝐴 + sec 𝐴) = 2
Sol:
LHS  1  cot A  cos ecA1  tan A  sec A
 cos A 1  sin A 1 
 1   1   
 sin A sin A  cos A cos A 
 sin A  cos A  1  cos A  sin A  1 
  
 sin  cos A 
 sin A  cos A
2
1

sin A cos A
1  2sin A cos A  1
  sin 2 A  cos 2 A  1
sin A cos A
 2.

61.  cos ec  sec  cot   tan   cos ec  sec  sec cos ec  2 
Sol:
LHS
 cos ec  sec   cot   tan  
 1 1   cos  sin  
 sin  cos    sin   cos  

 cos   sin    cos   sin  


2 2

 sin  cos    sin  cos  


 
  cos   sin  2  cos   sin   
 
 cos 2  sin 2  
RHS
 cos ec  sec  sec  cos ec  2 
 1 1  1 1 
      2
 sin  cos    cos  sin  
 sin   cos   1  2sin  cos  

 sin  cos    sin  cos  
 sin   cos    cos   sin   2sin  cos  
2 2
  
 sin  cos    sin  cos  
 cos   sin   cos   sin  
2

  cos 2   sin 2   1


sin  cos 
2 2

L.H .S  R.H .S Hence proved

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

62.  sec A  cos ecA1  tan A  cot A  tan A sec A  cot A cos ecA
Sol:
LHS   sec A  cos ecA1  tan A  cot A 
 1 1   sin A cos A 
  1 
 cos A sin A   cos A sin A 
 sin A  cos A   cos A sin A  sin A  cos A 
2 2
  
 sin A cos A   sin A cos A 
 sin A  cos A  sin 2 A  cos A sin A  cos2 A

sin 2 A cos 2 A
 sin 3
A  cos3 A 
 2
sin A cos A 2     
  a  b  a 2  ab  b  a 3  b3 

RHS  tan A sec A  cot A cos ecA
sin A 1 cos A 1
   
cos A cos A sin A cos A
sin A cos A
 
cos 2 A sin A
sin 3 A  cos3 A

sin 2 A cos 2 A
L.H .S  R.H .S Hence proved.

cos A cos ecA  sin A sec A


63.  cos ecA  sec A
cos A  sin A
Sol:

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
cos A cos ecA  sin A sec A
LHS
cos A  sin A
1 1
cos A   sin A 
 sin A cos A
cos A  sin A
cos A sin A

 sin A cos A
cos A  sin A
cos 2 A  sin 2 A
 sin A cos A
cos A  sin A
cos 2 A  sin 2 A 1
 
sin A cos A cos A  sin A


 cos A  sin A cos A  sin A
sin A cos A   cos A  sin A 
cos A  sin A

sin A cos A
cos A sin A
 
sin A cos A sin A cos A
1 1
 
sin A cos A
 cos ecA  sec A
 R.H .S
Hence proved.

sin A cot A
64.  1
sec A  tan A  1 cos ecA  cot A  1
Sol:
sin A cos A
LHS  
1 sin A 1 cos A
 1  1
cos A cos A sin A sin A
sin A cos A
 
1  sin A  cos A 1  cos A  sin A
cos A sin A
sin A cos A sin A cos A
 
1  sin A  cos A 1  cos A  sin A
 1 1 
 sin A cos A    sin A
1  sin A  cos A 1  cos A 

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

1  cos A  sin A  cot A sin A  cos A 


 sin A cos A  
 1  sin   cos  1  cos A  sin A 
 2 
 sin A cos A 
 cos A  sin A  sin A  sin A cos A  sin A  cos A  cos A  cos A sin A 
2 2

 2 
 sin A cos A 
1  sin A  cos A  2sin A cos A 
2 2

 2 
 sin A cos A  
 
1  sin 2 A  cos 2 A  2sin A cos A 

 
 sin A cos A 
2
1  1  2sin A cos A 
 
sin 2 A  cos 2 A  1

2
 sin A  cos A 
2sin A cos A
1
L.H .S  R.H .S

tan A cos A
65.   sin A cos A
1  tan 2 A  
1  cot 2 A 
2

Sol:
tan A cos A  1  tan 2 A  sec2 A 
   2 
sec A  cos ec A 1  cot A  cos ec A 
2 2 2
2 2

sin A cot A
 cos4 A  sin A4
sec A cos ec A
sin A cos A
 cos A  sin A
1 1
cos A sin 4 A
4

sin A cos4 A cos A sin 4


   
cos A 1 sin A 1
 sin A  cos3 A  cos A  sin 3

 sin A cos A cos 2 A  sin 2 A 
 sin A cos A
L.H.S = R.H.S
Hence proved.

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

66. 
sec 4 A 1  sin 4 A  2 tan 4 A  1
Sol:

LHS  sec4 A 1  sin 4 A  2 tan 4 A 
 sec A  sec A  sin A  2 tan 2 A
4 4 4

1
 sec4 A  4
 sin 4  2 tan 2 A
cos A
 sec A  tan 4 A  2 tan 2 A
4

   tan A  2 tan A
2
 sec2 A 4 2

 1  tan A   tan A  2 tan


2
2 4
 sec 2 A  tan 2 A  1
2
A
 1  tan 4 A  2 tan 2 A  tan 4 A  2 tan 2 A
 1  RHS
Hence proved.

cot 2 A  sec A  1  1  sin A 


67.  sec2 
1  sin A 1  sec A 
Sol:
cos 2 A  1 
  1
sin A  cos A 
2

1  sin A
cos A  1  cos A 
2

 
sin 2 A  cos A 
  sin 2 A  cos 2 A  1
1  sin A
 cos A  cos A 1  cos A 


1  cos 2 A  cos A  
1  sin A


 cos A1  cos A  1
1  cos A1  cos A 1  sin A
cos A

1  cos A1  sin A
Solving

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 1  sin A 
RHS  sec2 
1  sec A 
1 1  sec A 

cos 2 A 1  sec A 
1  1  sec A 
  cos A
cos 2 A  cos A  1 


1  sin A
 cos A cos A  1
By multiplying Nr and Dr with 1  sin A


1  sin A  1  sin A
 cos A1  cos A 1  sin A
1  sin 2 A
2


cos A 1  cos A 1  sin A 
cos 2 A

cos A 1  cos A 1  sin A 
cos 2 A

1  cos A1  sin A
L.H .S  R.H .S hence proved.

sec A cos ecA


68. 1  cot A  tan Asin A  cos A    sin A tan A  cos A cot A
cos ec A sec2 A
2

Sol:
1  cot A  tan A sin A  cos A
sin A  cos A  cot A sin A  cot A cos A  sin A tan A  tan A cos A
cos A sin A
sin A  cos A   sin A  cot A cos A  sin A tan A   cos A
sin A cos A
sin A  cos cos A  cot A cos A  sin A tan A  sin A
 sin A cos A cos A cot A
Solving:
sec A cos ecA

cos ec A sec2 A
2

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1
cos A  sin A
1 1
2
sin A cos 2 A
sin 2 A cos 2 A

cos A sin A
sin 3 A  cos3 A
sin A cos A
sin A cos A
 sin A   cos A 
cos A sin A
 sin A tan A  cos A cot A
L.H .S  R.H .S

69. sin 2 A cos2 B  cos2 A sin 2 B  sin 2 A  sin 2 B


Sol:
LHS  sin 2 A cos 2 B  cos 2 A sin 2 B.
   
 sin 2 A 1  sin 2 B  1  sin 2 A sin 2 A   cos 2 A  1  sin 2 A 
 sin 2 A  sin 2 A sin 2 B  sin 2 B  sin 2 A sin 2 B
 sin 2 A  sin 2 B
R.H .S Hence Proved.

cot A  tan B
70.  cot A tan B
cot B  tan A
Sol:
cot A  tan B
LHS 
cot B  tan A
cos A sin B

 sin A cos B
cos B cos ecA

sin B cos A
cos A cos B  sin A sin B
 sin A cos B
cos A cos B  sin A sin B
cos A sin B

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
cos A cos B  sin A sin B cos A sin B
 
sin A cos B cos A cos B  sin A sin B
cos A sin B

sin A cos B
 cot A tan B
 RHS
Hence proved

tan A  tan B
71.  tan A tan B
cot A  cot B
Sol:
tan A  tan B
LHSS 
cot A  cot B
sin A sin B

 cos A cos B
cos A cos B

sin A sin B
sin A cos B  cos A sin B
 cos A cos B
cos A sin B  cos B sin A
sin A sin B
sin A cos B  cos A sin B sin A sin B
 
cos A cos B cos A sin B  cos B sin A
sin A sin B

cos A cos B
 tan A  tan B  RHS
Hence proved

72. cot 2 A cos ec 2 B  cot 2 B cos ec 2 A  cot 2 A  cot 2 B


Sol:
LHS  cot 2 A cos ec 2 B  cot 2 B cos ec 2 A
 cot 2 A 1  cot 2 B   cot 2 B 1  cot 2 B   cos ec 2  1  cot 2  
 cot 2 A  cot 2 A cot 2 B  cot 2 B  cot 2 B cot 2 A
 cot 2 A  cot 2 B.
Hence proved

73. tan 2 A sec2 B  sec2 A tan 2 B  tan 2 A  tan 2 B


Sol:

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

LHS  tan 2 A sec2 B  sec2 A tan 2 B


 tan 2 A  1  tan 2 B   sec2 A  tan 2 A 
 tan 2 A  tan 2 A tan 2 B  tan 2 B 1  tan 2 A   sec 2 A  4 tan 2 A 
 tan 2  tan 2 A tan 2 B  tan 2 B  tan 2 B tan 2 A
 tan 2 A  tan 2 B
 RHS

74. If x = a sec 𝜃 + b tan 𝜃 and y = a tan 𝜃 + b sec 𝜃, prove that 𝑥 2 − 𝑦 2 = 𝑎2 − 𝑏 2


Sol:
L.H .S  x 2  y 2
  a sec   b tan     a tan   b sec  
2 2

 a 2 sec2   b 2 tan 2   2ab sec  tan   a 2 tan 2   b 2 sec   2ab sec  tan  .
 a 2  sec2   b 2 sec2   b 2 tan 2   a 2 tan 2 
  
 sec2  a 2  b 2  tan 2  b 2  a 2 
 sec   a  b   tan   a
2 2 2 2 2
 b2 
  a  b  sec   tan  
2 2 2 2
 sec2   tan 2   1
 a 2  b2

𝑥 y 𝑥 𝑦 𝑥2 𝑦2
75. If 𝑎 cos θ + b sin 𝜃 = 1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎 sin 𝜃 − 𝑏 cos 𝜃 = 1, 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑒 𝑡ℎ𝑎𝑡 𝑎2 + 𝑏2 = 2
Sol:
2 2
x y  x y 
   cos    1  1
2 2
 a cos  sin    sin 
b  a b 
x2 y 2 2 2 xy x2 y2
2
cos   2 sin 
2
cos  sin   2 sin   2 cos2 
2

a b ab a b
2 xy
 sin  cos   1  1
ab
x2 y2 y2 x2
2
cos 2
  2
cos 2
  2
sin 2
  2
sin 2   2
a b b a
x 2
y 
2
x 2
y 
2
cos 2   2  2   sin 2   2  2   2
a b  a a 

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 x2 y 2 

 2  2  cos   sin   2
2 2

 a b 
2 2
x
a 2
y
 2 
b

 cos 2   sin 2   1 

76. If cosec 𝜃 – sin 𝜃 = 𝑎3 , sec θ − cos θ = 𝑏 3 , 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑒 𝑡ℎ𝑎𝑡 𝑎2 𝑏 2 (𝑎2 + 𝑏 2 ) = 1


Sol:
cos ec  sin   a 3
1
 sin   a 3
sin 
1  sin 2
 a3
sin 
cos 2 
 a3
sin 
1
cos 3 
a 1
sin  3

4
cos 
 a2  3
2
sin 
3
sec   cos   b3
1
cos   b3
cos 
1  cos 2 
 b3
cos 
sin 2 
 b3
cos 
2
sin  3
b 1
cos 3 
Now, a 2b 2  a 2  b 2 
4
 4
4 4

cos  sin   cos  sin 3 
3 3
3

  
2 2  2 2 

sin  cos   sin  cos 3  

3 3 3

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

4 2  4 4

4 2

 cos 3
 sin 3
 
 cos 3 3
  sin 3
 2
 2 
 sin 3  cos 3  
 
2 2  
 cos 3  sin 3  2
 3
1
2


 cos 2   sin 2   1 
 sin  cos 3  
1
L.H .S  R.H .S

77. If a cos3 𝜃 + 3𝑎 cos 𝜃 sin2 𝜃 = 𝑚, 𝑎 sin3 𝜃 + 3 𝑎 cos 2 𝜃 sin 𝜃 = 𝑛, 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑒 𝑡ℎ𝑎𝑡


2 2
m  n3  m  n3
Sol:
2


 a cos3   3a cos  sin 2   a sin 3   3a cos 2  sin   3


 a cos   3a cos  sin   a sin   3a cos  sin 
3 2 3 2
 3

1 2


 a 3 cos3   3cos  sin 2   sin 3   3cos 2  sin   3

2 2


 a 3 cos3   3cos  sin 2   sin 3   3cos 2  sin   3

1 2 2 2

 a 3  cos   sin    3  a 3  cos   sin    3


3 3
  
2 2
 a  cos   sin     a 3  cos   sin  
2 2
3
 
2
 a 3 cos 2   sin 2   2sin  cos  
2 2
 a cos   sin   2sin  cos    a cos 2   sin 2   2sin  cos  
3 2 2 3

2 2
 a 1  2sin  cos    a 1  2sin  cos  
3 3

2
 a 3 1  2sin  cos   1  2sin  cos  
1 2
 a 1  1  2a
3 3

 R.H .S
Hence proved.

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝑥 2/3 𝑦 2/3
78. If x = a cos3 𝜃 , 𝑦 = 𝑏 sin3 𝜃 , 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑒 𝑡ℎ𝑎𝑡 (𝑎) + (𝑏 ) =1
Sol:
x  a cos3  : y  b sin 3 
x y
 cos3  :  sin 3 
a b
2 2
 x 3  y 3
L.H .S      
a b 
2 2


 cos3     sin  
3 3 3

 cos 2   sin 2   cos   sin


2 2
  1
1
Hence proved

79. If 3 sin 𝜃 + 5 cos 𝜃 = 5, prove that 5sin 𝜃 – 3 cos 𝜃 = ± 3.


Sol:
Given 3sin   5cos  5
3sin   5  5cos 
3sin   5 1  cos  
5 1  cos  1  cos  
3sin  
1  cos 
5 1  cos 2  
3sin  
1  cos  
5sin 2 
3sin  
1  cos 
3  3cos   5sin 
3  5sin  3cos 
 RHS
Hence proved.

80. If a cos 𝜃 + b sin 𝜃 = m and a sin 𝜃 – b cos 𝜃 = n, prove that 𝑎2 + 𝑏 2 = 𝑚2 + 𝑛2


Sol:
R.H .S  m2 sin 2
  a cos   b sin     a sin   b cos  
2 2

 a 2 cos 2   b 2 sin 2   2ab sin  cos 


 a 2 sin 2   b 2 cos 2   2ab sin  cos 
 a 2 cos 2   b 2 cos 2   b 2 sin 2   a 2 sin 2 

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

  
 a 2 sin 2   cos 2   b 2 sin 2   cos 2  
 a 2  b2  sin 2   cos 2   1 
81. If cos 𝜃 + cot 𝜃 = m and cosec 𝜃 – cot 𝜃 = n, prove that m n = 1
Sol:
LHS  mn
  cos ec  cot   cos ec  cot  
 cos ec 2  cot 2 
1   a  b  a  b   a 2  b 2 cos ec 2  cot 2   1
 R.H .S

82. If cos A + cos2 A = 1, prove that sin2 A + sin4 A = 1


Sol:
cos A  cos 2 A  1
cos A  1  cos 2 A
cos A  sin 2 A
LHS  sin 2 A  sin 4 A

 sin 2 A  sin 2 A 
 sin 2 A   cos A 
2

 sin 2 A  cos A
1

83. Prove that:


sec 𝜃−1 sec 𝜃+1
(𝑖) √ + √sec 𝜃−1 = 2𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃
sec 𝜃+1

1+sin 𝜃 1−sin 𝜃
(𝑖𝑖)√ + √1+sin 𝜃 = 2 sec 𝜃
1−sin 𝜃

1+cos 𝜃 1−cos 𝜃
(𝑖𝑖𝑖)√ + √1+cos 𝜃 = 2𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃
1−cos 𝜃
sec 𝜃−1 sin 𝜃 2
(𝑖𝑣) = (1+cos 𝜃)
sec 𝜃+1
Sol:
1 1
1 1
LHS  cos   cos 
1 1
1 1
cos  cos 

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

1  cos  1  cos 
 cos   cos 
1  cos  1  cos 
cos  cos 
1  cos  1  cos 
 
1  cos  1  cos 


1  cos    1  cos    1  cos  1  cos 

1  cos   1  cos  1  cos  1  cos 

1  cos   1  cos  
2 2

 
1  cos 2  1  cos 2 
1  cos  1  cos 
 
sin  sin 
1  cos   1  cos 

sin 
2

sin 
 2cos ec
1  sin  1  sin 
(2) 
1  sin  1  sin 
1  sin  1  sin   1  sin  1  sin 
  
1  sin  1  sin  1  sin  1  sin 
1  sin   1  sin  
2 2


1  sin 2  1  sin 2 

1  cos  1  cos  
2 2

 
sin 2  sin 2 
1  cos  1  cos 
 
sin  sin 
2
  2cos ec
sin 

(3) Not given

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
sec  1
(4)
sec  1
1
1
 cos 
1
1
cos 
1  cos 

1  cos 
1  cos  1  cos 
 
1  cos  1  cos 
1  cos 2 

1  cos  
2

sin 3

1  cos  
2

 sin  
2


1  cos  
 RHS
Hence proved.

84. If cos 𝜃 + cos2 𝜃 = 1, prove that


sin12   3sin10   3sin8   sin 6   2sin 4   2sin 2   2  1
Sol:
cos   cos 2   1
cos   1  cos 2 
cos   sin 2  ..... 1
Now, sin12   3sin10   3sin8   sin 6   2sin 4   2sin 2   2
   3sin   sin  sin   sin  
3
 sin 4  4 2 4 2

  sin    2  sin    2sin  2


3 2
2 2 2

Using  a  b   a 3  b3  3ab  a  b  and also from


3

(1) sin 2  cos 


 sin   sin    2 cos  2 cos  2.
3
4 2 2

sin    sin    2 cos   2 cos  2


2
2
2 2

 cos  sin  
3
2 2
 2 cos 2   2 cos   2

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 cos  sin   2cos   2sin


3
2 2 2
 2  sin 2   cos 2   1

1  2  sin   cos    2
2 2

1  2 1  2
1
L.H .S  R.H .S
Hence proved.

85. Given that 1  cos  1  cos  1  cos    1  cos  1  cos  1  cos  
Show that one of the values of each member of this equality is sin 𝛼 sin 𝛽 sin 𝛾
Sol:
L.H.S
  
We know that 1  cos   1  cos 2  sin 2  2cos 2
2 2 2
  
 2cos2  2cos2 .... 1
 2cos2
2 2 2
Multiply (1) with sin  sin  sin  and divide it with same we get
  
8cos2 cos2 cos2
2 2 2  sin  sin  sin 
sin  sin  sin 
  
2 cos 2 cos 2 cos 2  sin  sin  sin 
 2 2 2
  
sin sin sin
2 2 2
  
 sin  sin  sin   cot cot cot
2 2 2
RHS 1  cos  1  cos  1  cos  
  
We know that 1  cos   1  cos2  sin 2  2sin 2
2 2 2
  
 2sin 2 2  sin 2  2sin 2
2 2 2
Multiply and divide by sin  sin  sin  we get
  
2sin 2 2sin 2 2sin 2  sin  sin  sin 
2 2 2
sin  sin  sin 

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
  
2sin 2  2sin 2  2sin 2  sin  sin  sin 
 2 2 2
     
2sin cos 2sin cos 2sin cos
2 2 2 2 2 2
  
 tan tan sin  sin  sin 
tan
2 2 2
Hence sin  sin  sin  is the member of equality.

 
2
4  3 x2 1
86. if sin   cos   x P.T sin   cos   6 6

4
Sol:
sin   cos  x
Squaring on both sides
 sin   cos  
2
 x2
 sin 2   cos 2   2sin  cos   x 2
x2 1
 sin  cos   ...... 1
2
We know sin 2   cos 2   1
Cubing on both sides
sin   cos 2    1
3 3
2

sin 6   cos6   3sin 2  cos 2  sin 2   cos 2   1  


 sin 6   cos6 7  1  3sin 2  cos 2 
x 
2
2
1
 1 3 from (1)
4
 
2
4  3 x2 1
 sin 6   cos6  
4
Hence proved

x2 y 2 z 2
87. if x  a sec cos  y  b sec sin  and z  c tan  , S.T   1
a 2 b2 c 2
Sol:
x 2  a 2 sec2  cos 2  .....  i 
y 2  b 2 sec2  sin 2  ....  ii 
z 2  c 2 tan 2  ....  iii 

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 6.2
4
1. If cos   , find all other trigonometric ratios of angle 
5
Sol:
2
4
We have sin   1  cos   1   
2

5
16
 1
25
16
 25 
25
9 3
 
25 5
3
 sin  
5
sin  3 / 5 3 1 1 5
tan     sec    
cos  4 / 5 4 cos  4 4
5
1 1 5 1 1 4
cos ec    cot     .
sec  3 3 tan  3 3
5 4

1
2. If sin   , find all other trigonometric ratios of angle 
2
Sol:
2
1
We have cos   1  sin   1   
2

2
11 1
 
2 2
1
 cos  
2
1
sin 
tan    2 1
cos  1
2
1 1
cos ec    2
sin  1
2

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 1
sec     2
cos  1
2
1 1
cot    1
tan  1

1 cos ec 2  sec2 
3. If tan   , Find the value of
2 cos ec 2  cot 2 
Sol:
We know that sec   1  tan 2 
2
 1 
 1  
 2
1 3
 1 
2 2
1 1
cot     2
tan  1
2
cos ec  1  cot 2   1  2  3
Substituting it in (1) we get

   
2 2 3 3
3  3 3
  22
    3 2 5
2 2
3  3
3

10

3 1  cos 
4. If tan   , find thevalueof
4 1  cos 
Sol:
2
3 9
sec   1  tan   1     1 
2

4 16
16  9 5
 
16 4
1 1 4
 sec      cos 
cos  5 5
4

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
4 1
1
We get 5  5  1.
4 9 9
1
5 5

12 1  sin 
5. If tan   , find the valueof
5 1  sin 
Sol:
1 1 5
cot    
tan  12 12
5
144  25
2
5 169 13
cos ec  1  cot   1    
2
  .
12  12 
2
144 12
1 1 12
sin     .
cos ec 13 13
12
12 13  12
1
We get 13  18  25  25
12 13  12 1
1
13 18

1 1  cos 2 
6. If cot   , find the value of
3 2  sin 2 
Sol:
1 4
cos ec  1  cot 2   1  
3 3
2
 cos ec 
3
1 1 3
sin    
cos ec 2 2
3
3
1 sin  sin  1
and   cos   2  .
cot  cos  1 3 2
cos 

on substituting we get

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1 3
1
4  4  3.
3 5 5
2
4 4

2sin 2 A  3cot 2 A
7. If cos ec  2, find the value of

4 tan 2 A  cos 2 A 
Sol:
We know that cot A  cos ec 2 A  1
  2
2
1  2 1
1.
1 1
tan A   1
cot A 1
1 1 1
sin A  A  sin A 
cos ec 2 2
2
 1  1 1
cos A 1  sin A  1  
2
   .
 2 2 2
On substituting we get
3
 1 
 3 1 1
2
2  2  3
 2   2
  1 
2
  1
4 1    4 1  
  2
  2  
1 3 4
   2.
1 2
4
2

cos ec 2  cot 2 
8. If cot  3, find the value of
cos ec 2  cot 2 
Sol:

 3
2
cos ec  1  cot 2   1   1 3  2
1 1 cos 
sin     cot    cos   cot   sin 
cos ec 2 sin 

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

3
 cos  
2
1 2
sec   
cos  3
On substituting we get
 2  3
2 2
 43 7
 
 2 
2
12  4 8
 2
2
  3 3
 3
21
 .
8

6sin 2   tan 2 
9. If 3cos   1, find the value of
4cos 
Sol:
1
cos   sin  1  cos 2 
3
1 8 2 2
 1  
9 9 3
sin  2 2
tan    2 2
cos  3  1
3
On substituting in (1) we get
2
2 2 
 
2
6   2 2 3 16  24
3 6
   5 3
1 4 4
4
3 5 3
40
  10
4

10. If 3 tan   sin  , find thevalueof sin 2   cos2 


Sol:
sin 
3  sin 
cos 
3 1
cos   
3 3

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 6 – Trigonometric Identities Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2
 1 
sin   1  cos   1  
2

 3
2
 2  1 
2

 sin   cos   
2 2
   
 3   3
2 1 1
  
3 3 3

13 2sin   3cos 
11. If cos ec  , find thevalueof
12 4sin   9cos 
Sol:
1 1 12
sin    
cos ec 13 13
12
2
12  144
cos   1  sin   1     1 
2

13  169
25 5
 
169 13
12 5 24  15
2   3
 13 13  13  9  3
12 5 48  15 3
4  9
13 13 13

12. If sin   cos   2 cos  90    , find cot  find cot 


Sol:
L.H .S  sin   cos   2 sin   cos  90     sin  

 cos   sin   2   sin 


cos   sin   2  1
Divide both sides with sin  we get
cos  sin 

sin  sin 

2 1 
 cot   2  1

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Exercise – 7.1

1. Calculate the mean for the following distribution:


x: 5 6 7 8 9
f: 4 8 14 11 3
Sol:
x f fx
5 4 20
6 8 48
7 14 98
8 11 88
9 3 27
N  40  fx  281
 fx
Mean 
N
281
  7  025
4

2. Find the mean of the following data:


x: 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
f. 13 15 16 18 16 15 13
Sol:
x f fx
18 13 247
21 15 315
23 16 368
25 18 450
27 16 432
29 15 435
31 13 403
N  106  fx  2620
 fx 2680
Mean  x     25.
N 106

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3. If the mean of the following data is 20.6. Find the value of p.
x: 10 15 p 25 35
f: 3 10 25 7 5
Sol:
x F fx
10 3 30
5 10 150
P 25 25P
25 7 175
35 5 175
N  90  fx  530  25P
Given
 Mean  20  6
 Px
  20  6
N
530  25P
  20  6
50
 25P  20  6  50   530
500
P
25
 P  20.

4. If the mean of the following data is 15, find p.


x: 5 10 15 20 25
f: 6 p 6 10 5
Sol:
x F fx
5 6 30
10 P 10P
15 6 90
20 10 200
25 5 125
N  P127  fx  10P  445
Given

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
 Mean  15
 Px
 5
N
109  445
  15
P  127
 10 P  445  15 P  405
 15P  10 P  445  405
 5 P  40
40
P
5
 P 8

5. Find the value of p for the following distribution whose mean is 16.6
x: 8 12 15 p 20 25 30
f. 12 16 20 24 16 8 4
Sol:
x f fx
8 12 96
12 16 192
15 20 300
P 24 24P
20 16 220
25 8 200
30 4 420
N  100  fx  24 P  1228
Given
 Mean  16  6
54 x
  16  6
N
24 P  1228
  16  6
100
 24 P  1228  1660
 24 P  1660  1228
432
P
24
 P  18

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
6. Find the missing value of p for the following distribution whose mean is 12.58
x: 5 8 10 12 p 20 25
f. 2 5 8 22 7 4 2
Sol:
x f fx
5 2 10
8 5 40
10 8 80
12 22 264
P 7 70
20 24 480
25 2 50
N  50  fx  524P  7 P
Given
 Mean  12  8
3
5  12  58
N
528  7 P
  12  58
50
 524  7 P  629
 7 P  629  524
 7 P  105
105
P
7
 P  15

7. Find the missing frequency (p) for the following distribution whose mean is 7.68.
x: 3 5 7 9 11 13
f: 6 8 15 p 8 4
Sol:
x f fx
3 6 18
5 8 40
7 15 105
9 P 9P

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

11 8 18
13 4 52
N  P  41  fx  9 P  303
Given
 Mean  7  68
 fx
  68
N
7 P  303
  7  68
P  41
 9 P  303  P  7  68   314  88
 9 P  7  68 P  314  88  303
 1  32 P  11  88
11  88
P
1  32
 P  9.

8. Find the value of p, if the mean of the following distribution is 20.


x: 15 17 19 20 + p 23
f: 2 3 4 5p 6
Sol:
x f fx
15 2 30
17 3 51
19 4 76
20+P 5P 100P+5P2
23 6 138
N  5P  15  fx  295  100 P  2 P 2
 Given Mean  2n
 fx
  20
N
295  100 P  5 P 2
  20
5  15
 295  100 P  5 P 2  100 P  300

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 5P 2  5  0

 5 P2 1  0 
 P 2  1  0   P  1 P  1  0
 p2  1
 p  1
If P  1  0
P  1 (Reject)
Or P  1  0
P 1

9. The following table gives the number of boys of a particular age in a class of 40 students.
Calculate the mean age of the students
Age (in years): 15 16 17 18 19 20
No. of students: 3 8 10 10 5 4
Sol:
x f fx
15 3 45
16 8 128
17 10 170
18 10 180
19 5 95
20 4 80
 f  N  40  fx  498
 fx
Mean age 
N
698

40
 17  45 years
Mean age  17  45 years

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
10. Candidates of four schools appear in a mathematics test. The data were as follows:
Schools No. of Candidates Average Score
I 60 75
II 48 80
III NA 55
IV 40 50
If the average score of the candidates of all the four schools is 66, find the number of
candidates that appeared from school III.
Sol:
Let the number of candidates from school III = P
No of candidates Average scores
Schools Ni  xi 
I 60 75
II 48 80
III P 55
IV 40 50
Given
Average score or all schools  66.
N x  N 2 x2  N 3 x3  N 4 x4
 1 1  66
N1  N 2  N3  N 4
60  75  48  80  P  55  40  50
  66
60  48  P  40
4500  3340  55P  2000
  66
148  P
 10340  55 P  66 P  9768
 10340  9768  66 P  55 P
572
P
11
 P  52.

11. Five coins were simultaneously tossed 1000 times and at each toss the number of heads
were observed. The number of tosses during which 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 heads were obtained
are shown in the table below. Find the mean number of heads per toss.
No. of heads per toss No. of tosses
0 38
1 144
2 342
3 287
4 164

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5 25
Total 1000
Sol:
No. of heads per toss No. of tosses
0 38
1 144
2 342
3 287
4 164
5 25

No. of heads per toss No. of tosses fx


0 28 0
1 144 144
2 342 684
3 287 861
4 164 656
5 25 125
fx
Mean number of heads per toss 
N
2470

1000
 2  47
Mean  2  47

12. Find the missing frequencies in the following frequency distribution if it is known that the
mean of the distribution is 50.
X: 10 30 50 70 90
f: 17 f1 32 f2 19 Total 120.
Sol:
x f fx
10 17 170
30 f1 30 f1
50 32 1600
70 f2 70 f 2
90 19 1710
N  120  fx  30 f1  70 f 2  3480.
Given mean

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
fx
 50
N
30 f1  70 f 2  3480
 50
120
30 f1  70 f 2  3480  6000 …..(i)
Also,
f  120
17  f1  32  f 2  19  120
f1  f 2  52
f1  52  f 2
Substituting value of f1 in (i)
30  52  f 2   70 f 2  3480  6000  40 f 2  960
 f 2  24
Hence f1  52  24  28  f1  28; f 2  24

13. The arithmetic mean of the following data is 14. Find the value of k
𝑥𝑖 : 5 10 15 20 25
𝑓𝑖 : 7 k 8 4 5.
Sol:
x f fx
10 17 170
30 f1 30 f1
50 32 1600
70 f2 70 f 2
90 19 1710
N  120  fx  30 f1  70 f 2  3480.
Given mean = 50
fx
 50
N
30 f1  70 f 2  3480
 50
120
30 f1  70 f 2  3480  6000 …..(i)
Also,

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
f  120
17  f1  32  f 2  19  120
f1  f 2  52
f1  52  f 2
Substituting value of f1 in (i)
30  52  f 2   70 f 2  3480  6000  40 f 2  960
 f 2  24
Hence f1  52  24  28  f1  28; f 2  24

14. The arithmetic mean of the following data is 25, find the value of k.
𝑥𝑖 : 5 15 25 35 45
𝑓𝑖 : 3 k 3 6 2
Sol:
x f fx
5 3 15
15 K 15k
25 3 75
35 6 210
45 2 90
N  k  14  fx  15k1 390.
 Given mean  25
fx
  25
N
1  k  390
  25
k  14
 15k  390  25k  350
 25k  15k  40
 10k  40
40
k 
10
 k  4.

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
15. If the mean of the following data is 18.75. Find the value of p.
𝑥𝑖 : 10 15 p 25 30
𝑓𝑖 : 5 10 7 8 2
Sol:
x f fx
10 5 50
15 10 150
P 7 7P
25 8 200
30 2 60
N  32  fx  1P  460.
 Given mean  18  75
fx
  1  75
N
7 P  460
  18  75
32
 7 P  460  600
 7 P  460  600
 7 P  140
140
P
7
 P  20

Exercise – 7.2

1. The number of telephone calls received at an exchange per interval for 250 successive one-
minute intervals are given in the following frequency table:
No. of calls(x): 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
No. of intervals (f): 15 24 29 46 54 43 39
Compute the mean number of calls per interval.
Sol:
Let be assumed mean  A   3
No. of calls No. of
ui  x;  A  xi  3 f1 4;
 xi  intervals  fi 
0 15 -3 -45
1 24 -2 -47

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2 29 -1 -39
3 46 0 0
4 54 54
5 43 2 43(2) = 86
6 39 3 47
N  250 fi ui  135
fi 4;
Mean number of cells  A 
N
135
 3
250
750  135

250
885

250
 3  54

2. Five coins were simultaneously tossed 1000 times, and at each toss the number of heads
was observed. The number of tosses during which 0,1,2,3,4 and 5 heads were obtained are
shown in the table below. Find the mean number of heads per toss
No. of heads per toss (x): 0 1 2 3 4 5
No. of tosses (f): 38 144 342 287 164 25
Sol:
Let the assumed mean  A   2.
No. of heads No. of ui  A;  x
fi 4;
per toss  xi  intervals  fi   A; 2
0 38 -2 -76
1 144 -1 +44
2 342 0 0
3 287 1 287
4 164 2 328
5 25 3 75
N  1000 fi ui  470
fi 4
Mean number of per toss  A 
N
470
 2
1000
 2  0  47
 2  47

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3. The following table gives the number of branches and number of plants in the garden of a
school.
No. of branches (x): 2 3 4 5 6
No. of plants (f): 49 43 57 38 13
Calculate the average number of branches per plant.
Sol:
Let the assumed mean  A   4.
No. of No. of plants ui  xi  A
fi ui
branches  xi   fi   vi  4
2 49 -2 -98
3 43 -1 -43
4 57 0 0
5 28 + 10 = 38 1 28
6 13 2 85
N  200 fi ui  77
fi ui
Average number of branches per plant  A 
N
77
 4
200
77
 4
200
800  77

200
 3  615
 3  62  Approx  .

4. The following table gives the number of children of 150 families in a village
No. of children (x): 0 1 2 3 4 5
No. of families (f): 10 21 55 42 15 7
Find the average number of children per family.
Sol:
Let the assumed mean  A   2
No. of No of ui  xi  A
fi ui
children  xi  families  fi   xi  2
0 10 -2 -20
1 21 -1 -21
3 42 1 42
4 15 2 30
5 7 5 21

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

N  20 fi ui  52
fi ui
Average number of children for family  A 
N
52
 2
150
300  52

150
352

150
 2  35  approx 

5. The marks obtained out of 50, by 102 students in a Physics test are given in the frequency
table below:
Marks(x): 15 20 22 24 25 30 33 38 45
Frequency (f): 5 8 11 20 23 18 13 3 1
Find the average number of marks.
Sol:
Let the assumed mean  A   25
Frequency
Marks  xi  ui  xi  A  xi  25 fi ui
 fi 
15 5 -10 -50
20 8 -5 -40
22 8 -3 -33
24 20 -1 -20
25 23 0 0
30 18 5 90
33 13 8 104
38 3 12 39
45 3 20 20
N  122 fi ui  110
fi ui
Average number of marks  A 
N
110
 25 
102
2550  110

102
2660

102
 26  08  Approx 

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

6. The number of students absent in a class were recorded every day for 120 days and the
information is given in the following frequency table:
No. of students absent (x): 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
No. of days(f): 1 4 10 50 34 15 4 2
Find the mean number of students absent per day.
Sol:
Let the assumed mean  A   3
No. of students ui  xi  A
No. of days f i fi ui
absent xi  xi  3
3 1 -3 -3
1 4 -2 -8
2 10 -1 -10
3 50 0 -10
4 34 1 24
5 15 2 30
6 4 3 12
7 2 4 8
N  120 fi ui  63
fi ui
Mean number of students absent per day  A 
N
63
 3
120
360  63

120
423

120
 2  525
 3  53  Approx 

7. In the first proof reading of a book containing 300 pages the following distribution of
misprints was obtained:
No. of misprints per page (x): 0 1 2 3 4 5
No. of pages (f): 154 95 36 9 5 1
Find the average number of misprints per page.
Sol:
Let the assumed mean  A   2
No. of misprints ui  xi  A
No. of days  fi  fi ui
per page  xi   xi  3

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
0 154 -2 -308
1 95 -1 -95
2 36 0 0
3 9 1 9
4 5 2 1
5 1 3 3
N  300 fi ui  381
fi ui
Average number of mis prints per day  A 
N
381
 2
300
381
 2
300
600  381

300
219

300
 0  73

8. The following distribution gives the number of accidents met by 160 workers in a factory
during a month.
No. of accidents (x): 0 1 2 3 4
No. of workers (f): 70 52 34 3 1
Find the average number of accidents per worker.
Sol:
Let the assumed mean  A   2
No. of workers ui  xi  A
fi ui
No. of Accidents
 fi   xi  3
0 70 -2 -140
1 52 -1 -52
2 34 0 0
3 3 1 3
4 1 2 2
N  100 fi ui  100
Average no of accidents per day workers

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
f i ui
 A
N
187
 x
160
320  187

160
133

160
 0  83

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
9. Find the mean from the following frequency distribution of marks at a test in statistics:
Marks(x): 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
No. of students (f): 15 50 80 76 72 45 39 9 8 6
Sol:
Let the assumed mean  A   25.
No. of students ui  xi  A
Marks  xi  f1ui
 fi   xi  25
5 15 -20 -300
10 50 -15 -750
15 80 -10 -800
20 76 -5 -380
25 72 0 0
30 45 5 225
35 39 10 390
40 9 15 135
45 8 20 160
50 6 25 150
N  400 fi ui  1170
 f i ui
Mean =
N
1170
 25 
400
10000  1170

490
 22  075.

Exercise – 7.3

1. The following table gives the distribution of total household expenditure (in rupees) of
manual workers in a city.
Expenditure Frequency Expenditure Frequency
(in rupees) (x) (fi) (in rupees) (x1) (fi)
100 – 150 24 300 – 350 30
150 – 200 40 350 – 400 22
200 – 250 33 400 – 450 16
250 – 300 28 450 – 500 7
Find the average expenditure (in rupees) per household.
Sol:
Let the assumed mean  A   275.

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Class Mid value xi  275 Frequency


di  xi  275 ui  fi ui
interval  xi  50 fi
100-150 125 -150 -3 24 -12
150-200 175 -100 -2 40 -80
200-250 225 -50 -1 33 -33
250-300 275 0 0 28 0
300-350 325 50 1 30 30
350-400 375 100 2 22 44
400-450 425 150 3 16 48
450-500 475 200 4 7 28
N  200 fi ui  35
We have
A  275, h  50
fi ui
Mean  A  h 
N
35
 275  50 
200
 275  8  75
 266  25

2. A survey was conducted by a group of students as a part of their environment awareness


program, in which they collected the following data regarding the number of plants in 20
houses in a locality. Find the mean number of plants per house.
Number of plants: 0-2 2-4 4-6 6-8 8-10 10-12 12-14
Number of houses: 1 2 1 5 6 2 3
Which method did you use for finding the mean, and why?
Sol:
Let is find class marks  xi  for each internal by using the relation
upper class lim it  lower class lim it
Class mark  xi  
2
Now we may compute xi and fi xi as following
Number of plants Number of house  fi  xi fi xi
02 1 1 1 1  1
24 2 3 23  6
46 1 5 1 5  5
68 5 7 5  7  35
8  10 6 9 6  9  54
10  12 2 11 2 11  22
12  14 3 13 3 13  39
Total 20 162

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
From the table we may observe that
fi  20
fi xi  162
fi xi
Mean x 
fi
162
  8 1
20
So mean number of plants per house is 8 1
We have used for the direct method values xi and fi are very small

3. Consider the following distribution of daily wages of 50 workers of a factory


Daily wages (in Rs). 100 - 120 120 - 140 140 - 160 160 - 180 180 - 200
Number of workers: 12 14 8 6 10
Find the mean daily wages of the workers of the factory by using an appropriate method.
Sol:
Let the assume mean  A   150
Class Mid value xi  150
di  xi  150 ui  Frequency f i fi ui
interval xi 20
100-120 110 -40 -2 12 -24
120-140 130 -20 -1 14 -14
140-160 150 0 0 8 0
160-180 170 20 1 6 6
180-200 190 40 2 10 20
N  50 fi ui  12
We have
N  50, h  20
fi ui
Mean  A  h 
N
12
 150  2qr 
5d
24
 150 
5
 150  4  8
 145  2

4. Thirty women were examined in a hospital by a doctor and the number of heart beats per
minute recorded and summarized as follows. Find the mean heart beats per minute for these
women, choosing a suitable method.
Number of heat 65 - 68 68 - 71 71 - 74 74 - 77 77 - 80 80 - 83 83 -86

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
beats per minute:
Number of women: 2 4 3 8 7 4 2
Sol:
We may find class marks of each interval  xi  by using the relation
Upper class lim it  lower class lim it
xi 
2
Class size of this data = 3
Now taking 75  5 as assumed mean (a) we
May calculate, di , ui , fi ui as following.
Number of Number of xi  755
xi di  xi  75  5 ui  fi ui
heart beats women  xi  h
per minute
65  68 2 66  5 -9 -3 -6
68  71 9 69  5 -6 -2 -8
71  74 3 72  5 -3 -1 -3
74  77 8 75  5 0 0 0
75  80 7 78  5 3 1 7
80  83 4 81 5 2  3 6 2 8
83  86 2 84  5 9 3 6
30 4
Now we may observe from table that fi  30; fi ui  4
 f u   4 
Mean  x   9r  i i   h  75  5     3
 fi   30 
 75  5  0  4  75  9
So mean hear beats per minute for those women are 75  9 beats per minute.

Find the mean of each of the following frequency distributions: (5 − 14)


5. Class interval: 0 - 6 6 - 12 12 - 18 18 - 24 24-30
Frequency: 6 8 10 9 7
Sol:
Let a assume mean be 15
Class Mid-value x  15
di  xi  15 ui  i fi fi ui
interval x i 6
06 3 -12 -2 6 -12
6  12 9 -6 -1 2 -8
12  18 15 0 0 10 0
18  24 21 6 1 9 9
24  30 27 18 2 7 14
N  40 3
A  15, h  5

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
fi xi
Mean  A  h
N
3
 15  6 
40
 15  0  45
 15  0  45
 15  45

6. Class interval: 50 - 70 70 - 90 90 - 110 110 - 130 130 - 150 150 – 170


Frequency: 18 12 13 27 8 22
Sol:
Let the a assumed mean be 100
Class Mid-value xi  15
di  xi  15 ui  fi fi ui
interval xi 6
50  70 60 -40 -2 18 -36
70  90 80 -20 -1 12 -12
90  110 100 0 0 10 0
110  130 120 20 1 27 27
130  150 140 65 3 22 66
61
A  100,  20
fi ui
Mean  A  h
n
61
 100  20 
100
 100  12  2
 112  2

7. Class interval: 0-8 8- 16 16- 24 24-32 32-40


Frequency: 6 7 10 8 9
Sol:
Let the assumed mean  A   20
Class Mid-value xi  15
di  xi  15 ui  fi fi ui
interval xi 6
08 4 -16 -2 6 -12
8  16 12 -8 -1 7 -17
16  24 20 0 0 10 0
24  32 28 8 8 8 8
32  40 36 16 2 9 18
N  40 fi ui  7

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
We have
A  20, N  40
fi ui
Mean A  hx
N
7
 20  8v
40
 20  1 4
 21 4

8. Class interval: 0-6 6- 12 12- 18 18-24 24-30


Frequency: 7 5 10 12 6
Sol:
Let the assume mean  A   15
Class Mid-value xi  15 Frequency
di  xi  15 ui  fi ui
interval xi 6 fi
06 3 -12 -2 -1 -14
6  12 9 -6 -1 5 -5
12  18 15 0 0 10 0
18  24 21 6 1 12 12
24  30 27 12 2 6 12
N  40 fi ui  5
We have A  90
A  15, h  6
fi ui
Mean, A  h 
N
5
 15  6 
40
 15  0  7
 15  75

9. Class interval: 0- 10 10- 20 20-30 30-40 40-50


Frequency: 9 12 15 10 14
Sol:
Let the assumed mean  A   25
Class Mid-value xi  15 Frequency
di  xi  15 ui  fi ui
interval xi 6 fi
0  10 5 -20 -2 9 -18
10  20 15 -10 -1 10 -12

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
20  30 25 0 0 15 0
30  40 35 10 1 10 10
40  50 45 20 2 14 28
N  60 fi ui  8
We have A  25, h  10
fi ui
Mean  A  h
N
8
 25  19 
60
8
 25 
6
4
 25 
3
 26  333

10. Class interval: 0-8 8- 16 16-24 24-32 32 -40


Frequency: 5 9 10 8 8
Sol:
Let the assumed mean  A   20
Class Mid-value xi  15 Frequency
di  xi  15 ui  fi ui
interval xi 6 fi
08 4 -16 -2 5 -10
86 12 -8 -1 9 -9
16  24 20 0 0 10 0
24  32 28 8 1 8 8
32  40 36 16 2 8 16
N  40 fi ui  5
We have
A  20, h  18
fi ui
Mean  A  h 
N
5
 20  8 
40
 20  1
 21

11. Class interval: 0-8 8- 16 16- 24 24-32 32-40


Frequency: 5 6 4 3 2
Sol:

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Let the assumed  A   20.
Class Mid-value xi  15 Frequency
di  xi  15 ui  fi ui
interval xi 6 fi
08 4 -16 5 -2 -10
8  16 12 -8 6 -1 -6
16  24 20 0 4 0 0
24  32 28 8 3 1 3
32  40 36 16 2 8 4
N  20 f i ui  9
We have
A  20, h  18
fi ui
Mean  A  h 
N
9
 20  8 
20
 20  3  6
 16  4

12. Class interval: 10-30 30-50 50-70 70-90 90-110 110- 130
Frequency: 5 8 12 20 3 2
Sol:
Let the assume mean  A   60
Class Mid-value xi  15 Frequency
di  xi  15 ui  fi ui
interval xi 6 fi
10  30 20 -40 -2 5 -10
30  50 40 -20 -1 8 -8
50  70 60 0 0 12 0
70  90 80 20 1 20 20
90  110 100 40 2 3 6
110  130 120 60 3 2 6
N  50 fi ui  14
We have
A  60, h  25
fi ui
Mean  A  h 
N
14
 60  20 
50
 60  5  6
 65  6

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
13. Class interval: 25-35 35-45 45-55 55 - 65 65 – 75
Frequency: 6 10 8 12 4
Sol:
Let the assume mean  A   50
Class Mid-value xi  15 Frequency
di  xi  15 ui  fi ui
interval xi 6 fi
25  35 30 -20 -2 6 -12
35  45 40 -10 -1 10 -10
45  55 50 0 0 8 0
55  65 60 10 0 12 12
65  75 70 20 0 4 8
N  40 f i ui  2
We have
A  50, h  10
fi ui
Mean  A  h
N
 2 
 50  14  
 4b 
 50  0  5
 49  5

14. Classes: 25 -29 30-34 35-39 40-44 45-49 50-54 55-59


Frequency: 14 22 16 6 5 3 4
Sol:
Let the assume mean  A   42
Class Mid-value xi  15 Frequency
di  xi  15 ui  fi ui
interval xi 6 fi
25  29 27 -15 -3 14 -42
30  34 32 -10 -2 22 -44
35  39 37 -5 -1 16 -16
40  44 42 0 0 0 0
45  49 47 5 1 5 5
50  54 52 10 2 3 6
55  59 57 15 3 4 12
N  10 fi ui  79
We have
A  42, h  5
fi ui
Mean  A  h 
N

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
79
 42  5x
70
5  79
 42 
70
79
 42 
14
588  79

14
 36  357

15. For the following distribution, calculate mean using all suitable methods:
Size of item: 1 -4 4-9 9- 16 16-27
Frequency: 6 12 26 20
Sol:
By direct method
Class Frequency
Mid-value fi ui
interval fi
1 4 25 6 15
49 65 12 18
9  16 12  5 26 325
16  27 21 5 20 430
N  64  f i i  848
u
f x
Mean  i i  A
N
848

64
 13  25
By assuming mean method
Let the assumed mean  A   65

Class Mid-value l5  x;  A Frequency


fi ui
interval  xi   xi  65  fi 
1 4 25 -4 6 -24
49 65 0 12 0
9  16 12  5 6 26 156
16  27 21 5 15 20 300
N  64 fi ui  432
fi ui
Mean  A 
N
432
 65 
64

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
432
 65 
64
 13  25

16. The weekly observations on cost of living index in a certain city for the year 2004 - 2005
are given below. Compute the weekly cost of living index.
Cost of living Number of Cost of living Number of
Index Students Index Students
1400 – 1500 5 1700 – 1800 9
1500 – 1600 10 1800 – 1900 6
1600 – 1700 20 1900 – 2000 2

Sol:
Let the assume mean  A  1650

Class Mid-value di  xi  A xi  15 Frequency


ui  fi ui
interval xi  xi  1650 6 fi
1400-1500 1450 -200 -2 5 -10
1500-1600 1550 -100 -1 0 -10
1600-1700 1650 0 0 20 0
1700-1800 1750 100 1 9 9
1800-1900 1950 300 3 2 6
N  52 fi ui  7
We have
A  16, h  100
fi ui
Mean  A  h 
N
175
 1650  100 
13
21450  175

13
21625

13
 1663  46

17. The following table shows the marks scored by 140 students in an examination of a certain
paper:
Marks: 0- 10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50
Number of students: 20 24 40 36 20
Calculate the average marks by using all the three methods: direct method, assumed mean
deviation and shortcut method.

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
Direct method
Class Frequency
Mid-value fi ui
interval fi
0-10 5 20 100
10-20 15 20 350
20-30 25 40 1000
30-40 35 30 1260
40-50 45 20 900
N  140 8620
fi xi
Mean 
N
3650

140
 25  857
Assume mean method : Let the assumed mean  25
f u
Mean  A  i i
N
Class u;  xi  A fi ui
Mid-value f
interval
0-10 5 -20 20 -400
10-20 15 -10 24 -240
20-30 25=A 0 40 0
30-40 35 10 36 360
40-50 45 20 20 400
N  145 120
f u
Mean  A  i i
N
120
 25 
145
 25  0  867
 25  857
Step deviation method
Let the assumed mean  A   25

Class Mid-value d i  xi  A xi  25 Frequency


ui  fi ui
interval xi  xi  25 10 fi
0-10 5 -20 -2 20 -40
10-20 15 -10 -1 24 -24
20-30 25 0 0 40 0
30-40 35 10 1 36 36
40-50 45 20 2 20 40

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

N  140 fi ui  12
fi ui
Mean  A  h
N
120
 25  10  25  0  857
140
 25  857

18. The mean of the following frequency distribution is 62.8 and the sum of all the frequencies
is 50. Compute the missing frequencyf1 andf2.
Class: 0 - 20 20 - 40 40 - 60 60 - 80 80 - 100 100 – 120
Frequency: 5 f1 10 f2 7 8
Sol:
Class Frequency
Mid-value fi ui
interval fi
0-20 10 5 50
20-40 30 f1 20 30 f1
40-60 50 10=10 500
60-80 70 f2 70 f 2
80-100 90 7 630
100-120 110 8 880
N  50 f u
i i  30 f1  70 f 2  3060

Given
Sum of frequency  50
 5  f1  50  f 2  7  8  50
 f1  f 2  50  5  10  7  8
 f1  f 2  20
 3 f1  3 f 2  60 ...... 1  multiply it by '3'
And mean  62  8
f x
 i i  628
N
30 f1  70 f 2  2060
  62  8
50
 30 f1  70 f 2  3140  2060
 30 f1  70 f 2  1080
 3 f1  7 f 2  108 .......  2   Divide it by 10 
Subtract equation (1) from equation (2)
 3 f1  7 f 2  3 f1  3 f 2  108  60

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
 4 f 2  48
 f 2  12
Put value of f 2 in equation (1)
 3 f1  3 12  60
 3 f1  60  36  24
24
 f1  8
3
f1  8 and f 2  12

19. The following distribution shows the daily pocket allowance given to the children of a
multistorey building. The average pocket allowance is Rs 18.00. Find out the missing
frequency.
Class interval: 11-13 13-15 15-17 17-19 19-21 21-23 23-25
Frequency: 7 6 9 13 - 5 4
Sol:
Given mean = 18, let missing frequency be v
Class Frequency
Mid-value fi ui
interval fi
11-13 12 7 84
13-15 14 6 88
15-17 16 9 144
17-19 18 13 234
19-21 20 x 20x
21-23 22 5 110
23-25 14 4 56
N  44  v 752+20x
fi xi
Mean 
N
752  20 x
1 
44  x
792  18 x  752  20 x
2 x  40
x  20

20. If the mean of the following distribution is 27, find the value of p.
Class: 0 - 10 10 - 20 20 - 30 30 - 40 40-50
Frequency: 8 p 12 13 10
Sol:
Class fi ui
Mid-value Frequency
interval

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 xi  fi
0-10 5 8 40
10-20 15 P 152
20-30 25 12 300
30-40 35 13 455
40-50 45 16 450
N  43  P fi xi  1245  15P
Given
Mean  27
f x
 i i  27
N
1245  15P
  27
43  P
 1245  15P  1245  161  27 P
 27 P  15P  1245  1161
 12 P  84
84
P 7
12

21. In a retail market, fruit vendors were selling mangoes kept in packing boxes. These boxes
contained varying number of mangoes. The following was the distribution of mangoes
according to the number of boxes.
Number of mangoes: 50 - 52 53 - 55 56 - 58 59 - 61 62 -64
Number of boxes: 15 110 135 115 25
Find the mean number of mangoes kept in a packing box. Which method of finding the
mean did you choose?
Sol:
Number of mangoes Number of boxes  fi 
50-52 15
53-55 110
56-58 135
59-61 115
62-64 25
We may observe that class internals are not continuous
1
There is a gap between two class intervals. So we have to add from lower class limit of
2
each interval and class mark (xi) may be obtained by using the relation
Upper class lim it  lower class lim it
xi
2
Class size (h) of this data = 3

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now, taking 57 as assumed mean  a  we may calculate
di , ui , f i , ui as follows.
x; 57
Class interval fi xi di  4  57 ui  fi ui
h
49  5  52  5 15 51 -6 -2 -30
52  5  56  5 110 54 -3 -1 -110
55  5  58  5 135 57 0 0 0
58  5  61 5 115 60 3 1 115
61 5  64  5 25 63 6 2 50
Total 400 -25
Now, we have
fi  400
fi ui  25
 f u 
Mean  4     i i   h
 f i 
 45 
 57   3
 400 
3
 57 
16
 57  0 1875
 57  1875
 57 19
Clearly mean number of mangoes kept in packing box is 57 19
22. The table below shows the daily expenditure on food of 25 households in a locality
Daily expenditure (in Rs): 100 - 150 150 - 200 200 - 250 250 - 300 300 -350
Number of households: 4 5 12 2 2
Find the mean daily expenditure on food by a suitable method.
Sol:
We may calculate class mark  xi  for each interval by using the relation
Upper class lim it  lower class lim it
x1 
2
Class size  50
Now, taking 225 as assumed mean can we may calculated di , u i , fi , ui as follows
Daily expenditure xi  225
fi xi di  xi  225 ui  . fi ui
(in Rs) h
100-150 4 125 -100 -2 -8
150-200 5 175 -50 -1 -5
200-250 12 225 0 0 0

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
250-300 2 275 50 1 2
300-350 2 325 100 2 4
-7
Now we may observe that
fi  25
fi xi  7
 f u 
Mean  x   a   i i   h
 f 
 7 
 225     50
 25 
 225  14  211
So, mean daily expenditure on food is RS 211

23. To find out the concentration of SO2 in the air (in parts per million, i.e., ppm), the data was
collected for 30 localities in a certain city and is presented below:
Concentration of SO2 (in ppm) Frequency
0.00-0.04 4
0.04-0.08 9
0.08-0.12 9
0.12-0.16 2
0.16-0.20 4
0.20-0.24 2
Find the mean concentration of SO2 in the air.
Sol:
We may find a class marks for each interval by using the relation
Upper class lim it  Lower class lim it
x
2
Class size of this data  0  04
Now, taking 0 14 assumed mean can we use may calculated d,u,fu as following
Class
Concentration SO2
Frequency interval ui  xi  044 vi fi ui
(in ppm)  xi 
0  00  0  04 4 0  02 0 12 -3 -112
0  04  0  08 9 0  06 0  08 -2 -8
0  08  0 12 1 0 10 0  04 -1 -9
0 12  0 12 2 0 14 0 0 0
0 16  0  20 4 0 18 0  04 1 7
0  20  0  24 2 0  22 0  08 2 4
Total 30 -31
From the table we may observe that

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
fi  30
fi ui  31
 f u 
Mean x  9   i i   h
 f i 
 31 
 0 14     0  04 
 30 
 0 14  0  04133
 0  099PPm
So, mean concentration of SO2 in the air is 0  099PPm

24. A class teacher has the following absentee record of 40 students of a class for the whole
term. Find the mean number of days a student was absent.
Number of days: 0-6 6 - 10 10 - 14 14 - 20 20 -28 28 - 38 38 - 40
Number of students: 11 10 7 4 4 3 1
Sol:
We may find class mark of each interval by using the relation
Upper class lim it  Lower class lim it
xi 
2
Now, taking 16 as assumed mean  a  we may
Calculate d and f i d i as follows
Number of Number of students
xi a  xi  fi fi di
days fi
06 11 3 -13 -143
6-10 10 8 -8 -280
10-14 7 12 -4 -28
14-20 7 16 0 0
20-28 8 24 8 32
28-36 3 33 17 51
30-40 1 39 23 23
Total 70 -145
Now we may observe that
fi  40
fi di  145
 f d 
Mean  x   a   i i 
 f i 
 145 
 16     16  3  623
 40 
 12  38

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
So, mean number of days is 12, 38 days for which student was absent

25. The following table gives the literacy rate (in percentage) of 35 cities. Find the mean
literacy rate.
Literacy rate (in %): 45 - 55 55 - 65 65 - 75 75 - 85 85 -95
Number of cities: 3 10 11 8 3
Sol:
We may find class marks by using the relation
Upper class lim it  Lower class lim it
xi 
2
Class size  h  for this data = 10
Now taking 70 as assumed mean  a  wrong
Calculate d i , ui and f i , ui as follows

Library rate Number of di


xi di  xi 30 xi  fi ui
 in ri  cities  fi  10
45-55 3 10 -20 -2 -6
55-65 10 60 -10 -1 -10
65-75 11 70 0 0 0
75-85 8 80 10 1 8
85-95 3 90 20 2 6
Total 35 -2
Now we may observe that
f i  35
 f i ui   2
 f u 
Mean  x   a   i i  h
 ui 
 2 
 70   10
 35 
4
 70
7
 70  0  57  69  43
So, mean literacy rate is 69  437.

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Exercise – 7.4

1. Following are the lives in hours of 15 pieces of the components of aircraft engine. Find the
median:
715, 724, 725, 710, 729, 745, 694, 699, 696, 712, 734, 728, 716, 705, 719.
Sol:
Lives in hours of is pieces are
= 715, 724, 725, 710, 729, 745, 694, 699, 696, 712, 734, 728, 719, 705, 705, 719.
Arrange the above data in a sending order
694, 696, 699, 705, 710, 712, 715, 716, 719, 721, 725, 728, 729, 734, 745
N  15  odd 

 N 1 
th

Median    term
 2 
 15  1 
th

  term
 2 
 8th term
 716

2. The following is the distribution of height of students of a certain class in a certain city:
Height (in cm): 160 - 162 163 - 165 166 - 168 169 - 171 172 -174
No. of students: 15 118 142 127 18
Find the median height.
Sol:
Class interval Class interval Class interval Cumulative
(inclusive) (inclusive) Frequency frequency
160-162 159.2  162  5 15 15
163-164 162  5  165  5 118 133 (F)
166-168 165  5  168  5 142(f) 275
169-171 168  5  168  5 127 402
172  174 171 5  174  5 18 420
N  420
We have
N  420
N 420
  210
2 2
N
The cumulative frequency just greater than is 275 then 165  5 168  5 is the median
2
class such, that

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
l  165  5, f  142, F  133 and h  168  5  105  5  3
N
F
Mean  l  2 h
f
10  2
 165  5   10
142
17  4
 165  7 
142
 65  5  1  63
 168 13

3. Following is the distribution of I.Q. of loo students. Find the median I.Q.
I.Q.: 55-64 65-74 75-84 85-94 95-104 105-114 115-124 125-134 135-144
No of Students: 1 2 9 22 33 22 8 2 1
Sol:
Class interval Class interval Cumulative
Frequency
(inclusive) (exclusive) frequency
55-64 54  5  64  5 1 1
65-74 64  5  74  5 2 3
75-84 74  5  84  5 9 12
85-94 84  5  94  5 22 34(f)
95-104 94  5 104  5 33(f) 37
105-114 104  5  114  5 22 89
115-124 114  5  124  5 8 97
125-134 124  5  134  5 2 99
135-144 134  5  1343 1 100
N  100
We have
N  100
N 100
  50
2 2
N
The cumulative frequency just greater than is 67 then the median class is
2
94  5  104  5  94  5  10
N
F
Mean  l  2 h
f
50  34
 94  5  10
33

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
16 10
 94  5   94  5  4  88  99  35
33
4. Calculate the median from the following data:
Rent (in Rs.): 15-25 25-35 35-45 45-55 55-65 65-75 75-85 85-95
No. of Houses: 8 10 15 25 40 20 15 7
Sol:
Cumulative
Class interval Frequency
frequency
15-25 8 8
25-35 10 18
35-45 15 33(f)
45-55 25 58(f)
55-65 40(f) 28
65-75 20 38
75-85 15 183
85-95 9 140
N  110
We have N  140
N 140
 3
2 2
The cumulative frequency just greater than  is 98 then media class is 55-65 such that
l  55, f  40, f  58, h  65  55  10
N
f
Median  l  2 h
f
70  78
 55  40 10
1
12 10
 55 
40
 55  3
 58
Median = 58

5. Calculate the median from the following data:


Marks below: 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
No. of students: 15 35 60 84 96 127 198 250
Sol:
Marks No of Class Cumulative
Frequency
below students interval frequency

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
10 15 0-10 15 15
20 35 10-20 20 35
30 60 20-30 25 60
40 84 30-40 24 84
50 96 40-50 12 96(f)
60 127 50-60 37(f) 127
70 198 60-70 71 198
80 250 70-8 52 250
N  250
We have N  250
N 250
  12
2 2
N
The cumulative frequency just greater than is 127 then median class is 50-60 such that
2
l  50, f  31, F  96, h  60  50  10
N
F
Median  L  2 h
f
125  96
 50  10
31
29 10
 50 
31
155  290

31
445

31
 59  35

6. An incomplete distribution is given as follows:


Variable: 0 - 10 10 - 20 20 - 30 30 - 40 40 – 50 50 - 60 60 - 70
Frequency: 10 20 ? 40 ? 25 15
You are given that the median value is 35 and the sum of all the frequencies is 170. Using
the median formula, fill up the missing frequencies.
Sol:
Cumulative
Class interval Frequency
frequency
0-10 10 10
10-20 20 30
20-30 f1 30+ fi  F 

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

30-40 40(F) 70+ f1


40-50 f2 70+ f1  f 2
50-60 25 95  f1  f 2
60-70 15 40  f1  f 2
N  170
Given median  35
The median class  30  40
l  30, h  40  30  10, f  40, F  30  f1
N
F
Median l  2 h
F
85   30  f1 
35  30  10
40
55  f1
5
4
 F1  55  20  25
Given
Sum of frequencies = 170
 10  20  f1  40  f 2  25  15  170
 10  20  35  40  f 2  25  15  170
 f 2  170  145
 f 2  25
 f1  35 and f 2  25

7. Calculate the missing frequency from the following distribution, it being given that the
median of the distribution is 24.
Age in years: 0 - 10 10 - 20 20 - 30 30 - 40 40-50
No. of persons: 5 25 ? 18 7
Sol:
Class interval Frequency Cumulative frequency
0-10 5 5
10-20 25 30(F)
20-30 x(f) 30 + x
30-40 18 48 + x
40-50 7 55 + x
N  170
Given
Median = 24
Then median class  20  30

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
l  20, h  30  20, F  30
N
f
Median  l  2 h
f
55  x
 30
 24  20  2  30
x
 55  x 
 4 x  20   30  10
 2 
 4 x  275  5v  300
 4 x  5 x  25
  x  25
 x  25
Missing frequency  25

8. Find the missing frequencies and the median for the following distribution if the mean is
1.46.
No. of accidents: 0 1 2 3 4 5 Total
Frequency (No. of days): 46 ? ? 25 10 5 200
Sol:
No. of
No. of days (f) fx
accidents (x)
0 46 0
1 x x
2 y 2y
3 2s 75
4 10 40
5 5 25
N  200 fi xi  x  2 y  140
Given, N  200
 46  x  y  25  10  5  5  2n
 x  y  200  46  25  10  0
 x  y  114 ....  i 
And mean  1 46

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
fx
  1.46
N
x  2 y  140
  1 46
200
 x  2 y  140  292
 x  2 y  292  40
 x  2 y  152 ........  2 
Subtract equation (1) from equation (2)
 x  2 y  x  y  152  114
 y  38
Put the value of y in (1), we have x  114  38  76

No. of Cumulative
No. of days
accidents frequency
0 46 46
1 76 122
2 38 160
3 25 185
4 10 195
5 5 200
N  200
We have
N  200
N 200
  100
2 2
N
The cumulative frequency just more than is 122 then the median is 1.
2

9. An incomplete distribution is given below:


Variable: 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80
Frequency: 12 30 - 65 - 25 18
You are given that the median value is 46 and the total number of items is 230.
(i) Using the median formula fill up missing frequencies.
(ii) Calculate the AM of the completed distribution.
Sol:
(i)
Cumulative
Class interval Frequency
frequency
10-20 12 12

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
20-30 30 42
30-40 x 42  x  F 
40-50 65(f) 1107  x
50-60 y 107  x  y
60-70 25 132x  x  y
70-80 18 150  x  y
N  200
Given median  46
Then, median as  40  50
l  40, h  50  40  10, f  65, F  42  x
N
F
median  l  2 h
f
115   42  x 
 46  40   10
65
6  65
  73  x
10
 39  73  x
 x  73  39
 x  34
Given N  230
 12  30  34  65  y  25  18  230
 184  y  230
 y  230  184  46
(ii)
Class interval Mid value Frequency fx
10-20 15 12 180
20-30 25 30 750
30-40 35 34 1190
40-50 45 65 2925
50-60 55 46 2530
60-70 65 25 1625
70-80 75 18 1650
N  270 fx  10550
fx
Mean 
N
10550

250
 4  87

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
10. The following table gives the frequency distribution of married women by age at marriage:
Age (in years) Frequency Age (in years) Frequency
15-19 53 40-44 9
20-24 140 45-49 5
25-29 98 50-54 3
30-34 32 55-59 3
35-39 12 60 and above 2
Calculate the median and interpret the results
Sol:
Class interval Class interval Cumulative
Frequency
(exclusive) (inclusive) frequency
15-19 14  5 19  5 53 53(F)
20-24 19  5  24  5 140(f) 193
25-29 24  5  29  5 98 291
30-34 29  5  34  5 32 393
35-39 34  5  39  5 12 335
40-44 39  5  44  5 9 344
45-49 44  5  49  5 5 349
50-54 49  5  54  5 3 352
54-59 554  5  59  5 3 355
60 and above 59  5 and above 2 357
N  357
N  357
N 35
  178  5
2 2
N
The cumulative frequency just greater than is 193, then the median class is 19.5-24.5
2
such that
l  19  5, f  140. f  53, h  24  5  19  5  5
N
F
Median  l  2 h
f
178  5  53
Median  19  5   5  23  98
140
Nearly half the a women were married between ages 15 and 25.

11. If the median of the following frequency distribution is 28.5 find the missing frequencies:
Class interval: 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 Total
Frequency: 5 f1 20 15 f2 5 60
Sol:

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Cumulative
Class interval Frequency
frequency
0-10 5 5
10-20 f1 5  f1  F 
20-30 20  F  25  F1
30-40 15 40  f1
40-50 f2 40  f1  f 2
50-60 5 45  f1  f 2
N  60
Given
Median  28  5
Then, median class  20  30
l  20, f  20, F  5  fx, h  30  20  10
N
F
Median  l  2 h
f
30   5  f1 
 28  5  201   10
20
30  5  f1
 28  5  20   10
20
25  f1
 85 
2
 f1  25  17
 f1  8
Given sum of frequency = 60
 5  f1  20  15  f 2  5  60
 5  8  20  15  f 2  5  60
 f2  7
f1  8; f 2  7

12. The median of the following data is 525. Find the missing frequency, if it is given that there
are 100 observations in the data:
Class interval Frequency Class interval Frequency
0-100 2 500-600 20
100-200 5 600-700 f2
200-300 f1 700-800 9
300-400 12 800-900 7

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
400-500 17 900-1000 4
Sol:

Class interval Frequency Cumulative frequency

0-100 2 2
100-200 5 7
200-300 f1 7  f1
300-400 12 19  f1
400-500 17 36  f1  F 
500-600 20(f) 56  f1
600-700 f2 56  f1  f 2
700-800 9 65  f1  f 2
800-900 7 75  f1  f 2
900-1000 4 76  f1  f 2
N  100
Given media  525
Then media class  500  600
l  500, f  20, f  36  f1 , h  600  500  100
N
F
Median  l  2 h
f
50   36  f1 
 525  500  100
20
50  36  f1
 525  500  100
20
 25  14  f1  5
 5 f1  45  f1  9
Given sum of frequencies  100
 2  5  f1  12  17  20  f 2  9  7  4  100
 2  5  9  12  17  20  f 2  9  17  4  100
 86  f 2  100  f 2  15
 f1  9; f 2  15

13. If the median of the following data is 32.5, find the missing frequencies.
Class interval: 0- 10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 Total
Frequency: f1 5 9 12 f2 3 2 40
Sol:

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Class interval Frequency Cumulative frequency


0-10 f1 f1
10-20 5 5  f1
20-30 9 14  f1  f 
30-40 12(f) 26  f1
40-50 f2 26  f1  f 2
50-60 3 29  f1  f 2
60-70 2 31  f1  f 2
N  40
Given
Median  32  5
The median class  90  40
l  30  40  30  10, f  12, F  14  f1
N
F
Median  1  2 h
f
20  14  f1 
 32  5  30  10
12
6  f1
 25  5  15   6  81  5
6
15
 3  6  f1   6  f1
5
 f1  3
Given sum of frequencies = 40
 3  5  9  12  f 2  3  2  40
 34  f 2  40
 f2  6
 f1  3; f 2  6

14. A survey regarding the height (in cm) of 51 girls of X of a school was conducted and the
following data was obtained:
(i) Marks No. of students (ii) Marks No. of students
Less than 10 0 More than 150 0
Less than 30 10 More than 140 12
Less than 50 25 More than 130 27
Less than 70 43 More than 120 60
Less than 90 65 More than 110 105

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Less than 110 87 More than 100 124
Less than 130 96 Morethan90 141
Less than 150 100 More than 80 150
Sol:
(i)
Marks No. of students Class internal Frequency Cumulative frequency
Less than 10 0 0-10 0 0
Less than 30 10 10-30 10 10
Less than 50 25 30-50 15 25
Less than 70 43 50-70 18 43(F)
Less than 90 65 70-090 22(f) 65
Less than 110 87 90-110 22 87
Less than 130 96 110-130 9 96
Less than 150 100 130-150 8 100
N  100
We have N  100
N 100
  60
2 2
N
The commutative frequencies just greater than is 65 then median class is 70-90 such
2
that l  90, f  22, f  43, h  90  70  20
N
F
Median  l  2 h
f
50  43
 70   20
22
7  20
 70 
22
50  43
 70   20
22
7  20
 70 
22
 70  6  36
 76  36
(ii)
Marks No. of students Class internal Frequency Cumulative frequency
Less than 80 150 80-90 9 9
Less than 90 141 90-100 17 26
Less than 100 124 100-110 19 45(F)
Less than 110 105 110-120 45(f) 90
Less than 120 60 120-130 33 123

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Less than 130 27 130-140 45 138
Less than 140 12 150-160 0 150
Less than 150 0 150-160 0 150
N  150
We have N  150
N 150
 7
2 2
N
The commutative frequencies just greater than is 90 then median class is 110-120 such
2
that l  110, f  45, F  45, h  120  110  10
N
F
Median  l  2 h
f
75  45
 110   10
45
30 10
 110 
45
 110  6  67
 116  67.

15. A survey regarding the height (in cm) of 51 girls of class X of a school was conducted and
the following data was obtained:
Height in cm Number of Girls
Less than 140 4
Less than 145 11
Less than 150 29
Less than 155 40
Less than 160 46
Less than l65 51
Find the median height.
Sol:
To calculate the median height, we need to find the class intervals and their corresponding
frequencies
The given distribution being of thee less than type 140, 145, 150,…..,165 give the upper
limits of the corresponding class intervals. So, the classes should be below 140, 145,
150,….., 160, 165 observe that from the given distribution, we find that there are 4-girls
with height less than 140 is 4. Now there are 4 girls with heights less than 140. Therefore,
the number of girls with height in the interval 140, 145 is 11- 4=7, similarly. The
frequencies of 145 150 is 29-11=18, for 150-155 it is 40-29=11, and so on so our
frequencies distribution becomes.

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Class interval Frequency Cumulative frequency


below 140 4 4
140-145 7 11
145-150 18 29
150-155 11 40
155-160 6 46
160-165 5 51
n 51
Now n  51, So,   25  5. This observation lies in the class 145  150.
2 2
Then,
The lower limit = 145
CFC The cumulative frequency of the class
Preceding 145  150  11
F (The frequency of the median as 145+800=18,
h(class limit) = 5
 25  5  11 
Median  145   5
 18 
725
 145 
18
 145  03
So, the median height of the girls is 149  03cm . This means what the height of be about
50% of the girls in less than this height, and 50% are taller than this height,

16. A life insurance agent found the following data for distribution of ages of 100 policy
holders. Calculate the median age, if policies are only given to persons having age 18 years
onwards but less than 60 years.
Age in years Number of policy holders
Below 20 2
Below 25 6
Below 30 24
Below 35 45
Below 40 78
Below 45 89
Below 50 92
Below 55 98
Below 60 100
Sol:
Here class width is not same. There is no need to adjust the frequencies according to class
intervals. Now given frequencies table is of less than type represented with upper class

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
limits. As policies were given only to persons having age 18 years onwards but less than 60
years we can definite class intervals with their respective cumulative frequencies as below
Age (in years) No of policy planers Cumulative frequency (cr)
18-20 2 2
20-25 6-2=4 5
25-30 24-6=18 24
30-35 45-24=21 45
35-40 78-45=33 78
40-45 89-78=11 89
45-50 92-89=3 92
50-55 98-92=6 92
55-60 100-98=2 100
Total (n)
Now from the table we may observe that n=100 cumulative frequencies (F) just greater
n 100 
than  i.e.,  50  is 78 belonging to interval 35-40
2 2 
So median class = 35-40
Lower limit (1) o median class = 35
Class size (h) = 5
Frequencies (f) of median class = 33
Cumulative frequency (f) off class preceding median class = 45
n 
  cf 
Median    h
2
f
 50  15 
 35   x
 33 
2
 35 
33
 35  76
So, median age is 35  76 years

17. The lengths of 40 leaves of a plant are measured correct to the nearest millimeter, and the
data obtained is represented in the following table:
Length (in mm): 118-126 127-135 136-144 145-153 154-162 163-171 172-180
No. of leaves: 3 5 9 12 5 4 2
Find the mean length of life.
Sol:
The given data is not having continuous class intervals is 1. So, we have to add and subtract
1
 0  5 o upper class limits and lower class limits
2

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now continuous class intervals with respective cumulative frequencies can be presented as
below
Length (in mm) Number of leaves f i Cumulative frequencies
117  5  126  5 3 3
126  5  135  5 5 8  35
13  5  5  144  5 9 17  8  9
14  5  53  5 12 29  17  12
153  5  162  5 5 37  29  5
162  5  171 5 4 34  4  38
171 5  180  5 2 38  2  40
From the table we may observe that cumulative frequencies just greater than
n 40 
 i.e.,  20  is 29 belonging class interval 144  5  153  5
2 2 
Median class  144  5  153  5
Lower limit (L) of median class  144  5
Class size  h   9
Frequencies (f) of median class = 12
Cumulative frequencies (f) of class preceding median class = 17
n 
  cf 
Median  l   h
2
f
 20  27 
 144  5    h
 112 
9
 144  5 
4
 146  75
So, median length is 146  75 mm

18. The following table gives the distribution of the life time of 400 neon lamps:
Lite time: (in hours) Number of lamps1500-2000 14
2000-2500 56
2500-3000 60
3000-3500 86
3500-4000 74
4000-4500 62
4500-5000 48
Find the median life.
Sol:
We can find cumulative frequencies with their respective class intervals as below

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Life time Number of lams  fi  Cumulative frequencies


1500-2000 14 14
2000-2500 56 14+56=70
2500-3000 60 70+50=130
3000-3500 86 130+86=216
3500-4000 74 216+74=290
4000-4500 62 290+62=352
4500-5000 48 352+48=400
Total 420
n 400 
Now we may observe that cumulative frequencies just greater 430 x  i.e.,  200  is
2 2 
216 belonging to class interval 3000  3500
Median class 3000  3500
Lower limit 1 of median class = 3000
Frequencies (f) of median class = 86
Cumulative frequencies  cf  of class preceding
Median class  130
Class size = 500
N 
 2  c. f   200  130 
Median  l     h  3000     500
 f   86 
 
70  500
 3000   3406  98 hours
86
So, median life time is 3406  98 hours

19. The distribution below gives the weight of 30 students in a class. Find the median weight of
students:
Weight (in kg): 40-45 45-50 50-55 55-60 60-65 65-70 70-75
No. of students: 2 3 8 6 6 3 2
Sol:
We may find cumulative frequencies with their respective class internals as below
Weight in (kg) 40-45 45-50 50-55 55-60 60-65 65-70 70-75
Number of
2 3 8 6 6 3 2
students (f)
cf 2 5 13 19 25 28 30
n 30 
Cumulative frequencies just great class interval er than  i.e.,  15  is 19, belonging to
2 2 
class interval 55-60

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Median class  55  60
Lower limit (1) of media class = 55
Frequency of median class = 6
Cumulative frequencies y(f) of median class = 13
Class 55  h   5
 n cf 
Median  1     h
2 f 
 15  13 
 55   5
 6 
10
 55 
6
 56  666
So, median weight is 56  67kg

Exercise – 7.5

1. Find the mode of the following data:


(i) 3,5,7,4,5,3,5,6,8,9,5,3,5,3,6,9,7,4
(ii) 3, 3, 7, 4, 5, 3, 5, 6, 8, 9, 5, 3, 5, 3, 6, 9, 7,4
(iii) 15, 8, 26, 25, 24, 15, 18, 20, 24, 15, 19, 15
Sol:
(i)
Value (x) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Frequency (f) 4 2 5 2 2 1 2
Mode = 5 because it occurs maximum number of times
(ii)
Value (x) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Frequency (f) 5 2 4 2 2 1 2
Mode = 3 because it occurs maximum number of times
(iii)
Value (x) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Frequency (f) 1 4 1 1 2 1 1
Mode = 15 because it occurs maximum number of times

2. The shirt sizes worn by a group of 200 persons, who bought the shirt from a store, are as
follows:
Shirt size: 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
Number of persons: 15 25 39 41 36 17 15 12
Find the model shirt size worn by the group.

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
Shirt size 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
Frequency (f) 15 25 39 41 36 17 15 12
Model shirt size = 40 because it occurs maximum number of times

3. Find the mode of the following distribution.


(i) Class-interval: 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80
Frequency: 5 8 7 12 28 20 10 10
(ii) Class-interval: 10-15 15-20 20-25 25-30 30-35 35-40
Frequency: 30 45 75 35 25 15
(iii) Class-interval: 25-30 30-35 35-40 40-45 45-50 50-60
Frequency: 25 34 50 42 38 14
Sol:
(i)
Class 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80
interval
No. of 5 8 7 12 18 20 10 10
persons
Here the maximum frequency is 28 then the corresponding class 40 – 50 is the model class
L = 40, h = 50 – 40 = 10, f = 28, f1 = 12, f2 = 20
1 𝑓−𝑓
Mode = 𝐿 + 2𝑓−𝑓 −𝑓 ×ℎ
1 2
28−12
= 40 + 2×28−12 × 10
16×10
= 40 + 24
= 40 + 160 = 46.67
(ii)
Class interval 10-15 15-20 20-25 25-30 30-35 35-40
No. of 30 45 75 35 25 15
persons
Here the maximum frequency is 75 then the corresponding class 20 – 25 is the model class
L = 25, h = 25 – 20 = 5, f = 75, f1 = 45, f2 = 35
1 𝑓−𝑓
Mode = 𝐿 + 2𝑓−𝑓 −𝑓 ×ℎ
1 2
75−45
= 20 + 2×75−45−35 × 5
30×5
= 20 + 70
= 20 + 2.14

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
= 22.14
(iii)
Class interval 25-30 30-35 35-40 40-45 45-50 50-55
No. of 25 34 50 42 38 14
persons
Here the maximum frequency is 28 then the corresponding class 40 – 50 is the model class
L = 35, h = 40 – 35 = 5, f = 50, f1 = 34, f2 = 42
1 𝑓−𝑓
Mode = 𝐿 + 2𝑓−𝑓 −𝑓 ×ℎ
1 2
50−34
= 35 + 2(50)−34−42 × 5
16×5
= 35 +
24
= 35 + 3.33
= 38.33

4. Compare the modal ages of two groups of students appearing for an entrance test:
Age (in years): 16-18 18-20 20-22 22-24 24-26
Group A: 50 78 46 28 23
Group B: 54 89 40 25 17
Sol:
Age in years 16 – 18 18 – 20 20 – 22 22 – 24 24 – 26
Group A 50 78 46 28 23
Group B 54 89 40 25 17
For Group A
Here the maximum frequency is 78, then the corresponding class 18 – 20 is model class
L = 18, h = 20 – 18 = 2, f = 78, f1 = 50, f2 = 46
1 𝑓−𝑓
Mode = 𝐿 + 2𝑓−𝑓 −𝑓 ×ℎ
1 2
78−54
= 18 + 156−50−46 × 2
56
= 18 + 60 = 18 + 0.93
= 18.93 years
For group B
Here the maximum frequency is 89, then the corresponding class 18 – 20 is model class
L = 18, h = 18 +20 = 2, f = 89, f1 = 54, f2 = 40
1 𝑓−𝑓
Mode = 𝐿 + 2𝑓−𝑓 −𝑓 ×ℎ
1 2
78−54
= 18 + 156−54−40 × 5
70
= 18 + 84
= 18 + 0.83

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
= 18.83
Hence the mode of age for the group A is higher than group B

5. The marks in science of 80 students of class X are given below: Find the mode of the
marks obtained by the students in science.
Marks: 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80 80-90 90-100
Frequency: 3 5 16 12 13 20 5 4 1 1
Sol:
Marks 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80 80-90 90-100
Frequen 3 5 16 12 13 20 5 4 1 1
cy
Here the maximum frequency is 20, then the corresponding class 50 – 60 is model class
L = 50, h = 60 – 50 = 10, f = 20, f1 = 13, f2 = 5
1 𝑓−𝑓
Mode = 𝐿 + 2𝑓−𝑓 −𝑓 ×ℎ
1 2
20−13
= 50 + 40−13−5 × 10
7×10
= 50 + 22
= 50 +3.18
= 53.18

6. The following is the distribution of height of students of a certain class in a certain city:
Height (in cm): 160-162 163-165 166-168 169-171 172-174
No. of students: 15 118 142 127 18
Find the average height of maximum number of students.
Sol:
Height(exclusive) 160-162 163-165 166-168 169-171 172-174
Height(inclusive) 159.5-162.5 162.5-165.5 165.5-168.5 168.5-171-.5 171.5-174.5
No. of students 15 118 142 127 18
Here the maximum frequency is 142, then the corresponding class 165.5 – 168.5 is modal
class
L = 165.5, h = 168.5 – 165.5 = 3, f = 142, f1 = 118, f2 = 127
𝑓−𝑓1
Mode = 𝐿 + ×ℎ
2𝑓−𝑓1 −𝑓2
142−118
= 165.5 + 2×142−118−127 × 3
24×3
= 165.5 + 39
= 165.5 + 1.85
= 167.35𝑐𝑚

7. The following table shows the ages of the patients admitted in a hospital during a year:
Age (in years): 5-15 15-25 25-35 35-45 45-55 55-65

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
No. of students: 6 11 21 23 14 5
Find the mode and the mean of the data given above. Compare and interpret the two
measures of central tendency.
Sol:
We may observe compute class marks (xi) as per the relation
𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑠 𝑙𝑖𝑚𝑖𝑡+𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑠 𝑙𝑖𝑚𝑖𝑡
𝑥𝑖 = 2
𝑁𝑜𝑤 𝑡𝑎𝑘𝑖𝑛𝑔 30 𝑎𝑠 𝑎𝑠𝑠𝑢𝑚𝑒𝑑 𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛 (𝑎)𝑤𝑒 𝑚𝑎𝑦 𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑐𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑓1 𝑑1 𝑎𝑠 𝑓𝑜𝑙𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑠
Age (in yrs) No. of patients Class Mark xi 𝑑𝑖 = 𝑥𝑖 − 30 𝑓𝑖 𝑑𝑖
(fi)
5-15 6 10 -20 -120
15-25 11 20 -10 -110
25-35 21 30 0 0
35-45 23 40 10 230
45-55 14 50 20 280
55-65 5 60 60 150
Total 80 430
From the table we may observe that ∑ 𝑓𝑖 = 80
∑ 𝑓𝑖 𝑑𝑖 = 430
∑ 𝑓𝑖 𝑑𝑖
Mean = 𝑎 + ∑ 𝑓𝑖
30
= 30 + (80)
= 30 + 5.375
= 35.38
Clearly mean of this data is 35.38. It represents that on an average the age of patient
admitted to hospital was 35.58 years. As we may observe that maximum class frequency 23
belonging to class interval 35 – 45
So, modal class = 35 – 45
Lower limit (L) of modal class = 35
Frequency (f1) of modal class = 23
Class size (h) = 10
Frequency (f0) of class preceding the modal = 21
Frequency (f2) of class succeeding the modal = 14
0 𝑓−𝑓
Now mode = L + (2𝑓−𝑓 −𝑓 )ℎ
0 2
23−21
= 35 + [2(23)−21−14] × 6
20
= 35 + 11
= 35.81
= 36.8

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
8. The following data gives the information on the observed lifetimes (in hours) of 225
electrical components:
Lifetimes (in hours): 0-20 20-40 40-60 60-80 80-100 100-120
No. of components: 10 35 52 61 38 29
Determine the modal lifetimes of the components.
Sol:
From data as given above we may observe that maximum class frequency 61 belonging to
class interval 60 – 80.
So, modal class 60 – 80
L = 60, h = 20, f0 = 52, f1 = 61, f2 = 38
𝑓1 −𝑓0
Mode = 𝐿 + ( )ℎ
2𝑓−𝑓0 −𝑓2
61−52
= 60 + (2(61)−52−37) 20
9×20 90
= 60 + = 60 + 16 = 60 + 5.625
32
= 65.625

9. The following data gives the distribution of total monthly houshold expenditure of 200
families of a village. Find the modal monthly expenditure of the families. Also, find the
mean monthly expenditure:
Expenditure Frequency Expenditure Frequency
(in Rs.) (in Rs.)
1000-1500 24 3000-3500 30
1500-2000 40 3500-4000 22
2000-2500 33 4000-4500 16
2500-3000 28 4500-5000 7
Sol:
We may observe that the given data the maximum class frequency is 40 belonging to 1500
– 2000 interval. So modal class = 1500 – 2000
L.L (L) = 1500, f. of M.C (𝑓1 ) = 40
Frequency of class preceeding modal class 𝑓0 = 24
Frequency of class succeeding modal class 𝑓2 = 33
Class size (h) = 50
1 0 𝑓 −𝑓
Mode = L +(2𝑓−𝑓 )ℎ
−𝑓 0 2
40−24
= 1500 + [2(40)−24−33] × 500
16
= 1500 + [80−67 × 500]
8000
= 1500 + 23
= 1500 + 347.826
1847.826 = 1847.83

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
So modal class monthly expenditure was Rs. 1847.83
Now we may find class mark as
𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑠 𝑙𝑖𝑚𝑖𝑡+𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑠 𝑙𝑖𝑚𝑖𝑡
Class mark = 2
Class size (h) of given data = 500
Now taking 2750 as assumed mean(a) we may calculate d, 4 and f, 4 as follows.
Expenditure No. of 𝑥𝑖 𝑑𝑖 = 𝑥𝑖 − 4i 𝑓𝑖 4𝑖
In Rs. families 𝑓𝑖 2𝜋0
1000-1500 24 1250 -1500 -3 -72
1500-2000 40 1750 -1000 -2 -80
2000-2500 33 2250 -500 -1 -33
2500-3000 28 2750 0 0 0
3000-3500 30 3250 500 1 30
3500-4000 22 3750 1000 2 44
4000-4500 16 4250 1500 3 48
4500-5000 7 4750 2000 4 28
Total 200 -35

Now from table we may observe that


∑ 𝑓𝑖 4𝑖 = 200
∑ 𝑓𝑖 4𝑖 = −35
∑ 𝑓𝑖 4𝑖
(𝑥̅ ) 𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎 + ( )×ℎ
∑ 𝑓𝑖
−35
(𝑥̅ ) = 2750 + ( ) × 500
200
= 2750 – 87.5
= 2662.5
So mean, monthly expenditure was Rs. 2662.50 ps.

We may observe them the given data the maximum class frequency is 10 belonging to class
interval 30 – 35
So modal class 30 – 35
Class size (h) = 5
Lower limit (L) of modal class = 30
Frequency (𝑓1 ) of modal class 10
Frequency (𝑓0 ) of class preceeding modal class = 9
Frequency (𝑓0 ) of class succeeding modal class = 3
1 0 𝑓 −𝑓
Mode = L +(2𝑓−𝑓 )ℎ
−𝑓 0 2
10−9
= 30 + (30−9−3) 5
5
= 30 + 8
= 30.625

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Mode = 30.6

It represents that most of states 1 UT have a teacher – student ratio as 30.6


Now we may find class marks by using the relation
𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑠 𝑙𝑖𝑚𝑖𝑡 𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑠 𝑙𝑖𝑚𝑖𝑡
Class mark = 2
Now taking 325 as assumed mean (a) we may calculated 𝑑𝑖 4𝑖 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑓𝑖 4𝑖 as following.

10. The following distribution gives the state-wise teacher-student ratio in higher secondary
schools of India. Find the mode and mean of this data. Interpret, the two measures:
Number of students Number of states / Number of students Number of states /
per teacher U.T. per teacher U.T.
15-20 3 35-40 3
20-25 8 40-45 0
25-30 9 45-50 0
30-35 10 50-55 2

Sol:
No. of No. of states 𝑥𝑖 𝑑𝑖 = 𝑥𝑖 − 4i 𝑓𝑖 4𝑖
Students / / U.T. 328
teacher (𝑓𝑖 )
15 – 20 3 17.5 -15 -3 -9
20 – 25 8 22.5 -10 -2 -16
25 – 30 9 27.5 -5 -1 -9
30 – 35 10 32.5 0 0 0
35 – 40 3 37.5 5 1 3
40 – 45 0 42.5 10 2 0
45 – 50 0 47.5 15 3 0
50 – 55 2 52.5 25 4 8
Total 35 -23

∑ 𝑓𝑖 4𝑖
Now mean (𝑥̅ ) = a + ( ∑ 𝑓𝑖
)ℎ
−23
= 32.5 + ( 35 × 5)
23
= 32.5 − 7
= 32.5 – 3.28
= 29.22
So mean of data is 29.2
It represents that on an average teacher.
Student ratio was 29.2

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

11. The given distribution shows the number of runs scored by some top batsmen of the world
in one-day international cricket matches.
Runs scored No. of batsman Runs scored No. of batsman
3000-4000 4 7000-8000 6
4000-5000 18 8000-9000 3
5000-6000 9 9000-10000 1
6000-7000 7 10000-11000 1
Find the mode of the data.
Sol:
From the given data we may observe that maximum class frequently is 18 belonging to
class interval 4000 – 5000
So modal class 4000 – 5000
Lower limit (1) of model class = 4000
Frequently  f1  of class preceding modal class= 4
Frequently  f 2  of class succeeding modal class = 9
Frequently of modal case  fi   18
Class size = 1000
 1  fn 
Now mode  1    h
 2  f0  f2 
 18  4 
 4000  1000
 2 18  4  9 
 
14000
4000   4608  695
23
So, mode of given data is 4608 7 Runs

12. A student noted the number of cars passing through a spot on a road for loo periods each of
3 minutes and summarized it in the table given below. Find the mode of the data:
Sol:
From the given data we may observe that maximum class internal frequency is 200
belonging to modal class 40  50
l  40, f1  20, f 0  12, f 2  11, h  10
 f  f0 
Mode = 1   h
 2 f  f 0  f 2 
 20  12 
 40   10
 40  12  11 

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
180
 40   40  4  7  44  7
17

13. The following frequency distribution gives the monthly consumption of electricity of 68
consumers of a locality. Find the median, mean and mode of the data and compare them.
Monthly consumption - 65-85 85-105 105-125 125-145 145-165 165-185 185-205
(in units)
No. of consumers: 4 5 13 20 14 8 4
Sol:
Class Mid value
Frequency f fx Cumulative frequency
interval x
65-75 75 4 300 4
85-105 95 5 475 9
105-125 115 13 1495 22
125-145 135 20 2700 42
145-165 155 17 2170 56
165-185 175 8 1400 64
185-205 195 4 78 68
Total N  68 fx  9320
fx 9320
Mean    137  08
N 68
We have N  68
N 68
  34
2 2
N
Thee cumulative frequency just  is 42 then the median mass 125 145 such that
2
l  125, f  20 F  22, h  20
N
f
34  22
Median  l  2  h  125   20  137
f 20
Here the maximum frequently is 20, then the corresponding class 125-1145 is the modal
class l  125, h  20 f  20, f1  13, f 2  14
f  f1 20  13
Mode  l   h  125   20
2 f  f1 f 2 40  13  14
7  20
 125   135  77
13

14. 100 surnames were randomly picked up from a local telephone directly and the frequency
distribution of the number of letters in the English alphabets in the surnames was obtained
as follows:

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Number of letters: l-4 4-7 7-10 10-13 13-16 16-19
Number surnames: 6 30 40 16 4 4
Determine the median number of letters in the surnames. Find the mean number of letters
in the surnames. Also, find the modal size of the surnames.
Sol:
Class Mid value
Frequency f fx Cumulative frequency
interval x
1-4 25 6 15 6
4-7 55 30 165 36
7-10 85 40 340 76
10-13 11 5 16 185 92
13-16 14  5 4 58 96
16-19 17  5 4 70 100
N  100 fx  832
fx 832
Mean    8  32
N 100
N  100  N  50
N
The cumulative frequency  is 76, median class 7 10
2
l  7, h  3, f  40, f  36.
N
F
50  36
Median  1  2 h  7 3
f 40
14  3
7  8  05
40
Here the maximum frequency is 40, then the corresponding class 7-10 is thee modal class
l  7, h  10  7  3, f  40, f1  30, f 2  36
f  f1 40  30
Mode  1  h  7 3
28  f1  f 2 2  40  30  6
10  3
7  7  88
34

15. Find the mean, median and mode of the following data:
Classes: 0-20 20-40 40-60 60-80 80-100 100-120 120-140
Frequency: 6 8 10 12 6 5 3
Sol:
Class Mid value
Frequency f fx Cumulative frequency
interval x
0-20 10 6 60 6
20-30 30 8 240 17

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
40-60 50 10 500 24
60-080 70 12 840 36
80-100 90 6 540 42
100-120 110 5 550 47
120-140 130 3 390 50
N  60 fx  3120
fx 320
Mean    62  4
N 50
We have N  60
1 50
Then,   25
2 2
N
c,  is 36 then median class 60-80 such that
2
l  60, h  20, f  12, F  24
N
F
25  24
Median  l  2  h  60   20  60  1 67
f 12
Modal class l  60, h  20, f  12, f  10, f 2  6
 f  f1   12  10 
Mode  l    h  60   20
 2 f  f1  f 2   24  10  6 
40
 60   65
8
Mode  65

16. Find the mean, median and mode of the following data:
Classes: 0-50 50-100 100-150 150-200 200-250 250-300 300-350
Frequency: 2 3 5 6 5 3 1
Sol:
Class Mid value
Frequency f fx Cumulative frequency
interval x
0-50 25 2 50 2
50-100 75 3 225 5
100-150 125 5 625 10
150-200 175 6 1050 16
200-250 225 5 1127 21
250-300 275 3 825 24
300-350 325 1 325 25
N  25 fx  4225
fx 4225
Mean    169
25 25
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
N
We have N  25 then  12  5
2
N
c. f  15 16, median class 150  200 such that
2
l  150, h  4200  150  50, f  6, F  10
N
F
12  5  10
Median  l  2  h  150   50
f 6
 150  20  83  170  83
Here the maximum frequency is 6 then the corresponding class 150-200 is the modal class
l  150, h  200  150  50, f  6, f1  5, f 2  5
F  t1 65
Mode  t   h  150   50
2 f  f1  f 2 12  5  5
50
 150   175.
2
17. The following table gives the daily income of 50 workers of a factory:
Daily income (in Rs) 100 - 120 120 - 140 140 - 160 160 -180 180 – 200
Number of workers: 12 14 8 6 10
Find the mean, mode and median of the above data.
Sol:
Class Mid value
Frequency f fx Cumulative frequency
interval x
100-200 110 12 1320 12
120-140 130 14 1820 26
140-160 150 8 1200 34
160-180 170 6 1000 40
180-200 190 10 1900 50
N  50 fx  7260
fx 7250
Mean  
N 50
 145  2
We have
N  50
N 50
Then   25
2 2
N
The cumulative frequency is  is 26 corresponding class median class 120-140 such that
2
l  120, h  140  120  20, f  14, F  12

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
N
F
Median  l  2 h
f
25  12
 120   20
14
 120  18  57
 138  57
Here the maximum frequency is 14, then the corresponding class 120-140 is thee modal
class
l  120, h  140  120  20, f  14, f1  12, f 2  8
f  f1
Mode  1  h
2 f  f1  f 2
14  12
 120   25
2  4  12  8
2  25
 120 
5
 120  5
 125
Mode  125

Exercise – 7.6

1. Draw an given by less than method for the following data:


No.of rooms: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
No. of houses: 4 9 22 28 24 12 8 6 5 2
Sol:
We first prepare the cumulative frequency distribution table by less than method as given
be
No. of Rooms No. of houses Cumulative frequency
Less than or equal to 1 4 4
Less than or equal to 2 9 13
Less than or equal to 3 22 35
Less than or equal to 4 28 63
Less than or equal to 5 24 87
Less than or equal to 6 12 99
Less than or equal to 7 8 107
Less than or equal to 8 6 113
Less than or equal to 9 8 118
Less than or equal to 10 5 120

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Now, we mark the upper class limits along x-axis and cumulative frequency along y-axis.
Thus we plot the point (1, 4), (2, 3) (3, 35), (4, 63), (5, 87), (6, 99), (7, 107), (8, 113), (9,
118), (10, 120).
Cumulative frequency

2. The marks scored by 750 students in an examination are given in the form of a frequency
distribution table:
Marks No. of students Marks No. of students
600 – 640 16 760 – 800 172
640 – 680 45 800 – 840 59
680 – 720 156 840 – 800 18
720 – 760 284
Prepare a cumulative frequency table by less than method and draw an ogive.
Sol:
We first prepare the cumulative frequency table by less than method as given below
Marks No. of students Marks less than Cumulative frequency
600 – 640 16 640 16
640 – 680 45 680 61
680 – 720 156 720 217
720 – 760 284 760 501
760 – 800 172 800 693
800 – 840 59 840 732
840 – 880 18 880 750

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Now, we mark the upper class limits along x-axis and cumulative frequency along y-axis
on a suitable gear.
Thus, we plot the points (640, 16) (680, 61), (720, 217), (760, 501), (600, 673), (840, 732)
and (880, 750)
Cumulative frequency

3. Draw an ogive to represent the following frequency distribution:


Class-interval: 0 - 4 5 - 9 10 - 14 15 - 19 20-24
No. of students: 2 6 10 5 3
Sol:
The given frequency of distribution is not continuous so we first make it continuous and
prepare the cumulative frequency distribution as under
Class Interval No. of Students Less than Cumulative frequency
0.5 – 4.5 2 4.5 2
4.5 – 9.5 6 9.5 8
9.5 – 14.5 10 14.5 18
14.5 – 19.5 5 19.5 23
19.5 – 24.5 3 24.5 26

Now, we mark the upper class limits along x-axis and cumulative frequency along y-axis.
Thus we plot the points (4, 5, 2), (9, 5, 8), (14, 5, 08), (19, 5, 23) and (24, 5, 26)
Cumulative frequency

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

4. The monthly profits (in Rs.) of 100 shops are distributed as follows:
Profits per shop: 0 - 50 50 - 100 100 - 150 150 - 200 200 - 250 250 – 300
No. of shops: 12 18 27 20 17 6
Draw the frequency polygon for it.
Sol:
We have,
Profit per shop Mid value No. of shops
Less than 0 0 0
0 – 50 25 12
50 – 100 75 18
100 – 150 125 27
150 – 200 175 20
200 – 250 225 17
250 – 300 275 6

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Above 300 300 0

5. The following table gives the height of trees:


Height No. of trees
Less than 7 26
Less than 14 57
Less than 21 92
Less than 28 134
Less than 35 216
Less than 42 287
Less than 49 341
Less than 56 360
Draw ‘less than’ ogive and ‘more than’ ogive.
Sol:
Less than method,
It is given that,
Height No of trees
Less than 7 26
Less than 14 57
Less than 21 92
Less than 28 134
Less than 35 216
Less than 42 287
Less than 49 341
Less than 56 360

Now, we mark the upper class limits along x-axis and cumulative frequency along y-axis.

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Thus we plot the points (7, 26) (14, 57) (21, 92) (28, 134) (35, 216) (42, 287) (49, 341) (56,
360)
More than method: we prepare the cf table by more than method as given below:
Height Frequency Height more than Cumulative frequency
0–7 26 0 360
7 – 14 31 7 334
14 – 21 42 21 268
21 – 28 82 28 226
28 – 35 71 35 144
35 – 42 54 42 73
49 – 56 19 49 19

Now, we mark on x –axis lower class limits, y-axis cumulative frequency


Thus, we plot graph at (0, 360) (7, 334) (14, 303) (21, 268) (28, 226) (35, 144) (42, 73) (49,
19)

6. The annual profits earned by 30 shops of a shopping complex in a locality give rise to the
following distribution:
Profit (in lakhs in Rs) Number of shops (frequency)
More than or equal to 5 30
More than or equal to 10 28
More than or equal to 15 16
More than or equal to 20 14
More than or equal to 25 10
More than or equal to 30 7
More than or equal to 35 3
Draw both ogives for the above data and hence obtain the median.
Sol:
More than method
Profit (in lakhs in Rs) No. of shops (frequency)
≥5 30

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
≥ 10 28
≥ 15 16
≥ 20 14
≥ 25 10
≥ 30 7
≥ 35 3

Now, we mark on x- axis lower class limits, y- axis cumulative frequency


Thus, we plot the points (5, 30) (10, 28) (15, 16) (20, 14) (25, 10) (30, 7) and (35, 3)
Less than method

Profit (in lakhs in No. of shops Profit less than Cumulative


Rs) (frequency) frequency
0 – 10 2 10 2
10 – 15 12 15 14
15 – 20 2 20 16
20 – 25 4 25 20
25 – 30 3 30 23
30 – 35 4 35 27
35 – 40 3 40 30

Now, we mark the upper class limits along x-axis and cumulative frequency along y-axis.
Thus we plot the points. (10, 2) (15, 14) (20, 16) (25, 20) (30, 23) (35, 27) (40, 30)
We find that the two types of curves intersect of point P from point L it is drawn on x-axis.
The value of a profit corresponding to M is 17.5 lakh, Hence median is 17.5 Lakh

7. The following distribution gives the daily income of 50 workers of a factory:

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Daily income (in Rs): 100 - 120 120 - 140 140 - 160 160 - 180 180 – 200
Number of workers: 12 14 8 6 10
Convert the above distribution to a less than type cumula five frequency distribution and
draw its ogive.
Sol:
We first prepare the cumulative frequency table by less than method as given below.
Daily income (in Rs.) Cumulative frequency
< 120 12
< 140 26
< 160 34
< 180 40
< 200 50

Now, we mark on x – axis upper class limit, y – axis cumulative frequencies.


Thus, we plot the points (120, 12) (140, 26) (160, 34) (180, 40) (200, 50)

8. The following table gives production yield per hectare of wheat of 100 farms of a village:
Production yield 50 - 55 55 - 60 60 -65 65 - 70 70 - 75 75 - 80 in kg per
hectare:
Number of farms: 2 8 12 24 38 16
Draw ‘less than’ ogive and ‘more than’ ogive.
Sol:
Less than method:
Cumulative frequency table by less than method.
Production yield Number of farms Production yield Cumulative
(integer ) more than frequency
50 – 55 2 50 100
55 – 60 8 55 98
60 – 65 12 60 90
______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
65 – 70 24 65 78
70 – 75 38 70 54
75 – 80 16 75 16

Now, we mark on x – axis upper class limit, y – axis cumulative frequencies.


We plot the points (50, 100) (55, 98) (60, 90) (65, 78) (70, 54) (75, 16)

9. During the medical check-up of 35 students of a class, their weights were recorded as
follows:
Weight (in kg) No. of students
Less than 38 0
Less than 40 3
Less than 42 5
Less than 44 9
Less than 46 14
Less than 48 28
Less than 50 32
Less than 52 35
Draw a less than type ogive for the given data. Hence, obtain the median weight from the
graph and verify the result by using the formula
Sol:
Less than method
It is given that
On x- axis upper class limits. Y- axis cf.
We plot the points (38, 0) (40, 3) (42, 5) (44, 9) (46, 4) (48, 28) (50, 32) (52, 35)
More than method: Cf table
Weight (in kg) No. of students Weight more than Cumulative frequency
38 – 40 3 38 34
40 – 42 2 40 32
42 – 44 4 42 30

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
44 – 46 5 44 26
46 – 48 14 46 21
48 – 50 4 48 7
50 – 52 3 50 3
x- axis lower class limits on y-axis – cf
We plot the points (38, 35) (40, 32) (42, 30) (44, 26) (46, 21) (48, 7) (50, 3)

We find the two types of curves intersect at a point P. From point P. from P perpendicular
PM is draw on x-axis.
The verification,
We have
Weight (in kg) No. of students Cumulative frequency
36 – 38 0 0
38 – 40 3 3
40 – 42 2 5
42 – 44 4 9
44 – 46 5 28
46 – 48 14 32
48 – 50 4 32
50 – 0 3 35
Now, N = 35
𝑁 35
⇒ = = 17.5
2 2
𝑁
The cumulative frequency just greater than is 28 and the corresponding class is 46 – 48
2
Thus 46 – 48 is the median class such that
L = 46, f = 14, c1 = 14 and h = 2
𝑁
−𝑐1
2
∴ Median = L + ×ℎ
𝑓

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 7 – Statistics Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
17.5−14
= 46 + ×2
14
7
= 46 + 14
= 46.5
∴ Median = 46.5 kg
∴ Hence verify.

______________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Exercise 8.1

1. Which of the following are quadratic equations?


(i) 𝑥 2 + 6𝑥 − 4 = 0
1
(ii) √3𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 + 2 = 0
1
(iii) 𝑥 2 + 𝑥2 = 5
3
(iv) 𝑥 − 𝑥 = 𝑥2
(v) 2𝑥 2 − √3𝑥 + 9 = 0
(vi) 𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − √𝑥 − 5 = 0
(vii) 3𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 + 9 = 𝑥 2 − 7𝑥 + 3
1
(viii) 𝑥 + 𝑥 = 1
(ix) 𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 = 0
1 2 1
(x) (𝑥 + 𝑥) = 3 (1 + 𝑥) + 4
(xi) (2𝑥 + 1)(3𝑥 + 2) = 6(𝑥 − 1)(𝑥 − 2)
1
(xii) 𝑥 + 𝑥 = 𝑥2, 𝑥 ≠ 0
(xiii) 16𝑥 2 − 3 = (2𝑥 + 5)(5𝑥 − 3)
(xiv) (𝑥 + 2)3 = 𝑥 3 − 4
(xv) 𝑥(𝑥 + 1) + 8 = (𝑥 + 2)(𝑥 − 2)
Sol:
(i) 𝑥 2 + 6𝑥 − 4 = 0
1
(ii) √3𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 + 2 = 0
(iii) 3𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 + 9 = 𝑥 2 − 7𝑥 + 3
1
(iv) 𝑥+𝑥 =1
(v) (2𝑥 + 1)(3𝑥 + 2) = 6(𝑥 − 1)(𝑥 − 2)
(vi) 16𝑥 2 − 3 = (2𝑥 + 5)(5𝑥 − 3)
(vii) (𝑥 + 2)3 = 𝑥 3 − 4
These are all quadratic equations

2. In each of the following, determine whether the given values are solutions of the given
equation or not:
(i) 𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 + 2 = 0, 𝑥 = 2, 𝑥 = −1
a b
(ii) ax 2  3abx  2b2  0, x  and x 
b a
(iii) x2  2 x  4  0, x   2 and x  8 2
(iv) 2 x 2  x  9  x 2  4 x  3, x  2 and x  3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
1 13 5 4
(v) x   x  ,x 
2 6 6 3
2
(vi) 𝑥 − 3√3𝑥 + 6 = 0, x = √3, x = −8√3
(vii) 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 + 1 = 0, x = 0, x = 1
Sol:
(i) 𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 + 2 = 0, 𝑥 = 2, 𝑥 = −1
Here LHS = 𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 + 2
and RHS = 0
Now, substitute x = 2 in LHS
We get (2)2 − 3(2) + 2 = 4 – 6 + 2
=6–6
=0
⟹ RHS
𝑆𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑒, 𝐿𝐻𝑆 = 𝑅𝐻𝑆
x = 2 is a solution for the given equation.
Similarly,
Now substitute x = - 1 in LHS
We get (-1)2 -3(-1) +2
⟹ 1 + 3 + 2 = 6 ≠ RHS
Since LHS ≠ RHS
x = −1 is not a solution for the given equation
(ii) 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 + 1 = 0, x = 0, x = 1
𝐻𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝐿𝐻𝑆 = 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 + 1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑅𝐻𝑆 = 0
Now substitute x = 0 and x = 1 in LHS
⟹ 02 + 0 + 1 and (1)2 + (1) + 1
⟹1 and 1 + 1 + 1 = 3
≠ RHS ≠ RHS
∴ x = 0, x = 1 are not solutions of the given equation
(iii) 𝑥 2 − 3√3𝑥 + 6 = 0, x = √3, x = −8√3
Here LHS  x2  3 3x  6 and RHS  0
Substitute x  3 and x  2 3 in LHS

 3  3   6 and  2 3   
2 2
 3 3  3 3 2 3  6
 3  9  6 and 18  18  6
 0 and 36
 RHS  RHS
 x  3 is a solution and x  2 3 is not a solution for the given equation
1 13 5 4
(iv) x   x  ,x 
2 6 6 3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
1 13
Here LHS  x  and RHS 
x 6
5 4
Substitute x  and x  in the LHS
6 3
5 1 4 1
  and 
6 5 3 4
   
6 9
5 6 4 3
  and 
6 5 3 4
85  36 16  9
 and
30 18
61 85
 and
30 18
 RHS  RHS
5 4
 x  and x  are not solutions of the given equation
6 3
(v) 2 x  x  9  x  4 x  3, x  2 and x  3
2 2

 2 x2  x2  x  4 x  9  3  0
 x2  5x  6  0
Here, LHS  x 2  5 x  6 and RHS  0
Substitute x  2 and x  3 in LHS
  2   5  2   6 and  3  5  3  6
2 2

 4  10  6 and 9  15  6
 10  10 and 15  15
 0 and  0
= RHS = RHS
x  3 and x  2 are solutions of the given equation.
(vi) x2  2 x  4  0, x   2 and x  8 2
Here, LHS  x2  2x  4 and RHS  0
Substitute x   2 and x  2 2 in LHS

   2   4 and  2 2   
2 2
  2  2  2 2 2  4
 2  2  4 and 8  4  4
 4  4 and 8  4
 0 and 8
 RHS  RHS
 x   2 is a solution and x  2 2 is not a solution is the given equation.
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
a b
(vii) ax 2  3abx  2b2  0, x and x 
b a
Here, LHS  ax  3abx  2b and RHS  0
2 2

a b
Substitute x  and x  in LHS
b a
2 2
a a b b
 a    3ab    2b 2 and a 2    3ab    2b 2
2

b b a a


 a2  b2
 a  2   3a  a  2b and a  2  3b  b  2b2
2 2 2

b  a
a2
 2  3a 2  2b2 and b2  3b2  2b2
b
a4
 2  3a 2  2b2 and 3b2  3b2  0
b
 RHS  RHS
b a
 x  is a solution and x  is not a solution for the given equation.
a b

3. In each of the following, find the value of k for which the given value is a solution of the
given equation:
2
(i) 7𝑥 2 + 𝑘𝑥 − 3 = 0, 𝑥 = 3
(ii) 𝑥 2 − 𝑥(𝑎 + 𝑏) + 𝑘 = 0, 𝑥 = 𝑎
(iii) 𝑘𝑥 2 + √2𝑥 − 4 = 0, 𝑥 = √2
(iv) 𝑥 2 + 3𝑎𝑥 + 𝑘 = 0, 𝑥 = −𝑎
Sol:
2
(i) Given that x  is a root of the given equation
3
2
x satisfies the equation
3
2
2 2
i e 7   k   3  0
3 3
4 k
 7  2  3  0
9 3
k 28
 2  3
3 9
k 27  28
2 
3 9
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
k 1 1
2   k 
3 2 3 6
(ii) Given that x  a is a root of the given equation
x2  x  a  b   k  0
 x  a Satisfies the equation
i  e a  a a  b  k  0
2

 a 2  a 2  ab  k  0  ab  k  0
 k  ab
(iii) Given that x  2 is a root at the given equation
kx2  2x  4  0
 x  2 Satisfies the equation

 2  2 4  0
2
i e k  2
 2k  2  4  0
 2k  2  0  2k  2
 k 1
(iv) Given that x  0 is a root of the given equation x 2  3ax  k  0
 x  a Satisfies the equation
i  e  a   3a  a   k  0
2

 a 2  3a 2  k  0  2a 2  k  0
 k  2a 2

2
4. If x = 3 and x = - 3 are the roots of the equation 𝑎𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 + 𝑏 = 0, find the values of a and
b.
Sol:
a = 3, b = − 6

5. Determine if, 3 is a root of the equation given below:


x 2  4 x  3  x 2  9  4 x 2  14 x  16
Sol:
Given to check whether 3 is a root of the equation
x 2  4 x  3  x 2  9  4 x 2  14 x  16
Here LHS  x 2  4 x  3  x 2  9 and RHS  4 x 2  14 x  16
Substitute x  3 in LHS
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 32  4  3  3   3 9
2

 9  18  3  9  9
 0 00  LHS  0
Similarly, substitute x  3 in RHS.
 4  3  14  3  16
2

 4  9  42  16  36  42  16
 52  42  10
 RHS  10
Now, we can observe that
LHS  RHS
 x  3 is not a solution or root for the equation
x 2  4 x  3  x 2  9  4 x 2  14 x  16

Exercise 8.2

1. The product of two consecutive positive integers is 306. Form the quadratic equation to
find the integers, if x denotes the smaller integer.
Sol:
Given that the smallest integer of 2 consecutive integer is denoted by x
 The two integer will be x and  x  1
Product of two integers  x  x  1
Given that the product is 306
 x  x  1  306
 x 2  x  306  x 2  x  306  0
 The required quadratic equation is x 2  x  306  0

2. John and Jivanti together have 45 marbles. Both of them lost 5 marbles each, and the
product of the number of marbles they now have is 128. Form the quadratic equation to
find how many marbles they had to start with, if John had x marbles.
Sol:
Given that John and Jivani together have 45 marbles and John has x marbles
 Jivani had  45  x  marbles
No. of marbles John had after loosing 5 marbles  x  5
No. of marbles Jivani had after loosing 5 marbles   45  x   5
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 45  5  x
 40  x
Given that product of the no of marbles they now have  128
  x  5 40  x   128
 40 x  x 2  40  5  5 x  128
 45x  x 2  200  128  x 2  45x  128  200  0
 x 2  45x  328  0
 The required quadratic equation is x2  45x  328  0

3. A cottage industry produces a certain number of toys in a day. The cost of production of
each toy (in rupees) was found to be 55 minus the number of articles produced in a day. On
a particular day, the total cost of production was Rs. 750. If x denotes the number of toys
produced that day, form the quadratic equation fo find x.
Sol:
Given that x denotes the no of toys product in a day
 The cost of production of each by  55  no. of toys produced in a day
  55  x 
Total cost of production is nothing but product of no. of toys produced in a day and cost of
production of each toy
 x  55  x 
But total cost of production = Rs 750
 x  55  x   750
 55 x  x 2  750
 x 2  55x  750  0
 The required quadratic from of the given data is x2  55x  750  0

4. The height of a right triangle is 7 cm less than its base. If the hypotenuse is 13 cm, form the
quadratic equation to find the base of the triangle.
Sol:
Given that in a right triangle is 7cm less than its base
Let base of the triangle be denoted by x
 Height of the triangle   x  7  cm
We have hypotenuse of the triangle  13cm
We know that, in a right triangle
 base    Height    Hypotenuse 
2 2 2

  x    x  2   13
2 2 2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 x 2  x 2  14 x  49  169
 2 x 2  14 x  49  169  0
 2 x2  14 x  120  0
 2  x 2  7 x  60   0
 x2  7 x  60  0
 The required quadratic equation is x 2  7 x  60  0

5. An express train takes 1 hour less than a passenger train to travel 132 km between Mysore
and Bangalore. If the average speed of the express train is 1 1 km/hr more than that of the
passenger train, form the quadratic equation to find the average speed of express train.
Sol:
Let the arrange speed of express train be denoted by x km/hr
Given that average speed of express train is 11 km /hr more than that of the passenger train
 Average speed of passenger train   x  11 km /hr
Total distance travelled by the train  132 km
We know that,
Distance travelled
Time taken to travel 
Average speed
Distance travelled
 Time taken by express train 
Average speed of express train
132
 hr
x
132
 Time taken by express train  hr
 x  11
Given that time taken by express train is 1 hour less than that of passenger train.
 Time taken by passenger train _ Time taken by express train 1 hour
132 132
  1
x  11 x
 1 1
 132    1
 x  11 x 
 x   x  11 
 132    1
 x  x  11 
 132  x  2  11  x  x  11
 132 11  x 2  11x
 x 2  11x  1452
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 x 2  11x  1452  0
The required quadratic is x 2  11x  1452  0

6. A train travels 360 km at a uniform speed. If the speed had been 5 km/hr more, it would
have taken 1 hour less for the same journey. Form the quadratic eqiation to find the speed
of the train.
Sol:
Let Speed of train be x km / hr
Distance travelled by train  360 km
We know that
Distance travelled 360
Time of total   hr
Speed of the train x
If speed had been 5 km/hr more   x  5  km / hr
Distance travelled 360
Time of travel   hr
Speed of the train x  5
Give that,
Time of travel when speed is increased is 1 hour less than of the actual time of travel
360 360
  1
x x5
1 1 
 360    1
 x x5
 x 5 x 
 360    1
 x  x  5 
 360  5   x  x  5 
 x 2  5x  1800
 x 2  5 x  1800  0
 The required quadratic equation to find the speed of the train is x 2  5 x  1800  0

Exercise 8.3

Solve the following quadratic equations by factorization:

1.  x  4  x  2   0
Sol:
We have
 x  4  x  2   0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 either  x  4   0 or  x  2   0
 x  4 or x  2
Thus, x  4 and x  2 are two roots of the equation  x  4  x  2   0

2.  2 x  3 3x  7   0
Sol:
We have,
 2 x  3 3x  7   0
  2 x  3  0 or  3 x  7   0
 2 x  3 or 3x  7
3 7
x or x 
2 3
3 7
Thus, x  and x  are two roots of the equation  2 x  3 3 x  7   0
2 3

3. 4 x2  5x  0
Sol:
We have 4 x 2  5 x  0
 x  4 x  5  0
 either x  0 or 4 x  5  0
 x  0 or 4 x  5
5
 x  0 or x 
4
5
Thus, x  0 and x  are two roots of equation 4 x 2  5 x  0
4

4. 9 x 2  3x  2  0
Sol:
We have 9 x 2  3x  2  0
 9 x 2  6 x  3x  2  0
 3 x  3 x  2   1 3 x  2   0
  3x  2  3x  1  0
 either 3x  2  0 or 3x  1  0
 3x  2 or 3x  1
2 1
 x  or x  
3 3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
2 1
Thus, x  and x   are two roots of the equation 9 x 2  3x  2  0
3 3

5. 6 x2  x  2  0
Sol:
We have 6 x 2  x  2  0
 6 x 2  3x  4 x  2  0
 3x  2 x  1  2  2 x  1  0
  2 x  1 3x  2   0
 either 2 x  1  0 or 3x  2  0
 2 x  1 or 3x  2
1 2
 x   or x 
2 3
1 2
Thus, x   and x  are two roots of the equation 6 x 2  x  2  0
2 3

6. 6 x 2  11x  3  0
Sol:
We have
6 x 2  11x  3  0
 6 x2  9 x  2 x  3  0
 3 x  2 x  3  1 2 x  3   0
  2 x  3 3x  1  0
1
 2 x  3  0 or x  
3
3 1
Thus, x   and x   are the two roots of the given equation.
2 3
7. 5 x  3x  2  0
2

Sol:
We have,
5 x 2  3x  2  0
 5 x 2  5 x  2  x  1  0
 5 x  x  1  2  x  1  0
  x  1 5 x  2   0
  x  1  0 or 5x  2  0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
2
 x  1 or x  
5
2
 x  1 and x   are the two roots of the given equation.
5
8. 48 x  13x  1  0
2

Sol:
We have
48 x 2  13x  1  0
 48 x 2  16 x  3x  1  0
 16 x  3x  1  1 3x  1  0
  3x  116 x  1  0
 3x  1  0 or 16 x  1  0
1 1
 x  or x  
3 16
1 1
 x and x  are the two roots of the given equation.
16 3
9. 3x 2  11x  10
Sol:
We have
3x 2  11x  10
 3x 2  11x  10  0
 3x 2  6 x  5 x  10  0
 3x  x  2   5  x  2   0
  x  2  3x  5   0
5 5
  x  2   0 or x    x  2 and x   are the two roots at the quadratic equation
3 3
3x 2  11x  10

10. 25 x  x  1  4
Sol:
We have
 x  1  4
  25 x   x   25 x  10  4
 25 x 2  25x  4  0  25  4  100  25  20  5  100  20  5
 25 x 2  20 x  5 x  4  0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 5 x  5 x  4   1 5 x  4   0
  5 x  4  5 x  1  0
 5x  4  0 or 5x  1  0
4 1
 x   or x  
3 3
4 1
 x   and x   are the two solutions of the quadratic equation 25 x  x  1  4
3 5

1
11. 10 x  3
x
Sol:
We have
1
10 x   3
x
10 x 2  1
 3
x
 10 x 2  1  3x
 10 x 2  3x  1  0 10 x  1  10  10  5  2 and  3  5  2
 10 x 2  5 x 2  2 x  1  0
 5 x  2 x  1  1 2 x  1  0
  2 x  1 5 x  1  0
 2 x  1  0 or 5x  1  0
1 1
 x  or x  
2 5
1 1
 x  and x   are the two roots of the given equation
2 5

2 5
12.  20
22 x
Sol:
We have,
2 5
 20
22 x
2  5x  2 x2
 0
x2
 2 x2  5x  2  0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 2  2  4  4  4  1  5  4  1
 2 x2  4 x  x  8  0
 2 x  x  2   1 x  2   0
  x  2  2 x  1  0
 x  2  0 or 2 x  1  0
1
 x  2 or x 
2
1
 x  2 and x  are the two roots at the given quadratic equation
2

13. 4 3x 2  5 x  2 3  0
Sol:
We have,
4 3x 2  5 x  2 3  0
4 3  2 3  8  3  24  24  8  3  3  8  5  3  8
 
 4 3x 2  8 x  3x  2 3  0
 4x  3x  2  3   
3x  2  0


 4x  3  
3x  2  0

 4 x  3  0 or 3x  2
3 2
x or x  
4 3
3 2
x  and x   are the two roots of the given quadratic equation
4 3
14. 2 x 2  3x  2 2  0
Sol:
We have,
2 x 2  3x  2 2  0
 2  2 2  2  2  4  4  4 1  3  4  1
 
 2 x2  4 x  x  2 2  0

 2 x2  2 2 x 2 x  x  2 2  0 
  
 2x  x  2 2 1 x  2 2  0 

 x2 2  2 x  1  0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 x  2 2  0 or 2x  0
1
 x  2 2 or x 
2
1
x   and x  2 2 are the two roots of the given quadratic equation.
2

15. a 2 x 2  30bx  2b2  0


Sol:
We have,
a 2 x 2  30bx  2b2  0
 a 2 x 2  abx  2abx  2b2  0
 a 2  2b 2  2a 2b 2  2a 2b 2  2ab  ab  2ab  ab  3ab  2ab  ab 

 ax  ax  b   2b  ax  b   0
  ax  2b  ax  b   0
 ax  2b  0 or ax  b  0
 ax  2b or ax  b
2b b
x or x 
a a
b 2b
 x  and x  are the two roots of the given quadratic equation
a a

16. x2   
2 1 x  2  0
Sol:
We have,
x2   
2 1 x  2  0

 x2  2x 1 x  2  0
1 2  2  2   2  1
 
 x2  2 x  x  2  0
  
 x x  2 1 x  2  0 
 
 x  2  x  1  0

 x  2  0 or x 1  0
 x  2 or x  1
 x  1 and x  2 are the roots of the given quadratic equation
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________

17. x2   
3 1 x  3  0
Sol:
We have,
x2   
3 1 x  3  0

 x 2  3 x  1 x  3  0
 3 1  3  3   3  1 
  
3  1   3  1

  
 x x  3 1 x  3  0 
 
 x  3  x  1  0

 x  3  0 or x 1  0
 x  3 or x  1
 x  1 and x  3 are the two roots of the given quadratic equation

18. 4 x 2  4bx   a 2  b 2   0
Sol:
We have,
4 x 2  4bx   a 2  b 2   0

4 x   a2  b2   4 x   a  b  a  b   2  a  b   2  a  b   2 b  a   2  a  b   4b  2b  2b  8 b  a  

 4 x 2   2  b  a   2  a  b  x   a  b  a  b   0 
 2 x2   2 x  b  a    a  b   2x  b  a   0
  2x  b  a  or 2 x  a  b  0
 2x  a  b or 2x  a  b

x
a b
or 2 x    a  b   x  
 a  b
2 2

x  
 a  b  and x  a  b are the two roots of the given quadratic equation
2 2

19. ax 2   4a 2  3b  x  12ab  0
Sol:
We have,
ax 2   4a 2  3b  x  12ab  0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 a 12ab  12a 2b 2  4a 2  3b 

 ax 2  4a 2 x  3bx   4a   3b    0
 ax  x  4a   3b  x  4a   0
  a  4a  ax  3b   0
  x  4a   0 or  ax  3b   0
3b
 x  4a or x 
a
3b
x  and x  4a are the two roots of the given equations
a

2
 1
20.  x    4
 2
Sol:
We have,
2
 1
x  4
 2
2
 1
x  40
 2
2
 1
  x     2  0
2

 2
 1    1 
  x    2   x    2   0  a 2  b 2   a  b  a  b  
 2    2 
 1   1 
  x   2   0 or  x   2   0
 2   x 
1 1
 x  2  or x  2 
2 2
4 1 4 1
x or x 
2 2
3 5
 x  or x 
2 2
3 5
 x  and x  are the two rots at the given equations
2 2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
21. x2  4 2 x  6  0
Sol:
We have,
x2  4 2 x  6  0
1 6  6  6  3 2 x  2 and  4 2  3 2  2 
 

 x2  3 2 x  2 x  3 2  2  0 

 x x 3 2  2 x 3 2  0

 x 3 2  x  2   0

 x  3 2  0 or x  2  0
 x  3 2 or x  2
 x  3 2 and x  2 are the two roots of the given equation.

x  3 3x  7
22. 
x  2 2x  3
Sol:
x  3 3x  7
We have, 
x  2 2x  3
  x  3 2 x  3   x  2  3x  7 
 2 x 2  3x  6 x  9  3x 2  x  14
 2 x 2  3x  9  3x 2  x  14
 x 2  3x  x  14  9  0
 x2  4 x  5  0
1x  5  5  4  5  1
 x2  5x  x  5  0
 x  x  5   1 x  5   0
  x  5  x  1  0
 x  5  0 or x  1  0
 x  5 or x  1
 x  5 and x  1 are the two roots of the given quadratic equation.

2 x 2 x  5 25
23.  
x 4 x 3 3
Sol:
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
2 x 2 x  5 25
We have,  
x 4 x 3 3
2 x  x  3 7  x  4  2 x  5  25
 
 x  4  x  3 3
2 x 2  6 x  2 x 2  5 x  5 x  20 25
 
x 2  4 x  3x  12 3
4 x  19 x  20 25
2
 2 
x  7 x  12 3
 3  4 x 2  19 x  20   25  x 2  7 x  12 
 12 x 2  57 x  60  25x 2  175x  300
 25x 2  12 x 2  175x  57 x  300  60  0
 13x 2  118 x  240  0
 13x 2  78 x  40 x  240  0
 13  240  3120  3180  78  40 and  118  78  40
 13x  x  6   40  x  6   0
  x  6 13x  40   0
 x  6  0 or 13x  40  0
40
 x  6 or x 
13
40
 x  6 and x  are the two roots of the given equation.
13

x  3 1  x 17
24.  
x2 x 4
Sol:
We have,
x  3 1  x 17
 
x2 x 4
x  x  3   x  2 1  x  17
 
x  x  2 4
x 2  3x   x  x 2  2  2 x  17
 
x  2x
2
4
x  3x  x  x 2  2  2 x 17
2
 
x2  2 x 4
2 x  2 17
2
 2 
x  2x 4
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 4  2 x 2  2   17  x 2  2 x 
 8x 2  8  17 x 2  34 x
 8x 2  8  17 x 2  34 x
 17  8  x 2  34 x  8  0
 9 x 2  34 x  8  0
9  8  72  72  36  2 and  34  36  2
 9 x 2  36 x  2 x  8  0
 9x  x  4  2  x  4  0
  x  4  9 x  2   0
  x  4   0 or 9 x  2  0
8
 x  4 or x  
9
8
 x  4 and x   are the two roots of the given equations
9

𝑥−3 𝑥+3 48
25. − 𝑥−3 = , 𝑥 ≠ 3, 𝑥 ≠ −3
𝑥+3 7
Sol:
9
−4, 4

1 2 6
26.   ,x  0
x  2 x 1 x
Sol:
1 2 6
We have,   ,x  0
x  2 x 1 x


 x  1  1 x  2   6
 x  2  x  1 x
x 1  2x  4 6
 
x2  2 x  x  2 x
3x  5 6
 2 
x  3x  2 x
 x  3x  5  6  x 2  3x  2 
 3x 2  5 x  6 x 2  16 x  12
 3x 2  18x  5x  18  0
 3x 2  13x  18  0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 3 18  36  9 x  4 and  13  9  4
 3x 2  9 x  4 x  12  0
 3 x  x  3  4  x  3   0
  x  3 3x  4   0
 x  3  0 or 3x  4  0
4
 x  3 or x 
3
4
 x  3 and x  are the two roots of the given equation
3

x  1 x 1 5
27.   , x  1 and x  1
x 1 x  1 6
Sol:
We have
x  1 x 1 5
  , x  1 and x  1
x 1 x  1 6


 x  1 x  1   x  1 x  1  5
 x  1 x  1 6

 x  1   x  1
2 2
5
 
x 1 2 2
6
4  x 1 5
 2    x  b   a  b  4ab and  a  b  a  b   a 2  b2 
2 2

x 1 6  
 6  4 x   5  x 2  1
 24 x  5x 2  5
 5 x 2  5  24 x  0
 5 x 2  24 x  5  0  5 x  5  25  25  25 1  24  25  1
 5 x 2  25 x  x  5  0
 5 x  x  5   1 x  5   0
  x  5  5 x  1  0
 x  5  0 or 5x  1  0
1
 x  5 or x  
5
1
 x  5 and x   are the two roots of the given equation.
5
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
x 1 2x  1 5 1
28.   , x   ,1
2x  1 x 1 2 2
Sol:
We have
x 1 2x  1 5 1
  , x   ,1
2x  1 x 1 2 2


 x  1 x  1   2 x  1 2 x  1  5
 2 x  1 x  1 2

 x  1   2 x  1
2 2
5
 
2x  2x  x 1
2
2
x2  2 x  1  4 x2  4 x  1 5
    a  b  a 2  b2  2ab,  a  b   a 2  b2  2ab 
2 2

2x  x 1
2
2  
5x  2 x  2 5
2
 
2 x2  x 1 2
 2  5 x 2  2 x  2   5  2 x 2  x  1
 10 x 2  4 x  4  10 x 2  5 x  5
 4 x  5x  4  5  0
 9x  9  0
 9 x  9
 x  1
 x  1 is the only root for the given equation

29. 3x 2  14 x  5  0
Sol:
We have, 3x 2  14 x  5  0
 3x 2  15x  x  5  0
 3 x  x  5   1 x  5   0  3  5  15  15  15 1 and  4  5  1
  x  5  3x  1  0
 x  5  0 or 3x  1  0
1
 x  5 or x  
3
1
 x  5 and x   are the two roots of the given quadratic equation
3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
m 2 n
30. x   1  2x
n m
Sol:
We have given,
m 2 n
x   1  2x
n m
m x  n2
2 2
  1  2x
mn
 m 2 x 2  2mnx   n 2  mn   0
Now we solve the above quadratic equation using factorization method.
Therefore,
 
m2 x 2  mnx  m mnx   mnx  m mnx  n  mn n  mn   0
    
   
 m2 x2  mnx  m mnx    mx  n  mn  n  mn n  mn   0
  
  mx   mx  n  mn    n  mn  mx  n  mn   0

  mx  n  mn  mx  n  mn   0
Now, one of the products must be equal to zero for the whole product to be zero. Hence we
equate both the product to zero. In order to find the value of x. Therefore,
mx  n  mn  0
 mx  n  mn
n  mn
x
m
Or
mx  n  mn  0
 mx  n  mn
n  mn
x
m
 n  mn n  mn
Hence x  or n  .
m m

x a x b a b
31.   
x b x a b a
Sol:
We have,
x a x b a b
  
x b x a b a
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________


 x  a  x  a    x  b  x  b   a 2  b2
 x  b  x  a  ab

 x  a   x  b
2 2
a 2  b2
 
x 2  ax  bx  ab ab
x 2  2ax  a 2  x 2  2bx  b 2 a 2  b 2
 
x 2   a  b  x  ab ab
  2 x 2  2 x  a  b   a 2  b 2  ab   a 2  b 2   x 2   a  b  x  ab 

 2abx 2  2abx  a  b   ab  a 2  b 2    a 2  b 2  x 2   a 2  b 2   a  b  x  ab  a 2  b 2 

  a 2  b 2  2ab  x 2   a  b   a 2  b 2  2ab  x  0

  a  b  x 2   a  b  a  b  x  0
2 2

  a  b  x   a  b   0
2

 x  x   a  b  0
 x  0 or x   a  b   0  x  a  b
 x  0 and x   a  b  are the two roots of the equation

1 1 1 1
32.   
 x  1 x  2  x  2 x  3  x  3 x  4 6
Sol:
We have,
1 1 1 1
  
 x  1 x  2  x  2 x  3  x  3 x  4 6

 x  3 x  4    x  1 x  4    x  1 x  8  1
 x  1 x  2  x  3 x  4  6
 x  3 x  4    x  1  x  4    x  8 1
 
 x  1 x  2  x  3 x  4  6


 x  3 x  4    x  1 2 x  6   1
 x  1 x  2  x  3 x  4  6

 x  3 x  4    x  1  2  x  3  1
 x  1 x  2  x  3 x  4  6


 x  3  x  4  2 x  2  1
 x  1 x  2  x  3 x  4  6
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________


 x  3 3x  6  
1
 x  1 x  2  x  3 x  4  6

 x  3 x  2   3 
1
 x  1 x  2  x  3 x  4  6
3 1
 
 x  1 x  4  6
  x  1 x  4   3  6
 x2  4 x  x  4  18
 x 2  5 x  14  0  14  7  8 and  5  7  8
 x 2  7 x  8x  14  0
 x  x  7  8 x  7  0
  x  7  x  8   0
 x  7  0 or x  2  0
 x  7 or x  2
 x  7 and x  8 are the two roots of the given equation.

25
33.  x  5 x  6  
 24
2

Sol:
We have,
25
 x  5 x  6  
 24
2

25
 x 2  5 x  6 x  30  0
 24 
2

30  24   25
2

 x  11x 
2
0
 24 
2

17280  25
 x 2  11x  0
 2
2

17255  25
 x 2  11x  0
 24 
2

119 145
 x2  11x   0  17255  145 119
24 24
264 119 145
 x2  x  0  11 24  264
24 24 24
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 119  145  119 145
 x2   x  0
 24  24 24
119 145 119 145
 x2  x x  0
24 24 24 24
 119  145  119 
 x x   x 0
 24  24  24 
 119  145 
x  x  0
 24  24 
119 145
 x  0 and x  0
24 25
119 145
x or x 
24 24
23 1
x4 or x  6
24 24
23 1
x  4 and x  6 are the two roots of the given equation.
24 24

3 3
34. 7x   35
x 5
Sol:
3 3
We have, 7 x   35
x 5
7 x2  3 3
  35 
x 5
 3
 7 x 2  3   35   x
 5
 3
 7 x 2   35   x  3  0
 5
3
 7 x 2  35x  x  3  0
5
1
 7 x2  35x   3x  3  5  0
5
3
 7 x  x  5   x  5  0
5
 3
  x  5  7 x    0
 5
3
  x  5   0 or 7 x   0
5
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
3 3
 x  5 or 7 x   x 
5 35
3
 x  5 and x  are the two roots of the given equation.
35

a b 2c
35.  
x a x b x c
Sol:
We have,
a b 2c
 
x a x b x c
a  x  b  b  x  a 2c
 
 x  a  x  b  xc
ax  ab  bx  ab 2c
 
x  ax  bx  ab x  c
2

  x  c    a  b  x  2ab   2c  x 2   a  b  x  ab 
  a  b  x 2  2abx   a  b  c x  2abc  2cx 2  2c  a  b  x  2abc
  a  b  8c  x 2  2abx   a  b  x c  8c  a  b  x  0
  a  b  8c  x 2  x  8ab  ac  bc  8ac  8bc   0
  a  b  8c  x 2  x  2ab  ac  bc   0
 x  x  a  b  2c    ac  bc  2ab    0
 x  0 or x  a  b  2c    ac  bc  8ab   0

 x  0 or x  
 ac  bc  8ab 
a  b  8c
8ab  ac  bc
x
a  b  2c
2ab  ac  bc
 x  0 and x  are the two roots of the given equation.
a  b  8c
a b 2c
 
x a x b x c
a  x  b  b  x  a 2c
 
 x  a  x  b  xc
ax  ab  bx  ab 2c
 
x  ax  bx  ab x  c
2

  x  c    a  b  x  2ab   2c  x 2   a  b  x  ab 
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
  a  b  x 2  2abx   a  b  c x  2abc  2cx 2  2c  a  b  x  2abc

36. x 2  2ab   2a  b  x
Sol:
We have
x 2  2ab   2a  b  x
 x 2   2a  b  x  2ab  0  2ab  8a  b    8a  b   8a  b 
 x 2  2ax  bx  2ab  0
 x   x  8a   b  x  2a   0
  x  8a  x  b   0
 x  8a  0 or x  b  0
 x  8a or x  b
 x  8a and x  b are the two roots of the given equation .

a  b x 2   4ab  x   a  b   0
2 2
37.
Sol:
We have,
a  b x 2   4ab  x   a  b   0
2 2

2

  a  b  x2   a  b    a  b  x   a  b   0
2 2
 2

  a  b   a  b
2 2
 4ab 

  a  b  x2   a  b  x   a  b  x   a  b   0
2 2 2 2

  a  b  x  x  1   a  b   x  1  0
2 2


  x  1  a  b  x   a  b 
2 2
0
 x  1  0 or  a  b  x   a  b   0
2 2

 a  b
2
a b
2

 x  1 or x  
 a  b  a  b 
2

a b
2

 x  1 and x    are the two roots of the given equation


 a  b 

38. a  x 2  1  x  a 2  1  0
Sol:
We have
a  x 2  1  x  a 2  1  0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 ax 2  a 2 x  x  a  0  a  a  a2  a2  a 2  1   a 2  1  a 2  1
 
 a   x  a   1 x  a   0
  x  a  ax  1  0
 x  a  0 or ax 1  0
1
 x  a or x 
a
1
 x  a and x  are the two roots of the given equation
a

39. x 2  x  x  a  1  0
Sol:
We have,
x 2  x  x  a  1  0
 x 2   a  1  a  x  a  a  1  0  a  a  1    a  1  a  1  a   a  1 
 x 2   a  1 x  ax  ax    a  1   0
 x  x   a  1   a  x   a  1   0
  x   a  1   x  a   0
 x   a  1  0 or x  a  0
 x  a  1 or x  a
 x   a  1 and x  a are the two roots of the given equation.

 1
40. x2   a   x  1  0
 a
Sol:
We have,
 1
x2   a   x  1  0
 a
1 1  1 1 1 
 x2  ax  x  a  0  1  a  a  a  a  x  ax  a x 
a a    
1
 x  x  a   x  a  0
a
 1
  x  a x    0
 a
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
1
 x  a  0 or x  0
a
1
 x  a or x  
a
1
 x  a and x   are the two roots of the given equation.
a

41. abx 2   b 2  ac  x  bc  0
Sol:
We have,
abx 2   b 2  ac  x  bc  0
 abx  bc  ab 2 c  ab 2 c  b 2  ac and b 2  ac  b 2    ac  

 abx 2  b2 x  acx  bc  0
 bx  ax  b   c  ax  b   0
  ax  b  bx  c   0
 ax  b  0 or bx  c  0
b c
 x   or x 
a b
b c
 x   and x  are the two roots of the given equation
a b

42. a 2b 2 x 2  b 2 x  a 2 x  1  0
Sol:
We have, a 2b2 x 2  b2 x  a 2 x  1  0

 1 a 2b 2  a 2b 2  a 2b 2  a 2  b 2 

 a 2b 2 x 2  b 2 x  a 2 x  1  0

 b 2   a 2 x  1  1 a 2 x  1  0

  a 2 x  1 b 2 x  1  0

 a 2 x  1  0 or b2 x  1  0

1 1
x 2
and x  2 are the two root of te given equation
a b
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
x 1 x  3 1
43.   3 , x  2 and x  4
x2 x4 3
Sol:
We have,
x 1 x  3 1
  3 , x  2 and x  4
x2 x4 3


 x  1 x  4    x  3 x  2   10
 x  2 x  4  3
x 2  x  4 x  4  x 2  3x  2 x  6 10
 
x2  2 x  4 x  8 3
2 x 2  10 x  10 10
 2 
x  6x  8 3
 2  x 2  5x  5  3  5  x 2  6 x  8
 3x 2  15x  15  5 x 2  30 x  40
 2 x 2  30 x  15 x  40  15  0
 2 x 2  15 x  25  0
 2 x 2  10 x  5 x  25  0
 2 x  x  5  5  x  5  0
  x  5  2 x  5   0
  x  5   0 or 2 x  5  0
5
 x  5 or x 
2
5
 x  5 and x  are the two roots of the given equation
2

44. 3x 2  2 6 x  2  0
Sol:
We have 3x 2  2 6 x  2  0 Now we solve the above quadratic equation using factorization
method.
Therefore
3x 2  6 x  6 x  2  0
 3x  
 3x  2   0
3x  2  2

  3  2  3x  2   0

  3x  2   0 or  3x  2   0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 3x  2 or 3x  2
2 2
x or x 
3 3
2 2
x or x 
3 3
2 2
Hence x  or x 
3 3

1 1 6
45.   , x  1, 5
x 1 x  5 7
Sol:
We have
1 1 6
  , x  1, 5
x 1 x  5 7
x  5   x  1 6
 
 x  1 x  5 7
x  5  x 1 6
 
x  5x  x  5 7
2

6 6
 2 
x  4x  5 7
 x2  4 x  5  7
 x2  4 x  5  7  0
 x 2  4 x  18  0
 x 2  6 x  2 x  12  0
 x  x  6  2  x  6  0
 x  6  0 or x  8  0
 x  6 or x  8
 x  6 and x  8 are the two roots of the given equation.

1 1
46.   3, x  0, 2
x x2
Sol:
We have,
1 1
  3, x  0, 2
x x2
x2 x
 3
x  x  2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 2  3  x 2  2 x 
 3x 2  6 x  2  0
 3 x 2   3  3 x  2  0

 
 3x2  3  3  3 3 x   3  1  0

 3x 2  3  
3 1 x  3   
3 1 x  
 
3 1 
3 1   0

 a 2  b 2   a  b  a  b  

 3  x  3  3 1 x   3  1 3 1  0


2
 2

 3  3  1   3  1  3x   3  1   0

  3x  3  1  3x   3  1  0
  
 3x   3  1  0 or 3x   3  1  0

1
47. x  3, x  0
x
Sol:
We have,
1
x   3, x  0
x
x2 1
 3
x
 x 2  1  3x
 x 2  3x  1  0
3 3
 x2     x 1  0
2 2
 3  13 3  13 
 x 2     x   1  0
 2 2 
 3  13   3  13 
 x 2    x    x   1  0
 2   2 
 3  13   3  13   4 
 x 2    x    x     0
 2   2   4 
 3  13   3  13   9  13 
 x 2    x    x   0
 2   2   4 
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 2
  
2
 3  13   3  13   3  13 0
 x  
2
 x    x   
 2   2   22 
 
 3  13   3  13 
 x 2    
3  13


3  13
0
  
 
x  x
 2   2  2 2
  3  13    3  13    3  13  
 x  x         x      0
 2 2 2
      
 3  13  3  13 
  x   x  0
 2  2 
 3  13   3  13 
 x     0 or x     0
 2   2 
3  13 3  13
x or x 
2 2
3  13 3  13
x  and x  are the two roots of the given equation.
2 2

1 1 11
48.   , x  4,7
x  4 x  7 30
Sol:
We have,
1 1 11
  , x  4,7
x  4 x  7 30
x  7   x  4  11
 
 x  4  x  7  30
x7 x4 11
 
x  7 x  4 x  28 30
2

11 11
 2 
x  3x  28 30
  1  30  1  x 2  3 x  28 
 30  x 2  3x  28
 x 2  3x  28  30  0
 x 2  3x  2  0  2  2  1  3  2  1
 x2  2 x  x  2  0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 x  x  8   1 x  8   0
  x  8  x  1  0
 x  8  0 or x 1  0

 x  8 or x  1

 x  2 and x  1 are the two roots of the given equation.

Exercise 8.4

Find the roots of the following quadratic equations (if they exist) by the method of completing
the square.

1. x2  4 2 x  6  0
Sol:
We have,
x2  4 2 x  6  0

   2 2 
2 2
 x2  2  x  2 2  2 2 6 0

   2 2   6
2 2
 x2 2

 x  2 2    4  2  6
2

 x 2 2  86
2

 x 2 2  2
2

 x2 2   2
 x  2 2  2 or x  2 2   2
 x  3 2 or x  2
 x  2 and x  3 2 are the roots of the given equation.

2. 2 x2  7 x  3  0
Sol:
We have,
2 x2  7 x  3  0
 7 3
2  x2  x    0
 2 2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
7 1 3
 x2  2    x   0
2 2 2
2 2
7 7 7 3
 x2  2   x         0
4 4 4 2
2
7  7  49 3
 x  2  x       0
2

4  4  16 2
2
 7  49 3
x    0
 4  16 2
2
 7 49 3
x   
 4  16 2
49  86
2
 7
x  
 4 16
2
 7 25
x  
 4  16
2
7 5
 x   
4 4
7 5
 x 
4 4
7 5 7 5
 x   or x   
4 4 4 4
5 7 7 5
 x   or x  
4 9 4 4
12 2
 x  or x 
4 4
1
 x  3 or x 
2
1
 x  3 and x  are the roots of the given quadratic equation.
2

3. 3x 2  11x  10  0
Sol:
We have,
3x 2  11x  10  0
11 10
 x2  x   0
3 3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
1 11 10
 x2  2   x   0
2 3 3
2 2
11  11   11  10
 x2  2  2      0
6 6 6 3
2 2
 11   11  10
x    
 6 6 3
2
 11  121 10
x   
 6 36 3
11  121  120
2

x  
 6 36
2
 11  1
x  
 6  36
2 2
 11   1 
x   
 6  6
11 1
 x 
6 6
11 1 11 1
 x   or x   
6 6 6 6
1 11 1 11
 x   or x   
6 6 6 6
10 12
 x   or x    2
6 6
5
 x   or x  2
3
5
 x   or x  2 are the two roots of the given equation.
3

4. 2 x2  x  4  0
Sol:
We have,
2 x2  x  4  0
 x 4
 2  x2     0
 2 2
1 1
 x2  2    x  2  0
2 2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
2 2
1 1 1
 x2  2x   x        2  0
4 4 4
2 2
 1 1
x    2
 4 4
2
 1 1
x   2
 4  16
1  1  2 16
2

x  
 4 16
1  1  32
2

x  
 4 16
2
 1  33
x  
 4  16
 1 33
x 
 4 16
1 33 1 33
 x  or x   
4 4 4 4
33 1 33 1
x  or x   
4 4 4 4
33  1 33  1
x or x 
4 4
33  1 33  1
x  or x   are the two roots of the given eqution
4 4

5. 2 x2  x  4  0
Sol:
We have,
2 x2  x  4  0
x
 x2   2  0
2
1 1
 x2  2    x  2  0
2 2
2 2
1 1 1
 x2  2   x        2
4 4 4
2
 1 1
x   2
 4  16
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
1  1  36
2

x  
 4 16
2
 1 31
x  
 4 16
1  31
 x 
4 16
1 31 1 31
 x  or x   
4 4 4 4
31  1  31  1
x or x 
4 4
Since, 31 is not a real number
The roots are not real roots.

6. 4 x 2  4 3x  3  0
Sol:
We have,
4 x 2  4 3x  3  0
4 3 3
 x  x 0
4 4
1 3
 x2  2   3  x   0
2 4
2
3  3   3 2 3
 x  2
2
 x         0
2  2  2 4
2
 3 3 3
  x     0
 2  4 4
2
 3
  x   0
 4 
3 3
 x  0 and x  0
2 2
 3 3
x and x 
2 2
 3 3
x  and x   are the two roots of the given equation as it is a perfect square.
2 2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
7. 2 x 2  3x  2 2  0
Sol:
We have,
2 x 2  3x  2 2  0
3x 2 2
 x2  x 0
2 2
3
 x2  x 8  0
2
1 3
 x2  2   x2 0
2 2
2 2
3  3   3 
 x  2
2
x    20
2 2 2 2 2 2
2
 3  9
x   2
 2 2 8
2
 3  9  16
x   8
 2 2
2
 3  25
x   8
 2 2

8. 3x 2  10 x  7 3  0
Sol:
We have
3x 2  10 x  7 3  0
10 7 3
 x2  x 0
3 3
1 10
 x2  2   x7 0
2 3
2 2
5  5   5 
 x  2
2
x    7 0
3  3  3
2
 5  25
x   3 7
 3
2
 5  25  21
x   3
 3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
2
 5  4
x  3
 3
5 4
 x 
3 3
5 2 5 2
 x  or x  
3 3 3 3

3 7
x or x  
3 3

7
 x   3 or x  
3

7
 x   3 and x   are the roots of the given equation.
3

9. x2   
2 1 x  2  0
Sol:
We have,
x2   
2 1 x  2  0

 2  
1
 x2 2 1 x  2  0
2
2 2
2  1  2 1   2  1 
 x  2
2
x        2  0
2  2   2 
2 2
 2 1   2 1 
  x      2
 2   2 
2
 2 1  3  2 2  4 2
  x   
 2  4
2
 2 1  3  2 2
  x   
 2  4
2
 2 1  2 1 2 2
  x   
 2  4

 2
2
 2 2 1
2
 2 1 
  x   
 2  22
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________

  x 
2 1 
2
 2  12 
  2
 2  2
2 2
 2  1   2 1 
  x     
 2   2 
2 1  2 1 
 x    
2  2 
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
 x  or x  
2 2 2 2
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
x  or x  
2 2 2 2
2 1  2  1  2 1 2 1
x or x 
2 2
2 1
x or x 
2 2
 x  2 or x  1
 x  2 and x  1 are the roots of the given equation

10. x 2  4ax  4a 2  b2  0
Sol:
We have,
x 2  4ax  4a 2  b2  0
 x 2  2   2a   x   2a   b 2  0
2

  x  2a   b 2
2

 x  2a  b
 x  2a  b or x  2a  b
 x  2a  b or x  2a  b
 x  2a  b and x  2a  b are the two roots of the given quadratic equation.
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Exercise 8.5

1. Write the discriminant of the following quadratic equation:


(i) 2 x 2  5 x  3  0 (ii) x 2  2 x  4  0 (iii)  x  1 2 x  1  0 (iv) x 2  2 x  k  0, K  R
(v) 3x 2  2 2 x  2 3  0 (vi) x 2  x  1  0 (vii) 3x 2  2 x  k  0 (viii) 4 x 2  3kx  1  0
Sol: (i) 2 x 2  5 x  3  0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
here a  2, b  5 and c  3
The discriminant D  b2  4ac
  5   4  2  3
2

 25  24  1
The discriminant of the following quadratic equation is 1.

(ii) x 2  2 x  4  0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
here a  1, b  2 and c  4
The discriminant is D  b2  4ac
  2   4  1 4
2

 4 16  12
The discriminant of the following quadratic equation is 12.

(iii)  x  1 2 x  1  0
The given equation is  x  1 2 x  1  0
By solving it, we get 2 x 2  3x  1  0
This equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
here a  2, b  3, c  1
The discriminant is D  b2  4ac
  3   4  2  1
2

 9 8 1
The discriminant D, for the following quadratic equation is 1

(iv) x 2  2 x  k  0, K  R
The given equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
here a  1, b  2, c  k [given k  R ]
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
The discriminant is D  b2  4ac
  2   4 1 k
2

 4  4k
The discriminant D, of the following quadratic equation is 4  4k , where K  R

(v) 3x 2  2 2 x  2 3  0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
here a  3, b  2 2 x and c  2 3
The discriminant is D  b2  4ac

 
2
 2 2  4  3  2 3
 8  24
 32
The discriminant D, of the followig quadratic equation is 32.

(vi) x 2  x  1  0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
here a  1, b  1 and c  1
The discriminant is D  b2  4ac
  1  4  1 1
2

 1  4  3
The discriminant D, of the following quadratic equation is 3.

(vii) 3x 2  2 x  k  0
The given equation has 3x 2  2 x  k  0
here a  3, b  2, c  k
 given that the quadratic equation has real roots.
i.e., D  b2  4ac  0
 4  4  3 k  0
 4  12k  0
 4  12k
4
4
12
1
k 
3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
1
The ‘k’ value should not exceed to have the real roots for the given equation.
3
(viii) 4 x 2  3kx  1  0
The given equation has 4 x 2  3k x  1  0
here a  3, b  2, c  k
given that quadratic equation has real roots
i.e., D  b2  4ac  0
  2  4  3 k  0
2

 4  4  3 k  0
 4  12k  0
 4  12k
12
k  k 3
4

2. In the following, determine whether the given quadratic equation have real roots and if so,
find the roots:
(i) 16 x 2  24 x  1 (ii) x 2  x  2  0 (iii) 3x 2  10 x  8 3  0 (iv) 3x 2  2 x  2  0
(v) 2 x 2  2 6 x  3  0 (vi) 3a 2 x 2  8abx  4b 2  0, a  0 (vii) 3x 2  2 bx  b  0
(viii) x 2  2 x  1  0 (ix) 2 x 2  5 3  6  0 (x) 2 x2  7 x  5 2  0
(xi) 2 x2  2 2 x  1  0 (xii) 3x 2  bx  2  0
Sol:
(i) 16 x 2  24 x  1
The given equation is in the form of 16 x 2  24 x  1  0
Hence, the equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
Here, a  16, b  24, c  1, D  b 2  4ac   24   4  16  1  576  64  640  0
2

As D  0, the given equation has real roots, given by


b  D   24   640 3  10
  
2a 2 16 4

b  D   24   640 3  10
  
2a 2 16 4
3  10
The roots of the equation are
4
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
(ii) x 2  x  2  0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
a  1, b  1, c  2.
D  b 2  4ac  1  4 1 2  1  8  7  0
2

As Q  0, the equation has no real roots

(iii) 3x 2  10 x  8 3  0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
here a  3, b  10 and c  8 3
D  b2  4ac  10   4  3  8 3  100  96  19670
2

As Q  0, the given equation has real roots, given by


b  10 10  196 2 3 2
    [ Multiplying and dividing by 3]
2a 2 3 3 3
b  10 10  196
   4 3
2a 2 3
2
The roots of the equation are and 4 3
3
(iv) 3x 2  2 x  2  0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
here a  3, b  2, c  2
The discriminant Q  b2  4ac

  2   4  3  2  4  24
2

 20  0
Hence as Q  0,
The given equation has no reaal roots.

(v) 2 x 2  2 6 x  3  0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
here a  2, b  2 6, c  3
The discriminant Q  b2  4ac

 
2
 2 6  4  2  3  24  24
0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
As Q  0 , the given equation has real and equal roots, They are


b  D
 

2 6  0 2 1 6

3 
2a 2 2 42 2


b  D
 

2 6  0 2 1 6

3 
2a 2 2 42 2
3
The roots of the given equation is
2

(vi) 3a 2 x 2  8abx  4b 2  0, a  0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
here a  3a 2 , b  8ab, c  4b 2 [given a  0 ]
D  b2  4ac  8ab   4  3a 2  4b 2  64a 2b 2  48a 2b 2  16a 2b 2  0
2

As Q  0 , the given equation has real roots, given by


b  D

 8ab   16a 2b 2 2b

2a 2  3a 2 a


b  D

8ab   16a 2b2  2b
2a 2  3a 2 a
2b 2b
The roots of the given equation are ,
a 3a

(vii) 3x 2  2 bx  b  0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
here a  3, b  2 5, c  5
The discriminant Q  b2  4ac

 
2
 2 5  4  3  5  20  4  3  5
 20  60  80  0
As Q  0 , the given equation has real roots, given by


b  D

 2 5  80

5 
2a 23 3


b  D

 2 5  80


5 
2a 23 3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
3
The roots of the given equation is
2

(viii) x 2  2 x  1  0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
Here a  1, b  2 and c  1
The discriminant D  b2  4ac
  2   4  1  1  0
2

As Q  0 , the given equation has real and equal roots


b D b D b
   ,   i.e.,  and     0  0
2a 2a 2a
b
  and     
 2  2  1
2a 2 2 2
The roots of the given equation  and  is 1.

(ix) 2 x 2  5 3  6  0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
here a  2, b  5 3, c  6
The discriminant D  b2  4ac

 
2
 5 3  4  2  6  75  48
 27  0
As Q  0 , the given equation has real roots, given by


b  D

 5 3  27

 
3  5  3

3  2 1

3
2a 2 2 4 42 2


b  D
 
 
 5 3  27  3 5  3 8 2
 3  2 3
2a 2 2 4 41
3
The roots of the given equation are  , 2 3
2

(x) 2 x2  7 x  5 2  0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
here a  2, b  7, c  5 2
The discriminant Q  b2  4ac
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
  7   4  2  5 2  49  40
2

90
As 0  0 , the given equation has real roots, given by
b  D 7  9 7  3 42
     2
2a 2 2 2 2 2 2
b  D 7  9 7  3 5 5
    
2a 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
5
The roots of the given equation are  2,
2

(xi) 2 x2  2 2 x  1  0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
here a  2, b  2 2, c  1

D  b2  4ac 
 2 2   2 1
2
1

2 2 42 2
as D  0, the given equation has Real and equal roots

hence  and   
b


2 2

21 2


1
2a 2 2 42 2
1 3
The roots is obtained by multiplying and dividing by 2
2 2
1
The roots of the given equation is
2

(xii) 3x 2  bx  2  0
The given equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
here a  3, b  5, c  2
D  b2  4ac   5  4  3  2  25  24  1  0
2

as D  0, the given equation has Real roots, giving by


b D   5  1 5  1 61
     1
2a 23 6 6

b D   5  1 5  1 4 2 2
     
2a 23 6 63 3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
2
The roots of the given equation are 1 and
3

x 1 x  3 1
3. Solve for x :   3 ; x  2, 4
x2 x4 3
Sol: Given,
x 1 x  3 1
 3
x2 x4 3


 x  1 x  4    x  3 x  2   10 [Solving improper fraction]
 x  2 x  4  3


x 2
 5x  4   x2  5x  6

10
 x  2 x  4 3
This can also be written as. .
3  2 x 2  10 x  10   10  x  2  x  4  
 6 x 2  30 x  30  10 x 2  60 x  80
By solving them, by taking all to one side, we get
 10 x 2  60 x  80    6 x 2  30 x  30   0

 4 x 2  30 x  50  0, here a  4, b  30, c  50

b  b 2  4ac
Hence we get x by x 
2a

 30    30   4  4  50
2

x 5
2  4

  30    30   4  4  50
2
5
x 
2 4 2
5
The value of x are 5 and
2

1 1
4. Solve for x :   3, x  0, 2
x x7
1 1
Sol: Given  3
x x2
x2
 3
x  x  2
2
 3
x  x  2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
This can be written as 2  3  x 2  2 x 
The equation hence is 3x 2  6 x  2  0
This equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
Here a  3, b  6 and c  2

b  b 2  4ac
 x
2a

  6    6   4  3 2
2
6  36  24 3  3
x  
23 6 3
  6    6   4  3 2
2
6  36  24 3  3
x  
23 6 3
3 3
The value of x are
3
1
5. x  3, x  0
x
1
Sol: Given x   3, x  0
x
x2  1
Hence this equation can be written as 3
x
 x 2  1  3x  x 2  3x  1  0
The equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
Here a  1, b  3, c  1 .
b  b2  4ac
The value of ' x ' can be solved by x 
2a
b   3  4  1 1
2
3 9 4 3 5
x  
2 1 2 2
b   3  4  1 1
2
3 9 4 3 5
x  
2 1 2 2
3 5
The value of ' x ' are
2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Exercise 8.6

1. Determine the nature of the roots of the following quadratic equations:


3 2
(i) 2 x 2  3x  5  0 (ii) 2 x 2  3x  5  0 (iii) x 2  x  1  0 (iv) 3x 2  4 3x  4  0
5 3
(v) 3x 2  2 6 x  2  0 (vi)  x  2a  x  2b   4ab (vii) 2  a 2  b 2  x 2  2  a  b  x  1  0
(viii) 2  a 2  b 2  x 2  2  a  b  x  1  0 (ix)  b  c  x 2   a  b  c  x  a  0
Sol:
(i) 2 x 2  3x  5  0
The given quadratic equation is 2 x 2  3x  5  0
here a  2, b  2, c  5
D  b2  4ac   3  4  5 1  9  20  11  0
2

As D  0, The discriminant of equation is negative, then the expression has no real roots

(ii) 2 x 2  3x  5  0
The given quadratic equation is 2 x 2  3x  5  0
here a  2, b  6 and c  3
 D  b2  4ac   6   4  2  3  36  24  12  0
2

As D  0, the discriminant of equation is positive, the equation has real and distinct roots

3 2 2
(iii) x  x 1  0
5 3
3 2 2
The given quadratic equation is x  x  1  0 can also be written as 9 x 2  10 x  15  0
5 3
here a  9, b  10, c  15
D  b2  4ac   10   4  5  9  100  540  440  0
2

 as D  0, the equation has no real roots

(iv) 3x 2  4 3x  4  0
The given quadratic equation is 3x 2  4 3x  4  0
here a  3, b  4 3, c  4
The discriminant D  b2  4ac

 
2
 4 3  4  3  4  48  48  0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
as D  0, the equation has real and equal roots
(v) 3x 2  2 6 x  2  0
The given quadratic equation is 3x 2  2 6 x  2  0
Here. The equation is in the form of ax 2  b  c  0
Where a  3, b  2 6 and c  2

 
2
D  b 2  4ac  2 6  4  3  2  24  24  0
as D  0, the given quadratic equation has real and equal roots

(vi)  x  2a  x  2b   4ab
The given equation  x  2a  x  2b   4ab can also be written as x 2  x  2a  2b  and
c  0  4ab  4ab  0

D  b2  4ac    2a  2a   4 1 0   2a  2b   0


2 2

 as equal root of any integers is always positive


 D  0, hence the discriminant of the equation is positive

(vii) 2  a 2  b 2  x 2  2  a  b  x  1  0
The given equation is 2  a 2  b 2  x 2  2  a  b  x  1  0

It is in the form of the equation ax  bx  c  0


2

Here a  2  a 2  b 2  , b  2  a  b  and c  1

 D  b2  4ac
  2abcd   9  9a 2b 2  16c 2 d 2
2

 b  6a 2b2c 2 d 2  576a 2b2c 2 d 2  0


Hence as D  0, the equation has Real and equal roots

(viii) 2  a 2  b 2  x 2  2  a  b  x  1  0
The given equation is 2  a 2  b 2  x 2  2  a  b  x  1  0
It is in the farm of the equation ax 2  bx  c  0
Here a  2  a 2  b 2  , b  2  a  b  and c  1

 D  b2  4ac  2  a  b   4  2  a 2  b2  1


2

 4a 2  ab2  8ab  8a 2  8b2


Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 8ab  4  a 2  b 2   0
as D  0, The discriminant is negative and the nature of the roots are not real

(ix)  b  c  x 2   a  b  c  x  a  0
The given equation is  b  c  x 2   a  b  c  x  a  0
Here a  b  c, b    a  b  c  and c  a

 D  b2  4ac    a  b  c   4  b  c   a


2

  a  b  c   4abc  0
2

 as D  0 , the discriminant is positive and the nature of the roots are real and unequal

2. Find the values of k for which the roots are real and equal in each of the following
equation:
(i) kx 2  4 x  1  0 (ii) kx 2  2 5 x  4  0 (iii) 3x 2  5x  2k  0 (iv) 4 x 2  kx  9  0
(v) 2kx 2  40 x  25  0 (vi) 9 x2  24 x  k  0 (vii) 4 x 2  3kx  1  0
(viii) x 2  2  5  2k  x  3  7  10k   0
Sol:
(i) kx 2  4 x  1  0
Sol:
The given equation kx 2  4 x  1  0 is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0 where
a  k , b  4, c  1
 given that, the equation has real and equal roots
i.e., D  b2  4ac  0
  4   4  k 1  0
2

 16  4k  k  4
 The value of k  4

(ii) kx 2  2 5 x  4  0
Sol:
The given equation kx 2  2 5 x  4  0 is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0 where
a  k , b  2 3 and c  4
 given that, the equation has real and equal roots
i.e., D  b2  4ac  0

 
2
 2 5  4 k  4  0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
20 5 5
 20  16k  k   k 
16 4 4
5
 The value of k 
4

(iii) 3x 2  5x  2k  0
Sol:
The given equation is 3x 2  5x  2k  0
This equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
Here, a  3, b  5 and c  2k
 given that, the equation has real and equal roots
i.e., D  b2  4ac  0
  5   4  3   2k   0
2

 25  24k
25
 k
24
25
 The value of k 
24

(iv) 4 x 2  kx  9  0
Sol:
The given equation is 4 x 2  kx  9  0
This equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
Here, a  4, b  k and c  9
 given that, the equation has real and equal roots
i.e., D  b2  4ac  0
 k2  4 49  0
 k 2  16  9
 k  16  9  4  3  12
 The value of k  12

(v) 2kx 2  40 x  25  0
Sol:
The given equation is 2kx 2  40 x  25  0
This equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
Here, a  2k , b  40 and c  25
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 given that, the equation has real and equal roots
i.e., D  b2  4ac  0
  10   4  2k  25  0
2

 1600  200k  0
1600
k  8 k  8
200
 The value of k  8

(vi) 9 x2  24 x  k  0
Sol:
The given equation is 9 x2  24 x  k  0
This equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
Here, a  9, b  24, and c  k
 given that, the nature of the roots of this equation is real and equal
i.e., D  b2  4ac  0
  24   4  4  k  0
2

 576  36k  0
576
k   16  k  16
36
 The value of k  16

(vii) 4 x 2  3kx  1  0
Sol:
The given equation is 4 x 2  3kx  1  0
This equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
Here, a  4, b  3k , and c  1
 given that, the nature of the roots of this equation is real and equal
i.e., D  b2  4ac  0
  3k   4  4  1  0
2

16 16 4
 k2  k  
9 9 3
4
 k 
3
4
 The value of k is 
3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________

(viii) x 2  2  5  2k  x  3  7  10k   0
Sol:
The given equation is x 2  2  5  2k  x  3  7  10k   0
Here, a  1, b  2,  5  2k  and c  3  7  10k 
 given that, the nature of the roots of this equation are real and equal
i.e., D  b2  4ac  0
 
 2  5  2k   4 1 3  7  10k   0

 4  5  2k   12  7  10k   0
2

 25  4k 2  20k  21  30k  0
 4k 2  10k  4  0  2k 2  5k  2  0
1
 k 2  k  2   1 k  2   k  2 or k 
2
1
 The value of k is 2 or
2

(ix)  3k  1 x 2  2  k  1 x  k  0
Sol:
The given equation is  3k  1 x 2  2  k  1 x  k  0
This equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
Here a  3k  1, b  2  k  1 and c  k
 Given that the nature of the roots of this equation are real and equal
i.e., D  b2  4ac  0
 2  k  1  4   3k  1  0
2

 4  k  1  4k 3k  1  0
2

  k  1  k  3k  1  0
2

 k 2  1  2k  3k 2  k  0
 2k 2  k  1  0
This equation can also be written as 2k 2  k  1  0
The value of k can obtain by
b  b 2  4ac
k
2a
Where a  2, b  1, c  1 from equation 2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
  1   1  4  2   1
2
1 9 4
k   1
2 2 4 4

  1   1  4  2   1


2 1
1 9 2 1
k   
2 2 4 42 2
1
 the value of k are 1 and
2

(x) kx2  kx  1  4 x 2  x
Sol:
The given equation is kx2  kx  1  4 x 2  x bringing all the ' x ' components to one side,
we get the equation as x 2  4  k   x  k  1  1  0
This equation is in the form of the general quadratic equation i.e., ax 2  bx  c  0
Here a  4  k , b  k  1 and c  1
 Given that the nature of the roots of the given equation are real and equal
i.e., D  b2  4ac  0
  k  1  4 x  4  k  1  0
2

 k 2  1  2k  16  4k  0
 k 2  2k  10  0 ………….(2)
The equation (2) is as of the form ax 2  bx  c here a  1, b  2, c  16  1  15

b  b 2  4ac
The value of k is obtained by k 
2a

  2    2   4 1 15
2

k  5
2 1
  2    2   4 1 15
2

k   3
2 1
 The value of k are 5 and -3 respectively for the given quadratic equation.

(xi)  k  1 x 2  20   k  3 x   k  8   0
Sol:
The given equation is  k  1 22  2  k  3 x   k  8   0
Here a  k  1, b  2  k  3 and c  k  8
 given that the nature of the roots of this equation are real and equal i.e.,
D  b2  4ac  0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 2  K  3  4   k  1   k  8  0
2

 4  k  3  4  k  1   k  8   0
2

  k  3   k  1 k  8   0
2

 k 2  9  6k   k 2  9k  8  0

 k 2  9  6k  k 2  9k  8  0
1
 3k  1  0  k 
3
1
 The value of ' k ' for the given equation is
3

(xii) x 2  2kx  7k  12  0
Sol:
The given equation is x 2  2kx  7k  12  0
Here a  1, b  2k and c  7k  12
 given that the nature of the roots of this equation are real and equal i.e.,
D  b2  4ac  0
  2k   4 1  7 k  12   0
2

 4k 2  28k  48  0
 k 2  7k  12  0
b  b 2  4ac
The value of k can be obtained by k 
2a
  7   49  48 7  1
a  1, b  7, c  12  k    4,3
2 2
 The value of ' k ' for the equation is 4 and 3

(xiii)  k  1 x 2  2  3k  1 x  8k  1  0
Sol:
The given equation is  k  1 x 2  2  3k  1 x  8k  1  0
It is in the form of the equation ax 2  bx  c  0
Here, a  k  1, b  2  3k  1 and c  8k  1
 given that the nature of the roots of the given equation are real and equal i.e.,
D  b2  4ac  0
 2  3k  1  4   k  1 x 8k  1  0
2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 4  3k  1  4  k  1 8k  1  0
2

  3k  1   k  1 8k  1  0
2

 9k 2  6k  1  8k 2  9k  1  0

 9k 2  6k  1  8k 2  9k  1  0
 k 2  3k  0
 k  k  3  0
 k  0 or k  3
 The values of ' k ' for the given quadratic equation are 0 and 3

(xiv) 5 x 2  4 x  2  k  4 x 2  2 x  1  0
Sol:
The given equation is 5 x 2  4 x  2  k  4 x 2  2 x  1  0
This can be written as x 2 5  4k   x  4  2k   2  k  0
This equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0 ………(1)
Here a  5  4k , b    4  2k  and c  2k
 given that the nature of the roots of this equation are real and equal i.e.,
D  b2  4ac  0
   4  2k   4  5  4k  2  k   0
2

  4  2k   4  5  4k  2  k   0
2

 16  4k 2  16k  4 10  5k  8k  4k 2   0
 16  4k 2  16k  40  20k  32k  16k 2  0
 20k 2  4k  24  0
5k 2  k  6  0 ………..(2)
As equation (2) is of the form (1), k can be obtained
b  b 2  4ac
By k  where a  5, b  1, c  6
2a
b  b2  4ac   1  1  4  5  6 6
k   
2a 25 5
b  b2  4ac   1  1  4  5  6
k    1
2a 25
6
The values of k for the given equation are  and 1
5
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________

(xv)  4  k  x 2   2k  4  x   8k  1  0
Sol:
The given equation is  4  k  x 2   2k  4  x   8k  1  0
This equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
Here a  4  k , b  2k  4 and c  8k  1
 given that the nature of the roots of this equation are real and equal i.e.,
D  b2  4ac  0
  2k  4   4  4  k  8k  1  0
2

 4k 2  16  16k  4  8k 2  32k  4  k   0

 4k 2  16  16k   8k 2  4    31 4  k  16  0

 4k 2  16  16k  32k 2  124k  16  0


 36k 2  108k  0
 9k 2  27k  0
 k 2  3k  0
 k  k  3  0
Hence k  0 or k  3
 The value of ‘k’ for the given quadratic equation is 0 and 3

(xvi)  2k  1 x 2  2  k  3 x   k  5   0
Sol:
The given equation is  2k  1 x 2  2  k  3 x   k  5   0
This equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
Here a  2k , b  2  k  3 and c  k  5
 given that the nature of the roots for this equation are real and equal i.e.,
D  b2  4ac  0
 2  k  3  4  2k  1 k  5  0
2

  k  3   2k  1 k  5   0
2

 k 2  9  6k   2k 2  11k  5  0
 k 2  5k  4  0
 k 2  5k  4  0 ……….(2)
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 k 2  4k  k  4  0
b  b 2  4ac
The value of ' k ' an be obtained by k 
2a
Where from  2  , a  1, b  5, c  4
5  25  4 1 4 5  25  16 5  41
k  
2 1 2 2
5  25  4 1 4 5  25  16 5  41
k  
2 1 2 2
5  41
 The value of ‘k’ from the given equation are
2

(vii) 4𝑥 2 − 2(𝑘 + 1)𝑥 + (𝑘 + 4) = 0


Sol:
The given equation is 4𝑥 2 − 2(𝑘 + 1)𝑥 + (𝑘 + 4) = 0
This equation is in the form of 𝑎𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑥 + 𝑐 = 0
Here a = 4, b = -2(k + 1), c = k + 4
⟹Given that the nature of the roots of this equation is real and equal i.e. 0 = 𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑐 = 0
⟹ [−2(𝑘 + 1)]2 − 4𝑥 + 𝑥(𝑘 + 4) = 0
⟹ 4(𝑘 + 1)2 − 16(𝑘 + 4) = 0
⟹ (𝑘 + 1)2 − 4(𝑘 + 4) = 0
⟹ 𝑘 2 + 1 + 2𝑘 − 4𝑘 − 16 = 0
⟹ 𝑘 2 − 2𝑘 − 15 = 0
𝑇ℎ𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑜𝑓 ′𝑘 ′ 𝑐𝑎𝑛 𝑏𝑒 𝑜𝑏𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 𝑏𝑦 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑢𝑙𝑎
−𝑏±√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐
𝑘= where a = 1, b = -2, c = -15
2𝑎
−𝑏+√𝑏2 −4𝑎𝑐 −(−2)+√4−4×1×−15 2+√69
⟹𝑘= = = = 𝑘 = −3
2𝑎 2𝑎 2×1
∴ The value of ‘k’ for the given equation are 5 and −3

(xviii) 𝑥 2 − 2(𝑘 + 1)𝑥 + (𝑘 + 4) = 0


Sol:
The given equation is 𝑥 2 − 2(𝑘 + 1)𝑥 + (𝑘 + 4) = 0
This equation is in the form of 𝑎𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑥 + 𝑐 = 0
Here a = 1, b = −2(𝑘 + 1) and c = k + 4
⟹ The nature of the roots of this equation is given that it is real and equal
i.e., O = 𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑐 = 0
⟹ [−2(𝑘 + 1)]2 − 4 × 1 × 𝑘 + 4 = 0
⟹ 4(𝑘 + 1)2 − 4(𝑘 + 4) − 0
⟹ 4(𝑘 2 + 1 + 2𝑘) − 4𝑘 − 16 = 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⟹ 𝑘2 + 𝑘 − 3 = 0 …..(ii)
−𝑏±√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐
The value of ‘k’ can be obtained by formula 𝑘 = where a = 1, b = 1, c = -3
2𝑎
−𝑏+√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐 −1+√1−4×1−3 1
𝑘= = =2
2𝑎 2×1
−𝑏−√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐 −1−√1−4×1×−3 1
𝑘= = =2
2𝑎 2×1
1
𝑇ℎ𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑜𝑓 ′𝑘 ′ 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑣𝑒𝑛 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑎𝑟𝑒 2

(xix) 4𝑥 2 − 2(𝑘 + 1)𝑥 + 4 = 0


Sol:
The given equation as 𝑘 2 𝑥 2 − 2(2𝑘 − 1)𝑥 + 4 = 0
It is in the form of the equation 𝑎𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑥 + 𝑐 = 0
Here 𝑎 = 𝑘 2 , 𝑏 = −2(2𝑘 − 1) 𝑎𝑚𝑑 𝑐 = 4
⟹ Given that the nature of the roots of the equation are real and equal
i.e., D = 𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑐 = 0
⟹ [−2(2𝑘 − 1)]2 − 4 × 𝑘 2 × 4 = 0
⟹ 4(2𝑘 − 1)2 − 16𝑘 2 = 0
⟹ (2𝑘 − 1)2 − 4𝑘 2 = 0
⟹ 4k – 1 = 0
1
k=4
1
∴ The value of ‘k’ for the given equation is 4

(xx) (𝑘 + 1)𝑥 2 − 2(𝑘 − 1)𝑥 + 1 = 0


Sol:
The given equation is (𝑘 + 1)𝑥 2 − 2(𝑘 − 1)𝑥 + 1 = 0
It is in the form of the equation 𝑎𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑥 + 𝑐 = 0
Here a = k + 1, b = −2(𝑘 − 1)𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐 = 1
⟹ Given that the nature of the roots for the equation are real and equal
i.e., D = 𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑐 = 0
⟹[−2(𝑘 − 1)]2 − 4 × [𝑘 + 1] × 1 = 0
⟹ 4(𝑘 − 1)2 − 4(𝑘 + 1) = 0
⟹ (𝑘 − 1)2 − (𝑘 + 1) = 0
⟹ 𝑘 2 + 1 − 2𝑘 − 𝑘 − 1 = 0
⟹ 𝑘 2 − 3𝑘 = 0
⟹ k(k – 3) = 0
∴ Here k = 0 or k = 3
∴ The value of ‘k’ for the given equation is k = 0 or k = 3
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
(xxi) 2𝑥 2 + 𝑘𝑥 + 3 = 0
Sol:
The given equation is 2𝑥 2 + 𝑘𝑥 + 3 = 0
It is in the form of the equation 𝑎𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑥 + 𝑐 = 0
Here a = 2, b = k, and c = 3
⟹ Given that the roots of the equation are real and equal i.e., D = 𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑐 = 0
⟹ 𝑘2 − 4 × 2 × 3 = 0
⟹ 𝑘 2 = 24
⟹ k = √24 = ±2√6
∴ The value of k for the given equation is ±2√6

(xxii) kx(x – 2) + 6 = 0
Sol:
The given equation is 𝑘𝑥 2 − 2𝑘𝑥 + 6 = 0
a = 6, b = −2k, c = 6
⟹ Given that the roots are real and equal
i.e., D = 𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑐 = 0 ⟹ 4𝑘 2 − 4𝑘 × 6 = 0
⟹ 𝑘 2 − 6𝑘 = 0
⟹ k(k – 6) = 0
⟹ k = 0 or 6
∴ The value of k for the given equation is 0 or 6

(xxiii) 𝑥 2 − 4𝑘𝑥 + 𝑘 = 0
Sol:
The given equation is 𝑥 2 − 4𝑘𝑥 + 𝑘 = 0
a = 1, b = −4k, c = k
⟹ Given that the roots are real and equal i.e., D = 𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑐 = 0
⟹ 16𝑘 2 − 4𝑘 = 0
⟹ 4𝑘 2 − 𝑘 = 0
⟹ 𝑘(4𝑘 + 1) = 0
1
k = 0, k = 4
1
∴ The value of k for the given equation is 0 or 4

3. In the following determine the set of values of k foe which the green quadratic equation has
real roots:
(i) 2 x 2  3x  k  0 (ii) 2 x 2  kx  3  0 (iii) 2 x 2  5 x  k  0 (iv) kx 2  6 x  1  0
(v) x 2  kx  9  0
Sol:
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
(i) 2 x 2  3x  k  0
Sol:
The given equation is 2 x 2  3x  k  0
 given that the quadratic equation has real roots i.e., D  b2  4ac  0
Given here a  2, b  3, c  k
 9  4 2 k  0
 9  8k  0
9
 9  8k  k 
8
4
The value of k does not exceed to have roots
8
(ii) 2 x 2  kx  3  0
Sol:
The given equation is 2 x 2  kx  3  0
 given that the quadratic equation has real roots i.e., D  b2  4ac  0
here a  2, b  k , c  3
 k2  4 23  0
 k 2  24  0
 k 2  24
 k  24  k  2 6 or k  2 6
 The value of k does not exceed 2 6 and 2 6 to have real roots

(iii) 2 x 2  5 x  k  0
Sol:
The given equation is 2 x 2  5 x  k  0
 given that the equation has real roots i.e., D  b2  4ac  0
 25  4  2  k  0
 25  8k  0
 8k  25
25
The value of k should not exceed to have real roots.
8
(iv) kx 2  6 x  1  0
Sol:
The given equation is kx 2  6 x  1  0
Here a  k , b  6, c  1
 given that the equation has real roots
i.e., D  b2  4ac  0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 36  4  k 1  0
 36  4k
36
k 
7
k 9
The value of k should not exceed the value '9 ' to have real roots.

(v) x 2  kx  9  0
Sol:
The given equation is x 2  kx  9  0
Here a  1, b  k , c  9
 given that the equation has real roots
i.e., D  b2  4ac  0
   k   4  1 9  0
2

 k 2  36  0
 k 2  36
 k  6 or k  6
The ‘k’ value exits between 6 and 6 to have the real roots for the given equation.

(vi) 2𝑥 2 + 𝑘𝑥 + 2 = 0
Sol:
The given equation is 2𝑥 2 + 𝑘𝑥 + 2 = 0
Here a = 2, b = k, c = 2
⟹ Given that the equation has real roots
i.e., D = 𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑐 ≥ 0
⟹ 𝑘2 − 4 × 2 × 2 ≥ 0
⟹ 𝑘 2 − 16 ≥ 0
⟹ 𝑘 ≥ 16
⟹ 𝑘 ≥ √16
⟹ 𝑘 ≥ 4 or 𝑘 ≤ −4
∴ The k value lies between -4 and 4 to have the real roots for the given equation.

(vii) 3𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 + 𝑘 = 0
Sol:
The given equation has 3𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 + 𝑘 = 0
Here a = 3, b = 2, c= k
⟹ Given that the quadratic equation has real roots i.e., D = 𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑐 ≥ 0
⟹4–4×3×k≥0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⟹ 4 – 12k ≥ 0
4
⟹ k ≤ 12
1
⟹k≤3
1
The ‘k’ value should not exceed 3 to have the real roots for the given equation

(viii) 4𝑥 2 − 3𝑘 + 1 = 0
Sol:
The given equation has 4𝑥 2 − 3𝑘 + 1 = 0
Here a = 4, b = -3k, c = 1
⟹ Given that that quadratic equation has real roots i.e., D = 𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑐 ≥ 0
= 9𝑘 2 − 16 ≥ 0
16
⟹ 9𝑘 2 ≥ 16 = 𝑘 2 ≥ 9
16 4 4
⟹ 𝑘 ≥ √ 9 ⟹ 𝑘 ≥ 3 𝑜𝑟𝑘 ≤ − 3
4 4
∴ The value of k should be in between − 3 𝑎𝑛𝑑 3 to have real roots for the given
equation.

(ix) 2𝑥 2 + 𝑘𝑥 − 4 = 0
Sol:
The given equation is 2𝑥 2 + 𝑘𝑥 − 4 = 0
Here a = 2, b = k, c = -4
⟹ Given that the quadratic equation has real roots i.e., D = 𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑐 ≥ 0
⟹ 𝑘 2 + 32 ≥ 0
⟹ k ≤ √32
⟹k∈R
∴ The k ∈ R for the equation to have the real roots

4. For what value of k ,  4  k  x 2   2k  4  x   8k  1  0, is a perfect square


Sol:
The given equation is  4  k  x 2   2k  4  x   8k  1  0,
Here a  4  k , b  2k  4, c  8  1
The discriminant D  b2  4ac
  2k  4   4   4  k  8k  1
2

 4k 2  16  4k  4 32k  4  8k 2  k 

  4k 2  8k 2  4k  31k  4  4 
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 4 9k 2  27k 

 D  4 9k 2  27k 
The given equation is a perfect square
D0
 4 9k 2  27 k   0
 9k 2  27k  0
 3k 2  9k  0
 k 2  3k  0
 k  k  3  0
 k  0 or k  3
 The value of k is '0 ' or '3' for the equation to be a perfect square

5. Find the least positive value of k for which the equation x 2  kx  4  0 has real roots
Sol:
The given equation is x 2  kx  4  0
 given that the equation has real roots
i.e., D  b2  4ac  0
 k 2  4 1 4  0
 k 2  16  0
 k  4 or k  4
 The least positive value of k  4, for the equation to have real roots

6. Find the value of k for which the gives quadratic equation has real and distinct roots
(i) kx 2  2 x  1  0 (ii) kx 2  6 x  1  0 (iii) x 2  kx  9  0
Sol:
(i) kx 2  2 x  1  0
The given equation is kx 2  2 x  1  0
Here a  k , b  2, c  1
 given that the equation has real and distinct roots
i.e., D  b2  4ac  0
 4  4 1 k  0
 4  4k  0  4k  4
4
4
41
 The value of k is 1 i.e., k  1 for which the quadratic equation has real and distinct roots
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
(ii) kx 2  6 x  1  0
The given equation is kx 2  6 x  1  0
Here a  k , b  6, c  1
 given that the equation has real and distinct roots
Hence D  b2  4ac  0
 36  4 1 k  0
 36  4k  0
 4k  36
36
k  1 k 9
41
 k  9 for the equation to have real and distinct roots

(iii) x 2  kx  9  0
The given equation is x 2  kx  9  0
Here a  1, b  k , c  9
 given that the equation is having real and distinct roots
Hence D  b2  4ac  0
 k 2  4 1 9  0
 k 2  36  0
 k 2  36
 k  6 or k  6
 The value of " k " lies in between 6 and 6 to have the real roots for the given equation

7. If the roots of the equation  b  c  x 2   c  a  x   a  b   0 are equal, then prove that


2b  a  c
Sol:
The given equation is  b  c  x 2   c  a  x   a  b   0
This equation has the general form i.e., ax 2  bx  c  0
Here a  b  c, b  c  a and c  a  b
 given that the equation has real and equal roots
Hence b2  4ac  D  0
  c  a   4   b  c  a  b   0
2

 c 2  a 2  2ac  4  ab  b 2  ac  cb   0

 c2  a 2  2ac  4ab  4b2  4ac  4cb  0


 c 2  a 2  2ac  4ab  4b2  4cb  0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
  a  c   4ab  4b 2  4cb  0
2

  c  a  2b   0
2

 c  a  2b  0
 c  a  2b
Hence, it is proved that c  a  2b

8. If the roots of the equation  a 2  b 2  x 2  2  x  bd  x   c 2  d 2   0 are equal, prove that


a c
 .
b d
Sol:
The given equation is  a 2  b 2  x 2  2  x  bd  x   c 2  d 2   0
This equation has the general form ax 2  bx  c  0
Here a  a 2  b 2 , b  2  ac  bd  c   c 2  d 2   0
 given here that the nature of the real and equal
i.e., D  b2  4ac  0
 2  ac  bd   4 x  a 2  b2  c2  d 2   0
2

 4  ac  bd   4  a 2  b2  c 2  d 2   0
2

  ac  bd    a 2  b 2  c 2  d 2   0
2

 a 2 c 2  b 2 d 2  2abcd   a 2 c 2  a 2 d 2  b 2 c 2  b 2 d 2   0

 a 2 c  22 d 2  2abcd   a 2c 2  a 2 d 2  b 2c 2  b 2 d 2   0

 2abcd  a 2 d 2  b2c 2  0
 abcd  abcd  a 2 d 2  b2c 2  0
 ad  bc  ad   bc  ad  bc   0
  ad  bc  bc  ad   0
Case i:
 ab  bc  0
 ad  bc
a c
 
b d
Case ii:
  bc  ad   0
 bc  ad
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
a c
 
b d
a c
 Hence, it is proved that 
b d

9. If the roots the equation ax2  2bx  c  0 and bx 2  2 cax  b  0 are simultaneously real,
then prove that b 2  ac
Sol:
Given equations are ax2  2bx  c  0 and bx 2  2 cax  b  0
Then two equations are of the form ax 2  bx  c  0
 given that the roots of these two equations are real. Hence D  0 i.e., b2  4ac  0
Let us assume that ax2  2bx  c  0 be equations …….(1)
and bx  2 acx  b  0 be equation
2
…….(2)
from equation (1)  b  4ac  0 2

 4b2  4ac  0 …….(3)


From equation (2)  b2  4ac  0

 
2
 2 ac  4b 2  0 …….(4)
Given that the roots of (1) and (2) are simultaneously real hence equation (3) equation (4)
 4b2  4ac  4ac  4b2
 8ac  8b2
 b2  ac
 Hence, it is proved that b 2  ac

10. If p, q are real and p  q, then show that the roots of the equation
 p  q  x 2  5  p  q  x  2  p  q   0 are real and unequal
Sol:
The given equation is  p  q  x 2  5  p  q   0
 given p, q are real and p  q
The discriminant D  b24ac
 5  p  q   4   p  q    2  p  q  
4

 25  p  q   8  p  q 
2 2

We know that the square of nay integer is always positive i.e., greater than zero
Hence D  b2  4ac  0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
As given that p, q are real and p  q
 25  p  q   8  p  q   0 i.e., D  0
2 2

 The roots of this equation are real and unequal

11. If the roots of the equation  c 2  ab  x 2  2  a 2  bc  x  b 2  ac  0 are equal, prove that


either a  0 or a3  b3  c3  3abc
Sol:
The given equation is  c 2  ab  x 2  2  a 2  bc  x  b 2  ac  0
This equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
Here a  c 2  ab, b  2  a 2  bc  and c  b2  ac
 given that the roots of this equation are equal
Hence D  0 i.e., b2  4ac  0
 2  a 2  bc   4  c 2  ab  b2  ac   0
2

 4  a2  bc   4  c2  ab  b2  ac   0
2

 4a  a 3  b3  c 3  3abc   0

 4a  0 or a3  b3  c3  3abc  0
 a  0 or a3  b3  c3  3abc
 hence, it is proved

12. Show that the equation 2  a 2  b 2  x 2  2  a  b  x  1  0 has no real roots, when a  b.


Sol:
The given equation is 2  a 2  b 2  x 2  2  a  b  x  1  0
This equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
Here a  2  a 2  b 2  , b  2  a  b  and c  1
 given that a  b
The discriminant D  b2  4ac
 2  a  b   4  2  a 2  b2   1
2

 4  a  b   8  a 2  b2 
2

 4  a 2  b 2  2ab   8a 2  8b 2

 4a 2  4b2  2ab


As given that a  b, as the discriminant 0 has negative squares, 0 will be less than zero
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Hence 0  0, when a  b

13. Prove that both the roots of the equation  x  a  x  b    x  b  x  c    x  c  x  a   0


are real but they are equal only when a  b  c
Sol:
The given equation is  x  a  x  b    x  b  x  c    x  c  x  a   0
By solving the equation, we get it as
3x 2  2 x  a  b  c    ab  bc  ca   0
This equation is in the form of ax 2  bx  c  0
Here a  3, b  2  a  b  c  and c  ab  bc  ca
The discriminant D  b2  4ac
D   2 a  b  c   4  3 ab  bc  ca 
2

 4  a  b  c   12  ab  bc  ca 
2

 4  a  b  c   3  ab  bc  ca 
2
 
 4  a 2  b 2  c 2  ab  bc  ca 

 2  2a 2  2b 2  2c 2  2ab  2bc  2ca 

 2  a  b    b  c    c  a  
2 2 2
 
Here clearly 0  0, if 0  0 then
a  b  b  c   c  a   0
2 2 2

 a  b  0, b  c  0, c  a  0
Hence a  b  c
Hence, it is proved.

14. If a, b, c are real numbers such that ac  0, then show that at least one of the equations
ax 2  bx  c  0 and ax2  bx  c  0 has real roots
Sol:
The given equations are ax 2  bx  c  0 ………(1)
And ax  bx  c  0
2
………(2)
Given equations are of the form ax 2  bx  c  0 also given that a, b, c are real numbers
and ac  0
The discriminant D  b2  4ac
For equation (1)  b2  4ac ………(3)
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
For equation (2)  b 2  4  a    c 
 b2  4ac ………(4)
As a, b, c are real and given that ac  0 hence b2  4ac  0 and b2  4ac  0
0  0

Exercise 8.7

1. Find the consecutive numbers whose squares have the sum 85.
Sol:
Let the two consecutive natural numbers be ‘x’ and ‘x + 1’
⇒ Given that the sum of their squares is 85.
Then by hypothesis, we get
𝑥 2 + (𝑥 + 1)2 = 85
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 + 1 = 85
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 + 1 − 85 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 + 84 = 0 ⇒ 2[𝑥 2 + 𝑥 − 42 ] = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 − 6𝑥 − 42 = 0 [𝑏𝑦 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑚𝑒𝑡ℎ𝑜𝑑 𝑜𝑓 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑖𝑠𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛]
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 7) − 6(𝑥 + 7) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 6)(𝑥 + 7) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = 6 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 7
Case i: if x = 6 x + 1 = 6 + 1 = 7
Case ii: If x = 7 x + 1 = −7 + 1 = −6
∴ The consecutive numbers that the sum of this squares be 85 are 6,7 and −6, −7.

2. Divide 29 into two parts so that the sum of the squares of the parts is 425.
Sol:
Let the two parts be ‘x’ and 29 – x
⇒ Given that the sum of the squares of the parts is 425.
Then, by hypothesis, we have
⇒ 𝑥 2 + (29 − 𝑥)2 = 425
⇒ 2𝑥 2 − 58𝑥 + 841 − 425 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 − 58𝑥 + 416 = 0
⇒ 2[𝑥 2 − 29𝑥 + 208] = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 29𝑥 + 208 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 13𝑥 − 16𝑥 + 208 = 0 [𝐵𝑦 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑚𝑒𝑡ℎ𝑜𝑑 𝑜𝑓 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑖𝑠𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛]
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 13) − 16(𝑥 − 13) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 13)(𝑥 − 16) = 0
⇒ x = 13 or x = 16
Case i: If x = 13; 29 – x = 29 – 13 = 16
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Case ii: x = 16; 29 – x = 29 – 16 = 13
∴ The two parts that the sum of the squares of the parts is 425 are 13, 16.

3. Two squares have sides x cm and (x + 4)cm. The sum of this areas is 656 cm2. Find the
sides of the squares.
Sol:
The given sides of two squares = x cm and (x + 4) cm
The sum of their areas = 656 cm2.
The area of the square = side × side.
∴ Area of the square = x (x + 4) cm2.
⇒ Given that sum of the areas is 656 cm2.
Hence by hypothesis, we have
⇒ x(x + 4) + x(x + 4) = 656
⇒ 2x (x + 4) = 656
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 4𝑥 = 328 [𝑑𝑖𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑏𝑜𝑡ℎ 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑠 𝑏𝑦 2]
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 4𝑐 − 328 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 20𝑥 − 16𝑥 − 328 = 0 [∵ 𝐵𝑦 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑚𝑒𝑡ℎ𝑜𝑑 𝑜𝑓 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑖𝑠𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛]
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 20) − 16(𝑥 + 20) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 20)(𝑥 − 16) = 0 ⇒ 𝑥 = −20 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 16
Case i: If x = 16; x + 4 = 20
∴ The sides of the squares are 16 cm and 20 cm.
Note: No negative value is considered as the sides will never be measured negatively.

4. The sum of two numbers is 48 and their product is 432. Find the numbers
Sol:
Given the sum of two numbers is 48
Let the two numbers be x and 48 – x also given their product is 432.
Hence x(48 – x) = 432
⇒ 48x – x2 = 432
⇒ 48x − x2 – 432 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 48𝑥 + 432 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 36𝑥 − 12𝑥 + 432 = 0 [By method of factorisation]
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 36) − 12(𝑥 − 36) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 36)(𝑥 − 12) = 0
⇒ x = 36 or x = 12
∴ The two numbers are 12, 36.
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
5. If an integer is added to its square, the sum is 90. Find the integer with the help of quadratic
equation.
Sol:
Let the integer be ‘x’
Given that if an integer is added to its square, the sum is 90.
⇒ 𝑥 + 𝑥 2 = 90
⇒ 𝑥 + 𝑥 2 − 90 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 10𝑥 − 9𝑥 − 90 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 10) − 9(𝑥 + 10) = 0
⇒ x = −10 or x = 9
∴ The value of an integer are -10 or 9.

6. Find the whole numbers which when decreased by 20 is equal to 69 times the reciprocal of
the members.
Sol:
1
Let the whole number be x as it is decreased by 20 ⇒ (x – 20) = 69. (2)
1
⇒ 𝑥. 20 = 69. (𝑥)
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 20) = 69
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 20𝑥 − 69 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 23 + 3𝑥 − 69 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 23) + 3(𝑥 − 623) = 0
⇒ (x – 23) (x + 3) = 0
⇒ x = 23; x = −3
As the whole numbers are always positive, x = −3 is not considered.
∴ The whole number x = 23.

7. Find the two consecutive natural numbers whose product is 20.


Sol:
Let the two consecutive natural numbers be ‘x’ and ‘x + 2’
⇒ Given that the product of the natural numbers is 20
Hence ⇒ x(x + 1) = 20
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 = 20
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 − 20 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 5𝑥 − 4𝑥 − 20 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 5) − 4(𝑥 + 5) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = −5 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 4
Considering positive value of x as x ∈ N
For r = 4, x + 1 = 4 + 1 = 5
∴ The two consecutive natural numbers are 4 as 5.
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________

8. The sum of the squares of the two consecutive odd positive integers as 394. Find them.
Sol:
Let the consecutive odd positive integers are 2x – 1 and 2x + 1
Given that the sum of the squares is 394.
⇒ (2𝑥 − 1)2 + (2𝑥 + 1)2 = 394
⇒ 4𝑥 2 + 1 − 4𝑥 + 4𝑥 2 + 1 + 4𝑥 = 394
⇒ 8𝑥 2 + 2 = 394
⇒ 4𝑥 2 = 392
⇒ 𝑥 2 = 36
⇒x=6
As x = 6, 2x – 1 = 2 × 6 – 1 = 11
2x + 1 = 2 × 6 + 1 = 13
∴ The two consecutive odd positive numbers are 11 and 13.

9. The sum of two numbers is 8 and 15 times the sum of their reciprocals is also 8. Find the
numbers.
Sol:
Let the numbers be x and 8 – x
Given that the sum of these numbers is 8
And 15 times the sum of their reciprocals as 8
1 1
⇒ 15 (𝑥 + 8−𝑥) = 8
(8−𝑥)+𝑥
⇒ 15 ( 𝑥(8−𝑥) ) = 8
⇒ 15 ((8 − 𝑥) + 𝑥) = 8(𝑥(8 − 𝑥))
⇒ 15 [8 − 𝑥 + 𝑥] = 8𝑥(8 − 𝑥)
⇒ 120 = 64x – 8x2
⇒ 8𝑥 2 − 64𝑥 + 120 = 0
⇒ 8[𝑥 2 − 8𝑥 + 15] = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 − 3𝑥 + 15 = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 5)(𝑥 − 3) = 0
⇒ x = 5 or x = 3
∴ The two numbers are 5 and 3.

6
10. The sum of a numbers and its positive square root is 25. Find the numbers.
Sol:
Let the number be x
By the hypothesis, we have
6
⇒ x + √𝑥 = 25
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ let us assume that x = y2, we get
6
⇒ 𝑦 2 + 𝑦 = 25
⇒ 25𝑦 2 + 25𝑦 − 6 = 0
−𝑏±√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐
The value of ‘y’ can be obtained by y = 2𝑎
Where a = 25, b = 25, c = −6
−25±√625−600
⇒y= 50
−25±35 1 −11
⇒y= ⇒ 𝑦 = 5 𝑜𝑟
50 10
1 2 1
𝑥 = 𝑦 2 = (5) = 25
1
∴ 𝑇ℎ𝑒 𝑛𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟 𝑥 = 25.

11. The sum of a number and its square is 63/4. Find the numbers.
Sol:
Let the number be x.
63
Given that the sum of x and its square = 4
2 63
⇒x+𝑥 = 4
⇒ 4x + 4x – 63 = 0
2

⇒ 4x2 + 4x – 63 = 0
⇒ 4x2 + 4x – 63 = 0 ….(i)
The value of x can be found by the formula
−𝑏±√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐
𝑥= 2𝑎
⇒ ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑎 = 4, 𝑏 = 4 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐 = −63 𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 (i)
−4±√16−4×4×−63
𝑥= 2×4
−4±√16+16×63
= 2×4
−4±√16+1008 7 −4−√16+1008 −9
𝑥= = 2;𝑥 = =
8 8 2
7 −9
∴ The values of x i. e. , the numbers is 2 , .
2

12. There are three consecutive integers such that the square of the first increased by the
product of the first increased by the product of the others the two gives 154. What are the
integers?
Sol:
Let the three consecutive numbers x, x+1 and x +8.
According to the hypothesis given
𝑥 2 + (𝑥 + 1)(𝑥 + 2) = 154.
⇒ 𝑥 2 + [𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 + 2] = 154
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 = 152
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 − 152 = 0 …(i)
−𝑏±√𝑏2 −4𝑎𝑐
𝑇ℎ𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑜𝑓 ′𝑥 ′ 𝑐𝑎𝑛 𝑏𝑒 𝑜𝑏𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑑 𝑏𝑦 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑢𝑙𝑎 𝑥 = 2𝑎
ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑎 = 2, 𝑏 = 3 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐 = 152 𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 (𝑖)
−3+√9−4×2×−152
𝑥= 2×3
−3+√9+8×152 −19
𝑥= = 8,
6 2
𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑥
If x = 8, x + 1 = 9, x + 2 = 10
∴ The three consecutive integers are 8, 9, and 10

13. The product of two successive integral multiples of 5 is 300. Determine the multiples.
Sol:
Given that the product of two successive integral multiples of 5 is 300.
Let the integers be 5x, and 5(x + 1)
Then, by the integers be 5x and 5(x + 1)
Then, by the hypothesis, we have
5x ∙ 5(x + 1) = 300
⇒ 25x (x + 1) = 300
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 = 12
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 − 12 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 4𝑥 − 3𝑥 − 12 = 0
⇒ x(x + 4) −3(x + 4) = 0
⇒ (x + 4) (x – 3) = 0
⇒ x = −4 or x = 3
If x = −4, 5x = −20, 5(x + 1) = −15
x = 3, 5x = 15, 5(x + 1) = 20
∴ The two successive integral multiples are 15, 20 or −15, −20.

14. The sum of the squares of two numbers as 233 and one of the numbers as 3 less than twice
the other number find the numbers.
Sol:
Let the number be x
Then the other number = 2x – 3
According to the given hypothesis,
⇒ 𝑥 2 + (2𝑥 − 3)2 = 233
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 4𝑥 2 + 9 − 12𝑥 = 233
⇒ 5𝑥 2 − 12𝑥 − 224 = 0 …. (i)
−𝑏±√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐
The value of ‘x’ can be obtained by the formula 𝑥 = 2𝑎
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Here a = 5, b = 12 and c = -224 from (i)
−(−12)+√144+20×224
𝑥= =8
10
−(−12)−√144+20×224 −28
𝑥= =
10 5
𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑥 = 8
2x – 3 = 16 – 3 = 15
∴ The two numbers are 8 and 15.

15. Find the consecutive even integers whose squares have the sum 340.
Sol:
Let the consecutive even integers be 2x and 2x + 2.
Then according to the given hypothesis,
(2𝑥)2 + (2𝑥 + 2)2 = 340
⇒ 8𝑥 2 + 8𝑥 − 336 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 − 42 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 − 6𝑥 − 42 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 7) − 6(𝑥 + 7) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 7)(𝑥 − 6) = 0
⇒ x = − 7 or x = 6
Considering, the positive integers of x.
⇒ x = 6; 2x = 12 and 2x + 2 = 14.
∴ The two consecutive even integers are 12 and 14.

4
16. The difference of two numbers is 4. If the difference of their reciprocals is 21. Find the
numbers.
Sol:
Let the two numbers be x and x – 4
Given that the difference of two numbers is 4.
1 1 4
By the given hypothesis, we have 𝑥−4 − 𝑥 = 21
𝑥−𝑥+4 4
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥−4) = 21
⇒ 84 = 4x(x – 4)
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 − 21 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 7𝑥 + 3𝑥 − 21 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 7) + 3(𝑥 − 7) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 7)(𝑥 + 3) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = 7 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = −3 and
If x = −3, x – 4 = −3 −4 = −7
Hence, required numbers are 3, 7 and −3, −7
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
17. Let us find two natural numbers which differ by 3 and whose squares have the sum 117.
Sol:
Let the numbers be x and x – 3
By the given hypothesis,
𝑥 2 + (𝑥 − 3)2 = 117
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 2 + 9 − 6𝑥 − 117 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 − 6𝑥 − 108 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 − 54 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 9) + 6(𝑥 − 9) = 0
⇒ (x – 9) (x + 6) = 0
⇒ x = 9 or x = −6
Considering positive value of x
x = 9, x – 3 = 9 – 3 = 6
∴ The two numbers be 9 and 6.

18. The sum of the squares of three consecutive natural numbers as 149. Find the numbers
Sol:
Let the numbers be x, x + 1 and x + 2 according to the given hypothesis.
𝑥 2 + (𝑥 + 1)2 + (𝑥 + 2)2 = 149
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 2 + 1 + 2𝑥 + 𝑥 2 + 4 + 4𝑥 = 149
⇒ 3𝑥 2 + 6𝑥 + 5 − 149 = 0
⇒ 3𝑥 2 + 𝑥 − 144 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 − 48 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 8) − 6(𝑥 + 8) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 8)(𝑥 − 6) = 0
⇒ x = −8 or x = 6
Considering the positive value of x
𝑥 = 6, 𝑥 + 1 = 7 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑥 + 2 = 8
∴ The three consecutive numbers are 6, 7, 8.

1
19. Sum of two numbers is 16. The sum of their reciprocals is 3. Find the numbers.
Sol:
Given that the sum of two numbers is 16.
Let the two numbers be x and 16 – x
By the given hypothesis, we have
1 1 1
⇒ 𝑥 + 16−𝑥 = 3
16−𝑥+𝑥 1
⇒ 𝑥(16−𝑥) = 3
⇒ 48 = 16x – x2
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 16𝑥 + 48 = 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 12𝑥 − 4𝑥 + 48 = 0
⇒ x(x – 12) – 4(x – 12) = 0
⇒ (x – 12) (x – 4) = 0
⇒ x = 12 or x = 4
∴ The two numbers are 4 and 12.

20. Determine two consecutive multiples of 3, whose product is 270.


Sol:
Let the two consecutive multiples of 3 are 3x and 3x + 3
Given that their product is 270
⇒ (3x) (3x + 3) = 270
⇒ x(3x + 3) = 90
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 − 30 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 6𝑥 − 5𝑥 − 30 = 0
⇒ x(x + 6) −5(x + 6) = 0
⇒ (x + 6) (x – 5) = 0
⇒ x = 5 or x = −6
Considering the positive value of x.
⇒ x = 5, 3x = 15 and 3x + 3 = 18
∴ The two consecutive multiples of 3 are 15 and 18.

17
21. The sum of a number and its reciprocal is . Find the number.
4
Sol:
Let the number be ‘x’
According to the given hypothesis
1 17
𝑥+𝑥 = 4
𝑥 2 +1 17
⇒ =
𝑥 4
⇒ 4(𝑥 2 + 1) = 17𝑥
⇒ 4𝑥 2 − 17𝑥 + 4 = 0
⇒ 4𝑥 2 − 16𝑥 − 𝑥 + 4 = 0
⇒ 4𝑥(𝑥 − 4) − 1(𝑥 − 4) = 0
1
⇒ 𝑥 = 4 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 4
∴ 𝑇ℎ𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑥 = 4

22. A two-digit number is such that the products of its digits is 8. When 18 is subtracted from
the number, the digits interchange their places. Find the number?
Sol:
Let the two digits be x and x – 2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Given that the product of their digits is 8.
⇒ x(x – 2) = 8
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 2𝑥 − 8 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 + 2𝑥 − 8 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 4) + 2(𝑥 − 4) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 4)(𝑥 + 2) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = 4 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = −2
Considering the positive value x = 4, x – 2 = 2.
∴ The two digit number is 42.

23. A two digits number is such that the product of the digits is 12. When 36 is added to the
number, the digits inter change their places determine the number
Sol:
Let the tens digit be x
12
Then, the units digit 
x
12
 Number  10x 
x
And, number obtained by interchanging the
12 120
Digits  10  x  x.
x x
12 120
 10 x   36  x
x x
12  120
 9x   36  0
x
 9 x 2  108  36 x  0
 9  x 2  4 x  12   0

 x 2  6 x  2 x  12  0
 x  x  6  2  x  6  0

  x  2  x  6   0  x  2 or 6

But, a digit can never be negative, 80 x  2


12
Hence, the digit  10  2   20  6  26
2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
24. A two digit number is such that the product of the digits is 16. When 54 is subtracted from
the number the digits are interchanged. Find the number
Sol:
Let the two digits be:
16
Tens digits be x and units 
x
16
Number  10x 
x
16
Number obtained by interchanging  10  x
x
 16   16 
 10 x    10   x   5u
 x  x 
16 160
 10 x    x  54
7 x
 10 x 2  16  160  x 2  54 x
 9 x 2  54 x  144  0
 x 2  6 x  16  0
 x 2  8x  2 x  16  0
 x  x  8  2  x  8  0

  x  8 or x  2

But, a digit can never be negative, hence x  8


16
Hence the required number  10  8   82
8
25. Two numbers differ by 3 and their product is 504. Find the number
Sol:
Let the two numbers be x and x  3 given that x  x  3  504

 x 2  3x  504  0
 x 2  24 x  21x  504  0
 x  x  24   21 x  24   0

  x  24  x  21  0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 x  24 or x  21
Case 1: If x  24, x  3  21
Case 1: If x  21, x  3  24
 The two numbers are 21, 24 or 21, 24

26. Two number differ by 4 and their product is 192. Find the numbers?
Sol: Let the two numbers be x and x  4
Given that their product is 192
 x  x  4   192

 x 2  4 x  192  0
 x 2  16 x  12 x  192  0
 x  x  16   12  x  16   0

  x  16  x  12   0

 x  16 or x  12
Considering the positive value of x
x  16,  x  4  16  4  12
 The two numbers are 12,16

27. A two-digit number is 4 times the sum of its digits and twice the product of its digits. Find
the numbers
Sol:
Let the digits at tens and units place of the number be x and y respectively then, it is
given that  10x  y
 10 x  y  4 (sum of digits) and 2xy

 10 x  y  4  x  y  and 10 x  y  3xy

 10 x  y  4 x  4 y and 10 x  y  3xy
 6 x  3 y  0 and 10 x  y  3xy  0

 y  2 x and 10 x  2 x  2 xy  2 x 

 12 x  4 x 2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 4 x 2  12 x  0
 4 x  x  3  0

 4 x  0 or x  3
 here we have y  2 x  2  3  6
 x  3 and y  6
Hence 10 x  y  10  3  6  36
 The required two digit number is 36

28. The sum of the squares of two positive integers is 208. If the square of the large numbr is
18 times the smaller. Find the numbers
Sol:
Let the smaller number be x. Then square of a larger number  18x
Also, square of the smaller number  x 2
It is given that the sum of the square of the integers is 208.
 x 2  18 x  208
 x 2  18 x  208  0
 x 2  26 x  8x  208  0
  x  26  x  8   0  x  8 or x  26

But, the numbers are positive. Therefore x  8


 square of the larger number  18x  18  8  144
 larger number are 8 and 18.

1
29. The sum of two numbers is 18. The sum of their reciprocals is . Find the numbers
4
Sol: Let The numbers be x and 18  x
 according to the given hypothesis
1 1 1
 
x 18  x 4
18  x  x 1
 
x 18  x  4
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 72  18x  x2

 x 2  18x  72  0
 x 2  6 x  12 x  72  0
 x  x  6   12  x  12   0

 x  6 or x  12
 The two number are 6,12
1 1 3
30. The sum of two numbers a and b. is 15. and the sum of their reciprocals and is .
a b 10
Find the numbers a and b.
Sol:
Let us assume a number ' x '
1 1 3
Such that  
x 15  x 10

15  x  x 3
Hence  
x 15  x  10

 150  45 x  3x 2

 3x 2  45x  150  0

 x 2  15x  50  0

 22  10 x  5 x  50  0

 x  x  10   5  x  10   0

  x  10  x  5   0

 x  5 or x  10

Case i: If x  a, a  5 and

b  15  x, b  10.

Case ii: if x  15  a  15  10  5 x x  a  10

b  15  10  5
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 a  5, b  10 or a  10 and b  5

1
31. The sum of two numbers is 9. The sum of their reciprocals is . Find the numbers.
2
Sol:
Given that the sum of two numbers is 9 Let the two numbers be x and 9  x
By the given hypothesis, we have
1 1 1
 
x 9 x 2
9 x x 1
 
x 9  x  2

 18  9x  x 2
 x 2  9 x  18  0
 x 2  6 x  3x  18  0
 x  x  6  3 x  6  0

  x  6  x  3  0

 x  6 or x  3
 The two numbers are 3 and 6

32. Three consecutive positive integers are such that the sum of the square of the first and the
product of other two is 46. Find the integers.
Sol:
Let the three consecutive positive integers be x, x  1 and x  2
According to the hypothesis, we have
 x 2   x  1 x  2   46

 x 2  x 2  3x  2  46
 2 x 2  3x  44  0
 2 x 2  8 x  11x  44  0
 2 x  x  4   11 x  4   0

  2 x  11 x  4   0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
11
 x  4 or x  
2
Considering the positive value of x
 x  4, x  1  4 and x  2  6
 The three consecutive numbers are 4,5 and 6.

33. The difference of squares of two numbers is 88. If the larger number is 5 less than twice the
smaller number, then find the two numbers
Sol:
Let the smaller number be x. Then, larger number  2 x  5
It is given that the difference of the square of the number is 88.

  2 x  5   x 2  88
2

 4 x 2  25  20 x  x 2  88
 3x 2  20 x  63  0
 3x 2  27 x  7 x  63  0
 3x  x  9   7  x  9   0

  x  9  3x  7   0

7
 x  9 or 
3
As a digit can never be negative, x  9
 The numbers  2 x  5
 2  9  5  13
 Hence, required numbers are 9 and 13

34. The difference of square of two numbers is 180 . the square of the smaller number is 8
times the large numbers find two numbers
Sol:
Let the number be x
By the given hypothesis, we have
x 2  8 x  180
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
 x 2  8 x  180  0
 x 2  10 x  18x  180  0
 x  x  10   18  x  10   0

  x  10  x  18   0

 x  10 or x  18
Case (i): x  18
8x  8 18  144
 Larger number  144  12
Case (ii): x  10
Square of larger number 8x  80 here no perfect square exist, hence the numbers are
18,12

Exercise 8.8

1. The speed of a boat in still water is 8 km/hr It can go 15 km upstream and 22 km


downstream in 5 hours. Find the speed of the stream.
Sol:
Let the speed of the stream be x km/hr
Given that,
Speed of the boat in still water = 8 km/hr
Now,
Speed of the boat in upstream = (8 – x) km/hr
And speed of the boat in downstream = (8 + x) km/hr
15 𝑘𝑚 15
Time taken for going 15 km upstream = (8−𝑥)𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = 8−𝑥 ℎ𝑜𝑢𝑟𝑠
22 𝑘𝑚 22
Time taken for going 22 km downstream = (8+𝑥) 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = 8+𝑥 ℎ𝑜𝑢𝑟𝑠
Given that,
Time taken for upstream + downstream = 5 hours
15 22
⇒ 8−𝑥 ℎ𝑜𝑢𝑟𝑠 + 8+𝑥 ℎ𝑜𝑢𝑟𝑠 = 5ℎ𝑜𝑢𝑟𝑠
15 22
⇒ 8−𝑥 + 8+𝑥 = 5
15(8+𝑥)+22(8−𝑥)
⇒ (8−𝑥)(8+𝑥)
= 5
120+15𝑥+176−22𝑥
⇒ =5
82 −𝑥 2
⇒ 296 – 7x = 5 (64 – x2)
⇒ 296 – 7x = 320 – 5x2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ 5𝑥 2 − 7𝑥 + 296 − 320 = 0
⇒ 5𝑥 2 − 7𝑥 − 24 = 0 [5 × −24 = −120 ⇒ −180 = 8 × −15 − 7 = −15 + 8]
2
⇒ 5𝑥 − (15 − 8)𝑥 − 24 = 0
⇒ 5𝑥 2 − 15𝑥 + 8𝑥 − 24 = 0
⇒ 5x (x – 3) +8 (x – 3) = 0
⇒ (x – 3) (5x + 8) = 0
⇒ x – 3 = 0 or 5x + 8 = 0
−8
⇒ x = 3 or x = 5
Since, x cannot be a negative value So, x = 3
∴ Speed of the stream is 3 km/hr

2. A passenger train takes 3 hours less for a journey of 360 km, if its speed is increased by 10
km/hr from its usual speed. What is the usual speed?
Sol:
Let the usual speed be x km/hr.
Distance covered in the journey = 360 km
Now,
360 𝑘𝑚 360
Time taken by the train with the usual speed = 𝑥 𝑘𝑚 /ℎ𝑟 = ℎ𝑟
𝑥
Given that if speed is increased by 10 km/hr, the same train takes 3 hours less.
⇒ Speed of the train = (x + 10) km/hr and time taken by the train after increasing the speed
360 𝑘𝑚 360
= (𝑥+10)𝑘𝑚 /ℎ𝑟 = 𝑥+10 ℎ𝑟

3. A fast train takes one hour less than a slow train for a journey of 200 km. If the speed of the
slow train is 10 km/hr less than that of the fast train, find the speed of the two trains.
Sol:
Let the speed of the slow train be x km/hr.
Given that speed of the slow train is 10 km/hr less than that of fast train
⇒ Speed of the fast train = (x + 10) km/hr
Total distance covered in the journey = 200 km
200 𝑘𝑚 200
Time taken by fast train = (𝑥+10)𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = 𝑥+10 ℎ𝑟 and
200 𝑘𝑚 200
Time taken by slow train = 𝑥 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = ℎ𝑟
𝑥
Given that faster train takes 1 hour less than that of slow train
800 800
i.e., − 𝑥+10 = 1
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 800 (𝑥 − 𝑥+10) = 1
𝑥+10−𝑥
⇒ 800 (𝑥((𝑥+10) ) = 1
⇒ 800 (10) = x (x + 10) = 1
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ 8000 = x2 + 10x
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 10𝑥 − 2000 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + (50 − 40)𝑥 + (50𝑥 − 40) = 0
⇒ ( 𝑥 2 + 50𝑥 − 40𝑥 + (50𝑥 − 40)) = 0
⇒ x (x + 50) −40(x + 50) = 0
⇒ (x + 50) (x – 40) = 0
⇒ x + 50 = 0 or x – 40 = 0
⇒ x = −50 or x = 40
Clearly x cannot be a negative volume since it is speed. So, x = 40
∴ Speed of slow train is 40 km/hr
Now,
Speed of fast train = (x + 10) km/hr = (40 + 10) km/hr = 50 km/hr

4. A passenger train takes one hour less for a journey of 150 km if its speed is increased by 5
km/hr from its usual speed. Find the usual speed of the train.
Sol:
Let the usual speed of the train be x km/hr
Distance covered in the journey = 150 km
150 𝑘𝑚 150
⇒ Time taken by the train with usual speed = 𝑥 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = ℎ𝑟
𝑥
Given that, if the speed is increased by 5 km/hr from i to usual speed, the train takes one
hour less for the same journey.
⇒ Speed of the train = (x + 5) km/hr
150 𝑘𝑚 150
Now, time taken by the train after increasing the speed = (𝑥+5)𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = 𝑥+5 ℎ𝑟
150 150
We have, − 𝑥+5 = 1
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 150 (𝑥 − 𝑥+5) = 1
𝑥+5−𝑥
⇒ 150 (𝑥((𝑥+5) ) = 1
⇒ 150 (5) = x (x + 5)
⇒ 750 = x2 + 5x
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 5𝑥 − 750 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 30𝑥 − 25𝑥 + (30 × −25) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 30) − 25(𝑥 + 30) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 30)(𝑥 − 25) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = −30 𝑜𝑟 (𝑥 − 25) = 0
⇒ 𝑆𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑒, 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑑 𝑐𝑎𝑛𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑏𝑒 𝑛𝑒𝑔𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒𝑠, 𝑠𝑜 𝑥 = 25.
∴ usual speed of the train = 25 km/hr
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
5. The time taken by a person to cover 150 km was 2.5 hrs more than the time taken in the
return journey. If he returned at a speed of 10 km/hr more than the speed of going, what
was the speed per hour in each direction?
Sol:
Let the going speed of the person be x km/hr
Given that, the return speed is 10 km/hr more than the going speed
⇒ Return speed of the person = (x + 10) km/hr
Total distance covered = 150 km.
150 𝑘𝑚 150
Time taken for going = 𝑥 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = ℎ𝑟
𝑥
150 𝑘𝑚 150
Time taken for returning = (𝑥+10)𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟
= (𝑥+10) ℎ𝑟
Given that, time taken for going is 2.5 hours more than the time for returning
150 150
i.e. ℎ𝑟 − 𝑥+10 ℎ𝑟 = 2.5 ℎ𝑟
𝑥
1 1 25
⇒ 150 (𝑥 − 𝑥+10) = 10
𝑥+10−𝑥 25
⇒ 150 (𝑥(𝑥+10)) = 10
𝑥(𝑥+10)
⇒ 6 (10) = 10
2
⇒ 60 × 10 = 𝑥 + 10𝑥
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 10𝑥 − 600 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + (30 − 20)𝑥 + (30 × −20) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 = 30𝑥 − 20𝑥 + (30 × −20) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 30) − 20(𝑥 + 30) = 0
⇒ (x + 30) (x – 20) = 0
⇒ x + 30 = 0 or x – 20 = 0
⇒ x = −30 or x = 20
Since, speed cannot be negative. So x = 20
∴ speed of the person when going = 20 km/hr
Now, speed of the person when returning = (x + 10) km/hr
= (20 + 10) km/hr
= 30 km/hr

6. A plane left 40 minutes late due to bad weather and in order to reach its destination, 1600
km away in time, it had to increase its speed by 400 km/hr from its usual speed. Find the
usual speed of the plane.
Sol:
Let the usual speed of the plane be x km/hr
Total distance travelled = 1600 km
1600 𝑘𝑚 1600
⇒ Time taken by the plane with usual speed = = ℎ𝑟
𝑥 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 𝑥
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Given that, if speed is increased by 400 km/hr, the plane takes 40 minutes less than that of
the usual time. Speed of the plane after increasing = (x + 400) km/hr
1600 𝑘𝑚 1600
⇒ Time taken by the plane with increasing speed = 𝑘𝑚 = 𝑥+400 ℎ𝑟
(𝑥+400)
ℎ𝑟
Now,
1600 1600 40 40
ℎ𝑟 − 𝑥+400 ℎ𝑟 = 60 ℎ𝑟 [∵ 40 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠 = 60 ℎ𝑟 𝑎𝑠 1 ℎ𝑟 = 60 𝑚𝑖𝑛]
𝑥
1 1 40
⇒ 1600 [𝑥 − 𝑥+400] = 60
𝑥+400−𝑥 40
⇒ 1600 [𝑥(𝑥+400)] = 60
⇒ 40(400 × 60) = 𝑥(𝑥 + 400)
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 400𝑥 − 960000 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + (1800 − 800)𝑥 + (1800 × (−800)) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 2 ) + 1800𝑥 − 800𝑥 + (1800 × −800) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 1800) − 800(𝑥 + 1800) = 0
⇒ (x + 1800) (x – 800) = 0
⇒ x = −1800 or x – 800 = 0
⇒ x = −1800 or x = 800
Since, speed cannot be negative. So, x = 800
∴ Usual speed of the plans is 800 km/hr.

7. An aeroplane takes 1 hour less for a journey of 1200 km if its speed is increased by 100
km/hr from its usual speed. Find its usual speed.
Sol:
Let the usual speed of the plane be x km/hr.
Distance covered in the journey = 1800 km
1200 𝑘𝑚 1200
⇒ Time taken by the plane with usual speed = 𝑘𝑚 = ℎ𝑟
𝑥 𝑥
ℎ𝑟
Now, speed is increased by 100 km/hr and the time taken is 1 hour less for the same
journey.
⇒ Speed of the plane after increased = (x + 100) km/hr and Time taken by plane with
1800 𝑘𝑚 1800
increased speed = (𝑥+100)𝑘𝑚 = 𝑥+100 ℎ𝑟
ℎ𝑟
Now, we have
1800 1800
− 𝑥+100 = 1
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 1800 (𝑥 − 𝑥+100) = 1
𝑥+100−𝑥
⇒ 1800 (𝑥(𝑥+100)) = 1
⇒ 1200(100) = x(x + 100)
⇒ 120000 = 𝑥 2 + 100𝑥
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 100𝑥 − 120000 = 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ 𝑥 2 + (400 − 300)𝑥 + (400 × −300) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 400𝑥 − 300𝑥 + (400 × −300) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 400) − 300(𝑥 + 400) = 0
⇒ (x + 400) (x – 300) = 0
⇒ x + 400 = 0 or x – 300 = 0
⇒ x = −400 or x = 300
Since, speed cannot be negative so, x = 300 ∴ usual speed of the plane = 300 km/hr

8. A passenger train takes 2 hours less for a journey of 300 km if its speed is increased by 5
km/hr from its usual speed. Find the usual speed of the train.
Sol:
Let the usual speed of the train be x km/hr
Distance covered in the journey = 300 km
300 𝑘𝑚 300
Time taken by the train with usual speed = 𝑥 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = ℎ𝑟
𝑥
Now,
If the speed is increased by 5 km/hr, the train takes 2 hours less for the same journey.
⇒ speed of the train after increasing = (x + 5) km/hr
300 𝑘𝑚 300
And time taken by the train after increasing the speed = (𝑥+5)𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = 𝑥+5 ℎ𝑟
We have,
300 300
ℎ𝑟 − 𝑥+5 ℎ𝑟 = 2ℎ𝑟𝑠
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 300 (𝑥 − 𝑥+5) = 2
𝑥+5−𝑥
⇒ 300 (𝑥(𝑥+5)) = 2
⇒ 300(5) = 2(𝑥(𝑥 + 5))
⇒ 750 = 𝑥 2 + 5𝑥
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 5𝑥 − 750 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 30𝑥 − 25𝑥 + (30 × −25) = 0
⇒ (x + 30) (x – 25) = 0
⇒ x + 30 = 0 or x – 25 = 0
⇒ x = −30 or x = 25
Since, speed cannot be negative. So x = 25
∴ The usual speed of the train = 25 km/hr.

9. A train covers a distance of 90 km at a uniform speed. Had the speed been 15 km/hour
more, it would have taken 30 minutes less for the journey. Find the original speed of the
train.
Sol:
Let the original speed of the train be x km/hr
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Distance covered = 90 km.
90 𝑘𝑚 90
⇒ Time taken by the train with original speed = 𝑥 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = ℎ𝑟
𝑥
Now, if the speed of the train is increased by 15 km/hr, the train takes 30 minutes less for
the same journey
⇒ Speed of the train after increasing = (x + 15) km/hr and the time taken by the train after
90 𝑘𝑚 90
increasing the speed = (𝑥+15) 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = 𝑥+15 ℎ𝑟
Now,
90 90
ℎ𝑟 − 𝑥+15 ℎ𝑟 = 30 𝑚𝑖𝑛
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 90 ℎ𝑟 (𝑥 − 𝑥+15 ℎ𝑟) = 30𝑚𝑖𝑛
1 1 30
⇒ 90 (𝑥 − 𝑥+15) = 60 ℎ𝑟 [∵ 1ℎ𝑟 = 30 𝑚𝑖𝑛]
𝑥+15−𝑥 1
⇒ 90 (𝑥(𝑥+15)) = 2
⇒ 90 × 15 × 2 = 𝑥(𝑥 + 15)
⇒ 2700 = 𝑥 2 + 15𝑥
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 15𝑥 − 2700 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + (60 − 45)𝑥 + (60 × (−45)) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 60𝑥 − 45𝑥 + (60 × −45) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 60) − 45(𝑥 + 60) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 60)(𝑥 − 45) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 + 60 = 0 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 − 45 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = −60 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 45
𝑆𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑒, 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑑 𝑐𝑎𝑛𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑏𝑒 𝑛𝑒𝑔𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒. 𝑆𝑜, 𝑥 = 45
∴ Original speed of the train = 45 km/hr

10. A train travels 360 km at a uniform speed. If the speed had been 5 km/hr more, it would
have taken 1 hour less for the same journey. Find the speed of the train.
Sol:
Let the speed of the train be x km/hr
Distance covered by the train = 360 km
360 𝑘𝑚 360
⇒ Time taken by the train with initial speed = 𝑥 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = ℎ𝑟
𝑥
Now, if the speed is 5 km/hr more, the train takes 1 hour less for the same journey.
⇒ Speed of the train after increasing the speed = (x + 5) km/hr
360 𝑘𝑚 360
And time taken by the train with increased speed = (𝑥+5)𝑘𝑚 = 𝑥+5 ℎ𝑟
ℎ𝑟
Now,
360 360
ℎ𝑟 − 𝑥+5 ℎ𝑟 = 1ℎ𝑟
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 360 (𝑥 − 𝑥+5) = 1
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
𝑥+5−𝑥
⇒ 360 (𝑥(𝑥+5)) = 1
⇒ 360 × 5 = 1 × 𝑥(𝑥 + 5)
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 5𝑐 − 1800 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 45𝑥 − 40𝑥 + (𝑥 + 45) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 45) − 40(𝑥 + 45) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 45)(𝑥 − 40) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 + 45 = 0 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 − 40 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = −45 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 40
Since, speed is always a positive value i.e. x = 0 ⇒ x = 40
∴ The speed of the train = 40 km/hr

11. An express train takes 1 hour less than a passenger train to travel 132 km between Mysore
and Bangalore (without taking into consideration the time they stop at intermediate
stations). If the average speed of the express train is 11 kin/hr more than that of the
passenger train, find the average speeds of the two trains.
Sol:
Let the speed of the passenger train be x km/hr
Given that the average speed of the express train is 11 km/hr more than that of passenger
train.
⇒ Average speed of express train = (x + 11) km/hr
Now,
138 𝑘𝑚 13
Time taken by the passenger train = 𝑥 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = ℎ𝑟
𝑥
132 𝑘𝑚 138
And time taken by the express train = (𝑥+11)𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = 𝑥+11 ℎ𝑟
Given that, express train takes 1 hour less than that of passenger train to reach the destiny.
132 132
⇒ ℎ𝑟 − 𝑥+11 ℎ𝑟 = 1ℎ𝑟
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 132 (𝑥 − 𝑥+11) = 11
𝑥+11−𝑥
⇒ 132 (𝑥(𝑥+11)) = 1
⇒ 132 × 11 = 𝑥(𝑥 + 11) × 1
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 11𝑥 − 1452 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + (44𝑥 − 33𝑥) + (44 × −33) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 44𝑥 − 33𝑥 + (44 × −33) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 4) − 33(𝑥 + 44) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 44)(𝑥 − 33) = 0
⇒ x + 44 = 0 or x – 33 = 0
⇒ x = −44 or x = 33
Since, speed cannot be in negative values. So, x = 33
∴ Average speed of the slower train i.e. passenger train = 33 km/hr
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
And average speed of express train = (x + 11) km/hr = (33 + 11) km/hr = 44 km/hr.

12. An aeroplane left 50 minutes later than its scheduled time, and in order to reach the
destination, 1250 km away, in time, it had to increase its speed by 250 km/hr from its usual
speed. Find its usual speed.
Sol:
Let the usual speed of the plane be x km/hr
Distance covered by the plane = 1250 km
1250 𝑘𝑚
⇒ Time taken by the plane with usual speed = 𝑥 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = 1250 ℎ𝑟
To cover the delay of 50 minutes, the speed of the plane is increased by 250 km/hr
Now,
Speed of the plane after increasing = (x + 250) km/hr and
1250 𝑘𝑚 1250
Time taken by the plane with increased speed = (𝑥+250) 𝑘𝑚/ℎ𝑟 = 𝑥+250 ℎ𝑟
From the data we have,
1250 1250
ℎ𝑟 − 𝑥+250 ℎ𝑟 = 50 𝑚𝑖𝑛
𝑥
1 1 50
⇒ 1250 ℎ𝑟 (𝑥 − 𝑥+250) = 60 ℎ𝑟 [∵ 1ℎ𝑟 = 50 𝑚𝑖𝑛]
𝑥+250−𝑥 1
⇒ 250 (𝑥(𝑥+250)) = 6
⇒ 250 × 250 × 6 = 𝑥(𝑥 + 250) × 1
⇒ 375000 = 𝑥 2 + 250𝑥
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 250𝑥 − 375000 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + (750 − 500)𝑥 + (750 × −500) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 750𝑥 − 500𝑥 + (750 × −500) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 750)(𝑥 − 500) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 750) = 0 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 500 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = −750 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 500
Since, speed cannot be a negative value. So, x = 500
∴ the usual speed of the plane = 500 km/hr.

Exercise 8.9

1. Ashu is x years old while his mother Mrs Veena is x years old. Five years hence Mrs Veena
will be three times old as Ashu. Find their present ages.
Sol:
Given that, Ashu is x years old while his mother Mrs. Veena is x2 years old.
⇒ Ashu’s present age = x years and Mrs. Veena’s present age = x2 years
And also given that, after 5 years Mrs. Veena will be three times old as
Ashu.
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ Ashu’s age after 5 years = (x + 5)years
And Mrs. Veena’s age after 5 years = (x2 + 5)years
But given that,
⇒ (𝑥 2 + 5) = 3(𝑥 + 5)
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 5 = 3𝑥 + 15
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 3𝑥 − 10 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 + 2𝑥 − 10 = 0
⇒ x(x – 5) +2(x – 5) = 0 ⇒ (x – 5) (x + 2) = 0
⇒ x – 5 = 0 or x + 2 = 0
⇒ x = 5 or x = −2
Since, age cannot be in negative values. So, x = 5 years.
∴ Present age of Ashu is x = 5 years and
Present age of Mrs. Veena is 𝑥 2 ⇒ 52 𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑠 ⇒ 25𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑠.

2. The sum of the ages of a man and his son is 45 years. Five years ago, the product of their
ages was four times the man’s age at the time. Find their present ages.
Sol:
Let the present age of the son be x years
Given that,
sum of present ages of man and his son is 45 years.
⇒ Man’s present age = (45 – x)years
And also given that,
five years ago, the product of their ages was four times the man’s age at the time.
⇒ Man’s age before 5 years = (45 – x – 5) years = (40 – x) years
And son’s age before 5 years = (x – 5) years
But, given that (40 – x) (x – 5) = 4(40 – x)
⇒x–5=4
⇒ x = 9 years
⇒ Son’s present age ⇒ x = 9 years
Now, Man’s present age ⇒ (45 – x) years = (45 – 9) years = 36 years
∴ The present ages of man and son are 36 years and 9 years respectively.

3. The product of Shikha’s age five years ago and her age 8 years later is 30, her age at both
times being given in years. Find her present age.
Sol:
Let the present age of shika be x years.
Given that,
The product of her age five years ago and her age 8 years later is 30
Now,
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Shika’s age five years ago = (x – 5) years
And Shika’s age 8 years later = (x + 8) years
Given that.
(𝑥 − 5)(𝑥 + 8) = 30
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 8𝑥 − 5𝑥 − 40 = 30
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 − 70 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 10𝑥 − 7𝑥 − 70 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 10) − 7(𝑥 + 10) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 10)(𝑥 − 7) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 + 10 = 0 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 − 7 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = −10 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 7
Since, age cannot be in negative values, So x = 7 years
∴ The present age of shika is 7 years.

4. The product of Ramu’s age (in years) five years ago and his age (in years) nine years later
is 15. Determine Ramu’s present age.
Sol:
Let the present age of Ramu be a x years
Given that,
The product of his age five years ago and his age y nine years later is 15.
Now, Ramu’s age five years ago = (x – 5) years
And Ramu’s age nine years later = (x + 9) years
Given that,
(𝑥 − 5)(𝑥 + 9) = 15
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 9𝑥 − 5𝑥 − 45 = 15
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 4𝑥 − 60 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 10𝑥 − 6𝑥 − 60 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 10) − 6(𝑥 + 10) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 10)(𝑥 − 6) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 + 10 = 0 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 − 6 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = −10 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 6
Since, age cannot be in negative values, So x = 6 years
∴ The present age of shika is 6 years.

5. Is the following situation possible? If so, determine their present ages. The sum of the ages
of two friends is 20 years. Four years ago, the product of their ages in years was 48.
Sol:
Let the present age of friend 1 be a x years
Given that,
Sum of the ages of two friends = 20 years
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ Present age of friend 2 = (20 – x) years
And also given that, four years ago, the product of their age was 48.
⇒ Age of friend 1 before 4 years = (x – 4) years
And age of friend 2 before 4 years = (20 – x – 4) years = (16 – x) years
Given that,
(𝑥 − 4)(16 − 𝑥) = 48
⇒ 16𝑥 − 𝑥 2 − 64 + 4𝑥 = 48
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 20𝑥 + 112 = 0
Let D be the discriminant of this quadratic equation.
Then, D = (−20)2 − 4 × 112 × 1 = 400 − 448 = −48 ∠0
We know that, to have real roots for a quadratic equation that discriminant D must be
greater than or equal to 0 i.e. D ≥ 0
But D ∠ 0 in the above. So, above equation does not have real roots
Hence, the given situation is not possible.

6. A girl is twice as old as her sister. Four years hence, the product of their ages (in years) will
be 160. Find their present ages.
Sol:
Let the age of girls sister be a x years
Given that,
Girl is twice as old as her sister
⇒ Girls age = 2 × 𝑥 years = 2x years
Given that, after 4 years, the product of their ages will be 160.
⇒ Girls age after 4 years = (2x + 4) years
And sisters age after 4 years = (x + 4) years
Given that,
(2𝑥 + 4)(𝑥 + 4) = 160
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 8𝑥 + 4𝑥 + 16 = 160
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 12𝑥 − 144 = 0
⇒ 2(𝑥 2 + 6𝑥 − 72) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 6𝑥 − 72 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 12𝑥 − 6𝑥 − 72 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 12) − 6(𝑥 + 12) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 12)(𝑥 − 6) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 + 12 = 0 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 − 6 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = −12 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 6
Since, age cannot be in a negative value.
So, x = 6.
∴ Age of girls sister is x = 6 years.
And age of girl is 2x = 2 × 6 years = 12 years
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Hence, the present ages of girl and her sister are 12 years and 6 years respectively.

7. The sum of the reciprocals of Rehman’s ages (in years) 3 years ago and 5 years from now
1
is 3. Find his present age.
Sol:
Let the present age of Rehman be x years.
Now,
Rehman’s age 3 years ago = (x – 3) years
And Rehman’s age 5 years later = (x + 5) years
Given that,
1
The sum of reciprocals of Rehman’s ages 3 years ago and 5 years later is 3
1 1 1
⇒ 𝑥−3 + 𝑥+5 = 3
𝑥+5 + 𝑥−3 1
⇒ (𝑥−3)(𝑥+5) = 3
⇒ (2𝑥 + 2) × 3 = 1(𝑥 − 3)(𝑥 + 5)
⇒ 6x + 6 = 𝑥 2 + 5𝑥 − 3𝑥 − 15
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 − 6𝑥 − 15 − 6 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 − 21 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 7𝑥 + 3𝑥 − 21 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 7)2 − 3(𝑥 − 7) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 7)(𝑥 + 3) = 0 ⇒ 𝑥 − 7 = 0 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 + 3 = 0
⇒ x = 7 or x = −3
Since, age cannot be in negative values. So, x = 7 years Hence, the present age of Rehman
is 7 years.

Exercise 8.10

1. The hypotenuse of a right triangle is 25 cm. The difference between the lengths of the other
two sides of the triangle is 5 cm. Find the lengths of these sides.
Sol:
Let the length of the shortest side be x cm
Given that the length of the largest side is 5cm more than that of smaller side
⇒ longest side = (x + 5)cm
And also, given that
Hypotenuse = 25cm
So, let us consider a right angled triangle ABC right angled at B
We have, hypotenuse (AC) = 25 cm
BC = x cm and AB = (x + 5)cm
Since, ABC is a right angled triangle
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
We have, (𝐵𝐶)2 + (𝐴𝐵)2 = (𝐴𝐶)2
⇒ 𝑥 2 𝑐𝑚2 + (𝑥 + 5)2 𝑐𝑚2 = (25)2 𝑐𝑚2
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 2 + 10𝑥 + 25 = 625
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 10𝑥 − 600 = 0
⇒ 2(𝑥 2 + 5𝑥 − 300) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 5𝑥 − 300 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 20𝑥 − 15𝑥 + (20𝑥 − 15) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 20) − 15(𝑥 + 20) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 20)(𝑥 − 15) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 20) = 0 𝑜𝑟 (𝑥 − 15) = 20

2. The hypotenuse of a right triangle is 3.Ji cm. If the smaller leg is tripled and the longer leg
doubled, new hypotenuse will be 9Iš cm. How long are the legs of the triangle?
Sol:
Using Pythagoras theorem,
(𝐴𝐵)2 + (𝐵𝐶)2 = (𝐴𝐶)2
2
⇒ (2𝑦)2 𝑐𝑚2 + (3𝑥)2 𝑐𝑚2 = (9√5) 𝑐𝑚2
⇒ 4𝑦 2 + 9𝑥 2 = 81 × 5
⇒ 4𝑦 2 + 9𝑥 2 = 405
⇒ 4(90 − 𝑥 2 ) + 9𝑥 2 = 405 [∵ 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 90]
⇒ 4 × 90 − 4𝑥 2 + 9𝑥 2 = 405
⇒ 5𝑥 2 = 405 − 360
⇒ 5𝑥 2 = 405 − 360
⇒ 5𝑥 2 = 45
⇒ 𝑥2 = 9
⇒ 𝑥 = √32 ⇒ 𝑥 = ±3
𝑆𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑒, 𝑥 𝑐𝑎𝑛𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑏𝑒 𝑎 𝑛𝑒𝑔𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒. 𝑆𝑜 𝑥 = 3𝑐𝑚
We have,
𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 90
⇒ 𝑦 2 = 90 − (3)2
⇒ 𝑦 2 = 90 − 9
⇒ 𝑦 2 = 81 ⇒ 𝑦 = √81 ⇒ 𝑦 = ± 9
Since, y cannot be a negative value. So, y = 9cm
∴ hence, the length of the smaller side is 3 cm and the length of the longer side is 9cm.

3. A pole has to be erected at a point on the boundary of a circular park of diameter 13 metres
in such a way that the difference of its distances from two diametrically opposite fixed
gates A and B on the boundary is 7 metres. Is it the possible to do so? If yes, at what
distances from the two gates should the pole be erected?
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Sol:
Yes, it is possible to do so as in the given condition
This can be proved as below,
P

Xm

A O B
13m

Let P be the required location of the pole such that its distance from gate B is x meter i.e.
BP = x meters and also AP – BP = 7m
⇒ AP = BP + 7m = (x + 7)m
Since, AB is a diameter and P is a point on the boundary of the semi-circle, ∆APB is right
angled triangle, right angled at P.
Using Pythagoras theorem,
(𝐴𝐵)2 = (𝐴𝑃)2 + (𝐵𝑃)2
⇒ (13)2 𝑚2 = (𝑥 + 7)2 𝑚2 + (𝑥)2 𝑚2
⇒ 169 = 𝑥 2 + 14𝑥 + 49 + 𝑥 2
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 14𝑥 + 49 − 169 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 14𝑥 − 120 = 0
⇒ 2(𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 − 60) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 − 60 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 12𝑥 − 5𝑥 − (12 × −5) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 12) − 5(𝑥 + 12) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 12)(𝑥 − 5) = 0
⇒ x + 12 = 0 or x – 5 = 0
⇒ x = −12 or x = 5
Since, x cannot be a negative value, So x = 5
⇒ BP = 5m
Now, AP = (BP + 7)m = (5 + 7)m = 12 m
∴ The pole has to be erected at a distance 5 mtrs from the gate B and 12 m from the gate A.
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
4. The diagonal of a rectangular field is 60 metres more than the shorter side. If the longer
side is 30 metres more than the shorter side, find the sides of the field.
Sol:
120 m, 90 m
Exercise 8.11

1. The perimeter of a rectangular field is 82 m and its area is 400 m2. Find the breadth of
the rectangle.
Sol:
Let the breadth of the rectangle be x meters
Given that,
Perimeter = 82 m and Area = 400m2
We know that
Perimeter of a rectangle = 2(length + breadth)
⇒ 82 = 2 (length + x)
⇒ 41 = length + x
⇒ length = (41 - x)m
A B

Xm

D (41-x)m C

We have
Area of rectangle = length × breadth
⇒ 400 m2 = (41 – x) 𝑚 × 𝑥𝑚
⇒ 400 = 41x – x2
⇒ 400 x2 – 41x + 400 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 25𝑥 − 16𝑥 + (−25 × −16) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 25) − 16(𝑥 − 25) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 25)(𝑥 − 16) = 0
⇒ (x – 25) (x – 16) = 0
⇒ x – 25 = 0 or x – 16 = 0
⇒ x = 25 or x = 16
Hence, breadth of the rectangle is 25m or 16m
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
2. The length of a hail is 5 m more than its breadth. If the area of the floor of the hail is 84 m2,
what are the length and breadth of the hail?
Sol:
Let the breadth of the rectangle (hall) be x meter.
Given that,
Length of the hall is 5m more than its breadth i.e. length = (x + 5)m

Hall xm

(x +5)m
And also given that,
Area of the hall = 84m2
Since, hall is in the shape of a rectangle,
Area of the rectangular hall = length × breadth
⇒ 84𝑚2 = 𝑥𝑚 × (𝑥 + 5)𝑚
⇒ 84 = x(x + 5)
⇒ 84 = 𝑥 2 + 5𝑥
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 5𝑥 − 84 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 12𝑥 − 7𝑥 − 84 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 12) − 7(𝑥 + 12) = 0
⇒ (x – 7) (x + 12) = 0
⇒ x = 7m or x = −12m
Since, x cannot be negative. So, breadth of the hall = 7m
Hence, length of the hall = (x + 5)m = (7 + 5)m = 12m.

3. Two squares have sides x cm and (x + 4) cm. The sum of their areas is 656 cm2. Find the
sides of the squares.
Sol:
Let S1 and S2 be two squares.
Let x cm be the side of square S1 and (x + 4)cm be the side of square S2.
We know that,
Area of a square = (Side)2
⇒ Area of square S1 = (𝑥)2 = 𝑥 2 𝑐𝑚2
⇒ Area of square S2 = (𝑥 + 4)2 𝑐𝑚2
Given that,
Area of square S1 + Area of square S2 = 656 cm2
⇒ 𝑥 2 𝑐𝑚2 + (𝑥 + 4)𝑐𝑚2 = 656 𝑐𝑚2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 2 + 8𝑥 + 16 = 656
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 8𝑥 + 16 − 656 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 8𝑥 − 640 = 0
⇒ 2(𝑥 2 + 4𝑥 − 320) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 4𝑥 − 320 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 20𝑥 − 16𝑥 + (20𝑥 − 16) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 + 20 = 0 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 − 16 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = −20 𝑐𝑚 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 16 𝑐𝑚
Since, x cannot be negative. So, x = 16cm
∴ Side of square S1 ⇒ x = 16cm and
Side of square S2 ⇒ (x + 4) = (16 + 4)cm = 20 cm

4. The area of a right angled triangle is 165 m2. Determine its base and altitude if the latter
exceeds the former by 7m.
Sol:
Let the altitude of the right angled triangle be denoted by x meter
Given that altitude exceeds the base of the triangle by 7m.
⇒ Base = (x – 7)m

Xm
Area = 165m2

C (x-7)m B

We know that,
1
Area of a triangle = 2 × 𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒 × ℎ𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡
1
⇒ 165m2 = 2 × (𝑥 − 7)𝑚 × 𝑥 𝑚 [∵ 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 = 165𝑚2 𝑔𝑖𝑣𝑒𝑛]
⇒ 2 × 165 = 𝑥(𝑥 − 7)
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 7𝑥 = 330
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 7𝑥 − 330 = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 22) + 15(𝑥 − 22) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 22)(𝑥 + 15) = 0
⇒ x = 22 or x = − 15
Since, x cannot be negative. So, x = 22 m
∴ Altitude of the triangle ⇒ x = 22m
And base of the triangle ⇒ (x – 7)m = (22 – 7)m = 15m
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
5. Is it possible to design a rectangular mango grove whose length is twice its breadth and the
area is 800 m2? If so, find its length and breadth.
Sol:
Let the breadth of the rectangular mango grove be x meter.
Given that length is twice that of breadth ⇒ length = 2 × x m = 2x m
Given that area of the grove is 800m2.

Area = 800m2 Xm

2x m
But we know that
Area of a rectangle = length × breadth
⇒ 800m2 = 2x m × x m
⇒ 2x2 = 800
⇒ x2 = 400
⇒ x = √400 = √(20)2 = ±20
⇒ x = 20 or x = −20
Since, x cannot be a negative value.
So, x = 20 m
∴ Breadth of the mango grove = 20m and length of the mango grove
= 2x m = 2 × 20 m = 40m
Yes. It is possible to design a rectangular mango grove whose length is twice its breadth
and the area is 800m2.

6. Is it possible to design a rectangular park of perimeter 80 m and area 400 m2? If so, find its
length and breadth.
Sol:
To prove the given condition, let us assume that the length of the rectangular park be
denoted by x m.
A

Perimeter = 8cm
(40-x)m
Area = 400 m2

D Xm C
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Given that
Perimeter = 80m and Area = 400m2
We know that,
Perimeter of a rectangle = 2(length + breadth)
⇒ 80m = 2 (x + breadth)
80
⇒ breadth = ( 2 − 𝑥) 𝑚
⇒ breadth = (40 – x)m
And also,
Area of a rectangle = length × breadth
⇒ 400m2 = x m × (40 − 𝑥)𝑚
⇒ 400 = x(40 – x)
⇒ 400 = 40x – x2
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 40𝑥 + 400 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 2 × 20 × 𝑥 + (20)2 = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 20)2 = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 20 = 0) ⇒ 𝑥 = 20
∴ length of the rectangular park ⇒ x = 20 m and breadth of the rectangular park ⇒
(40 – x)m = (40 – 20)m = 20m
Yes. It is possible to design a rectangular park of perimeter 80m and area 400m2.

7. Sum of the areas of two squares is 640 m2. If the difference of their perimeters is 64 m, find
the sides of the two squares.
Sol:
Let the two squares be denoted as S1 and S2 and let side of squares S1 be denoted as x meter
and that of square S2 be y m.
Given that,
Difference of their perimeter is 64m.
We know that
Perimeter of a square = 4 × side
⇒ Perimeter of square S1 = 4 × 𝑥 𝑚 = 4𝑥 𝑚
⇒ Perimeter of square 𝑆2 = 4 × 𝑦 𝑚 = 4𝑦 𝑚
Now, difference of perimeter = perimeter of square 𝑆1 − Perimeter of square 𝑆2
⇒ 64 m = (4x – 4y)m
⇒ 64 = 4(x – y)
⇒ x – y = 16
⇒ x = y + 16
And also,
Given that sum of areas of two squares = 640 m2.
We know that,
Area of a square = (Side)2
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ Area of square 𝑆1 = 𝑥 2 𝑚2
⇒ Area of square 𝑆2 = 𝑦 2 𝑚2
Now,
Sum of areas of two squares = Area of square 𝑆1+Area of square 𝑆2
⇒ 640𝑚2 = 𝑥 2 𝑚2 + 𝑦 2 𝑚2
⇒ 640 = (𝑦 + 16)2 + 𝑦 2 [∵ 𝑥 = 𝑦 + 16]
⇒ 𝑦 2 + 32𝑦 + 256 + 𝑦 2 = 640
⇒ 2𝑦 2 + 32𝑦 + 256 − 640 = 0
⇒ 2𝑦 2 + 32𝑦 − 384 = 0
⇒ 2(𝑦 2 + 16𝑦 − 192) = 0
⇒ 𝑦 2 + 16𝑦 − 192 = 0
⇒ 𝑦 2 + 24𝑦 − 8𝑦 + (24 × −8) = 0
⇒ 𝑦(𝑦 + 24) − 8(𝑦 + 24) = 0
⇒ (y + 24) (y – 8) = 0
⇒ y + 24 = 0 or y – 8 = 0
⇒ y = − 24 or y = 8
Since, y cannot be a negative value. So, y = 8m
∴ Side of the square 𝑆2 is y = 8m
And side of the square 𝑆1 is x = (y + 16)m = (8 + 16)m = 24 m
Hence, sides of the two squares is 24m and 8m.

Exercise 8.12

1. A takes 10 days less than the time taken by B to finish a piece of work. If both A and B
together can finish the work in 12 days, find the time taken by B to finish the work.
Sol:
Let B takes x days to complete the piece of work.
1
⇒ B’s one days work = 𝑥
Now, A takes 10 days less than that of B to finish the same piece of work i.e. (x – 10)days
1
⇒ A’s one days work = 𝑥−10
Given that, both A and B together can finish the same work in 12 days.
1
⇒ (A and B)’s one days work = 12
Now,
1 1 1
(A’s one days work) + (B’s one days work) = 𝑥 + 𝑥−10 and (𝐴 + 𝐵)’s one days work = 12
1 1 1
⇒ 𝑥 + 𝑥−10 = 12
𝑥−10+𝑥 1
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥−10) = 12
⇒ (2𝑥 − 10) × 12 = 𝑥(𝑥 − 10)
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ 24x – 120 = x2 – 10x
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 10𝑥 − 24𝑥 + 120 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 34𝑥 + 120 = 0
= 𝑥 2 − 30𝑥 − 4𝑥 + (−30 × −4) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 30) − 4(𝑥 − 30) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 30)(𝑥 − 4) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 30) = 0 𝑜𝑟 (𝑥 − 4) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 = 30 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 4
We can observe that, the value of x cannot be less than 10.
∴ The time taken by B to finish the work is 30 days.

2. If two pipes function simultaneously, a reservoir will be filled in 12 hours. One pipe fills
the reservoir 10 hours faster than the other. How many hours will the second pipe take to
fill the reservoir?
Sol:
Let x be no. of students planned for a picnic
Given that budget for food was Rs 480
𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑏𝑢𝑑𝑔𝑒𝑡 480
⇒ Share of each student = 𝑁𝑜.𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠 = Rs 𝑥
Given that 8 students foiled to go
⇒ No. of students will be (x – 8)
Now,
Share of each student will be equal to
𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑏𝑢𝑑𝑔𝑒𝑡 480
= 𝑁𝑜.𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠 = 𝑅𝑠. 𝑥−8
Given that if 8 students failed to go, then cost of food for each member increased by Rs. 10.

3. Two water taps together can fill a tank in 9 hours. The tap of larger diameter takes 10 hours
less than the smaller one to fill the tank separately. Find the time in which each tap can
separately fill the tank.
Sol:
Let the time taken by the top of smaller diameter to fill the tank be x hours
1
⇒ Portion of tank filled by smaller pipe in one hour = 𝑥
Now, larger diameter pipe takes 10 hours less than that of smaller diameter pipe
i.e. (x – 10) hours
1
⇒ Portion of tank filled by larger diameter pipe in one hour = 𝑥−10
Given that,
3 75
Two tops together can fill the tank in 9 8 hours ⇒ hours
8
Now,
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
1 8
Portion of tank filled by both the tops together in one hour = 75/8 = 75
We have,
Portion of tank filled by smaller pipe in 1 hr + Portion of tank filled by larger pipe in 1 hr.
1 1 8 1 1
= 𝑥 + 𝑥−10 ⇒ 75 = 𝑥 + 𝑥−10

4. Two pipes running together can fill a tank in 11 minutes. If one pipe takes 5 minutes more
than the other to fill the tank separately, find the time in which each pipe would fill the tank
separately.
Sol:
Let us take the time taken by the faster pipe to fill the tank as x minutes.
1
⇒ Portion of tank filled by faster pipe in one minute = 𝑥
Now, time taken by the slower pipe to fill the same tank is 5 minutes more than that of
faster pipe i.e. (x + 5) minutes.
1
⇒ Portion of tank filled by slower pipe in one minute = 𝑥+5
Given that,
1 100
The two pipes together can fill the tank in 11 9 minutes ⇒ minutes
9
⇒ portion of tank filled by faster pipe in 1min + Portions of tank filled by slower pipe in
9 1 1
1min i.e. 100 = 𝑥 + 𝑥+5
9 𝑥+5+𝑥
⇒ =
100 𝑥(𝑥+5)

Exercise 8.13

1. A piece of cloth costs Rs. 35. If the piece were 4 m longer and each metre costs Rs. one
less, the cost would remain unchanged. How long is the piece?
Sol:
Let initial length of the cloth be x m, and cost per each meter of cloth be Rs y
⇒ Total cost of piece of cloth will be length of cloth x cost per each meter
⇒ xy
35
But given that xy = Rs. 35 ⇒ y = Rs. 𝑥
And also,
Given that if the piece were 4m longer and each meter costs Rs. 1 less the cost would
remain unchanged.
⇒ Length of the cloth will be (x + 4)m and cost per each meter of cloth will be Rs (y..)
⇒ Total cost of piece of cloth will be Rs. (x + 4) (y – 1)
But,
Rs (x + 4) (y – 1) = Rs 35
⇒ xy + 4y – x – 4 = 35
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
35 35
⇒ 35 + 4( 2 ) − 𝑥 − 4 = 35 [∵ 𝑥𝑦 = 35 &𝑦 = ]
2
140−𝑥 2 −4𝑥
⇒ 𝑥
=0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 4𝑥 − 140 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 14𝑥 − 10𝑥 + (14𝑥 − 10) = 0 [∵ 140 = 14𝑥 − 10 = 4𝑥 = 14𝑥 − 10𝑥]
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 14) − 10(𝑥 + 14) = 0
⇒(𝑥 + 14)(𝑥 − 10) = 0
⇒(𝑥 + 14) = 0 𝑜𝑟 (𝑥 − 10) = 0
⇒𝑥 = −14 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 10
Since length of the cloth cannot be in negative integers, the required length of cloth is 10m.

2. Some students planned a picnic. The budget for food was Rs. 480. But eight of these failed
to go and thus the cost of food for each member increased by Rs. 10. How many students
attended the picnic?
Sol:
Let x be no. of students planned for a picnic
Given that budget for food was Rs 480
𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑏𝑢𝑑𝑔𝑒𝑡 480
⇒ Share of each student = 𝑁𝑜.𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠 = Rs 𝑥
Given that 8 students foiled to go
⇒ No. of students will be (x – 8)
Now,
Share of each student will be equal to
𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑏𝑢𝑑𝑔𝑒𝑡 480
= 𝑁𝑜.𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠 = 𝑅𝑠. 𝑥−8
Given that if 8 students failed to go, then cost of food for each member increased by Rs. 10.

3. A dealer sells an article for Rs. 24 and gains as much percent as the cost price of the article.
Find the cost price of the article.
Sol:
Let the cost price of the article be Rs x
Given that gain percentage of the article is as much as cost price i.e. x
⇒ Selling price = cost price + gain
= Rs x + cost price × gain percentage
𝑥
= Rs x + Rs x × 100
𝑥2
= Rs (𝑥 + 100)
Given that selling price = Rs 24
𝑥2
⇒ Rs 24 = Rs (𝑥 + 100)
𝑥2
⇒ 24 = 𝑥 + 100
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
𝑥2
⇒ 100 + 𝑥 − 24 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 100𝑥 − 2400 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 120𝑥 − 20𝑥 + (120 × −80) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 (𝑥 + 180) − 80(𝑥 + 180) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 180)(𝑥 − 20) = 0
⇒ x + 120 = 0 or x – 20 = 0
⇒ x = -120 or x = 20
Since, cost price of the article cannot be negative, the required cost price of the article is
Rs 20
480 480
⇒ 𝑅𝑠 𝑥−8 − 𝑅𝑠 = 𝑅𝑠 10
𝑥
480 480
⇒ 𝑥−8 − = 10
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 480 (𝑥−8 − 𝑥) = 10
𝑥−(𝑥−8)
⇒ 48 ( 𝑥(𝑥−8) ) = 1
𝑥−𝑥+8
⇒ 48 ( 𝑥 2 −8𝑥 ) = 1
⇒ 48 (8) = 𝑥 2 − 8𝑥
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 8𝑥 − 384 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 24𝑥 + 16𝑥 + (−24 × 16) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 24) + 16(𝑥 − 24) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 24)(𝑥 + 16) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 24) = 0 or (𝑥 + 16) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 − 24 or 𝑥 = −16
Since the value of number of students cannot be negative, the required number of students
attended the picnic is 24.

4. Out of a group of swans, 7/2 times the square root of the total number are playing on the
share of a pond. The two remaining ones are swinging in water. Find the total number of
swans.
Sol:
Let total number of swans be x
Given that 7/2 times the square root of the total number of swans are playing on the share
7
of a pond i.e. 2 √𝑥 and the two remaining ones are swinging in water
7
⇒ Total number of swans x = 2 √𝑥 + 2
7
⇒ 𝑥 = 2 √𝑥 + 2 [𝐿𝑒𝑡 √𝑥 = 𝑦 ⇒ 𝑥 = 𝑦 2 ]
7
⇒ 𝑦2 = 2 𝑦 + 2
7
⇒ 𝑦2 − 2 𝑦 − 2 = 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ 2𝑦 2 − 7𝑦 − 4 = 0
⇒ 2𝑦 2 − 8𝑦 + 𝑦 − 4 = 0
⇒ 2𝑦(𝑦 − 4) + 1(𝑦 − 4) = 0
⇒ (𝑦 − 4)(2𝑦 + 1) = 0
⇒ (𝑦 − 4) = 0 𝑜𝑟 (2𝑦 + 1) = 0
−1
⇒ y = 4 or y = 2
−1 2 1
⇒ 𝑦 2 = 42 = 16 𝑜𝑟 𝑦 2 = ( 2 ) = 4
Since, the value of number of swans cannot be a fraction, the required number of swans
x = 16

5. If the list price of a toy is reduced by Rs. 2, a person can buy 2 toys more for Rs. 360. Find
the original price of the toy.
Sol:
Let initial list price of the toy be Rs x
Given that total cost of toys = Rs 360
𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑡 𝑅𝑠 360 360
⇒ Initially number of toys a person can buy = 𝑙𝑖𝑠𝑡 𝑝𝑟𝑖𝑐𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑒𝑎𝑐ℎ 𝑡𝑜𝑦 = ⇒
𝑅𝑠 𝑥 𝑥
Now, if the list price is reduced by Rs 2 i.e. Rs. (x – 2)
Number of toys a person can buy is 2 more for Rs 360
𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑡 𝑅𝑠 360 360
⇒ Number of toys a person can buy when price is reduced = = 𝑅𝑠 𝑥−2 = 𝑥−2
𝑙𝑖𝑠𝑡 𝑝𝑟𝑖𝑐𝑒
Now,
360 360
− =2
𝑥−2 𝑥
1 1
⇒ 360 (𝑥−2 − 𝑥) = 2
𝑥−(𝑥−2)
⇒ 360 ( 𝑥(𝑥−2) ) = 2
𝑥−𝑥+2
⇒ 360 ( 𝑥 2 −2𝑥 ) = 2
2
⇒ 360 (𝑥 2 −2𝑥) = 2
⇒ 360 = x2 – 2x

6. Rs. 9000 were divided equally among a certain number of persons. Had there been 20 more
persons, each would have got Rs. 160 less. Find the original number of persons.
Sol:
Let the original number of persons be x,
Total amount to be divided equally is Rs. 9000
𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑎𝑚𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑡 900
⇒ Share of each person will be equal to = 𝑁𝑜.𝑜𝑓 𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑠𝑜𝑛𝑠 = 𝑅𝑠 𝑥
Given that if there had been 20 more persons
⇒ Final number of persons will be x + 20, then each would have got Rs 160 less
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
Now,
𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑎𝑚𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑡 9000
Final share of each person will be equal to = 𝑁𝑜.𝑜𝑓 𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑠𝑜𝑛𝑠 = 𝑅𝑠 𝑥+20
We have,
9000 9000
Rs − 𝑅𝑠 𝑥+20 = 𝑅𝑠 160
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 9000 (𝑥 − 𝑥+20) = 160
7+80−𝑥
⇒ 9000 (𝑥(𝑥+20)) = 160
20
⇒ 9000 (𝑥 2 +20𝑥) = 160
⇒ 1125 = x2 + 20x
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 20𝑥 − 1125 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 45𝑥 − 25𝑥 + (45 × −25) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 45) − 25(𝑥 + 45) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 45)(𝑥 − 25) = 0
⇒ x + 45 = 0 or x – 25 = 0
⇒ x = − 45 or x = 25
Since, share of each person cannot be negative value, the required share of each person is
Rs 25.

7. Some students planned a picnic. The budget for food was Rs. 500. But, 5 of them failed to
go and thus the cost of food for each member increased by Rs. 5. How many students
attended the picnic?
Sol:
Let the number of students planned for the picnic be x
Given budget for food = Rs. 500
𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑏𝑢𝑑𝑔𝑒𝑡 500
⇒ Initially share of food for each student = 𝑛𝑜.𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠 = 𝑅𝑠 𝑥
Given that 5 students failed to go for the picnic
⇒ No. of students attended the picnic will be (x – 5)
𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑏𝑢𝑑𝑔𝑒𝑡 500
Now, share of food for each student will be equal to = 𝑛𝑜.𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠 𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑑 = 𝑅𝑠 𝑥−5
Given that, share of food for each student is increased
500 500
⇒ Rs 𝑥−5 − 𝑅𝑠 = 𝑅𝑠 5
𝑥
500 500
⇒ 𝑥−5 − =5
𝑥
1 1
⇒ 500(𝑥−5 − 𝑥) = 5
𝑠−(𝑥−5)
⇒ 500 ( 𝑥(𝑥−5) ) = 5
𝑥−𝑥+5
⇒ 500 ( 𝑥 2 −5𝑥 ) = 5
5
⇒ 500 (𝑥 2 −5𝑥) = 5
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ 500 = x2 – 5x
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 5𝑥 − 500 = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 − 25𝑥 + 20𝑥 − 500 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 − 25) + 20(𝑥 − 25) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 25)(𝑥 + 20) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 − 25) = 0 𝑜𝑟 (𝑥 + 20) = 0
⇒ x = 25 or x = −20
Since, the value of x cannot be negative,
⇒ x = 25
Here, x is the no. of students planned,
Given that 5 students failed to go
⇒ No. of students attended the picnic = x – 5 = 25 – 5 = 20
∴ No. of students attended the picnic = 20

8. A pole has to be erected at a point on the boundary of a circular park of diameter 13 metres
in such a way that the difference of its distances from two diametrically opposite fixed
gates A and B on the boundary is 7 metres. Is it the possible to do so? If yes, at what
distances from the two gates should the pole be erected?
Sol:
Let P be the required location of the pole such that its distance from gets B is x meters i.e.
BP = x meters and also AP – BP = 7m ⇒ AP = (x + 7)m
P

Xm

A O B
13m

Since, AB is a diameter and P is a point in the semi-circle ∆𝐴𝑃𝐵 is right angled at P.


Now, (𝑥 + 7)2 + (𝑥)2 = (13)2 [∵ 𝐴𝑃2 + 𝐵𝑃2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝐴𝐵 = 13𝑚]
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 14𝑥 + 49 + 𝑥 2 = 169
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 14𝑥 + (49 − 169) = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 14𝑥 − 180 = 0
⇒ 2(𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 − 60) = 0
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 7𝑥 − 60 = 0
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
⇒ 𝑥 2 + 12𝑥 − 5𝑥 + (12𝑥 − 5) = 0
⇒ 𝑥(𝑥 + 12) − 5(𝑥 + 12) = 0
⇒ (𝑥 + 12)(𝑥 − 5) = 0
⇒ x + 12 = 0 or x – 5 = 0
⇒ x = - 12m or x = 5m
Since, BP cannot be in negative value (or) distances cannot be negative values,
The required values of BP and AP are 5m and 12m respectively.
∴ The pole has to be erected at a distance 5meters from the gate B.

9. In a class test, the sum of the marks obtained by P in Mathematics and science is 28. Had
he got 3 marks more in Mathematics and 4 marks less in Science. The product of his marks,
would have been 180. Find his marks in the two subjects.
Sol:
Let number of marks obtained by P in mathematics and science be x and y respectively.
Given that sum of these two is 28
⇒ x +y = 28 ⇒ x = 28 – y
Given that if x becomes (x + 3) i.e. marks in mathematics is increased by 3 and y
becomes (y – 4) i.e. marks in science is decreased by 4, The product of these two
becomes by 4,
⇒ (𝑥 + 3)(𝑦 − 4) = 180
⇒ (28 − 𝑦 + 3)(𝑦 − 4) = 180 [∵ 𝑥 = 28 − 𝑦]
⇒ (31 − 𝑦)(𝑦 − 4) = 180
⇒ 31y – 31 × 4 – y2 + 4y = 180
⇒ 35y – y2 – 124 = 180
⇒ 𝑦 2 − 35𝑦 + 180 + 124 = 0
⇒ 𝑦 2 − 35𝑦 + 304 = 0
⇒ 𝑦 2 − 19𝑦 − 16𝑦 + (−19 × −16) = 0
⇒ 𝑦(𝑦 − 19) − 16(𝑦 − 19) = 0
⇒ (𝑦 − 19)(𝑦 − 16) = 0
⇒ y – 19 = 0 or y – 16 = 0
⇒ y = 19 or y = 16
We have,
x + y = 28
if y = 19 ⇒ x = 28 – y = 28 – 19 = 9 and
if y = 16 ⇒ x = 28 – y = 28 – 16 = 12
∴ Marks in mathematics = 9 and Marks in Science = 19 or
Marks in mathematics = 12 and Marks in Science = 16
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
10. In a class test, the sum of Shefali’s marks in Mathematics and English is 30. Had she got 2
marks more in Mathematics and 3 marks less in English, the product of her marks would
have been 210. Find her marks in two subjects.
Sol:
Let marks of shefali in Mathematics and English be x and y respectively.
Given that sum of these two is 30 ⇒ x + y = 30 ⇒ x = 30 – y
Given that if x becomes (x + 2) i.e. marks in mathematics is increased by 2
and y becomes (y – 3) i.e. marks in English is decreased by 3,
the product at these two becomes 210
i.e. (x + 2) (y – 3) = 210
⇒ (30 – y + 2) (y – 3) = 210 [∵ x = 30 – y]
⇒ (32 – y) (y – 3) = 210
⇒ (32 – y) (y – 3) = 210
⇒ 32y – 32 × 3 – y × 3y = 210
⇒ 35y – 96 – y2 = 210
⇒ 𝑦 2 − 35𝑦 + 210 + 96 = 0
⇒ 𝑦 2 − 35 + 306 = 0
⇒ 𝑦 2 − 17𝑦 − 18𝑦 + (−17 × −18) = 0 [∵ 306 = 17 × 18 = −17 × −18]
⇒ 𝑦(𝑦 − 17) − 18(𝑦 − 17) = 0
⇒ (𝑦 − 17)(𝑦 − 18) = 0
⇒ y – 17 = 0 or y – 18 = 0
⇒ y = 17 or y = 18
We have,
x + y = 30
if y = 17 ⇒ x = 30 – y = 30 – 17 = 13 and
if y = 18 ⇒ x = 30 – y = 30 – 18 = 18
∴ Marks in Mathematics = 13 and marks in English = 17 or
Marks in Mathematics = 12 and marks in English = 18.

11. A cottage industry produces a certain number of pottery articles in a day. It was observed
on a particular day that the cost of production of each article (in rupees) was 3 more than
twice the number of articles produced on that day. If the total cost of production on that day
was Rs. 90, find the number of articles produced and the cost of each article.
Sol:
Let the number of articles produced on a particular day be x.
Total cost of production on that particular day = Rs 90
𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 90
Given ⇒ Cost of production of each article = = 𝑅𝑠
𝑛𝑜.𝑜𝑓 𝑎𝑟𝑡𝑖𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑠 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑒𝑑 𝑥
But given that, the cost of production of each article was 3 more than twice the no. of
articles produced on that day i.e. Rs (2x +3)
Class X Chapter 8 – Quadratic Equations Maths
__________________________________________________________________
90
⇒ Rs (2x + 3) = Rs 𝑥
90
⇒ 2x + 3 = 𝑥
⇒ x(2x + 3) = 90 ⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 − 90 = 0
⇒ 2𝑥 2 + 15𝑥 − 12𝑥 − 90 = 0
⇒ 𝑥(2𝑥 + 15) − 6(2𝑥 + 15) = 0
⇒ (2x + 15) (x – 16) = 0
⇒ 2x + 15 = 0 or x – 6 = 0
−15
⇒x= 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 6
2
Since, number of articles x cannot be a negative value, the required value of number of
articles produced on a particular day x = 6.
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

Exercise – 9.1

1. Write the first terms of each of the following sequences whose nth term are
(i) 𝑎𝑛 = 3𝑛 + 2
𝑛−2
(ii) 𝑎𝑛 = 3
𝑛
(iii) 𝑎𝑛 = 3
3𝑛−2
(iv) 𝑎𝑛 = 5
(v) 𝑎𝑛 = (−1)𝑛 2𝑛
𝑛(𝑛−2)
(vi) 𝑎𝑛 = 2
(vii) 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑛2 − 𝑛 + 1
(viii) 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑛2 − 𝑛 + 1
2𝑛−3
(ix) 𝑎𝑛 = 6
Sol:
We have to write first five terms of given sequences
(i) 𝑎𝑛 = 3𝑛 + 2
Given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = 3𝑛 + 2
To write first five terms of given sequence put n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, we get
𝑎1 = (3 × 1) + 2 = 3 + 2 = 5
𝑎2 = (3 × 2) + 2 = 6 + 2 = 8
𝑎3 = (3 × 3) + 2 = 9 + 2 = 11
𝑎4 = (3 × 4) + 2 = 12 + 2 = 14
𝑎5 = (3 × 5) + 2 = 15 + 2 = 17
∴ The required first five terms of given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = 3𝑛 + 2 are 5, 8, 11, 14, 17.

𝑛−2
(ii) 𝑎𝑛 = 3
𝑛−2
Given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = 3
𝑛−2
To write first five terms of given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = 3
put n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 then we get
1−2 −1 2−2
𝑎1 = = ; 𝑎2 = =0
3 3 3
3−2 1 4−2 2
𝑎3 = = 3 ; 𝑎4 = =3
3 3
5−2
𝑎5 = =1
3
𝑛−2 −1 1 2
∴ The required first five terms of given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = are , 0, , , 1.
3 𝟑 3 3
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

(iii) 𝑎𝑛 = 3𝑛
Given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = 3𝑛
To write first five terms of given sequence, put n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 in given sequence.
Then,
𝑎1 = 31 = 3; 𝑎2 = 32 = 9; 𝑎3 = 27; 𝑎4 = 34 = 81; 𝑎5 = 35 = 243.

3𝑛−2
(iv) 𝑎𝑛 = 5
3𝑛−2
Given sequence, 𝑎𝑛 = 5
3𝑛−2
To write first five terms, put n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 in given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = 5
Then, we ger
3×1−2 3−2 1
𝑎1 = = =5
5 5
3×2−2 6−2 4
𝑎2 = = =5
5 5
3×3−2 9−2 7
𝑎3 = = =5
5 5
3×4−2 12−2 10
𝑎4 = = =
5 5 5
3×5−2 15−2 13
𝑎5 = = =
5 5 5
1 4 7 10 13
∴ The required first five terms are 5 , 5 , 5 , ,
5 5

(v) 𝑎𝑛 = (−1)𝑛 2𝑛
Given sequence is an = (−1)n 2n
To get first five terms of given sequence an, put n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
𝑎1 = (−1)1 . 21 = (−1). 2 = −2
𝑎2 = (−1)2 . 22 = (−1). 4 = 4
𝑎3 = (−1)3 . 23 = (−1). 8 = −8
𝑎4 = (−1)4 . 24 = (−1). 16 = 16
𝑎5 = (−1)5 . 25 = (−1). 32 = −32
∴ The first five terms are -2, 4, -8, 16, -32.

𝑛(𝑛−2)
(vi) 𝑎𝑛 =
2
𝑛(𝑛−2)
The given sequence is, 𝑎𝑛 = 2
𝑛(𝑛−2)
To write first five terms of given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = 2
Put n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. Then, we get
1(1−2) 1−1 −1
𝑎1 = = =
2 2 2
2(2−2) 2.0
𝑎2 = 2
= 2
=0
3(3−2) 3.1 3
𝑎3 = = =2
2 2
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
4(4−2) 4.2
𝑎4 = = =4
2 2
5(5−2) 5.3 15
𝑎5 = = =
2 2 2
−1 3 15
∴ The required first five terms are , 0, 2 , 4, 2 .
2

(vii) 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑛 2 − 𝑛 + 1
The given sequence is, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑛2 − 𝑛 + 1
To write first five terms of given sequence 𝑎𝑛1 we get put n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. Then we
get 𝑎1 = 12 − 1 + 1 = 1
𝑎2 = 22 − 2 + 1 = 3
𝑎3 = 32 − 3 + 1 = 7
𝑎4 = 42 − 4 + 1 = 13
𝑎5 = 52 − 5 + 1 = 21
∴The required first five terms of given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑛2 − 𝑛 + 1 are 1, 3, 7, 13, 21

(viii) 𝑎𝑛 = 2𝑛2 − 3𝑛 + 1
The given sequence is 𝑎𝑛 = 2𝑛2 − 3𝑛 + 1
To write first five terms of given sequence 𝑎𝑛 , we put n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. Then we get
𝑎1 = 2.12 − 3.1 + 1 = 2 − 3 + 1 = 0
𝑎2 = 2.22 − 3.2 + 1 = 8 − 6 + 1 = 3
𝑎3 = 2.32 − 3.3 + 1 = 18 − 9 + 1 = 10
𝑎4 = 2.42 − 3.4 + 1 = 32 − 12 + 1 = 21
𝑎5 = 2.52 − 3.5 + 1 = 50 − 15 + 1 = 36
∴ The required first five terms of given sequence 𝑎𝑛 − 2𝑛2 − 3𝑛 + 1 are 0, 3, 10,
21, 36

2𝑛−3
(ix) 𝑎𝑛 = 6
2𝑛−3
Given sequence is, 𝑎𝑛 = 6
To write first five terms of given sequence we put n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. Then, we get,
2.1−3 2−3 −1
𝑎1 = = =
6 6 6
2.2−3 4−3 1
𝑎2 = = =6
6 6
2.4−3 8−3 5
𝑎3 = = =6
6 6
2.4−3 8−3 5
𝑎4 = = =6
6 6
2.5−3 10−3 7
𝑎5 = = =6
6 6
2𝑛 −3 −1 1 1 5 7
∴ The required first five terms of given sequence 𝑎𝑛 = are , 6 , 2 , 6 , 6.
6 6
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

2. Find the indicated terms in each of the following sequences whose nth terms are:
(i) 𝑎𝑛 = 5𝑛 − 4; 𝑎12 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎15
3𝑛−2
(ii) 𝑎𝑛 = 4𝑛+5; 𝑎7 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎8
(iii) 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑛(𝑛 − 1)(𝑛 − 2); 𝑎5 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎8
(iv) 𝑎𝑛 = (𝑛 − 1)(2 − 𝑛)(3 + 𝑛); 𝑎11 𝑎21 𝑎3
(v) 𝑎𝑛 = (−1)𝑛 𝑛; 𝑎3 , 𝑎5 , 𝑎8
Sol:
We have to find the required term of a sequence when nth term of that sequence is given.
(i) 𝑎𝑛 = 5𝑛 − 4; 𝑎12 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎15
Given nth term of a sequence 𝑎𝑛 = 5𝑛 − 4
To find 12th term, 15th terms of that sequence, we put n = 12, 15 in its nth term.
Then, we get
𝑎12 = 5.12 − 4 = 60 − 4 = 56
𝑎15 = 5.15 − 4 = 15 − 4 = 71
∴ The required terms 𝑎12 = 56, 𝑎15 = 71
3𝑛−2
(ii) 𝑎𝑛 = 4𝑛+5; 𝑎7 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎8
3𝑛−2
Given nth term is (an) = 4𝑛+5
To find 7th, 8th terms of given sequence, we put n = 7, 8.
(3.7)−2 19
𝑎7 = (4.7)+5 = 33
(3.8)−2 22
𝑎8 = (4.8)+5 = 37
19 22
∴ The required terms 𝑎7 = 33 and 𝑎8 = 37.
(iii) 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑛(𝑛 − 1)(𝑛 − 2); 𝑎5 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎8
Given nth term is 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑛(𝑛 − 1)(𝑛 − 2)
To find 5th, 8th terms of given sequence, put n= 5, 8 in an then, we get
𝑎5 = 5(5 − 1). (5 − 2) = 5.4.3 = 60
𝑎8 = 8. (8 − 1). (8 − 2) = 8.7.6 = 336
∴ The required terms are 𝑎5 = 60 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎8 = 336
(iv) 𝑎𝑛 = (𝑛 − 1)(2 − 𝑛)(3 + 𝑛); 𝑎11 𝑎21 𝑎3
The given nth term is 𝑎𝑛 = (𝑛 + 1)(2 − 𝑛)(3 + 𝑛)
To find 𝑎1 , 𝑎2 , 𝑎3 of given sequence put n = 1, 2, 3 is an
𝑎1 = (1 − 1)(2 − 1)(3 + 1) = 0. 1. 4 = 0
𝑎2 = (2 − 1)(2 − 2)(3 + 2) = 1. 0. 5 = 0
𝑎3 = (3 − 1)(2 − 3)(3 + 3) = 2. −1. 6 = −12
∴ The required terms 𝑎1 = 0, 𝑎2 = 0, 𝑎3 = −12
(v) 𝑎𝑛 = (−1)𝑛 𝑛; 𝑎3 , 𝑎5 , 𝑎8
The given nth term is, 𝑎𝑛 = (−1)𝑛 . 𝑛
To find 𝑎3 . 𝑎5 , 𝑎8 of given sequence put n = 3, 5, 8, in an.
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

𝑎3 = (−1)3 . 3 = −1. 3 = −3
𝑎5 = (−1)5 . 5 = −1. 5 = −5
𝑎8 = (−1)8 = 1.8 = 8
∴ The required terms 𝑎3 = −3, 𝑎5 = −5, 𝑎8 = 8

3. Find the next five terms of each of the following sequences given by:
(i) 𝑎1 = 1, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎𝑛−1 + 2, 𝑛 ≥ 2
(ii) 𝑎1 = 𝑎2 = 2, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎𝑛−1 − 3, 𝑛 > 2
𝑎𝑛 −1
(iii) 𝑎1 = −1, 𝑎𝑛 = ,𝑛 ≥ 2
𝑛
(iv) 𝑎1 = 4, 𝑎𝑛 = 4 𝑎𝑛−1 + 3, 𝑛 > 1
Sol:
We have to find next five terms of following sequences.
(i) 𝑎1 = 1, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎𝑛−1 + 2, 𝑛 ≥ 2
Given, first term (a1) = 1,
nth term 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎𝑛−1 + 2, 𝑛 ≥ 2
To find 2nd, 3rd, 4th , 5th , 6th terms, we use given condition n ≥ 2 for nth term 𝑎𝑛 =
𝑎𝑛−1 + 2
𝑎2 = 𝑎2−1 + 2 = 𝑎1 + 2 = 1 + 2 = 3 (∴ 𝑎1 = 1)
𝑎3 = 𝑎3−1 + 2 = 𝑎2 + 2 = 3 + 2 = 5
𝑎4 = 𝑎4−1 + 2 = 𝑎3 + 2 = 5 + 2 = 7
𝑎5 = 𝑎5−1 + 2 = 𝑎4 + 2 = 7 + 2 = 9
𝑎6 = 𝑎6−1 + 2 = 𝑎5 + 2 = 𝑎 + 2 = 11
∴ The next five terms are,
𝑎2 = 3, 𝑎3 = 5, 𝑎4 = 7, 𝑎5 = 𝑎, 𝑎6 = 11
(ii) 𝑎1 = 𝑎2 = 2, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎𝑛−1 − 3, 𝑛 > 2
Given,
First term (𝑎1 ) = 2
Second term (𝑎2 ) = 2
nth term (𝑎𝑛 ) = 𝑎𝑛−1 − 3
To find next five terms i.e., 𝑎3 , 𝑎4 , 𝑎5 , 𝑎6 , 𝑎7 we put n = 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 is 𝑎𝑛
𝑎3 = 𝑎3−1 − 3 = 2 − 3 = −1
𝑎4 = 𝑎4−1 − 3 = 𝑎3 − 3 = −1 − 3 = −4
𝑎5 = 𝑎5−1 − 3 = 𝑎4 − 3 = −4 − 3 = −7
𝑎6 = 𝑎6−1 − 3 = 𝑎5 − 3 = −7 − 3 = −10
𝑎7 = 𝑎7−1 − 3 = 𝑎6 − 3 = −10 − 3 = −13
∴ The next five terms are, 𝑎3 = −1, 𝑎4 = −4, 𝑎5 = −7, 𝑎6 = −10, 𝑎7 = −13

𝑎𝑛 −1
(iii) 𝑎1 = −1, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑛
,𝑛 ≥ 2
Given, first term (𝑎1 ) = −1
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
𝑎𝑛 −1
nth term (𝑎𝑛 ) = ,𝑛 ≥ 2
𝑛
To find next five terms i.e., 𝑎2 , 𝑎3 , 𝑎4 , 𝑎5 , 𝑎6 we put n = 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 is an
𝑎2−1 𝑎1 −1
𝑎2 = = =
2 2 2
𝑎3−1 𝑎2 −1/2 −1
𝑎3 = = = =
3 3 3 6
𝑎4−1 𝑎3 −1/6 −1
𝑎4 = = = =
4 4 4 24
𝑎5−1 𝑎4 −1/24 −1
𝑎5 = = = = 120
5 5 5
∴ The next five terms are,
−1 −1 −1 −1 −1
𝑎2 = , 𝑎3 = , 𝑎4 = , 𝑎5 = 120 , 𝑎6 = 720
2 6 24
(iv) 𝑎1 = 4, 𝑎𝑛 = 4 𝑎𝑛−1 + 3, 𝑛 > 1
Given,
First term (a1) = 4
nth term (𝑎𝑛 ) = 4 𝑎𝑛−1 + 3, n > 1
To find next five terms i.e., 𝑎2 , 𝑎3 , 𝑎4 , 𝑎5 , 𝑎6 we put n= 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 is 𝑎𝑛
Then, we get
𝑎2 = 4𝑎2−1 + 3 = 4. 𝑎1 + 3 = 4.4 + 3 = 19 (∴ 𝑎1 = 4)
𝑎3 = 4𝑎3−1 + 3 = 4. 𝑎2 + 3 = 4(19) + 3 = 79
𝑎4 = 4 𝑎4−1 + 3 = 4. 𝑎3 + 3 = 4(79) + 3 = 319
𝑎5 = 4 𝑎5−1 + 3 = 4. 𝑎4 + 3 = 4(319) + 3 = 1279
𝑎6 = 4. 𝑎6−1 + 3 = 4. 𝑎5 + 3 = 4(1279) + 3 = 5119
∴ The required next five terms are,
𝑎2 = 19, 𝑎3 = 79, 𝑎4 = 319, 𝑎5 = 1279, 𝑎6 = 5119

Exercise – 9.2

1. For the following arithmetic progressions write the first term a and the common difference
d:
(i) 5, 1,3, 7,..............
1 3 5 7
(ii) , , , ,.............
5 5 5 5
(iii) 0.3, 0.55, 0.80, 1.05,.........
(iv) 1.1, 3.1, 5.1, 7.1,.....
Sol:
We know that if a is the first term and d is the common difference, the arithmetic
progression is a, a  d , a  2d  a  3d ,..............
(i) 5, 1,3, 7,..............
Given arithmetic series is
5, 1,3,7.............
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

This is in the form of a, a  d , a  2d  a  3d ,.............. by comparing these two


a  5, a  d  1, a  2d  3, a  3d  7,........
First term  a   5
By subtracting second and first term, we get
a  d   a  d
1   5   d
4d
Common difference  d   4.
1 3 5 7
(ii) , , , ,.............
5 5 5 5
Given arithmetic series is,
1 3 5 7
, , , ,.............
5 5 5 5
1 2 5 7
This is in the form of , , , ,.............
5 5 5 5
a, a  d , a  2d , a  3d ,......
By comparing this two, we get
1 3 5 7
a  , a  d  , a  2d  , a  3d 
5 5 5 5
1
First term cos 
5
By subtracting first term from second term, we get
d  a  d   a
3 1
d 
5 5
2
d
5
2
common difference  d  
5
(iii) 0.3, 0.55, 0.80, 1.05,.........
Given arithmetic series,
0.3, 0.55, 0.80, 1.05,.........
General arithmetic series
a, a  d , a  2d , a  3d ,........
By comparing,
a  0.3, a  d  0.55, a  2d  0.80, a  3d  1.05
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

First term  a   0.3.


By subtracting first term from second term. We get
d  a  d   a
d  0.55  0.3
d  0.25
Common difference (d)  0.25
(iv) 1.1, 3.1, 5.1, 7.1,.....
General series is
a, a  d , a  2d , a  3d ,........
By comparing this two, we get
a  1.1, a  d  3.1, a  2d  5.1, a  3d  71
First term  a   1.1
Common difference  d    a  d    a 
 3.1   1.1
Common difference (d)  2

2. Write the arithmetic progressions write first term a and common difference d are as
follows:
(i) a  4, d  3
1
(ii) a  1, d 
2
(iii) a  1.5, d  0.5
Sol:
We know that, if first term  a   a and common difference  d , then the arithmetic series
is, a, a  d , a  2d , a  3d ,........
(i) a  4, d  3
Given first term  a   4
Common difference  d   3
Then arithmetic progression is,
a, a  d , a  2d , a  3d ,........
 4, 4  3, a  2  3 , 4  3  3 ,.........
 4,1, 2, 5, 8,.......
1
(ii) a  1, d 
2
Given,
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

First term  a   1
1
Common difference  d  
2
Then arithmetic progression is,
 a, a  d , a  2d , a  3d ,..........
1 1 1
 1, 1  , 1  2 , 1  3 ,.........
2 2 2
1 1
 1, ,0, ,..........
2 2
(iii) a  1.5, d  0.5
Given
First term  a   1.5
Common difference  d   0.5
Then arithmetic progression is
 a, a  d , a  2d , a  3d ,.......
 1.5, 1.5  0.5, 1.5  2  0.5 , 1.5  3  0.5
 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3,.............
Then required progression is
1.5, 2, 2.5, 3,.........

3. In which of the following situations, the sequence of numbers formed will form an A.P.?
(i) The cost of digging a well for the first metre is Rs 150 and rises by Rs 20 for each
succeeding metre.
1
(ii) The amount of air present in the cylinder when a vacuum pump removes each time 4 of
their remaining in the cylinder.
Sol:
(i) Given,
Cost of digging a well for the first meter  c1   Rs.150.
Cost rises by Rs.20 for each succeeding meter
Then,
Cost of digging for the second meter  c2   Rs.150  Rs 20
 Rs 170
Cost of digging for the third meter  c3   Rs.170  Rs 20
 Rs 210
Thus, costs of digging a well for different lengths are
150,170,190, 210,......
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

Clearly, this series is in A  p.


With first term  a   150, common difference  d   20
(ii) Given
th
3
Let the initial volume of air in a cylinder be V liters each time of air in a remaining i.e.,
4
1
1
4
3
First time, the air in cylinder is V.
4
3
Second time, the air in cylinder is V .
4
2
3
Third time, the air in cylinder is   V .
4
2 3
3 3 3
Therefore, series is V , V ,   V ,   V ,.........
4 4 4

4. Show that the sequence defined by an = 5n − 7 is an A.P., find its common difference.
Sol:
Given sequence is
an  5n  7
nth term of given sequence  an   5n  7

 n  1 term of given sequence  an  1  an


th

  5n  2    5n  7 
5
d  5

5. Show that the sequence defined by an = 3n2 — 5 is not an A.P.


Sol:
Given sequence is,
an  3n2  5.
nth term of given sequence  an   3n 2  5.

 n  1 term of given sequence  an  1  3  n  1  5


th 2

 3  n 2  12  2n.1  5
 3n2  6n  2
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

 The common difference  d   an  1  an


d   3n 2  6n  2    3n 2  5 
 3a 2  6n  2  3n2  5
 6n  3
Common difference (d) depends on ' n ' value
 given sequence is not in A. p

6. The general term of a sequence is given by an = −4n + 15. Is the sequence an A.P.? If so,
find its 15th term and the common difference.
Sol:
Given sequence is,
an  4n  15.
nth term is  an   4n  15

 n  1 term is  an 1   4  n  1  15
th

 4n  4  15
 4n  11
Common difference  d   an 1  an
  4n  11   4n  15 
 4n  11  4n 15
d  4
Common difference  d   an 1  an
  4n  11   4n  15 
 4n  11  4n 15
d  4.
Common difference (d) does not depend on ' n ' value
 given sequence is in A.P
 15th term a15  4 15   15
 60  15
 45
a15  45

7. Find the common difference and write the next four terms of each of the following
arithmetic progressions:
(i) 1, 2, 5, 8,.......
(ii) 0, 3, 6, 9,...........
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

1 3
(iii) 1, , ,........
4 2
5 2
(iv) 1, , ,........
6 3
Sol:
(i) 1, 2, 5, 8,.......
Given arithmetic progression is,
a1  1, a2  2, a3  5, a4  8.........
Common difference  d   a2  a1
 2  1
d  3
To find next four terms
a5  a4  d  8  3  11
a6  a5  d  11  3  14
a7  a6  d  14  3  17
a8  a7  d  17  3  20
 d  3, a5  11, a6  16, a7  17, a8  20
(ii) 0, 3, 6, 9,...........
Given arithmetic progression is.
0, 3, 6, a4  9...........
Common difference  d   a2  a1
 3  0
d  3
To find next four terms
a5  a4  d  9  3  12
a6  a5  d  12  3  15
a7  a6  d  15  3  18
a8  a7  d  18  3  21
 d  3, a5  12, a6  15, a7  17, a8  21
1 3
(iii) 1, , ,........
4 2
Given arithmetic progression is,
1 3
1, , ,........
4 2
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

1 3
a1  1, a2  , a3  ,.........
4 2
Common difference  d   a2  a1
1
   1
4
1 4

4
5
d
4

To find next four terms,


3 5 6  4 11
a4  a3  d    
2 4 4 4
11 5 16
a5  a4  d   
4 4 4
16 5 21
a6  a5  d   
4 4 4
21 5 26
a7  a6  d   
4 4 4
5 11 16 21 26
 d  , a4  , a5  , a6  , a7  .
4 4 4 4 4
(iv) Given arithmetic progression is,
5 2
1, , ,........
6 3
5 2
a1  1, a2  , a3  ,.........
6 3
Common difference  d   a2  a1
5
   1
6
5  6

6
1

6

To find next four terms,


1
2 1 4  1  3 1
a4  a3  d      .
3 6 6 63 2
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
1
1 1 3  1  2 1
a5  a4  d      .
2 6 6 63 2
1 1 2  1 1
a6  a5  d     .
3 6 6 16
1 1
a7  a6  d    0.
6 6
1 1 1 1
 d  , a4   , a5   , a6   , a7  0
6 2 3 6

8. Prove that no matter what the real numbers a and b are, the sequence with nth term a + nb
is always an A.P. What is the common difference?
Sol:
Given sequence  an   an  6n
nth term  an   a  nb

 n  1 term  an 1   a   n  1 b.
th

Common difference (d)  an 1  an


d   a   n  1 b    a  nb 
 a  n b  b  a  nb
b
 common difference (d) does not depend on nth value so, given sequence I sin Ap with
d   b

9. Write the sequence with nth term :


(i) an  3  4n
Sol:
(i) an  3  4n
Given, nth term an  3  4n
 n  1 term an 1  3  4  n  1
th

Common difference  d   an 1  an
  3  4  n  1   3  4n
 4.
d  4 does not depend on n value so, the given series is in A. p and the sequence is
a1  3  4 1  3  4  7
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

a2  a1  d  7  4  11; a3  a2  d  11  4  15
 7,11,15,19,.........
(ii) an  5  2n
Given, nth term  an   5  2n

 n  1 term  an 1   5  2  n  1
th

 7  2n
Common difference  d   7  2n  5  20
 2.
d  2 does not depend on n value given sequence is in A. p and the sequence is B1
a1  5  2.1  7
a2  7  2  9, a3  9  2  11, a4  11  2  13
 7,9,11,13,............
(iii) an  6  n
Given, nth term an  6  n
 n  1 term an 1  6   n  1
th

 5n
Common difference  d   an 1  an
 5  n   6  n
 1
 d  1does not depend on n value given sequence is in A. p the sequence is
a1  6  1  5, a2  5  1  4, a3  4  1  3, a4  3  1  2
 5, 4,3, 2,1,.............
(iv) an  9  5n
Given, nth term an  9  5n
 n  1 term an 1  9  5  n  1
th

 4  5n
Common difference  d   an 1  an
  4  5n    4  5n 
 5
d  1does not depend on n value given sequence is in A. p
The sequence is,
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

a1  9  1.1  4
a2  9  5.2  1
a3  9  5.3  6
 4, 1, 6, 11,.........

10. Find out which of the following sequences are arithmetic progressions. For those which are
arithmetic progressions, find out the common differences.
Sol:
(i) 3,6,12, 24,.............
General arithmetic progression is a, a  d , a  2d , a  3d ,.........
Common difference  d   Second term – first term
  d  d   a  d (or)
 Third term – second term
  a  2d    a  d   d
To check given sequence is in A. p or not we use this condition.
Second term – First term = Third term – Second term
a1  3, a2  6, a3  12, a4  24
Second term – First term = 6  3  3
Third term – Second term  12  6  6
This two are not equal so given sequence is not in A. p
(ii) 0, 4, 8, 12,............
In the given sequence
a1  0, a2  4, a3  8, a4  12
Check the condition
Second term – first term = third term – second term
a2  a1  a8  a2
4  0  8   4 
4  8  4
4  4
Condition is satisfied  given sequence is in A. p with common difference
 d   a2  a1  4
1 1 1 1
(iii) , , , ,...........
2 4 6 8
In the given sequence
1 1 1 1
a1  , a2  , a3  , a4  .
2 4 6 8
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

Check the condition


a2  a1  a3  a2
1 1 1 1
  
4 2 6 4
1 2 4  6

4 24
1 2

4 24
1 1

4 12
Condition is not satisfied
 given sequence not in A. p
(iv) 12, 2, 8, 18,.............
In the given sequence
a1  12, a2  2, a3  8, a4  18
Check the condition
a2  a1  a3  a2
2 12  8  2
10  10
 given sequence is in A. p with common difference d  10
(v) 3,3,3,3,..............
In the given sequence
a1  3, a2  3, a3  3, a4  3
Check the condition
a2  a1  a3  a2
33  33
00
 given sequence is in A. p with common difference d  0
(vi) p, p  90, p  80, p  270,...... where p   999 
In the given sequence
a1  p, a2  p  90, a3  p  180, a4  p  270
Check the condition
a2  a1  a3  a2
p  90  p  R  180  p  90
90  180  90
90  90
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

(vii) 1.0, 1.7, 2.4, 3.1….,


In the given sequence
a1  1.0, a2  1.7, a3  2.4, a4  31
Check the condition
a2  a1  a3  a2
1.7  1.0  2.4  1.7
0.7  0.7
 The given sequence is in A. p with d  0.7
(viii) 225, 425, 625, 825,.........
In the given sequence
a1  225, a2  425, a3  625, a4  825
Check the condition
a2  a1  a3  a2
425  225  625  425
200  200
 The given sequence is in A. p with d  200
(ix) 10,10  25 ,10  26 ,10  27 ,..........
In the given sequence
a1  10, a2  10  25 , a3  10  26 , a4  10  27
Check the condition
a2  a1  a3  a2
10  25  10  10  26  10  25
25  26  25.
 The given sequence is not in A. p

Exercise – 9.3

1. Find:
(i) 10th term of the AP 1,4 , 7, 10….
(ii) 18th term of the AP 2,3 2,5 2,............
(iii) nth term of the AP 13,8,3, 2,...........
(iv) 10th term of the AP 40, 15,10,35,.........
(v) 8th term of the AP 11, 104, 91, 78………
(vi) 11th term of the AP 10.0, 10.5, 11.0, 11.2…….
3 5 7 9
(vii) 9th term of the AP , ,  ,..............
4 4 4 4
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

Sol:
(i) Given A. p is
1, 4, 7,10,..........
First term  a   1
Common difference (d) = second term first term
 4 1
 3.
nth term in an A. p  a   n  1 d
10th term in an 1  10  1 3
 1  9.3
 1  27
 28
(ii) Given A. p is
2,3 2,5 2,............
First term  a   2
Common difference  Second term – First term
3 2 2
d 2 2
nth term in an A. p  a   n  1 d
18th term of A. p  2  18  1 2 2
 2  17.2 2
 2 1  34 
 35 2
18th term of A. p is 35 2
(iii) Given A. p is
13,8,3, 2,...........
First term  a   13
Common difference  d   Second term first term
 8  13
 5
nth term of an A. p an  a   n  1 d
 13   n  1  5
 13  5n  5
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

an  18  5n
(iv) Given A. p is
40, 15,10,35,.........
First term  a   40
Common difference  d   Second term – first term
 15   40 
 40  15
 25
nth term of an A. p an  a   n  1 d
10th term of A. p a10  40  10  1 25
 40  9.25
 40  225
 185
(v) Given sequence is
117,104,91, 78,............
First learn can  117
Common difference  d   Second term – first term
 104  117
 13
nth term an  a   n  1 d
8th term a8  a   8  1 d
 117  7  13
 117  91
 26
(vi) Given A. p is
10.0,10.5,11.0,11.5,..........
First term  a   10.0
Common difference (d)  Second term – first term
 10.5  10.0
 0.5
nth term an  a   n  1 d
11th term a11  10.0  11  1 0.5
 10.0  10  0.5
 10.0  5
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

 15.0
(vii) Given A. p is
3 5 7 9
, ,  ,..............
4 4 4 4
3
First term  a  
4
Common difference  d   Second term – first term
5 3
 
4 4
2

4
n term an  a   n  1 d
th

9th term a9  a   9  1 d
3 2
  8.
4 4
3 16
 
4 4
19

4

2. (i) Which term of the AP 3, 8, 13, …. is 248?


(ii) Which term of the AP 84, 80, 76, … is 0?
(iii) Which term of the AP 4, 9, 14, …. is 254?
(iv) Which term of the AP 21, 42, 63, 84, … is 420?
(v) Which term of the AP 121, 117, 113, … is its first negative term?
Sol:
(i) Given A. p is 3,8,13,.........
First term  a   3
Common difference  d   Second term – first term
 83
5
nth term  an   a   n  1 d
Given nth term an  248
248  3   n  1 .5
248  2  5n
5n  250
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

250
n  50
5
50th term is 248.
(ii) Given A. p is 84,80, 76,.........
First term  a   84
Common difference  d   a2  a
 80  84
 4
nth term  an   a   n  1 d
Given nth term is 0
0  84   n  1  4
84  4  n  1
21
84
n 1   21
4
n  21  1  22
22nd term is 0.
(iii) Given A. p 4,9,14,.......
First term  a   4
Common difference  d   a 2  a
 94
5
nth term  an   a   n  1 d
Given nth term is 254
4   n  1 5  254
 n  1  5  250
250
n 1   50
5
n  51
 51st term is 254.
(iv) Given A. p
21, 42, 63,84,..........
a  21, d  a2  a
 42  21
 21
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

nth term  an   a   n  1 d
Given nth term  420
21   n  1 21  420
 n  1 21  399
399
n 1   19
21
n  20
 20th term is 420.
(v) Given A. p is 121,117,113,..........
First term  a   121
Common difference  d   117  121
 4
nth term  a   a   n  1 d
Given nth term is negative i.e., an  0
121   n  1  4  0
121  4  4n  0
125  4n  0
4n  125
125
n
4
n  31.25
The integer which comes after 31.25 is 32.
32nd term is first negative term

3. (i) Is 68 a term of the AP 7, 10, 13,….?


(ii) Is 302 a term of the AP 3, 8, 13, …. ?
(iii) Is −150 a term of the AP 11, 8, 5, 2, …?
Sol:
In the given problem, we are given an A. p and the Value of one of its term
We need to find whether it is a term of the A. p or not so here we will use the formula
an  a   n  1 d
(i) Here, A. p is 7,10,13,...........
an  68, a  7 and d  10  7  3
Using the above mentioned formula, we get
68  7   n  1 3
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

 68  7  3n  3
 31  3  3n
 64  3n
64
n
3
Since, the value of n is a fraction.
Thus, 68 is not the team of the given A. p
(ii) Here, A. p is 3,8,13,..........
an  302, a  3
Common difference  d   8  3  5 using the above mentioned formula, we get
302  3   n  1 5
 302  3  5n  5
 299  5n  5
 5n  304
305
n
5
Since, the value of ' n ' is a fraction. Thus, 302 is not the term of the given A. p
(iii) Here, A. p is 11,8,5, 2,...........
an  150, a  1 and d  8  11  3
Thus, using the above mentioned formula, we get
150  11   x  1 3
 150  11  34  3
 161  3  34
 34  164
164
n
3
Since, the value of n is a fraction. Thus, 150 is not the term of the given A. p

4. How many terms are there in the AP?


(i) 7,10,13,..............43
5 2 1 10
(ii) 1, , , ,........, .
6 3 2 3
(iii) 7,13,19,...........05
1
(iv) 18,15 ,13,..........  47
2
Sol:
(i) 7,10,13,..............43
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

From given A. p
a  7, d  10  7  3, an  a   n  1 d .
Let, an  43 (last term)
7   n  1 3  43
12
26
 n  1   12
3
n  13
13 terms are there in given A. p
5 2 1 10
(ii) 1, , , ,........, .
6 3 2 3
From given A. p
5
a  1, d    1, an  a   n  1 d
6
1

6
10
Let, an  (last term)
3
1 10
1   n  1 
6 3
1 10
 n  1  
6 3
13  62
 n  1   26
3
n  27
 27 terms are there in given A. p
(iii) 7,13,19,...........05
From the given A. p
a  7, d  13  7  6, an  a   n  1 d
Let, an  205 (last term)
7   n  1 6  205
 n  1 .6  198
n  1  33
n  34
 34 terms are there in given A. p
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

1
(iv) 18,15 ,13,..........  47
2
From the given A. p.,
1 31
a  18, d  15  18   18  15  5  18  2  5
2 2
an  a   n  1 .d
Let an  47 (last term)
18   n  1 , 2.5  47
12.5  n  1  65
65 65 10
n 1    26
25 25
n  27
 27 terms are there in given A. p

5. The first term of an AP is 5, the common difference is 3 and the last term is 80, find the
number of terms.
Sol:
Given
First term  a   5
Common difference  d   3
Last term 1  80
To calculate no of terms in given A. p
an  a   n  1 d
Let an  80,
80  5   n  1  3
75   n  1  3
75
n 1   25
3
n  26
 There are 26 terms.

6. The 6th and 17 terms of an A.P. are 19 and 41 respectively, find the 40th term.
Sol:
Given, a6  19, a17  41
 a6  a   6  1 d
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

19  a  5d ……….(1)
 a17  a  17  1  d
41  a  16d ………..(2)
Subtract (1) from (2)
a  16d  41
a  5d  19
0  11d  22
22
d 2
11
Substitute d  2 in (1)
19  a  5  2 
9a
 40th term a40  a   40  1  d
 9  39  2
 9  78
 87
 a40  87

7. If 9th term of an A.P. is zero, prove that its 29th term is double the 19th term.
Sol:
Given
9th term of an A. p a9  0, an  a   n  1 d
a   a  1  d  0
a  8d  0
a  8d
We have to prove
24th term is double the 19th term a29  2  a19
a   29  1 d  2  a  1a  1 .d 
a  28 d  2  a  18a 
Put a  8d
8d  28d  2  8d  18d 
20d  2 10d
20d  20d
Hence proved
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

8. If 10 times the 10th term of an A.P. is equal to 15 times the 15th term, show that 25th term
of the A.P. is zero.
Sol:
Given,
10 times of 10th term is equal to 15 times of 15th term.
10 a10  15.a15
10  a  10  1 d   15  a  15  1 .d   an  a   n  1 d 
10  a  9d   15  a  14  d 
15
a  9d   a  14d 
10
3 42d
a a   9d
2 2
12
1 24
 a d
2 2
a  24  d
a  24  d
We have to prove 25th term of A. p is 0
a25  0
a   25  1 d  0
a  24d  0
Put a  24d
24  d  24d  0
00
Hence proved.

9. The 10th and 18th terms of an A.P. are 41 and 73 respectively. Find 26th term.
Sol:
Given,
a10  41, a18  73, an  a   n  1  d
 a10  a  10  1  d
41  a  9d ………..(1)
 a18  a  18  1 d
73  a  17d ………..(2)
Subtract (1) from (2)
(2) (1)
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

a  17d  73
a  9d  41
0  8d  32
32
d 4
8
Substitute d  4 in (1)
a  9  4  41
a  41  36
a5
26th term a26  a   26  1 d
 5  25.4
 5  100
 105
 26th term a26  105.

10. In a certain A.P. the 24th term is twice the 10th term. Prove that the 72nd term is twice the
34th term.
Sol:
Given
24th term is twice the 10th term
a24  2 a10
Let, first term of a square  a
Common difference  d
nth term an  a   n  1 d
a   24  1 d   a  10  1 .d  2
a  23d  2  a  9d 
 23  18 d  a
a  5d
We have to prove
72nd term is twice the 34th term
a12  2a34
a  12  1 d  2  a   34  1 d 
a  71d  2a  66d
Substitute a  5d
5d  71d  2  5d   66d
76d  10d  66d
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

76d  76d
Hence proved.

11. If (m + 1)th term of an A.P. is twice the (n + 1)th term, prove that (3m + 1)th term is twice
the (m+n+l)th term.
Sol:
Given
 m  1 term is twice the  m  1 term.
th th

First term  a
Common difference  d
nth term an  a   n  1 .d
am1  2 an  1
a   m  1  1  d  2  a   n  1  1  d 
a  md  2  a  nd 
a   m  2n  d
We have to prove
 3m  1 term is twice the  m  n  1 term
th th

a3m1  2  am n 1
a   3m  1  1  d   a   m  n  1  1  d 
a  3m  d  2a  2  m  n  d
Substitute a   m  2n   d

 m  2n  d  3m d  2  m  2n  d  2  m  n   d
4m  2n  4m  4n  2n
4m  2n  4m  2n
Hence proved.

12. If the n term of the A.P. 9, 7, 5, ... is same as the th term of the A.P. 15, 12, 9, ... find n.
Sol:
Given,
First sequence is 9, 7,5,.............
a  9, d  9  2, an  a   n  1 d
an  9   n  1 .  2
Second sequence is 15,12,9,................
a  15, d  12  15  3, an  a   n  1 d
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

an  15   n  1  3
Given an. an are equal
9  2  n  1  15  3  n  1
3  n  1  2  n  1  15  9
n 1  6
n7
 7th term of two sequence are equal

13. Find the 12th term from the end of the following arithmetic progressions:
(i) 3 51 7, 9, ... 201 (ii) 3, 8, 13, ... , 253 (iii) 1, 4, 7, 10, ..., 88
Sol:
(i) 3,5,7,9,............2d
First term  a   3
Common difference  d   5  3  2
12th term from the end is can be considered as (1) last term = first term and common
differnce  d 1  d nth term from the end = last term   n  1  d
12th term from end  201  12  1 2 
 201  22
 179
(ii) 3,8,13,............253
First term  a  3
Common difference d  8  3  5
Last term 1  253
nth term of a sequence on  a   n  1  d
To find nth term from the end, we put last term 1 as ' a ' and common difference as
d
nth term from the end = last term   n  1   d
12th term from the end = 253  12  1  5
 253  55
 198
12th term from the end  198
(iii) 1, 4, 7,10,...............88
First term a  1
Common differnce d  4  1  3
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

Last term 1  88


nth term an  a   n  1  d
nth term from the end = last term   n  1   d
12th term from the end  88  12  1  3
 88  33
 55
12th term from the end  55.

14. The 4th term of an A.P. is three times the first and the 7 term exceeds twice the third term
by 1. Find the first term and the common difference.
Sol:
Given,
4th term of an A. p is three times the times the first term
a4  3. a
nth term of a sequence an  a   n  1  d
a   4  1  d  3a
a  3d  3a
3d  2a
3
a  d. ………….(1)
2
Seventh term exceeds twice the third term by 1.
a7  1  2.a3
a   7  1  d  1  2     1 d 
a  6d  1  2a  4d
a  2d  1 ………….(2)
By equating (1), (2)
3
d  2d  1
2
3
d  2d  1
2
3d  4d
1
2
d  2
d  2
3
Put d  2 in a  d
2
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

3
 .x
2
 3
First term a  3, common difference d  2.

15. Find the second term and nth term of an A.P. whose 6th term is 12 and the 8th term is 22.
Sol:
Given
a6  12, a8  22
nth term of an A. p an  a   n  1 d
a6  a   n  1  d  a   6  1 d  a  5d  12 ………….(1)
Subtracting (1) from (2)
a  7d  22
a  5d  12
(2) (1) 
0  2d  10
d 5
a  5d  12
a  55  12
Put d  5 in
a  12  25
a  13
Second term a2  a   2  1  d
ad
 13  5
a1  8
nth term an  a   n  1 d
 13   n  1  5
an  18  5n
nth term an  a   n  1 d
 13   n  1  5
an  18  5n
 a2  8, an  18  5n
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

16. How many numbers of two digits are divisible by 3?


Sol:
We observe that 12 is the first two-digit number divisible by 3 and 99 is the last two digit
number divisible by 3. Thus, the sequence is
12,15,18,.................99
This sequence is in A. p with
First term  9   12
Common difference  d   15  12  3
nth term an  99
nth term of an A. p  an   a   n  1  d
99  12   n  1  3
99  12  n  1 3
87
 n 1
3
n  30
 30 term are there in the sequence

17. An A.P. consists of 60 terms. If the first and the last terms be 7 and 125 respectively, find
32nd term.
Sol:
Given
No. of terms  n  60
First term  a   7
Last term a10  125
a60  a   60  1  d  a n  a   n  1 d 
125  7  59  d
118  59d
118
d 2
59
52nd term a32  a   32  1 d
 7  31.2
 7  62
 69

18. The sum of 4 and 8th terms of an A.P. is 24 and the sum of the 6th and 10th terms is 34.
Find the first term and the common difference of the A.P.
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

Sol:
Given
a4  a8  24
a6  a10  34
 a   4  1 d  a  18  1 d  24
2a  10d  24
a  5d  12 ………….(1)
 a6  a10  34
a   6  1 d  a  10  1 d  34
2a  14d  34
a  7d  17 ………….(2)
Subtract (1) from (2)
a  7d  17
a  5d  12
2d  5
5
d
2
5
Put d  in a  5d  12
2
5
a  12  5 
2
24  25 1
a 
2 2
1 b
a   , d 
2 2

19. The first term of an A.P. is 5 and its 100th term is — 292. Find the 50th term of this A.P.
Sol:
Given,
a30  a20  a   30  1 d   a   20  1 d   an  a   n  1 d 
 a  29d  a  19d
 10d
(i) 9, 14, 19, 24,.......
Common difference (d) = second tern – first term
 14   9 
 14  9
d 5
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

Then a30  a20  10d


 10.5
a30  a20  50
(ii) a, a  d , a  2d , a  3d
First term  a   a
Common difference  d   d
a30  a20  a   30  1 d   a   20  1 d 
 a  29d  0  19d
a30  a20  10d

20. Find a30 — a20 for the A.P.


(i) 9, 14, 19, 24,........
(ii) a, a + d, a + 2d, a + 3d,...
Sol:
Given,
a30  a20  a   30  1 d   a   20  1 d   an  a   n  1 d 
 a  29d  a  19d
 10d
(i) 9, 14, 19, 24,........
Common difference (d) = second term – first term
 14   9 
 14  9
d 5
Then a30  a20  10d
 10.5
a30  a20  50
(ii) a, a  d , a  2d , a  3d ,............
First term  a   a
a30  a20  a   30  1 d   a   20  1 d 
 a  29d  a  19d
a30  a20  10d

21. Write the expression 𝑎𝑛 − 𝑎𝑘 for the A.P. a, a + d, a + 2d, ...


Hence, find the common difference of the AP for which
(i) 11th term an  5 and 13th term a13  79
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

(ii) a10  a5  200


(iii) 20th term is 10 more than the 18th term.
Sol:
General arithmetic progression
a, a  d , a  2d ,.........
ab  ak  a   n  1 d   a   k  1 d   an  a   n  1 d 
 a   n  1 d  2 a   k  1 d
an  ak   n  k  d ………….(1)
(i) Given
11th term an  5
13th term a13  79
By using (1) put n  13, k  11
an  ak   n  k   d
79  5  13  11  d
74  2  d
74
d  37
2
(ii) Given
a10  a5  200
From (1) a10  a5  10  5  d
200  5  d
200
d  40  d  40
5
(iii) Given
a20  10  a18
a20  a18  10
By (1) an  ak   n  k   d
a20  a18   20  18   d
10  2  d
10
d  5
2
d  5
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

22. Find n if the given value of x is the n term of the given A.P.
21 31 41 141
(i) 1, , , ,........, x 
11 11 11 11
1 1
(ii) 5 ,11,16 , 22,...........: x  550
2 2
(iii) 1, 3, 5, 7,......: x  151
(iv) 25,50,75,100.........: c  1000
Sol:
(i) 25,50,75,100.........: c  1000
First term  a   25
Common difference  d   50  25  25
nth term an  a   n  1  d
Given, an  1000
1000  25   n  1  25
975   n  1  25
975
n 1   39
25
n  40
(ii) Given sequence 1, 3, 5, 7,......: x  151
First term  a   1
Common difference  d   3   1  3  1  2
nth term an  a   n  1 d
Given an  151,
151  1   n  1  2
150  1 n  1 2
150
n 1   75
2
n  74
(iii) Given sequence is
1 1
5 ,11,16 , 22,...........: x  550
2 2
1 1
First term (a)  5 
2 2
22  11

2
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

11

2
nth term an  a   n  1 d
11 11
550    n  1 
2 2
11
550  1  n  1
2
2
n  550 
11
n  100
(iv) Given sequence is
21 31 41 141
1, , , ,........, x 
11 11 11 11
First term  a   1
21
Common difference  d   1
11
21  11

11
10

11
n term an  a   n  1  d
th

171 10
 1   n  1 .
11 11
171 10
 1   n  1
11 11
171  11 10
  n  1
11 11
160 10
  n  1 .
11 11
160 11
n 1  
11 10
n  17

23. If an A.P. consists of n terms with first term a and nth term 1 show that the sum of the mth
term from the beginning and the mth term from the end is (a + l).
Sol:
First term of a sequence is a
Last term  1
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

Total no. of terms  n


Common difference  d
mth term from the beginning am  a   n  1  d
mth term from the end = last term   n  1  d
an  m  1  1   n  1  d
 am  an  m  1  a   n  1 d   l   n  1 d 
 a   n  1 d  l   n  1 d
am  an  m  1  a  l
Hence proved

24. Find the arithmetic progression whose third term is 16 and seventh term exceeds its fifth
term by 12.
Sol:
Given, a3  16
a   3  1 d  16
a  2d  16. ……..(1)
And a7  12  a5
a   7  1 d  12  a   5  1 d  a n  a   n  1 d 
a  6d 12  a  4d
2d  12
12
d    6
2
Put d  6 in (1)
a  2  6   16
a  12  6
a  284
Then the sequence is a, a  d , a  2d , a  3d ,.......
 28, 4,10,16, 22,......

25. The 7th term of an A.P. is 32 and its 13th term is 62. Find the A.P.
Sol:
Given,
a  32
a   7  1 d  32
a  6d  32 …….(1)
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

And a13  62
a  13  1 d  62
a  12d  62 ……..(2)
Subtract (1) from (2)
a  12d  62
a  6d  32
(2) – (1) 
0  6d  32
30
d 5
6
Put d  5 in a  6d  32
a  6  5  32
a2
Then the sequence is a, a  d , a  2d , a  3d ,..........
 2,7,12,17,......

26. Which term of the A.P. 3, 10, 17, ... will be 84 more than its 13th term?
Sol:
Given A. p is 3,10,17,.......
First term  a   3, Common difference  d   10  3
7
Let, nth term of A. p will be 84 more than 13th term
an  84  a13
a   n  1 d  a  13  1 d  84
 n  1 7  12.7  84
 n  1  7  168
168
n 1   24
7
n  25
Hence 25th term of given A. p is 84 more than 13th term

27. Two arithmetic progressions have the same common difference. The difference between
their 100th terms is 100, what is the difference between their l000th terms?
Sol:
Let the two A. p is be a1 , a2 , a3 ,.......... and b1 , b2 , b3 ,...........
an  a1   n  1 d and bn  b1   n  1  d
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

Since common difference of two equations is same given difference between 100th terms is
100
a100  b100  100

 
a1  9 9 d  b1  99d  100
a1  b1  100 …………..(1)
Difference between. 1000th terms is
a1000  b1000  a1  1000  1 d   b1  1000  1 d 
 a1  9 9 9d  b1  9 9 9d
 a1  b1
 100 (from (1))
 Hence difference between 1000th terms of two A. p is 100.

28. For what value of n, the nth terms of the arithmetic progressions 63, 65, 67, . . . and 3, 10,
17, . . . are equal?
Sol:
Given two A. p is are
63, 65, 67.......... and 3,10,...........
First term of sequence 1 is a1  63
Common difference d1  65  63
 2.
nth term  an   a1   n  1 d
 63   n  1 d
First term of sequence 2 is b1  3.
Common difference d 2  10  3
7
nth term  bn   b1   n  1 d 2
 3   n  1  7
Let nth terms of two sequence is equal
63   n  1 2  3   n  1  7
60  5  n  1
60
n 1   12
5
n  13
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

 13th term of both the sequence are equal.

29. How many multiples of 4 lie between 10 and 250?


Sol:
250
Multiple of 4 after 10 is 12 and multiple of 4 before 250 is remainder is 2, so,
4
250  2  248
248 is the last multiple of 4 before 250.
The sequence is
12,........., 248
With first term  a   12
Last term 1  248
Common difference  d   4
nth term an  a   n  1  d
Here, nth term an  248
248  12   n  1  4
236   n  1  4
236
n 1   59
4
n  60
 There are 60 terms between 10 and 250 which are multiples of 4

30. How many three digit numbers are divisible by 7?


Sol:
The three digit numbers are 100,......999 105 is the first 3 digit number which is divisible
by 7 when we divide 999 with 7 remainder is 5. So, 999 – 5 = 994 is the last three digits
divisible by 7 so, the sequence is
105,...........,994
First term  a   105
Last term 1  994
Common difference  d   7
Let there are n numbers in the sequence
an  994
a   n  1 d  994
a   n  1 d  994
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

105   n  1 7  994
 n  1  7  889
889
n 1   127
7
n  128
 there are 128 numbers between 105, 994 which are divisible by 7

31. Which term of the arithmetic progression 8, 14, 20, 26, . . . will be 72 more than its 41st
term?
Sol:
Given sequence
8,14, 20, 26,.........
Let nth term is 72 more than its 41st term
an  a41  72
For the given sequence
a  8, d  14  8  6
a   n  1 d  8   a  1 6  72
8   n  1 6  8   90   6  72
 n  1 6  312
312
n 1   52
6
n  53
 53rd term is 72 more than 41st term

32. Find the term of the arithmetic progression 9, 12, 15, 18,. . . which is 39 more than its 36th
term.
Sol:
Given A. p is 9,12,15,........
For this a  9, d  12  9  3
Let nth term is 39 more than its 36th term
an  39  a36
a   n  1 3  39  9   36  1  3  an  a   n  1 d 
 n  1 3  39  35  3
 n  1  3  144
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

144
n 1   48
3
n  49
 49th term is 39 more than its 36th term

33. Find the 8th term from the end of the A.P. 7,1õ13, . . ., 184
Sol:
Given A. p is 7,10,13,.........184
a  7, d  10  7  3, l  184
nth term from the end  l   n  1  d
8th term from the end  184   8  1  3
 184  21
 163
8th term from the end 163

34. Find the 10th term from the end of the A.P. 8, 10, 12,. . ., 126.
Sol:
Given A. p is 8,10,12,........126
a  8, d  10  8  2, l  126
nth term from the end  l   n  1  d
10th term from the end  126  10  1  2
 126 18
 108
10th term from the end  108

35. The sum of 4th and 8th terms of an A.P. is 24 and the sum of 6th and 10th terms is 44. Find
the A.P.
Sol:
Given, a4  a8  24
 a   4  1 d    a  8  1 d   24  a n  a   n  1 d 
2a  10d  24
a  5d  12 ………(1)
And a6  a10  44
a   6  1  a  10  1 d  44  a n  a   n  1 d 
2a  14d  44
a  7d  22 ………(2)
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

Subtract (1) from (2)


a  7d  22
a  5d  12
(2) – (1) 
0  2d  10
d 5
Put d  5 in (1) a  5  5  12
a  13

36. Which term of the A.P. 3, 15, 27, 39, . . . will be 120 more than its 21st term?
Sol:
Given A. p is
3,15, 27,39,........
Let nth term is 120 more than 21st term
Then an  120  a21
For the given sequence
a  3, d  15  3  12
a   n  1 d  120  d   21  1 d
 n  112  120  20  2 
 n  112  360
360
 n 1   30
12
n  31
 31st term is 120 more than 21st term

37. The 17th term of an A.P. is 5 more than twice its 8th term. If the 11th term of the A.P. is 43,
find the nth term.
Sol:
Given
17th term of an A. p is 5 more than twice its 8th term
a17  5  2a8
a  17  1 d  5  2  a   8  1  d 
a  16d  5  2a  14d
a  5  2d …………(1)
th
And 11 term of the A. p is 43
a11  43
a  11  1 d  43
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

a11  43
a  11  1 d  43
a  10d  43 …………(2)
a  10d  43
a  2d  5
(2) – (1) 
a  12d  48
48
d 4
12
Put d  4 in (1)
a  5  2  4
a3
 nth term of given sequence is an  a  1   n  1 d
 3   n  1 4
 3  4n  4
 4n  1
 nth term of given sequence an  4n  1

Exercise – 9.4

1. The sum of three terms of an A.P. is 21 and the product of the first and the third terms
exceeds the second term by 6, find three terms.
Sol:
Given,
Sum of three terms of on A.P is 21.
Product of first and the third term exceeds the second term by 6.
Let, the three numbers be a-d, a, a+d, with common difference d: then,
(a – d) + a + (a + d) = 21
3a = 21
21
a= =7
3
and (a – d) (a + d) = a + 6
𝑎2 − 𝑑 2 = 𝑎 + 6
Put a = 7 ⟹ 72 − 𝑑 2 = 7 + 6
49 – 13 = d2
d = ±6
∴ The three terms are a – d, a, a + d, i.e., 1, 7, 13.
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

2. Three numbers are in A.P. If the sum of these numbers be 27 and the product 648, find the
numbers.
Sol:
Let, the three numbers are a – d, a, a + d.
Given,
(a – d) + a + (a + d) = 27
3a = 27
27
a= =9
3
and, (𝑎 − 𝑑)(𝑎)(𝑎 + 𝑑) = 648
(𝑎2 − 𝑑 2 )(𝑎) = 648
Put a = 9, then
(92 − 𝑑2 ) 9 = 648
648
81 – d2 = = 72
9
2
𝑑 = 81 − 72
𝑑2 = 9
d=3
∴ The three terms are a – d, a, a + d i.e. 6, 9, 12.

3. Find the four numbers in A.P., whose sum is 50 and in which the greatest number is 4 times
the least.
Sol:
Let, the four numbers be a – 3d, a – d, a + d, a + 3d, with common difference 2d.
Given, sum is 50.
(a – 3d) + (a – d) + (a + d) + (a + 3d) = 50
4a = 50
a = 12.5
greater number is 4 time the least
(a + 3d) = 4(a – 3d)
a + 3d = 4a – 12d
15d = 3a
Put a = 12.5
3
d = 15 × 12.5
d = 2.5
∴ The four numbers are a – 3d, a – d, a + 3d i.e., 12.5 – 3(2.5), 12.5 – 2.5, 12.5 + 2.5, 12.5
+ 3(2.5)
⟹ 5, 10, 15, 20
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

4. The angles of a quadrilateral are in A.P. whose common difference is 10°. Find the angles.
Sol:
A quadrilateral has four angles. Given, four angles are in A.P with common difference 10.
Let, the four angles be, a – 3d, a – d, a + d, a + 3d with common difference = 2d.
2d = 10
10
d= =5
2
In a quadrilateral, sum of all angles = 360°
(a – 3d) + (a – d) + (a + d) + (a + 3d) = 360
4a = 360
a = 360/4 = 90°
∴ The angles are a – 3d, a – d, a + d, a + 3d with a = 90, d = 5
i.e. 90 – 3(5), 90 – 5, 90 + 3(5)
⟹ 75°, 85°, 95°, 105°.

5. The sum of three numbers in A.P. is 12 and the sum of their cubes is 288. Find the
numbers.
Sol:
2, 4, 6, or 6, 4, 2.

6. Find the value of x for which ( 8x + 4 ), ( 6x — 2 ) and (2x + 7) are in A.P.


Sol:
Given,
8x + 4, 6x – 2, 2x + 7 are are A.P.
If the numbers a, b, c are in A.P. then condition is 2b = a + c.
Then, 2(6x – 2) = 8x + 4 + 2x + 7
12x – 4 = 10 + 11
2x = 15
15
x= 2

7. If x + 1 , 3x and 4x + 2 are in A.P., find the value of x.


Sol:
Given numbers
x + 1, 3x, 4x + 2 are in AP
If a, b, c are in AP then 2b = a + c
Then 2(3x) = x + 1 + 4x + 2
6x = 5x + 3
x=3
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

8. Show that (a — b)2,(a2 + b2) and (a + b)2 are in A.P.


Sol:
We have to show, (a – b)2, (a2 + b2) and (a + b)2 are in AP.
If they are in AP. Then they have to satisfy the condition
2b = a + c
2(a2 + b2) = (a – b)2 + (a + b)2
2a2 + 2b2 = a2 + 2ab + b2 + a2 + 2ab + b2
2a2 + 2b2 = 2a2 + 2b2.
They satisfy the condition means they are in AP.

Exercise – 9.5

1. Find the sum of the following arithmetic progressions:


(i) 50, 46, 42, ... to 10 terms
(ii) 1, 3, 5, 7, ... to 12 terms
(iii) 3, 9/2, 6, 15/2, ... to 25 terms
(iv) 41, 36, 31, ... to 12 terms
(v) a + b, a – b, a − 3b, ... to 22 terms
(vi) (x — y)2, (x2 + y2), (x + y)2, ...., to n terms
𝑥−𝑦 3𝑥−2𝑦 5𝑥−3𝑦
(vii) 𝑥+𝑦 , , , … . 𝑡𝑜 𝑛 𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚𝑠
𝑥+𝑦 𝑥+𝑦
(viii) −26, −24, −22, … . 𝑡𝑜 36 𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚𝑠
Sol:
In an A.P let first term = a, common difference = d, and there are n terms. Then, sum of n
terms is,
𝑛
𝑆𝑛 = 2 {2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑}
(i) Given progression is,
50, 46, 42, ……to 10 term.
First term (a) = 50
Common difference (d) = 46 – 50 = −4
nth term = 10
10
Then 𝑆10 = {2.50 + (10 − 1) − 4}
2
= 5{100 − 9.4}
= 5{100 − 36}
= 5 × 64
∴ 𝑆10 = 320
(ii) Given progression is,
1, 3, 5, 7, …..to 12 terms
First term difference (d) = 3 – 1 = 2
nth term = 12
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
12
Sum of nth terms 𝑆12 = × {2.1 + (12 − 1). 2}
2
= 6 × {2 + 22} = 6 .24
∴ S12 = 144.
(iii) Given expression is
9 15
3, 2 , 6, , … … . 𝑡𝑜 25 𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚𝑠
2
First term (a) = 3
9 3
Common difference (d) = 2 − 3 = 2
Sum of nth terms 𝑆𝑛 , 𝑔𝑖𝑣𝑒𝑛 𝑛 = 25
𝑛
𝑆25 = 2 (2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1). 𝑑)
25 3
𝑆25 = (2.3 + (25 − 1). 2)
2
25 3
= (6 + 24. )
2 2
25
= (6 + 36)
2
25
= (42)
2
∴ 𝑆25 = 525
(iv) Given expression is,
41, 36, 31, …… to 12 terms.
First term (a) = 41
Common difference (d) = 36 – 41 = − 5
Sum of nth terms 𝑆𝑛 , 𝑔𝑖𝑣𝑒𝑛 𝑛 = 12
𝑛
𝑆12 = 2 (2𝑎(𝑛 − 1). 𝑑)
12
= (2.41 + (12 − 1). −5)
6
= 6(82 + 11. (−5))
= 6(27)
= 162
∴ S12 = 162.
(v) a + b, a – b, a – 3b, …… to 22 terms
First term (a) = a + b
Common difference (d) = a – b – a – b = −2b
𝑛
Sum of nth terms 𝑆𝑛 = {2𝑎(𝑛 − 1). 𝑑}
2
Here n = 22
22
𝑆22 = {2. (𝑎 + 𝑏) + (22 − 1). −2𝑏}
2
= 11{2(𝑎 + 𝑏) − 22𝑏}
= 11 {2a – 20b}
= 22a – 440b
∴ S22 = 22a – 440b
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

(vi) (𝑥 – 𝑦)2 , (𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 ), (𝑥 + 𝑦)2 , … … . . 𝑡𝑜 𝑛 𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚𝑠


First term (a) = (𝑥 − 𝑦)2
Common difference (d) = 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 − (𝑥 − 𝑦)2
= 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 − (𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 − 2𝑥𝑦)
= 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 − 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 + 2𝑥𝑦
= 2xy
𝑛
Sum of nth terms 𝑆𝑛 = 2 {2𝑎(𝑛 − 1). 𝑑}
𝑛
= 2 {2(𝑥 − 𝑦)2 + (𝑛 − 1). 2𝑥𝑦}
= 𝑛{(𝑥 − 𝑦)2 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑥𝑦}
∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 𝑛{(𝑥 − 𝑦)2 + (𝑛 − 1). 𝑥𝑦}
𝑥−𝑦 3𝑥−2𝑦 5𝑥−3𝑦
(vii) , , , … . . 𝑡𝑜 𝑛 𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚𝑠
𝑥+𝑦 𝑥+𝑦 𝑥+𝑦
𝑥−𝑦
𝐹𝑖𝑟𝑠𝑡 𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚 (𝑎) = 𝑥+𝑦
3𝑥−2𝑦 𝑥−𝑦
Common difference (d) = −
𝑥+𝑦 𝑥+𝑦
3𝑥−2𝑦−𝑥+𝑦
= 𝑥+𝑦
2𝑥−𝑦
= 𝑥+𝑦
𝑛
Sum of n terms Sn = 2 {2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1). 𝑑}
𝑛 𝑥−𝑦 2𝑥−𝑦
= 2 {2. 𝑥+𝑦 + (𝑛 − 1). }
𝑥+𝑦
𝑛
= 2(𝑥+𝑦) {2(𝑥 − 𝑦) + (𝑛 − 1)(2𝑥 − 𝑦)}
𝑛
= 2(𝑥+𝑦) {2𝑥 − 2𝑦 + 2𝑛𝑥 − 𝑛𝑦 − 2𝑥 + 𝑦}
𝑛
= 2(𝑥+𝑦) {𝑛(2𝑥 − 𝑦) − 𝑦}
𝑛
∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2(𝑥+𝑦) {𝑛(2𝑥 − 𝑦) − 𝑦}
(viii) Given expression −26, −24, −22, ……. To 36 terms
First term (a) = −26
Common difference (d) = −24 – (−26) = −24 + 26 = 2
𝑛
Sum of n terms 𝑆𝑛 = 2 {2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑}
36
Sum of n terms 𝑆𝑛 = {2. −26 + (36 − 1)2}
2
= 18[−52 + 70]
= 18.18
= 324
∴ Sn = 324

2. Find the sum to n term of the A.P. 5, 2, — 1, —4, —7, ...


Sol:
Given AP is 5, 2, -1, -4, -7, …..
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

a = 5, d = 2 – 5 = −3
𝑛
𝑆𝑛 = 2 {2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑}
𝑛
= 2 {2.5 + (𝑛 − 1) − 3}
𝑛
= 2 {10 − 3(𝑛 − 1)}
𝑛
= 2 {13 − 3𝑛}
𝑛
∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (13 − 3𝑛)

3. Find the sum of n terms of an A.P. whose th terms is given by an = 5 - 6n.


Sol:
Given nth term 𝑎𝑛 = 5 − 6𝑛
Put n = 1, 𝑎1 = 5 − 6.1 = −1
We know, first term (a1) = −1
Last term (an) = 5 – 6n = 1
𝑛
Then Sn = 2 (−1 + 5 − 6𝑛)
𝑛 𝑛
= 2 (4 − 6𝑛) = 2 (2 − 3𝑛)

4. If the sum of a certain number of terms starting from first term of an A.P. is 25, 22, 19, ... is
116. Find the last term.
Sol:
Given AP is 25, 22, 19, ……
First term (a) = 25, d = 22 – 25 = −3.
𝑛
Given, 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑)
𝑛
116 = 2 (2 × 25 + (𝑛 − 1) − 3)
232 = n(50 − 3(𝑛 − 1))
232 = n(53 – 3n)
232 = 53n – 3n2
3𝑛2 − 53𝑛 + 232 = 0
(3n – 29) (n – 8) = 0
∴n=8
⟹ a8 = 25 + (8 – 1) −3
∴ n = 8, a8 = 4
= 25 – 21 = 4

5. (i) How many terms of the sequence 18, 16, 14, ... should be taken so that their
(ii) How many terms are there in the A.P. whose first and fifth terms are −14 and 2
respectively and the sum of the terms is 40?
(iii) How many terms of the A.P. 9, 17, 25, . . . must be taken so that their sum is 636?
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

(iv) How many terms of the A.P. 63, 60, 57, . . . must be taken so that their sum is 693?
Sol:
(i) Given sequence, 18, 16, 14, …
a = 18, d = 16 – 18 = −2.
Let, sum of n terms in the sequence is zero
Sn = 0
𝑛
(2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑) = 0
2
𝑛
(2.18 + (𝑛 − 1) − 2) = 0
2
𝑛(18 − (𝑛 − 1)) = 0
𝑛(19 − 𝑛) = 0
n = 0 or n = 19
(ii) ∵ 𝑛 = 0 is not possible. Therefore, sum of 19 numbers in the sequence is zero.
Given, a = -14, a 5 = 2
a + (5 – 1)d = 2
−14 + 4d = 2
4𝑑 = 16 ⟹ 𝑑 = 4
Sequence is −14, −10, -6, −2, 2, ……
Given 𝑆𝑛 = 40
𝑛
40 = 2 {2(−14) + (𝑛 − 1)4}
80 = 𝑛(−28 + 4𝑛 − 4)
80 = 𝑛(−32 + 4𝑛)
4(20) = 4n(−8 + n)
𝑛2 − 8𝑛 − 20 = 0
(𝑛 − 10)(𝑛 + 2) = 0
𝑛 = 10 𝑜𝑟 𝑛 = −2
∴ Sum of 10 numbers is 40 (Since -2 is not a natural number)
(iii) Given AP 9, 17, 25, …….
a = 9, d = 17 – 9 = 8, and 𝑆𝑛 = 636
𝑛
636 = 2 (2.9 + (𝑛 − 1)8)
1272 = 𝑛(18 − 8 + 8𝑛)
1272 = n(10 + 8n)
2 × 636 = 2n(5 + 4n)
636 = 5n + 4n2
4n2 + 5n – 636 = 0
(4n + 53) (n – 12) = 0
−53
∴ n = 12 (Since n is not a natural number)
4
Therefore, value of n is 12.
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

(iv) Given AP, 63, 60, 57, ……


a =63, d = 60 – 63 = −3 𝑆𝑛 = 693
𝑛
𝑆𝑛 = 2 (2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑)
𝑛
693 = 2 (2.63 + (𝑛 − 1) − 3)
1386 = n(126 – 3n + 3)
1386 = (129 – 3n)n
3𝑛2 − 129𝑛 + 1386 = 0
𝑛2 − 43𝑛 + 462 = 0
n = 21, 22
∴ Sum of 21 or 22 term is 693

6. The first and the last terms of an A.P. are 17 and 350 respectively. If the common
difference is 9, how many terms are there and what is their sum?
Sol:
Given, a = 17, l = 350, d = 9
l = 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑
350 = 17 + (n – 1)9
333 = (n – 1)9
333
n–1= = 37
9
n = 38
∴ 38 terms are there
𝑛
𝑆𝑛 = 2 {𝑎 + 𝑙}
38
= {17 + 350}
2
= 19.367
∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 6973

7. The third term of an A.P. is 7 and the seventh term exceeds three times the third term by 2.
Find the first term, the common difference and the sum of first 20 terms.
Sol:
Given, 𝑎3 = 7 and 3𝑎3 + 2 = 𝑎7
𝑎7 = 3.7 + 2
𝑎7 = 21 + 2 = 23
∴ 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑
𝑎3 = 𝑎(3 − 1)𝑑 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎7 = 𝑎 + (7 − 1)𝑑
7 = 𝑎 + 2𝑑 … . . (𝑖) 23 = 𝑎 + 6𝑑 … . (𝑖𝑖)
𝑆𝑢𝑏𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑡 (𝑖)𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 (𝑖𝑖)
(𝑖𝑖) − (𝑖) ⟹ a + 6d = 23
a + 2d = 7 _
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

4d = 16
d=4
Put d = 4 in (i) ⟹ 7 = a + 2.4
a = 7 – 8 = −1
Given to find sum of first 20 terms.
20
𝑆20 = {−2 + (10 − 1)4}
2
= 10(−2 + 76)
∴ 𝑆20 = 740

8. The first term of an A.P. is 2 and the last term is 50. The sum of all these terms is 442. Find
the common difference.
Sol:
Given a = 2, l = 50, 𝑆𝑛 = 442
𝑛
𝑆𝑛 = 2 (𝑎 + 1)
𝑛
442 = 2 (2 + 50)
𝑛
442 = 2 . 52
442
∴n= = 17
26
Given, 𝑎𝑛 = 1 = 50
50 = 2 + (17 – 1) d
48 = 16 × 𝑑
48
d = 16 = 3
∴d=3

9. If 12th term of an A.P. is—13 and the sum of the first four terms is 24, what is the sum of
first 10 terms?
Sol:
Given, 𝑎12 = −13, 𝑎 + 𝑎2 + 𝑎3 + 𝑎4 = 24
4
𝑆4 = 2 (2𝑎 + 3𝑑) = 24
24
2a + 3d = = 12 … . (𝑖)
2
⟹ a + (12 − 1)𝑑 = −13
a + 11d = −13 … … (𝑖𝑖)
Subtract (i) from (ii) × 2
2 × (ii) – (i) ⟹ 2a + 22d = −28
2a + 3d = 12
198d = −38
−38
d= = −2
19
put d = −2 𝑖𝑛 (𝑖𝑖)
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

a + 11 (−2) = −13
a = −13 + 22
a=9
Given to find sum of first 10 terms.
10
𝑆10 = {2(𝑎) + (10 − 1) − 2}
2
= 5(18 – 18)
=0
∴ 𝑆10 = 0

10. Find the sum of first 22 terms of an A.P. in which d = 22 and a = 149.
Sol:
Given, d = 22, 𝑎22 = 149
𝑎 + (22 − 1) 𝑑 = 149
𝑎 = −313
22
Given, to find 𝑆22 = [2𝑎 + (22 − 1)𝑑]
2
= 11[2(−313) + 21.22]
= 11[−626 + 462]
= 11 – 164
= −1804
∴ 𝑆22 = −1804

11. Find the sum of all natural numbers between 1 and 100, which are divisible by 3.
Sol:
The numbers between 1 and 100 which are divisible by 3 are 3, 6, 9, ….99.
In this sequence, a = 3, d = 3, 𝑎𝑛 = 99
99 = 𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑
99 = 3 + (n – 1)3
99 = 3[1 + n – 1]
99
n= = 33
3
∴ There are 33 numbers in the given sequence
33 𝑛
𝑆33 = (2.3 + (33 − 1)3) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = (2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑))
2 2
33
= (6 + 96)
2
33
= × 102
2
= 1683
∴ Sum of all natural numbers between 1 and 100, which are divisible by 3 is 1683.
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

12. Find the sum of first n odd natural numbers.


Sol:
The sequence is, 1, 3, 5, …..n.
In this first term (a) = 1, common difference (d) = 2
𝑛
𝑆𝑛 = 2 (2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑)
𝑛
= 2 (2.1 + (𝑛 − 1)2)
𝑛
= 2 × 2(1 + 𝑛 − 1)
= 𝑛2 .
∴ Sum of first n odd natural numbers is 𝑛2 .

13. Find the sum of all odd numbers between (i) 0 and 50 (ii) 100 and 200.
Sol:
(i) Odd numbers between 0 and 50 are 1, 3, 5, ….., 49
In this a = 1, d = 2, l = 49 = 𝑎𝑛
49 = 1 + (n – 1)2 (∴ an = a + (n – 1)d)
48 = (n – 1)2
48
n–1= = 24
2
n = 25.
∴ There are 25 terms
25 𝑛
𝑆25 = (1 + 49) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (𝑎 + 1))
2
25
= × 50 = 625
2
∴ Sum of all odd numbers between 0 and 50 is 625.
(ii) Odd numbers between 100 and 200 are 101, 103, …. 199
In this a = 101, d = 2, l = an = 199
199 = 101 + (n – 1)2
98
n–1= = 49
2
n = 50
∴ There are 50 terms.
50 𝑛
𝑆50 = (101 + 199) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (𝑎 + 1))
2
50
= × 300
2
= 7500
∴ Sum of all odd numbers between 100 and 200 is 7500.
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

14. Show that the sum of all odd integers between 1 and 1000 which are divisible by 3 is
83667.
Sol:
Odd integers between 1 and 1000 which are divisible by 3 are 3, 6, 9, 15 …… 999.
In this a = 3, d = 5, l = 𝑎𝑛 = 999
999 = 3 + (n – 1)5 (∴ 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑)
999 = 3[1 + (n – 1)2]
999 334
∴ 2n – 1 = = 333 ⟹ 𝑛 = = 167
3 2
∴ There are 333 numbers 167.
333
𝑆167 = [3 + 999]
2
333
= × 100 = 83667
2
∴ 𝑆167 = 83667
∴ Sum of all odd integers between 1 and 4000 which are divisible by 3 is 83667.

15. Find the sum of all integers between 84 and 719, which are multiples of 5.
Sol:
The numbers between 84 and 719, which are multiples of 5 are 85, 90, 95,…..715.
In this, a = 85, d = 5, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑙 = 715
715 = 85 + (n – 1)5 (∴ 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑)
630 = (n – 1)5
𝑛 − 1 = 126
n = 127
127 𝑛
∴ 𝑆𝑛 = (85 + 115) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (𝑎 + 1))
2
127
= × 800 = 50800
2
∴ Sum of all integers between 84 and 719, which are multiples of 5 is 50800.

16. Find the sum of all integers between 50 and 500, which are divisible by 7.
Sol:
Numbers between 50 and 500, which are divisible by 7 are 56, 63, ….., 497.
In this a = 56, d = 7, l = 𝑎𝑛 = 497
497 = 56 + (n – 1)7
441 = (n – 1)7
441
n–1= = 63
7
n = 64
∴ There are 64 terms.
64
𝑆64 = (56 + 497)
2
= 32 × 553 = 17696
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

∴ Sum of all integers between 50 and 500, which are divisible by 7 is 17696.

17. Find the sum of all even integers between 101 and 999.
Sol:
Even integers between 101 and 999 are 102, 104, …..998
a = 102, d = 2, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑙 = 998
998 = 102 + (n – 1)× 2 (∴ 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑)
896 = (n – 1)(2)
n – 1 = 448
n = 449.
∴ 449 terms are there
449
𝑆449 = [102 + 998]
2
449
= × 1100 = 246950
2
∴ Sum of all even integers between 101 and 999 is 24690

18. Find the sum of all integers between 100 and 550, which are divisible by 9.
Sol:
Integers between 100 and 550 which are divisible by 9 are 108, 117, …., 549.
In this a = 108, d = 9, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑙 = 549
549 = 108 + (n – 1)× 9 (∴ 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎 + (𝑛 + 1)𝑑)
441 = (n – 1) × 9
449
n–1= = 49
9
n = 50.
50 𝑛
∴ 𝑆50 = {108 + 549} (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (10 + 1))
2
= 25 × 657
= 16425
∴ Sum of all integers between 100 and 550, which are divisible by 9 is 16425.

19. In an A.P., if the first term is 22, the common difference is — 4 and the sum to n terms is
64, find n.
Sol:
Given, a = 22, d = −4, 𝑆𝑛 = 64
𝑛
𝑆𝑛 = 2 (2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑)
𝑛
64 = 2 × (2.22 + (𝑛 − 1) − 4)
64 = n(24 – 2n)
64 = 2n (12 – n)
64
12n – n2 = = 32
2
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

𝑛2 − 12𝑛 + 32 = 0
(𝑛 − 4)(𝑛 − 8) = 0
∴ n = 4 or 8

20. In an A.P., if the 5th and 12th terms are 30 and 65 respectively, what is the sum of first 20
terms?
Sol:
Given, 𝑎5 = 30, 𝑎12 = 65
⟹ 30 = a + (5 – 1)d
30 = a + 4d …..(i)
⟹ 65 = a + (12 – 1)d
65 = a + 11d …..(ii)
(ii) – (i) ⟹ a + 11d = 65
a + 4d = 30
0 + 7d = 35
35
d= =5
7
put d = 5 in …(i) ⟹ 80 = a + 4 (5)
a = 30 – 20 = 10
20 𝑛
𝑆20 = (2(10) + (20 − 1)5) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (20 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑))
2
= 10[20 + 95]
= 10 × 115
= 1150
∴ Sum of first 20 terms 𝑆20 = 1150

21. Find the sum of the first


(i) 11 terms of the A.P : 2, 6, 10, 14, ...
(ii) 13 terms of the A.P : — 6, 0, 6, 12,....
(iii) 51 terms of the A.P : whose second term is 2 and fourth term is 8.
Sol:
(i)
Given AP, 2; 6, 10, 14, ……
11 𝑛
a = 2, d = 4, 𝑆𝑛 = 𝑆11 = (2.2 + (11 − 1). 4) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑))
2
11
= (4 + 40)
2
11
= × 49
2
∴ 𝑆11 = 242
(ii)
Given AP −6, 0, 6, 12, … …
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
𝑛
a = −6, d = 6, 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑)
13
𝑆𝑛 = 𝑆13 = (2 × −6 + (13 − 1) × 6)
2
13
= (−12 + 72)
2
13
= × 60
2
= 390
∴ S13 = 890
(iii)
Given, 𝑎2 = 2 and 𝑎4 = 8
a + d = 2 ….(i) a + 3d = 8 ….(ii)
(ii) – (i) ⟹ a + 3d = 8
a +d=2
2d = 6
d=3
put d = 3 in ….(i) ⟹ a + d = 2
a+3=2
a = −1
51 𝑛
𝑆51 = (2 × −1 + (51 − 1) × 3) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑))
2
51
= (−2 + 50 × 3)
2
51
= × 148
2
= 3774.
∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 3774

22. Find the sum of


(i) the first 15 multiples of 8
(ii) the first 40 positive integers divisible by (a) 3 (b) 5 (c) 6.
(iii) all 3 — digit natural numbers which are divisible by 13.
(iv) all 3-digit natural numbers, which are multiples of 11.
Sol:
The first 15 multiples of 8 are 8, 16, 24, ……
a = 8, d = 8, n = 15
15 𝑛
𝑆15 = (28 + (15 − 1) × 8) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑))
2
15
= (16 + 112)
2
15
= × 128
2
= 960
∴ 𝑆𝑢𝑚 𝑜𝑓 𝑓𝑖𝑟𝑠𝑡 15 𝑚𝑢𝑙𝑡𝑖𝑝𝑙𝑒𝑠 𝑜𝑓 8 𝑖𝑠 960.
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

Given, 𝑎2 = 2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎4 = 8
a + d = 2 ….(i) a + 3d = 8 …..(ii)
(ii) – (i) ⟹ a + 3d = 8
a + d=2
2d = 6
d=3
Put d = 3 in ….(i) ⟹ a + d = 2
a+3=2
a = −1
51 𝑛
𝑆51 = (2 × −1 + (51 − 1 × 3)) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (20 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑))
2
51
= (−2 + 50 × 3)
2
51
= × 148
2
= 3774
= 44550
∴ Sum of all 3 – digit natural numbers which are multiples of 11 is 44550.

23. Find the sum:


(i) 2 + 4 + 6 + …… + 200
(ii) 3 + 11 + 19 + …..+ 803
(iii) 34 + 32 + 30 + ….. + 10
(iv) 25 + 28 + 31 + ….. + 100
Sol:
(i) 2 + 4 + 6 + …… + 200
a = 2, d = 4 – 2 = 2, l = 200 = an
𝑛
∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (𝑎 + 𝑙) 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑
200 = 2 + (n – 1)2
198 = (n – 1)2
198
n–1= = 99
2
n = 100
100
𝑆𝑛 = (2 + 200)
2
= 50 × 202
= 10100
(ii) 3 + 11 + 19 + …..+ 803
a = 3, d = 11 – 3 = 8, l = an = 803
803 = 3+ (n – 1)8
800
=𝑛−1
8
𝑛 = 101
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
101
𝑆𝑛 = (3 + 803)
2
101
= × 806
2
= 504
𝑆𝑛 = 504
(iii) 34 + 32 + 30 + ….. + 10
a = 34, d = −2, l = an = 10
10 = 34 + (n – 1) × 2
+24 = 2 (n – 1)
n – 1 = 12
n = 13
13
∴ 𝑆13 = (34 + 10)
2
13
= × 44
2
= 286
(iv) 25 + 28 + 31 + ….. + 100
a = 25, d = 8, l = an = 100
100 = 25 + (n – 1) × 3
75 = (n – 1) × 3
n – 1 = 25
n = 26

24. Find the sum of the first 15 terms of each of the following sequences having nth term as
(i) 𝑎𝑛 = 3 + 4𝑛
(ii) 𝑏𝑛 = 5 + 2𝑛
(iii) Yn = 9 – 5n
Sol:
(i) Given 𝑎𝑛 = 3 + 4𝑛
Put n = 1, a1 = 3 + 4(1) = 7
Put n = 15, 𝑎15 = 3 + 4(15) = 63 = 8
15 𝑛
Sum of 15 terms, 𝑆15 = (7 + 63) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (𝑎 + 𝑙))
2
15
= × 70
2
∴𝑆15 = 525
(ii) Given 𝑏𝑛 = 5 + 2𝑛
Put n = 1, 𝑏1 = 5 + 2(1) = 7
Put n = 15, b15 = 5 + 2(15) = 35 = l
15 𝑛
Sum of 15 terms , 𝑆15 = (7 + 35) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = (𝑎 + 𝑙))
2 2
15
= × 42
2
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

= 315
∴ 𝑆15 = 315
(iii) Given, Yn = 9 – 5n
Put n = 1, 𝑦1 = 9 − 5.1 = −4
Put n = 15, 𝑦15 9 − 5.15 = 9 − 75 = −66 = (𝑙)
15 𝑛
∴ 𝑆15 = (−4 − 66) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (𝑎 + 𝑙))
2
15
= × −70
2
= −465
∴ 𝑆15 = −465

25. Find the sum of first 20 terms of the sequence whose nth term is a = An + B.
Sol:
Given, nth term 𝑎𝑛 = 𝐴𝑛 + 𝐵
Put n = 1, 𝑎1 = 𝐴 + 𝐵
Put n = 20, 𝑎20 = 20 𝐴 + 𝐵 = (𝑙)
20 𝑛
∴ 𝑆20 = (𝐴 + 𝐵 + 20𝐴 + 𝐵) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = (𝑎 + 𝑙))
2 2
= 10 (21A + 2B)
= 210A + 20B
∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 210𝐴 + 2𝐵

26. Find the sum of the first 25 terms of an A.P. whose nth term is given by an = 2 − 3n.
Sol:
Given, nth term 𝑎𝑛 = 2 − 3𝑛
Put n = 1, 𝑎1 = 2 − 3.1 = −1
Put n = 25, 𝑎15 = 𝑙 = 2 − 3.15 = −43
25 25
∴ 25 = (−1 − 43) = (−44) = −925
2 2
∴ 𝑆25 = −925

27. Find the sum of the first 25 terms of an A.P. whose nth term is given by an = 7 − 3n.
Sol:
Given, 𝑎𝑛 = 7 − 3𝑛
Put n = 1, 𝑎1 = 7 − 3.1 = 4
Put n = 25, 𝑎25 = 𝑙 = 7 − 3.25 = −68
25 𝑛
∴ 𝑆25 = (4 − 68) (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (𝑎 + 𝑙))
2
25
= × −64
2
= −800
∴ 𝑆25 = −800
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

28. Find the sum of first 51 terms of an A.P. whose second and third terms are 14 and 18
respectively.
Sol:
Given, 𝑎2 = 14 ⟹ 𝑎 + 𝑑 = 14 … . . (𝑖)
𝑎3 = 18 ⟹ 𝑎 + 2𝑑 = 18 … . . (𝑖𝑖)
(ii) – (i) ⟹ a + 2d = 18
a + d = 14
0+d=4
Put d = 4 is (i) a + 4 = 4
a = 10
51 𝑛
∴ 𝑆50 = {2.10 + (51 − 1) × 4} (𝑆𝑛 = 2 {2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑})
2
51
= {20 + 200}
2
51
= × 220
2
= 5610
∴ 𝑆51 = 5610
29. If the sum of 7 terms of an A.P. is 49 and that of 17 terms is 289, find the sum of n terms.
Sol:
Given, 𝑆7 = 49
7 𝑛
(2𝑎 + (7 − 1)𝑑) = 49 (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = {2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑})
2 2
7
(2𝑎 + 6𝑑) = 49
2
7
× 2(𝑎 + 3𝑑) = 49
2
49
𝑎 + 3𝑑 = = 7 … . (𝑖) and
7
𝑆17 = 289
17
(2𝑎 + (17 − 1)𝑑) = 289
2
17
× 2(𝑎 + 8𝑑) = 289
2
289
𝑎 + 8𝑑 = = 17 …..(ii)
17
𝑆𝑢𝑏𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑡 (𝑖)𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 (𝑖𝑖)
a + 8d = 17
a + 3d = 7
5d = 10
d= 2
put d = 2, in (i) ⟹ a + 3 × 2 = 7
a=1
𝑛 𝑛
∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 {2.1 + (𝑛 − 1). 2} (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑))
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

= 𝑛{1 + 𝑛 − 1}
∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 𝑛2 .

30. The first term of an A.P. is 5, the last term is 45 and the sum is 400. Find the number of
terms and the common difference.
Sol:
Given, a = 5, l = 45, Sum of terms = 400
∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 400
𝑛
{5 + 45} = 400
2
𝑛
= 50 = 400
2
2
𝑛 = 40 × 5
∴ 𝑛 = 16
16th term is 45
𝑎16 = 45 ⟹ 5 + (16 − 1) × 𝑑 = 45 = 15 × 𝑑 = 40
408 8
d= =3
15
8
∴ n = 16, d = 3
3𝑛2 13
31. In an A.P., the sum of first n terms is + n. Find its 25th term.
2 2
Sol:
3𝑛2 13
Given, sum of n terms 𝑆𝑛 = + 𝑛
2 2
3(𝑛−1)2 13
Let, 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑆𝑛 − 𝑆𝑛−1 (∴ Replace n by (n – 1) is 𝑆𝑛 to get 𝑆𝑛−1 = + (𝑛 − 1))
2 2
3𝑛2 13 3(𝑛−1)2 13
𝑎𝑛 = + 𝑛− − (𝑛 − 1)
2 2 2 2
3 2 13
= {𝑛 − (𝑛 − 1)2 } + {𝑛 − (𝑛 − 1)}
2 2
3 13
= {𝑛2 − 𝑛2 + 2𝑛 − 1} + {1}
2 2
10
= 3𝑛 + = 3𝑛 + 5
2
Put n = 25, 𝑎25 = 3(25) + 5 = 75 + 5 = 80
∴ 25th term 𝑎25 = 80

32. Let there be an A.P. with first term ‘a’, common difference ‘d’. If a denotes its nth term and
Sn the sum of first n terms, find.
(i) n and Sn and if a = 5, d = 3 and a = 50
(ii) n and a, if an = 4, d = 2 and Sn = −14
(iii) d, if a = 3, n = 8 and Sn = 192
(iv) a, if an = 28, Sn = 144 and n = 9
(v) n and d, if a = 8, a = 62 and Sn = 210
(vi) n and an, if a = 2, d = 8 and Sn = 90
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

Sol:
(i) Given a = 5, d = 3, 𝑎𝑛 = 50
𝑎𝑛 = 50
𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑 = 50
5 + (n – 1)3 = 50
(n – 1)3 = 45
45
n–1= = 15
3
n = 16
𝑛
Some of n terms 𝑆𝑛 = 2 [𝑎 + 𝑙]
16
= [5 + 50]
2
= 8 × 55
= 440
(ii) Given, 𝑎𝑛 = 4, 𝑑 = 2, 𝑆𝑛 = −14
𝑛
a + (n – 1).2 = 4 and 2 [2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1). 2] = −14
a + 2n = 6 𝑛[2𝑎 + 2𝑛 − 2] = −14
(or)
𝑛
[𝑎 + 𝑎𝑛 ] = −14
2
𝑛
[𝑎 + 4] = −14
2
𝑛[6 − 2𝑛 + 4] = −28
𝑛[10 – 2𝑛] = −28
2
2𝑛 − 10𝑛 − 28 = 0
2(𝑛2 − 5𝑛 − 14) = 0
(n + 2) (n – 7) = 0
N = −2, n = 7
∵ n = −2 is not a natural number. So, n = 7.
(iii) Given, a = 3, n = 8, Sn = 192.
𝑛
𝑆𝑛 = 2 [2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑]
192 × 2 = 8[6 + (8 − 1)𝑑]
192×2
= 6 + 7𝑑
8
48 = 6 + 7𝑑
7d = 42
d=6
(iv) Given, 𝑎𝑛 = 28, 𝑆𝑛 = 144, 𝑛 = 9
𝑛
𝑆𝑛 = 2 [𝑎 + 𝑙]
9
144 = 2 [𝑎 + 28]
2
144 = 9 = 𝑎 + 28
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

a + 28 = 32
a=4
(v) Given, a = 8, 62 and Sn = 210
𝑛
𝑆𝑛 = 2 [𝑎 + 𝑙]
𝑛
210 = 2 [8 + 62]
210 × 2 = n[70]
210×2
n= =6
70
a + (n – 1) d = 62
8 + (6 – 1) d = 62
5d = 54
d = 10.8
(vi) Given
a = 2, d = 8 and Sn = 90
𝑛 𝑛
90 = 2 [4 + (𝑛 − 1)8] (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 [2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑])
180 = n [4 + 8n – 8]
8𝑛2 − 4𝑛 − 180 = 0
4(2𝑛2 − 𝑛 − 45) = 0
2𝑛2 − 𝑛 − 45 = 0
(2n + 1) (n – 5) = 0
1
∵ n = − 2 is not a natural no. n = 5
𝑎𝑛 = 2 + 4(8) (∴ 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑)
𝑎𝑛 = 32

33. A man saved Rs 16500 in ten years. In each year after the first he saved Rs 100 more than
he did in the preceding year. How much did he save in the first year?
Sol:
Let ‘a’ be the money he saved in first year
⟹ First year he saved the money = Rs a
He saved Rs 100 more than, he did in preceding year.
⟹ Second year he saved the money = Rs (a + 100)
⟹ Third year he saved the money = Rs. (a + 2 (100))
So, the sequence is a, a + 100, a + 2(100), ……, This is in AP with common difference (d)
= 100.
⟹ Sum of money he saved in 10 years 𝑆10 = 16,500 𝑟𝑢𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑠
𝑛
𝑆𝑛 = 2 (2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑)
10
𝑆10 = (2𝑎 + (10 − 1). 100)
2
16,500 = 5 (2a + 9 × 100)
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
16500
2a + 900 = = 3300
5
2a = 2400
2400
a= = 1200
2
∴ He saved the money in first year (a) = Rs. 1200

34. A man saved Rs 32 during the first year, Rs 36 in the second year and in this way he
increases his savings by Rs 4 every year. Find in what time his saving will be Rs 200.
Sol:
Given
Saving in 1st yr (𝑎1 ) = Rs 32
Saving in 2nd yr (𝑎2 ) = Rs 36
Increase in salary every year (d) = Rs 4
Let in n years his saving will be Rs 200
⟹ 𝑆𝑛 = 200
𝑛
⟹ 2 [2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑] = 200
𝑛
⟹ 2 [64 + 4𝑛 − 4] = 200
𝑛
⟹ 2 [4𝑛 + 60] = 200
⟹ 2𝑛2 + 30𝑛 = 200
⟹ 𝑛2 + 15 − 100 = 0 [Divide by 2]
2
⟹ 𝑛 + 20𝑛 − 5𝑛 − 100 = 0
⟹ n(n + 20) – 5(n + 20) = 0
⟹ (n + 20)(n – 5) = 0
If n + 20 = 0 or n – 5 = 0
n = −20 or n = 5 (Rejected as n cannot be negative)
∴ In 5 years his saving will be Rs 200

35. A man arranges to pay off a debt of Rs 3600 by 40 annual installments which form an
arithmetic series. When 30 of the installments are paid, he dies leaving one-third of the debt
unpaid, find the value of the first installment.
Sol:
Given
A man arranges to pay off a debt of Rs 3600 by 40 annual installments which form an A.P
i.e., sum of all 40 installments = Rs 3600
S40 = 3600
Let, the money he paid in first installment is a, and every year he paid with common
difference = d
Then,
𝑛
S40 = 3600 (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 [2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑])
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
40
[2𝑎 + (40 − 1)𝑑] = 3600
𝑥
3600
2𝑎 + 39𝑑 = = 180 … … (𝑖)
20
𝑏𝑢𝑡,
He died by leaving one third of the debt unpaid that means he paid remaining money in 30
installments.
3600
∴ The money he paid in 30 installments = 3600 − = 3600 − 1200
3
∴ 𝑆30 = 2400
𝑆30 = 2400
30 𝑛
= [2𝑎 + (30 − 1)𝑑] = 2400 (∴ 𝑆𝑛 = 2 (2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑))
2
2400
2a + 2ad = = 160 … . (𝑖𝑖)
15
(i) – (ii) ⟹ 2a + 39d = 180
2a + 29d = 160
0 + 10 d = 20
20
d = 10 = 2
put d = 2 in (ii) 2a + 29 (2) = 160
2a = 102
102
a= = 51
2
∴ The value of his first installment = 51.
Class X Chapter 9 - Arithmetic Progression Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

Exercise – 9.1
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Exercise – 10.1

1. Fill in the blanks


(i) The common point of tangent and the circle is called point of contact.
(ii) A circle may have two parallel tangents.
(iii) A tangent to a circle intersects it in one point.
(iv) A line intersecting a circle in two points A called a secant.
(v) The angle between tangent at a point P on circle and radius through the point is 90°.
Sol:

Point of contact
P
Tangent
90°

Secant

2. How many tangents can a circle have?


Sol:
Tangent: A line intersecting circle in one point is called a tangent.

As there are infinite number of points on the circle a circle has many (infinite) tangents.

3. O is the center of a circle of radius 8cm. The tangent at a point A on the circle cuts a line
through O at B such that AB = 15 cm. Find OB
Sol:
Consider a circle with center O and radius OA = 8cm = r, AB = 15 cm.
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

O B

(AB) tangent is drawn at A (point of contact)


At point of contact, we know that radius and tangent are perpendicular.
In ∆OAB, ∠OAB = 90°, By Pythagoras theorem
𝑂𝐵 2 = 𝑂𝐴2 + 𝐴𝐵 2
𝑂𝐵 = √82 + 152
= √64 + 225 = √229 = 17 𝑐𝑚
∴ 𝑂𝐵 = 17 𝑐𝑚

4. If the tangent at point P to the circle with center O cuts a line through O at Q such that PQ
= 24cm and OQ = 25 cm. Find the radius of circle
Sol:
Given,
PQ = 24 cm
OQ = 25 cm
OP = radius = ?
P

O 25 cm Q

P is point of contact, At point of contact, tangent and radius are perpendicular to each other
∴ ∆POQ is right angled triangle ∠OPQ = 90°
By Pythagoras theorem,
𝑃𝑄 2 + 𝑂𝑃2 = 𝑂𝑄 2
⇒ 242 + 𝑂𝑃2 = 252
⇒ 𝑂𝑃 = √252 − 242 = √625 − 576
= √49 = 7𝑐𝑚
∴ 𝑂𝑃 = 𝑟𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑠 = 7𝑐𝑚
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Exercise – 10.2

1. If PT is a tangent at T to a circle whose center is O and OP = 17 cm, OT = 8 cm. Find the


length of tangent segment PT.
Sol:
OT = radius = 8cm
OP = 17cm
PT = length of tangent = ?
T

8 cm

O 17 cm P

T is point of contact. We know that at point of contact tangent and radius are perpendicular.
∴ OTP is right angled triangle ∠OTP = 90°, from Pythagoras theorem 𝑂𝑇 2 + 𝑃𝑇 2 = 𝑂𝑃2
82 + 𝑃𝑇 2 = 172
PT √172 − 82 = √289 − 64
= √225 = 15𝑐𝑚
∴ PT = length of tangent = 15 cm.

2. Find the length of a tangent drawn to a circle with radius 5cm, from a point 13 cm from the
center of the circle.
Sol:
Consider a circle with center O.
OP = radius = 5 cm.
A tangent is drawn at point P, such that line through O intersects it at Q, OB = 13cm.
Length of tangent PQ = ?
P

Q O

A + P, we know that tangent and radius are perpendicular.


∆𝑂𝑃𝑄 is right angled triangle, ∠OPQ = 90°
𝐵𝑦 𝑝𝑦𝑡ℎ𝑎𝑔𝑜𝑟𝑎𝑠 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑚, 𝑂𝑄 2 = 𝑂𝑃2 + 𝑃𝑄 2
⇒ 132 = 52 + 𝑃𝑄 2
⇒ 𝑃𝑄 2 = 169 − 25 = 144
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

⇒ PQ = √144 = 12𝑐𝑚
Length of tangent = 12 cm

3. A point P is 26 cm away from O of circle and the length PT of the tangent drawn from P to
the circle is 10 cm. Find the radius of the circle.
Sol:
Given OP = 26 cm
PT = length of tangent = 10cm
radius = OT = ?
10 T
P

26
O

At point of contact, radius and tangent are perpendicular ∠OTP = 90°, ∆OTP is right
angled triangle.
By Pythagoras theorem, 𝑂𝑃2 = 𝑂𝑇 2 + 𝑃𝑇 2
262 = 𝑂𝑇 2 + 102
𝑘
𝑂𝑇 𝑘 = (√676 − 100)
𝑂𝑇 = √576
= 24 cm
OT = length of tangent = 24 cm

4. If from any point on the common chord of two intersecting circles, tangents be drawn to
circles, prove that they are equal.
Sol:
Let the two circles intersect at points X and Y.
XY is the common chord.
Suppose ‘A’ is a point on the common chord and AM and AN be the tangents drawn A to
the circle
We need to show that AM = AN.

In order to prove the above relation, following property will be used.


Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
“Let PT be a tangent to the circle from an external point P and a secant to the circle through
P intersects the circle at points A and B, then 𝑃𝑇 2 = 𝑃𝐴 × 𝑃𝐵"
Now AM is the tangent and AXY is a secant ∴ 𝐴𝑀2 = 𝐴𝑋 × 𝐴𝑌 … . . (𝑖)
AN is a tangent and AXY is a secant ∴ 𝐴𝑁 2 = 𝐴𝑋 × 𝐴𝑌 … . . (𝑖𝑖)
From (i) & (ii), we have 𝐴𝑀2 = 𝐴𝑁 2
∴ AM = AN

5. If the quadrilateral sides touch the circle prove that sum of pair of opposite sides is equal to
the sum of other pair.
Sol:
Consider a quadrilateral ABCD touching circle with center O at points E, F, G and H as in
figure.

We know that
The tangents drawn from same external points to the circle are equal in length.
1. Consider tangents from point A [AM ⊥ AE]
AH = AE …. (i)
2. From point B [EB & BF]
BF = EB …. (ii)
3. From point C [CF & GC]
FC = CG …. (iii)
4. From point D [DG & DH]
DH = DG …. (iv)
Adding (i), (ii), (iii), & (iv)
(AH + BF + FC + DH) = [(AC + CB) + (CG + DG)]
⇒ (AH + DH) + (BF + FC) = (AE + EB) + (CG + DG)
⇒ AD + BC = AB + DC [from fig.]
Sum of one pair of opposite sides is equal to other.

6. If AB, AC, PQ are tangents in Fig. and AB = 5cm find the perimeter of ∆APQ.
Sol:
Perimeter of ∆APQ, (P) = AP + AQ + PQ
= AP + AQ + (PX + QX)
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

We know that
The two tangents drawn from external point to the circle are equal in length from point A,
AB = AC = 5 cm
From point P, PX = PB
From point Q, QX = QC
Perimeter (P) = AP + AQ + (PB + QC)
= (AP + PB) + (AQ + QC)
= AB + AC = 5 + 5
= 10 cms.

7. Prove that the intercept of a tangent between two parallel tangents to a circle subtends a
right angle at center.
Sol:
Consider circle with center ‘O’ and has two parallel tangents through A & B at ends of
diameter.

Let tangents through M intersects the tangents parallel at P and Q required to prove is that
∠POQ = 90°.
From fig. it is clear that ABQP is a quadrilateral
∠A + ∠B = 90° + 90° = 180° [At point of contact tangent & radius are perpendicular]
∠A + ∠B + ∠P + ∠Q = 360° [Angle sum property]
∠P + ∠Q = 360°−180° = 180° …..(i)
1
At P & Q ∠APO = ∠OPQ = 2 ∠𝑃
1
∠BQO = ∠PQO = 2 ∠𝑄 in (i)
2∠OPQ + 2 ∠PQO = 180°
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
∠OPQ + ∠PQO = 90° …. (ii)
In ∆OPQ, ∠OPQ + ∠PQO + ∠POQ = 180° [Angle sum property]
90° + ∠POQ = 180° [from (ii)]
∠POQ = 180° − 90° = 90°
∴ ∠POQ = 90°

8. In Fig below, PQ is tangent at point R of the circle with center O. If ∠TRQ = 30°. Find
∠PRS.

Sol:
Given ∠TRQ = 30°.
At point R, OR ⊥ RQ.
∠ORQ = 90°
⇒ ∠TRQ + ∠ORT = 90°
⇒ ∠ORT = 90° − 30° = 60°
ST is diameter, ∠SRT = 90° [∵ Angle in semicircle = 90°]
∠ORT + ∠ SRO = 90°
∠SRO + ∠PRS = 90°
∠PRS = 90° − 30° = 60°

9. If PA and PB are tangents from an outside point P. such that PA = 10 cm and ∠APB = 60°.
Find the length of chord AB.
Sol:
AP = 10 cm ∠APB = 60°
Represented in the figure
We know that

A line drawn from center to point from where external tangents are drawn divides or
1
bisects the angle made by tangents at that point ∠APO = ∠OPB = 2 × 60° = 30°
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
The chord AB will be bisected perpendicularly
∴ AB = 2AM
In ∆AMP,
𝑜𝑝𝑝.𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 𝐴𝑀
sin 30° = ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒 = 𝐴𝑃
AM = AP sin 30°
𝐴𝑃 10
= = = 5𝑐𝑚
2 2
AP = 2 AM = 10 cm ---- Method (i)
In ∆AMP, ∠AMP = 90°, ∠APM = 30°
∠AMP + ∠APM + ∠MAP = 180°
90° + 30° + ∠MAP = 180°
∠MAP = 180°
In ∆PAB, ∠MAP = ∠BAP = 60°, ∠APB = 60°
We also get, ∠PBA = 60°
∴∆PAB is equilateral triangle
AB = AP = 10 cm. -----Method (ii)

10. From an external point P, tangents PA and PB are drawn to the circle with centre O. If CD
is the tangent to the circle at point E and PA = 14 cm. Find the perimeter of ABCD.
Sol:
PA = 14 cm
Perimeter of ∆PCD = PC + PD + CD = PC + PD + CE + ED

We know that
The two tangents drawn from external point to the circle are equal in length.
From point P, PA = PB = 14cm
From point C, CE = CA
From point D, DB = ED
Perimeter = PC + PD + CA +DB
= (PC + CA) + (PD + DB)
= PA + PB = 14 + 14 = 28 cm.

11. In the fig. ABC is right triangle right angled at B such that BC = 6cm and AB = 8cm. Find
the radius of its in circle.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
BC = 6cm AB = 8cm
As ABC is right angled triangle

By Pythagoras theorem
𝐴𝐶 2 = 𝐴𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝐶 2 = 62 + 82 = 100
𝐴𝐶 = 10 𝑐𝑚
Consider BQOP ∠B = 90°,
∠BPO = ∠OQB = 90° [At point of contact, radius is perpendicular to tangent]
All the angles = 90° & adjacent sides are equal
∴ BQOP is square BP = BQ = r
We know that
The tangents drawn from any external point are equal in length.
AP = AR = AB – PB = 8 – r
QC = RC = BC – BQ = 6 – r
AC = AR + RC ⇒ 10 = 8 – r + 6 – r
⇒ 10 = 14 – 2r
⇒ 2r = 4
⇒ Radius = 2cm

12. From a point P, two tangents PA and PB are drawn to a circle with center O. If OP =
diameter of the circle shows that ∆APB is equilateral.
Sol:
OP = 2r
Tangents drawn from external point to the circle are equal in length
PA = PB

At point of contact, tangent is perpendicular to radius.


𝑜𝑝𝑝.𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 𝑟 1
In ∆AOP, sin 𝜃 = ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒 = 2𝑟 = 2
𝜃 = 30°
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
∠APB = 20 = 60°, as PA = PB ∠BAP = ∠ABP = x.
In ∆PAB, by angle sum property
∠APB + ∠BAP + ∠ABP = 180°
2x = 120° ⇒ x = 60°
In this triangle all angles are equal to 60°
∴ ∆APB is equilateral.

13. Two tangent segments PA and PB are drawn to a circle with center O such that ∠APB =
120°. Prove that OP = 2AP
Sol:
A+P
OP bisects ∠APB
1 1
∠APO = ∠OPB = ∠𝐴𝑃𝐵 = × 120° = 60°
2 2

At point A
OA ⊥ AP, ∠OAP = 90°
𝐴𝑃
In ∆PDA, cos 60° =
𝐷𝑃
1 𝐴𝑃
= 𝐷𝑃 ⇒ 𝐷𝑃 = 2𝐴𝑃
2

14. If ∆ABC is isosceles with AB = AC and C (0, 2) is the in circle of the ∆ABC touching BC
at L, prove that L, bisects BC.
Sol:
Given ∆ABC is isosceles AB = AC

We know that
The tangents from external point to circle are equal in length
From point A, AP = AQ
But AB = AC ⇒ AP + PB = AQ + QC
⇒ PB = PC …. (i)
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
From B, PB = BL; ….(ii) from C, CL = CQ …..(iii)
From (i), (ii) & (iii)
BL = CL
∴ L bisects BC.

15. In fig. a circle touches all the four sides of quadrilateral ABCD with AB = 6cm, BC = 7cm,
CD = 4cm. Find AD.
Sol:
We know that the tangents drawn from any external point to circle are equal in length.

From A ⟶ AS = AP ….(i)
From B ⟶ QB = BP …. (ii)
From C ⟶ QC = RC …..(iii)
From D ⟶ DS = DR …. (iv)
Adding (i), (ii), (iii) & (iv)
(AS + QB + QC + DS) = (AB + BP + RC + OR)
(AS + DS) + (QB + QC) = (AP + BP) + (RC + DR)
AD + BC = AB + CD
⇒ AD + 7 = 6 + 4 AD = 3cm
⇒ AD = 10 – 7 = 3cm

16. Prove that the perpendicular at the point of contact to a circle passes through the centre of
the circle.
Sol:
We know that
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
The at point of contact, the tangent is perpendicular to the radius. Radius is line from center
to point on circle. Therefore, perpendicular to tangent will pass through center of circle.

17. In fig.. O is the center of the circle and BCD is tangent to it at C. Prove that ∠BAC +
∠ACD = 90°
Sol:
Given
O is center of circle
BCD is tangent.

Required to prove: ∠BAC + ∠ACD = 90°


Proof: OA = OC [radius]
In ∆OAC, angles opposite to equal sides are equal.
∠OAC = ∠OCA …. (i)
∠OCD = 90° [tangent is radius are perpendicular at point of contact]
∠ACD + ∠OCA = 90°
∠ACD + ∠OAC = 90° [∵ ∠OAC = ∠BAC]
∠ACD + ∠BAC = 90° ⟶ Hence proved

18. Two circles touch externally at a point P. from a point T on the tangent at P, tangents TQ
and TR are drawn to the circles with points of contact Q and E respectively. Prove that TQ
= TR.
Sol:

Let the circles be represented by (i) & (ii) respectively


TQ, TP are tangents to (i)
TP, TR are tangents to (ii)
We know that
The tangents drawn from external point to the circle will be equal in length.
For circle (i), TQ = TP …. (i)
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
For circle (ii), TP = TR …. (ii)
From (i) & (ii) TQ = TR

19. In the fig. a circle is inscribed in a quadrilateral ABCD in which ∠B = 90° if AD = 23cm,
AB = 29cm and DS = 5cm, find the radius of the circle.
Sol:
Given AD = 23 cm
AB = 29 cm
∠B = 90°
DS = 5cm

From fig in quadrilateral POQB


∠OPB = ∠OQB = 90° = ∠B = ∠POQ
and PO = OQ. ∴ POQB is a square PB = BQ = r
We know that
Tangents drawn from external point to circle are equal in length.
We know that
Tangents drawn from external point to circle are equal in length.
From A, AR = AQ …. (i)
From B, PB = QB …. (ii)
From C, PC = CS …. (iii)
From D, DR = DS …. (iv)
(i) + (ii) + (iv) ⇒ AR + DB + DR = AQ + QB + DS
⇒ (AR + DR) + r = (AQ + QB) + DS
AD + r = AB + DS
⇒ 23 + r = 29 + 5
⇒ r = 34 – 23 = 11 cm
∴ radius = 11 cm

20. In fig. there are two concentric circles with Centre O of radii 5cm and 3cm. From an
external point P, tangents PA and PB are drawn to these circles if AP = 12cm, find the
tangent length of BP.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Given

OA = 5 cm
OB = 3 cm
AP = 12 cm
BP = ?
We know that
At the point of contact, radius is perpendicular to tangent.
For circle 1, ∆OAP is right triangle
By Pythagoras theorem, 𝑂𝑃2 = 𝑂𝐴2 + 𝐴𝑃2
⇒ 𝑂𝑃2 = 52 + 122 = 25 + 144
= 169
⇒ OP = √169 = 13 𝑐𝑚
For circle 2, ∆OBP is right triangle by Pythagoras theorem,
𝑂𝑃2 = 𝑂𝐵 2 + 𝐵𝑃2
132 = 32 + 𝐵𝑃2
𝐵𝑃2 = 169 − 9 = 160
𝐵𝑃 = √160 = 4√10 𝑐𝑚

21. In fig. AB is chord of length 16cm of a circle of radius 10cm. The tangents at A and B
intersect at a point P. Find the length of PA.
Sol:
Given length of chord AB = 16cm.
Radius OB = OA = 10 cm.

Let line through Centre to point from where tangents are drawn be intersecting chord AB at
M. we know that the line joining Centre to point from where tangents are drawn be
intersecting chord AB at M. we know that
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
The line joining Centre to point from where tangents are drawn bisects the chord joining
the points on the circle where tangents intersects the circle.
1 1
AM = MB = 2 (𝐴𝐵) = 2 × 16 = 8𝑐𝑚
Consider ∆OAM from fig. ∠AMO = 90°
By Pythagoras theorem, 𝑂𝐴2 = 𝐴𝑀2 + 𝑂𝑀2
102 = 82 + 𝑂𝑀2
𝑂𝑀 = √100 − 64 = √36 = 6𝑐𝑚
In ∆AMP, ∠AMP = 90° by Pythagoras theorem 𝐴𝑃2 = 𝐴𝑀2 + 𝑃𝑀2
𝐴𝑃2 = 82 + (𝑂𝑃 − 𝑂𝑀)2
𝑃𝐴2 = 64 + (𝑂𝑃 − 6)2
(𝑂𝑃 − 6)2 = −64 + 𝑃𝐴2 ….(i)
𝐼𝑛 ∆𝐴𝑃𝑂, ∠𝑃𝐴𝑂 = 90° [At point of contact, radius is perpendicular to tangent]
𝑂𝑃2 = 𝑂𝐴2 + 𝑃𝐴2 [Pythagoras theorem]
2 2 2
𝑃𝐴 = 𝑂𝑃 − 10
= 𝑂𝑃2 − 100 ….. (ii)

22. In figure PA and PB are tangents from an external point P to the circle with centre O. LN
touches the circle at M. Prove that PL + LM = PN + MN
Sol:

Given
O is Centre of circle
PA and PB are tangents
We know that
The tangents drawn from external point to the circle are equal in length.
From point P, PA = PB
⇒ PL + AL = PN + NB …. (i)
From point L & N, AL = LM and MN = NB } …. Substitute in (i)
PL + Lm = PN + MN
⇒ Hence proved.

23. In the fig. PO ⊥ QO. The tangents to the circle at P and Q intersect at a point T. Prove that
PQ and OT are right bisectors of each other.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Given
PO ⊥ OQ
Consider quadrilateral OQTP.
∠POQ = 90°
∠OPT = ∠OQT = 90° [At point of contact, tangent and radius are perpendicular]
∴ ∠PTO = 90°
OP = OQ = radius
In this quadrilateral, all the angles are equal and pair of adjacent sides are equal.
∴ OQTP is a square.

24. In the fig two tangents AB and AC are drawn to a circle O such that ∠BAC = 120°. Prove
that OA = 2AB.
Sol:

Consider Centre O for given circle


∠BAC = 120°
AB and AC are tangents
From the fig.
In ∆OBA, ∠OBA = 90° [radius perpendicular to tangent at point of contact]
1 1
∠OAB = ∠OAC = 2 ∠𝐵𝐴𝐶 = 2 × 120° = 60°
[Line joining Centre to external point from where tangents are drawn bisects angle formed
by tangents at that external point1]
𝐴𝐵
In ∆OBA, cos 60° = 𝑂𝐴
1 𝐴𝐵
= 𝑂𝐴 ⇒ 𝑂𝐴 = 2𝐴𝐵
2
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
25. In the fig. BC is a tangent to the circle with Centre O. OE bisects AP. Prove that ∆AEO ~
∆ABC.
Sol:

Given
BC is tangent to circle
OE bisects AP, AE = EP
Consider ∆AOP

26. The lengths of three consecutive sides of a quadrilateral circumscribing a circle are 4cm,
5cm and 7cm respectively. Determine the length of fourth side.
Sol:

Let us consider a quadrilateral ABCD, AB = 4cm, BC = 5 cm, CD = 7cm, CD as sides


circumscribing circle with centre O. and intersecting at points E, F, G, H. as in fig.
We know that the tangents drawn from external point to the circle are equal in length.
From point A, AE = AH …. (i)
From point B, BE = BF ….. (ii)
From point C, GC = CE ….(iii)
From point D, GD = DH ….(iv)
(i) + (ii) + (iii) + (iv) ⇒ (AE + BE + GC + GD) = (AH + BF + CF + DH)
⇒ (AE + BE) + (GC + GD) = (AH + DH) + (BF + CF)
⇒ AB + CD = AD + BC
⇒ 4 + 7 = 5 + AD
⇒ AD = 11 – 5 = 6 cm
Fourth side = 6 cm
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
27. In fig common tangents PQ and RS to two circles intersect at A. Prove that PQ = RS.
Sol:
Consider

Two circles namely (i) & (ii) as shown with common tangents as PQ and RS.
We know that
The tangents from external point to the circle are equal in length.
From A to circle (i) AP = AR … (i)
From A to circle (ii), AQ = AS …. (ii)
(i) + (ii) ⇒ AP + AQ = AR + RS
⇒ PQ = RS

28. Equal circles with centers O and O’ touch each other at X. OO’ produced to meet a circle
with Centre O’ at A. AC is tangent to the circle whose Centre is a O’D is perpendicular to
AC. Find the value of DO’/CO
Sol:

Given circles with centers O and O’


O’D ⊥ AC. Let radius = r
𝑂’A = O’X = OX = r
𝐼𝑛 𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒𝑠, ∆𝐴𝑂’D and ∆𝐴𝑂𝐶
∠A = ∠A [Common angle]
∠𝐴𝐷𝑂’ = ∠ACO = 90° [O’D ⊥ AC and at point of contact C, radius ⊥ tangent]
𝐵𝑦 𝐴 ∙ 𝐴 𝑠𝑖𝑚𝑖𝑙𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑡𝑦 ∆𝐴𝑂’D ~∆AOC.
𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑛 𝑡𝑤𝑜 𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒𝑠 𝑎𝑟𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑚𝑖𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑖𝑟 𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑝𝑜𝑛𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑠 𝑤𝑖𝑙𝑙 𝑏𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛
By A.A similarity ∆𝐴𝑂’D~ ∆AOC
When two triangles are similar then their corresponding sides will be in proportion
𝐴𝑂’ 𝐷𝑂’
=
𝐴𝑂 𝐶𝑂
𝐷𝑂’ 𝑟 𝑟 1
⇒ = 𝑟+𝑟+𝑟 = 3𝑟 = 3
𝐶𝑂
Class X Chapter 10 – Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝐷𝑂’ 1
⇒ =3
𝐶𝑂

29. In figure OQ : PQ = 3 : 4 and perimeter of ∆PDQ = 60cm. determine PQ, QR and OP.
Sol:
Given OQ: PQ = 3 : 4
Let OQ = 3x PQ = 4x
OP = y

∠OQP = 90° [since at point of contact, tangent is perpendicular to radius]


In ∆OQP, by Pythagoras theorem
𝑂𝑃2 = 𝑂𝑄 2 + 𝑄𝑃2
⇒ 𝑦 2 = (3𝑥)2 + (4𝑥)2
⇒ 𝑦 2 = 9𝑥 2 + 16𝑥 2 = 25𝑥 2
⇒ 𝑦 2 = √25𝑥 2 = 5𝑥
Perimeter = OQ + PQ + OP = 3x + 4x + 5x = 12x
According to problem perimeter = 60
∴ 12x = 60
60
x = 12 = 5𝑐𝑚
OQ = 3 × 5 = 15𝑐𝑚
PQ = 4 × 5 = 20 𝑐𝑚
OP = 5 × 5 = 25𝑐𝑚
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Exercise – 12.1

1. A tower stands vertically on the ground. From a point on the ground, 20 m away from the
foot of the tower, the angle of elevation of the top of the tower is 600. What is the height of
the tower?
Sol:
Given
Distance between point of observation and foot of tower  20m  BC
Angle of elevation of top of tower  60  0
Height of tower H  ?  AB

Now from fig ABC


ABC is a right angle
1 Adjacent side

tan Opposite side
Opposite side  AB 
 tan  
Adjacent side  BC 
AB
i.e., tan 60 
20
 AB  20 tan 60
 H  20 3
 20 3
 Height of tower H  20 3m

2. The angle of elevation of a ladder leaning against a wall is 600 and the foot of the ladder is
9.5 m away from the wall. Find the length of the ladder.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Distance between foot ladder and wall  9.5m  BC


Angle of elevation 0  60
Length of ladder  l  ?  AC.
Now fig. forms a right angle triangle ABC
We know
Adjacent side
cos  
hypotenuse
BC
 cos 60 
AC
1 95
 
2 AC
 AC  2  9.5  19m
 length of ladder l  19m

3. A ladder is placed along a wall of a house such that its upper end is touching the top of the
wall. The foot of the ladder is 2 m away from the wall and the ladder is making an angle of
600 with the level of the ground. Determine the height of the wall.
Sol:

Distance between foot and ladder and wall  2m  BC


Angle made by ladder with ground
  60
Height of wall H  ?  AB
Now fig ABC forms a right angled triangle
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
 height of wall H  2 3m.
AB
 tan 60 
BC
AB
 3  AB  2 3m.
2

4. An electric pole is 10 m high. A steel wire tied to top of the pole is affixed at a point on the
ground to keep the pole up right. If the wire makes an angle of 45° with the horizontal
through the foot of the pole, find the length of the wire.
Sol:

Height of the electric pole H  10m  AB angle made by steel wire with ground
(horizontal)   45
Let length of rope wire  l  AC
If we represent above data is
Form of figure thin it forms a right triangle ABC
Opposite side
Here sin  
Hypotenuse
AB
 sin 45 
AC
1 10m
 
2 l
 l  10 2m
 length of wire l  10 2m
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

5. A kite is flying at a height of 75 meters from the ground level, attached to a string inclined
at 600 to the horizontal. Find the length of the string to the nearest meter.
Sol:

Given
Height o kite from ground  75m  AB
Inclination of string with ground
  60
Length of string l  ?  AC
If we represent the above data is form of figure as shown then its form a right angled
triangle ABC here
Opposite side
sin  
hypotenuse
AB
sin 60 
AC
3 75
 
2 l
75  2 3  50
l  
3 3
 l  50 3m
Length of string l  50 3m.

6. The length of a string between a kite and a point on the ground is 90 meters. If the string
makes an angle O with the ground level such that tan O = 15/8, how high is the kite?
Assume that there is no slack in the string.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Length of string between point on ground and kite  90.


15
Angle made by string with ground is  and tan  
8
 15 
   tan 1  
8
Height of the kite be Hm
If we represent the above data in figure as shown then it forms right angled triangle ABC.
We have,
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
AB
tan  
BC
15 
 
8 BC
84
 BC  …………(1)
15
in ABC , by Pythagoras theorem we have
AC 2  BC 2  AB 2
2
 8H 
 90  
2
 H
2

 15 
8H   15H 
2 2

 90 2

152
 H 2  82  152   902  152

 H 2  64  225    90  15 
2

 90 15
2

H 2

289
 90 15 
2

H  2

 17 
90 15
H   79  41
17
 height of kite from ground H  79  41m.

7. A vertical tower stands on a horizontal plane and is surmounted by a vertical flag-staff. At


a point on the plane 70 metres away from the tower, an observer notices that the angles of
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

elevation of the top and the bottom of the flag-staff are respectively 600 and 45°. Find the
height of the flag-staff and that of the tower.
Sol:

Given
Vertical tower is surmounted by flag staff distance between tower and observer
 70m  BC . Angle of elevation of top of tower   45
Angle of elevation of top of flag staff   60
Height of flagstaff  h  AD
Height of tower  H  AB
If we represent the above data in the figure then it forms right angled triangles ABC and
CBD
When  is angle in right angle triangle we know that
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
AB
tan  
BC
H
 tan 45 
70
 H  70 1
 70m.
DB
tan  
BC
AD  AB h  H
 tan 60  
70 70
 h  70  70 3
 h  70  3  1
 70 1 32  1  70  0  732
 51 24m.  h  51 24m
Height of tower  70m height of flagstaff  51 24m
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

8. A vertically straight tree, 15 m high, is broken by the wind in such a way that its top just
touches the ground and makes an angle of 60° with the ground. At what height from the
ground did the tree break?
Sol:
Initial height of tree H  15m
 AB
Let us assume that it is broken at pointe.

Then given that angle made by broken part with ground   60
Height from ground to broken pointe  h  BC
AB  AC  BC
 H  AC  h  AC   H  h  m
If we represent the above data in the figure as shown then it forms right angled triangle
ABC from fig
Opposite side
sin  
Hypotenuse
BC
 sin 60 
CA
3 h
 
2 H h
 3 15  h   2h
 15 3  h 3  2h

 2  3 h  15 3
15 3 2  3
h 
2 3 2 3
Rationalizing denominator rationalizing factor of a  b is a  b

h
15 3  2  3 
22   3
2


 15 2 3  3 
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths


 h  15 2 3  3 

 height of broken point from ground  15 2 3  3 m 
9. A vertical tower stands on a horizontal plane and is surmounted by a vertical flag-staff of
height 5 meters. At a point on the plane, the angles of elevation of the bottom and the top of
the flag-staff are respectively 300 and 600. Find the height of the tower.
Sol:

Height of the flagstaff h  5m  AP


Angle of elevation of the top of flagstaff  60  
Angle of elevation of the bottom of flagstaff  30  
Let height of tower be Hm  AB.
If we represent the above data in forms of figure then it from triangle CBD in which ABC
is included with B  90
In right angle triangle, if
Angle is  then
Oppositeside
tan  
Adjacent side
BD
tan  
BC
AB  AD
 tan 60 
BC
H 5
 3 …………..(1)
BC
AB
tan  
BC
H
 tan 30 
BC
1 H
  …………..(2)
3 BC
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

3 H 15 / BC
(1) and (2)  
1 H / BC
3
H 5
3  3H  H  5
H
5
 2H  5  H   2  5m.
2
Height of tower H  2  5m.

10. A person observed the angle of elevation of the top of a tower as 30°. He walked 50 m
towards the foot of the tower along level ground and found the angle of elevation of the top
of the tower as 600. Find the height of the tower.
Sol:

Given,
Angle of elevation of top of tour, from first point of elevation  A    30
Let the walked 50m from first point  A  to B then AB  50m
Angle of elevation from second point B  Gb  60
Now let is represent the given data in form of then it forms triangle ACD with triangle
BCD in it c  90
Let height of tower, be
Hm  CD
BC  xm.
Opposite side
If in a right angle triangle  is the angle then tan  
Adjacent side
CD
tan  
AC
H
 tan 30 
AB  BC
1 H
 
3 50  x
 50  x  H 3 …………..(1)
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

CD
tan  
BC
H
 tan 60 
x
H
 3
x
11
x …………..(2)
3
(2) in (1)
H
 50  H 3
3
H
H 3  50
3
 3 1 
H   50
 3 
50 3
H   25 3
2
 Height of tower H  25 3m

11. The shadow of a tower, when the angle of elevation of the sun is 45°, is found to be 10 m.
longer than when it was 600. Find the height of the tower.
Sol:

Let the length of shadow of tower when angle of elevation is   60  be x m  BC then
according to problem
Length of the shadow with angle of elevation    45  is 10  x  m  BD.
If we represent the, above data in form of figure then it forms a triangle ABD is which
triangle ABC is included with B  90
Let height of tower be Hm  AB
If in right angle triangle one of the angle is  then
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

AB
tan  
BC
H
 tan 60 
x
H
x ……………(1)
3
AB
tan  
BD
H
 tan 45 
x  10
 x  10  H
 x  H  10 ……………(2)
Substitute x  H  10 in (1)
H
H  10 
3
 3H  10 3  H
  
3  1 H  10 3

10 3
H 
3 1
10 3  3  1
H 
 3 1  
3 1

10 3 3  1

2

 5 3 3 
 23  66m
Rationalize denominator rationalizing factor of a  b is a  b
 Height of tower
 23  66m
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

12. A parachutist is descending vertically and makes angles of elevation of 45° and 60° at two
observing points 100 m apart from each other on the left side of himself. Find the
maximum height from which he falls and the distance of the point where he falls on the
ground from the just observation point.
Sol:

Let is the parachutist at highest point A. Let C and D be points which are 100m a part on
ground where from then CD  100m
Angle of elevation from point C  45  
Angle of elevation from point B  60   
Let B be the point just vertically down the parachute
Let us draw figure according to above data then it forms the figure as shown in which
ABC is triangle and ABD included in it with
ABD triangle included
Maximum height of parachute
From ground  AB  Hm
Distance of point where parachute falls to just nearest observation point  xm
If in right angle triangle one of the included angle  . Then
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
AB
tan  
CB
H
tan 45 
100  x
100  x  H ……….(1)
AB
tan  
DB
H
tan 60 
x
H  3x ……….(2)
From (1) and (2)
3x  100  x
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

 
3  1 x  100

100 3 1
x 
3 1 3 1


100  3 1 
2
 x  50  
3  1 m.
 x  50 1 732  1
 x  50  2  732 
 x  136.6m in (2)
H  3 136  6  1 732 136  6  236  6m
Maximum height of parachute from ground
H  236  6m
Distance between point where parachute falls on ground and just observation is
x  136  6m

13. On the same side of a tower, two objects are located. When observed from the top of the
tower, their angles of depression are 45° and 60°. If the height of the tower is 150 m, find
the distance between the objects.
Sol:

Height of tower, H  AB  150m.


Let A and B be two objects m the ground
Angle of depression of objects A'  A ' Ax     45  AA' B  Ax  AB 
Angle of depression of objects B’
xAB    60  ABB  Ax  AB 
Let AB  x BB  y
In we figure the above data in figure, then it is as shown with B  90
In any right angled triangle if one of the included angle is  then
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
AB
tan  
BB
150
 tan 60 
y
150
y
3 ……….(1)
AB
tan  
AB
150
 tan 45 
x y
 x  y  150 ……….(2)
150
(1) and (2)  x   150
3
50  3
 x  150
3
 x  150  50 3  150  50 1732
 150  86  6  63  4m
Distance between objects AB  63  4m

14. The angle of elevation of a tower from a point on the same level as the foot of the tower is
30°. On advancing 150 meters towards the foot of the tower, the angle of elevation of the
tower becomes 60°. Show that the height of the tower is 129.9 meters (Use √3 = 1.732).
Sol:

Angle of elevation of top of tower from first point A,   30


Let we advanced through A to b by 150m then AB  150m
Angle of elevation of top of lower from second point B,   60
Let height of tower CD  H m
If we represent the above data in from of figure then it forms figure as shown with
D  90
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Opposite side
If in right angled triangle, one of included angle is  then tan  
Adjacent side
CD
tan  
AD
H
 tan 30 
150  x
150  x  H 3 ……….(1)
CD
tan  
BD
H
 tan 60 
x
H
H x 3x ……….(2)
3
(2) in (1)
H  1
150   H 3  H  3    150
3  3
 3 1  150  3
H   150  H   75 3  75 1 732
 3  2
 129  9m
 height of tower  129  9m

15. The angle of elevation of the top of a tower as observed from a point in a horizontal plane
through the foot of the tower is 32°. When the observer moves towards the tower a distance
of 100 m, he finds the angle of elevation of the top to be 63°. Find the height of the tower
and the distance of the first position from the tower. [Take tan 32° = 0.6248 and tan 63° =
1.9626]
Sol:
91.65m, 146.7m

16. The angle of elevation of the top of a tower from a point A on the ground is 30°. Moving a
distance of 20metres towards the foot of the tower to a point B the angle of elevation
increases to 60°. Find the height of the tower & the distance of the tower from the point A.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Angle of elevation of top of tower from points A   30


Angle of elevation of top of tower from points B   60
Distance between A and B, AB  20m
Let height of tower CD  ' h ' m
Distance between second point B from foot of tower bc ' x ' m
If we represent the above data in the figure, then it forms figure as shown with D  90
Opposite side
In right angled triangle if one of the included angle is  then tan  
Adjacent side
CD
tan  
AD
h
tan 30 
20  x
20  x  h 3 …………(1)
CD
tan  
BD
h
tan 60 
x
h
x …………(2)
3
h  1 
(2) in (1)  20   h 3  h 3    20
3  3
 3 1  20 3
 h   20  h  2  10  3  17  32m
 3 
10 3
x  10m.
3
Height of tower h  17  32m
Distance of tower from point A   20  10   30m
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

17. From the top of a building 15 m high the angle of elevation of the top of a tower is found to
be 30°. From the bottom of the same building, the angle of elevation of the top of the tower
is found to be 60°. Find the height of the tower and the distance between the tower and
building.
Sol:

Let AB be the building and CD be the tower height of the building is 15m  h  AB.
Angle of elevation of top of tower from top of building   30
Angle of elevation of top of tower from bottom of building   60
Distance between tower and building BD  x
Let height of tower above building be ' a ' m
If we represent the above data is from of figure then it forms figure as shown with
D  90 also draw AX || BD, AXC  90
Here ABDX is a rectangle
 BD  DX  ' x ' m AB  XD  h  15m
Opposite side
In right triangle if one of the included angle is  then tan  
Adjacent side
CX
tan  
AX
a
 tan 30 
x
xa 3 …………..(1)
CD
tan  
BD
a  15
 tan 60 
x
 x 3  a  15 …………..(2)
(1) and (2)


x

a 3
x 3 a  15
 a  15  a 3  3
a  15  3a
 2a  15
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

15
a  7  5m
2
xa 3
 7  5 1 732
 12  99m
Height of tower above ground  h  a
 15  7  5  22  5m
Distance between tower and building  12  99m

18. On a horizontal plane there is a vertical tower with a flag pole on the top of the tower. At a
point 9 meters away from the foot of the tower the angle of elevation of the top and bottom
of the flag pole are 60° and 30° respectively. Find the height of the tower and the flag pole
mounted on it.
Sol:

Let AB be the tower and BC be flagstaff on the tower


Distance of point of observation from foot of tower BD  9m
Angle of elevation of top of flagstaff  c   60
Angle of elevation of bottom of flag pole  B    30
Let height of tower  ' x '  AB
Height of pole  ' y '  BC
The above data is represented in form of figure a shown with A  90
If in right triangle one of the included is  , then
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
AC
tan  
AD
x y
tan 60 
9
x y 9 3
y  9 3 3 3
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

AB
tan  
AD
x
tan 30 
9
9
x  3 3  5 196m
3
 6 3  6 1 732
 10  392m
Height of tower x  5 196m
Height of pole y  10  392m

19. A tree breaks due to storm and the broken part bends so that the top of the tree touches the
ground making an angle of 30° with the ground. The distance between the foot of the tree
to the point where the top touches the ground is 8 m. Find the height of the tree.
Sol:

Let initially tree height be AB


Let us assumed that the tree is broken at point C
Angle made by broken part CB with ground is 30  
Distance between foot of tree of point where it touches ground BA  8m
Height of tree  h  AC  CB  AC  CB
The above information is represent in the form of figure as shown
Adjacent side Opposite side
cos   tan  
Hypotenuse Adjacent side
AB
cos30 
CB
3 B

2 CB
16
CB 
3
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

CA
tan 30 
AB
1 CA

3 8
8
CA 
3
16 8 24 8  3
Height of tree  CB  CA    
3 3 3 3
 8 3m

20. From a point P on the ground the angle of elevation of a 10 m tall building is 30°. A flag is
hoisted at the top of the building and the angle of elevation of the top of the flag-staff from
P is 45°. Find the length of the flag-staff and the distance of the building from the point
P.(Take √3= 1.732).
Sol:

Let AB be the tower and 80 be the flagstaff Angle of elevation of top of building from
P   30
AB  height of tower  10m
Angle of elevation of top of flagstaff from P   45
Let height of flagstaff BD  ' a ' m
The above information is represented in form of figure as shown with A  90
In a right angled triangle if one of the included
Angle is 
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
AB
tan  
AP
10
tan 30 
AP
AP  10 3
 10 1 732
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

 17  32
AD
tan  
AP
10  a
tan 45 
AP
10  a  AP
a  17  32  10
 7  32m
Height of flagstaff ' '  7  32m
Distance between P and foot of tower  17  32m.

21. A 1 .6 m tall girl stands at a distance of 3.2 m from a lamp-post and casts a shadow of 4.8
m on the ground. Find the height of the lamp-post by using (i) trigonometric ratios (ii)
property of similar triangles.
Sol:
Let AC be the lamp past of height ' h '
We assume that ED  1 6m, BE  4  8m and EC  3  2m
We have to find the height of the lamp post
Now we have to find height of lamp post using similar triangles

Since triangle BDE and triangle ABC are similar,


AC ED

BC BE
h 1 6
 
4 8  3 2 4 8
8
h
3
Again we have to find height of lamp post using trigonometry ratios
1 6
In ADE , tan  
48
1
 tan  
3
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Again in ABC ,
h
tan  
4 8  3 2
1 h
 
3 8
8
h
3
8
Hence the height of lamp post is .
3

22. A 1.5 m tall boy is standing at some distance from a 30 m tall building. The angle of
elevation from his eyes to the top of the building increases from 30° to 60° as he walks
towards the building. Find the distance he walked towards the building.
Sol:
𝟏𝟗√𝟑

23. The shadow of a tower standing on a level ground is found to be 40 m longer when Sun’s
altitude is 30° than when it was 60°. Find the height of the tower
Sol:
𝟐𝟎√𝟑

24. From a point on the ground the angles of elevation of the bottom and top of a transmission
tower fixed at the top of 20 m high building are 45° and 60° respectively. Find the height of
the transmission tower.
Sol:

Given height of building  20m  AB


Let height of tower above building  ' h '  BC
Height of tower + building   h  20  m [from ground]  CA
Angle of elevation of bottom of tour,   45
Angle of elevation of top of tour,   60
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Let distance between tower and observation point  ' x ' m


The above data is represented in  AD
The form of figure as shown is one of the included angle is right angle triangle is a then
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
AB
tan  
AD
20
 tan 45 
x
 x  20m
CA
tan  
DA
h  20
 tan 60 
x
 h  20  20 3
 h  20  3 1 
Height of tower h  20  
3 1
 20 1 732  1
 20  0  732
 14  64m

25. The angles of depression of the top and bottom of 8 m tall building from the top of a
multistoried building are 30° and 45° respectively. Find the height of the multistoried
building and the distance between the two buildings.
Sol:

Let height of multistoried building ' h ' m  AB


Height of tall building  8m  CD
Angle of depression of top of tall building   30
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Angle of depression of bottom of tall building   45


Distance between two building  ' x ' m  BD
Let Ax  x
AB  AX  XB but XB  CD [ AXCD is rectangle]
AB  ' a ' m  8m
AB   a  8  m
The above information is represented in the form of figure e as shown
If in right triangle are of included angle is 
Opposite side
Then tan  
Adjacent side
In AXB
AX
tan 30 
CX
1 a a
  .
3 BD x
xa 3 ………….(1)
In ABD
AB a  8
tan 45  
BD x
a 8
1
x
 a 8  x ………….(2)

26. A statue I .6 m tall stands on the top of pedestal. From a point on the ground, the angle of
elevation of the top of the statue is 60° and from the same point the angle of elevation of
the top of the pedestal is 45°. Find the height of the pedestal.
Sol:

Let height of pedestal be ' h ' m


Height of status  1 6m
Angle of elevation of top of status   60
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Angle of elevation of pedestal of status   60


The above data is represented in the form of figure as shown.
If in right angle triangle one of the included angle is  then
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
BC
tan  
BD
h
tan 45 
DC
DC  h 8.1
DC  ' h ' m .........(1)
AC
tan  
DC
h  1 6
tan 60 
DC
h  1 6
DC  .........(2)
BC
h  1 6
From (1) and (2) h 
3
 h 3  h  1 6
h  
3  1  1 6

1 6 3 1
h
3 1

3 1
 0.5  3 1 
Height of pedestal  0  6  3  1 m.
27. A T.V. Tower stands vertically on a bank of a river. From a point on the other bank directly
opposite the tower, the angle of elevation of the top of the tower is 60°. From a point 20 m
away this point on the same bank, the angle of elevation of the top of the tower is 30°. Find
the height of the tower and the width of the river.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Let AB be the T.V tower of height ' h ' m on a bank of river and ' D ' be the point on the
opposite of the river. An angle of elevation at top of tower is 60 and form the point 20m
away them angle of elevation of tower at the same point is 30
Let AB  h and BC  x
Here we have to find height and width of river the corresponding figure is here
In CAB,
AB
tan 60 
BC
h
 3
x
 3x  h
h
 x
3
Again in DBA,
AB
tan 30 
BC
1 h
 
3 20  x
 3h  20  x
h  h 
 3h  20   x 
3 3
h
 3h   20
3
2h
  20
3
 h  10 3
h 10 3
x 
3 3
 x  10
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Hence the height of the tower is 10 3m and width of the river is 10 m.

28. From the top of a 7 m high building, the angle of elevation of the top of a cable tower is
60° and the angle of depression of its foot is 45°. Determine the height of the tower.
Sol:

Given
Height of building  7m  AB
Height of cable tower  ' H ' m  CD
Angle of elevation of top of tower, from top of building   60
Angle of depression of bottom of tower, from top of building   45
The above data is represented in form of figure as shown
Let CX  ' x ' m
CD  DX  XC  7m  ' x ' m
 x  7m.
In ADX
Oppositeside  XD 
tan 45 
Adjacent side  AX 
7
1
AX
 AX  7m
In AXD
XC
tan 60 
AX
x
3
H
x7 3
But CD  x  7
 7 37  7  
3  1 m.

Height of cable tower  7  


3 1 m
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

29. As observed from the top of a 75 m tall lighthouse, the angles of depression of two ships
are 30° and 45°. If one ship is exactly behind the other on the same side of the lighthouse,
find the distance between the two ships.
Sol:

Given
Height of light house  75m  ' h ' m  AB
Angle of depression of ship 1   30
Angle of depression of ship 2   45
The above data is represented in form of figure as shown.
Let distance between ships be ' x ' m  CD
In right triangle if one of included angle is  then
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
AB
tan  
DB
75
tan 30 
x  BC
x  BC  75 3 …………(1)
AB
tan  
CB
75
tan 45 
BC
BC  75 …………(2)
(2) in (1)  x  75  75 3
 x  75  3 1 
 Distance between ships
 ' x'm
 75  
3 1 m.
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

30. The angle of elevation of the top of the building from the foot of the tower is 30° and the
angle of the top of the tower from the foot of the building is 60°. If the tower is 50 m high,
find the height of the building.
Sol:

Angle of elevation of top of building from foot of tower  30  


Angle of elevation of top of tower, from foot of building  60  
Height of tower  50m  AB
Height of building  ' h ' m
 CD
The above information is represented in form of figure as shown
Opposite side
In right triangle if one of the included angle is  then tan  
Adjacent side
In ABC
AB
tan  
BD
50
tan 60 
BD
50
BD 
3
In CBD
CD
tan  
BD
h
tan 30 
50
3
50 1
h 
3 3
50

3
50
 height of building  m
3
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

31. From a point on a bridge across a river the angles of depression of the banks on opposite
side of the river are 30° and 45° respectively. If bridge is at the height of 30 m from the
banks, find the width of the river.
Sol:

Height of the bridge  30m  AB 


Angle of depression of bank 1 i.e.,   30. B1 
Angle of depression of bank 2 i.e.,   30. B2 
Given banks are on opposite sides
Distance between banks B1 B2  B1B  BB2
The above information is represented is the form of figure as shown in right angle triangle
if one of the included angle is O then
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
In ABB1
AB
tan  
B1 B
30
tan 30 
B1 B
B1 B  30 3m
In ABB2
AB
tan  
BB2
30
tan 45 
BB2
BB2  30m
B1 B2  B1B  BB2  30 3  30

 30  3 1 
Distance between banks  30  
3 1 m
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

32. Two poles of equal heights are standing opposite to each other on either side of the road
which is 80 m wide. From a point between them on the road the angles of elevation of the
top of the poles are 60° and 30° respectively. Find the height of the poles and the distances
of the point from the poles.
Sol:
𝟐𝟎√𝟑m

33. A man sitting at a height of 20 m on a tall tree on a small island in the middle of a river
observes two poles directly opposite to each other on the two banks of the river and in line
with the foot of tree. If the angles of depression of the feet of the poles from a point at
which the man is sitting on the tree on either side of the river are 60° and 30° respectively.
Find the width of the river.
Sol:

Height of tree AB  20m


Angle of depression of pole 1 feet   60
Angle of depression of pole 2 feet   30
B1C1 be one pole and B1C2 be other sides width of river  B1 B2
 B1B  BB2
The above information is G represent in from of figure as shown
In right triangle, if one of included angle is 0
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
AB
tan  
B1 B
20
tan 60 
B1 B
20
B1 B 
3
AB
tan  
BB2
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

20
tan 30 
BB2
BB2  20 3
20 1  3  20
B1 B2  B2 B  BB2   20 3  20  
3  3 3
80
Width of river  m.
3
80 3
 m.
3

34. A vertical tower stands on a horizontal plane and is surmounted by a flag-staff of height 7
m. From a point on the plane, the angle of elevation of the bottom of the flag-staff is 30°
and that of the top of the flag-staff is 45°. Find the height of the tower.
Sol:

Given
Height of flagstaff  7m  BC
Let height of tower  ' h ' m  AB
Angle of elevation of bottom of flagstaff   30
Angle of elevation of top of flagstaff   45
Points of desecration be ' p '
The above data is represented in form of figure as shown
In right angle triangle if one of the induced angle is  then
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
AB
tan  
AP
h
tan 30 
AP
AP  h 3 …….(1)
AC
tan  
AP
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

h7
tan 45 
AP
AP  h  7 …….(2)
From (1) and (2)
h 3  h7
h 3h 7
3 1
h  
3 1  7  h 
7
3 1

3 1
7  3 1   3 5

2
 3 1 
Height of tower  3  5  
2  1 m.

35. The length of the shadow of a tower standing on level plane is found to be 2x metres longer
when the sun’s altitude is 30° than when it was 45°. Prove that the height of tower is x (√3
+ 1) metres.
Sol:

Let
Length of shadow be ' a ' m  BC  when sun attitude be  45
Length of shadow will be  2 x  a  m  80 when sun attitude is   30
Let height of tower be ' h ' m  AB the above information is represented in form of figure as
shown
In right triangle one of the included angle is  then
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
In ABC
AB
tan  
BC
h
tan 45 
a
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

ha ……….(1)
In ADB
AB
tan  
 2 x  a  BC
h
tan 30 
2x  a
2x  a  h 3 ……….(2)
(1) in (2)  2 x  h  h 3
h  
3 1  2x

2x 3 1
h 
3 1 3 1


2x  3 1 
2
x  3 1 
Height of tower  x  
3 1 m

36. A tree breaks due to the storm and the broken part bends so that the top of the tree touches
the ground making an angle of 30° with the ground. The distance from the foot of the tree
to the point where the top touches the ground is 10 meters. Find the height of the tree.
Sol:

Let AB be height of tree it is broken at pointe and top touches ground at B 


Angle made by top   30
Distance from foot of tree from point where A touches ground = O meter
The above information is represented in form of figure as shown
Height of tree  AB  AC  CB
 AC  CB
In right triangle If one of angle is  then
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Adjacent side Adjacent side


tan   cos  
Opposite side Hypotenuse
AC
tan 30 
BA
10
AC  m
3
AB
cos30 
BC
3 10

2 BC
20
BC  m.
3
10 20
AB  CA  CB  
3 3
30
  10 3
3
Height of tree  10 3m

37. A balloon is connected to a meteorological ground station by a cable of length 215 m


inclined at 600 to the horizontal. Determine the height of the balloon from the ground.
Assume that there is no slack in the cable.
Sol:

Length of cable connected to balloon  215m CB 


Angle of inclination of cable with ground   60
Height of balloon from ground  ' h ' m  AB
The above data is represented in form of figure as shown
In right triangle one of the included angle is  then
Opposite side
sin  
hypotenuse
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

AB 3 h 215 3
sin 60    h  107  5 3m
BC 2 215 2
 Height of balloon from ground  107  5 3m.

38. Two men on either side of the cliff 80 m high observes the angles of elevation of the top of
the cliff to be 300 and 600 respectively. Find the distance between the two men.
Sol:

Height of cliff  80m  AB.


Angle of elevation from Man 1,   30  M 1 
Angle of elevation from Man 2,   60  M 2 
Distance between two men  M1M 2  BM1  BM 2 .
The above information is represented in form of figure as shown
In right angle triangle one of the included angle is  then
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
AB
tan  
M1B
80
tan 30 
M1B
M 1 B  80 3
AB
tan  
BM 2
80
tan 60 
BM 2
80
BM 2 
3
80 80  4 320
M1M 2  M1B  BM1  80 3   
3 3 3
320 3
Distance between men  meters
3
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

39. Find the angle of elevation of the sun (sun’s altitude) when the length of the shadow of a
vertical pole is equal to its height.
Sol:

Let
Height of pole  ' h ' m  sun’s altitude from ground length of shadow be ' l '
Given that l  h.
Angle of elevation of sun’s altitude be  the above data is represented in form of figure as
shown
In right triangle if one of the included angle is 0 then.
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
AB h
tan    tan  
BC l
l
 tan    h  1
l
   tan 1  45
1

Angle of sun’s altitude is 45

40. A fire in a building B is reported on telephone to two fire stations P and 20 km apart from
each other on a straight road. P observes that the fire is at an angle of 60° to the road and Q
observes that it is at an angle of 45° to the road. Which station should send its team and
how much will this team have to travel?
Sol:

Let AB be the building


Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Angle of elevation from point P [Fire station 1]   60


Angle of elevation from point Q [Fire station 1]   45
Distance between fire stations PQ  20km
The above information is represented in form of figure as shown
In right triangle if one of the angle is  then.
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
AB
tan  
AP
AB
tan 60 
AP
AB
AP  ………..(1)
3
AB
tan  
AQ
AB
tan 45 
AQ
AQ  AB ………..(2)
AB  1 3 
(1) + (2)  AP  AQ   AB  AB  
3  3 
 3 1  20 3
 20  AB    AB 
 3  3 1
3 1
AB 
20 3

3  1 3 1
 10 3   
3  1  10 3  3 
 
AQ  AB  10 3  3  10  3  1 732  12  64km

 10  3  1  10  0  732  7  32km
AB
Ap 
3
Station 1 should send its team and they have to travel 7  32km

41. A man on the deck of a ship is 10 m above the water level. He observes that the angle of
elevation of the top of a cliff is 45° and the angle of depression of the base is 300. Calculate
the distance of the cliff from the ship and the height of the cliff.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Height of ship from water level  10cm  AB


Angle of elevation of top of cliff   45
Angle of depression of bottom of cliff   30
Height of cliff CD  ' h ' m.
Distance of ship from foot of tower cliff
Height of cliff above ship be ' a ' m
Then height of cliff  DX  XC
 10  0  m
The above data is represented in form of figure as shown
Opposite side
In right triangle, if one of the included angle is  , then tan  
Adjacent side
CX
tan 45 
AX
a
1
AX
AX  ' a ' m
XD
tan 30 
AX
1 10

3 AX
AX  10 3
 a  10 3m.
Height of cliff  10  10 3  10   
3  1 m.

Distance between ship and cliff  10 3m.

42. A man standing on the deck of a ship, which is 8 m above water level. He observes the
angle of elevation of the top of a hill as 60° and the angle of depression of the base of the
hill as 30°. Calculate the distance of the hill from the ship and the height of the hill.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Height of ship above water level  8m  AB


Angle of elevation of top of cliff (hill)   60
Angle of depression of bottom of hill   30
Height of hill  CD
Distance between ship and hill  AX .
Height of hill above ship  CX  ' a ' m
Height of hill   a  8  m.
The above data is represented in form of figure as shown
Opposite side
In right triangle if one of included angle is  then tan  
Adjacent side
CX
tan  
AX
a
tan 60 
AX
a
AX 
3
XD
tan  
AX
8
tan 30 
AX
AX  8 3
a
  8 3  a  24m.
3
AX  8 3m
 Height of cliff hill   24  8  m  32m
Distance between hill and ship 8 3m.
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

43. There are two temples, one on each bank of a river, just opposite to each other. One temple
is 50 m high. From the top of this temple, the angles of depression of the top and the foot of
the other temple are 30° and 60° respectively. Find the width of the river and the height of
the other temple.
Sol:

Height of temple 1 AB   50m


Angle of depression of top of temple 2,   30
Angle of depression of bottom of temple 2,   60
Height of temple 2  CD   ' h ' m
Width of river  BD  ' x ' m. the above data is represents in form of figure as shown
In right triangle if one of ' h ' m included angle is  , then
Opposite side
tan   here BD  CX , CD  BX ,
Adjacent side
AX
tan  
CX
AX
tan 30 
CX
CX  A  3
AB
tan  
BD
50
tan 60 
CX
50
CX 
3

 
AX 3 
50
3
50
 AX  m.
3
50 100
CD  XB  AB  AX  50   m
3 3
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

50
Width of river  m
2
100
Height of temple 2  m
3

44. The angle of elevation of an aeroplane from a point on the ground is 45°. After a flight of
15 seconds, the elevation changes to 30°. If the aeroplane is flying at a height of 3000
meters, find the speed of the aeroplane.
Sol:

Let aeroplane travelled from A to B in 15 sec


Angle of elevation of point A   45
Angle of elevation of point B   30
Height of aeroplane from ground  3000 meters
 AP  BQ
Distance travelled in 15 sees  AB  PQ
Velocity (or) speed = distance travelled time the above data is represents is form of figure
as shown
In right triangle one of the included angle is  then
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
AP
tan  
XP
3000
tan 45 
XP
XP  3000m
BQ
tan  
XQ
3000
tan 30 
XQ
XQ  3000 3
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

PQ  XQ  XP  3000  3 1 m

PQ 3000 3  1 
Speed 
time

15
 200  
3 1

 2000  0  732
 146  4 m / sec
Speed of aeroplane  146.4 m / sec

45. An aeroplane flying horizontally 1 km above the ground is observed at an elevation of 60°.
After 10 seconds, its elevation is observed to be 30°. Find the speed of the aeroplane in
km/hr.
Sol:

Let aeroplane travelled from A to B in 10 secs


Angle of elevation of point A    60
Angle of elevation of point B    30
Height of aeroplane from ground  1km  AP  BQ
Distance travelled in 10 sec  AB  PQ
The above data is represent in form of figure as shown
Opposite side
In right triangle if one of the included angle is  then tan  
Adjacent side
AP
tan  
PX
1
tan 60 
PX
1
PX  km
3
BQ
tan  
XQ
1
tan 30 
XQ
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

XQ  3km
1 2 2 3
PQ  XQ  PX  3   km.  km.
3 3 2
PQ 2 3 / 3km 2 3 2
Speed     60  6
time 10 3
hr
60  60
 240 3 km / hr
Speed of aeroplane  240 3 km / hr

46. From the top of a 50 m high tower, the angles of depression of the top and bottom of a pole
are observed to be 45° and 60° respectively. Find the height of the pole.
Sol:

AB  height of tower  50m.


CD  height of (Pole)
Angle of depression of top of building   45
Angle of depression of bottom of building   60
The above data is represent in the form of figure as shown
Opposite side
In right triangle one of included angle is  then tan  
Adjacent side
AX
tan  
CX
AX
tan 45 
CX
AX  CX
AB
tan  
BD
50
tan 60 
BD
50
CX 
3
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

50
AX  m  BD
3

CD  AB  AX  50 
50 50

 3 1
3 3


50
3
3 3 
Height of building (pole) 
50
3

3  3 m. 
50
Distance between pole and tower  m.
3

47. The horizontal distance between two trees of different heights is 60 m. The angle of
depression of the top of the first tree when seen from the top of the second tree is 45°. If the
height of the second tree is 80 m, find the height of the first tree.
Sol:

Distance between trees  60m.80


Height of second tree  80m CD 
Let height of first tree  ' h ' m  AB 
Angle of depression from second tree top from first tree top   45
The above information is represent in form of figure as shown
In right triangle if one of the included angle is 0 their
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
Draw CX  AB, CX  BD  60n.
XB  CD  AB  AX
AX
tan  
CX
AX
tan 45   AX  60m.
60
XB  CD  AB  AX
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

 80  60
 20m
Height of second tree  80m
Height of first tree  20m

48. A tree standing on a horizontal plane is leaning towards east. At two points situated at
distances a and b exactly due west on it, the angles of elevation of the top are respectively
(𝑏−𝑎) tan 𝛼 tan 𝛽
𝛼 and 𝛽 Prove that the height of the op from the ground is tan 𝛼−tan 𝛽
Sol:

AB be the tree leaning east


From distance ' a ' m from tree, Angle of elevation be  at point P.
From distance ' b ' m from tree, Angle of elevation be  at point Q.
The above data is represented in the form of figure as shown in right triangle if one of the
included angle is  then
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
Draw AX  QB let BX  ' a ' m
AX
tan  
PX
AX
tan  
xa
xa
cot  
Ax
x  B  AX cot ……………(1)
AX
tan  
QX
AX
tan  
xb
xb
cot  
AX
x  B  AX cot  ……………(2)
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

(2) and (1)   x  b    x  a   AX cot   AX cot 

 tan   tan  
 b  a  AX  
 tan   tan  

 AX 
 b  a  tan   tan 
tan   tan 

 Height of top from ground 


 b  0 tan   tan 
tan   tan 

49. The angle of elevation of the top of a vertical tower PQ from a point X on the ground is
60°. At a point Y, 40 m vertically above X, the angle of elevation of the top is 45°.
Calculate the height of the tower.
Sol:

50. The angle of elevation of a stationery cloud from a point 2500 m above a lake is 15° and
the angle of depression of its reflection in the lake is 45°. What is the height of the cloud
above the lake level? (Use tan 15° = 0.268)
Sol:

Let cloud be at height PQ as represented from lake level


From point x, 2500 meters above the lake angle of elevation of top of cloud   15
Angle of depression of shadow reflection in water   45
Here PQ  PQ draw AY  PQ
Let AQ  ' h ' mAP  ' x ' m.
PQ   h  x  m PQ   h  x  m
The above data is represented in from of figure as shown
Opposite side
In right triangle if one of included angle is  then tan  
Adjacent side
AQ
tan15 
AY
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

h
 0  268 
AY
h
 AY  ………(1)
0  268
AB AP  PQ
tan 45  
AY AY
 AY  x   h  x 
 h  2x
 AY  h  2 x ………..(2)
h
From (1) and (2)  h  2 x  3 131h  h  2  2500
0  268
5000
h  1830  8312
0  731
Height of cloud above lake  h  x
 1830  8312  2500
 4300  8312 m

51. If the angle of elevation of a cloud from a point h meters above a lake is a and the angle of
depression of its reflection in the lake be b, prove that the distance of the cloud from the
2 ℎ sec 𝛼
point of observation is tan 𝛽−tan 𝛼
Sol:

Let x be point ' b ' meters above lake


Angle of elevation of cloud from X  
Angle of depression of cloud refection in lake  
Height of cloud from lake  PQ
PQ be the reflection then PQ  PQ
Draw XA  PQ, AQ  ' x ' m AP  XY  ' h ' m.
Distance of cloud from point of observation is XQ
The above data is represented in form of figure as shown
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

In AQX
AQ
tan  
AX
x
tan   ………..(1)
AX
In AXQ
AQ
tan  
AX
h xh
tan   ………..(2)
AX
2h 2h
(2) and (1)  tan   tan    AX 
AX tan   tan 
In AXQ
AX
cos    QX  AX sec
XQ
2h sec
 XQ 
tan   tan 
 Distance of cloud from point of observation
 2h sec  / tan   tan 

52. From an aeroplane vertically above a straight horizontal road, the angles of depression of
two consecutive mile stones on opposite sides of the aeroplane are observed to be 𝛼 and 𝛽
tan 𝛼 tan 𝛽
Show that the height in miles of aeroplane above the road is given by tan 𝛼+tan 𝛽
Sol:

Let PQ be height of aeroplane from ground x and y be two mile stones on opposite sides
of the aeroplane xy  1 mile
Angle of depression of x from p  
Angle of depression of y from p  
The above data is represented in form of figure as shown
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Opposite side
In right triangle, if one of included angle is  then tan  
Adjacent side
In P  Q
PQ
tan  
XQ
PQ
XQ 
tan 
In PQY
PQ
tan  
QY
PQ
QY 
QY
PQ PQ  1 1 
XQ  QY    XY  PQ   
tan  tan   tan  tan  
 tan   tan  
 1  PQ  
 tan   tan  
tan   tan 
 PQ 
tan   tan 
tan   tan 
Height of aeroplane  miles
tan   tan 

53. PQ is a post of given height a, and AB is a tower at some distance. If 𝛼 and 𝛽 are the
angles of elevation of B, the top of the tower, at P and Q respectively. Find the height of
the tower and its distance from the post.
Sol:

PQ is part height  ' a ' m AB is tower height


Angle of elevation of B from P  
Angle of elevation of B from Q  
The above information is represented in form of figure as shown
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Opposite side
In right triangle if one of the included angle is  , then tan  
Adjacent side
Draw QX  AB, PQ  AK
In BQX
BX
tan  
QX
AB  AX
 tan  
QX
AB  a
 tan   ………..(1)
QX
In BPA
AB
tan  
AP
AB
 tan   ………..(2)
QX
(1) divided by (2)
tan  AB  a a
   1
tan  AB AB
a tan  tan   tan 
  1 
AB tan  tan 
a tan  AB a
 AB  Q 
tan   tan  tan  tan   tan 
Height of power  a tan   tan   tan  
Distance between past and tower  a  tan   tan  

54. A ladder rests against a wall at an angle 𝛼 to the horizontal. Its foot is pulled away from the
wall through a distance a, so that it slides a distance b down the wall making an angle 𝛽
𝑎 cos 𝛼−cos 𝛽
with the horizontal. Show that 𝑏 = sin 𝛽−sin 𝛼
Sol:
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Let AB be ladder initially at an inclination  to ground


When its foot is pulled through distance ' a ' let BB  ' a ' m and AA '  ' b ' m
New angle of elevation from B  B the above information is represented in form of figure
as shown
Let AP  ground BP AB  AB
AP  x BP  y
In ABP
AP xb
sin    sin   ………(1)
AB AB
BP y
cos    cos   ………(2)
AB AB
In ABP.
AP x
sin    sin   ………(3)
AB AB
BP ya
cos    cos   ………(4)
AB AB
b
(1) and (3)  sin   sin  
AB
a
(4) and (2)  cos   cos  
AB
a cos   cos 
 
b sin   sin 

55. A tower subtends an angle 𝛼 at a point A in the plane of its base and the angle if depression
of the foot of the tower at a point b metres just above A is 𝛽. Prove that the height of the
tower is b tan 𝛼 cot 𝛽
Sol:

Let height of tower be ' h ' m  PQ


Angle of elevation at point A on ground  
Let B be point ' b ' m above the A.
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Angle of depression of foot of tower from B   the above data is represented in ffrom of
figure as shown draw BX  PQ from figure QX  ' b ' m
In PBX
PQ
tan   ……..(1)
BX  AD 
In QBX
QX
tan   ……..(2)
BX
tan  PQ
(1) and (2)  
tan  QX
tan 
 PQ  QX   b  tan   cot 
tan 
 Height of tour  b  tan   cot 

56. An observer, 1.5 m tall, is 28.5 m away from a tower 30 m high. Determine the angle of
elevation of the top of the tower from his eye.
Sol:

Height of observer  AB  1 5m
Height of tower  PQ  30m
Height of tower above the observe eye  30  1 5
QX  28  5m.
Distance between tower and observe XB  28  5m.
 be angle of elevation of tower top from eye
The above data is represented in form of figure as shown from figure
Opposite side
tan  
Adjacent side
QX 28  5
tan     1    tan 1 1  45
BX 28  5
Angle of elevation  45
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

57. A carpenter makes stools for electricians with a square top of side 0.5 m and at a height of
1.5 m above the ground. Also, each leg is inclined at an angle of 60° to the ground. Find
the length of each leg and also the lengths of two steps to be put at equal distances.
Sol:

Let AB be height of stool  1 5m.


Let P and Q be equal distance then AP  0  5m, AQ  1m the above information is
represented in form of figure as shown
BC  length of leg
AB 3 1 5
sin 60   
BC 2 BC
1 5  2
 BC   3m.
3
Draw PX  AB, QZ  AB, XY  CA, ZW  CA
XY
sin 60 
XC
05
 XC   4
3
 3 8
   
 4  3
2

3
 XC  11077m.
ZW
sin 60 
CZ
1
CZ 
3
2
2

3
CZ  1 654m.
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

58. A boy is standing on the ground and flying a kite with 100 m of string at an elevation of
30°. Another boy is standing on the roof of a 10 m high building and is flying his kite at an
elevation of 45°. Both the boys are on opposite sides of both the kites. Find the length of
the string that the second boy must have so that the two kites meet.
Sol:

For boy
Length of string AB  100m.
Angle Made by string with ground    30
For boy 2
Height of building CD  10m.
Angle made by string with building top   45 length of kite thread of boy 2 if both the
kites meet must be ' DB
The above information is represented in form of figure as shown
Drawn BX  AC , YD  BC
In ABX
BC
tan 30 
AX
BX 1 BX
sin 30     BX  20m.
AB 2 100
BY  BX  XY  50  10m  50m.
BY
In BYD sin 45 
BD
1 40
  BD  40 2m.
2 BD
Length of thread or string of boy 2  40 2m.

59. The angle of elevation of the top of a hill at the foot of a tower is 60° and the angle of
elevation of the top of the tower from the foot of the hill is 30°. If the tower is 50 m high,
what is the height of the hill?
Sol:
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Height of towers AB  50m


Height of hill CD  ' h ' m.
Angle of elevation of top of hill from of tower   60.
Angle of elevation of top of tower from foot of hill   30.
The above information is represented I form of figure as shown
From figure
In ABC
Opposite side AB
tan 30  
Adjacent side BC
1 50
  BC  50 3.
3 BC
In BCD
Opposite side CD CD
tan 60   
Adjacent side BC 50 3
CD
3  CD  50  3  150m
50 3
Height of hill  150m.

60. Two boats approach a light house in mid-sea from opposite directions. The angles of
elevation of the top of the light house from two boats are 30° and 45° respectively. If the
distance between two boats is 100 m, find the height of the light house.
Sol:

Let B1 be boat 1 and B2 be boat 2.


Height of light house  ' h ' m  AB
Distance between B1 B2  100m
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Angle of elevation of A from B1   30


Angle of elevation of B from B2   45
The above information is represented in the form of figure as shown here
In ABB1
Opposite side AB
tan 30  
Adjacent side B1B
B1 B  AB 3  h 3 ………….(1)
In ABB2
Opposite side AB
tan 30   ………….(2)
Adjacent side B1B
(1) + (2)  B1 B  BB2  h 3  h
 B1B2  h  
3 1

B1 B2 100 3 1
h  
3 1 3 1 3 1
 3 1   50
 
100
 3 1
2
Height of light house  50  3 1
61. From the top of a building AB, 60 m high, the angles of depression of the top and bottom
of a vertical lamp post CD are observed to be 30° and 60° respectively. Find
(i) The horizontal distance between AB and CD.
(ii) The height of the lamp post.
(iii) The difference between the heights of the building and the lamp post.
Sol:

Height of building AB  60m.


Height of lamp post CD  h m
Angle of depression of top of lamp post from top of building   30
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Angle of depression of bottom of lamp post from top of building   60


The above information is represented in the form of figure as shown
Draw DX  AB, DX  AC , CD  AX
In BDX
Opposite side BX
tan   
Adjacent side DX
60  CD
tan 30 
DX
1 60  h

3 AC
AC   60  h  3m ……………(1)
In BCA
AB 60
tan    tan 60 
AC AC
60
 AC   20 3m ……………(2)
3
From (1) and (2)
 60  h  3  20 3
60  h  20
 h  40m
Height of lamp post  40m
Distance between lamp posts building AC  20 3m.
Difference between heights of building and lamp post
 BX  60  h  60  40  20m

62. From the top of a light house, the angles of depression of two ships on the opposite sides of
it are observed to be a and 3. If the height of the light house be h meters and the line joining
the ships passes through the foot of the light house, show that the distance
ℎ(tan 𝛼+tan 𝛽)
metres
tan 𝛼 tan 𝛽
Sol:

Height of light house  ' h ' meters  AB


Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

S1 and S2 be two ships on opposite sides of light house  


Angle of depression of S1 from top of light house  
Angle of depression of S 2 from top of light house
Required to prove that
h  tan   tan  
Distance between ships  meters
tan   tan 
The above information is represented in the form of figure as shown
In ABS1
Opposite side AB
tan   
Adjacent side S1B
h
S1B  …………….(1)
tan 
In ABS2
AB h
tan    BS2  …………….(2)
BS2 tan 
h h
(1) and (2)  BS1  BS2  
tan  tan 
 1 1  h  tan   tan  
 S1S 2  h   
 tan  tan   tan   tan 
h  tan   tan  
Distance between ships  . meters
tan   tan 

63. A straight highway leads to the foot of a tower of height 50 m. From the top of the tower,
the angles of depression of two cars standing on the highway are 30° and 60° respectively.
What is the distance between the two cars and how far is each car from the tower?
Sol:

Height of towers AB  50mts


C1 and C2 be two cars
Angle of depression of C1 from top of towers   30
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Angle of depression of C2 from top of towers   60


Distance between cars C1C2
The above information is represented in form of figure as shown
In ABC2
Opposite side AB
tan   
Adjacent side BC2
50
tan 60 
BC1
50
BC2 
3
In ABC1
AB
tan  
BC1
50
tan 30   BC1  50 3,
BC1
50  3  1  100 100
C1C2  BC1  BC2  50 3   50    3mts.
3  3  3 3
100
Distance between cars C1C2  3 mts
3
Distance of car1 from tower  50 3 mts.
50
Distance of car 2 from tower  mts
3

64. The angles of elevation of the top of a rock from the top and foot of a loo m high tower are
respectively 30° and 45°. Find the height of the rock.
Sol:

Height of tour AB  100m


Height of rock CD  ' h ' m
Angle of elevation of top of root from top of tower   30
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Angle of elevation of top of root from bottom of tower   45


The above data is represented in form of figure as shown
Draw AX  CD
XD  AB  100m
XA  DB.
CX
In CXA, tan  
AX
CX
 tan 30 
DB
 DB  C  3 …………..(1)
CD 100  CX
In CBD, tan   
DB DB
100  CX
tan 45   DB  100  CX ……………(2)
DB
From (1) and (2)
100  CX  C  3  C   
3  1  100

100 3 1
 CX  
2 1 3 1
CX  50  3 1
Height of hill  100  50    
3  1  150 3  3 mts.

65. As observed from the top of a 150 m tall light house, the angles of depression of two ships
approaching it are 30° and 45°. If one ship is directly behind the other, find the distance
between the two ships
Sol:

Height of light house AB  150mts.


Let S1 and S 2 be two ships approaching each other.
Angle of depression of S1 ,   50
Angle of depression of S 2 ,   50
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

Distance between ships  S1S2 .


The above data is represented in the form of figure as shown
In ABS2
AB
tan  
BS 2
150
tan 45 
BS2
BS2  150m.
In ABS1
AB
tan  
BS1
150
tan 30 
BS1
BS1  150 3m.
S1S2  BS1  BS2  150  
3  1 mts

Distance between ships  150  


3  1 mts.

66. A flag-staff stands on the top of a 5 m high tower. From a point on the ground, the angle of
elevation of the top of the flag-staff is 60° and from the same point, the angle of elevation
of the top of the tower is 45°. Find the height of the flag-staff.
Sol:

Height of tower  AB  5m.


Height of flagstaff BC  ' h ' m
Angle of elevation of top of flagstaff a  60
Angle of elevation of bottom of flagstaff   45
The above data is represented in form of figure as shown
AB 5
In ADB tan    tan 45 
DA DA
 DA  5m.
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

AC
In ADC, tan   ,
AD
AB  BC h  5
tan 60  
AD 5
h5
3
5
h5  5 3  h  5  
3  1  5  0  732  3  65 meters height of flagstaff  3  65 meters

67. The angles of elevation of the top of a tower from two points at a distance of 4 m and 9 m
from the base of the tower and in the same straight line with it are complementary. Prove
that the height of the tower is 6m.
Sol:

Height of tower AB  ' h ' meters


Let point C be 4 meters from B, Angle of elevation be  given point D be 9 meters from B.
Angle of elevation be  . given  ,  are complementary,     90    90  
required to prove that h  6 meters
The above data is represented in the form of figure as shown
AB
In ABC , tan  
BC
h
tan  
4
h  4 tan  ………………(1)
AB h
In ABD, tan   
BD 9
h
tan  90    
9
h  4 tan  ………………(2)
Multiply (1) and (2) h  h  4 tan   9cot 
 36  tan   cot  
h 2  36
h  36  6 meters.
Class X Chapter 12 – Trigonometry Maths

height of tower  6 meters.

68. The angles of depression of two ships from the top of a light house and on the same side of
it are found to be 45° and 30° respectively. If the ships are 200 m apart, find the height of
the light house.
Sol:

Height of light house AB  ' h ' meters


Let S1 and S 2 be ships distance between ships S1S 2
Angle of depression of S1   30
Angle of depression of S 2    45
The above data is represented in form of figure as shown
In ABS2
AB
tan  
BC2
h
tan 45 
BS2
BS2  h ………..(1)
In ABS1
AB
tan  
BS1
h
tan 30 
BS2
BS1  h 3 ………..(2)
(2) and (1)  BS1  BS2  h  3 1 
 200  h  
3 1

3  1 200
h
200
3 1

3 1

2
 
3  1  100  
3  1 meters

h  100 1 732  1  273  2 meters


Height of light house  273  2 meters
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

Exercise – 13.1

1. The probability that it will rain tomorrow is 0.85. What is the probability that it will not
rain tomorrow?
Sol:
Let E be the event of happening of rain
P(E) is given as 0.85
𝐸̅ ⟶ 𝑛𝑜𝑡 ℎ𝑎𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑜𝑓 𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛
P(𝐸̅ ) = 1 – P(E) = 1 – 0.85 = 0.15
∴ P(not happening of rain) = 0.15

2. A die is thrown. Find the probability of getting:


(i) a prime number
(ii) 2 or 4
(iii) a multiple of 2 or 3
(iv) an even prime number
(v) a number greater than 5
(vi) a number lying between 2 and 6
Sol:
(i) Total no of possible outcomes = 6 {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}
E ⟶ Event of getting a prime no.
No. of favorable outcomes = 3 {2, 3, 5}
No.of favorable outcomes
𝑃(𝐸) = Total no.of possible outcomes
3 1
P(E) = 6 = 2
(ii) E ⟶ Event of getting 2 or 4.
No. of favorable outcomes = 2 {2, 4}
Total no.of possible outcomes = 6
2 1
Then, P(E) = 6 = 3
(iii) E ⟶ Event of getting a multiple of 2 or 3
No. of favorable outcomes = 4 {2, 3, 4, 6}
Total no.of possible outcomes = 6
4 2
Then, P(E) = 6 = 3
(iv) E ⟶ Event of getting an even prime no.
No. of favorable outcomes = 1 {2}
Total no.of possible outcomes = 6 {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}
1
P(E) = 6
(v) E ⟶ Event of getting a no. greater than 5.
No. of favorable outcomes = 1 {6}
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

Total no.of possible outcomes = 6


1
P(E) = 6
(vi) E ⟶ Event of getting a no. lying between 2 and 6.
No. of favorable outcomes = 3 {3, 4, 5}
Total no.of possible outcomes = 6
3 1
P(E) = 6 = 2

3. In a simultaneous throw of a pair of dice, find the probability of getting:


(i) 8 as the sum (iv) a doublet of odd numbers
(ii) a doublet (v) a sum greater than 9
(iii) a doublet of prime numbers (vi) an even number on first
(vii) an even number on one and a multiple of 3 on the other
(viii) neither 9 nor 1 1 as the sum of the numbers on the faces
(ix) a sum less than 6 (xi) a sum more than 7
(x) a sum less than 7 (xii) at least once
(xiii) a number other than 5 on any dice.
Sol:
In a throw of pair of dice, total no of possible outcomes = 36 (6 × 6) which are
(1, 1) (1, 2) (1, 3) (1, 4) (1, 5) (1, 6)
(2, 1) (2, 2) (2, 3) (2, 4) (2, 5) (2, 6)
(3, 1) (3, 2) (3, 3) (3, 4) (3, 5) (3, 6)
(4, 1) (4, 2) (4, 3) (4, 4) (4, 5) (4, 6)
(5, 1) (5, 2) (5, 3) (5, 4) (5, 5) (5, 6)
(6, 1) (6, 2) (6, 3) (6, 4) (6, 5) (6, 6)
(i) Let E be event of getting the sum as 8
No. of favorable outcomes = 5 {(2, 6) (3, 5) (4, 4) (5, 3) (6, 2)}
No.of favorable outcomes
We know that, Probability P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
5
P(E) = 36
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting a doublet
No. of favorable outcomes = 5 {(1, 1) (2, 2) (3, 3) (4, 4) (5, 5) (6, 6)}
Total no. of possible outcomes = 36
6 1
P(E) = 36 = 6
(iii) E ⟶ event of getting a doublet of prime no’s
No. of favorable outcomes = 3 {(2, 2) (3, 3) (5, 5)}
Total no. of possible outcomes = 36
3 1
P(E) = 36 = 12
(iv) E ⟶ event of getting a doublet of odd no’s
No. of favorable outcomes = 3 {(1, 1) (3, 3) (5, 5)}
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

Total no. of possible outcomes = 36


3 1
P(E) = 36 = 12
(v) E ⟶ event of getting a sum greater than 9
No. of favorable outcomes = 6 {(4, 6) (5, 5) (5, 6) (6, 4) (6, 5) (6, 6)}
Total no. of possible outcomes = 36
6 1
P(E) = 36 = 6
(vi) E ⟶ event of getting an even no. on first
No. of favorable outcomes = 18 {(2, 1) (2, 2) (2, 3) (2, 4) (2, 5) (2, 6), (4, 1) , (4, 2)
, (4, 3) , (4, 4) , (4, 5) , (4, 6) , (6, 1) , (6, 2) , (6, 3) , (6, 4) , (6, 5) , (6, 6)}
Total no. of possible outcomes = 36
18 1
P(E) = 36 = 2
(vii) E ⟶ event of getting an even no. on one and a multiple of 3 on other
No. of favorable outcomes = 11 {(2, 3) (2, 6) (4, 3) (4, 6) (6, 3) (6, 6), (3, 2), (3, 4),
(3, 4) , (3, 6) , (6, 2) , (6, 4)}
Total no. of possible outcomes = 36
11
P(E) = 36
(viii) 𝐸 ⟶ event of getting neither 9 nor 11 as the sum of numbers on faces
E ⟶ getting either 9 or 11 as the sum of no’s on faces
No. of favorable outcomes = 6 {(3, 6) (4, 5) (5, 4) (6, 3) (5, 6) (6, 5)}
Total no. of possible outcomes = 36
6 1
P(E) = 36 = 6
1 5
P(𝐸) = 1 − 𝑃 = 1 − 6 = 6
(ix) E ⟶ event of getting a sum less than 6
No. of favorable outcomes = 10 {(1, 1) (1, 2) (1, 3) (1, 4) (2, 1) (2, 2) , (2, 3) , (3, 1)
, (3, 2) , (4, 1)}
Total no. of possible outcomes = 36
10 5
P(E) = 36 = 18
(x) E ⟶ event of getting a sum less than 7
No. of favorable outcomes = 15 {(1, 1) (1, 2) (1, 3) (1, 4) (1, 5) (2, 1), (2, 2) (2, 3)
(2, 4) (3, 1) (3, 2) (3, 3) (4, 1) (4, 2) (5, 1)}
Total no. of possible outcomes = 36
15 5
P(E) = 36 = 12
(xi) E ⟶ event of getting a sum more than 7
No. of favorable outcomes = 15 {(2, 6) (3, 5) (3, 6) (4, 4) (4, 5) (4, 6), (5, 3) (5, 4)
(5, 5) (5, 6) (6, 2) (6, 3) (6, 4) (6, 5) (6, 6)}
Total no. of possible outcomes = 36
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
15 5
P(E) = 36 = 12
(xii) E ⟶ event of getting a 1 at least once
No. of favorable outcomes = 11 {(1, 1) (1, 2) (1, 3) (1, 4) (1, 5) (1, 6), (2, 1) (3, 1)
(4, 1) (5, 1) (6, 1)}
Total no. of possible outcomes = 36
11
P(E) = 36
(xiii) E ⟶ event of getting a no other than 5 on any dice
No. of favourable outcomes = 25 {(1, 1) (1, 2) (1, 3) (1, 4) (1, 6) (2, 1), (2, 2) (2, 3)
(2, 4) (2, 6) (3, 1) (3, 2) (3, 3) (3, 4) (3, 6) (4, 1) (4, 2) (4, 3) (4, 4) (4, 6) (6, 1) (6, 2)
(6, 3) (6, 4) (6, 6)}
Total no. of possible outcomes = 36
25
P(E) = 36

4. Three coins are tossed together. Find the probability of getting:


(i) exactly two heads (iii) at least one head and one tail
(ii) at least two heads (iv) no tails
Sol:
When 3 coins are tossed together,
Total no. of possible outcomes = 8 {HHH, HHT, HTH, HTT, THH,THT, TTH, TTT}
No.of favorable outcomes
(i) Probability of an event =
Total no.of possible outcomes
Let E ⟶ event of getting exactly two heads
No. of favourable outcomes = 3 {HHT, HTH, THH}
Total no. of possible outcomes = 8
3
P(E) = 8
(ii) E ⟶ getting at least 2 Heads
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {HHH, HHT, HTH, THH}
Total no. of possible outcomes = 8
4 1
P(E) = 8 = 2
(iii) E⟶ getting at least one Head & one Tail
No. of favourable outcomes = 6 {HHT, HTH, HTT, THH, THT, TTH}
Total no. of possible outcomes = 8
6 3
P(E) = 8 = 4
(iv) E ⟶ getting no tails
No. of favourable outcomes = 1 {HHH}
Total no. of possible outcomes = 8
1
P(E) = 8
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

5. What is the probability that an ordinary year has 53 Sundays?


Sol:
Ordinary year has 365 days
365 days = 52 weeks + 1 day
That 1 day may be Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat
Total no. of possible outcomes = 7
Let E ⟶ event of getting 53 Sundays
No. of favourable outcomes = 1 {Sun}
No.of favorable outcomes 1
P(E) = =7
Total no.of possible outcomes

6. What is the probability that a leap year has 53 Sundays and 53 Mondays?
Sol:
A leap year has 366 days
366 days = 52 weeks + 2 days
That 2 days may be (Sun, Mon) (Mon, Tue) (Tue, Wed) (Wed, Thu) (Thu, Fri) (Fri, Sat)
(Sat, Sun)
Let E ⟶ event of getting 53 Sundays & 53 Mondays.
No. of favourable outcomes = 1 {(Sun, Mon)}
Since 52 weeks has 52 Sundays & 52 Mondays & the extra 2 days must be Sunday &
Monday.
Total no. of possible outcomes = 7
No.of favorable outcomes 1
P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 7

7. A and B throw a pair of dice. If A throws 9, find B’s chance of throwing a higher number.
Sol:
When a pair of dice are thrown, then total no. of possible outcomes = 6 × 6 = 36, which are
{ (1, 1) (1, 2) (1, 3) (1, 4) (1, 5) (1, 6)
(2, 1) (2, 2) (2, 3) (2, 4) (2, 5) (2, 6)
(3, 1) (3, 2) (3, 3) (3, 4) (3, 5) (3, 6)
(4, 1) (4, 2) (4, 3) (4, 4) (4, 5) (4, 6)
(5, 1) (5, 2) (5, 3) (5, 4) (5, 5) (5, 6)
(6, 1) (6, 2) (6, 3) (6, 4) (6, 5) (6, 6) }
E ⟶ event of throwing a no. higher than 9.
No. of favourable outcomes = 6 {(4, 6) (5, 5) (6, 4) (5, 6) (6, 5) (6, 6)}
No.of favorable outcomes
We know that P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
6 1
i.e., P(E) = 36 = 6
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

8. Two unbiased dice are thrown. Find the probability that the total of the numbers on the dice
is greater than 10.
Sol:
When a pair of dice are thrown, then total no. of possible outcomes = 6 × 6 = 36
let E ⟶ event of getting sum on dice greater than 10
then no of favourable outcomes = 3 {(5, 6) (6, 5) (6, 6)}
No.of favorable outcomes
we know that, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
3 1
i.e., P(E) = 36 = 12

9. A card is drawn at random from a pack of 52 cards. Find the probability that card drawn is
(i) a black king (ix) other than an ace
(ii) either a black card or a king (x) a ten
(iii) black and a king (xi) a spade
(iv) a jack, queen or a king (xii) a black card
(v) neither a heart nor a king (xiii) the seven of clubs
(vi) spade or an ace (xiv) jack
(vii) neither an ace nor a king (xv) the ace of spades
(viii) Neither a red card nor a queen. (xvi) a queen
Sol:
Total no. of outcomes = 52 {52 cards}
(i) E⟶ event of getting a black king
No of favourable outcomes = 2{king of spades & king of clubs}
No.of favorable outcomes 2 1
We know that, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 52 = 26
(ii) E⟶ event of getting either a black card or a king.
No. of favourable outcomes = 26 + 2 {13 spades, 13 clubs, king of hearts &
diamonds}
26+2 28 7
P(E) = = 52 = 13
52
(iii) E⟶ event of getting black & a king.
No. of favourable outcomes = 2 {king of spades & clubs}
2 1
P(E) = =
52 26
(iv) E⟶ event of getting a jack, queen or a king
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 + 4 + 4 = 12 {4 jacks, 4 queens & 4 kings}
12 3
P(E) = 52 = 13
(v) E⟶ event of getting neither a heart nor a king.
No. of favourable outcomes = 52 – 13 – 3 = 36 {since we have 13 hearts, 3 kings
each of spades, clubs & diamonds}
36 9
P(E) = 52 = 13
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

(vi) E⟶ event of getting spade or an all.


No. of favourable outcomes = 13 + 3 = 16 {13 spades & 3 aces each of hearts,
diamonds & clubs}
16 4
P(E) = 52 = 13
(vii) E⟶ event of getting neither an ace nor a king.
No. of favourable outcomes = 52 – 4 – 4 = 44 {Since we have 4 aces & 4 kings}
44 11
P(E) = 52 = 13
(viii) E⟶ event of getting neither a red card nor a queen.
No. of favourable outcomes = 52 – 26 – 2 = 24 {Since we have 26 red cards of
hearts & diamonds & 2 queens each of heart & diamond}
24 6
P(E) = 52 = 13
(ix) E⟶ event of getting card other than an ace.
No. of favourable outcomes = 52 – 4 = 48 {Since we have 4 ace cards}
48 12
P(E) = 52 = 13
(x) E⟶ event of getting a ten.
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {10 of spades, clubs, diamonds & hearts}
4 1
P(E) = 52 = 13
(xi) E⟶ event of getting a spade.
No. of favourable outcomes = 13 {13 spades}
13 1
P(E) = 52 = 24
(xii) E⟶ event of getting a black card.
No. of favourable outcomes = 26 {13 cards of spades & 13 cards of clubs}
26 1
P(E) = 52 = 2
(xiii) E⟶ event of getting 7 of clubs.
No. of favourable outcomes = 1 {7 of clubs}
1
P(E) =
52
(xiv) E⟶ event of getting a jack.
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {4 jack cards}
4 1
P(E) = 52 = 13
(xv) E⟶ event of getting the ace of spades.
No. of favourable outcomes = 1{ace of spades}
1
P(E) = 52
(xvi) E⟶ event of getting a queen.
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {4 queens}
4 1
P(E) = 52 = 13
(xvii) E⟶ event of getting a heart.
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

No. of favourable outcomes = 13 {13 hearts}


13 1
P(E) = 52 = 4
(xviii) E⟶ event of getting a red card.
No. of favourable outcomes = 26 {13 hearts, 13 diamonds}
26 1
P(E) = 52 = 2

10. In a lottery of 50 tickets numbered 1 to 50, one ticket is drawn. Find the probability that the
drawn ticket bears a prime number.
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 50 {1, 2, 3, …. , 50}
E⟶ event of getting a prime no.
No. of favourable outcomes = 15
{2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19, 23, 29, 31, 37, 41, 43, 47}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
15 3
i.e. P(E) = 50 = 10

11. An urn contains 10 red and 8 white balls. One ball is drawn at random. Find the probability
that the ball drawn is white.
Sol:
Total no of possible outcomes = 18 {10 red balls, 8 white balls}
E ⟶ event of drawing white ball
No. of favourable outcomes = 8 {8 white balls}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
8 4
= 18 = 9

12. A bag contains 3 red balls, 5 black balls and 4 white balls. A ball is drawn at random from
the bag. What is the probability that the ball drawn is:
(i) White (iii) Black
(ii) Red (iv) Not red
Sol:
Total number of possible outcomes = 12 {3 red balls, 5 black balls & 4 white balls}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting white ball
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {4 white balls}
4 1
Probability, P(E) = 12 = 3
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting red ball
No. of favourable outcomes = 5 {3 red balls}
3 1
P (E) = 12 = 4
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

(iii) E ⟶ event of getting black ball


No. of favourable outcomes = 5 {5 black balls}
5
P (E) = 12
(iv) E ⟶ event of getting red
No. of favourable outcomes = 3 {3 black balls}
3 1
P(E) = 12 = 4
(𝐸̅ ) ⟶ event of not getting red.
P(𝐸̅ ) = 1 – P(E)
1
=1–4
3
=4

13. What is the probability that a number selected from the numbers 1, 2, 3, ..., 15 is a multiple
of 4?
Sol:
Total no. possible outcomes = 15 {1, 2, 3, …. , 15}
E ⟶ event of getting a multiple of 4
No. of favourable outcomes = 3 {4, 8, 12}
No.of favorable outcomes 3 1
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 15 = 5

14. A bag contains 6 red, 8 black and 4 white balls. A ball is drawn at random. What is the
probability that ball drawn is not black?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 18 {6 red, 8 black, 4 white}
Let E ⟶ event of drawing black ball.
No. of favourable outcomes = 8 {8 black balls}
No.of favorable outcomes 8 4
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 18 = 9
𝐸̅ ⟶ event of not drawing black ball
𝑃(𝐸̅ ) = 1 − 𝑃(𝐸)
4 5
=1− =
9 9

15. A bag contains 5 white and 7 red balls. One ball is drawn at random. What is the
probability that ball drawn is white?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 12 {5 white, 7 red}
E ⟶ event of drawing white ball.
No. of favorable outcomes = 5 {white balls are 5}
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
5
P(E) = 12

16. Tickets numbered from 1 to 20 are mixed up and a ticket is drawn at random. What is the
probability that the ticket drawn has a number which is a multiple of 3 or 7?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 20 {1, 2, 3, …. , 20}
E ⟶ event of drawing ticket with no multiple of 3 or 7
No. of favourable outcomes = 8 which are {3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 7, 14}
No.of favorable outcomes 8 2
Probability, P(E) = = =
Total no.of possible outcomes 20 5

17. In a lottery there are 10 prizes and 25 blanks. What is the probability of getting a prize?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 35 {10 prizes, 25 blanks}
E ⟶ event of getting prize
No. of favourable outcomes = 10 {10 prizes}
No.of favorable outcomes 10 2
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 35 = 7

18. If the probability of winning a game is 0.3, what is the probability of losing it?
Sol:
E ⟶ event of winning a game
P(E) is given as 0.3
(𝐸̅ ) ⟶ event of loosing the game
we know that P(E) + P(𝐸̅ ) = 1
𝑃(𝐸̅ ) = 1 − 𝑃(𝐸)
= 1 – 0.3 = 0.7

19. A bag contains 5 black, 7 red and 3 white balls. A ball is drawn from the bag at random.
Find the probability that the ball drawn is:
(i) Red (ii) black or white (iii) not black
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 15
{5 black, 7 red & 3 white balls}
(i) E ⟶ event of drawing red ball
No. of favorable outcomes = 7 {7 red balls}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
7
P(E) = 15
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

(ii) E ⟶ event of drawing black or white


No. of favourable outcomes = 8 {5 black & 3 white}
8
P(E) = 15
(iii) E ⟶ event of drawing black ball
No. of favourable outcomes = 5 {5 black balls}
5 1
P (E) = 15 = 3
𝐸̅ ⟶ 𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑑𝑟𝑎𝑤𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑏𝑙𝑎𝑐𝑘 𝑏𝑎𝑙𝑙
P (𝐸̅ ) = 1 − 𝑃(𝐸)
1 2
=1−3=3

20. A bag contains 4 red, 5 black and 6 white balls. A ball is drawn from the bag at random.
Find the probability that the ball drawn is:
(i) White (iii) Not black
(ii) Red (iv) Red or white
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 15 {4 red, 5 black, 6 white balls}
(i) E ⟶ event of drawing white ball.
No. of favourable outcomes = 6 {6 white}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
6 2
P(E) = 15 = 5
(ii) E ⟶ event of drawing red ball
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {4 red balls}
4
P(E) = 15
(iii) E ⟶ event of drawing black ball
No. of favourable outcomes = 5 {5 black balls}
5 1
P(E) = 15 = 3
𝐸̅ ⟶ event of not drawing black ball
1 2
𝑃(𝐸̅ ) = 1 − 3 = 3
(iv) E ⟶ event of drawing red or white ball
No. of favourable outcomes = 10 {4 red & 6 white}
10 2
P(E) = 15 = 3

21. A black die and a white die are thrown at the same time. Write all the possible outcomes.
What is the probability?
(i) that the sum of the two numbers that turn up is 8?
(ii) of obtaining a total of 6?
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

(iii) of obtaining a total of 10?


(iv) of obtaining the same number on both dice?
(v) of obtaining a total more than 9?
(vi) that the sum of the two numbers appearing on the top of the dice is 13?
(vii) that the sum of the numbers appearing on the top of the dice is less than or equal to
12?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes when 2 dice are thrown = 6 × 6 = 36 which are
{ (1, 1) (1, 2) (1, 3) (1, 4) (1, 5) (1, 6)
(2, 1) (2, 2) (2, 3) (2, 4) (2, 5) (2, 6)
(3, 1) (3, 2) (3, 3) (3, 4) (3, 5) (3, 6)
(4, 1) (4, 2) (4, 3) (4, 4) (4, 5) (4, 6)
(5, 1) (5, 2) (5, 3) (5, 4) (5, 5) (5, 6)
(6, 1) (6, 2) (6, 3) (6, 4) (6, 5) (6, 6) }
(i) E ⟶ event of getting sum that turn up is 8
No. of possible outcomes = 36
No. of favourable outcomes = 5 {(2, 6) (3, 5) (4, 4) (5, 3) (6, 2)}
No.of favorable outcomes 5
P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 36
(ii) Let E ⟶ event of obtaining a total of 6
No. of favourable outcomes = 5
{(1, 5) (2, 4) (3, 3) (4, 2) (5, 1)}
5
P(E) = 36
(iii) Let E ⟶ event of obtaining a total of 10.
No. of favourable outcomes = 3 {(4, 6) (5, 5) (6, 4)}
3 1
P(E) = 36 = 12
(iv) Let E ⟶ event of obtaining the same no. on both dice
No. of favourable outcomes = 6 {(1, 1) (2, 2) (3, 3) (4, 4) (5, 5) (6, 6)}
3 1
P(E) = 36 = 12
(v) E ⟶ event of obtaining a total more than 9
No. of favourable outcomes = 6 {(4, 6) (5, 5) (6, 4) (5, 6) (6, 5) (6, 6)}
6 1
P(E) = 36 = 6
(vi) The maximum sum is 12 (6 on 1st + 6 on 2nd)
So, getting a sum of no’s appearing on the top of the two dice as 13 is an impossible
event.
∴ Probability is 0
(vii) Since, the sum of the no’s appearing on top of 2 dice is always less than or equal to
12, it is a sure event.
Probability of sure event is 1.
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

So, the required probability is 1.

22. One card is drawn from a well shuffled deck of 52 cards. Find the probability of getting:
(i) a king of red suit (iv) a queen of black suit
(ii) a face card (v) a jack of hearts
(iii) a red face card (vi) a spade
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 52 (52 cards)
(i) E ⟶ event of getting a king of red suit
No. of favourable outcomes = 2 {king heart & king of diamond}
No.of favorable outcomes 2 1
P(E), = = =
Total no.of possible outcomes 52 26
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting face card
No. of favourable outcomes = 12 {4 kings, 4 queens & 4 jacks}
12 3
P(E) = 52 = 13
(iii) E ⟶ event of getting red face card
No. favourable outcomes = 6 { kings, queens, jacks of hearts & diamonds}
6 3
P(E) = 26 = 26
(iv) E ⟶ event of getting a queen of black suit
No. favourable outcomes = 6 { kings, queens, jacks of hearts & diamonds}
6 3
P(E) = =
26 26
(v) E ⟶ event of getting red face card
No. favourable outcomes = 6 { queen of spades & clubs}
1
P(E) = 52
(vi) E ⟶ event of getting a spade
No. favourable outcomes = 13 {13 spades}
13 1
P(E) = 52 = 4

23. Five cards—ten, jack, queen, king, and an ace of diamonds are shuffled face downwards.
One card is picked at random.
(i) What is the probability that the card is a queen?
(ii) If a king is drawn first and put aside, what is the probability that the second card
picked up is the ace?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 5 {5 cards}
(i) E ⟶ event of drawing queen
No. favourable outcomes = 1 {1 queen card}
No.of favorable outcomes 1
P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 5
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

(ii) When king is drawn and put aside, total no. of remaining cards = 4
Total no. of possible outcomes = 4
E ⟶ event of drawing ace card
No. favourable outcomes = 1 {1 ace card}
1
P(E) = 4

24. A bag contains 3 red balls and 5 black balls. A ball is drawn at random from the bag. What
is the probability that the ball drawn is:
(i) Red
(ii) Black
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 8 {3 red, 5 black}
(i) Let E ⟶ event of drawing red ball.
No. favourable outcomes = 1 {1 ace card}
No.of favorable outcomes 3
P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 8
(ii) Let E ⟶ event of drawing black ball.
No. favourable outcomes = 5 {5 black balls}
5
P(E) = 8

25. A bag contains cards which are numbered from 2 to 90. A card is drawn at random from
the bag. Find the probability that it bears.
(i) a two digit number
(ii) a number which is a perfect square
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 89 {2, 3, 4, …., 90}
(i) Let E ⟶ event of getting a 2 digit no.
No. favourable outcomes = 81 {10, 11, 12, 13, ….., 80}
No.of favorable outcomes 81
P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 89
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting a no. which is perfect square
No. favourable outcomes = 8 {4, 9, 16, 25, 36, 49, 64, 81}
8
P(E) = 89

26. A game of chance consists of spinning an arrow which is equally likely to come to rest
pointing to one of the number, 1, 2, 3, ..., 12 as shown in Fig. below. What is the
probability that it will point to:
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

(i) 10? (iii) a number which is multiple of 3?


(ii) an odd number? (iv) an even number?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 12 {1, 2, 3,…., 12}
(i) Let E ⟶ event of pointing 10
No. favourable outcomes = 1 {10}
No.of favorable outcomes 1
P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 12
(ii) Let E ⟶ event of pointing at an odd no.
No. favourable outcomes = 6 {1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11}
6 1
P(E) = 12 = 2
(iii) Let E ⟶ event of pointing at a no. multiple of 3
No. favourable outcomes = 4 {3, 6, 9, 12}
4 1
P(E) = 12 = 3
(iv) Let E ⟶ event of pointing at an even no.
No. favourable outcomes = 6 {2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12}
6 1
P(E) = 12 = 2

27. Two customers are visiting a particular shop in the same week (Monday to Saturday). Each
is equally likely to visit the shop on any one day as on another. What is the probability that
both will visit the shop on:
(i) the same day? (ii) different days? (iii) consecutive days?
Sol:
Total no. of days to visit the shop = 6 {Mon to Sat}
Total no. possible outcomes = 6 × 6 = 36
i.e. two customers can visit the shop in 36 ways
(i) E⟶ event of visiting shop on the same day.
No. of favourable outcomes = 6 which are (M, M) (T, T) (Th, Th) (F, F) (S, S)
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
6 1
P(E) = 36 = 6
(ii) E⟶ event of visiting shop on the same day.
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

E⟶ event of visiting shop on the different days.


1
In above bit, we calculated P(E) as 6
We know that, P(E) + P(𝐸̅ ) = 1
P(𝐸̅ ) = 1 – P(E)
1 5
=1−6=6
(iii) E⟶ event of visiting shop on c
No. of favourable outcomes = 6 which are (M, T) (T, W) (W, Th) (Th, F) (F, S)
5
P(E) = 36

28. In a class, there are 18 girls and 16 boys. The class teacher wants to choose one pupil for
class monitor. What she does, she writes the name of each pupil on a card and puts them
into a basket and mixes thoroughly. A child is asked to pick one card from the basket. What
is the probability that the name written on the card is:
(i) the name of a girl
(ii) the name of a boy
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 34 (18 girls, 16 boys)
(i) E ⟶ event of getting girl name
No. of favorable outcomes = 18 (18 girls)
No.of favorable outcomes 18 9
Probability, P(E) = = =
Total no.of possible outcomes 34 17
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting boy name
No. of favorable outcomes = 16 (16 boys)
16 8
P(E) = 34 = 17

29. Why is tossing a coin considered to be a fair way of deciding which team should choose
ends in a game of cricket?
Sol:
No. of possible outcomes while tossing a coin = 2 {1 head & 1 tail}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability = Total no.of possible outcomes
1
P(getting head) = 2
1
P(getting tail) = 2
Since probability of two events are equal, these are called equally like events.
Hence, tossing a coin is considered to be a fair way of deciding which team should choose
ends in a game of cricket.
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

30. What is the probability that a number selected at random from the number 1,2,2,3,3,3, 4, 4,
4, 4 will be their average?
Sol:
Given no’s are 1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 4
Total no. of possible outcomes = 10
𝑠𝑢𝑚 𝑜𝑓 𝑛𝑜′𝑠 1+2+2+3+3+3+4+4+4+4 30
Average of the no’s = = = 10 = 3
𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑛𝑜′𝑠 10
E ⟶ event of getting 3
No. of favourable outcomes = 3 {3, 3, 3}
No.of favorable outcomes
P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
3
P(E) =
10

31. The faces of a red cube and a yellow cube are numbered from 1 to 6. Both cubes are rolled.
What is the probability that the top face of each cube will have the same number?
Sol:
Total no. of outcomes when both cubes are rolled = 6 × 6 = 36 which are
{ (1, 1) (1, 2) (1, 3) (1, 4) (1, 5) (1, 6)
(2, 1) (2, 2) (2, 3) (2, 4) (2, 5) (2, 6)
(3, 1) (3, 2) (3, 3) (3, 4) (3, 5) (3, 6)
(4, 1) (4, 2) (4, 3) (4, 4) (4, 5) (4, 6)
(5, 1) (5, 2) (5, 3) (5, 4) (5, 5) (5, 6)
(6, 1) (6, 2) (6, 3) (6, 4) (6, 5) (6, 6) }
E ⟶ event of getting same no. on each cube
No. of favourable outcomes = 6 which are
{ (1, 1) (2, 2) (3, 3) (4, 4) (5, 5) (6, 6)}
No.of favorable outcomes 6 1
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 36 = 6

32. The probability of selecting a green marble at random from a jar that contains only green,
1
white and yellow marbles is 4. The probability of selecting a white marble at random from
1
the same jar is 3 . If this jar contains 10 yellow marbles. What is the total number of
marbles in the jar?
Sol:
Let the no. of green marbles = x
The no. of white marbles = y
No. of yellow marbles = 10
Total no. of possible outcomes = x + y + 10 (total no. of marbles)
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
1 𝑥
Probability (green marble) = 4 = 𝑥+𝑦+10
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

⇒ x + y + 10 = 4x
⇒ 3x – y – 10 = 0 …..(i)
1 𝑦
Probability (white marble) = 3 = 𝑥+𝑦+10
⇒ x + y 10 = 3y
⇒ x – 2y + 10 = 0 ….(ii)
⇒ 3x – 6y + 30 = 0 ….(iii)
Multiplying by 3,
Sub (i) from (iii), we get
−6y + y + 30 + 10 = 0
⇒ −5y + 40 = 0
⇒ 5y = 40
⇒y=8
Subs. Y in (i), 3x – 8 – 10 = 0
3x – 18 = 0
18
x= =6
3
Total no. of marbles in jar = x + y + 10 = 6 + 8 + 10 = 24

33. There are 30 cards, of same size, in a bag on which numbers 1 to 30 are written. One card
is taken out of the bag at random. Find the probability that the number on the selected card
is not divisible by 3.
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 30 {1, 2, 3, … 30}
E ⟶ event of getting no. divisible by 3.
No. of favourable outcomes = 10 {3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
10 1
P(E) = 30 = 3
𝐸̅ ⟶ event of getting no. not divisible by 3.
P(𝐸̅ ) = 1 – P(E)
1 2
=1-3=3

34. A bag contains 5 red, 8 white and 7 black balls. A ball is drawn at random from the bag.
Find the probability that the drawn ball is
(i) red or white
(ii) not black
(iii) neither white nor black.
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 20 {5 red, 8 white & 7 black}
(i) E ⟶ event of drawing red or white ball
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

No. of favourable outcomes = 13 {5 red, 8 white}


No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
13
P(E) = 20
(ii) Let E ⟶ be event of getting black ball
No. of favourable outcomes = 13 {5 red, 8 white}
7
P(E) = 20
(𝐸̅ )⟶ event of not getting black ball
𝑃(𝐸̅ ) = 1 – P(E)
7 13
= 1 − 20 = 20
(iii) Let E ⟶ be event of getting neither white nor black ball
No. of favourable outcomes = 20 – 8 – 7 = 5 {total balls – no. of white balls – no. of
black balls}
5 1
P(E) = 20 = 4

35. Find the probability that a number selected from the number 1 to 25 is not a prime number
when each of the given numbers is equally likely to be selected.
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 25 {1, 2, 3, … 25}
E ⟶ event of getting a prime no.
No. of favourable outcomes = 9 {2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19, 23}
No.of favorable outcomes 9
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 25
(𝐸̅ ) ⟶ 𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑔𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑎 𝑝𝑟𝑖𝑚𝑒 𝑛𝑜.
9 16
𝑃(𝐸̅ ) = 1 − 𝑃(𝐸) = 1 − = 25 25

36. A bag contains 8 red, 6 white and 4 black balls. A ball is drawn at random from the bag.
Find the probability that the drawn ball is
(i) Red or white
(ii) Not black
(iii) Neither white nor black
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 8 + 6 + 4 = 18 {8 red, 6 white, 4 black}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting red or white ball
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {4 black balls}
4 2
P(E) = 18 = 9
(𝐸̅ ) ⟶ 𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑔𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑏𝑙𝑎𝑐𝑘 𝑏𝑎𝑙𝑙
2 7
P(𝐸̅ ) = 1 − 𝑃(𝐸) = 1 − 9 = 9
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

(ii) E ⟶ event of getting neither white nor black.


No. of favourable outcomes = 15 – 6 – 4 = 8 {Total balls – no. of white balls – no.
of black balls}
8 4
P(E) = 18 = 9

37. Find the probability that a number selected at random from the numbers 1, 2, 3, ..., 35 is a
(i) Prime number (ii) Multiple of 7 (iii) Multiple of 3 or 5
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 35 {1, 2, 3, …. 35}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting a prime no.
No. of favourable outcomes = 11 {2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19, 23, 29, 31}
No.of favorable outcomes 11
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 35
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting no. which is multiple of 7
No. of favourable outcomes = 5 {7, 14, 21, 28, 35}
5 1
P(E) = 35 = 7
(iii) E ⟶ event of getting no which is multiple of 3 or 5
No. of favourable outcomes = 16 {3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30, 33, 5, 10, 20,
25, 35}
16
P(E) = 35

38. From a pack of 52 playing cards Jacks, queens, kings and aces of red colour are removed.
From the remaining, a card is drawn at random. Find the probability that the card drawn is
(i) A black queen
(ii) A red card
(iii) A black jack
(iv) a picture card (Jacks, queens and kings are picture cards)
Sol:
Total no. of cards = 52
All jacks, queens & kings, aces of red colour are removed.
Total no. of possible outcomes = 52 – 2 – 2 – 2 – 2 = 44 {remaining cards}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting a black queen
No. of favourable outcomes = 2 {queen of spade & club}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
2 1
P(E) = 44 = 22
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting a red card
No. of favourable outcomes = 26 – 8 = 18 {total red cards – jacks, queens, kings,
aces of red colour}
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
18 9
P(E) = 44 = 22
(iii) E ⟶ event of getting a black jack
No. of favourable outcomes = 2 {jack of club & spade}
2 1
P(E) = 44 = 22
(iv) E ⟶ event of getting a picture card
No. of favourable outcomes = 6 {2 jacks, 2 kings & 2 queens of black colour}
6 3
P(E) = 44 = 22

39. A bag contains lemon flavoured candies only. Malini takes out one candy without looking
into the bag. What is the probability that she takes out
(i) an orange flavoured candy?
(ii) a lemon flavoured candy?
Sol:
(i) The bag contains lemon flavoured candies only. So, the event that malini will take
out an orange flavoured candy is an impossible event. Since, probability of
impossible event is O, P(an orange flavoured candy) = 0
(ii) The bag contains lemon flavoured candies only. So, the event that malini will take
out a lemon flavoured candy is sure event. Since probability of sure event is 1, P(a
lemon flavoured candy) = 1

40. It is given that m a group of 3 students, the probability of 2 students not having the same
birthday is 0.992. What is the probability that the 2 students have the same birthday?
Sol:
Let E ⟶ event of 2 students having same birthday P(E) is given as 0.992
Let (𝐸̅ ) ⟶ event of 2 students not having same birthday.
We know that, P(E) + P(𝐸̅ ) = 1
P(𝐸̅ ) = 1 − 𝑃(𝐸)
= 1 – 0.992
= 0.008

41. A bag contains 3 red balls and 5 black balls. A ball is drawn at random from the bag. What
is the probability that the ball drawn is
(i) red? (ii) not red?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 8 {3 red, 5 black}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting red ball.
No. of favourable outcomes = 3 {3 red}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
3
P(E) = 8
(ii) 𝐸̅ ⟶ event of getting no red ball.
𝑃(𝐸) + 𝑃(𝐸̅ ) = 1
P(𝐸̅ ) = 1 − 𝑃(𝐸)
3 5
=1−8=8

42. (i) A lot of 20 bulbs contain 4 defective ones. One bulb is drawn at random from the lot.
What is the probability that this bulb is defective?
(ii) Suppose the bulb drawn in
(a) is not defective and nõt replaced. Now bulb is drawn at random from the rest. What
is the probability that this bulb is not defective?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 20 {20 bulbs}
(i) E ⟶ be event of getting defective bulb.
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {4 defective bulbs}
No.of favorable outcomes 4 1
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes = 20 = 5
(ii) Bulb drawn in is not detective & is not replaced remaining bulbs = 15 good + 4 bad
bulbs = 19
Total no. of possible outcomes = 19
E ⟶ be event of getting defective
No. of favorable outcomes = 15 (15 good bulbs)
15
P(E) = 9

43. A box contains 90 discs which are numbered from 1 to 90. If one discs is drawn at random
from the box, find the probability that it bears
(i) a two digit number
(ii) a perfect square number
(iii) (iii) a number divisible by 5.
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 90 {1, 2, 3, … 90}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting 2 digit no.
No. of favourable outcomes = 81 {10, 11, 12, …. 90}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
81
P(E) = 90
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting a perfect square.
No. of favourable outcomes = 9 {1, 4, 9, 16, 25, 26, 49, 64, 81}
9 1
P(E) = 10
90
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

(iii) E ⟶ event of getting a no. divisible by 5.


No. of favourable outcomes = 18 {5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65,
70, 75, 80, 85, 90}
18 1
P(E) = 90 = 5

44. A lot consists of 144 ball pens of which 20 are defective and others good. Nun will buy a
pen if it is good, but will not buy if it is defective. The shopkeeper draws one pen at
random and gives it to her. What is the probability that
(i) She will buy it? (ii) She will not buy it?
Sol:
No. of good pens = 144 – 20 = 24
No. of detective pens = 20
Total no. of possible outcomes = 144 {total no pens}
(i) E ⟶ event of buying pen which is good.
No. of favourable outcomes = 124 {124 good pens}
No.of favorable outcomes
P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
124 31
P(E) = 144 = 36
(ii) 𝐸̅ ⟶ event of not buying a pen which is bad P(E) + P(𝐸̅ ) = 1
𝑃(𝐸) + 𝑃(𝐸̅ ) = 1
P(𝐸̅ ) = 1 - P(E)
31 5
= 1 − 36 = 36

45. 12 defective pens are accidently mixed with 132 good ones. It is not possible to just look at
pen and tell whether or not it is defective. one pen is taken out at random from this lot.
Determine the probability that the pen taken out is good one.
Sol:
No. of good pens = 132
No. of defective pens = 12
Total no. of possible outcomes = 12 + 12 {total no of pens}
E ⟶ event of getting a good pen.
No. of favourable outcomes = 132 {132 good pens}
No.of favorable outcomes
P (E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
132 66 33 11
∴ P(E) = 144 = 72 = 36 = 2

46. Five cards — the ten, jack, queen, king and ace of diamonds, are well-shuffled with their
face downwards. One card is then picked up at random.
(i) What is the probability that the card is the queen?
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

(ii) If the queen is drawn and put a side, what is the probability that the second card
picked up is
a. an ace?
b. a queen?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 5 {5 cards}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting a good pen.
No. of favourable outcomes = 132 {132 good pens}
No.of favorable outcomes
P (E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
1
∴ P(E) = 5
(ii) If queen is drawn & put aside,
Total no. of remaining cards = 4
(a) E ⟶ event of getting a queen.
No. of favourable outcomes = 1 {1 ace card}
Total no. of possible outcomes = 4 {4 remaining cards}
1
P(E) = 4
(b) E ⟶ event of getting a good pen.
No. of favourable outcomes = 0 {there is no queen}
0
P(E) = 4 = 0
∵ E is known as impossible event.

47. Harpreet tosses two different coins simultaneously (say, one is of Re 1 and other of Rs 2).
What is the probability that he gets at least one head?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 4 which are{HT, HH, TT, TH}
E ⟶ event of getting at least one head
No. of favourable outcomes = 3 {HT, HH, TH}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
3
P(E) = 4

48. Two dice, one blue and one grey, are thrown at the same time. Complete the following
table:
Event: ‘Sum 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
on two dice’
Probability
From the above table a student argues that there are 1 1 possible outcomes 2,3,4,5,6,7, 8, 9,
10, 11 and 12. Therefore, each of them has a probability j-j . Do you agree with this
argument?
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes when 2 dice are thrown = 6 × 6 = 36 which are
{ (1, 1) (1, 2) (1, 3) (1, 4) (1, 5) (1, 6)
(2, 1) (2, 2) (2, 3) (2, 4) (2, 5) (2, 6)
(3, 1) (3, 2) (3, 3) (3, 4) (3, 5) (3, 6)
(4, 1) (4, 2) (4, 3) (4, 4) (4, 5) (4, 6)
(5, 1) (5, 2) (5, 3) (5, 4) (5, 5) (5, 6)
(6, 1) (6, 2) (6, 3) (6, 4) (6, 5) (6, 6) }
E ⟶ event of getting sum on 2 dice as 2
No. of favourable outcomes = 1{(1, 1)}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
1
P(E) = 36
E ⟶ event of getting sum as 3
No. of favourable outcomes = 2 {(1, 2) (2, 1)}
2
P(E) = 36
E ⟶ event of getting sum as 4
No. of favourable outcomes = 3 {(3, 1) (2, 2) (1, 3)}
3
P(E) = 36
E ⟶ event of getting sum as 5
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {(1, 4) (2, 3) (3, 2) (4, 1)}
4
P(E) = 36
E ⟶ event of getting sum as 6
No. of favourable outcomes = 5 {(1, 5) (2, 4) (3, 3) (4, 2) (5, 1)}
6
P(E) = 36
E ⟶ event of getting sum as 7
No. of favourable outcomes = 6 {(1, 6) (2, 5) (3, 4) (4, 3) (5, 2) (6, 1)}
6
P(E) = 36
E ⟶ event of getting sum as 8
No. of favourable outcomes = 5 {(2, 6) (3, 5) (4, 4) (5, 3) (6, 2)}
5
P(E) = 36
E ⟶ event of getting sum as 9
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {(3, 6) (4, 5) (5, 4) (6, 3)}
4
P(E) = 36
E ⟶ event of getting sum as 10
No. of favourable outcomes = 3 {(4, 6) (5, 5) (6, 4)}
3
P(E) = 36
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

E ⟶ event of getting sum as 11


No. of favourable outcomes = 2 {(5, 6) (6, 5)}
2
P(E) = 36
E ⟶ event of getting sum as 12
No. of favourable outcomes = 1 {(6, 6)}
1
P(E) = 36
Event ‘Sum 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
on two dice’
Probability 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 4 3 2 1
36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
No, the outcomes are not equally likely from the above table we see that, there is different
probability for different outcome

49. Cards marked with numbers 13, 14, 15, ...., 60 are placed in a box and mixed thoroughly.
One card is drawn at random from the box. Find the probability that number on the card
drawn is
(i) divisible by 5
(ii) a number is a perfect square
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 48 {13, 14, 15, …., 60}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting no divisible by 5
No. of favourable outcomes = 10{15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 55, 60}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
10 5
P(E) = 48 = 24
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting a perfect square.
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {16, 25, 36, 49}
4 1
P(E) = 48 = 12
50. A bag contains 6 red balls and some blue balls. If the probability of drawing a blue ball the
bag is twice that of a red ball, find the number of blue balls in the bag.
Sol:
No of red balls = 6
Let no. of blue balls = x
Total no. of possible outcomes = 6 + x(total no. of balls)
No.of favorable outcomes
P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
P(blue ball) = 2 P(red ball)
𝑥 2(6)
⇒ 𝑥+6 = 𝑥+6
⇒ x = 2(6)
x = 12
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

∴ No of blue balls = 12

51. A bag contains tickets numbered 11, 12, 13,..., 30. A ticket is taken out from the bag at
random. Find the probability that the number on the drawn ticket
(i) is a multiple of 7
(ii) is greater than 15 and a multiple of 5.
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 20 {11, 12, 13, ….., 30}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting no. which is multiple of 7
No. of favorable outcomes = 3 {14, 21, 28}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
3
P(E) = 20
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting no. greater than 15 & multiple of 5
No. of favorable outcomes = 3 {14, 21, 28}
3
P(E) = 20

52. The king, queen and jack of clubs are removed from a deck of 52 playing cards and the
remaining cards are shuffled. A card is drawn from the remaining cards. Find the
probability of getting a card of
(i) heart
(ii) queen
(iii) clubs.
Sol:
Total no. of remaining cards = 52 – 3 = 49
(i) E⟶ event of getting hearts
No. of favorable outcomes = 3 {4 – 1}
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
13
P(E) = 49
(ii) E ⟶ event of getting queen
No. of favorable outcomes = 3 (4 – 1) {Since queen of clubs is removed}
3
P(E) = 49
(iii) E ⟶ event of getting clubs
No. of favorable outcomes = 10 (13 – 3) {Since 3 club cards are removed}
10
P(E) = 49

53. Two dice are thrown simultaneously. What is the probability that:
(i) 5 will not come up on either of them?
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

(ii) 5 will come up on at least one?


(iii) 5 wifi come up at both dice?
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes when 2 dice are thrown = 6 × 6 = 36 which are
{ (1, 1) (1, 2) (1, 3) (1, 4) (1, 5) (1, 6)
(2, 1) (2, 2) (2, 3) (2, 4) (2, 5) (2, 6)
(3, 1) (3, 2) (3, 3) (3, 4) (3, 5) (3, 6)
(4, 1) (4, 2) (4, 3) (4, 4) (4, 5) (4, 6)
(5, 1) (5, 2) (5, 3) (5, 4) (5, 5) (5, 6)
(6, 1) (6, 2) (6, 3) (6, 4) (6, 5) (6, 6) }

(i) E ⟶ event of 5 not coming up on either of them


No. of favourable outcomes = 25 which are
{ (1, 1) (1, 2) (1, 3) (1, 4) (1, 5) (1, 6)
(2, 1) (2, 2) (2, 3) (2, 4) (2, 5) (2, 6)
(3, 1) (3, 2) (3, 3) (3, 4) (3, 5) (3, 6)
(4, 1) (4, 2) (4, 3) (4, 4) (4, 5) (4, 6)
(5, 1) (5, 2) (5, 3) (5, 4) (5, 5) (5, 6)
(6, 1) (6, 2) (6, 3) (6, 4) (6, 5) (6, 6) }
No.of favorable outcomes
Probability, P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
25
P(E) =
36
(ii) E ⟶ event of 5 coming up at least once {(1, 5) (2, 5) (3, 5) (4, 5) (5, 5) (5, 1) (5, 2)
(5, 3) (5, 4) (5, 6) (6, 5)}
11
P(E) = 36
(iii) E ⟶ event of getting 5 on both dice
No. of favourable outcomes = 1 { (5, 5) }
1
P(E) = 36

54. Fill in the blanks:


(i) Probability of a sure event is...........
(ii) Probability of an impossible event is...........
(iii) The probability of an event (other than sure and impossible event) lies between……
(iv) Every elementary event associated to a random experiment has ........... probability.
(v) Probability of an event A + Probability of event ‘not A’ —...........
(vi) Sum of the probabilities of each outcome m an experiment is ..........
Sol:
(i) 1, ∵ P(sure event) = 1
(ii) 0, ∵ P(impossible event) = 0
(iii) 0 & 1, ∵ O ∠ P(E) ∠ 1
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

(iv) Equal
(v) 1, ∵ P(E) + P(𝐸̅ ) = 1
(vi) 1

55. Examine each of the following statements and comment:


(i) If two coins are tossed at the same time, there are 3 possible outcomes—two heads,
two tails, or one of each. Therefore, for each outcome, the probability of occurrence
is 1/3
(ii) (ii) If a die is thrown once, there are two possible outcomes—an odd number or an
even number. Therefore, the probability of obtaining an odd number is 1 /2 and the
1
probability of obtaining an even number is .
2
Sol:
(i) Given statement is incorrect. If 2 coins are tossed at the same time,
Total no. of possible outcomes = 4 {HH, HT, TH, TT}
1 No.of favorable outcomes
P(HH) = P(HT) = P(TH) = P(TT) = 4 {∵ Probability = Total no.of possible outcomes}
1
I.e. for each outcome, probability of occurrence is 4
1 1
Outcomes can be classified as (2H, 2T, 1H & 1T) P(2H) = 4, P(2T) = 4, P(1H & 1T)
2
=4
Events are not equally likely because the event ‘one head & 1 tail’ is twice as likely
to occur as remaining two.
(ii) This statement is true
When a die is thrown; total no. of possible outcomes = 6 {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}
These outcomes can be taken as even no. & odd no.
3 1
P(even no.) = P(2, 4, 6) = 6 = 2
3 1
P(odd no.) = 𝑝(1, 3, 5) = 6 = 2
∴ Two outcomes are equally likely

56. A box contains loo red cards, 200 yellow cards and 50 blue cards. If a card is drawn at
random from the box, then find the probability that it will be
(i) a blue card
(ii) not a yellow card
(iii) neither yellow nor a blue card.
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 100 + 200 + 50 = 350 {100 red, 200 yellow & 50 blue}
(i) E ⟶ event of getting blue card.
No. of favourable outcomes = 50 {50 blue cards}
50 1
P(E) = 350 = 7
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

(ii) E ⟶ event of getting yellow card


No. of favourable outcomes = 200 {200 yellow}
200 4
P(E) = 350 = 7
𝐸̅ ⟶ event of not getting yellow card
𝑃(𝐸̅ ) = 1 − 𝑃(𝐸)
4 3
=1−7=7
(iii) E ⟶ getting neither yellow nor a blue card
No. of favourable outcomes = 350 – 200 – 50 = 100 {removing 200 yellow & 50
blue cards}
100 2
P(E) = =
350 7

57. A number is selected at random from first 50 natural numbers. Find the probability that it is
a multiple of 3 and 4.
Sol:
Total no. of possible outcomes = 50 {1, 2, 3 …. 50}
No. of favourable outcomes = 4 {12, 24, 36, 48}
No.of favorable outcomes
P(E) = Total no.of possible outcomes
4 2
P(E) = 50 = 25

Exercise – 13.2

1. In the accompanying diagram a fair spinner is placed at the center O of the circle.
Diameter AOB and radius OC divide the circle into three regions labelled X, Y and Z. If
∠BOC = 45°. What is the probability that the spinner will land in the region X? (See fig)

Sol:
Given ∠BOC = 45°
∠AOC = 180 – 45 = 135°
Area of circle = 𝜋r2
𝜃
Area of region × = 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2
135 3
= 360 × 𝜋𝑟 2 = 8 𝜋𝑟 2
Probability that the spinner will land in the region
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
3
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑥 𝜋𝑟 2 3
X = 𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑙𝑒 = 8𝜋𝑟 2 = 8

2. A target shown in Fig. below consists of three concentric circles of radii, 3, 7 and 9 cm
respectively. A dart is thrown and lands on the target. What is the probability that the dart
will land on the shaded region?

Sol:
1st circle ⟶ with radius 3
2nd circle ⟶ with radius 7
3rd circle ⟶ with radius 9
Area of 1st circle = (3)2 = 9𝜋
Area of 2nd circle= (7)2 = 49𝜋
Area of 3rd circle = (9)2 = 81𝜋
Area of shaded region = Area of 2nd circle – area of 1st circle
= 49𝜋 – 9𝜋
= 40𝜋
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑠ℎ𝑎𝑑𝑒𝑑 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛 40𝜋 40
Probability that will land on the shaded region = = 81𝜋 = 81
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 3𝑟𝑑 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑙𝑒

3. In below Fig., points A, B, C and D are the centers of four circles that each have a radius of
length one unit. If a point is selected at random from the interior of square ABCD. What is
the probability that the point will be chosen from the shaded region?

Sol:
Radius of circle = 1cm
Length of side of square = 1 + 1 = 2cm
Area of square = 2 × 2 = 4cm2
Area of shaded region = area of square – 4 × area of quadrant
1
= 4 – 4 (4) 𝜋(1)2
= (4 − 𝜋) cm2
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑠ℎ𝑎𝑑𝑒𝑑 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛
Probability that the point will be chosen from the shaded region = 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑟𝑒 𝐴𝐵𝐶𝐷
4−𝜋 𝜋
= = 1−4
4
Since geometrical probability,
𝑀𝑒𝑎𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑐𝑖𝑓𝑖𝑒𝑑 𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛
P(E) = 𝑀𝑒𝑎𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑤ℎ𝑜𝑙𝑒 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛

4. In the Fig. below, JKLM is a square with sides of length 6 units. Points A and B are the
mid- points of sides KL and LM respectively. If a point is selected at random from the
interior of the square. What is the probability that the point will be chosen from the interior
of ∆JAB?

Sol:
Length of side of square JKLM = 6 cm
Area of square JKLM = 62 = 36 cm2
Since A & B are the mid points of KL & LM
KA = AL = LB = LM = 3 cm
Area of ∆ AJB = area of square – area of ∆ AKJ – area of ∆ ALB – area of ∆ BMJ
1 1
= 36 − 2 × 6 × 3 − 2 × 6 × 3
= 36 − 9 − 4.5 − 9
= 13.5 𝑠𝑞. 𝑢𝑛𝑖𝑡𝑠
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 ∆𝐴𝐽𝐵
Probability that the point will be chosen from the interior of ∆AJB = 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑟𝑒

5. In the Fig. below, 13, a square dart board is shown. The length of a side of the larger square
is 1.5 times the length of a side of the smaller square. If a dart is thrown and lands on the
larger square. What is the probability that it will land in the interior of the smaller square?
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________

Sol:
Let length of side of smaller square = a
Then length of side of bigger square = 1.5a
Area of smaller square = 𝑎2
Area of bigger square = (1.5)2a2 = 2.25a2.
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑚𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑟 𝑠𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑟𝑒
Probability that dart will land in the interior of the smaller square = 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑏𝑖𝑔𝑔𝑒𝑟 𝑠𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑟𝑒
𝑎2 1
= 2.25𝑎2 = 2.25
∵ Geometrical probability,
𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑐𝑖𝑓𝑖𝑒𝑑 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑡
𝑃(𝐸) = 𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑤ℎ𝑜𝑙𝑒 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛

6. Suppose you drop a tie at random on the rectangular region shown in Fig. below. What is
the probability that it will land inside the circle with diameter 1 m?

Sol:
Area of circle with radius 0.5 m
A circle = (0.5)2 = 0.25 𝜋m2
Area of rectangle = 3 × 2 = 6𝑚2
𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒𝑑 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑐𝑖𝑓𝑖𝑒𝑑 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑡
Probability (geometric) = 𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑤ℎ𝑜𝑙𝑒 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛
Probability that tie will land inside the circle with diameter 1m
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑙𝑒
= 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒
0.25𝜋𝑚2
= 6 𝑚2
1 𝜋
=4×6
𝜋
= 24
Class X Chapter 13 – Probability Maths
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 14.1

1. On which axis do the following points lie?


(i) P(5, 0)
(ii) Q(0 – 2)
(iii) R(−4, 0)
(iv) S(0, 5)
Sol:
(i) P  5, 0  lies on x  axis
(ii) Q  0, 2  lies on y  axis
(iii) R  4, 0  lies on x  axis
(iv) S  0,5  lies on y  axis

2. Let ABCD be a square of side 2a. Find the coordinates of the vertices of this square when
(i) A coincides with the origin and AB and AB and coordinate axes are parallel to the
sides AB and AD respectively.
(ii) The center of the square is at the origin and coordinate axes are parallel to the sides
AB and AD respectively.

Sol:
(i) Coordinate of the vertices of the square of side 2a are:
A  0, 0  , B  2a, 0  , C  2a, 2a  and D  0, 2a 
(ii) Coordinate of the vertices of the square of side 2a are:
A  a, a  , B  a, a  , C  a, a  and  a, a 
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3. The base PQ of two equilateral triangles PQR and PQR’ with side 2a lies along y-axis such
that the mid-point of PQ is at the origin. Find the coordinates of the vertices R and R’ of
the triangles.

Sol:
We have two equilateral triangle PQR and PQR with side 2a.
O is the mid-point of PQ.
In QOR, QOR  90
Hence, by Pythagoras theorem
OR 2  OQ 2  QR 2
OR 2   2a    a 
2 2

OR 2  3a 2
OR   3 a
Coordinates of vertex R is   
3a,0 and coordinate of vertex R’ is  3a,0 
Exercise 14.2

1. Find the distance between the following pair of points:


(i)  6, 7  and  1, 5
(ii)  a  b, b  c  and  a  b, c  b 
(iii)  a sin  , b cos   and  a cos  , b sin  
(iv)  a, 0  and  0,b 
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

(i) We have P  6, 7  and Q  1, 5


Here,
x1  6, y1  7 and
x2  1, y2  5

PQ   x2  x1    y2  y1 
2 2

PQ   1   6     5  7 
2 2

PQ   1  6   5  7 
2 2

PQ   5   12
2 2

PQ  25  144
PQ  169
PQ  13
(ii) we have P  a  b, b  c  and Q  a  b, c  b  here,
x1  a  b, y1  b  c and x2  a  b, y2  c  b

PQ   x2  x1    y2  y1 
2 2

PQ   a  b   a  b     c  b   b  c  
2 2

PQ   a  b  a  b  c  b  b  c 
2 2

PQ   2b    2b 
2 2

PQ  4b2  4b2
PQ  8b2
PQ  4  2b2
PQ  2 2b
(iii) we have P  a sin  , b cos   and Q  a cos  , b sin   here
x1  a sin  , y1  b cos  and
x2  a cos  , y2  b sin 

PQ   x2  x1    y2  y1 
2 2

 a cos   a sin     b sin    b cos   


2
PQ 
2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

PQ   a cos     a sin    2  a cos   a sin     b sin     b cos    2  b sin   b cos  


2 2 2 2

PQ  a 2 cos2   a 2 sin 2   2a 2 cos  sin   b2 sin 2   b2 cos2   2b2 sin  cos 


PQ  a 2  cos2   sin 2    2a 2 cos  sin   b2  sin 2   cos2    2b2 sin  cos 

PQ  a 2 1  2a 2 cos  sin   b2 1  2b2 sin  cos   sin 2   cos 2   1

PQ  a 2  b2  2a 2 cos  sin   2b2 sin  cos 


PQ  a 2
 b2   2cos  sin   a 2  b2 

PQ  a 2
 b2  1  2cos  sin  

(iv) We have P  a, 0  and Q  0, b 


Here,
x1  a, y1  0, x2  0, y2  b,

PQ   x2  x1    y2  y1 
2 2

PQ  0  a  b  0
2 2

PQ   a    b 
2 2

PQ  a 2  b2

2. Find the value of a when the distance between the points (3, a) and (4, 1) is √10.
Sol:
We have P  3, a  and Q  4,1
Here,
x1  3, y1  a
x2  4, y2  1
PQ  10

PQ   x2  x1    y2  y1 
2 2

 10   4  3  1  a 
2 2

 10  1  1  a 
2 2

 10  1  1  a 2  2a   a  b  a 2  b2  2ab 
2
 
 10  2  a 2  2a
Squaring both sides
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

   
2 2
 10  2  a 2  2a

 10  2  a 2  2a
 a 2  2a  2  10  0
 a 2  2a  8  0
Splitting the middle team.
 a 2  4a  2a  8  0
 a  a  4  2  a  4  0
  a  4  a  2   0
 a  4, a  2

3. If the points (2, 1) and (1, -2) are equidistant from the point (x, y) from (-3, 0) as well as
from (3, 0) are 4.
Sol:
We have P  2,1 and Q 1, 2  and R  X , Y 
Also, PR  QR

PR   x  2   y  1
2 2

 PR  x2   2   2 xx  2  y 2  1  2  y 1
2 2

 PR  x 2  4  4 x  y 2  1  2 y

 PR  x 2  5  4 x  y 2  2 y

QR   x  1   y  2
2 2

 PR  x 2  1  2 x  y 2  4  4 y

 PR  x 2  5  2 x  y 2  4 y
PR  QR
 x2  5  4x  y 2  2 y  x2  5  2x  y 2  4 y
 x2  5  4 x  y 2  2 y  x2  5  2 x  y 2  4 y
 x2  5  4 x  y 2  2 y  x2  5  2 x  y 2  4 y
 4 x  2 x  2 y  4 y  0
 2 x  6 y  0
 2  x  3 y   0
0
 x  3y 
2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
 x  3y  0
Hence proved.

4. Find the values of x, y if the distances of the point (x, y) from (−3, 0) as well as from (3,0)
are 4.
Sol:
We have P  x, y  , Q  3, 0  and R  3, 0 

PQ   x  3   y  0
2 2

 4  x2  9  6 x  y 2
Squaring both sides

 
2
  4  x2  9  6 x  y 2
2

 16  x 2  9  6 x  y 2
 x 2  y 2  16  9  6 x
 x2  y 2  7  6x ………….(1)

PR    x  3   y  0  
2 2

 4  x2  9  6 x  y 2
Squaring both sides

 
2
 4  x2  9  6 x  y 2
2

 16  x 2  9  6 x  y 2
 x 2  y 2  16  9  6 x
 x2  y 2  7  6 x …………..(2)
Equating (1) and (2)
7  6x  7  6x
 7  7  6x  6x
 0  12x
 x  12
Equating (1) and (2)
7  6x  7  6x
 7  7  6x  6x
 0  12x
 x  12
Substituting the value of x  0 in (2)
x2  y 2  7  6 x
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

0  y2  7  6  0
y2  7
y 7

5. The length of a line segment is of 10 units and the coordinates of one end-point are (2,−3).
If the abscissa of the other end is 10, find the ordinate of the other end.
Sol:
Let two ordinate of the other end R be Y
 Coordinates of other end R are 10, y  i.e., R 10, y 
Distance PR  10 [given]
PR   x2  x1    y2  y1 
2 2

 10  10  2   y  3
2 2

 10  82  y 2  9  6 y

 10  64  y 2  9  6 y

 10  73  y 2  6 y
Squaring both sides

 
2
10   73  y 2  6 y
2

 100  73  y 2  6 y
 y 2  6 y  73  100  0
 y 2  6 y  27  0
Splitting the middle term
y 2  9 y  3 y  27  0
 y 2  9 y  3 y  27  0
 y  y  9  3 y  9  0
  y  9  y  3  0
 y  9, y  3

6. Show that the points (−2, − 4), (4, 0) and (2, 3) are the vertices points of are the vertices
points of a rectangle.
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Sol:
Let A  4, 1 , B  2, 4  , C  4, 0  and D  2,3 be the given points
Now,
AB   2  4   4  1
2 2

 AB   2   3
2 2

 AB  4  9
 AB  13
CD   4  2   0  3
2 2

 CD   2   3
2 2

 CD  4  9
 CD  13
BC   4  2   0  4
2 2

 BC   6   4
2 2

 BC  36  16
 BC  52
AD   4  2   1  3
2 2

 AD   6   4
2 2

 AD  36  16
 AD  52
 AB  CD and AD  BC  ABCD is a parallelogram
Now,
AC   4  4   0  1
2 2

 AC  8  1
2 2

 AC  64  1
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 AC  65
BD   2  2  3  4
2 2

 BD   4  7
2 2

 BD  16  49
 BD  65
Since the diagonals of parallelogram ABCD are equal i.e., AC  BD
Hence, ABCD is a rectangle

7. Show that the points A(1, −2), B(3, 6), C(5, 10) and D(3, 2) are the vertices of a
parallelogram

Sol:
Let A 1, 2  , B  3, 6  , C  5,10  , D  3, 2  be the given points

AB   3 1   6  2
2 2

 AB   2    8
2 2

 AB  4  64
 AB  68
CD   5  3  10  2 
2 2

 CD   2    8
2 2

 CD  4  64
 CD  68
AD   3  1   2  2
2 2

 AD   2   4
2 2

 AD  4  16
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 AD  20
BC   5  3  10  6
2 2

 BC   2   4
2 2

 BC  4  16
 BC  20
 AB  CD and AD  BC
Since opposite sides of a parallelogram are equal
Hence, ABCD is a parallelogram

8. Prove that the points A (1, 7), B (4, 2), C (−1, −1) and D (−4, 4) are the vertices of a
square.
Sol:
Let A 1, 7  , B  4, 2  , C  1, 1 and D  4, 4  be the given point. One way of showing that
ABCD is a square is to use the property that all its sides should be equal and both its
diagonals should also be equal
Now,
AB  1  4   7  2   9  25  34
2 2

BC   4  1   2  1  25  9  34
2 2

CD   1  4   1  4  9  25  34
2 2

DA  1  4   7  4   25  9  34
2 2

AC  1  1   7  1  4  64  68
2 2

BD   4  4   2  4  64  4  68
2 2

Since, AB  BC  CD  DA and AC  BD, all the four sides of the quadrilateral ABCD
are equal and its diagonals AC and BD are also equal. Therefore, ABCD is a square

9. Prove that the points (3, 0) (6, 4) and (-1, 3) are vertices of a right angled isosceles triangle.
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Sol:
Let A  3, 0  , B  6, 4  and C  1,3 be the given points

AB   6  3   4  0
2 2

 AB   3   4 
2 2

 AB  9  16
 AB  25
BC   1  6   3  4
2 2

 BC   7    1
2 2

 BC  49  1
 BC  50
AC   1  3   3  0 
2 2

 AC   4   3
2 2

 A 16  9
 AC  25

 
2
AB 2  25

 AB 2  25
AC 2  25

 
2
BC 2  50

BC 2  50
Since AB 2  AC 2  BC 2 and AB  AC
 ABC is a right angled isosceles triangle

10. Prove that (2, —2), (—2, 1) and (5, 2) are the vertices of a right angled triangle. Find the
area of the triangle and the length of the hypotenuse.
Sol:
Let A  2, 2  , B  2,1 and C  5, 2  be the given points

AB   2  2  1  2
2 2

 AB   4   3
2 2

 AB  16  9
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 AB  25
BC   5  2   2 1
3 2

B  7   1
2 2

 BC  49  1
 BC  50
AC  5  2   2  2
2 2

 AC   3   4 
2 2

 AC  9  16
 AC  25

 
2
AB 2  25

 AB 2  25

 
2
BC 2  50

 BC 2  50
Since, AB 2  AC 2  BC 2
 ABC is a right angled triangle.
Length of the hypotenuse BC  50  5 2
1
Area of ABC   AB  AC
2
1
  25  25
2
25
 square units.
2
11. Prove that the points (2 a, 4 a), (2 a, 6 a) arid (2a + √3𝑎, 5a) are the vertices of an
equilateral triangle.
Sol:
 
Let A  2a, 4a  , B  2a, 6a  and C 2a  3a,5a be the given points

AB   2a  2a    6a  4a 
2 2

 AB   0   2a 
2 2

 AB  4a 2
 AB  2a
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 2a  3a  2a   5a  6a 
2
BC 
2

 BC   3a    a 
2 2

 BC  3a 2  a 2
 BC  4a 2
 BC  2a

 2a  3a  2a    5a  4a 
2
AC 
2

 AC   3a    a 
2 2

 AC  3a 2  a 2
 AC  4a 2
 AC  2a
Since, AB  BC  AC
 ABC is an equilateral triangle

12. Prove that the points (2, 3), (-4, -6) and (1, 3/2) do not form a triangle.
Sol:
Let A  2,3 , B  4, 6  and C 1,3 / 2  be the given points

AB   4  2   6  3
2 2

 AB   6   9
2 2

 AB  36  81
 AB  117
2
3 
BC  1  4     6
2

 2 
2
 15 
 BC   5   
2

2
225
 BC  25 
4
325
 BC 
4
 BC  8125
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2
 3
AC   2  1   3  
2

 2
2
3
 AC  1   
2

2
9
 AC  1 
4
13
 AC 
4
 AC  3.25
We know that for a triangle sum of two sides is greater than the third side
Here AC  BC is not greater than AB.
 ABC is not triangle

13. An equilateral triangle has two vertices are (2, -1), (3, 4), (-2, 3) and (-3, -2), find the
coordinates of the third vertex.
Sol:
Let A  3, 4  , B  2,3 and C  x, y  be the three vertices of the equilateral triangle then,
AB 2  BC 2  CA2
AB   2  3   3  4   5   1  25  1  26
2 2 2 2

BC   x  2    y  3  x 2  4  4 x  y 2  9  6 y  x 2  y 2  6 x  8 y  25
2 2

CA   x  3   y  4   x 2  9  6 x  y 2  16  8 y  x 2  y 2  6 x  8 y  25
2 2

Now, AB 2  BC 2
 x 2  y 2  4 x  6 y  13  26
 x 2  y 2  4 x  6 y  13  0 …….(i)
AB 2  CA2
 26  x 2  y 2  6 x  8 y  25
 x2  y 2  6x  8 y 1  0 …….(ii)
Subtracting (ii) from (i) we get,
10 x  2 y  12  0
 5x  y  6 …….(iii)
 5x  6  y
6 y
x
5
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
6 y
Subtracting x  in (i) we get
5
 6 y   6 y 
2

  y  4   6 y  13  0
2

 5   5 
6  y 
2
24  4 y
  y2   6 y  13  0
25 5
36  y 2  12 y 24  4 y
  y2   6 y  13  0
25 5
36  y 2  12 y  25 y 2  120  20 y  150  13  25
 0
25
 26 y 2  32 y  6  325  0
 26 y 2  32 y  319  0
D  b2  4ac
D   32   4  26   319   1024  33176  34200
2

b  D   32   34200
 y 
2a 2  26
32  185 217 32  185 153
y   or y  
52 52 52 52
217
Substituting y  in (iii)
52
217
5x  6
52
217 95
5x  6  
52 52
19
x
52
153
Again substituting y  in (iii)
52
153
5x  6
52
153 465
5x  6  
52 52
93
x
52
 93 153 
Therefore, the coordinates of the third vertex are  ,
19 217 
 or  , 
 52 52   52 52 
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
14. Show that the quadrilateral whose vertices are (2, -1) (3, 4), (-2, 3) and (-3, -2) is a
rhombus.
Sol:
Let A  2, 1 , B  3, 4  , C  2,3 and D  3, 2 

AB   3  2   4  1  1  5  1  25  26
2 2 2 2

BC   2  3   3  4   5   1  25  1  26
2 2 2 2

CD   3  2   2  3   1   5  1  25  26
2 2 2 2

AD   3  2   2  1   5   1  25  1  26
2 2 2 2

Since AB  BC  CD  AD
 ABCD is a rhombus

15. Two vertices of an isosceles triangle are (2, 0) and (2, 5). Find the third vertex if the length
of the equal sides is 3.
Sol:
Two vertices of an isosceles triangle are A  2, 0  and B  2,5  . Let C  x, y  be the third
vertex
AB   2  2  5  0   0    5  25  5
2 2 2 2

BC   x  2    y  5  x 2  4  4 x  y 2  25  10 y  x 2  4 x  y 2  10 y  29
2 2

AC   x  2   y  0  x2  4  4 x  y 2
2 2

Also we are given that


AC  BC  3
 AC 2  BC 2  9
 x 2  4  4 x  y 2  x 2  4 x  y 2  10 y  29
 10 y  25
25 5
y 
10 2
AC 2  9
x2  4  4 x  y 2  9
x 2  4  4 x   2.5   9
2

x 2  4  4 x  6.25  9
x 2  4 x  1.25  0
D   4   4  1 1.25
2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
D  16  5
D  11
  4   11 4  3.31 7.31
x    3.65
2 1 2 2
  4   11 4  11 4  3.31
Or x     0.35
2 2 2
The third vertex is  3.65, 2.5  or  0.35, 2.5 

16. Which point on x-axis is equidistant from (5, 9) and (-4, 6)?
Sol:
Let A  5,9  and B  4, 6  be the given points.
Let C  x, 0  be the point on x  axis
Now,
AC   x  5   0  9
2 2

 AC  x 2  25  10 x   9 
2

 AC  x 2  10 x  25  81
 AC  x 2  10 x  106
BC   x  4   0  6
2 2

 BC  x 2  16  8d   6 
2

 BC  x 2  8 x  16  36
 BC  x 2  8 x  5 x
Since AC  BC
Or, AC 2  BC 2
x 2  10 x  106  x 2  8 x  52
 10 x  106  8x  52
 10 x  8x  52  106
 18x  54
54
x
18
 x3
Hence the points on x-axis is  3, 0  .
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
17. Prove that the points (— 2, 5), (0, 1) and (2, — 3) are collinear.
Sol:
Let A  2,5  , B  0,1 and C  2, 3 be the given points

AB   0  2  1  5
2 2

 AB  4   4 
2

 AB  4  16
 AB  20
 AB  2 5
BC   2  0   3  1
2 2

 BC   2   4
2 2

 BC  4  16
 BC  20
 BX  2 5
AC   2  2   3  5
2 2

 AC   4   8
2 2

 AC  16  64
 AC  80
 AC  4 5
Since AB  BC  AC
Hence A  2,5  , B  0,1 , and C  2, 3 are collinear

18. The coordinates of the point P are (—3, 2). Find the coordinates of the point Q which lies
on the line joining P and origin such that OP = OQ.

Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Let the coordinates of Q be  x, y 


Since Q lies on the line joining P and O (origin) and OP  OQ
By mid-point theorem
 x  3  0 and  y  2  0
2 2
 x  3, y  2
Hence coordinates of points Q are  3, 2 

19. Which point on y-axis is equidistant from (2, 3) and (—4, 1)?
Sol:
A  2,3 and B  4,1 are the given points.
Let C  0, y  be the points are y  axis

AC   0  2   y  3
2 2

 AC  4  y 2  9  6 y

 AC  y 2  6 y  13

BC   0  4   y  1
2 2

 BC  16  y 2  1  2 y

 BC  y 2  2 y  17
Since AC  BC
AC 2  BC 2
y 2  6 y  13  y 2  2 y  17
 6 y  2 y  17  13
 4 y  4
 y  1
 The point on y  axis is  0, 1

20. The three vertices of a parallelogram are (3, 4), (3, 8) and (9, 8). Find the fourth vertex.
Sol:
Let A  3, 4  , B  3,8  and C  9,8  be the given points
Let the forth vertex be D  x, y 

AB   3  3   8  4 
2 2

 AB  0   4 
2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 AB  16
 AB  4
BC   9  3   8  8 
2 2

 BC   6 0
2

 BC  36
 BC  B
CD   x  9   y  8
2 2

 CD  x 2   92   18x  y 2  82   16 y

 CD  x 2  81  18 x  y 2  64  16 y

 CD  x 2  18 x  y 2  16 y  145

AD   x  3   y  4 
2 2

 AD  x 2  9  6 x  y 2  16  8 y

 AD  x 2  6 x  y 2  8 y  25
Since ABCD is a parallelogram and opposite sides of a parallelogram are equal
AB  CD and AD  BC
AB  CD
AB 2  CD 2
 x 2  18 x  y 2  16 y  145  16
 x 2  18 x  y 2  16 y  145  16  0
 x 2  18 x  y 2  16 y  129  0 ………..(1)
BC  AD
BC 2  AD2
x 2  6 x  y 2  8 y  25  36
 x 2  6 x  y 2  8 y  25  36  0
 x 2  6 x  y 2  8 y  11  0 ………..(2)
x  9, y  4
The fourth vertex is D  9, 4 

21. Find the circumcenter of the triangle whose vertices are (—2, —3), (— 1, 0), (7, — 6).
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Circumcenter of a triangle is the point of intersection of all the three perpendicular
bisectors of the sides of triangle. So, the vertices of the triangle lie on the circumference of
the circle.
Let the coordinates of the circumcenter of the triangle be  x, y 
  x, y  will the equidistant from the vertices of the triangle.

 x2  x1    y2  y1 
2 2
Using distance formula , it is obtained:

D1   x  2    y  3
2 2

 D1  x 2  4  4 x  y 2  9  6 y (Taking points  x, y  and  2, 3 )

 D1  x 2  y 2  4 x  6 y  13

D2   x  1   y  0 (Taking points  x, y  and  1, 0  )


2 2

 D2  x 2  1  2 x  y 2

D3   x  7    y  6 (Taking points  x, y  and  7, 6  )


2 2

 D3  x 2  49  14 x  y 2  36  12 y

 D3  x 2  y 2  14 x  12 y  85
As  x, y  is equidistant from all the three vertices
So, D1  D2  D3
D1  D2
 x 2  y 2  4 x  6 y  13  x 2  1  2 x  y 2
 x 2  y 2  4 x  6 y  13  x 2  1  2 x  y 2
 4 x  6 y  2 x  1  13
 2 x  6 y  12
 x  3 y  6 ……….(1)
D2  D3
 x 2  1  2 x  y 2  x 2  y 2  14 x  12 y  85
 x 2  1  2 x  y 2  x 2  y 2  14 x  12 y  85
 2 x  14 x  12 y  85  1
 16 x  12 y  84
 4 x  3 y  21 ……….(2)
Adding equations (1) and (2):
x  3 y  4 x  3 y  6  21
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5x  15
15
x
3
 x3
When x  3, we get
4  3  21
y [Using (2)]
3
12  21
y
3
9
 y
3
 y  3
  3, 3 are the coordinates of the circumcenter of the triangle

22. Find the angle subtended at the origin by the line segment whose end points are (0, 100)
and (10, 0).

Sol:
Let the point P  0,100  and Q 10, 0  be the given points.
 The angle subtended by the line segment PQ at the origin O is 90.

23. Find the centre of the circle passing through (5, — 8), (2, — 9) and (2, 1).
Sol:
Let the center of the circle be O  x, y 
Since radii of the circle is constant
Hence, distance of O from A  5, 8 , B  2, 9  and C  2,1 will be constant and equal
 OA2  OB 2  OC 2
 x  5   y  B    x  2   y  9
2 2 2 2

x 2  25  10 x  y 2  64  16 y  x 2  4  4 x  y 2  81  18 y
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
6 x  2 y  4  0
3x  y  2  0
y  2  3x ………….(i)
Also, OB2  OC 2
 x  2   y  9    y  1
2 2 2

y 2  81  18 y  y 2  1  2 y
80  20 y  0
y  4
Substituting y in (i)
4  2  3x
3x  6
x2
Hence center of circle  2, 4 

24. Find the value of k, if the point P (0, 2) is equidistant from (3, k) and (k, 5).
Sol:
Let the point P  0, 2  is equidistant from A  3, k  and  k ,5 
PA  PB
PA2  PB 2
3  0   k  2   k  0  5  2
2 2 2 2

 9  k 2  4  4k  k 2  9.
 9  k 2  4  4k  k 2  9  0
 4  4k  0
 4k  4
 k 1

25. If two opposite vertices of a square are (5, 4) and (1, —6), find the coordinates of its
remaining two vertices.
Sol:
Let ABCD be a square and let A  5, 4  and C 1, 6  be the given points.
Let  x, y  be the coordinates of B.
AB  BC
AB 2  BC 2
 x  5   y  4    x  1   y  6 
2 2 2 2

 x 2  25  10 x  y 2  16  8 y  x 2  1  2 x  y 2  36  12 y
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 x 2  10 x  y 2  8 y  x 2  2 x  y 2  12 y  1  36  25  16
 8 x  20 y  4
 8 x  20 y  4
20 y  4
x
8
4  5 y  1
x
8
5 y 1
x
2
1 5y
x ………..(1)
2
In right triangle ABC
AB 2  BC 2  AC 2
 x  5   y  4    x  1   y  6    5  1   4  6 
2 2 2 2 2 2

 x 2  25  10 x  y 2  16  8 y  x 2  1  2 x  y 2  36  12 y  16  100
 2 x 2  2 y 2  12 x  4 y  116  78
 2 x 2  2 y 2  12  4 y  38
 x 2  y 2  6 x  2 y  19
 x 2  y 2  6 x  2 y  19  0 ………..(2)
Substituting the value of x form (1) in (2), we get
 1 5y   1 5y 
2

  y  6   2 y  19  0
2

 2   2 
1  5 y 
2

  y 2  3 1  5 y   2 y  19  0
4
1  25 y 2  10 y
  y 2  3  15 y  2 y  19  0
4
1  25 y 2  10 y  4 y 2  12  60 y  8 y  76
 0
4
 29 y 2  58 y  87  0
 y2  2 y  3  0
 y2  3y  y  3  0
 y  y  3   1 y  3   0
  y  3 y  1  0
 y  3, y  1
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Substituting y  3 and y  1 in equation (1), we get
1  5  3
x
2
1  15
x
2
 x 8
1  5 1
x
2
1 5
x
2
4
x
2
 x  2
Hence, the required vertices of the square are  2,1 and  8, 3 .

26. Show that the points (—3, 2), (—5, —5), (2, —3) and (4, 4) are the vertices of a rhombus.
Find the area of this rhombus.

Sol:
A  3, 2  , B  5, 5  , C  2, 3 and D  4, 4  be the given points.

AB   5  3   5  2
2 2

 AB   2   7 
2 2

 AB  4  49
 AB  53
BC   2  5   5  2
2 2

 BC   7    2
2 2

 BC  49  4
 BC  53
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

CD   4  2    4  3
2 2

 CD   2   7 
2 2

 CD  4  49
 CD  53
AD   4  3   4  2 
2 2

 AD   7    2
2 2

 AD  49  4
 AD  53
AC   2  3   3  2
2 2

 AC  5   5
2 2

 AC  25  25
 AC  50
BD   4  5   4  5
2 2

 BD  9  9
2 2

 BD  81  81
 BD  162
Since AB  BC  CD  AD and diagonals AC  BD
 ABCD is a rhombus
1
Area of rhombus ABCD   AC  BD
2
1
  50  162
2
1
  90
2
 45 sq. units

27. Find the coordinates of the circumcenter of the triangle whose vertices are (3, 0), (—1, —
6) and (4,—1). Also, find its circumradius.
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Sol:
Let A  3, 0  , B  1, 6  and C  4, 1 be the given points.
Let O  x, y  be the circumcenter of the triangle
OA  OB  OC
OA2  OB 2
 x  3   y  0    x  1   y  6 
2 2 2 2

 x 2  9  6 x  y 2  x 2  1  2 x  y 2  36  12 y
 x 2  6 x  y 2  x 2  2 x  y 2  12 y  1  36  9
 8 x  12 y  28
 2 x  3 y  7
 2 x  3 y  7 ………(1)
Again
OB2  OC 2
 x  1   y  6    x  4    y  1
2 2 2 2

 x 2  1  2 x  y 2  36  12 y  x 2  16  8 x  y 2  1  2 y
 x 2  2 x  y 2  12 y  x 2  8 x  y 2  2 y  16  1  1  36
 10 x  10 y  20
 x  y  2 ………(2)
Solving (1) and (2), we get
x  1, y  3
Hence circumcenter of the triangle is 1, 3

Circum radius  1  1   3  6
2 2

  2    3
2 2

 49
13 units
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
28. Find a point on the x-axis which is equidistant from the points (7, 6) and (—3, 4).
Sol:
Let A  7, 6  and B  3, 4  be the given points.
Let P  x.0  be the point on x  axis such that PA  PB
PA  PB
PA2  PB 2
 x  7  0  6   x  3   0  4 
2 2 2 2

 x 2  49  14 x  36  x 2  9  6 x  16
 x 2  14  x 2  6 x  9  16  36  49
 20 x  60
 x3
The point on x  axis is  3, 0  .

29. (i) Show that the points A(5, 6), B (1, 5), C(2, 1)and D(6, 2) are the vertices of a square.
(ii) Prove that the points A (2, 3), B (—2, 2), C (—1, —2), and D (3, —1) are the vertices
of a square ABCD.

Sol:
A  5, 6  , B 1,5  , C  2,1 and D  6, 2  are the given points

AB   5  1   6  5
2 2

 AB   4  1
2 2

 AB  16  1
 AB  17
BC  1  2  5  1
2 2

 BC   1   4
2 2

 BC  1  16
 BC  17
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

CD   6  2   2 1
2 2

 CD   4  1
2 2

 CD  16  1
 CD  17
AD   6  5   2  6 
2 2

 AD  1   4
2 2

 AD  1  16
 AD  17
AC   5  2   6  1
2 2

 AC   3   5 
2 2

 AC  9  25
 AC  34
BD   6 1   2  5
2 2

 BD  5   3
2 2

 BD  25  9
 BD  34
Since AB  BC  CD  AD and diagonals AC  BD
 ABCD is a square

30. Find the point on x-axis which is equidistant from the points (—2, 5) and (2,—3).
Sol:
Let A  2,5  and  2, 3  be the given points.
Let  x, 0  be the point on x  axis
Such that PA  PB
PA  PB
PA2  PB 2
 x  2    0  5   x  2    0  3
2 2 2 2

 x 2  4  4 x  25  x 2  4  4 x  9
 x 2  4 x  x 2  4 x  4  9  4  25
 8x  16
 x  2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

The point on x  axis is  2, 0 

31. Find the value of x such that PQ = QR where the coordinates of P, Q and R are (6,—1), (1,
3) and (x, 8) respectively.
Sol:
P  6, 1 , Q 1,3 and R  x,8  are the given points.
PQ  QR
PQ 2  QR 2
  6  1   1  3   x  1  8  3
2 2 2 2

  5    4   x 2  1  2 x   5 
2 2 2

 25  16  x 2  1  2 x  25
 41  x 2  2 x  26
 x 2  2 x  26  41  0
 x 2  2 x  15  0
 x 2  5x  3x  15  0
 x  x  5  3  x  5  0
  x  3 x  5   0
 x  3 or x  5

32. Prove that the points (0, 0), (5, 5) and (—5, 5) are the vertices of a right isosceles triangle.
Sol:
Let A  0, 0  , B  5,5  and C  5,5  be the given points

AB  5  0  5  0
2 2

 AB  25  25
 AB  50
BC   5  5   5  5
2 2

 BC  10 0
2

 BC  100
AC   0  5   0  5
2 2

 AC  25  25
 AC  50
AB 2  50
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

BC 2  100
AC 2  50
 AB 2  AC 2  BC 2
Since, AB  AC and AB 2  AC 2  BC 2
 ABC is a right isosceles triangle

33. If the point P(x, y ) is equidistant from the points A(5, 1) and B (1, 5), prove that x = y.
Sol:
Since P  x, y  is equidistant from A  5,1 and B 1,5 
AP  BP
Hence, AP 2  BP 2
 x  5   y  1   x  1   y  5 
2 2 2 2

x 2  25  10 x  y 2  1  2 y  x 2  1  2 x  y 2  25  10 y
10 x  2 x  10 y  2 y
8 x  8 y
x y
Hence, proved.

34. If Q (0, 1) is equidistant from P (5, —3) and R (x, 6), find the values of x. Also, find the
distances QR and PR
Sol:
Given Q  0,1 is equidistant from P  5, 3 and R  x, 6  so PQ  QR

 5  0   3 1   0  x   1  6 
2 2 2 2

 5   4    x    5
2 2 2 2

25  16  x 2  25
41  x 2  25
16  x 2
x  4
So, point R is  4, 6  or  4, 6 
When point R is  4, 6 

PR   5  4   3  6  12   9   1  81  82
2 2

QR   0  4  1  6   4   5  16  25  41
2 2 2 2

When point R is  4, 6 


Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

5   4   3  6 9   9


2
PR 
2

2 2
 81  81  9 2

 0  4  1  6  4    5
2
QR 
2

2 2
 16  25  41

35. Find the values of y for which the distance between the points P (2, —3) and Q (10, y) is
10 units
Sol:
Given that distance between  2, 3  and 10, y  is 10

 2  10   3  y   10
2 2
Therefore using distance formula

 8   3  y   10
2 2

64   y  3  100
2

 y  3
2
 36
y  3  6
y  3  6 or y  3  6
Therefore y  3 or 9

36. Find the centre of the circle passing through (6, —6), (3, —7) and (3, 3)
Sol:

Let O  x, y  be the center of the circle passing through A  6, 6  , B  3, 7  and C  3,3


OA  OB  OC
OA2  OB 2
 x  6   y  6   x  3   y  7 
2 2 2 2

 x 2  36  12 x  y 2  36  12 y  x 2  9  6 x  y 2  49  14 y
 x 2  36  12 x  y 2  36  12 y  x 2  9  6 x  y 2  49  14 y  0
 6 x  2 y  36  36  9  49
 6 x  2 y  14 …………(1)
OB  OC
2 2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 x  3   y  7    x  3   y  3
2 2 2 2

 x 2  9  6 x  y 2  49  14 y  x 2  9  6 x  y 2  9  6 y
 x 2  6 x  y 2  14 y  x 2  6 x  y 2  6 y  9  9  9  49
 20 y  40
 y  2
Substituting y  2 in (1)
6 x  2  2   14
 6 x  4  14
 6 x  14  4
 6 x  18
 x3
The centre of the circle is  3, 2 

37. Two opposite vertices of a square are (—1, 2) and (3, 2). Find the coordinates of other two
vertices.
Sol:

Let ABCD be a square and let A  1, 2  and  3, 2  be the opposite vertices and let B  x, y 
be the unknown vertex.
AB  BC
AB 2  BC 2
 x  1   y  2    x  3   y  2 
2 2 2 2

 x2  1  2 x  y 2  4  4 y  x2  9  6 x  y 2  4  4 y
 x2  2 x  y 2  4 y  x2  6 x  y 2  4 y  9  4  1  4
 8x  8
 x 1 ………(1)

In right triangle ABC


AB 2  BC 2  AC 2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

  x  1   y  2    x  3   y  2    3  1   2  2 
2 2 2 2 2 2

 x 2  1  2 x  y 2  4  4 y  x 2  9  6 x  y 2  4  4 y  16
 2 x 2  2 y 2  4 x  8 y  16  1  4  9  4
 2 x 2  2 y 2  4 x  8 y  2 ………(2)
Substituting x  1 from (1) and (2)
2 1  2 y 2  4 1  8 y  2
2

 2  2 y 2  4  8 y  2
 2 y2  8 y  2  2  0
 2 y2  8 y  0
 2 y  y  4  0
 y  0, or y  4
Hence the required vertices of the square are 1, 0  and 1, 4 

38. Name the quadrilateral formed, if any, by the following points, and give reasons for your
answers:
(i) A (—1, — 2), B (1, 0), C (—1, 2), D (—3, 0)
(ii) A (—3, 5), B (3, 1), C (0, 3), D (—1, — 4)
(iii) A (4, 5), B (7, 6), C (4, 3), D (1, 2)
Sol:
(i) Let, A   1, 2  , B  1, 0  , C   1, 2,  , D  3, 0 

AB   1 1   2  0   2   2  44  8  2 2


2 2 2 2

1   1   0  2  2    2 
2
BC 
2

2 2
 44  8  2 2

 1   3   2  0  2   2
2
CD 
2

2 2
 44  8  2 2

 1   3   2  0  2   2
2
AD 
2

2 2
 4 4  8  2 2

 1   1   2  2  02   4   16  4
2
Diagonal AC 
2 2

1   3   0  0  4
2
Diagonal BD 
2

2
 02  16  4
Here, all sides of this quadrilateral are of same length and also diagonals are of same
length. So, given points are vertices of a square
(ii) Let, A   3,5  , B   3,1 , C   0,3 , D   1, 4 

AB   3  3  5 1   6   4  36  16  52  2 13
2 2 2 2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

BC   3  0  1  3  3   2  9  4  13
2 2 2 2

 0   1  3   4 1   7 


2 2
CD  
2 2
 1  49  50  5 2

 3   1  5   4  2   9 
2 2
AD  
2 2
 4  81  85
Here, all sides of this quadrilateral are of different length . So, we can say that it is only a
general quadrilateral not specific like square, rectangle etc.
(iii) Let, A   4,5  , B   7, 6  , C   4,3 , D  1, 4 

AB   4  7   5  6   3   1  9  1  10
2 2 2 2

BC   7  4    6  3   3   3  9  9  18
2 2 2 2

CD   4 1  3  2  3  1  9  1  10


2 2 2 2

AD   4 1  5  2   3   3   9  9  18
2 2 2 2

Diagonal AC   4  4    5  3   0   2  04  2
2 2 2 2

Diagonal BD   7 1   6  2   6   4  36  16  52  13 2
2 2 2 2

Here, opposite sides of this quadrilateral are of same length but diagonals are different
length . So, given points are vertices of a parallelogram.

39. Find the equation of the perpendicular bisector of the line segment joining points (7,1) and
(3, 5).
Sol:
Bisector passes through midpoint
  7  3 1  5  
Midpoint of  7,1 and  3,5    ,    5,3
 2 2 
Perpendicular bisector has slope that is negative reciprocal of line segment joining points
 7,1 and  3,5 
 5 1  4
Slope of line segment     1
 3  7   4 
Perpendicular bisector has slope = 1 and passes through point  4, 4 
Use point slope form
y  3  1 x  5 
y  x2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
40. Prove that the points (3, 0), (4, 5), (—1, 4) and (—2, —1), taken in order, form a rhombus.
Also, find its area.
Sol:

Let the given vertices be A  3, 0  , B  4,5  , C  1, 4  and D  2, 1

Length of AB   4  3   5  0   1  25  26
2 2

Length of BC   1  4   4  5  25  1  26
2 2

Length of CD   2  1   1  4  1  25  26
2 2

Length of DA   3  2   0  1  25  1  26
2 2

Length of diagonal AC  3   1   0  4  


2 2
 
 16  16  4 2

Length of diagonal BD   4   2    5   1 


2 2

 
 36  36  6 2
Here all sides of the quadrilateral ABCD are off same lengths but the diagonals are of
different lengths
So, ABCD is a rhombus.
1
Therefore area of rhombus ABCD   4 2  6 2
2
 24 square units

41. In the seating arrangement of desks in a classroom three students Rohini, Sandhya and Bina
are seated at A (3, 1), B (6, 4) and C (8, 6). Do you think they are seated in a line?
Sol:
Let A  3,1 , B  6, 4  and C  8, 6  be thee given points

AB   6  3   4  1
2 2

 AB   3   3
2 2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 AB  9  9
 AB  18
 AB  3 2
BC  8  6    6  4 
2 2

 BC   2   2
2 2

 BC  4  4
 BC  8
 BC  2 2
AC  8  3   6  1
2 2

 AC   5   5
2 2

 AC  25  25
 AC  50
 AC  5 2
Since, AB  BC  AC
Points A, B, C are collinear
Hence, Rohini, Sandhya and Bina are seated in a line

42. Find a point on y-axis which is equidistant from the points (5, — 2) and (— 3, 2).
Sol:
Let A  5, 2  and B  3, 2  be the given points,
Let P  0, y  be the point on y  axis
PA  PB
PA2  PB 2
 0  5   y  2    0  3   y  2 
2 2 2 2

 25  y 2  4  4 y  9  y 2  4  4 y
 y 2  4 y  y 2  4 y  9  4  4  25
 8 y  16
 y  2

43. Find a relation between x and y such that the point (x, y) is equidistant from the points (3,
6) and (—3, 4).
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Point  x, y  is equidistant form  3, 6  and  3, 4 

 x  3   y  6   x   3   y  4
2 2 2

2
Therefore

 x  3   y  6    x  3   y  4 
2 2 2 2

 x  3   y  6    x  3   y  4 
2 2 2 2

x 2  9  6 x  y 2  36  12 y  x 2  9  6 x  y 2  16  8 y
36  16  6 x  6 x  12 y  8 y
20  12 x  4 y
3x  y  5

44. If a point A (0, 2) is equidistant from the points B (3, p) and C (p, 5), then find the value of
p.
Sol:
A  0, 2  , B  3, P  and C  p,5 are given points
It is given that AB  AC
 AB2  AC 2
3  0   p  2   p  0  5  2
2 2 2 2

9  p2  4  4 p  p2  9
44p  0
p 1
Exercise 14.3

1. Find the coordinates of the point which divides the line segment joining (— 1, 3) and (4, —
7) internally in the ratio 3 : 4.
Sol:
Let P  x, y  be the required point.
mx2  nx1
x
mn
my  ny1
y 2
mn
Here, x1  1
y1  3
x2  4
y2  7
m : n  3: 4
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3  4  4   1
x 3
3 4
12  4
x
7
8
x
7
3   7   4  3
y
3 4
21  12
y
7
9
y
7
 8 9 
The coordinates of P are  , 
7 7 

2. Find the points of trisection of the line segment joining the points:
(i) (5, —6) and (— 7, 5),
(ii) (3, —2) and (—3, —4)
(iii) (2, —2) and (—7, 4).
Sol:
(i) Let P and Q be the point of trisection of AB i.e., AP  PQ  QB

 5, 6   7,5 

Therefore, P divides AB internally in the ratio of 1:2, thereby applying section formula, the
coordinates of P will be
 1 7   2  5    1 5   2  6    7 
 ,  i.e., 1, 
 1 2   1 2   3 

Now, Q also divides AB internally in the ratio of 2:1 there its coordinates are
 2  7   1 5   2  5   1 6   4
 , i.e.,  3, 
 2 1  2 1  3
(ii)
Let P, Q be the point of tri section of AB i.e.,
AP  PQ  QB
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 3, 2   3, 4 

Therefore, P divides AB internally in the ratio of 1:2


Hence by applying section formula, Coordinates of P are
  1 3  2  3  1 4   1 2    8 
  ,  i.e., 1, 
 1 2  1 2   3 
Now, Q also divides as internally in the ratio of 2:1
So, the coordinates of Q are

  2  3  1 3  2  4   1 2    10 
  ,  i.e.,  1, 
 2 1  2 1   3 
Let P and Q be the points of trisection of AB i.e., AP  PQ  OQ

Therefore, P divides AB internally in the ratio 1 : 2. Therefore, the coordinates of P, by


applying the section formula, are
  1 7   2  2    1 4   2  2   
   ,    , i.e.,  1, 0 
  1  2    1  2   

Now, Q also divides AB internally in the ration 2 : 1. So, the coordinates of Q are
 2  7   1 2  2  4   1 2  
 ,  , i.e.,  4, 2 
 2 1 2 1 

3. Find the coordinates of the point where the diagonals of the parallelogram formed by
joining the points (—2, —1), (1, 0), (4, 3) and (1, 2) meet.
Sol:

Let P  x, y  be the given points.


Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
We know that diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other.
2  4
x
2
2
 x  1
2
1  3 2
y  1
2 2
Coordinates of P are 1,1

4. Prove that the points (3, —2), (4, 0), (6, —3) and (5, —5) are the vertices of a
parallelogram.
Sol:

Let P  x, y  be the point of intersection of diagonals AC and 80 of ABCD.


3 6 9
x 
2 2
2  3 5
y 
2 2
 9 5 
Mid – point of AC   , 
5 2 
Again,
5 4 9
x 
2 2
5  0 5
y 
2 2
9 5
Mid – point of BD   ,  
2 2
Here mid-point of AC – Mid - point of BD i.e, diagonals AC and BD bisect each other.

We know that diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other


 ABCD is a parallelogram.
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5. Three consecutive vertices of a parallelogram are (—2, —1), (1, 0) and (4, 3). Find the
fourth vertex.
Sol:

Let A  2, 1 , B 1, 0  , C  4,3 and D  x, y  be the vertices of a parallelogram ABCD taken
in order.

Since the diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other.

 Coordinates of the mid - point of AC = Coordinates of the mid-point of BD.


2  4 1  x
 
2 2
2 x 1
 
2 2
x 1
1 
2
 x 1  2
 x 1
1  3 y  0
And, 
2 2
2 y
 
2 2
 y2
Hence, fourth vertex of the parallelogram is 1, 2 

6. The points (3, —4) and (—6, 2) are the extremities of a diagonal of a parallelogram. If the
third vertex is (—1, —3). Find the coordinates of the fourth vertex.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Let A  3, 4  and C  6, 2  be the extremities of diagonal AC and B  1, 3 , D  x, y  be


the extremities of diagonal BD.

Since the diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other.

Coordinates of mid-point of AC = Coordinates of mid point of BD.


3  6 x 1
 
2 2
3 x  1
 
2 2
 x  2
4  2 y  3
And, 
2 2
2 y  3
 
2 2
 y 1
Hence, fourth vertex of parallelogram is  2,1

7. Find the ratio in which the point (2, y) divides the line segment joining the points A (— 2,
2) and B ( 3, 7). Also, find the value of y.
Sol:
Let the point P  2, y  divide the line segment joining the points A  2, 2  and B  3, 7  in the
ratio K :1
Then, the coordinates of P are
 3k   2  1 7k  2 1 
 , 
 k  1 k1 
 3k  2 7 k  2 
 ,
 k  1 k  1 
But the coordinates of P are given as  2, y 
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3k  2
 2
k 1
 3k  2  2k  2
 3k  2k  2  2
k 4

7k  2
y
k 1
Putting the value of k, we get
7 4  2
y
4 1
30
y
5
6 y
i.e., y  6
Hence the ratio is 4 :1 and y  6.

8. If A (—1, 3), B (1, —1) and C (5, 1) are the vertices of a triangle ABC, find the length of
the median through A.
Sol:

Let A 1,3 , B 1, 1 and C  5,1 be the vertices of triangle ABC and let AD be the median
through A.

Since, AD is the median, D is the mid-point of BC

 1  5 1  1 
Coordinates of D are  ,    3, 0 
 2 2 

Length of median AD  3  1   0  3
2 2

  4   3
2 2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 16  9
 25
 5 units.

9. If the coordinates of the mid-points of the sides of a triangle are (1, 1), (2, —3) and (3, 4),
find the vertices of the triangle.
Sol:

Let A  x1 , y1  , B  x2 , y2  and C  x3 , y3  be the vertices of ABC.


Let D 1,1 , E  2, 3 and F  3, 4  be the mid-points of sides BC , CA and AB respectively.
Since, D is the mid-point of BC.
x x y  y3
 2 3  1 and 2 1
2 2
 x2  x3  2 and y2  y3  2 ………..(i)
Similarly E and F are the mid-points of CA and AB respectively.
x x y y
 1 3  2 and 1 3  3
2 2
 x1  x3  4 and y1  y3  6 ………..(ii)
x1  x2 y y
And,  3 and 1 2  4
2 2
 x1  x2  6 and y1  y2  8 ………..(iii)
From (i), (ii) and (iii) we get
x2  x3  x1  x3  x1  x2  2  4  6 and
y2  y3  y1  y3  y1  y2  2   6   8
 2  x1  x2  x3   12 and 2  y1  y2  y3   4
x1  x2  x3  6 and y1  y2  y3  2 ………..(iv)
From (i) and (iv) we get
x1  2  6 and y1  2  2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
 x1  6  2 and  y2  2  2 2
 x1  4  y1  0
So the coordinates of A are  4, 0 
From (ii) and (iv) we get
x2  4  6 and y2   6   2
 x2  2  y2  6  2  y2  8
So the coordinates of B are  2,8 
From (iii) and (iv) we get
6  x3  6 and 8  y 3  2
 x3  6  6  y3  2  8
 x3  0 and y3  6
So the coordinates of C are  0, 6 
Hence, the vertices of triangle ABC are:
A  4, 0  , B  2,8  and C  0, 6 

10. If a vertex of a triangle be (1, 1) and the middle points of the sides through it be (—2, 3)
and (5, 2), find the other vertices.
Sol:

Let A 1,1 , be the given vertex


And, D  2,3 , E  5, 2  be the mid-point of AB and AC respectively,

Now, since D and E are the midpoints of AB and AC


x1  1 y 1
 2, 1 3
2 2
 x1  1  4  y 1  1  6
 x1  5  y1  5
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

So, the coordinates of B are  5,5 


x2  1 y 2 1
And,  5, 2
2 2
 x2  1  10  y2  1  4
 x2  9  y2  3
So the coordinates of C are  9,3 
Hence, the over vertices are B  5,5  and C  9,3

11. (i) In what ratio is the line segment joining the points (—2, —3) and (3, 7) divided by the y-
axis? Also, find the coordinates of the point of division.
(ii) In what ratio is the line segment joining (—3, —1) and (—8, —9) divided at the point
21
(− 5, − 5 )?
Sol:

Suppose y  axis divides PQ in the ration K :1 at R


Then, the coordinates of the point of division are:
 3k   2  1 7 k   3 1 
R , 
 k  1 k 1 
 3k  2 7 k  3 
 R ,
 k  1 k  1 
Since, R lies on y  axis and x  coordinate of every point on y-axis is zero
3k  2
 0
k 1
 3k  2  0
 3k  2
2
k 
3
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2
Hence, the required ratio is :1
3
i.e., 2 : 3
2
Putting k  in the coordinates of R
3
We get,  0,1

Let the point P divide AB in the ratio K :1


 8k  3 9k  1 
Then, the coordinates of P are  ,
 k 1 k  1 
 21 
But the coordinates of P are given as  5, 
 5 
8k  3
  5
k 1
 8k  3  5k  5
 8k  5k  5  3
 3k  2
2
k 
3
2
Hence, the point P divides AB in the ratio :1  2 : 3
3

12. If the mid-point of the line joining (3, 4) and (k, 7) is (x, y) and 2 x + 2 y + 1 = 0. find the
value of k.
Sol:

Since,  x, y  is the mid-point


3 k 4  7 11
x ,y 
2 2 2
Again,
2x  2 y 1  0

 2
 3  k   2  11  1  0
2 2
 3  k  11  1  0
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
 3  k  12  0
 k  15  0
 k  15

13. Determine the ratio in which the straight line x — y — 2 = 0 divides the line segment
joining (3, —1) and (8, 9).
Sol:
Suppose the line x  y  2  0 divides the line segment joining A  3, 1 and B  8,9  in the
ratio K :1 at point P. Then the coordinates of P are
 8k  3 9k  1 
 , 
 k 1 k 1 
But P lies on x  y  2  0
8k  3 9k  1
  2  0
k 1 k 1
8k  3 9k  1
  2
k 1 k 1
8k  3  9k  1
 2
k 1
 k  4  2k  2
 k  2k  2  4
2
 3k  2  k 
3
So, the required ratio is 2 : 3

14. Find the ratio in which the line segment joining (—2, —3) and (5, 6) is divided by
(i) x-axis
(ii) y-axis.
Also, find the coordinates of the point of division in each case.
Sol:
(i) Suppose x  axis divides AB in the ratio K :1 at point P
Then, the coordinates of the point of division of division are
 5k  2 6k  3 
P ,
 k  1 k  1 
Since, P lies on x-axis, and y-coordinates of every point on x-axis is zero.
6k  3
 0
k 1
 6k  3  0
 6k  3
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3 1
k  k 
6 2
Hence, the required ratio is 1: 2
1
Putting k  in the coordinates of P
2
1 
We find that its coordinates are  , 0  .
3 

(ii) Suppose y-axis divides AB in the ratio k :1 at point Q.


Then, the coordinates of the point of division are
 5k  2 6k  3 
Q ,
 k  1 k  1 
Since, Q lies on y  axis and x-coordinates of every point on y-axis is zero.
5k  2
 0
k 1
 5k  2  0
2
k 
5
2
Hence, the required ratio is :1  2 : 5
5
2
Putting k  in thee coordinates of Q.
5
 3 
We find that the coordinates are  0, 
 7 

15. Prove that the points (4, 5), (7, 6), (6, 3), (3, 2) are the vertices of a parallelogram. Is it a
rectangle.
Sol:

Let A  4,5  , B  7, 6  , C  6,3 and D  3, 2  be the given points.


And, P the points of intersection of AC and BD.
 46 53
Coordinates of the mid-point of AC are  ,    5, 4 
 2 2 
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 73 62
Coordinates of the mid-point of BD are  ,    5, 4 
 2 2 
Thus, AC and BD have the same mid-point.
Hence, ABCD is a parallelogram
Now, we shall see whether ABCD is a rectangle.
We have,
AC   6  4    3  5
2 2

 AC  4  4
 AC  8
And, BD   7  3   6  2 
2 2

 BD  16  16
 BD  32
Since, AC  BD
So, ABCD is not a rectangle

16. Prove that (4, 3), (6, 4), (5, 6) and (3, 5) are the angular points of a square.
Sol:

Let A  4,3 , B  6, 4  , C  5, 6  and D  3,5  be the given points.


 45 3 6   9 9 
Coordinates of the mid-point of AC are  ,  , 
 2 2  2 2
 63 45  9 9 
Coordinates of the mid-point of BD are  ,  , 
 2 2  2 2
AC and BD have the same mid-point
 ABCD is a parallelogram
Now,
AB   6  4    4  3
2 2

 AB  4  1
 AB  5
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

And, BC   6  5   4  6 
2 2

 BC  1  4
 BC  5
 AB  BC
So, ABCD is a parallelogram whose adjacent sides are equal
 ABCD is a rhombus
We have,
AC   5  4    6  3
2 2

 AC  10

BD   6  3   4  5
2 2

 BD  10
AC  BD
Hence, ABCD is a square

17. Prove that the points (—4, —1), (—2, —4), (4, 0) and (2, 3) are the vertices of a rectangle.
Sol:

Let A  4, 1 , B  2, 4  , C  4, 0  and D  2,3 be the given points


 4  4 1  0   1 
Coordinates of the mid-point of AC are  ,    0, 
 2 2   2 
 2  2 4  3   1 
Coordinates of the mid-point of BD are  ,    0, 
 2 2   2 
Thus AC and BD have the same mid-point
AC   4  4   0  1  65
2 2

BD   2  2   4  3  65
2 2

Hence ABCD is a rectangle


Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
18. Find the lengths of the medians of a triangle whose vertices are A (−1, 3), B (1, −1) and C
(5,1).
Sol:

Let AD, BF and CE be the medians of ABCD


 5  1 1 1 
Coordinates of D are  ,    3, 0 
 2 2 
 1  1 3  1 
Coordinates of E are  ,    0,1
 2 2 
 5 1 1  3 
Coordinates of F are  ,    2, 2 
 2 2 

Length of AD   1  3  3  0  5 units
2 2

Length of BF   2  1   2  1  10 units
2 2

Length of CE  5  0  1 1  5 units


2 2

19. Three vertices of a parallelogram are (a + b, a — b), (2a + b, 2a — b), (a — b, a + b). Find
the fourth vertex.
Sol:

Let A  a  b, a  b  , B  2a  b, 2a  b  , C  a  b, a  b  and  x, y  be the given points


Since, the diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other
 Coordinates of the midpoint of AC  Coordinates of the midpoint of BD
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 a  b  a  b a  b  a  b   2a  b  x 2a  b  y 
 ,  , 
 2 2   2 2 
 2 a  b  x 2a  b  y 
  a, a    , 
 2 2 
2a  b  x 2a  b  y
  a and a
2 2
 2a  b  x  2a  2a  b  y  2a
 x  b  y  b
Hence, the fourth vertex is  b, b  .

20. If two vertices of a parallelogram are (3, 2), (—1, 0) and the diagonals cut at (2, —5), find
the other vertices of the parallelogram.
Sol:

Let A  3, 2  , B  1, 0  , C  x1 , y1  and D  x2 , y2  be the given points.


Since, the diagonals of parallelogram bisect each other.
Coordinates of the midpoint of AC  Coordinates of the midpoint of BD
 x1  3 y1  2   x2  1 y2  0 
 ,  , 
 2 2   2 2 
x1  3 y 2
But  2, 1  5
2 2
 x1  3  4  y1  10  2
 x1  1  y1  12
x2  1
And, 2
2
 x2  1  4
 x2  5
y2  0
 5
2
y2  10
Hence, the other vertices of parallelogram are 1, 12  and  5, 10  .
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
21. If the coordinates of the mid-points of the sides of a triangle are (3, 4), (4, 6) and (5, 7),
find its vertices
Sol:

 
Let A  x1 , y1  , B  x2 , y2  and C x3 , y3 be the vertices of ABC

Let D  3, 4  , E  4, 6  and F  5, 7  be the midpoints of BC , CA and AB.


Since, D is the midpoint of BC
x x y  y3
 2 3  3 and 2 4
2 2
 x2  x3  6 and y2  y3  8 ……….(i)
Since, E is the midpoint of CA
x x y y
 1 3  4 and 1 3  6
2 2
 x1  x3  8 and y1  y3  12 ……….(ii)
Since F is the mid-point of AB
x1  x2 y y
 5 and 1 2  7
2 2
 x1  x2  10 and y1  y3  14 ……….(iii)
From (i), (ii) and (iii), we get
x2  x3  x1  x3  x1  x2  6  8  10
x1  x2  x3  12 ……….(iv)
And y2  y3  y1  y3  y1  y2  8  12  14
y1  y2  y3  17 ……….(iv)
From (i) and (iv)
x1  6  12, y1  8  17
x1  6, y1  9
From (ii) and (iv)
x2  8  12, y2  12  17
x2  4, y2  5
From (iii) and (iv)
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
x3  10  12, y3  14  17
x3  2, y3  3
Hence the vertices of triangle ABC are  6,9  ;  4,5  ;  2,3

22. The line segment joining the points P (3, 3) and Q (6, — 6) is bisected at the points A and
B such that A is nearer to P. If A also lies on the line given by 2x + y + k = 0, find the value
of k.
Sol:

We are given PQ is the line segment, A and B are the points of trisection of PQ.
We know that PA : QA  1: 2
So, the coordinates of A are
 6 1  3  2 6 1  3  2 
 , 
 2 1 2 1 
12
 ,0
3
  4, 0 
Since, A lies on the line
2x  y  k  0
 2 4  0  k  0
8 k  0
 8  k  8

23. If the points (—2 , —1), (1, 0), (x, 3) and (1, y) form a parallelogram, find the values of x
and y.
Sol:

Let A  2, 1 , B 1, 0  , C  x,3 and D 1, y  be the given points.
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
We know that diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other
Coordinates of the mid-point of AC  Coordinates of the mid-point of BD
 x  2 3 1   1  1 y  0 
 ,  , 
 2 2   2 2 
 x2   y
 ,1  1, 
 2   2
x2 y
  1 and  1
2 2
 x2  2 y  2
x4 y2

24. The points A (2, 0), B (9, 1), C (11, 6) and D (4, 4) are the vertices of a quadrilateral
ABCD. Determine whether ABCD is a rhombus or not.
Sol:

Let A  2, 0  , B  9,1 , C 11, 6  and D  4, 4  be the given points.


 11  2 6  0   13 
Coordinates of midpoint AC are  ,    ,3 
 2 2   2 
 9  4 1  4   13 5 
Coordinates of midpoint BD are  ,  , 
 2 2   2 2
Since, coordinates of mid-point of AC  coordinates of mid-point of BD.
So, ABCD, is not a parallelogram. Hence, it is not a rhombus.

25. If three consecutive vertices of a parallelogram are (1, —2), (3, 6) and (5, 10), find its
fourth vertex.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Let A 1, 2  , B  3, 6  , C  5,10  and D  x, y  be the given points taken in order.


Since, diagonals of parallelogram bisect each other
Coordinates of mid-point of AC  Coordinates of midpoint of BD
 5  1 10  2   x  3 y  6 
 ,  , 
 2 2   2 2 
x3 y 6
  3, 4  ,
2 2
x3 y6
  3 and 4
2 2
 x3 6  y6 8
 x3  y2
Hence, the fourth vertex is  3, 2  .

26. If the points A (a, —11), B (5, b), C (2, 15) and D (1, 1) are the vertices of a parallelogram
ABCD, find the values of a and b.
Sol:

Let A  a, 11 , B  5, b  , C  2,15  and D 1,1 be the given points.


We know that diagonals of parallelogram bisect each other.
Coordinates of mid-point of AC  Coordinates of mid-point of BD
 a  2 15  11   5  1 b  1 
 ,  , 
 2 2   2 2 
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
a2 b 1
  3 and 2
2 2
 a  2  6  b 1  4
a4 b 3

27. If the coordinates of the mid-points of the sides of a triangle be (3, —2), (—3, 1) and (4, —
3), then find the coordinates of its vertices.
Sol:

Let A  x1 , y1  , B  x2 , y2  and C  x3 , y3  be the vertices of ABC


Let D  3, 2  , E  3,1 and F  4, 3 be the midpoint of sides BC , CA and AB respectively
Since, D is the midpoint of BC
x x y y
 2 3  3 and 2 3  2
2 2
 x2  x3  6 and y2  y3  4 …….(i)
Similarly, E and F are the midpoint of CA and AB respectively.
x x y y
 1 3  3 and 1 3  1
2 2
 x1  x3  6 and y1  y3  2 …….(ii)
And,
x x y y
 1 2  4 and 1 2  3
2 2
 x1  x2  8 and y1  y2  6 …….(iii)
From (i), (ii) and (iii), we have
x2  x3  x1  x3  x1  x2  6   6   8 and
y2  y3  y1  y3  y1  y2  4  2  6

 2  x1  x2  x3   8 and 2  y1  y2  y3   8
 x1  x2  x3  4 and y1  y2  y3  4 …….(iv)
From (i) and (iv)
x1  6  4 and y1  4  4
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
 x1  2  y1  0
So, the coordinates of A are  2, 0 
From (ii) and (iv)
x2  6  4 and y2  2  4
 x2  10  y2  6
So, the coordinates of B are 10, 6 
From (iii) and (iv)
x3  8  4 and y3  6  4
 x3  4  y3  2
So, the coordinates of C are  4, 2 
Hence, the vertices of ABC are A  2, 0  , B 10, 6  and C  4, 2  .

28. Find the lengths of the medians of a ΔABC having vertices at A (0,—1), B (2, 1) and C (0,
3).
Sol:

Let A  0,1 , B  2,1 and C  0,3 be the given points


Let AD, BE and CF be the medians
 2  0 1 3 
Coordinates of D are  ,   1, 2 
 2 2 
 0 3 1 
Coordinates of E are  ,    0,1
2 2 
 2  0 1 1 
Coordinates of F are  ,   1, 0 
 2 2 

Length of median AD  1  0   2  1  10 units


2 2

Length of median BE   2  0  1 1  2 units


2 2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Length of median CF  1  0   0  3  10 units


2 2

29. Find the lengths of the medians of a ΔABC having vertices at A (5, 1), B (1, 5), and C
(−3,-1).
Sol:

Let A  5,1 , B 1,5  and C  3, 1 be vertices of ABC


Let AD, BE and CF be the medians
 1  3 5 1 
Coordinates of D are  ,    1, 2 
 2 2 
 5  3 1 1 
Coordinates of E are  ,   1, 0 
 2 2 
 5 1 1 5 
Coordinates of F are  ,    3,3
 2 2 

Length of median AD  5  1  1  2  37 units


2 2

Length of median BE  1  1  5  0  5 units


2 2

Length of median CF  3  3  3  1  2 13  52 units


2 2

30. Find the coordinates of the points which divide the line segment joining the points (−4, 0)
and (0, 6) in four equal parts.
Sol:

Let A  4, 0  and B  0, 6  be the given points.


And, Let P, Q, R be the points which divide AB in four equal points..
We know AP : PB  1: 3
Coordinates of P are
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 1 0  3  4  1 6  3  0 
 , 
 1 3 1 3 
 3
  3, 
 2
We know that Q is midpoint of AB
 Coordinates of Q are
 3  0  1  4  3  6  1 0 
 , 
 3 1 3 1 
 9
  1, 
 2

31. Show. that the mid-point of the line segment joining the points (5, 7) and (3, 9) is also the
mid-point of the line segment joining the points (8, 6) and (0, 10).
Sol:
Let A  5, 7  , B  3,9  , C 8, 6  and D  0,,10  be the given points
 53 79 
Coordinates of the mid-point of AB are  ,    4,8 
 2 2 
 8  0 6  10 
Coordinates of the mid-point of CD are  ,    4,8 
 2 2 
Hence, the midpoints of AB = midpoint of CD.

32. Find the distance of the point (1, 2) from the mid-point of the line segment joining the
points (6, 8) and (2, 4).
Sol:
Let P 1, 2  , A  6,8  and B  2, 4  be thee given points.
Coordinates of midpoint of the line segment joining A  6,8  and B  2, 4  are
 6 2 8 4 
Q ,   Q  4, 6 
 2 2 

Now, distance PQ   4 1   6  2


2 2

 PQ  9  16
 PQ  25
 PQ  5
Hence, the distant  5 units
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝐴𝑃 3
33. If A and B are (1, 4) and (5, 2) respectively, find the coordinates of P when 𝐵𝑃 = 4
Sol:

Let A 1, 4  and B  5, 2  be the given points.


AP 3
We know that 
BP 4
Or, AP : BP  3: 4
Coordinates of P are
 3  5  4 1 3  2  4  4 
 , 
 3 4 3 4 
 19 22 
 , 
 7 7 

34. Show that the points A (1, 0), B ( 5, 3), C ( 2, 7) and D (—2, 4) are the vertices of a
parallelogram.
Sol:

Let A 1, 0  , B  5,3 , C  2, 7  and D  2, 4  be the given points


 1 2 0  7   3 7 
Coordinates of the midpoint of AC are  ,  , 
 2 2  2 2
 5 2 3 4   3 7 
Coordinates of the midpoint of BD are  ,  , 
 2 2  2 2
Since, coordinates of midpoint of AC  coordinates off midpoint of BD
 ABCD is a parallelogram as we know diagonals of parallelogram bisect each other.

35. Determine the ratio in which the point P (m, 6) divides the join of A(—4, 3) and B(2, 8).
Also, find the value of m.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Let P  m, 6  divides the join of A  4,3 and B  2,8  in the ratio K :1


Then, the coordinates of P are
 2k  1  4  8k  1 3 
 , 
 k  1 k 1 
 2k  4 8k  3 
 , 
 k 1 k 1 
8k  3
But, 6
k 1
 8k  3  6k  6
 8k  6k  3
3
k 
2
Hence, P divides AB in the ratio 3: 2
Again,

2k  4
m
k 1
3
Substituting k  , we get
2
3
2  4
2 m
3
1
2
1
 m
5
2
2
 m
5
2
m 
5

36. Determine the ratio in which the point (—6, a) divides the join of A(—3, 1) and B(—8, 9).
Also find the value of a.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Let P  6, a  divides the join of A  3,1 and B  8,9  in the ratio k :1
Then, the coordinates of P are
 8k  3 9k  1 
 , 
 k 1 k 1 
8k  3
But,  6
k 1
 8k  3  6k  6
 8k  6k  6  3
 2k  3
3
k 
2
Hence, P divides AB in the ratio 3: 2
Again
9k  1
a
k 1
3
Substituting k 
2
We get,
3
9 1
2 a
3
1
2
29
 2 a
5
2
29
 a
5
29
a 
5

37. The line segment joining the points (3, —4 ) and (1, 2) is trisected at the points P and Q . If
5
the coordinates of P and Q are (p, —2) and ( 3, q) respectively. Find the values of p and q.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

5 
We have P  p, 2  and Q  , q  are the points of trisection of the line segment joining
3 
A  3, 4  and B 1, 2 
We know AP : PB  1: 2
Coordinates of P are
 11  2  3 1 2  2   4  
 , 
 1 2 1 2 
7 
  , 2 
3 
7
Hence, P 
3
Again we know that AQ : QB  2 :1
Coordinates of Q are
 2  1  1  3 2  2  1   4  
 , 
 2  1 2 1 
5 
  ,0
3 
Hence, q  0

38. The line joining the points (2, 1) and (5,—8) is trisected at the points P and Q. If point P
lies on the line 2x — y + k = 0. Find the value of k.
Sol:

Since, P is the point of trisection of the line segment joining the point A  2,1 and B  5, 8 
We have AP : PB  1: 2
Coordinates of the point P are
 1 5  2  2 1  8   2 1 
 , 
 1 2 1 2 
  3, 2 
But, P lies on the line
2x  y  k  0
 2  3   2   k  0
62k  0
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
8 k  0
 k  8

39. If A and B are two points having coordinates (—2, —2) and (2, —4) respectively, find the
coordinates of P such that AP = AB.
Sol:

The Coordinates of point A and B are  2, 2  and  2, 4  respectively


3
Since AP  AB
7
Therefore AP : PB  3: 4
So, point P divides the line segment AB in a ratio 3: 4.
 3  2  4   2  3   4   4   2  
Coordinates of P   , 
 3 4 3 4 
 6  8 12  8 
 , 
 7 7 
 2 20 
 , 
 7 7 

40. Find the coordinates of the points which divide the line segment joining A (—2, 2) and B
(2, 8) into four equal parts.
Sol:

From the figure we have points X, Y, Z are dividing the line segment in a ratio 1: 3,1:1,3:1
respectively.
 1  2  3   2  1 8  3  2 
Coordinates of X   , 
 1  3 1 3 
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 7
  1, 
 2
 2   2  2  8 
Coordinates of Y   , 
 2 2 
  0,5 
 3  2  1  2  3  8  1 2 
Coordinates of Z   , 
 3 1 3 1 
 13 
 1, 
 2

41. A (4, 2), B (6, 5) and C (1, 4) are the vertices of ΔABC.
(i) The median from A meets BC in D. Find the coordinates of the point D.
(ii) Find the coordinates of point P on AD such that AP : PD = 2 : 1.
(iii) Find the coordinates of the points Q and R on medians BE and CF respectively such
that BQ : QE = 2 : l and CR : RF 2 : 1.
(iv) What do you observe?
Sol:

(i) Median AD of the triangle will divide the side BC in two equals parts. So D is the
midpoint of side BC.
 6 1 5  4   7 9 
Coordinates of D   ,  , 
 2 2  2 2
(ii) Point P divides the side AD in a ratio 2:1
 7 9 
 2  6  1 4 2  2  1 2 
Coordinates of P   , 
 2  1 2 1 
 
 11 11 
 , 
3 3
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
(iii) Median BE of the triangle will divide the side AC in two equal parts. So E is the
midpoint of side AC.
 4 1 2  4   5 
Coordinates of E   ,    ,3 
 2 2  2 
Point Q divides the side BE in a ratio 2:1
 5 
 2  2  1 6 2  3  1 5   11 11 
Coordinates of Q   ,  , 
 2 1 2 1   3 3 
 
Median CF of the triangle will divide the side AB in two equal parts. So F is the midpoint
of side AB.
 4  6 2 1   7 
Coordinates of F   ,    5, 
 2 2   2
Point R divides the side CF in a ratio 2:1.
 7 
 2  5  11 2  2  1 4   11 11 
Coordinates of R   ,  , 
 2 1 2 1   3 3 
 
(iv) Now we may observe that coordinates of point P, Q, R are same. So, all these are
representing same point on the plane i.e. centroid of the triangle.

42. ABCD is a rectangle formed by joining the points A (—1, —1), B (—1, 4), C (5, 4) and D
(5, −1). P, Q, R and S are the mid-points of sides AB, BC, CD and DA respectively. Is the
quadrilateral PQRS a square? a rectangle? or a rhombus? Justify your answer.
Sol:

2
3  25 61
Length of PQ   1  2     4   9 
2

2  4 4
2
 3 25 61
Length of QR   2  5
2
4   9 
 2 4 4
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
2
3  25 61
Length of RS   5  2     1  9 
2

2  4 4
2
 3 25 61
Length of SP   2  1   1    9 
2

 2 4 4
2

 1  5      6
2 3 3
Length of PR
2 2

 2  2   4  1 5
2 2
Length of QS
Here all sides of given quadrilateral is of same measure but the diagonals are of different
lengths. So, PQRS is a rhombus.

43. Show that A(—3, 2), B(—5,—5), C(2,—3) and D(4,4)are the vertices of a rhombus.
Sol:

Let A  3, 2  , B  5, 5  , C  2, 3 and D  4, 4  be the given points


 3  2 2  3   1 1 
Coordinates of the midpoint of AC are  ,  , 
 2 2   2 2 
 5  4 5  4   1 1 
Coordinates of the midpoint of BD are  ,  , 
 2 2   2 2 
Thus, AC and BD have the same midpoint
Hence, ABCD is a parallelogram
Now, AB   5  3   5  2
2 2

 AB  4  49
 AB  53
Now, BC   5  2   5  3
2 2

 BC  49  4
 BC  53
 AB  BC
So, ABCD is a parallelogram whose adjacent sides are equal.
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Hence, ABCD is a rhombus.

44. Find the ratio in which the y-axis divides the line segment joining the points (5, —6) and
(—1, —4). Also, find the coordinates of the point of division.
Sol:
Let P  5, 6  and Q  1, 4  be the given points.
Let y-axis divide PQ in the ratio k :1
Then, the coordinates of the point of division are
 k  5 4k  6 
R ,
 k 1 k  1 
Since, R lies on y-axis and x-coordinates of every point on y-axis is zero
k  5
 0
k 1
 k  5  0
k 5
Hence, the required ratio is 5 :1
Putting k  5 in the coordinates of R, we get
 5  5 4  5  6 
 , 
 5 1 5 1 
 13 
  0, 
 3 
 13 
Hence, the coordinates of the point of division are  0,   .
 3

45. If the points A (6, 1), B (8, 2), C (9, 4) and D (k, p) are the vertices of a parallelogram
taken in order, then find the values of k and p.
Sol:

Let A  6,1 , B 8, 2  , C  9, 4  and D  k , p  be the given points.


Since, ABCD is a parallelogram
Coordinates of midpoint of AC  Coordinates of the midpoints of BD
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 6  9 1 4   8  k 2  p 
 ,  , 
 2 2   2 2 
 15 5   8  k 2  p 
 ,  , 
 2 2  2 2 
8  k 15 2 p 5
  and 
2 2 2 2
 8  k  15  2  p  5
k 7  p3

46. In what ratio does the point (—4, 6) divide the line segment joining the points A (--6, 10)
and B (3, -8)?
Sol:
Let  4, 6 
Divide AB internally in the ratio k :1 using thee section formula, we get
3k  6 8k  10 
 4, 6    ,  ……..(2)
 k 1 k 1 
3k  6
So, 4 
k 1
i.e., 4k  4  3k  6
i.e., 7k  2
i.e., k :1  2 : 7
You c check for the y-coordinate also. So, the point  4, 6  divides the line segment j
joining the points A  6,10  and B  3, 8  in the ratio 2: 7

47. Find the coordinates of a point A, where AB is a diameter of the circle whose centre is (2,
—3) and B is (1, 4).
Sol:
Let coordinates of point A be  x, y 
Mid-point of diameter AB is center of circle  2, 3 
x 1 y  4 
 2, 3   , 
 2 2 
x 1 y4
 2 and  3
2 2
x  1  4 and y  4  6
x  3 and y  10
Therefore coordinates of A are  3,10 
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

48. A point P divides the line segment joining the points A (3, — 5) and B (— 4, 8) such that
𝐴𝑃 𝑘
= 1. If P lies on the line x + y = 0, then find the value of y.
𝑃𝐵
Sol:
Given points are A  3, 5  and B  4,8 
P divides AB in the ratio k :1,
Using the section formula, we have:
Coordinate of point P are  4k  3 / k  18k  5 / k  1
Now it is given, that P lies on the line x  y  0
Therefore
4k  3 / k  1  8k  5 / k  1  0
 4k  3  8k  5  0
 4k  2  0
k  2/ 4
 k  1/ 2
1
Thus, the value of k is .
2

Exercise 14.4

1. Find the centroid of the triangle whose vertices are:


(i) 1, 4  ,  1, 1 and  3, 2 
Sol:
We know that the coordinates of the centroid of a triangle whose vertices are
 x1 , y1  ,  x2 , y2  ,  x3 , y3  are
 x1  x2  x3 y1  y2  y3 
 , 
 3 3 
So, the coordinates of the centroid of a triangle whose vertices are
1 1  3 4 1  2 
1, 4  ,  1, 1 and  3, 2  are  , 
 3 3 
 1
 1, 
 3

2. Two vertices of a triangle are (1, 2), (3, 5) and its centroid is at the origin. Find the
coordinates of the third vertex.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Let the coordinates of the third vertex bee  x, y  , Then


Coordinates of centroid of triangle are
 x 1 3 y  2  5 
 , 
 3 3 
We have centroid is at origin  0, 0 
x 1 3 y 25
  0 and 0
3 3
 x4 0  y7  0
 x  4  y  7

3. Prove analytically that the line segment joining the middle points of two sides of a triangle
is equal to half of the third side.
Sol:

Let ABC be a triangle such that BC is along x-axis


Coordinates of A, B and C are  x, y  ,  0, 0  and  x1 , y1 
D and E are the mid-points of AB and AC respectively
 x0 y0
Coordinates of D are  , 
 2 2 
x y
 , 
2 2
 x  x1 y  y1 
Coordinates of E are  , 
 2 2 
Length of BC  x12  y12
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 x  x1 x   x  y1 y 
2 2

Length of DE       
 2 2  2 2
2 2
x  y 
  1   1 
2 2
x12 y12
 
4 4


4

1 2
x1  y12 
1 2
 x1  y12
2
1
 BC
2

4. Prove that the lines joining the middle points of the opposite sides of a quadrilateral and the
join of the middle points of its diagonals meet in a point and bisect one another.
Sol:

Let OBCD be the quadrilateral P, Q, R, S be the midpoint off OB, CD, OD and BC.
Let the coordinates of O, B, C, D are  0, 0  ,  x, 0  ,  x, y  and  0, y 
x 
Coordinates of P are  , 0 
2 
x 
Coordinates of Q are  , y 
2 
 y
Coordinates of R are  0, 
 2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

 y
Coordinates of S are  x, 
 2
Coordinates of midpoint of PQ are
x x 
 2  2 0 y  x y 
 ,   , 
 2 2  2 2
 
 y y
    
Coordinates of midpoint of RS are 
0 x 2 2  x, y
, 
 2 2   2 2 
 
Since, the coordinates of the mid-point of PQ  coordinates of mid-point of RS
 PQ and RS bisect each other

5. If G be the centroid of a triangle ABC and P be any other point in the plane, prove that PA2
+ PB2 + PC2 = GA2 + GB2 + GC2 + 3GP2.
Sol:
Let A  0, 0  , B  a, 0  , and C  c, d  are the o-ordinates of triangle ABC
c  0  a d 
Hence, G  , 
 3 3
a  c d 
i.e., G  ,
 3 3 
let P  x, y 
To prove:
PA2  PB 2  PC 2  GA2  GB2  GC 2  3GP2
Or, PA2  PB 2  PC 2  GA2  GB 2  GC 2  GP 2  GP 2  GP 2
Or, PA2  GP 2  PB 2  GP 2  PC 2  GP 2  GA2  GB 2  GC 2
Proof:
PA2  x 2  y 2
ac 
2 2
 d
GP   x 
2
  y 
 3   3
PB 2   x  a   y 2
2

PC 2   x  c    y  d 
2 2

L.H.S
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

  ac
2
 a  c   y 2  d 2  2 yd   x  a 2  y 2
 x2  y 2   x2     2 x   
  3  3 9 3 

  ac
2
 ac 2 d
2
2 yd 
  x2          x  c   y  d 
2 2
 2 x   y
  3   3  9 3 

  ac
2
 ac  2 d
2
2 yd 
  x2     2 x    y   
  3   3  9 3 
 x 2  y  x 2  x 2  a 2  2ax  y 2  x 2  c 2  2 xc  y 2  d 2  2 yd  3
 2  a  c 2  ac  2 d
2
2 yd 
x     2x   y   
  3   3  9 3 

a  c
2
d2
 3x 2  3y 2  a 2  c 2  d 2  2ax  2 xc  2 yd  3x 2   2x  a  c   3y2   2 yd
3 3
a  c  2ac 2 2
d2
 a 2  c 2  d 2  2ax  2xc  2yd   2ax  2cx   2 yd
3 3
3a  3c  3d  a  c  2ac  d
2 2 2 2 2 2
2a  2c  2d  2ac
2 2 2
   L.H .S
3 3
Solving R.H.S
GA2  GB 2  GC 2
 ac  d  a 2  c 2  2ac d 2
2 2

GA  
2

    
 3  3 9 9
 ac   d   c  2a   d 
2 2 2 2

GC  
2
 a       
 3  3  3  3
a 2  4c 2  4ca 4d 2
 
9 9
 ac   d   c  2a   d 
2 2 2 2

GB 2    a       
 3  3  3  3
c 2  4a 2  4ac d 2
 
9 9
a 2  c 2  2ac d 2 a 2  4c 2  4ac 4d 2 c 2  4a 2  4ac d 2
GA  GB  GC 
2 2 2
    
9 9 9 9 9 9
a  c  2ac  d  a  4c  4ac  4d  c  4a  4ac  d
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

9
6a  6c  6d  6ac 2a  2c 2  2d 2  2ac
2 2 2 2
 
9 3
 L.H .S  R.H .S
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

6. If G be the centroid of a triangle ABC, prove that:



AB 2  BC 2  CA2  3 GA2  GB 2  GC 2 
Sol:
Let A  b, c  , B  0, 0  and C  a, 0  be the coordinates of ABC
a b c
Then coordinates of centroid are G  ,
 3 3 
To prove:

AB 2  BC 2  CA2  3 GA2  GB 2  GC 2 
Solving L.H.S
AB 2  BC 2  CA2
 b2  c2  a 2  a  b   c 2
2

 b2  c 2  a 2  a 2  b2  2ab  c 2
 2a 2  2b2  2c 2  2ab
Solving R.H.S
 a  b 2
  c   ab   c   ab
2 2 2
 c 
2 2

3  b  c     
      a 
   
 3   3  3   3  2   3  
 a  2b 2  2c 2  a  b 2  c 2  b  2a 2  c  2 
 3             
 3   3   3   3   3   3  
 a 2  4b 2  4ab 4c 2 a 2  b 2  2ab c 2 b 2  4a 2  4ab c 2 
 3      
 9 9 9 9 9 9
 a 2  4b 2  4ab  4c 2  a 2  b 2  2ab  c 2  b 2  4a 2  4ab  c 2 
 3 
 9 
 6a 2  6b 2  6c 2  6ab 
 3 
 9 
 2a 2  2b 2  2c 2  2ab 
 3 3  
 9 
 2a 2  2b2  2c 2  2ab
L.H.S = R.H.S proved

7. If (—2, 3), (4, —3) and (4, 5) are the mid-points of the sides of a triangle, find the
coordinates of its centroid.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Let A  x1 , y2  , B  x2 , y2  and C  x3 , y3  be the vertices of ABC


Let D  2,3 , E  4, 3 and F  4,5  be the midpoints of sides BC , CA and AB respectively
Since, D is the midpoint of BC
x2  x3 y  y3
 2 and 2 3
2 2
 x2  x3  4 and y 2  y 3  6 …………(i)
x1  x3 y y
And,  4 and 1 3  3
2 2
 x1  x2  8 and y1  y 3  6 …………(ii)
x1  x2 y y
And,  4 and 1 2  5
2 2
 x1  x2  8 and y1  y 3  10 …………(iii)
From (i), (ii) and (iii), we get
x2  x3  x1  x3  x1  x2  4  8  8 and
y2  y3  y1  y3  y1  y2  6  6  10

 2  x1  x2  x3   12 and 2  y1  y2  y3   10
 x1  x2  x3  6 and y1  y2  y3  5 …………(iv)
From (i) and (iv), we get
x1  4  6 and y1  6  5
 x1  10  y1  1
So, the coordinates of A are 10, 1

From (ii) and (iv)


x2  8  6 and y2  6  5
 x2  2  y2  11
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

So, the coordinates of B are  2,11


From (iii) and (iv)
x3  8  6 and y3  10  5
 x3  2  y3  5
So, the coordinates of C are  2, 5
The vertices of ABC are A 10, 1 , B  2,11 and C  2, 5 
Hence, coordinates of the centroid of ABC are
 10  2  2 1  11  5 
 , 
 3 3 
 5
  2, 
 3

8. In below Fig. a right triangle BOA is given. C is the mid-point of the hypotenuse AB.
Show that it is equidistant from the vertices O, A and B.
Sol:

Given a right triangle BOA with vertices B  0, 2b  , 0  0, 0  and A  2a, 0 


Since, C is the midpoint of AB
 2a  0 0  2b 
coordinates of C are  , 
 2 2 
  a, b 

Now, CO   a  0  b  0  a 2  b2
2 2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

CA   2a  a    0  b   a 2  b2
2 2

CB   a  0  b  2b   a 2  b2
2 2

Since, CO  CA  CB.
C is equidistant from O, A and B.

9. Find the third vertex of a triangle, if two of its vertices are at (-3, 1) and (0, -2) and the
centroid is at the origin
Sol:
Let the coordinates of the third vertex be  x, y  , Then
Coordinates of centroid of triangle are
 x  3  0 y 1  2   x  3 y 1 
 ,  , 
 3 3   2 3 
We have centroid is at origin  0, 0 
x 3 y 1
  0 and 0
3 3
 x 3  0  y 1  0
 x3  y 1
Hence, the coordinates of the third vertex are  3,1 .

10. A (3, 2) and B (−2, 1) are two vertices of a triangle ABC whose centroid G has the
5 1
coordinates (11 , 3). Find the coordinates of the third vertex C of the triangle.
Sol:
Let the third vertex be C  x, y 
Two vertices A  3, 2  and B  2,1
Coordinates of centroid of triangle are
 x  3  2 y  2 1 
 , 
 3 3 
5 1
But the centroid of the triangle are  ,  
3 3
x 3 2 5 y  2 1 1
  and 
3 3 3 3
x 1 5 y 3 1
   
3 3 3 3
 x 1  5  y  3  1
x4  y  4
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Hence, the third vertex of the triangle is C  4, 4 

Exercise 14.5

1. Find the area of a triangle whose vertices are


(i)  6,3 ,  3,5 and  4, 2 
(ii)   
 at12 , 2at1 , at22 , 2at2 at32 , 2at3 
 
(iii) (a, c  a), (a, c) and (a, c  a)
Sol:
(i) Area of a triangle is given by
1
 x1  y2  y3   x2  y3  y1   x3  y1  y2 
2
Here, x1  6, y1  3, x2  3, y2  5, x3  4, y3  2
Let A  6,3 , B  3,5  and C  4, 2  be the given points
1
Area of ABC  6  5  2    3 2  3  4 3  5
2
1
 6  7  3   5  4  2 
2
1
  42  15  8
2
49
 sq. units
2
(ii) Let A   x1 , y1    at12 , 2at1 


B   x2 , y2   at22 , 2at2 
 
  x3 , y3   at32 , 2at3 be the given points.
The area of ABC
1
 at12  2at2  2at3   at22  2at3  2at1   at32  2at1  2at2 
2
1
 2a 2t12t2  2a 2t12t3  2a 2t22t3  2a 2t22t1  2a 2t32t1  2a 2t32t2 
2
1
  2 a 2t12  t2  t3   a 2t22 t3  t1   a 2  t32 t1  t2 
2
 a 2 t12  t2  t3   t22  t3  t1   t32  t1  t2  
(iii) Let A   x1 , y1    a, c  a 
B   x2 , y2    a, c 
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

C   x3 , y3    a, c  a  be the given points


The area of ABC

 a  c  c  a  a  c  a   c  a     a  c  a  a 


1
2
1
 a  c  c  a   a  c  a  c  a   a  c  a  c 
2
1
 a  a  ax  2a   a  a 
2
1
 a 2  2a 2  a 2 
2
1
   2a 
2

2
 a 2

2. Find the area of the quadrilaterals, the coordinates of whose vertices are
(i) (—3, 2), (5, 4), (7, — 6) and (—5, — 4)
(ii) (1, 2), (6, 2), (5, 3) and (3, 4)
(iii) (—4, — 2), (—3, — 5), (3, — 2), (2, 3)
Sol:

Let A  3, 2  , B  5, 4  , C  7, 6  and D  5, 4  be the given points.


Area of ABC
1
 3  4  6   5  6  2   7  2  4 
2
1
 3 10  5   8  7  2 
2
1
  30  40  14
2
 42
But area cannot be negative
Area of ADC  42 square units
Area of ADC
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
 3  6  4   7  4  2    5 2  6 
2
1
 3  2   7  6   5  8
2
1
 6  42  40
2
1
  76
2
 38
But area cannot be negative
Area of ADC  38 square units
Now, area of quadrilateral ABCD
 Ar. of ABC  Ar of ADC
  42  38 
 80 square. units
(i)

Let A 1, 2  , B  6, 2  , C  5,3 and  3, 4  be the given points


Area of ABC
1
 1 2  3  6  3  2   5  2  2 
2
1
 1  6  1  0
2
1
  1  6
2
5

2
Area of ADC
1
 1 3  4   5  4  2   3  2  3
2
1
 1 5  2  3  1
2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
 1  10  3
2
1
  6
2
3
Now, Area of quadrilateral ABCD
 Area of ABC  Area of ADC
5 
   3  sq. units
2 
11
 sq. units
2
(ii)

Let A  4, 2  , B  3, 5  , C  3, 2  and D  2,3 be the given points


1
Area of ABC   4 5  2  3  2  2  3  2  5
2
1
  4 3  3  0  3 3
2
21

2
1
Area of ACD   4  3  2   2  2  2   3  2  3
2
1 35
 4  5  2  0   3  5 
2 2
35
But area can’t be negative, hence area of ADC 
2
Now, area of quadrilateral  ABCD   ar  ABC   ar  ADC 
21 35
Area (quadrilateral ABCD )  
2 2
56
Area (quadrilateral ABCD ) 
2
Area (quadrilateral ABCD )  28 square. Units
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3. The four vertices of a quadrilateral are (1, 2), (−5, 6), (7, −4) and (k, −2) taken in order. If
the area of the quadrilateral is zero, find the value of k.
Sol:

Let A 1, 2  , B  5, 6  , C  7, 4  and  k , 2  be the given points.


Area of ABC
1
 1 6  4    5 4  2   7  2  6 
2
1
 10  30  28
2
1
 12
2
6
Area of ADC
1
 1 4  2   7  2  2   k  2  4 
2
1
 2  7   4   k  6
2
1
  2  28  6k 
2
1
  30  6k 
2
 15  3k
 3k  15
Area of quadrilateral ABCD
= Area of ABC  Area of ADC
  6  3k  15 
But are of quadrilateral  0 (given)
 6  3k  15  0
 3k  15  6
 3k  9
k 3
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
4. The vertices of ΔABC are (—2, 1), (5, 4) and (2, —3) respectively. Find the area of the
triangle and the length of the altitude through A.
Sol:

Let A  2,1 , B  5, 4  and C  2, 3 be the vertices of ABC.


Let AD be the altitude through A.
Area of ABC
1
 2  4  3  5  3  1  2 1  4 
2
1
  14  20  6
2
1
  40
2
 20
But area cannot be negative
Area of ABC  20 square units
Now, BC   5  2    4  3
2 2

 BC   3   7 
2 2

 BC  58
We know that area of 
1
  Base  Altitude
2
1
 20   58  AD
2
40
 AD 
58
40
Length of the altitude AD 
58
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5. Show that the following sets of points are collinear.
(a) (2, 5), (4, 6) and (8, 8) (b) (1, —1), (2, 1) and (4, 5)
Sol:
(a) Let A  2,5  , B  4, 6  and C  8,8  be the given points
Area of ABC
1
 2  6  8  4 8  5  8 5  6 
2
1
 2   2   4  3  8   1
2
1
  4  12  8
2
1
 0
2
0
Since, area of ABC  0
  2,5  ,  4, 6  and  8,8  are collinear.
(b) Let A 1, 1 , B  2,1 and C  4,5  be the given points
Area of ABC
1
 11  5  2  5  1  4  1  1
2
1
  4  12  8
2
1
 0
2
0
Since, area of ABC  0
The points 1, 1 ,  2,1 and  4,5  are collinear

1 1
6. Prove that the points (a, 0), (0, b) and (1, 1) are collinear if, 𝑎 + 𝑏 = 1.
Sol:
Let A  a, 0  , B  0, b  and C 1,1 be the given points
Area of ABC

 x1  y2  y3   x2  y3  y1   x3  y1  y2 
1
2
 a  b  1  0 1  0   1 0  b 
1
2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
 ab  a  0  b
2
1
 ab  a  b
2
 ab   a  b 
1
2
1  1 1 
 ab  ab  a  b  1
2
ab
 1
ab
 a  b  ab
1
 0
2
0
1 1
Hence, A  a, 0  , B  0, b  and 1,1 are collinear if   1.
a b

7. The point A divides the join of P (—5, 1) and Q (3, 5) in the ratio k : 1. Find the two values
of k for which the area of ΔABC where B is (1, 5) and C (7, —2) is equal to 2 units.
Sol:

Let A  x, y  divides the join of P  5,1 and  3, 5  in the ratio k :1


3k  5 5k  1
x ,y
k 1 k 1
 3k  5 5k  1 
Area of ABC with A  ,  B 1,5  and C  7, 2 
 k 1 k 1 
1  3k  5 5k  1   5k  1 
   5  2   1 2    7  5 
2  k 1  k 1   k 1 
1  3k  5 7 k  3 4 
  7   
2  k 1 k 1 k  1
1  21k  35 7k  3 4 
    
2  k 1 k 1 k  1
1  21k  35  7k  3  4 
  
2 k 1 
1 14k  42 
  
2  k 1 
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
14k  42

2  k  1
But area of ABC  2 given,
14k  42
 2
2  k  1
 14k  42  4  k  1
 14k  42  4k  4
 14k  4k  4  42
 10k  46
46 23
k  
10 5

8. The area of a triangle is 5. Two of its vertices are (2, 1) and (3, -2). Third vertex lies on y =
x + 3. Find the third vertex.
Sol:

Let A  2,1 , B  3, 2  be the vertices of 


And C  x, y  be the third vertex
1
Area of ABC  2  2  y   3  y  1  x 1  2 
2
1
 4  2 y  3 y  3  3x
2
1
 3x  y  7
2
But it is given that area of ABC  5
1
 5  3 x  y  7 
2
10  3x  y  7
3x  y  17 or 3x  y  3 (i)
But it is given that third vertices lies on y  x  3
Hence subsisting value of y in (i)
3x  x  3  17 or 3x  x  3  3
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
4 x  14 or4 x  6
7 3
x or x
2 2
7 3
y  3 or y 3
2 2
13 3
y or y
2 2
 7 13   3 3 
Hence coordinates of c will be  ,  or  , 
2 2   2 2

9. If a ≠ b ≠ c, prove that the points (a, a2 ), (b, b2 ), (c, c 2 ) can never be collinear.
Sol:
Let A  a, a 2  B  b, b 2  and  c, c 2  be the given points.
Area of ABC

 
 a  b2  c 2   b  c 2  a 2   c  a 2  b 2 
1
2
 ab2  ac 2  bc 2  ba 2  ca 2  cb2 
1
2
1
 0
2
0 if a  b  c 
i.e., the points are collinear if a  b  c
Hence, the points can never be collinear if a  b  c.

𝛥𝐷𝐵𝐶
10. Four points A(6, 3), B (-3, 5), C(4, -2) and D(x, 3x) are given in such a way that 𝛥𝐴𝐵𝐶 =
1
, find x.
2
Sol:
Area of DBC 
1
2
x 5  2   3 2  3x   4 3x  5

1
2
7    6  9 x   12 x  20
1
 28 x  14
2
Area of ABC  6  5  2    3 2  3  4  3  5
1
2
1
 42  15  8
2
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
  49
2
Given
DBC 1

ABC 2
1
 28 x  14  1
2 
1 2
 49
2
28x  14 1
 
49 2
 2  28 x  14   49
 56 x  28  49
 56 x  77
77
x
56
11
x
8

11. For what value of a point (a, 1), (1, -1) and (11, 4) are collinear?
Sol:
Let A  a,1 , B 1, 1 and C 11, 4  be the given points
Area of ABC

 a  1  4   1 4  1  111  1
1
2
1
 5  3  22
2
1
 5a  25
2
For the points to be collinear
Area of ABC  0
1
 5a  25  0
2
 5a  25  0
 5a  25
a5

12. Prove that the points (a, b), (𝑎1 , 𝑏1 ) and (𝑎 − 𝑎1 , 𝑏 − 𝑏1 ) are collinear if 𝑎𝑏1 = 𝑎1 𝑏
Sol:
Class X Chapter 14 – Co-Ordinate Geometry Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Let A  a, b  , B  a1 , b1  and C  a  a1 , b  b1  be the given points.

Area of ABC
1
 
 a b1   b  b1   a1  b  b1  b    a  a1 b  b1 
2
1

 a  b1  b  b1   a1  b 1  ab  ab1  a1b  a1b1
2

1
 ab1  ab  ab1  a1b1  ab  ab1  a1b  a1b1
2
1
 ab1  a1b
2
1
 0  0 if ab1  a1b
2
Hence, the points are collinear if ab1  a1b.
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 15.1

1. Find the circumference and area of circle of radius 4.2 cm


Sol:
Radius (r) = 4.2 cm
Circumference = 2 × r
22
=2× × 4.2
7
44 264
= (10 × 6) = 10
= 26.4 𝑐𝑚
22
Area = 𝜋𝑟 2 = × 4.2 × 4.2
7
22×6×42 5544
= = = 55.44𝑐𝑚2
10×10 100

2. Find the circumference of a circle whose area is 301.84 cm2.


Sol:
Area of circle = 301.84 cm2.
Let radius = r cm
Area of circle = 𝜋r2
𝜋r2 = 301.84
22
× 𝑟 2 = 301.84
7
1
301.84×7
𝑟2 = = (√7 × 7) 2 × 13.75
22
𝑟 = √13.72 × 7 = √7 × 7 × 1.96 = 7 × 1.4 = 9.8 𝑐𝑚
Radius = r = 9.8 cm
22
Circumference = 2 × r = 2 × × 9.8
7
= 44 × 1.4
= 61.6 𝑐𝑚

3. Find the area of circle whose circumference is 44 cm.


Sol:
Circumference = 44 cm
Let radius = r cm
Circumference = 2 × r = 44 cm
22
2× × 𝑟 = 44
7
44×7
r = 2×22 = 7𝑐𝑚
radius = 7 cm
Area of circle = 𝜋r2
22
= × 7 × 7 = (22 × 7) = 154𝑐𝑚2
7
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

4. The circumference of a circle exceeds diameter by 16.8 cm. Find the circumference of
circle.
Sol:
Let radius of circle = r cms
Diameter(d) = 2 × 𝑟𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑠 = 2𝑟
Circumference (c) = 2𝜋r
Given circumference exceeds diameter by 16.8cm
C = d + 16.8
⇒ 2𝜋r = 2r + 16.8
⇒ 2r(𝜋 – 1)= 16.8
22
⇒ 2r × ( 7 − 1) = 16.8
15
⇒ 2r × = 16.8
7
16.8×7
⇒r= = 5.6 × 0.7
30
⇒ r = 3.92 cms
22
Circumference = 2𝜋r = 2 × × 3.92
7
2464
= = 24.64 𝑐𝑚𝑠
100

5. A horse is tied to a pole with 28m long string. Find the area where the horse can graze.
Sol:
Length of string 1 = 28m

Area it can graze is area of circle with radius equal to length of string
Area = 𝜋l2
22
= × 28 × 28
7
= 88 × 28
= 2464 cm2
∴ area grazed by horse = 2464cm2.

6. A steel wire when bent is the form of square encloses an area of 12 cm2. If the same wire is
bent in form of circle. Find the area of circle.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Let side of square = s and length of wire be l. As wire is bent into square
l = perimeter of square = 4s.
Area of square = 121cm2 = s2.
S = √121 = 11𝑐𝑚
∴ length of wire l = 4(11) = 44cm
As wire is bent into circle (let radius be r)
Length of wire = circumference
44 = 2𝜋r
22 44×7
× 2 × 𝑟 = 44 ⇒ 𝑟 = 2×22 = 7𝑐𝑚
7
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑙𝑒 = 𝜋𝑟 2
22
= ×7×7
7
= 22 × 7
= 154𝑐𝑚2

7. A horse is placed for grazing inside a rectangular field 40m by 36m and is tethered to one
corner by a rope 14m long. Over how much area can it graze.
Sol:

The fig shows rectangular field ABCD at corner A, a horse is tied with rope length = 14m.
The area it can graze is represented A as shaded region= area of quadrant with (radius =
length) of string
1
Area = 4 × (𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑙𝑒) = 𝜋𝑟 2
1 22
=4× × 14 × 14
7
= (22 × 7)
= 154 m2.
Area it can graze = 154m2.
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
8. A sheet of paper is in the form of rectangle ABCD in which AB = 40cm and AD = 28 cm.
A semicircular portion with BC as diameter is cut off. Find the area of remaining paper.
Sol:

Given sheet of paper ABCD


AB = 40 cm, AD = 28 cm
⇒ CD = 40 cm, BC = 28 cm [since ABCD is rectangle]
Semicircle be represented as BMC with BC as diameter
1 1
Radius = 2 × 𝐵𝐶 = 2 × 28 = 14𝑐𝑚𝑠
Area of remaining (shaded region) = (area of rectangle) – (area of semicircle)
1
= (𝐴𝐵 × 𝐵𝐶) − (2 𝜋𝑟 2 )
1 22
= (40 × 28) − (7 × × 14 × 14)
7
= 1120 − 308
= 812 cm2.

9. The circumference of two circles are in ratio 2:3. Find the ratio of their areas
Sol:
Let radius of two circles be 𝑟1 and 𝑟2 then their circumferences will be 2𝜋𝑟1 : 2𝜋𝑟2
= 𝑟1 : 𝑟2
But circumference ratio is given as 2 : 3
𝑟1 : 𝑟2 = 2: 3
Ratio of areas = 𝜋𝑟22 : 𝜋𝑟22
𝑟 2
= (𝑟1 )
2
2 2
= (3)
4
=9
= 4: 9
∴ 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜 𝑜𝑓 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎𝑠 = 4 ∶ 9

10. The side of a square is 10 cm. find the area of circumscribed and inscribed circles.
Sol:
Circumscribed circle
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

1
Radius = 2 (𝑑𝑖𝑎𝑔𝑜𝑛𝑎𝑙 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑟𝑒)
1
= 2 × √2 side
1
= 2 × √2 × 10
= 5√2 cm
Area = 𝜋r2
22
= × 25 × 2
7
1100
= 𝑐𝑚2
7
Inscribed circle

1
Radius = 2 (sides)
1
= 2 × 10
= 5 cm
Area = 𝜋r2
22
= ×5×5
7
550
= 𝑐𝑚2
7

11. The sum of the radii of two circles is 140 cm and the difference of their circumferences in
88 cm. Find the diameters of the circles.
Sol:

Let radius of circles be 𝑟1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑟2


Given sum of radius = 140cm
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝑟1 + 𝑟2 = 140 …..(i)
𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑢𝑚𝑔𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒𝑠 = 88 𝑐𝑚
2 × 𝑟1 − 2𝜋𝑟2 = 88
22
2× (𝑟1 − 𝑟2 ) 88
7
88×7
𝑟1 − 𝑟2 = 2×22 = 14
𝑟1 = 𝑟2 + 14 ….(ii)
(𝑖𝑖)𝑖𝑛 (𝑖) ⇒ 𝑟2 + 𝑟2 + 14 = 140
⇒ 2𝑟2 = 126
126
⇒ 𝑟2 = = 63𝑐𝑚𝑠
2
𝑟2 = 63𝑐𝑚𝑠 𝑖𝑛 (𝑖𝑖) 𝑟1 = 63 + 14 = 77 𝑐𝑚𝑠
Diameter of circle (i) = 2𝑟1 = 2 × 77 = 154 𝑐𝑚𝑠
Diameter of circle (ii) = 2𝑟2 = 2 × 63 = 126 𝑐𝑚𝑠

12. The area of circle, inscribed in equilateral triangle is 154 cms2. Find the perimeter of
triangle.
Sol:

Let circle inscribed in equilateral triangle


Be with centre O and radius ‘r’
Area of circle = 𝜋r2
But given that area = 154 cm2.
𝜋r2 = 154
22
× 𝑟 2 = 154
7
2
𝑟 = 7×7
r = 7cms
Radius of circle = 7cms
From fig. at point M, BC side is tangent at point M, BM ⊥ OM. In equilateral triangle, the
perpendicular from vertex divides the side into two halves
1 1 𝑥
BM = 2 𝐵𝐶 = 2 (𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 = 𝑥) = 2
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
∆BMO is right triangle, by Pythagoras theorem
𝑂𝐵 2 = 𝐵𝑀2 + 𝑀𝑂2
𝑥2 𝑥2
𝑂𝐵 = √𝑟 2 + = √49 + 𝑂𝐷 = 𝑟
4 4
√3 √3
Altitude BD = (𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒) = 𝑥 = 𝑂𝐵 + 𝑂𝐷
2 2
BD – OD = OB
√3 𝑥2
⇒ 𝑥 − 𝑟 = √49 +
2 4

√3 𝑥2
⇒ 𝑥 − 7 = √49 +
2 4
2 2
√3 𝑥2
⇒ (2 𝑥 − 7) = (√ 4 + 49)
3 𝑥2
⇒ 4 𝑥 2 − 7√3𝑥 + 49 = + 49
4
𝑥
⇒ 2 = 7√3 ⇒ 𝑥 = 14 √3 𝑐𝑚
Perimeter = 3x = 3 × 14√3
= 42√3 cms

13. A field is in the form of circle. A fence is to be erected around the field. The cost of fencing
would to Rs. 2640 at rate of Rs.12 per metre. Then the field is to be thoroughs ploughed at
cost of Rs. 0.50 per m2. What is amount required to plough the field?
Sol:
Given
Total cost of fencing the circular field = Rs. 2640
Cost per metre fencing = Rs 12
Total cost of fencing = circumference × cost per fencing
⇒ 2640 = circumference × 12
2640
⇒ circumference = = 220𝑚
12
Let radius of field be r m
Circumference = 2 𝜋r m
2𝜋r = 220
22
2× × 𝑟 = 220
7
70
r= = 35𝑚
2
Area of field = 𝜋r2
22
= × 35 × 35
7
= 3850 m2.
Cost of ploughing per m2 land = Rs. 0.50
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
Cost of ploughing 3850 m2 land = 2 × 3850
= Rs. 1925.

14. If a square is inscribed in a circle, find the ratio of areas of the circle and the square.
Sol:

Let side of square be x cms inscribed in a circle.


1
Radius of circle (r) = 2 (𝑑𝑖𝑎𝑔𝑜𝑛𝑎𝑙 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑟𝑒)
1
= 2 (√2𝑥)
𝑥
=
√2
Area of square = (side)2 = x2
Area of circle = 𝜋r2
𝑥 2
= 𝜋( )
√2
𝜋𝑥 2
= 2
𝜋 2
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑙𝑒 𝑥 𝜋
2
= = = 𝜋: 2
𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑟𝑒 𝑥2 2

15. A park is in the form of rectangle 120m × 100m. At the centre of park there is a circular
lawn. The area of park excluding lawn is 8700m2. Find the radius of circular lawn.
Sol:

Dimensions of rectangular park length = 120m


Breadth = 100m
Area of park = l × b
= 120 × 100 = 12000𝑚2.
𝐿𝑒𝑡 𝑟𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑠 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑙𝑎𝑤𝑛 𝑏𝑒 𝑟
Area of circular lawn = 𝜋𝑟 2
Area of remaining park excluding lawn = (area of park) – (area of circular lawn)
⇒ 8700 = 12000 – 𝜋r2
⇒ 𝜋r2 = 12000 – 8700 = 3300
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
22
⇒ × 𝑟 2 = 3300
7
2
⇒ 𝑟 = 150 × 7 = 1050
⇒ r = √1050 = 5√42 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠
∴ radius of circular lawn = 5√42 metres.

16. The radii of two circles are 8 cm and 6 cm respectively. Find the radius of the circle having
its are equal to the sum of the areas of two circles.
Sol:
Radius of circles are 8cm and 6 cm
Area of circle with radius 8 cm = 𝜋(8)2 = 64𝜋𝑐𝑚2
Area of circle with radius 6cm = 𝜋(6)2 = 36𝜋 𝑐𝑚2
Areas sum = 64𝜋 + 36𝜋 = 100𝜋 cm2
Radius of circle be x cm
Area = 𝜋x2
𝜋x2 = 100𝜋
𝑥 2 = 100 ⇒ 𝑥 = √100 = 10𝑐𝑚

17. The radii of two circles are 19cm and 9 cm respectively. Find the radius and area of the
circle which has circumferences is equal to sum of circumference of two circles.
Sol:
Radius of 1st circle = 19cm
Radius of 2nd circle = 9 cm
Circumference of 1st circle = 2(19) = 38𝜋 cm
Circumference of 2nd circle = 2𝜋 (9) = 18𝜋 cm
Let radius of required circle = R cm
Circumference of required circle = 2𝜋R = 𝑐1 + 𝑐2
2𝜋R = 38𝜋 + 18𝜋
2𝜋R = 56𝜋
R = 28 cms
Area of required circle = 𝜋r2
22
= × 28 × 28
7
= 2464 𝑐𝑚2

18. A car travels 1 km distance in which each wheel makes 450 complete revolutions. Find the
radius of wheel.
Sol:
Let radius of wheel = ‘r’ m
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Circumference of wheel = (2𝜋r)m.


No. of revolutions = 450
Distance for 450 revolutions = 450 × 2𝜋𝑟 = 900𝜋𝑟 𝑚
But distance travelled = 1000 m.
900𝜋r = 1000
r = 10000 9𝜋 × 100
10
= 9𝜋 𝑚
1000
= 𝑐𝑚𝑠
9𝜋
1000
𝑟𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑠 (𝑟) = 𝑐𝑚𝑠
9𝜋

19. The area enclosed between the concentric circles is 770cm2. If the radius of inner circle.
Sol:
Radius of outer circle = 21𝑐𝑚

Radius of inner circle = 𝑅2


Area between concentric circles = area of outer circle – area of inner circle
22
⇒ 770 = (212 − 𝑅22 )
7
⇒ 212 − 𝑅22 = 35 × 7 = 245
⇒ 441 – 245 = 𝑅22
⇒ 𝑅2 = √196 = 14 𝑐𝑚
Radius of inner circle = 14cm.
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 15.2

1. Find in terms of x the length of the arc that subtends an angle of 30°, at the centre of circle
of radius 4 cm.
Sol:

𝜃
Length of arc = 360° × 2𝜋𝑟
Radius = r = 4 cm
𝜃 = angle subtended at centre = 30°
30°
Arc length = 360° × 2 × (7)
2𝜋
= cm
3

5𝜋
2. Find the angle subtended at the centre of circle of radius 5cm by an arc of length ( 3 ) 𝑐𝑚
Sol:
Radius (r) = 5 cm

𝜃 = angle subtended at centre (degrees)


𝜃
Length of Arc = 360° × 2𝜋r cm
5𝜋
But arc length = 𝑐𝑚
3
𝜃 5𝜋
× 2𝜋 × 5 =
360° 3
360°×𝜋
𝜃= = 60°
3×2𝜋
∴ Angle subtended at centre = 60°
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
3. An arc of length 20𝜋 cm subtends an angle of 144° at centre of circle. Find the radius of the
circle.
Sol:

Length of arc = 20𝜋cm


Let radius = ‘r’ cm
O = angle subtended at centre = 144°
𝜃
Length of arc = 360° × 2𝜋𝑟
144 4𝜋
= 360 × 2𝜋𝑟 = 𝑟
5
4𝜋
= 𝑟 = 20𝜋
5
20𝜋×5
𝑟= = 25 𝑐𝑚𝑠
4𝜋

4. An arc of length 15 cm subtends an angle of 45° at the centre of a circle. Find in terms of 𝜋,
radius of the circle.
Sol:

Length of arc = 15cm


𝜃 = angle subtended at centre = 45°
Let radius = r cm
𝜃
arc length = × 2𝜋𝑟
360°
45°
= × 2𝜋𝑟
360°
45
× 2𝜋𝑟 = 15
360
15×360 60
𝑟= = cms
45×2𝜋 𝜋
60
𝑅𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑠 = 𝑐𝑚𝑠
𝜋
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝑎𝜋
5. Find the angle subtended at the centre of circle of radius ‘a’ cm by an arc of length 𝑐𝑚
4
Sol:

𝑎𝜋
Length of arc = 𝑐𝑚
4
Radius r = ‘a’ cm
𝜃 = angle subtended at centre
𝜃
arc length = 360° × 2𝜋𝑟
𝜃
= 360° × 2𝜋𝑎
𝜃 𝑎𝜋
∴ 360° × 2𝜋𝑎 = 4
9𝜋×360°
⇒𝜃= = 45°
4×2𝜋𝑎

6. A sector of circle of radius 4cm contains an angle of 30°. Find the area of sector
Sol:
Radius = 4 cm = r

Angle subtended at centre = 𝜃 = 30°


Area of sector (shaded region)
𝜃
= 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2
30 22
= 360 × ×4×4
7
88 2
= 21 𝑐𝑚
88
∴ 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑟𝑒𝑑 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 = 21 𝑐𝑚2
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
7. A sector of a circle of radius 8cm contains the angle of 135°. Find the area of sector.
Sol:
Radius (r) = 8cm

𝜃 = angle subtended at centre = 135°


𝑥
Area of sector = × 𝜋𝑟 2
360°
135 22
= 360 × ×8×8
7
528 2
= 𝑐𝑚
7

8. The area of sector of circle of radius 2cm is 𝜋cm2. Find the angle contained by the sector.
Sol:

Area of sector = 𝜋 𝑐𝑚2


Radius of circle = 2𝑐𝑚
Let 𝜃 = angle subtended by arc at centre
𝜃
Area of sector = 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2
𝜃
= 360° × 𝜋 × 2 × 2
𝜋𝜃
= 90°
𝜋𝜃
= 𝜋 ⇒ 𝜃 = 90°
90°

9. The area of sector of circle of radius 5cm is 5𝜋 cm2. Find the angle contained by the sector.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
Area of sector = 5𝜋 cm2.
Radius (r) = 5cm
𝜃
Let 𝜃 = angle subtended at centre area of sector = 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2
𝜃 5𝜋𝜃
= 360 × 𝜋 × 5 × 5 = 72°
5𝜋𝜃
= = 5𝜋
72°
⇒ 𝜃 = 72°

10. AB is a chord of circle with centre O and radius 4cm. AB is length of 4cm. Find the area of
sector of the circle formed by chord AB
Sol:

AB is chord AB = 4cm
OA = OB = 4cm
OAB is equilateral triangle ∠AOB = 60°
Area of sector (formed by chord [shaded region]) = (area of sector)
𝜃 60 8𝜋
= 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2 = 360 × 𝜋 × 4 × 4 = 𝑐𝑚2
3

11. In a circle of radius 35 cm, an arc subtends an angle of 72° at the centre. Find the length of
arc and area of sector
Sol:

Radius (r) = 35 cm
𝜃 = angle subtended at centre = 72°
𝜃
Length of arc = 360° × 2𝜋𝑟
72 22
= 360 × 2 × × 35
7
= 2 × 22 = 44𝑐𝑚𝑠
𝜃
Area of sector = 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
72 22
= 360 × × 35 × 35
7
= (35 × 22) = 770 𝑐𝑚2

12. The perimeter of a sector of circle of radius 5.7m is 27.2 m. Find the area of sector.
Sol:

Radius = OA = OB (From fig) = r


= 5.7 m
Perimeter = 27.2 m
Let angle subtended at centre = 𝜃
𝜃
Perimeter = (360° × 2𝜋𝑟) + 𝑂𝐴 + 𝑂𝐵
𝜃
= 360° × 2(5.7) × 𝜋 + 2(5.7)
2𝜋(5.7)𝜃
= + 11.4
360°
𝜋(5.7)𝜃
= + 11.4 = 27.2
180°
𝜋(5.7)𝜃
= = 15.8
180°
𝜃
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 = × 𝜋𝑟 2
360°
158.8 22
= × × 5.7 × 5.7
360 7
= 45.048 𝑐𝑚2

13. The perimeter of certain sector of circle of radius 5.6 m is 27.2 m. Find the area of sector.
Sol:

𝜃 = angle subtended at centre


Radius (r) = 5.6m = OA ± OB
Perimeter of sector = 27.2 m
(AB arc length) + OA + OB = 27.2
𝜃
⇒ (360° × 2𝜋𝑟) + 5.6 + 5.6 ± 27.2
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
5.6 𝜋 𝜃
⇒ + 11.2 = 27.2
180°
22
⇒ 5.6 × × 𝜃 = 16 × 180
7
16×180
⇒𝜃= = 163.64°
0.8×22
𝜃 163.64° 22
Area of sector = 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2 = × × 5.6 × 5.6
360° 7
163.64
= × 11 × 0.8 × 5.6
180
= 44.8 𝑐𝑚2

14. A sector is cut-off from a circle of radius 21 cm the angle of sector is 120°. Find the length
of its arc and its area.
Sol:

Radius of circle (r) = 21 cm


𝜃 = angle subtended at centre = 120°
𝜃
Length of its arc = 360° × 2𝜋𝑟
120 22
= 360 × 2 × × 21
7
= 44 cms
𝜃
Area of sector = 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2
120 22
= 360 × × 21 × 21
7
= (22 × 21)
= 462 𝑐𝑚2
𝐿𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ 𝑜𝑓 𝑎𝑟𝑐 = 44 𝑐𝑚
Area of sector = 462 cm2

15. The minute hand of a clock is √21 𝑐𝑚 long. Find area described by the minute hand on the
face of clock between 7 am and 7:05 am
Sol:
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Radius of minute hand (r) = √21 𝑐𝑚


For 1hr = 60 min, minute hand completes one revolution = 360°
60 min = 360°
1 min = 6°
From 7 am to 7:05 am it is 5 min angle subtended = 5 × 6° = 30° = 𝜃
𝜃
Area described = 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2
30 22
= 360 × × 21
7
22
= = 5.5𝑐𝑚2
4

16. The minute hand of clock is10cm long. Find the area of the face of the clock described by
the minute hand between 8am and 8:25 am
Sol:

Radius of minute hand (r) = 10 cm


For 1 hr = 60 min, minute hand completes one revolution = 360°
60 min = 360°
1 min = 6°
From 8 am to 8:25 am it is 25 min angle subtended = 6° × 25 = 150° = 𝜃
𝜃
Area described = 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2
150 22
= 360 × × 10 × 10
7
250×11
= 3
2750
= 𝑐𝑚2
3

17. A sector of 56° cut out from a circle contains area of 4.4 cm2. Find the radius of the circle
Sol:
Angle subtended by sector at centre 𝜃 = 56°
Let radius be ‘x’ cm
𝜃
Area of sector = 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2
56 22
= 360 × × 𝑟2
7
22
= 45 𝑟 2
44
But area of sector = 4.4cm2 = 10 𝑐𝑚2
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
22 44
𝑟 2 = 10
45
45×44
⇒ 𝑟 2 = 22×10 = 9
⇒ 𝑟 = √9
= 3 𝑐𝑚
∴ radius (r) = 3cm

18. In circle of radius 6cm, chord of length 10 cm makes an angle of 110° at the centre of circle
find
(i) Circumference of the circle
(ii) Area of the circle
(iii) Length of arc
(iv) The area of sector
Sol:
(i) Radius of circle (r) = 6 cm
Angle subtended at the centre = 110°
Circumference of the circle = 2𝜋r
22
=2× ×6
7
264
= 𝑐𝑚
7
22
(ii) Area of circle = 𝜋r2 = ×6×6
7
792
= 𝑐𝑚2
7
𝜃
(iii) Length of arc = 360° × 2𝜋𝑟
110 22
= 360 × 2 × ×6
7
232
= 𝑐𝑚
21
𝜃
(iv) Area of sector = 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2
110 22
= 360 × ×6×6
7
232
= 𝑐𝑚2
7

19. Below fig shows a sector of a circle, centre O. containing an angle 𝜃°. Prove that
𝜋𝜃
(i) Perimeter of shaded region is 𝑟 (tan 𝜃 + sec 𝜃 + 180 − 1)
𝑟2 𝜋𝜃
(ii) Area of shaded region is (tan 𝜃 − 180)
2
Sol:
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Given angle subtended at centre of circle = 𝜃


∠OAB = 90° [At joint of contact, tangent is perpendicular to radius]
OAB is right angle triangle
𝑎𝑑𝑗.𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 𝑟
Cos 𝜃 = ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒 = 𝑂𝐵 ⇒ 𝑂𝐵 = 𝑟 sec 𝜃 … … (𝑖)
𝑜𝑝𝑝.𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 𝐴𝐵
tan 𝜃 = 𝑎𝑑𝑗. = ⇒ 𝐴𝐵 = 𝑟 tan 𝜃 … … . (𝑖𝑖)
𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 𝑟
Perimeter of shaded region = AB + BC + (CA arc)
𝜃
= 𝑟 tan 𝜃 + (𝑂𝐵 − 𝑂𝐶) + 360° × 2𝜋𝑟
𝜋𝜃𝑟
= 𝑟 tan 𝜃 + 𝑟 sec 𝜃 − 𝑟 + 180°
𝜋𝜃
= 𝑟 (tan 𝜃 + sec 𝜃 + 180° − 1)
Area of shaded region = (area of triangle) – (area of sector)
1 𝜃
= (2 × 𝑂𝐴 × 𝐴𝐵) − 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2
1 𝑟2 𝜃
= 2 × 𝑟 × 𝑟 tan 𝜃 − [180° × 𝜋]
2
𝑟2 𝜋𝜃
= [tan 𝜃 − 180]
2

20. The diagram shows a sector of circle of radius ‘r’ can containing an angle 𝜃. The area of
sector is A cm2 and perimeter of sector is 50 cm. Prove that

360 25
(i) 𝜃= ( 𝑟 − 1)
𝜋
(ii) A = 25r – r2
Sol:

(i) Radius of circle = ‘r’ cm


Angle subtended at centre = 𝜃
Perimeter = OA + OB + (AB arc)
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝜃 𝜋𝜃
= r + r + 360° × 2𝜋𝑟 = 2𝑟 + 2𝑟 [360°]
But perimeter given as 50
𝜋𝜃
50 = 2r [1 + 360°]
𝜋𝜃 50
⇒ 360° = 2𝑟 − 1
360° 25
⇒𝜃= [ 𝑟 − 1] …..(i)
𝜋
𝜃
(ii) Area of sector = 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2
360° 25
( −1)
= 𝜋 𝑟
× 𝜋𝑟 2
360°
25
= × 𝑟2 − 𝑟2
𝑟
= 25r – r2
⇒ A = 25r – 𝑟 2 …..(ii)

Exercise 15.3

1. AB is a chord of a circle with centre O and radius 4cm. AB is length 4cm and divides circle
into two segments. Find the area of minor segment
Sol:

Radius of circle r = 4cm = OA = OB


Length of chord AB = 4cm
OAB is equilateral triangle ∠AOB = 60° ⟶ 𝜃
Angle subtended at centre 𝜃 = 60°
Area of segment (shaded region) = (area of sector) – (area of ∆AOB)
𝜃 √3
= 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2 = (𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒)2
4
60 22 √2
= 360 × ×4 ×4= 4 × 4×4
7
176
= − 4√3 = 58.67 − 6.92 = 51.75 𝑐𝑚2
3

2. A chord of circle of radius 14cm makes a right angle at the centre. Find the areas of minor
and major segments of the circle.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Radius (r) = 14cm


𝜃 = 90°
= OA = OB
Area of minor segment (ANB)
= (𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝐴𝑁𝐵 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟) − (𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 ∆𝐴𝑂𝐵)
𝜃 1
= 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2 − 2 × 𝑂𝐴 × 𝑂𝐵
90 22 1
= 360 × × 14 × 14 − 2 × 14 × 14
7
= 154 − 98 = 56𝑐𝑚2
Area of major segment (other than shaded)
= area of circle – area of segment ANB
= 𝜋𝑟 2 − 56
22
= × 14 × 14 − 56
7
= 616 – 56
= 560 cm2.

3. A chord 10 cm long is drawn in a circle whose radius is 5√2 cm. Find the area of both
segments
Sol:
Given radius = r = 5√2 cm = OA = OB
Length of chord AB = 10cm

In ∆OAB, OA = OB = 5√2 𝑐𝑚 AB = 10cm


2 2
𝑂𝐴2 + 𝑂𝐵 2 = (5√2) + (5√2) = 50 + 50 = 100 = (𝐴𝐵)2
Pythagoras theorem is satisfied OAB is right triangle
𝜃 = angle subtended by chord = ∠AOB = 90°
Area of segment (minor) = shaded region
= 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 − 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 ∆𝑂𝐴𝐵
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
𝜃 1
= 360 × 𝜋𝑟 2 − 2 × 𝑂𝐴 × 𝑂𝐵
90 22 2 1
= 360 × (5√2) − 2 × 5√2 × 5√2
7
275 100
= − 25 − 𝑐𝑚2
7 7
Area of major segment = (area of circle) – (area of minor segment)
100
= 𝜋𝑟 2 2 − 7
22 2 100
= × (5√2) −
7 7
1100 100 1000
= − = 𝑐𝑚2
7 7 7

4. A chord AB of circle, of radius 14cm makes an angle of 60° at the centre. Find the area of
minor segment of circle.
Sol:

Given radius (r) = 14cm = OA = OB


𝜃 = angle at centre = 60°
In ∆AOB, ∠A = ∠B [angles opposite to equal sides OA and OB] = x
By angle sum property ∠A + ∠B + ∠O = 180°
x + x + 60° = 180° ⇒ 2x = 120° ⇒ x = 60°
All angles are 60°, OAB is equilateral OA = OB = AB
Area of segment = area of sector – area ∆le OAB
𝜃 √3
= 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2 − × (−𝐴𝐵)2
4
60 22 √3
= 360 × × 14 × 14 − × 14 × 14
7 4
308 308−147√3
= − 49√3 = 𝑐𝑚2
3 3

5. AB is the diameter of a circle, centre O. C is a point on the circumference such that ∠COB
= 𝜃. The area of the minor segment cutoff by AC is equal to twice the area of sector BOC.
𝜃 𝜃 1 𝜃
Prove that sin 2 . cos 2 = 𝜋 (2 − 120°)
Sol:
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Given AB is diameter of circle with centre O


∠COB = 𝜃
𝜃
Area of sector BOC = 360° × 𝜋𝑟 2
Area of segment cut off, by AC = (area of sector) – (area of ∆AOC)
∠AOC = 180 – 𝜃 [∠AOC and ∠BOC form linear pair]
(180−𝜃) 𝜋𝑟 2 𝜋𝜃𝑟 2
Area of sector = × 𝜋𝑟 2 = −
360° 2 360°
In ∆AOC, drop a perpendicular AM, this bisects ∠AOC and side AC.
𝐴𝑀 180−𝜃 𝐴𝑀
Now, In ∆AMO, sin∠AOM = ⇒ sin ( )=
𝐷𝐴 2 𝑅
𝜃 𝜃
⇒ AM = R sin(90 − 2) = 𝑅. cos 2
𝑂𝑀 𝜃 𝑂𝑀 𝜃
cos ∠ADM = ⇒ cos (90 − 2) = ⇒ 𝑂𝑀 = 𝑅. 𝑆𝑖𝑛 2
𝑂𝐴 𝑌
𝜋𝑟 2 𝜋𝜃𝑟 2 1
Area of segment = − − 2 (𝐴𝐶 × 𝑂𝑀) [𝐴𝐶 = 2 𝐴𝑀]
2 360°
𝜋𝑟 2 𝜋𝜃𝑟 2 1 𝜃 𝜃
= − − × (2 𝑅 cos 𝑅 sin )
2 360° 2 2 2
2 𝜋 𝜋𝜃 𝜃 𝜃
= 𝑟 [ 2 − 360° − cos 2 sin 2]
Area of segment by AC = 2 (Area of sector BDC)
𝜋 𝜋𝜃 𝜃 𝜃 𝜋𝜃
𝑟 2 [ 2 − 360° − cos 2 . sin 2] = 2𝑟 2 [360°]
𝜃 𝜃 𝜋 𝜋𝜃 2𝜋𝜃
cos 2 . sin 2 = 2 − 360 − 360°
𝜋 𝜋𝜃
= 2 − 360° [1 + 2]
𝜋 𝜋𝜃 1 𝜃
= 2 − 360° = 𝜋 (2 − 120°)
𝜃 𝜃 1 𝜃
cos 2 . sin 2 = 𝜋 (2 − 120°)

6. A chord of a circle subtends an angle 𝜃 at the centre of circle. The area of the minor
𝜃 𝜃
segment cut off by the chord is one eighth of the area of circle. Prove that 8 sin 2 . cos 2 +
𝜋𝜃
𝜋= 45
Sol:
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Let radius of circle = r


Area of circle = 𝜋𝑟 2
AB is a chord, OA, OB are joined drop OM ⊥ AB. This OM bisects AB as well as ∠AOB.
1 𝜃
∠AOM = ∠MOB = 2 (0) = AB = 2AM
2
In ∆AOM, ∠AMO = 90°
𝜃 𝐴𝑀 𝜃 𝜃
Sin 2 = ⇒ 𝐴𝑀 = 𝑅. sin 2 AB = 2R sin 2
𝐴𝐷
𝜃 𝑂𝑀 𝜃
Cos 2 = ⇒ 𝑂𝑀 = 𝑅 cos 2
𝐴𝐷
Area of segment cut off by AB = (area of sector) – (area of triangles)
𝜃 1
= 360 × 𝜋𝑟 2 − 2 × 𝐴𝐵 × 𝑂𝑀
𝜋𝜃 1 𝜃 𝜃
= 𝑟 2 [360° − 2 . 2𝑟𝑠𝑖𝑛 2 . 𝑅 cos 2]
𝜋𝜃 𝜃 𝜃
= 𝑅 2 [360° − sin 2 . cos 2]
1
Area of segment = 2 (𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑙𝑒)
𝜋𝜃 𝜃 𝜃 1
𝑟 2 [360 − sin 2 . cos 2] = 8 𝜋𝑟 2
8𝜋𝜃 𝜃 𝜃
− 8 sin 2 . cos 2 = 𝜋
360°
𝜃 𝜃 𝜋𝜃
8 sin 2 . cos 2 + 𝜋 = 45

Exercise 15.4

1. A plot is in the form of rectangle ABCD having semi-circle on BC. If AB = 60m and BC =
28m, find the area of plot.
Sol:

Given AB = 60m = DC [length]


BC = 28m = AD [breadth]
1
Radius of semicircle r = 2 × 𝐵𝐶 = 14𝑚
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
Area of semicircle r = 2 × 𝐵𝐶 = 14𝑚
Area of plot = (Area of rectangle ABCD) + (area of semicircle)
1
= (𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ × 𝑏𝑟𝑒𝑎𝑑𝑡ℎ) + 2 𝜋𝑟 2
1 22
= (60 × 28) + [2 × × 14 × 14]
7
= 1680 + 308 = 1988𝑚2

2. A playground has the shape of rectangle, with two semicircles on its smaller sides as
diameters, added to its outside. If the sides of rectangle are 36m and 24.5m. find the area of
playground.
Sol:

Let rectangular play area be ABCD


AB = CD = 36m [length]
AD = BC = 24.5 m [breadth]
1
Radius of the semicircle = 2 (𝐵𝐶) = 𝑅
1
= 2 × (24.5) = 12.25𝑐𝑚
Area of playground = (Area of rectangle) + 2(Area of semicircle)
1
= (𝐴𝐵 × 𝐵𝐶) + (2 𝜋𝑟 2 ) 2
1 22
= (36 × 24.5) + (2 × × 12.25 × 12.25) 2
7
= 882 + 471.625
= 1353.625 𝑚2

3. The outer circumference of a circular race track is 528m. The track is everywhere 14m
wide. Calculate the cost of leveling the track at rate of 50 paise per square metre.
Sol:

Let inner radius = r width(d) = 14m


Outer radius = R
Outer circumference of track = 2 𝜋𝑟
∴ 2 𝜋𝑟 = 528
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
22 528×7
2× × 𝑅 = 528 ⇒ 𝑅 = = 84 𝑚
7 2×22
Inner radius r = R – d = 84 – 14 = 70m
Area of track = (area of outer circle) – (area of inner circles)
= 𝜋𝑅 2 − 𝜋𝑟 2
22
= 𝜋(𝑅 2 − 𝑟 2 ) = (842 − 702 )
7
22 22
= (84 + 70)(84 − 70) = × 154 × 14
7 7
= 6776 𝑚2
Cost of leveling 𝑚2 = 𝑅𝑠. 0.50
1
Total cost of leveling track = 6776 × 2 = 𝑅𝑠. 3388

4. A rectangular piece is 20m long and 15m wide from its four corners, quadrants of 3.5m
radius have been cut. Find the area of remaining part.
Sol:

Length of rectangular piece l = 20m


Breadth of rectangular piece b = 15m
Radius of each quadrant r = 3.5m
Area of rectangular piece = (length × breadth) = 20 × 15 = 300m2.
1
Area of quadrant each = 4 (𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑙𝑒 𝑤𝑖𝑡ℎ 𝑟𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑠 3.5𝑚)
1
= 4 × 𝜋𝑟 2
1 22 38.5
=4× × 3.5 × 3.5 = 𝑚2
7 4
Area of remaining part = [area of rectangular piece] – 4[area of each quadrant]
385
= 300 – 4 [ ] = 300 – 38.5
4
= 261.5m2

5. Four equal circles, each of radius 5 cm touch each other as shown in fig. Find the area
included between them.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

Area required shaded = (area of square ABCD) – (Area of 4 quadrant)


Side of square = 5cm + 5cm
= 10cm
Area of square = side × side
= 10𝑐𝑚 × 10𝑐𝑚 = 100𝑐𝑚2
1
Area of quadrant = 4 (𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑙𝑒 𝑤𝑖𝑡ℎ 𝑟𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑠 5 𝑐𝑚)
1
= 4 × 𝜋𝑟 2
1 22 1
=4× × 5 × 5 = (25 × 3.14) 4 𝑐𝑚2
7
Area included between circles = (area of square) – 4(area of quadrant)
1
= 100 – (4 × 25 × 2.14)
= 100 – 78.5
= 21.5cm2

6. Four cows are tethered at four corners of a square plot of side 50m, so that’ they just cant
reach one another. What area will be left ungrazed.
Sol:

Side of square plot (s) = 50m


Area grazed by four cows is area of sectors represented by 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Radius of each quadrant = 25m = r.
Area of square plot = 𝑠 2 = 502 = 2500𝑚2
1 1 22 1
Area of each quadrant = 4 𝜋𝑟 2 = 4 × × 25 × 25 = (625 × 3.14) × 4
7
Area of ungrazed land = (area of square plot) – 4(area of quadrant)
1
= 2500 − 4 (4 × 3.14 × 625)
= 2500 – 1962.5 = 537.5 m2
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________

7. A road which is 7m wide surrounds a circular park whose circumference is 352m. Find the
area of road.
Sol:

Outer radius of road = R


Inner radius of road = r
Width of park road = d
R=2+d
Circumference of road (outer) = 2𝜋R
2𝜋R = 352 [from problem given]
22
2× × 𝑅 = 352
7
352×7
R= = 56𝑚.
2×22
Inner radius = R – d = 56 – 7 = 49 m
Area of road = (area of circle with radius 56m) – (area of circle with radius 49m)
= 𝜋𝑅 2 − 𝜋𝑟 2
22 22
= (562 − 492 ) = (56 − 49) (56 + 49)
7 7
22
= × 7 × 105 = 2310𝑚2
7

6
8. Four equal circles each of radius a, touch each other. Show that area between them is 7 𝑎2
Sol:

Let circles be with centres A, B, C, D


Join A, B, C and D then ABCD is square formed with side = (a + a) = 2a
Radius = a
Area between circles = area of square – 4(area of quadrant)
(shaded region)
1
= (2𝑎)2 − 4 (4 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑙𝑒 𝑤𝑖𝑡ℎ 𝑟𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑠 ′𝑎′)
Class X Chapter 15 – Areas Related to Circles Maths
______________________________________________________________________________
1
= 4𝑎2 − 4 (4) × 𝑎2
= 𝑎2 (4 − 𝜋)
22
= 𝑎2 (4 − )
7
28−22 6
=( ) 𝑎2 = 7 𝑎2
7
6
∴ Area between circles = 7 𝑎2 .

9. A square water tank has its side equal to 40m, there are 4 semicircular flower beds grassy
plots all around it. Find the cost of turfing the plot at Rs 1.25/sq.m
Sol:

Side of water tank = 40m


𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 40
Grassy plot is semicircular with radius = = = 20𝑚 = 𝑟
2 2
Area of grassy plot = 4(area od semicircular grassy plot with radius 20m)
1
= 4 [2 (𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑙𝑒 𝑤𝑖𝑡ℎ 𝑟𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑠)]
1
= 4 × 2 × 𝜋(20)2
= 2 × 20 × 20 × 𝜋 = 800𝜋 𝑚2.
Cost of turfing 1m2 = Rs. 1.25
Total cost of turfing the grassy plot around tank
= 800𝜋 × 1.25
= 1000𝜋
= 1000 × 3.14
= Rs. 3140.
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Exercise 16.1

1. How many balls each of radius 1cm can be made from a solid sphere of lead of radius
8cm?
Sol:
Given that a solid sphere f radius  r1   8cm
With this sphere we have to make spherical balls of radius  r2   1cm
Since we don’t know no of balls let us assume that no of balls formed be ‘n’
We know that
4
Volume of sphere   r 2
3
Volume of solid sphere should be equal to sum of volumes of n spherical balls
4 4
n   1   r 3
3

3 3
4
 8
3

n 3
4
 1
3

3
n  83
n  512
hence 512 no of balls can be made of radius 1cm from a solid sphere of radius
8cm

2. How many spherical bullets each of 5cm in diameter can be cast from a rectangular block
of metal 11dm 1m  5dm ?
Sol:
Given that a metallic block which is rectangular of diameter 11dm 1m  5dm
Given that diameter of each bullet is 5cm
4
Volume of sphere   r 2
3
Dimensions of rectangular block = 11dm 1m  5dm
Since we know that 1 dm  101 m
11101 1 5 101  55 102 m3 ………(1)
Diameter of each bullet  5cm
d 5
Radius of bullet  r     2  5cm
2 2
2
 25 10 m
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

4
 
3
So volume   25 102
3
Volume of rectangular block should be equal sum of volumes of n spherical bullets
Let no of bullets be ‘n’
Equating (1) and (2)
4
 
3
55 102  n   25 102
3
2
55 10
n
4 22
 
3
2
 25 10
3 7
n  8400
 No of bullets found were 8400

3. A spherical ball of radius 3cm is melted and recast into three spherical balls. The radii of
the two of balls are 1 9cm and 2cm . Determine the diameter of the third ball?
Sol:
Given that a spherical ball of radius 3cm
4
We know that Volume of a sphere   r 2
3
4
So its volume  v     3
2

3
Given that ball is melted and recast into three spherical balls
4
Radii of first ball  v1    1 5
3

3
4
Radii of second ball  v2     2 
3

3
Radii of third ball ___________?
4
Volume of third ball   r 3  v3
3
Volume of spherical ball is equal to volume of 3 small spherical balls
4 4 4 4
  r 2   1 5    2     3
3 3 3

3 3 3 3
 r 2  1  5    2    3
3 3 3

 r 3  33  1 53  23
1
 r  15  6 
3
 r  2  5cm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Diameter  d   2r  2  2  5  5cm
 Diameter of third ball  5cm.

4. 2  2 Cubic dm of grass is to be drawn into a cylinder wire 0  25cm in diameter. Find the
length of wire?
Sol:
Given that 2  2dm3 of grass is to be drawn into a cylindrical wire 0.25cm in diameter
Given diameter of cylindrical wire  0.25cm
d 0  25
Radius of wire  r     0 125cm
2 2
 0 125 102 m.
We have to find length of wire?
Let length of wire be ‘h’  1cm  102 m 
Volume of Cylinder   r 2 h
Volume of brass of 2  2dm3 is equal to volume of cylindrical wire
22
7
 
0 125 102 h  2  2 103

2  2 103  7
h
 
2
22 0 125 102
 h  448m
 Length of cylindrical wire  448m

5. What length of a solid cylinder 2cm in diameter must be taken to recast into a hollow
cylinder of length 16cm, external diameter 20cm and thickness 2  5mm ?
Sol:
Given that diameter of solid cylinder  2cm
Given that solid cylinder is recast to hollow cylinder
Length of hollow cylinder  16cm
External diameter = 20cm
Thickness  2  5mm  0  25cm
Volume of solid cylinder   r 2h
Radius of cylinder  1cm
So volume of solid cylinder   1 h
2
……(i)
Let length of solid cylinder be h
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Volume of hollow cylinder   h  R 2  r 2 


Thickness  R  r
0  25  10  r
 Internal radius  9  75cm
So volume of hollow cylinder   16 100  95  0625  ….(2)
Volume of solid cylinder is equal to volume of hollow cylinder.
(1) = (2)
Equating equations (1) and (2)
 1 h   16 100  95  06 
2

22 2 22
1  h  16  4  94
7 7
h  79  04cm
Length of solid cylinder  79cm

6. A cylindrical vessel having diameter equal to its height is full of water which is poured into
two identical cylindrical vessels with diameter 42cm and height 21cm which are filled
completely. Find the diameter of cylindrical vessel?
Sol:
Given that diameter is equal to height of a cylinder
So h  2r
Volume of cylinder   r 2 h
So volume   r 2  2r 
 2 r 3
Volume of each vessel   r 2 h
Diameter  42cm
Height  21cm
Diameter  d   2r
2r  42
r  21
Radius  21cm
Volume of vessel    21  21
2
……….(2)
Since volumes are equal
Equating (1) and (2)
 2 r 3    21  21 2
2
( 2 identical vessels)
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

  21  21 2
2

r  3

2
 r 3   21
3

 r  21  d  42cm
Radius of cylindrical vessel  21cm
Diameter of cylindrical vessel  42cm.

7. 50 circular plates each of diameter 14cm and thickness 0  5cm are placed one above other
to form a right circular cylinder. Find its total surface area?
Sol:
Given that 50 circular plates each with diameter  14cm
Radius of circular plates  r   7cm
Thickness of plates  0  5
Since these plates are placed one above other so total thickness of plates  0  5  50
 25cm.
Total surface area of a cylinder  2 rh  2 r 2
 2 rh  2 r 2
 2 r  h  r 
22
 2  7  25  7 
7
T .S. A  1408cm2
Total surface area of circular plates is 1408cm2

8. 25 circular plates each of radius 10  5cm and thickness 1 6cm are placed one above the
other to form a solid circular cylinder. Find the curved surface area and volume of cylinder
so formed?
Sol:
Given that 25 circular plates each with radius (r) = 10.5cm
Thickness  1 6cm
Since plates are placed one above other so its height becomes  1 6  25  40cm
Volume of cylinder   r 2 h

  10  5   40
2

 13860cm3
Curved surface area of a cylinder  2 rh
 2   10  5  40
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

22
 2 10  5  40
7
 2640cm2
Volume of cylinder  13860cm3
Curved surface area of a cylinder  2640cm2

9. A path 2m wide surrounds a circular pond of diameter 4cm. how many cubic meters of
gravel are required to grave the path to a depth of 20cm
Sol:
Diameter of circular pond  40m
Radius of pond(r)  20m.
Thickness  2m
Depth  20cm  0  2m
Since it is viewed as a hollow cylinder
Thickness  t   R  r
2  Rr
2  R  20
R  22m
Volume of hollow cylinder    R 2  r 2  h


  222  202 h 
   22 2
 202  0 2
  84   0.2

Volume of hollow cylinder  52   m3


 52  77m3 of gravel is required to have path to a depth of 20cm.

10. A 16m deep well with diameter 3  5m is dug up and the earth from it is spread evenly to
form a platform 27  5m by 7m. Find height of platform?
Sol:
Let as assume well is a solid right circular cylinder
3 5
Radius of cylinder  r    1 75m
2
Height (or) depth of well  16m.
Volume of right circular cylinder   r 2h
22
  1 75 16
2
……..(1)
7
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Given that length of platform  l   27.5m


Breath of platform  b   7cm
Let height of platform be xm
Volume of rec tan gle  lbh
 27  5  7  x  192  5x ………(2)
Since well is spread evenly to form platform
So equating (1) and (2)
V1  V2
22
 1 75 16  192  5x
2

7
 x  0  8m
 Height of platform (h)  80cm.

11. A well of diameter 2m is dug14m deep. The earth taken out of it is spread evenly all around
it to form an embankment of height 40cm. Find width of the embankment?
Sol:
Let us assume well as a solid circular cylinder
2
Radius of circular cylinder   1m
2
Height (or) depth of well  14m
Volume of solid circular cylindeer   r 2h

  1 14
2
…..(1)
Given that height of embankment (h) = 40cm
Let width of embankment be ‘x’ m
Volume of embankment   r 2 h

  
2
  1  x2 1  0  4 …..(2)
Since well is spread evenly to form embankment so their volumes will be same so equating
(1) and (2)

 
2
  1 14   1  x   1  0  4
2 2

 x  5m
 Width of embankment of  x   5m
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

12. Find the volume of the largest right circular cone that can be cut out of a cube where edge
is 9cm_____?
Sol:
Given that side of cube =9cm
Given that largest cone is curved from cube
Diameter of base of cone = side of cube
 2x  9
9
 r  cm
2
Height of cone = side of cube
 Height of cone (h) = 9cm
1
Volume of l arg est cone   r 2 h
3
2
1 9
  t    9
3 2

  93
12
 190  92cm3
Volume of largest cone  v   190  92cm3

13. A cylindrical bucket, 32 cm high and 18cm of radius of the base, is filled with sand. This
bucket is emptied on the ground and a conical heap of sand is formed. If the height of the
conical heap is 24 cm, find the radius and slant height of the heap.
Sol:
36cm, 43.27 cm

14. Rain water, which falls on a flat rectangular surface of length 6cm and breath 4m is
transferred into a cylindrical vessel of internal radius 10cm. What will be the height of
water in the cylindrical vessel if a rainfall of 1cm has fallen____?
Sol:
Given length of rectangular surface  6cm
Breath of rectangular surface  4cm
Height (h) 1cm
Volume of a flat rec tan gular surface  lbh
 6000  400 1
Volume  240000cm3 _________(1)
Given radius of cylindrical vessel  20cm
Let height off cylindrical vessel be h1
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Since rains are transferred to cylindrical vessel.


So equating (1) with (2)
Volume of cylindrical vessel   r12h1
22
  20  h1
2
_________(2)
7
22
24000   20   h1
2

7
 h1  190  9cm
height of water in cylindrical vessel  190  9cms

15. A conical flask is full of water. The flask has base radius r and height h. the water is proved
into a cylindrical flask off base radius one. Find the height of water in the cylindrical flask?
Sol:
Given base radius of conical flask be r
Height of conical flask is h
1
Volume of cone   r 2 h
3
1
So its volume   r 2 h ________(1)
3
Given base radius of cylindrical flask is ms.
Let height of flask be h1
Volume of cylinder   r 2 h1
22
So its volume   mr  h1
2
_________(2)
7
Since water in conical flask is poured in cylindrical flask their volumes are same
(1) = (2)
1
  r 2 h    mr   h1
2

3
h
 h1 
3m2
h
Height of water in cylindrical flask 
3m2

16. A rectangular tank 15m long and 11m broad is required to receive entire liquid contents
from a full cylindrical tank of internal diameter 21m and length 5m. Find least height of
tank that will serve purpose______?
Sol:
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Given length of rectangular tank = 15m


Breath of rectangular tank = 11m
Let height of rectangular tank be h
Volume of rec tan gular tan k  lbh
Volume  15 11 h ______(1)
21
Given radius of cylindrical tank  r   m
2
Length/height of tank = 5m
Volume of cylindrical tan k   r 2 h
2
 21 
    5 _______(2)
 2
Since volumes are equal
Equating (1) and (2)
2
 21 
15 11 h      5
 2
2
22  21 
  5
7  2
h
15 11
 h  10  5m
Height of tank  10  5m.

17. A hemisphere tool of internal radius 9cm is full of liquid. This liquid is to be filled into
cylindrical shaped small bottles each of diameter 3cm and height 4cm. how many bottles
are necessary to empty the bowl.
Sol:
Given that internal radius of hemisphere bowl  90m
4
Volume of hemisphere   r 3
3
2
   9
3
______(1)
3
Given diameter of cylindrical bottle  3cm
3
Radius  cm
2
Height  4cm
Volume of cylindrical   r 2h
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

2
3
   4 ______(2)
2
Volume of hemisphere bowl is equal to volume sum of n cylindrical bottles
(1) = (2)
2
2 3
 9      4  n
3

3 2
2
 9
3

n 3 2
3
   4
2
 n  54
No of bottles necessary to empty the bottle  54.

18. The diameters of the internal and external surfaces of a hollow spherical shell are 6 cm and
10 cm respectively. If it is melted and recast and recast into a solid cylinder of diameter 14
cm, find the height of the cylinder.
Sol:
Internal diameter of hollow spherical shell  6cm
6
Internal radius of hollow spherical shell   3 cm
3
External diameter of hollow spherical shell  10cm
10
External radius of hollow spherical shell   5 cm
2
Diameter of cylinder  14 cm
14
Radius of cylinder   7cm
2
Let height of cylinder  xcm
According to the question
Volume of cylinder = Volume of spherical shell
4

   7  x   53  33
2

3

4
 49 x  125  27 
3
4
 49 x    98
3
4  98 8
x  cm
3  49 3
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

8
Height off cylinder  cm
3

19. A hollow sphere of internal and external diameter 4cm and 8cm is melted into a cone of
base diameter 8cm. Calculate height of cone?
Sol:
Given internal diameter of hollow sphere (r)  4cm
External diameter  R   8cm
4

Volume of hollow sphere   R 2  r 2
3

4

  B 2  42
3
 ____(1)

Given diameter of cone  8cm


Radius of cone  4cm
Let height of cone be h
1
Volume of cone   r 2 h
3
1
    4 h
2
____(2)
3
Since hollow sphere is melted into a cone so there volumes are equal
(1) = (2)
4 1
   64  16     4  h
2

3 3
4
  48 
3 h
1
 16 
3
 h  12cm
Height of cone  12cm

20. A cylindrical tube of radius 12cm contains water to a depth of 20cm. A spherical ball is
dropped into the tube and the level of the water is raised by 6  75cm. Find the radius of the
ball___?
Sol:
Given that radius of a cylindrical tube (r)  12cm
Level of water raised in tube  h   6  75cm

Volume of cylinder   r 2 h
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

  12   6  75cm3
2

22
 12 6  25cm3
2
………(1)
7
Let ‘r’ be radius of a spherical ball
4
Volume of sphere   r 3 ………(2)
3
To find radius of spherical balls

Equating (1) and (2)


4
  12   6  75   r 3
2

3
  12   6  75
2

r 
3
4

3
r 3  729
r 3  93
r  9cm
Radius of spherical ball  r   9cm

21. 500 persons have to dip in a rectangular tank which is 80m long and 50m broad. What is
the rise in the level of water in the tank, if the average displacement of water by a person is
0  04m3 ____?
Sol:
Given that length of a rectangular tank (r) = 80m
Breath of a rectangular tank (b)  50m
Total displacement of water in rectangular tank
By 500 persons  500  0  04m3
 20m3 ______(1)
Let depth of rectangular tank be h
Volume of rectangular tan k  lbh
 80  50  hm3 ______(2)
Equating (1) and (2)
 20  80  50  h
 20  4000h
20
 h
4000
 h  0  005m
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

h  0  5cm
Rise in level of water in tank  h   0  05cm.

22. A cylindrical jar of radius 6cm contains oil. Iron sphere each of radius 1 5cm are immersed
in the oil. How many spheres are necessary to raise level of the oil by two centimetress?
Sol:
Given that radius of a cylindrical jar  r   6cm
Depth/height of cylindrical jar  h   2cm
Let no of balls be ‘n’
Volume of a cylinder   r 2 h
22
V1    6   2cm3
2
………(1)
7
Radius of sphere 1 5cm
4
So volume of sphere   r 3
3
4 22
V2   1 5 cm3
3
………(2)
3 7
Volume of cylindrical jar is equal to sum of volume of n spheres
Equating (1) and (2)
22 4 22
  6   2  n   1 5
2 3

7 3 4
22
  6  2
2
v1
n n 7
4 22
v2  1 5
3

3 7
n  16
No of spherical balls  n   16

23. A hollow sphere of internal and external radii 2cm and 4cm is melted into a cone of basse
radius 4cm. find the height and slant height of the cone______?
Sol:
Given that internal radii of hollow sphere (r) = 2cm
External radii of hollow sphere  R   4cm
4

Volume of hollow sphere   R 2  r 2
3

Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

4

v1    42  22
3
 …………(1)

Given that sphere is melted into a cone


Base radius of cone  4cm
Let slant height of cone be l
Let height of cone be h
l 2  r 2  h2
l 2  16  h2 …………(3)
1
Volume of cone   r 2 h
3
1
v2    4  h
2
………..(2)
3
v1  v2 Equating (1) and (2)
4
3
  1
 42  2 2    4  h
3
2

4
 16  4 
3 h
1
 16 
3
h  14cm
Substituting ‘h’ value in (2)
l 2  16  h2
l 2  16  142
l 2  16  196
l  14  56cm
Slant height of cone  14  56cm

24. The internal and external diameters of a hollow hemisphere vessel are 21cm and 25  2cm.
The cost of painting 1cm2 of the surface is 10paise. Find total cost to paint the vessel all
over______?
Sol:
21
Given that internal diameter of hollow hemisphere  r   cm  10  5cm
2
25  2
External diameter  R    12  6cm
2
Total surface area of hollow hemisphere

 2 R 2  2 r 2   R 2  r 2 
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths


 2 12  6   2 10  5   12  62  10  52
2 2

 997  51  692  72  152  39
 1843  38cm2
Given that cost of painting 1cm2 of surface  10 ps
Total cost for painting 1843  38cm2
 1843  38 10 ps
 184  338 Rs.
Total cot to paint vessel all over  184  338 Rs.

25. A cylindrical tube of radius 12cm contains water to a depth of 20cm. A spherical ball of
radius 9cm is dropped into the tube and thus level of water is raised by hcm. What is the
value of h_____?
Sol:
Given that radius of cylindrical tube  r1   12cm
Let height of cylindrical tube (h)
Volume of a cylinder   r12 h

v1   12   h
2
……(1)
Given spherical ball radius  r2   9cm
4
Volume of sphere   r23
3
4
v2     93 ……(2)
3
Equating (1) and (2)
v1  v2
4
 12   h     93
2

3
4
   93
h 3
 12 
2

h  6  75cm
Level of water raised in tube (h)  6  75cm

26. The difference between outer and inner curved surface areas of a hollow right circular
cylinder 14cm long is 88cm2 . If the volume of metal used in making cylinder is 176cm3 .
find the outer and inner diameters of the cylinder____?
Sol:
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Given height of a hollow cylinder = 14cm


Let internal and external radii of hollow
Cylinder be ‘r’ and R
Given that difference between inner and outer
Curved surface  88cm2
Curved surface area of cylinder (hollow)
 2  R  r  h cm 2
 88  2  R  r  h
 88  2  R  r 14
 R  r 1 ……(1)
Volume of cylinder (hollow)    R  r 2  h cm3
2

Given volume of a cylinder  176cm3


 
  R 2  r 2 h  176

  R 2
 r2  14  176
 R2  r 2  4
  R  r  R  r   4
 Rr  4 ……(2)
R  r 1
Rr 4
2R  5
5
2R  5  R   2  5cm
2
Substituting ‘R’ value in (1)
 R  r 1
 25  r 1
 2  5 1  r
 r  1 5cm
Internal radii of hollow cylinder  1 5cm
External radii of hollow cylinder  2  5cm

27. Prove that the surface area of a sphere is equal to the curved surface area of the
circumference cylinder__?
Sol:
Let radius of a sphere be r
Curved surface area of sphere  4 r 2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

S1  4 r 2
Let radius of cylinder be ' r ' cm
Height of cylinder be '2r ' cm
Curved surface area of cylinder  2 rh
S2  2 r  2r   4 r 2
S1 and S 2 are equal. Hence proved
So curved surface area of sphere = surface area of cylinder

28. The diameter of a metallic sphere is equal to 9cm. it is melted and drawn into a long wire
of diameter 2mm having uniform cross-section. Find the length of the wire?
Sol:
Given diameter of a sphere (d)  9cm
9
Radius (r)   4  5cm
2
4
Volume of a sphere   r 3
3
4
V1     4  53  381 70cm3 ……(1)
3
Since metallic sphere is melted and made into a cylindrical wire
Volume of a cylinder   r 2 h
2mm
Given radius of cylindrical wire  r  
2
 1mm  0 1cm
V2    0 1 h
2
……(2)
Equating (1) and (2)
V1  V2
 381  703    0 1 h
2

 h  12150cm
Length of wire (h)  12150cm

29. An iron spherical ball has been melted and recast into smaller balls of equal size. If the
1
radius of each of the smaller balls is 4 of the radius of the original ball, how many such
balls are made? Compare the surface area, of all the smaller balls combined together with
that of the original ball.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

1
Given that radius of each of smaller ball  Radius of original ball.
4
Let radius of smaller ball be r.
Radius of bigger ball be 4r
4
Volume of big spherical ball   r 3  r  4r 
3
4
V1    4r 
3
……(1)
3
4
Volume of each small ball   r 3
3
4
V2   r 3 ……(2)
3
Let no of balls be ' n '
V
n 1
V2
4
  4r 
3

n 3
4
 r 
3

3
 n  43  64
 No of small balls  64
Curved surface area of sphere  4 r 2
Surface area of big ball  S1   4  4r 
2
…….(3)
Surface area of each small ball  S1   4 r 2
Total surface area of 64 small balls
 S2   64  4 r 2 …….(4)
By combining (3) and (4)
S
 2 4
3
 S2  4s
Total surface area of small balls is equal to 4 times surface area of big ball.

30. A tent of height 77dm is in the form a right circular cylinder of diameter 36m and height
44dm surmounted by a right circular cone. Find the cost of canvas at Rs.3.50 per m2 ?
Sol:
Given that height of a tent = 77dm
Height of cone  44dm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Height of a tent without cone  77  44  33dm


 3  3m
Given diameter of cylinder (d) = 36m
36
Radius  r    18m
2
Let ‘l’ be slant height of cone
l 2  r 2  h2
l 2  182  3  32
l 2  324  10  89
l 2  334  89
l  18  3
Slant height of cone l  18  3
Curved surface area of cylinder  S1   2 rh
 2   18  4  4m2 …….(1)
Curved surface area of cone  S 2    rl
  18 18  3m2 …….(2)
Total curved surface of tent  S1  S 2
T.C.S.A  S1  S 2
 1532  46m2
Given cost canvas per m 2  Rs 3  50
Total cost of canvas per 1532  46  3  50
 1532  46  3  50
 5363  61
Total cost of canvas  Rs 5363.61

31. Metal spheres each of radius 2cm are packed into a rectangular box of internal dimension
16cm  8cm  8cm when 16 spheres are packed the box is filled with preservative liquid.
Find volume of this liquid?
Sol:
Given radius of metal spheres  2cm
4
Volume of sphere  v    r 3
3
4
So volume of each metallic sphere    2  cm3
3

3
4
Total volume of 16 spheres  v1   16    2  cm3
3
…(1)
3
Volume of rectangular box  lbh
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

V2  16  8  8cm3 …(2)
Subtracting (2) – (1) we get volume of liquid
 V2  V1  Volume off liquid
4
 16  8  8    2  16
3

3
 1024  536 16  488cm3
Hence volume of liquid  488cm3

32. The largest sphere is to be curved out of a right circular of radius 7cm and height 14cm.
find volume of sphere?
Sol:
Given radius of cylinder  r   7cm
Height of cylinder  h   14cm
Largest sphere is curved out from cylinder
Thus diameter of sphere = diameter of cylinder
Diameter of sphere  d   2  7  14cm
4
Volume of a sphere   r 3
3
4
  7
3

3
1372

3
 1436  75cm3
Volume of sphere  1436  75cm3

33. A copper sphere of radius 3cm is melted and recast into a right circular cone of height 3cm.
find radius of base of cone?
Sol:
Given radius of sphere  3cm
4
Volume of a sphere   r 3
3
4
    33 cm3 …..(1)
3
Given sphere is melted and recast into a right circular cone
Given height of circular cone  3cm.
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

1
Volume of right circular cone   r 2 h 
3

 r 
2
 3cm2 …..(1)
3
Equating 1 and 2 we get
4 1
  33    r   3
2

3 3
4
  33
r 
2 3

r  36cm
2

r  6cm
Radius of base of cone  r   6cm

34. A vessel in the shape of cuboid contains some water. If these identical spheres are
immersed in the water, the level of water is increased by 2cm. if the area of base of cuboid
is 160cm2 and its height 12cm, determine radius of any of spheres?
Sol:
Given that area of cuboid  160cm2
Level of water increased in vessel  2cm
Volume of a vessel  160  2cm3 ……(1)
4
Volume of each sphere   r 3cm3
3
4
Total volume of 3 spheres  3   r 3cm3 ……(2)
3
Equating (1) and (2) ( Volumes are equal V1  V2 )
4
160  2  3   r 3
3
160  2
r3 
4
3 
3
320
r3 
4
r  2  94cm
Radius of sphere  2  94cm

35. A copper rod of diameter 1cm and length 8cm is drawn into a wire of length 18m of
uniform thickness. Find thickness of wire?
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Sol:
Given diameter of copper rod  d1   1cm
1
Radius  r1   0  5cm
2
Length of copper rod  h1   8cm

Volume of cylinder   r12 h1

V1    0  5   8cm3
2
……(1)
V2   r22 h2
Length of wire  h2   18m  1800cm
V2   r22 1800  cm3 ..…..(2)
Equating (1) and (2)
V1  V2
  0  5   8   r22 1800 
2

  0  5  8 2
2

 r2
 1800 
r2  0  033cm
Radius thickness of wire  0  033cm.

36. The diameters of internal and external surfaces of hollow spherical shell are 10cm and 6cm
2
respectively. If it is melted and recast into a solid cylinder of length of 2 3 cm, find the
diameter of the cylinder.
Sol:
Given diameter of internal surfaces of a hollow spherical shell  10cm
10
Radius  r    5cm.
2
6
External radii  R    3cm
2
4

Volume of a spherica shell  hollow   R 2  r 2
3

4

V1   52  32 cm3
3
 ………(1)

8
Given length of solid cylinder  h  
3
Let radius of solid cylinder be ' r '
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Volume of a cylinder   r 2 h
8
V2   r 2   cm3 ………(2)
3
V1  V2
Equating (1) and (2)
4 8
   25  9    r 2  
3 3
4
 16 
3  r2
 
8
 
3
 r  49cm
2

 r  7cm
d  2r  14cm
 Diameter of cylinder  14cm

37. A right angled triangle whose sides are 3 cm, 4 cm and 5 cm is revolved about the sides
containing the right angle in two days. Find the difference in volumes of the two cones so
formed. Also, find their curved surfaces.
Sol:
(i) Given that radius of cone  r1   4cm
Height of cone  h1   3cm
Slant height of cone  l1   5cm
1
Volume of cone V1    r12 h1
3
1
   4   3  16 cm3
2

3
(ii) Given radius of second cone  r2   3cm
Height of cone  h2   4cm
Slant height of cone  l2   5cm
1
Volume of cone V2   r22 h2
3
1
   3  4   12 cm3
2

3
Difference in volumes of two cones V   V1  V2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

V  16  12
V  4 cm3
Curved surface area of first cone  S1    r1l1
S1    4  5   20 cm 2
Curved surface area of first cone  S1    r1l1
S1    4  5   20 cm 2
Curved surface area of second cone  S2    r2l2
S1    3 5   15 cm 2
S1  20 cm2 S2  15 cm2

38. How many coins 1 75cm in diameter and 2mm thick must be melted to form a cuboid
11cm 10cm  75cm ___?
Sol:
Given that dimensions of a cuboid 11cm 10cm  75cm
So its volume V1   11cm 10cm  7cm
 1110  7cm3 …….(1)
Given diameter (d)  1 75cm
d 1 75
Radius  r     0  875cm
2 2
Thickness  h   2mm  0  2cm

Volume of a cylinder   r 2 h

V2    0  875   0  2  cm3
2
…….(2)
V1  V2  n
Since volume of a cuboid is equal to sum of n volume of ‘n’ coins
V
n 1
V2
n  no of coins
1110  7
n
  0  875  0  2 
2

n  1600
No of coins  n   1600,
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

39. A well with inner radius 4m is dug 14m deep earth taken out of it has been spread evenly
all around a width of 3m it to form an embankment. Find the height of the embankment?
Sol:
Given that inner radius of a well  a   4m
Depth of a well  h   14m

Volume of a cylinder   r 2 h

V1    4  14cm3
2
……….(1)
Given well is spread evenly to form an embankment
Width of an embankment  3m
Outer radii of a well (R)  4  3  7m.
Volume of a hollow cylinder    R 2  r 2   hm3


V2   7 2  42  hm3  ………..(2)
Equating (1) and (2)
V1  V2
   4  14    49  16   h
2

  4  14
2

h
  33
h  6  78m

40. Water in a canal 1.5m wide and 6m deep is flowering with a speed of 10km / hr. how much
area will it irrigate in 30 minutes if 8cm of standing water is desired?
Sol:
Given that water is flowering with a speed  10km / hr
30
In 30 minutes length of flowering standing water  10  km
60
 5km  5000m.
Volume of flowering water in 30 minutes
V  5000  width  depth m3
Given width of canal  1 5m
Depth of canal  6m
V  5000 1 5  6m3
V  45000m3
45000
Irrigating area in 30 minutes if 8cm of standing water is desired 
0  08
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

45000
  562500m2
0  08
 Irrigated area in 30min utes  562500m2

41. A farmer runs a pipe of internal diameter 20 cm from the canal into a cylindrical tank in his
field which is 10 m in diameter and 2 m deep. If water flows through the pipe at the rate of
3 km/h, in how much time will the tank be filled?
Sol:
9
𝑚
8

42. A well of diameter 3 m is dug 14 m deep. The earth taken out of it has been spread evenly
all around it to a width of 4 m to form an embankment. Find the height of the embankment.
Sol:
Given diameter of well = 3m
3
Radius of well  m  4
2
Depth of well  b   14m
With of embankment  4m
3 11
Radius of outer surface of embankment  4   m
2 2
Let height of embankment  hm
Volume of embankment V1     r22  r12  h
( it is viewed as a hollow cylinder)
2
  11 2  3  
V1           h  m3 …..(1)
 2   2 
 
Volume of earth dugout V2    r12 h
2
3
V2     14 m3 …..(2)
2
Given that volumes (1) and (2) are equal
So V1  V2
  11 2  3 2  3
2

         h     14
 2   2   2
 
 121 9  9
   h   14
 4 4 4
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

9
 h m
8
9
Height of embankment  h   m.
8
43. The surface area of a solid metallic sphere is 616 cm2. It is melted and recast into a cone of
22
height 28 cm. Find the diameter of the base of the cone so formed (Use it = )
7
Sol:
Given height of cone  h   28cm
Given surface area of Sphere  616cm2
We know surface area of sphere  4 r 2
 4 r 2  616
616  7
 r2 
4  22
 r  49
2

 r  7cm
Radius of sphere  r   7cm
Let r1 be radius of cone
Given volume of cone  Volume of sphere
1
Volume of cone   r 2 h
3
 
1
V1    r1   28cm3
2
………..(1)
3
4
Volume of sphere  V2    r 3
3
4
V2    7  cm3
3
………..(1)
3
(1) = (2)  V1  V2
1 4
   r1   28    7 
2 3

3 3
 r1  49
2

r1  7cm
Radius of cone  r1   7cm
Diameter of base of cone  d1   2  7  14cm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

44. The difference between the outer and inner curved surface areas of a hollow right circular
cylinder 14cm long is 88cm2 . If the volume of metal used in making cylinder is 176cm3
find outer and inner diameters of the cylinder?
Sol:
Given height of a hollow cylinder  14cm
Let internal and external radii of hollow
Cylinder be ‘r’ an ‘R’
Given that difference between inner and outer curved surface  88cm2
Curved surface area of hollow cylinder  2  R  r  h
 88  2  R  0  h
 88  2  R  r 14
 R  r 1 ……..(1)
Volume of hollow cylinder    R 2  r 2  h cm3

Given volume of cylinder  176cm3


 
  R 2  r 2 h  176

  R 2
 r2  14  176
 R2  r 2  4
  R  r  R  r   4
 R4 4 ……..(2)
By using (1) and (2) equations and solving we get
R  r  1 ..(1)
R  r  4 ..(2)
2R  5
5
 R  2  5cm
2
Substituting ‘R’ value in (1)
 R  r 1
 25  r  1
 2  5 1  r
 r  1 5cm
External radii of hollow cylinder  R   2  5cm
Internal radii of hollow cylinder  r   1 5cm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

1
45. The volume of a hemisphere is 2425 cm3 . Find its curved surface area?
2
Sol:
1
Given that volume of a hemisphere  2424 cm3
2
2
Volume of a hemisphere   r 3
3
2 1
  r 3  2425
3 2
2 4841
  r3 
3 2
4851 3
 r3 
2  2 
4851 3
 r3 
4
3
r
r  10  50cm
Radius of hemisphere  10  5cm
Curved surface area of hemisphere  2 r 2
 2 10  5 
2

 692  72
 693xm2
curved surface area off hemisphere  693cm2

46. A cylindrical bucket 32cm high and with radius of base 18cm is filled with sand. This
bucket is emptied out on the ground and a conical heap of sand is formed. If the height of
the conical heap of sand is formed. If the height of the conical heap is 24cm. find the radius
and slant height of the heap?
Sol:
Given that height of cylindrical bucket  h   32cm
Radius  r   18cm
Volume of cylinder   r 2 h
22
 18  32cm3
2
………(1)
7
Given height of conical heap  24cm
Let radius of conical heap be r1
Slant height of conical heap be l1
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

 l12  r12  h12


 r12  l12  h12
 r12  l12   24 
2
………..(2)
1
Volume of cone   r 2 h
3
1
So its volume    r12 h1
3
1 22
   r12  24
3 7
22
  r12  8cm3 ………….(3)
7
So equating (1) and (3)
(1) = (3)
22 22
 18  32   r12  8
2

7 7
18
2
 32
  r12
8
 r1  1296
2

 r1  36cm
Radius of conical heap is 36cm
Substituting r1 in (2)
 r12  l12   24 
2

 1296  l12  576


 1296  576  l12
 1872  l12
 l1  43  26cm
Slant height of conical heap  43  26cm

Exercise 16.2

47. A tent is in the form of a right circular cylinder surmounted by a cone. The diameter of
cylinder is 24 m. The height of the cylindrical portion is 11 m while the vertex of the cone
is 16 m above the ground. Find the area of canvas required for the tent.
Sol:
Given diameter of cylinder 24m
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

24
Radius  r    12m
2
Given height of cylindrical part  h1   11m
 Height of cone part  h2   5m
Vertex of cone above ground  11  5  16m
Curved surface area of cone  S1    rl
22
 12  l
7
Let l be slant height of cone
 l  r 2  h22

 l  122  52  13m
l  13m
22
 Curved surface area of cone  5  12 13m2 ……….(1)
7
Curved surface area of cylinder  S2   2 rh
S2  2 12 11 m2 ………..(2)
To find area of canvas required for tent
S  S1  S 2  1   2 
22
S 12 13  2 12 11
7
S  490  829  38
S  1320m2
 Total canvas required for tent  S   1320m2

48. A rocket is in the form of a circular cylinder closed at the lower end with a cone of the
same radius attached to the top. The cylinder is of radius 2  5m and height 21m and the
cone has a slant height 8m. Calculate total surface area and volume of the rocket?
Sol:
Given radius of cylinder  a   2  5m
Height of cylinder  h   21m
Slant height of cylinder  l   8m
Curved surface area of cone  S1    rl
S1    2  5  8  cm2 ………(1)
Curbed surface area of a cone  2 rh   r 2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

S 2  2  2  5  21    2  5  cm 2
2
……….(2)
 Total curved surface area = (1) + (2)
S  S1  S2
S    2  5  8   2  2  5  21    2  5 
2

S  62  831  329  86  19  63
S  412  3m2
 Total curved surface area  412  3m2
1
Volume of a cone   r 2 h
3
1
V1     2  5 h cm3
2
………...(3)
3
Let ‘h’ be height of cone
l 2  r 2  h2
 l 2  r 2  h2
 h  l2  r2
 h  82  252
 h  23  685m
Subtracting ‘h’ value in (3)
1
Volume of a cone V1      2  5  23  685 cm2
2
………(4)
3
Volume of a cylinder V2    r 2 h
   2  5  21m3
2
………..(5)
Total volume = (4) + (5)
V  V1  V2
1
 V     2  5  23  685    2  5  1
2 2

3
 V  461 84m2
Total volume V   461  84m 2

49. A tent of height 77 dm is in the form of a right circular cylinder of diameter 36 m and
height 44 dm surmounted by a right circular cone. Find the cost of the canvas at Rs. 350
22
per m2 (Use it = ).
7
Sol:
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Given that height of a tent  77dm


Height of a surmounted cone  44dm
Height of cylinder part  77  44
 33dm  3.3m
Given diameter of cylinder (d)  26m
36
Radius  r    18m.
2
Let ‘l’ be slant height of cone
 l 2  r 2  h2
 l 2  182  3  32
 l 2  824  10  89
 l  18  3
 Slant height of cone 1  18  3
Curved surface area of cylinder  S1   2 rh
 2   18  4  4m2 ………..(1)
Curved surface area of cone  S 2    rh
  18 18  3m2 ………..(2)
Total curved surface of tent  S1  S 2
S  S1  S2
S  1532  46m2
 Total curved surface area  S   12  1532  46m2

50. A toy is in the form of a cone surmounted on a hemisphere. The diameter of the base and
the height of cone are 6cm and 4cm. determine surface area of toy?
Sol:
Given height of cone  h   4cm
Diameter of cone  d   6cm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

6
 Radius (r)   3cm
2

Let ‘l’ be slant height of cone


l  r 2  h2
 32  42  5cm
l  5cm
 Slant height of cone  l   5cm.
Curved surface area of cone  S1    rl
S1    3 5   47 1cm2
Curved surface area of hemisphere  S 2   2 r 2
S 2  2  3  56  52cm 2
2

 Total surface area  s   61  S2


 47 1  56  52
 103  62cm2
 Curved surface area of toy  103  62cm2

51. A solid is in the form of a right circular cylinder, with a hemisphere at one end and a cone
at the other end. The radius of the common base is 3.5 cm and the heights of the cylindrical
and conical portions are 10 cm. and 6 cm, respectively. Find the total surface area of the
22
solid. (Use n = )
7
Sol:
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Given radius of common base  3  5cm


Height of cylindrical part  h   10cm
Height of conical part  h   6cm
Let ' l ' be slant height of cone
l  r 2  h2

l  3  5  62
2

l  48  25cm
Curved surface area of cone  S1    rl
   3  5  48  25 
 76  408cm2
Curved surface area of cylinder  S2   2 rh
 2  3  5 10 
 220cm2
Curved surface area of hemisphere  S   S1  S2  S3
 76  408  220  77
 373  408cm2
 Total surface area of solid  S   373  408cm2
Cost of canvas per m 2  Rs 3  50
Cost of canvas for 1532  46m2  1532  46  3  50
 5363  61Rs
 Cost of canvas required for tent  Rs 5363  61 pr

52. A toy is in the shape of a right circular cylinder with a hemisphere on one end and a cone
on the other. The radius and height of the cylindrical part are 5 cm and 13 cm respectively.
The radii of the hemispherical and conical parts are the same as that of the cylindrical part.
Find the surface area of the toy if the total height of the toy is 30 cm.
Sol:
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

S1  2  2 13
S1  408  2cm2
Curved surface area of cone  S 2    rl
Let l be slant height of cone
l  r 2  h2
h  30 13  5  12cn
 l  122  52  13cm
l  13cm
 Curved surface area of cone  S2     513
 204 1cm2
Curved surface area of hemisphere  S3   2 r 2
 2  5 
2

 2  25   50  157cm 2
S3  157cm2
Total curved surface area  S   S1  S2  S3
S  408  2  204 1  157
S  769  3cm2
 Surface area of toy  S   769.3cm 2

53. A cylindrical tube of radius 5cm and length 9  8cm is full of water. A solid in form of a
right circular cone mounted on a hemisphere is immersed in tube. If radius of hemisphere is
immersed in tube if the radius of hemisphere is 3  5cm and height of the cone outside
hemisphere is 5cm. find volume of water left in the tube?
Sol:
Given radius of cylindrical tube  r   5cm.
Height of cylindrical tube  h   9  8cm
Volume of cylinder   r 2 h
V1    5   9  8   770cm3
2

Given radius of hemisphere  r   3  5cm


Height of cone  h   5cm
2
Volume of hemisphere   r 3
3
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

2
    3  5  89  79cm3
3

3
1
Volume of cone   r 2 h
3

  3  5 5  64 14cm3
2

3
Volume of cone + volume of hemisphere V2   39  79  64 14  154cm3

54. A circular tent has cylindrical shape surmounted by a conical roof. The radius of cylindrical
base is 20m. The height of cylindrical and conical portions are 4  2m and 2 1m. Find the
volume of the tent?
Sol:
Given radius of cylindrical base  20m
Height of cylindrical part  h   4  2m.
Volume of cylindrical   r 2 h1
V1    20  4  2  5280m3
2

1
Volume of cone   r 2 h2
3
Height of conical part  h2   2 1m

V2   20  2 1  880m3
2

3
Volume of tent  v   V1  V2
V  5280  880
V  6160m3
 Volume of tent  v   V1  V2
V  5280  880
V  6160m3
 Volume of tent  v   6160m3

55. A petrol tank is a cylinder of base diameter 21cm and length 18cm fitted with conical ends
each of axis 9cm. determine capacity of the tank?
Sol:
Given base diameter of cylinder  21cm
21
Radius  r    11 5cm
2
Height of cylindrical part  h   18cm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Height of conical part  h2   9cn


Volume of cylinder   r 2 h1
V1   11  5  18  7474  77cm3
2

1
Volume of cone   r 2 h2 ( 2 conical end)
3
1
V2   11 5  9   2
2

3
1
V2   1190  25  2492  25cm3
3
Volume of tank = volume of cylinder + volume of cone
V  V1  V2
V  7474  77  2492  85
V  9966  36cm3
Volume of water left in tube = Volume of cylinder – Volume of hemisphere and cone
V  V1  V2
 770 154
 616cm3
 Volume of water left in tube  616cm3

56. A conical hole is drilled in a circular cylinder of height 12cm and base radius 5cm. The
height and base radius of the cone are also the same. Find the whole surface and volume of
the remaining cylinder?
Sol:

Given base radius of cylinder  r   5cm


Height of cylinder  h   12cm
Let ‘l’ be slant height of cone
l  r 2  h2
 52  122
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

l  13cm
 Height and base radius of cone and cylinder are same
Total surface area of remaining part  s   2 rh   r 2   rl
 2  5 12     5     5 13
2

T.S.A  210 cm2


Volume of remaining part = Volume of cylinder – Volume of cone
1
 V   r 2h   r 2h
3
1
 V    5 12     5 12 
2 2

3
 V  200 cm 3

 Volume of remaining part  v   200 cm3

57. A tent is in form of a cylinder of diameter 20m and height 2  5m surmounted by a cone of
equal base and height 7  5m. Find capacity of tent and cost of canvas at Rs 100per square
meter?
Sol:

20
Given radius of cylinder  r    10m
2
Height of a cylinder  h1   2  5m
Height of cone  h2   7  5m
Let ‘l’ be slant height of cone
l  r 2  h22

l  102  7  52
 l  12  5m
Volume of cylinder V1    r 2 h
V1   10   2  5 
2
……..(1)
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

1
Volume of cone V2    r 2 h2
3
1
  10   7  5 m3
2
……..(2)
3
Total capacity of tent = (1) + (2)
V  V1  V2
1
V   10  2  5   10  7  5
2 2

3
V  250  250
V  500 cm3
 Total capacity of tent  500 cm2

58. A boiler is in the form of a cylinder 2m long with hemispherical ends each of 2m diameter.
Find the volume of the boiler?
Sol:

Given height of cylinder  h   2m


Diameter of hemisphere  d   2m
Radius  r   1m
Volume of a cylinder   r 2 h
V1   1  2  cm3
2
……..(1)
2
Volume of hemisphere   r 3
3
Since at ends of cylinder hemisphere are attached
Volumes of 2 hemispheres
2
 2   1 cm2
2
………(2)
3
Volumes of boiler = (1) + (2)
V  V1  V2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

2
V  2   1   1  2 
2 2

3
220 3
V m
21
220 3
 Volumes of boiler  m
21

59. A vessel is a hollow cylinder fitted with a hemispherical bottom of the same base. The
14
depth of cylinder is m and internal surface area of the solid?
3
Sol:
3 5
Given radius of hemisphere  r    1 75m
2
14
Height of cylinder  h   m
3
Volume of cylinder   r h2

2  14 
  1 75    cm3 ……..(1)
 3
2
Volume of hemisphere   r 3
3
2
   1 75 cm3
3
……..(2)
3
Volume of vessel = (1) + (2)
V  V1  V2
2
V   r 2h   r 3
3
2  14  2
V   1 75     1 75 
2

 3 3
V  56m3
 Volumes of vessel  v   56m3
Internal surface area of solid  s   2 rh  2 r 2
S = Surface area of cylinder + surface are of hemisphere
 14 
S = 2 1 75     2 1 75 
2

 3
S  70  51m2
 Internal surface area of solid  s   70  51m 2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

60. A solid is composed of a cylinder with hemispherical ends. If the whole length of the solid
is 104cm and radius of each of hemispherical ends is 7cm. find the cost of polishing its
surface at the rate of Rs 10 per dm2 ?
Sol:
Given radius of hemispherical ends  7cm
Height of body  h  2r   104cm.
Curved surface area of cylinder  2 rh
 2  7  h ………(1)
 h  2 x  104
 h  104  2  r 
 h  90cm
Substitute ‘h’ value in (1)
Curved surface area of cylinder  2  7  90 
 3948  40cm2 ………(2)
Curved surface area of 2 hemisphere  2  2 r 2 
 2  2    72 
 615  75cm3 ………(3)
Total curved surface area = (2) + (3)
 3958  40  615  75  4574 15cm2  45  74dm2
Cost of polishing for 1dm2  Rs10
Cost of polishing for 45  74dm2  45  74 10
 Rs 457  4

61. A cylindrical vessel of diameter 14cm and height 42cm is fixed symmetrically inside a
similar vessel of diameter 16cm and height 42cm. The total space between two vessels is
filled with cork dust for heat insulation purpose. How many cubic cms of cork dust will be
required?
Sol:
Given height of cylindrical vessel  h   42cm
14
Inner radius of a vessel  r1   cm  7cm
2
16
Outer radius of a vessel  r2    8cm
2
Volume of a cylinder    r2  r12  h
2

   82  7 2  42
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

   64  49  42
 15  42  
 630
 1980cm3
Volume of a vessel  1980cm2

62. A cylindrical road solar made of iron is 1m long its internal diameter is 54cm and thickness
of the iron sheet used in making roller is 9cm. Find the mass of roller if 1cm3 of iron has
7  8gm mas?
Sol:

Given internal radius of cylindrical road


54
Roller  r1    27cm
2
1
Given thickness of road roller    9cm
b
Let order radii of cylindrical road roller be R
t  Rr
 9  R  27
 R  9  27  36cm
R  36cm
Given height of cylindrical road roller  h   1m
h  100cm.
Volume of iron   h  R 2  r 2 
   362  27 2  100
 1780  38cm3
Volume of iron  1780  38cm3
Mass of 1cm3 of iron  7  8gm
Mass of 1780  38cm3 of iron  1780  38  7  8
 1388696  4gm
 1388  7kg
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

 Mass of roller  m   1388  7 kg

63. A vessel in from of a hollow hemisphere mounted by a hollow cylinder. The diameter of
hemisphere is 14cm and total height of vessel is 13cm. find the inner surface area of
vessel?
Sol:
Given radius of hemisphere and cylinder (r)
14
  7cm
2
Given total height of vessel  13cm
 h  r   13cm
Inner surface area of vessel  2 r  h  r 
 2    7 13
 182
 572cm2
Inner surface area of vessel  572cm2

64. A toy is in the form of a cone of radius 3  5cm mounted on a hemisphere of same radius.
The total height of toy is 15  5cm. Find the total surface area of toy?
Sol:

Given radius of cone  r   3  5cm


Total height of toy  h   15  5cm
Length of cone  l   15  5  3  5
 12cm
Length of cone  l   12cm
Curved surface area of cone   rl
S1    3  5 12 
S1  131 94cm2 ……(1)
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Curved surface area of hemisphere  2 r 2


S 2  2  3  5 
2

S2  76  96cm2 ……(2)
Total surface of toy = (1) + (2)
S  S1  S2
S  181 94  76  96
S  208  90
S  209cm2
Total surface area of toy  209cm2

65. The difference between outside and inside surface areas of cylindrical metallic pipe 14cm
long is 44m2 . If pipe is made of 99cm3 of metal. Find outer and inner radii of pipe?
Sol:
Let inner radius of pipe be r1
Radius of outer cylinder be r2
Length of cylinder  h   14cm.
Surface area of hollow cylinder  2 h  r2  r1 
Given surface area of cylinder  44m2

66. A radius circular cylinder bring having diameter 12cm and height 15cm is full ice-cream.
The ice-cream is to be filled in cones of height 12cm and diameter 6cm having a
hemisphere shape on top find the number of such cones which can be filled with ice-
cream?
Sol:
12
Given radius of cylinder  r1    6cm
2
6
Given radius of hemisphere  r2    3cm.
2
Given height of cylinder  h   15cm..
Height of cones  l   12cm.
Volume of cylinder   r12 h
   6  15  cm3
2
……(1)
Volume of each cone = volume of cone + volume of hemisphere
1 2
  r22l   r23
3 3
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

1 2
   3 12     3 cm3
2 3
……..(2)
3 3
Let number of cones be ‘n’
n(Volume of each cone) = volume of cylinder
1 2 3
n    3 12     3     6  15
2 2

3 3 
  6  15
2

n
1 2
  3 12     3
2 3

3 3
540
n  10
5
 2 h  r2  r1   44
 2 14  r2  r1   44
 28  r2  r1   44
44
  r2  r1  
28
1
  r2  r1   ………..(1)
2
Given volume of a hollow cylinder  99cm3
Volume of a hollow cylinder   h  r22  r12 

 
  h r22  r12  99


 14 r22  r12  99 
 14  r1  r2  r2  r1   99
 14  r1  r2 1  99
 14  r1  r2   99
9
  r1  r2   ………..(2)
2
Equating (1) and (2) equations we get
9
r1  r2 
2
1
r1  r2 
2
2r2  5
5
r2  cm.
2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Substituting r2 value in (1)


 r1  2cm
Inner radius of pipe  a   2cm
5
Radius of outer cylinder  r2   cm.
2

67. A solid iron pole having cylindrical portion 110cm high and of base diameter 12cm is
surmounted by a cone 9cm high. Find the mass of the pole given that the mass of 1cm3 of
iron is 8 gm ?
Sol:
12
Given radius of cylindrical part  r    6cm
2
Height of cylinder  h   110cm
Length of cone  l   9cm
Volume of cylinder   r 2 h
V1    0  110cm3
2
………(1)
1
Volume of cone   r 2l
3
1
V2    6  9  108 cm3
2
………(2)
3
Volume of pole = (1) + (2)
V  V1  V2
 V    6  110  108
2

 V  12785 14cm3
Given mass of 1cm3 of iron  8gm
Mass of 12785 14cm3 of iron  12785 14  8
 10228112
 102  2kg
Mass of pole for 12785 14cm3 of iron is 102  2kg

68. A solid toy is in the form of a hemisphere surmounted by a right circular cone. Height of
the cone is 2 cm and the diameter of the base is 4 cm. If a right circular cylinder
circumscribes the toy, find how much more space it will cover.
Sol:
4
Given radius of cone, cylinder and hemisphere  r    2cm
2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Height of cone  l   2cm


Height of cylinder  h   4cm
Volume of cylinder   r 2 h    2   4  cm3
2
………(1)
1
Volume of cone   r 2l
3
1
   2  2
2

3

  4  2cm3 ……….(2)
3
2
Volume of hemisphere   r 3
3
2
    2
3

3
2
   8 cm3 ………..(3)
3
1 2 
So remaining volume of cylinder when toy is inserted to it   r 2 h    r 2l   r 3 
3 3 
= (1) – ((2) + (3))
 2 
   2  4    8     8 
2

3 3 
2
 16    4  8  16  8  8 cm3
3
So remaining volume of cylinder when toy is inserted to it  8 cm3

69. A solid consisting of a right circular cone of height 120cm and radius 60cm is placed
upright in right circular cylinder full of water such that it touches bottoms. Find the volume
of water left in the cylinder. If radius of cylinder is 60cm and its height is 180cm ?
Sol:
Given radius of circular cone  a   60cm
Height of circular cone  b   120cm.
1
Volume of a cone   r 2l
3
1
   60  120  cm3
2
…………(1)
3
2
Volume of hemisphere   r 3
3
Given radius of hemisphere  60cm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

2
   60  cm3
2
………….(2)
3
Given radius of cylinder  60cm
Height of cylinder  h   180cm.
Volume of cylinder   r 2 h
   60  180cm3
2
……………(3)
Volume of water left in cylinder = (3) – ((1) + (2))
1 2 
   60  120      60     60  180 
3 3 2

3 3 
 113 1cm3  1131m3
Volume of water left in cylinder  1131m3

70. A cylindrical vessel with internal diameter 10cm and height 10  5cm is full of water. A
solid cone of base diameter 7cm and height 6cm is completely immersed in water. Find
value of water (i) displaced out of the cylinder (ii) left in the cylinder?
Sol:
10
Given internal radius  r1    5cm
2
Height of cylindrical vessel  h   10  5cm
7
Outer radius of cylindrical vessel  l2    3  5cm
2
Length of cone  l   6cm.
(i) Volume of water displaced = volume of cone
1
Volume of cone   r22l
3
1
   3  52  6  76  9cm3
3
 77cm3
Volume of water displaced  77cm3
Volume of cylinder   r12 h    5  10  5
2

 824  6
 825cm2
(ii) Volume of water left in cylinder = volume of
Cylinder – volume of cone
 825  77  748cm3
Volume of water left in cylinder  748cm3
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

71. A hemispherical depression is cut from one face of a cubical wooden block of edge 21cm
such that the diameter of hemisphere is equal to the edge of cube determine the volume and
total surface area of the remaining block?
Sol:
Given edge of wooden block  a   21cm
Given diameter of hemisphere = edge of cube
21
Radius   10  5cm
2
Volume of remaining block = volume of box – volume of hemisphere
2
 a3   r 3
3
2
  2    10  5
3 3

3
 6835  5cm3
Surface area of box  6a 2 ……..(1)
Curved surface area of hemisphere  2 r 2
..……(2)
Area of base of hemisphere   r 2
……..(3)
So remaining surface area of box = (1) – (2) + (3)
 6a 2   r 2  2 r 2
 6  21   10  5   2 10  5 
2 2

 2992  5cm2
Remaining surface area of box  2992  5cm2
Volume of remaining block  6835  5cm3

72. A tag is in the form of a hemisphere surmounted by a right circular cone of same base
radius as that of the hemisphere. If the radius of the base of cone is 21cm and its volume is
2
of volume of hemisphere calculate height of cone and surface area of toy?
3
Sol:

Given radius of cone = radius of hemisphere


Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Radius  r   21cm
2
Given that volume of cone  Volume of hemisphere
3
1
 Volume of cone   r 2 h
3
2
Volume of hemisphere   r 3
3
1 22 
So  r 2 h    r 3 
3 33 
1 22 3
   21 h     21 
2

3 33 
4  21   3
h
4  21

4
 h   21  28cm
3

Height of cone  h   28cm

Curved surface area of cone   rl

S1    21 28  cm2 ………….(1)

Curved surface area off hemisphere  2 r 2

S 2  2    21 cm 2
2
…………..(2)

Total surface area  s   S1  S2  1   2 

S   rl  2 r 2

S  5082cm2

Curved surface area of toy  5082cm2


Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

73. A solid is in the shape of a cone surmounted on hemisphere the radius of each of them is
being 3  5cm and total height of solid is 9  5cm . Find volume of the solid?
Sol:

Given radius of hemisphere and cone  3  5cm


Given total height of solid  h   9  5cm
Length of cone  l   9  5  3  5  6cm
1
Volume of a cone   r 2l
3
1
V1    3  5  6 cm3
2
…………(1)
3
2
Volume of hemisphere   r 3
3
2
V2    3  5 cm3
3
………………..(2)
3
Volume of solid = (1) + (2)
V  V1  V2
1 2
V    3  5  6    3  5
2 3

3 3
V  76  96  89  79  166  75cm3
Volume of solid  v   166  75cm3

Exercise 16.3

1. A bucket has top and bottom diameters of 40 cm and 20 cm respectively. Find the volume of
the bucket if its depth is 12 cm. Also, find the cost of tin sheet used for making the bucket at
the rate of Rs 1.20 per dm2 . (Use 𝜋 = 3.14)
Sol:
Given diameter to top of bucket = 40cm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

40
Radius  r1    20cm
2
Depth of a bucket  h   12cm
1
Volume of a bucket   r12  r22  r1r2 h
3
 
3

  202  102  20 10  
12

1
 8800cm3 .
Let ‘l’ be slant height of bucket
l   r1  r2   h2
2

l   20 10  122
2

 l  2 61  15  620cm
Total surface area of bucket    r1  r2   l   r22
   20  10  15  620   10 
2

1320 61  2200 2
 cm
7
1320 61  2200 2
 dm  17  87dm2
7 100
Given that cost of tin sheet used for making bucket per dm2  Rs1.20
So total cost for 17  87dm2  1 20 17  87
 21 40 Rs.
Cost of tin sheet for 17  87dm2  Rs 2140 ps

2. A frustum of a right circular cone has a diameter of base 20cm, of top 12cm and height
3cm. find the area of its whole surface and volume?
Sol:
Given base diameter of cone  d1   20cm
20
Radius  r1    10cm
2
Top diameter of cone  d 2   12cm
12
Radius  r2    6cm
2
Height of cone  h   3cm
Volume of frustum right circular cone
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

1

  r12  r22  r1r2 h
3

  102  62  10  6   3
1
3
 616cm3
Let ‘l’ be slant height of cone
l   r1  r2   h2
2

l  10  6  32
2

 l  16  9  25cm  5cm
Slant height of cone  l   5cm
Total surface area of cone    r1  r2  l   r12   r22
  10  6  5   10     6 
2 2

   80  100  36 
   216   678  85cm 2
Total surface area of cone  678  85cm2

3. The slant height of the frustum of a cone is 4cm and perimeters of it circular ends are 18cm
and 6cm. find curved surface of the frustum?
Sol:
Given slant height of cone  r   4cm
Let radii of top and bottom circles be r1 and r2
Given perimeters of its ends as 18cm and 6cm
 2 r1  18cm
  r1  9cm ……(1)
 2 r2  6cm
  r2  3cm ……(2)
Curved surface area of frustum cone    r1  r2  l
   r1  r2  l
  r1   r2  l
  9  3 4
 12  4  48cm 2
Curved surface area of frustum cone  48cm2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

4. The perimeters of the ends of a frustum of a right circular cone are 44 cm and 33 cm. If the
height of the frustum be 16 cm, find its volume, the slant surface and the total surface.
Sol:
Given perimeters of ends of frustum right circular cone are 44cm an 33cm
Height of frustum cone  16cm
Perimeter  2 r
2 r1  44
r1  7cm
2 r2  33
21
r2   5  25cm
4
Let slant height of frustum right circular cone be l
l  r1  r2   h2
2

l  7  5  25  162 cm
2

l  16 1cm
Slant height of frustum cone  16 1cm
Curved surface area of frustum cone    r1  r2  l
   7  5  25 16 1
C.S.A of cone  619  65cm2
1
Volume of a cone   r12  r22  r1r2  h
3
 
1

 72   5  25  7  5  25 16
3
2

 1898  56cm3
Volume of a cone  1898  56 cm3
Total surface area of frustum cone    r1  r2  l   r12   r22


   7  5  25 16 1   7 2  5  252 
 860  27cm2
Total surface area of frustum cone  860  27cm2

5. If the radii of circular ends of a conical bucket which is 45cm high be 28cm and 7cm. find
the capacity of the bucket?
Sol:
Given height of conical bucket  45cm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Give radii of 2 circular ends of a conical bucket is 28cm and 7cm


r1  28cm
r2  7cm
1
 
Volume of a conical bucket   r12  r22  r1r2 h
3
1
 
  282  72  28  7  45
3
1
  1029  45
3
 15435
V  48510cm3
Volume of a conical bucket  48510cm3

6. The height of a cone is 20cm. A small cone is cut off from the top by a plane parallel to the
1
base. If its volumes be of the volume of the original cone, determine at what height
25
above base the section is made
Sol:

V AB be a cone of height h 1  VO1  20cm


Fronts triangles Vo1 A and VoA1
VO1 O1 A 20 O1 A
  
VO OA1 VO OA1
1
Volumes of cone VAO
1  times volumes of cone VAB
125
1 1 1
We have   OA12 VO     O1 A12  20
3 125 3
2
 OA  4
  1  VO 
 O1 A  25
2
 VO  4
   VO 
 20  25
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

4  400
 VO  
3

25
 VO  64
3

 VO  4
Height at which section is made  20  4  16cm.

7. If the radii of circular ends of a bucket 24cm high are 5cm and 15cm. find surface area of
bucket?
Sol:
Given height of a bucket  R   24cm
Radius of circular ends of bucket 5cm and 15cm
r1  5cm ; r2  15cm
Let ' l ' be slant height of bucket
l  r1  r2   h2
2

l  15  5  242
2

 l  100  576  676


l  26cm
Curved surface area of bucket    r1  r2  l   r22
   5  15  26   15 
2

   20  26   15 
2

   520  225 
 745 cm2
Curved surface area of bucket  745 cm2

8. The radii of circular bases of a frustum of a right circular cone are 12cm and 3cm and
height is 12cm. find the total surface area volume of frustum?
Sol:
Let slant height of frustum cone be ‘l’
Given height of frustum cone 12cm
Radii of a frustum cone are 12cm and 23cm
r1  12cm r2  3cm

l  r1  r2   h2
2

l 12  3  122
2

l  81  144  15cm
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

l  15cm
Total surface area of cone    r1  r2  l   r12   r22
  12  315   12     3 
2 2

T.S.A  378 cm2


1

Volume of cone   r12  r1r2  r22  h
3

1

  122  32  12  3 12
3

 756 cm3
Volume of frustum cone  756 cm3

9. A tent consists of a frustum of a cone copped by a cone. If radii of ends of frustum be 13m
and 7m the height of frustum be 8m and slant height of thee conical cap bee 12m. find
canvas required for tent?
Sol:
Given height of frustum  h   8m
Radii of frustum cone are 13m and 7m
r1  13m r2  7cm
Let ‘l’ be slant height of frustum cone
l   r1  r2   h2
2

l  13  7   82  36  64
2

 l  10m
Curved surface area of friction  S1     r1  r2   l
  13  7  10
 200 m2
C.S.A of frustum  S1   200 m 2
Given slant height of conical cap = 12m
Base radius of upper cap cone  7m
Curved surface area of upper cap cone  S 2    rl
   7 12  264m2
Total canvas required for tent  S   S1  S2
S  200  264  892  57m2
Total canvas  892  57m2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

10. A reservoir in form of frustum of a right circular contains 44 107 liters off water which
fills it completely. The radii of bottom and top of reservoir are 50m and 100m. find depth
of water and lateral surface area of reservoir?
Sol:
Let depth of frustum cone be h
1
Volume of first cone V    r12  r22  r1r2 h
3
 
r1  50m r2  100m
1 22

V    502  1002  50 100  h
3 7

1 22
V     2500  1000  5000 h …(1)
3 7
Volumes of reservoir  44 107 liters ….(2)
Equating (1) and (2)
1
  2500 h  44 102
3
h  24
Let ‘l’ be slant height of cone
l  r1  r2   h2
2

l 50  100  242


2

l  55  461m
Lateral surface area of reservoir
 S     r1  r2   l
   50  100  55  461
 1500  55  461   26145  225m2
Lateral surface area of reservoir  26145  225m2
1
Volume of frustum cone   r12  r22  r1r2 h
3
 
1

  302  182  30 18 9
3

 5292 cm3
Volume  5292 cm3
Total surface area of frustum cone =
   r1  r2   l   r12   r22
  30  18 15    30   18 
2 2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths


  48 15   30   18
2 2

   720  900  324 
 1944 cm2
Total surface area  1944 cm2

11. A metallic right circular cone 20cm high and whose vertical angle is 90 is cut into two
parts at the middle point of its axis by a plane parallel to base. If frustum so obtained bee
1
drawn into a wire of diameter   cm. find length of the wire?
 16 
Sol:

Let ABC be cone. Height of metallic cone AO  20cm


Cone is cut into two parts at the middle point of its axis
Hence height of frustum cone AD  10cm
Since angle A is right angled. So each angles B and C  45
Angles E and F  45
Let radii of top and bottom circles of frustum cone bee r1 and r2 cm
DE
From le ADE   cot 45
AD
r1
 1
10
 r1  10cm.
From le AOB
OB
  cot 45
OA
r
 2 1
20
 r2  20cm

12. A bucket is in the form of a frustum of a cone with a capacity of 12308.8 cm3 of water.
The radii of the top and bottom circular ends are 20 cm and 12 cm respectively. Find the
height of the bucket and the area of the metal sheet used in its making. (Use 𝜋 = 3.14).
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Sol:
Given radii of top circular ends  r1   20cm
Radii of bottom circular end of bucket  r2   12cm
Let height of bucket be ‘h’
1
Volume of frustum cone   r12  r22  r1r2 h
3
 
1

  202  122  20 12  h
3

784
  hcm3 ……….(1)
3
Given capacity/volume of bucket  123308  8cm3 ……….(2)
Equating (1) and (2)
784
  h  12308  8
3
12308  8  3
h
784  
 h  15cm
Height of bucket  h   15cm
Let ‘l’ be slant height of bucket
 l 2   r1  r2   h 2
2

l   r1  r2   h2
2

l   20  2  152  64  225
2

 l  17cm
Length of bucket/ slant height of
Bucket  l   17cm
Curved surface area of bucket    r1  r2  l   r22
   20  12 17   12 
2

   32 17   12 
2

   9248  144   2160  32cm2


Curved surface area  2160  32cm2

13. A bucket made of aluminum sheet is of height 20cm and its upper and lower ends are of
radius 25cm an 10cm, find cost of making bucket if the aluminum sheet costs Rs 70 per
100cm2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Sol:
Given height of bucket  h   20cm
Upper radius of bucket  r1   25cm
Lower radius of bucket  r2   10cm
Let ‘l’ be slant height of bucket
l  r1  r2   h2
2

l  25 10  202  225  400


2

l  25m
Slant height of bucket (l)  25cm
Curved surface area of bucket    r1  r2  l   r22
   25  10  25   10 
2

   35  25   100   975
C.S.A  3061 5cm2
Curved surface area  3061 5cm2
Cost of making bucket per 100cm2  Rs70
3061 5
Cost of making bucket per 3061 5cm2   70
100
 Rs 2143  05
Total cost for 3061 5cm2  Rs 2143  05 per

14. Radii of circular ends of a solid frustum off a cone re 33cm and 27cm and its slant height
are 10cm. find its total surface area?
Sol:
Given slant height of frustum cone  10cm
Radii of circular ends of frustum cone are 33 and 27cm
r1  33cm ; r2  27cm.
Total surface area of a solid frustum of cone
   r1  r2   l   r12   r22

   33  27  10    33    27 
2 2

   60  10    33    27 
2 2

   600  1089  729 


 2418 cm2
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

 7599  42cm2
Total surface area of frustum cone  7599  42cm2

15. A bucket made up of a metal sheet is in form of a frustum of cone of height 16cm with
diameters of its lower and upper ends as 16cm and 40cm. find thee volume of bucket. Also
find cost of bucket if the cost of metal sheet used is Rs 20 per 100 cm2
Sol:
Given height off frustum cone  16cm
Diameter of lower end of bucket  d1   16cm
16
Lower and radius  r1    8cm
2
40
Upper and radius  r2    20cm
2
Let ‘l’ be slant height of frustum of cone
l  r1  r2   h2
2

l  20  8  162
2

l  144  256
l  20cm
Slant height of frustum cone  l   20cm.
1

Volume of frustum cone   r12  r22  r1r2 h
3

1

  82  202  8  20  16
3

1
   9984 
3
Volume  10449  92cm3
Curved surface area of frustum cone
   r1  r2  l   r22
   20  8  20    8 
2

   560  64   624 cm2


Cost of metal sheet per 100cm2  Rs 20
624
Cost of metal sheet for 624 cm2   20
100
 Rs 391 9
Total cost of bucket  Rs 391 9
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

16. A solid is in the shape of a frustum of a cone. The diameter of two circular ends are 60cm
and 36cm and height is 9cm. find area of its whole surface and volume?
Sol:
Given height of a frustum cone = 9cm
60
Lower end radius  r1   cm  30cm
2
36
Upper end radius  r2   cm  18cm
2
Let slant height of frustum cone be l
l  r1  r2   h2
2

l 8  30  92
2

l  144  81
l  15cm
1
Volume of frustum cone   r12  r22  r1r2 h
3
 
1

  302  182  30 18 9
3

 5292 cm3
Volume  5292 cm3
Total surface area of frustum cone =
   r1  r2   l   r12   r22

   30  18 15    30    18 
2 2


  48 15   30   18
2 2

   720  900  324 
 1944 cm2
Total surface area  1944 cm2

17. A milk container is made of metal sheet in the shape of frustum of a cone whose volume is
3
10459 cm3 . The radii of its lower and upper circular ends are 8cm and 20cm. find the
7
cost of metal sheet used in making container at rate of Rs 1 4 per cm 2 ?
Sol:
Given lower end radius of bucket  r1   8cm
Upper end radius of bucket
Class X Chapter 16 – Surface Areas and Volumes Maths

Let height of bucket be ‘h’


1

V1   82  202  8  20  h cm3
3
 ………(1)

3
Volume of milk container  10459 cm3
4
73216 3
V2  cm ……….(2)
7
Equating (1) and (2)
V1  V2
1

  82  202  8  20  h 
3
73216
7

10459  42
h
653  45
 h  16cm
Height of frustum cone  h   16cm
Let slant height of frustum cone be ‘l’
l  r1  r2   h2
2

  20  8  162  144  256


2

l  20cm
Slant height of frustum cone  l   20cm
Total surface area of frustum cone
   r1  r2  l   r22   r12
   20  8  20  20     8 
2 2

   560  400  64 
   960  64   1024  3216  99cm2
Total surface area  3216  99cm2

You might also like